Skip to main content

Full text of "An introduction to the grammar of the Sanskrit language, for the use of early students"

See other formats


'^^;s^lf^: 


4 


D  E I '  A  R^r  NI  IS  NT 


SANSKRIT 


GIFT   OF 

FITZKDWARD    MAIvIv 

MARLESFORD,   SUFFOLK,    ENGLAND 

(H.  C.  1846) 

Received  July  17,  1899 


THE  LIBRARY 
OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 


GIFT  OF 
HORACE  W.  CARPENTIER 


\  r 


AN 


INTRODUCTION  TO  THE  GRAMMAR 

ni.; 

SANSKRIT    LANGUAGE, 


FOR  THE  USE  OF 


EARLY    STUDENTS. 


BY 

H.  H.  WILSON,  M.A.  F.R.S.  &c.  &c. 

BODEN  PROFESSOR  OF  SANSKRIT  IN  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  OXFORD. 


LONDON, 

PUBLISHED  BY  J.  MADDEN  AND  CO., 
LEADENHALL  STREET. 

184L 


Harvard  University 
Sa'.isicrit  Dept.    Library. 

fitzb:- w^B^"^'  eiiLi*  i 

July  3^.7,^,^18^9, 


«^M^ftiin«p 


Oxford,  Printed  by  T.  Combe,  Printer  to  the  University. 


PREFACE 


The  design  of  the  present  Grammar  of  the  Sanskrit 
Language  has  been  suggested  by  the  experience  which 
I  have  now  had  in  teaching  the  language,  and  by  the 
want  which  I  have  repeatedly  felt  of  some  such  ele- 
mentary work  as  that  which  I  have  here  attempted  to 
compile. 

Of  the  Sanskrit  Grammars  published  in  Calcutta,  the 
works  of  Mr.  Colebrooke,  Dr.  Carey,  and  Mr.  Forster 
are  too  voluminous  and  difficult  for  beginners.  The 
Grammar  of  Mr.  Yates  is  better  adapted  to  such  a  class 
of  students,  but  it  is  not  readily  procurable  in  this 
country.  The  Grammar  of  Professor  Bopp,  being  com- 
posed in  German  and  in  Latin,  is  not  universally  accept- 
able to  English  students :  and  the  only  Grammar  within 
their  reach,  therefore,  has  been  that  of  Sir  C.  Wilkins. 
This  work,  however  admirable  in  many  respects,  is 
exceptionable  in  some  parts  of  its  arrangement,  and  is 
inconvenient  in  use  from  its  extent ;  it  is  also  growing 
scarce.  A  new  Grammar,  therefore,  on  a  somewhat 
different  plan,  had  become  necessary;  and  as  I  found 
no  one  disposed  to  engage  in  its  preparation,  I  have 
thought  it  incumbent  upon  me  to  undertake  the  task. 

The  structure  of  a  highly  elaborated  form  of  speech, 
such  as  is  Sanskrit,  abounding  with  grammatical  inflex- 
ions,  cannot  be  explained  with  that  brevity  of  which 

a  3 


iv  PREFACE. 

more  simply  constituted  languages  permit :  much  cannot 
be  described  in  a  very  few  phrases.  The  present  work 
has  exceeded  the  limits  which  I  originally  contemplated ; 
but  I  found  it  impossible  to  be  more  concise,  without 
being  obscure,  or  without  omitting  something  that  was 
essential.  As  the  extent  of  the  book,  however,  is  in 
great  part  attributable  to  the  multiplication  of  examples, 
rather  than  of  rules,  it  will  be  useful  for  occasional  refer- 
ence, without  being  cumbrous  to  the  memory  of  the  stu- 
dent. I  have  endeavoured  to  make  reference  easy,  by  the 
headings  of  the  pages  and  other  supplementary  means. 

The  first  topic  of  all  Sanskrit  Grammars  is  necessarily 
the  euphonic  combination  of  concurrent  letters,  the  ana- 
lysis of  which  must  be  performed  before  the  words  can 
be  separated  and  read.  In  the  chapter  upon  the  com- 
bination of  letters,  or  Sandhi,  as  it  is  termed,  I  have 
rather  added  to,  than  diminished,  the  number  of  the 
rules  which  are  to.be  found  in  the  Grammar  of  Sir 
C.  Wilkins :  but,  on  the  other  hand,  I  have  not  imitated 
Professor  Bopp  in  the  copiousness  with  which  he  has 
explained  the  changes,  as,  however  serviceable  the  rules 
which  he  has  assembled  with  singular  industry  and 
correctness,  they  are  not  in  all  cases  confined  to  modi- 
fications of  a  euphonic  character :  they  comprise  .many 
that  occur  as  the  consequence  of  verbal  or  nominal 
inflexion :  and  although  a  knowledge  of  them  will  no 
doubt  facilitate  the  student's  subsequent  acquirement  of 
the  principles  of  declension  and  conjugation,  I  have  not 
found  him  content  to  be  detained  so  long  upon  what 
appears  to  him  to  be  but  the  threshold  of  the  edifice, 
into  the  interior  of  which  he  is  eager  to  enter. 

The  general  outline  of  the  chapter  on  Declension  is  in 
all  essential  respects  the  same  as  that  followed  in  the 


PREFACE.  V 

Grammars  of  Wilkins  and  Bopp ;  but  I  have  thought  it 
advisable  to  put  more  prominently  forward  than  they 
have  done  the  scheme  of  technical  terminations,  devised 
by  native  grammarians  for  the  construction  of  the  cases 
of  a  noun ;  as,  notwithstanding  the  substitutions  which 
they  partially  undergo,  they  are  applicable  in  all  nouns 
to  a  considerable  portion  of  the  case^,  and  in  some  nouns 
to  all.  They  are  easily  acquired,  and  so  are  their  sub- 
stitutes ;  and  familiarity  with  them  once  attained,  the 
subject  of  Declension,  however  complicated  it  may  ap- 
pear, becomes  exceedingly  simple,  and  is  mastered  with 
facility. 

It  is  in  the  chapter  on  Conjugation  that  I  have 
departed  most  widely  from  the  course  pursued  by  my 
European  predecessors.  Professor  Bopp  has  followed 
in  the  main  the  example  set  by  Sir  C.  Wilkins,  of  exem- 
plifying, under  the  head  of  each  class  or  conjugation, 
only  those  tenses  of  the  verb  to  which  the  conjugational 
characteristics  are  confined  ;  and  of  illustrating  the 
remaining  tenses  of  verbs  in  general  in  one  collective 
division,  under  the  head  of  each  several  tense.  I  have 
found  this  arrangement  peculiarly  embarrassing  to  be- 
ginners. An  entire  verb  is  nowhere  presented  to  them ; 
and  although  the  whole  of  the  inflexions  of  most  of 
those  of  which  the  conjugational  tenses  are  exhibited 
are  to  be  found  in  the  Grammar,  yet  they  can  only  be 
collected  by  a  diligent  and  protracted  search.  It  rarely 
happens  that  the  young  student  is  not  disheartened  by 
the  labour  thus  imposed  upon  him,  and  a  competent 
knowledge  of  the  conjugation  of  Sanskrit  verbs  is  in 
consequence  comparatively  seldom  acquired.  In  the 
hope  of  removing  some  of  the  difficulties  inherent  in 
the  subject,  I  have  brought  the  several  tenses  of  the  verb 


vi  PREFACE. 

together,  and  explained  their  formation  in  consecutive 
order.  I  have  then  detailed  an  entire  verb  in  its  dif- 
ferent voices  and  derivative  forms ;  and  finally,  under  the 
head  of  each  conjugation,  I  have  given  complete  para- 
digms of  a  number  of  the  most  useful  verbs,  arranged 
in  alphabetical  succession,  in  the  several  conjugations  to 
which  they  respectively  belong.  An  example  of  this 
classification  of  the  verbs  was  set  by  Mr.  Colebrooke. 
In  the  first  volume  of  his  Grammar,  the  only  one  pub- 
lished^ he  has  assembled  all  the  verbs  of  the  first  conju- 
gation, with  paradigms  more  or  less  complete.  The  limits 
of  the  present  work  rendered  it  impossible  to  represent 
all  the  verbs  of  each  conjugation,  but  I  have  endeavoured 
to  make  such  a  selection  as  comprehends  those  which 
are  of  most  frequent  occurrence,  or  anomalous  construc- 
tion. The  forms  are  taken  chiefly  from  the  native 
Grammar,  the  Siddhanta  Kaumudi,  and  from  a  MS. 
collection  of  verbs  I  had  compiled  in  India.  The  first 
part  only  of  Mr.  Westergaard's  very  valuable  work, 
'  Radices  Linguae  Sanscritae,'  had  reached  me  before  my 
collection  was  completed,  or  it  would  have  saved  me  some 
labour.  The  usefulness  of  the  series  will  have  been 
materially  enhanced  by  the  alphabetical  Index  to  all  the 
verbs  specified,  which  will  be  found  at  the  end  of  the 
volume,  and  for  the  preparation  of  which  I  am  indebted 
to  the  promptly  tendered  assistance  of  Professor  Johnson, 
whom  I  have  also  to  thank  for  the  careful  revision  of 
the  proof  sheets,  with  exception  of  those  of  the  last 
hundred  pages,  and  for  the  correction  of  many  errors, 
ascribable  to  typographic  inaccuracy,  or  to  m}''  own 
inadvertencies. 

The  chapter  on  Derivation  does  not  attempt  to  follow 
the  detail  with  which  the  subject  is  illustrated  in  the 


PREFACE.  vii 

Grammar  of  Sir  C.  Wilkins.  The  same  copiousness  was 
no  longer  necessary,  as  my  Dictionary,  however  incom- 
plete, offers  many  of  the  same  examples,  and  sufficiently 
exhibits  the  principles  of  etymological  developement. 
By  the  alphabetical  arrangement,  however,  of  the  tech- 
nical affixes  employed  in  eliminating  derivative  from 
primitive  words,  a  plan  adopted  from  the  example  of 
Professor  Bopp,  reference  to  any  particular  form  of 
derivatives  will  have  been  facilitated,  and  the  process  of 
their  developement,  perhaps,  have  been  rendered  more 
intelligible. 

The  formation  of  compound  words  is  described  much 
in  the  same  manner,  but  with  some  slight  difference  of 
arrangement,  as  by  Sir  C.  Wilkins.  In  the  succeeding 
chapter  on  Syntax,  also,  I  have  followed  much  the  same 
course,  being  guided,  as  he  was,  by  the  authority  of 
native  grammarians,  although  appealing  to  different 
works,  and  endeavouring  to  illustrate  the  rules  by  more 
diversified  examples.  The  subject,  however,  is  yet  but 
imperfectly  investigated.  The  native  authorities  restrict 
their  remarks  to  the  application  of  the  cases  of  the 
nouns,  and  the  tenses  of  the  verbs  ;  and  to  have  supplied 
their  deficiencies  would  have  demanded  a  longer  period, 
and  ampler  space,  than  were  compatible  with  the  plan 
and  purposes  of  the  present  publication.  My  guides 
have  been  principally  the  Siddhanta  Kaumudi  and  the 
poem  of  Bhatti,  but  I  have  drawn  examples  also  from 
other  printed  Sanskrit  books. 

The  Prosody  of  Sanskrit  has  been  much  more  suc- 
cessfully illustrated  than  its  Syntax;  and  in  the  Dis- 
sertation of  Mr.  Colebrooke,  in  the  tenth  volume  of  the 
Asiatic  Researches,  and  in  the  remarks  and  annotations 
of  various   continental    scholars   and   critics   upon   the 


viii  PREFACE. 

metres  prevailing  in  the  Sanskrit  works  which  they  have 
edited,  abundant  materials  exist  for  a  comprehensive 
treatise  upon  the  laws  of  Sanskrit  metre.  In  the  chapter 
upon  the  subject  which  I  have  added  to  the  Grammar, 
nothing  more  has  been  intended  than  a  brief  explanation 
of  the  fundamental  principles  by  which  poetical  metre  is 
regulated,  and  an  exemplification  of  a  few  of  its  most 
frequently  recurring  and  popular  varieties. 

As  the  especial  object  of  the  present  work  is  the 
introduction  of  the  juvenile  student  to  an  elementary 
knowledge  of  the  Sanskrit  language,  I  have  but  rarely 
adverted  to  the  affinities  which  connect  it  with  other 
languages ;  and  in  the  few  allusions  which  I  have 
admitted,  I  have  purposed  rather  to  intimate  that  such 
affinities  exist,  than  to  explain  their  nature,  or  inquire 
into  their  origin  or  extent.  The  more  advanced  student, 
who  may  take  an  interest  in  the  investigation,  will  find 
in  the  writings  of  different  continental  scholars  and 
grammarians,  and  especially  in  the  Comparative  Gram- 
mar of  Professor  Bopp,  numerous  and  undeniable  proofs 
of  the  close  connexion  which  subsists  between  the  sacred 
language  of  the  Hindus  and  the  languages  of  ancient 
Greece  and  Rome,  as  well  as  those  of  the  Celtic,  Teutonic, 
and  Sclavonic  nations. 

It  were  superfluous  in  the  present  day  to  offer  any 
observations  upon  the  value  and  interest  of  Sanskrit 
literature.  The  study  constitutes  an  era  in  the  branch 
of  intellectual  inquiry  just  referred  to,  and  has  given 
an  entirely  new  character  to  philology.  The  principles 
of  etymological  affinity  have  been  placed  upon  secure 
grounds,  and  the  history  of  languages,  and  through 
them  the  history  of  man,  has  received  novel  and  import- 
ant elucidation.    Nor  is  this  the  only  service  which  it  has 


PREFACE.  ix 

rendered  to  general  literature.  The  history  of  philosophy 
and  science  is  also  largely  indebted  to  it ;  and  in  the 
civil  and  religious  codes  which  it  has  laid  open  to  our 
knowledge,  and  in  the  mythological  and  legendary  tradi- 
tions, and  the  dramatic  and  heroic  poems,  which  it  offers 
to  our  curiosity,  it  presents  a  series  of  new,  interesting, 
and  instructive  pictures  of  society,  in  which  the  features 
of  a  highly  artificial,  but  original  civilization  are  singu- 
larly blended  with  the  characteristics  of  primitive  man- 
ners and  archaicg  institutions.  The  history  of  mankind 
can  be  but  imperfectly  appreciated  without  some  ac- 
quaintance with  the  literature  of  the  Hindus. 

It  is,  however,  to  the  educated  youth  whose  manhood 
is  to  be  spent  in  India,  and  who  is  there  destined  to 
discharge  high  duties,  and  sustain  heavy  responsibilities 
— who  is  to  execute  the  offices  of  civilized  government 
over  millions  of  subject  Hindus,  and  to  make  that 
government  a  blessing,  not  a  curse,  to  India — a  glory, 
not  a  shame,  to  Britain ;— it  is  to  him  that  the  study  of 
Sanskrit  commends  itself,  by  considerations  of  peculiar 
utility  and  importance. 

A  careful  examination  of  the  different  dialects  which 
are  spoken  in  various  parts  of  India  is  yet  to  be  effected  ; 
but  enough  is  known  to  admit  of  their  being  distin- 
guished as  belonging  to  two  great  families,  that  of  India 
proper,  and  that  of  the  Dakhin.  Of  the  former,  the 
members  are,  as  far  as  we  are  familiar  with  them,  recog- 
nised as  Sanskrit.  They  have  undergone  great  changes ; 
have  simplified  their  grammatical  structure;  have  suf- 
fered in  a  greater  or  lesser  degree  admixture  and  adul- 
teration from  foreign  words.  They  probably  also  com- 
prehend a  small  portion  of  a  primitive,  unpolished,  and 
scanty  speech,  the  relics  of  a  period  prior  to  civilization : 

b 


X  PREFACE. 

but  in  the  names  of  things  of  the  most  ordinary  observa- 
tion, in  terms  for  the  functions  of  life,  as  well  as  the 
relations  of  society,  as  much  as  in  those  words  which 
are  the  offspring  of  civilization,  and  which  spring  from 
science,  philosophy,  law,  and  religion,  they  are  almost 
wholly  dependent  upon  Sanskrit ;  a  knowledge  of  which 
consequently  places  the  members  of  this  family,  Bengali, 
Hindee,  Punjabi,  Guzerati,  Marhatha,  and  others,  almost 
without  effort  within  the  power  of  any  one  to  whom  it 
may  become  a  duty  to  acquire  either  or  all  of  them. 

In  the  south  of  India  the  case  is  somewhat  different. 
Cultivated  languages  of  local  origin  are  there  met  with, 
largely  supplied  with  words  which  are  not  of  Sanskrit 
origin.  There,  however,  as  in  the  north,  the  introduc- 
tion of  Sanskrit  was  the  precursor  of  civilization,  and 
deeply  impressed  it  with  its  own  peculiarities.  The 
spoken  languages  were  cultivated  in  imitation  and  rivalry, 
and  but  partially  aspired  to  an  independent  literature. 
The  principal  compositions  in  Tamil,  Teloogoo,  Canara, 
and  Malayalam,  are  translations  or  paraphrases  from 
Sanskrit  works,  and  largely  borrow  the  phraseology  of 
their  originals :  and  hence  so  large  a  proportion  of  the 
language  of  education  and  of  society  is  Sanskrit,  that  a 
knowledge  of  it  is  absolutely  essential  to  a  correct  under- 
standing of  the  spoken  dialects  of  the  peninsula. 

There  is,  however,  a  higher  point  of  view  from  which 
the  advantages  to  the  servants  of  the  East  India  Com- 
pany in  India  of  a  knowledge  of  Sanskrit  are  to  be 
contemplated,  than  the  aid  which  it  is  calculated  to 
afford  them  in  their  executive  functions.  It  will  not 
only  enable  them  to  understand  the  uttered  words  of 
those  with  whom  they  hold  official  intercourse ;  it  will 
not  only  teach  them  to  interpret  the  language  of  rej)re- 


PREFACE.  xi 

sentation  or  complaint,  or  to  express  the  decrees  of 
justice,  or  the  commands  of  power; — it  will  enable 
them  to  understand  the  people,  and  to  be  understood 
by  them.  The  popular  prejudices  of  the  Hindus,  their 
daily  observances,  their  occupations,  their  amusements, 
their  domestic  and  social  relations,  their  local  legends, 
their  national  traditions,  their  mythological  fables,  their 
metaphysical  abstractions,  their  religious  worship,  all 
spring  from,  and  are  perpetuated  by,  the  Sanskrit  lan- 
guage. To  know  a  people,  these  things  must  be  known. 
Without  such  knowledge,  revenue  may  be  raised,  justice 
may  be  administered,  the  outward  shows  and  forms  of 
orderly  government  may  be  maintained ;  but  no  influ- 
ence with  the  people  will  be  enjoyed,  no  claim  to  their 
confidence  or  attachment  will  be  established,  no  affection 
will  be  either  felt  or  inspired,  and  neither  the  disposition 
nor  the  ability  to  work  any  great  or  permanent  improve- 
ment in  the  feelings,  opinions,  or  practices  of  the  country 
will  be  attained.  It  fortunately  happens,  it  is  true, 
that  much  of  this  indispensable  information  may  now  be 
acquired  through  the  English  language,  in  consequence 
of  the  valuable  translations  and  dissertations  of  various 
of  the  Company's  most  distinguished  servants  ;  but  know- 
ledge from  the  fountain  head  is  more  precise  and  effective 
than  when  gleaned  from  subordinate,  and  not  always 
pure  or  profound,  rivulets :  and  in  proportion  as  it  is 
effective  and  precise,  will  be  the  respect  and  tinist  of 
the  native  population,  the  influence  and  power  of  their 
English  masters. 


hz 


CONTENTS. 


Chap.  I.  Letters  .     .     .    (.     ;     .     . 

Pronunciation  .     .    \.     I     . 

Classification 

Chap.  II.  Sandhi — Combination  of  letters 
Sect.  I.  Conjunction  of  vowels . 
Sect.  2,»  Conjunction  of  consonants 
Sect.  3.  Changes  of  Visarga 

Chap.  III.  Declension 

General  rules 

Sect.  I.  Nouns  ending  in  vowels    . 

CI.  I.  Nouns  ending  in  '^  and  ^r 
CI.  2.  Nouns  ending  in  ^  and  "cT 
CI.  3.  Nouns  ending  in  "^  and  "31 
CI.  4.  Nouns  ending  in  "^,  ^,  oj,  o| 
CI.  ^.  Nouns  ending  in  ^      .      . 
CI.  6.  Nouns  ending  in  $      .     . 
CI.  7.  Nouns  ending  in  ^     . 
CI.  8.  Nouns  ending  in  ^    . 
Sect.  2,,  Nouns  ending  in  consonants 

CI.  I.  Nouns  ending  in  oR,  ^,  n,  V 
CI.  2.  Nouns  ending  in  %  "S[,  »T,  ^ 
CI.  3.   Nouns  ending  in  r,  7,  T,  ^    . 
CI.  4.  Nouns  ending  in  tt,  "^t  "^^  V 
CI.  5.  Nouns  ending  in  "q,  ifi,  ^,  H 
CI.  6.   Nouns  ending  in  T,  '^,  ^9  "T,  H 
Nouns  in  ^nr    .... 
Nouns  in  ^    .... 
CI.  7.  Nouns  ending  in  v,  t,  7^,  ^ 
CI.  8.  Nouns  ending  in  "^r,  "q,  ^ 
CI.  9.  Nouns  ending  in  ^      .     . 

Sect.  3.  Adjectives 

Sect.  4.   Pronouns  and  pronominal  nouns 
Sect.  5,   Numerals      ... 

Ordinals 


P.  I 


xiv  CONTENTS. 

Chap.  IV.  Indeclinables 90 

Adverbs         91 

Prepositions         . 97 

Conjunctions loi 

Interjections ]o:j 

Expletives 103 

Chap.  V.  Conjugation 104 

Sect.  I.  Roots  and  indicatory  letters       ....  104 

Sect.  2.  Classes  of  verbs 107 

Sect.  3.  Moods  and  tenses no 

Sect.  4.  Voices         113 

Sect.  5.  Numbers  and  persons 114 

General  principles  of  conjugation          .      .  116 

Of  the  augment  ^ i2>6 

Sect.  6.  Formation  of  the  verb      .     .     .     .     .     .  1^2, 

Passive  voice         135 

Sect.  7.  Derivative  verbs          135 

Causals 135 

Desideratives         138 

Frequentatives 141 

Ditto  inserting  t\ 141 

Ditto  rejecting  ir         143 

Impersonals 150 

Nominals 150 

Sect.  8.  Conjugations. 

First  conjugation .  153 

Second 191 

Third 309 

Fourth 214 

Fifth 226 

Sixth ,     .     .  231 

Seventh 237 

Eighth 241 

Ninth 243 

Tenth 250 

Changes  of  voices 259 

Chap.  VI.  Derivation 268 

Sect.  I.  Verbal  derivatives 268 

Infinitive 269 

Participles 270 

Present  participles     .      .    - 270 


CONTENTS. 


XV 


Past  participles 272 

Participles  of  the  second  praeterite        .     .  272 

Indefinite  past  participles 273 

Future  participles  active 279 

Ditto  passive  or  neuter         280 

Indeclinable  participles         287 

Adverbial  participles 290 

Sect.  2.  Verbal  nouns         .      .      .    ^ 291 

Sect.  3.  Nominal  derivatives         .^/ 311 

CI.  I.  Miscellaneous  affixes 313 

CI.  2.  Possessives 326 

CI.  3.  Degrees  of  comparison  ;  pronominals  ; 

numerals         330 

CI.  4.  Indeclinables         332 

Chap.  VII.   Compound  words         336 

Sect.  I.   Dwandwa  compounds 338 

Sect.  2.  Tatpurusha  compounds         340 

Karmmadharaya  Tatpurusha  compounds  .  343 

Dwigu  Tatpurusha  compounds        .      .      .  346 

Tatpurusha  comp.  with  particles  and  prep.  346 

Sect.  3.  Bahuvrihi  compounds 348 

Sect.  4.   Indeclinable  compounds 354 

Sect.  5.   General  rules        358 

Chap.  VIII.   Syntax 361 

Sect.  I.  Nouns         362 

Sect.  2.  Adjectives 385 

Sect.  3.   Pronouns 388 

Sect.  4.   Indeclinables 389 

Sect.  5.  Verbs .      ...      .      .  393 

Sect.  6.   Derivative  verbs         407 

Sect.  7.   Participles 409 

Chap.  IX.  Prosody        415 

Sect.  I.  General  rules         415 

Sect.  2.  Varna-vritta  class  of  metres       .      .      .      .  417 

Sect.  3.   Gaiia-vritta  class  of  metres         ....  427 

Sect.  4.  Matrachhandas  class  of  metres        .      .      .  429 


SANSKRIT  ALPHABET. 

I 

Initial. 

Medial.          Equivalent  and  power. 

Equivalent  and  power. 

^ 

a,  as  in  America. 

al 

fa,  as  in  singe. 

^n 

T       a 

—   casa  (Italian). 

•z 

't 

—  true. 

^ 

f      i 

—   chi        — 

-z 

'th 

• 

i 

t       i 

—    cosi       — 

? 

a 

—  dim. 

^ 

o       u 

—    furore   — 

^ 

ah 

■■ 

^ 

Cs        6 

—   fui 

^ 

n 

—  none. 

'^ 

t,       ri 

—   ricco     — 

fT 

t 

—  tongue. 

n. 

£       ri 

—   riso        — 

'q 

th 

•• 
■ 

^ 

ca      Iri 

^ 

d 

—  den. 

^ 

c^       Iri 

^ 

dh 

^ 

"^       e 

—   che        — 

^ 

n 

_   not. 

^ 

■=*>       ai 

—   mai        — 

TT 

P 

—  point. 

w 

T      0 

—    cosa      — 

TR 

ph 

—  up-hill. 

T      au 

—   paura    — 

■^ 

b 

—  bind. 

'^f 

ah 

—    (ang) 

H 

bh 

abhor. 

w- 

:       ah 

M 

m 

—  man. 

■^R      k,  as 

in  king. 

^ 

y 

—  young. 

■^     kh    - 

—  khan. 

T 

r 

—  rain. 

^      g      - 

-   gun. 

fT 

1 

—  lion. 

ri     gh    - 

—  afghan. 

'^ 

V 

—  voice. 

^      n       - 

—   sing. 

'ST 

s 

session. 

■^      ch    - 

—   church. 

^ 

tsh 

-^  shun. 

•S;      chh 

^ 

s 

—  son. 

^     j       ■ 

—  jet. 

I 

h 

—  house. 

«:      ;k 

£ 

Ir 

Varieties  :  -sr  a,  ^  ri,  ^  1,  ^  e,  :^  jh,  xrr  n,  "^  ru,  "^or  ^  ru. 
Numerals:  cj^^JiM^Sba^O 


3     4 


G     7     8     9     10 


SANSKRIT   GRAMMAR. 


CHAPTER   I. 

LETTERS. 

i  HE  Sanskrit  language  is  written  in  different  parts  of  India 
in  the  characters  which  are  in  use  for  the  spoken  dialects ; 
but  the  alphabet  which  is  regarded  as  most  appropriate  to  it, 
and  from  which  the  local  alphabets  are  derived,  is  that  which 
is  termed  Nagari  or  Devanagari,  the  alphabet  of  ^the  city/ 
or  of  '  the  city  of  the  gods,^  being  a  derivative  from  Nagara, 
'  a  city/  compounded  in  the  second  form  with  Deva,  ^  deus/ 
*  a  god/  It  appears  to  have  undergone  various  modifications 
from  a  period  of  remote  antiquity  down  to  the  seventh  or 
eighth  century,  when  the  letters  assumed  the  form  in  which 
they  now^  occur. 

As  usually  enumerated,  the  Nagari  alphabet  comprises  forty- 
seven  letters,  the  long  vowels  being  considered  distinct  from 
the  short ;  the  vowels  are  thus  fourteen :  the  consonants, 
among  which  the  aspirated  are  distinguished  from  the  corre- 
sponding unaspirated  letters,  are  thirty-three.  The  consonants 
are  classified  according  to  the  organ  chiefly  concerned  in  their 
articulation ;  and  in  order  to  effect  their  utterance,  the  short 
vowel  ^a'  is  attached  to  their  respective  sounds. 

B 


LETTERS. 


Vowels. 


W  a,  ^  a,  ^  i,  ^i,  ^  u^  "gi  u,  ^  ri,  "^  ri,  ^  Iri,  ^  Iri, 
1?  e,  ^  ai.  ^  o,  ^  au. 

Conlsoiiaints. 
Gutturals,     ^  ka,  ^  kha,  n  ga,  tt  gha,  "3?  li. 
Palatals,         ^  cha,  "S^  chha,   »T  ja,  Vf^jha,  ^  n. 
Cerebrals,      z  t'a,  7  t'ha,  ^  S.a,  ^  &ha,  ^  na. 
Dentals,        ir  ta,  "^r  tha,  ^  da,  \r  dha,  ff  na. 
Labials,         xf  pa,  xr  pha,  "^  ba,  H  bha,  tt  ma. 
Semivowels,  it  ya,  t  ra,   c5  la,  ^  va. 
Sibilants  and  aspirate,  ^  sa,  "^  sha,  t^  sa,  ^  ha. 

To  these  are  to  be  added  two  signs,  which  are  occasionally 
attached  to  vowels,  termed  Anuswara  and  Visarga.  The  first 
is  a  dot  over  and  after  a  letter;  the  second  consists  of  two 
dots  after  it.  The  first  denotes  a  slight  nasal ;  the  second,  a 
soft  aspirate;  as,  ^  an  (ang),  "m  ah.  Another  additional 
character  is  3S,  with  a  sound  partaking  of  ^  P  and  '  r/  but  it  is 
peculiar  to  the  Vedas.  Some  lists  add  "^  ksha  and  ^  jna,  but 
these  are  compounds ;  the  first  of  oj;  k  and  "R  sh,  and  the 
second  of  IT  j  and  ^  n.  The  first  is  sometimes  expressed 
by  ^x.' 

In  designating  a  letter,  the  word  cRTt  kara  is  added  to  it; 
as,  -^HohK  a-kara,  the  letter  'a;'  wm,  ka-kara,  the  letter 
'k,^  &c. 

When  a  vowel  is  uttered  as  an  initial,  or  before  a  conso- 
nant, it  retains  the  form  above  given :  when  it  is  uttered  after 
a  consonant,  or  as  a  medial  or  final,  it  assumes  a  different 
form,  which  is  written  before  or  after,  above  or  below,  the 
consonant  with  which  it  is  associated  ;  with  exception  of  ^  '^a,' 
which,  as  a  medial  or  final,  is  always  left  unwritten,  being 
understood  to  be  combined  with  the  consonant,  and  articu- 
lated with  it,  as  in  the  alphabet,  unless  the  consonant  be  final, 
which  is  denoted  by  a  mark  at  its  foot,  a  Virama  or  ^  rest,^  as 


COMPOUND   LETTERS. 


^  k;   or  unless  it  be  conjoined  with  another  consonant,  as 
below.     The  forms  of  the  vowels  as  medials  and  finals  are, 

T  a,  fiyji,  ^  u,   ^u,    ^  ri,    .  ri,   ^  Iri,  ^  Iri, 


,   -^  ai,  >  o,  1 


or  in  combination,  ^  ak,  ^SHR  aka,  ^TT^T  aka,  ^  iki,  ^  iki, 
'^  uku,  -gr^uku,  ^-^  rikri,  "^  rikri,  oj^lriklri,  o|;3;  Iriklri, 
^^  eke,  1!%  aikai,  ^ftoFt  oko,  w^  aukau,  w4  akaii,  ^rsfi:  akah. 

When  two  or  more  consonants  come  together,  without  any- 
intermediate  vowel,  they  are  combined  into  one  compound 
consonant — in  which  in  general  the  component  members  may- 
be recognised  without  much  difficulty — one  consonant  being 
subjoined  to  the  other,  as  in  ^r^  akka,  w^  achcha,  where  the 
transverse  line  of  the  lower  is  omitted ;  or  one  consonant 
following  the  other,  as  ^ptt  agga,  ^SIST  ajja,  where  the  per- 
pendicular line  of  the  first  of  the  two  is  rejected.  In  some 
cases  the  elements  of  the  combination  are  not  so  obvious. 
The  letters  most  frequently  recurring  in  conjunction  with  pre- 
ceding consonants  are  tt  ya  and  t  ra.  The  first  is  easily 
discernible  in 

^  kya,  ^  chya,  m  tya,  ?r  dya,  xq  pya,  J^  mya,  &c. : 

the  second  is  usually  designated  by  a  short  transverse  stroke 
at  the  foot  of  the  letter  or  letters ;  as, 

■g;  or  ^  kra,  ?i  gra,  ^  or  ^  tra,  TT  dra,  ir  pra,  ^  krya. 

When  T^  precedes  a  consonant,  it  is  placed  at  the  top  of  it  in 
the  shape  of  a  crescent ;  as,  ^  rka  in  wk  arka,  *  the  sun ;'  or 
^  rmma  in  vS  dharmma,  ^  duty/ 

The  difficulties  from  this  source  soon  disappear  with  prac- 
tice. Some  of  the  most  useful  combinations  are  subjoined. 
It  may  be  also  here  observed,  that  some  of  the  single  letters 
may  be  written  in  a  difierent  manner,  of  which  examples  are 
given  at  the  foot  of  the  Table  at  the  head  of  this  chapter. 

B   2 


LETTERS. 


IRkka 
WTktrya 
^  grya 
^  nghra 

^jya 

J  {{a. 
^  n^a 
^ttya 
j^  twa 
^  dda 
^  dbhya 
K  dhna 
r^  nda 
TT  pna 
^bja 
ff{  mma 
"^  schya 
"g«I  shfya 
^5^  skha 
^  spha 
g  hna 


^kta 
^ksha 
TTghna 
"W  chcha 
^jra 
^{hya 
^  Aa 
"^  ttra 
W  tsa 
i[  ddha 
?r  dma 
wrdhma 
v^  ndra 
^  ppa 
-sjTbbha 
W  msa 
^S  sna 
"g  shtVa 
W  sta 
W  sma 
V  hma 


Compound 

gjkna 
^  kshya 
xJTghma 
^  chchha 
Wjwa 
^  S.hra 
inrMya 
^tna 
l^tsna 
3f  ddhya 
^  dya 
lisr  dhwa 
^  ndha 
"^r  pma 
«r  bhya 
"^Ipa 
"i^r  sra 
"^  sh{rya 
^  stra 
^  smya 
^hya 


consonants. 

"^kma 
^  kshwa 
1j  Ilka 
Tti  chma 
^jjha 
J^nia. 
XF  Awa 
TW  tma 
W  tsya 
^  dna 
^dra 
^  nta 
■^  ndhra 
5r  pla 
v^bhwa 
''5R  Ima 
^  swa 
W  shna 
^  stha 
^  sya 
ihra 


^kwa 
^khya 
^liga 
"^chchhra 
^  ncha 
;q3n^ha 
r3R  tka 
W(  tmya 
W  dga 
^  dba 
1"  dwa 
v^  ntya 
^  nna 
T?  pwa 
^  mna 
^  vya 
"^^  ssa 
"*ir  shma 
^  sna 
^  sra 
^hla 


M  ktwa 
irgra 
^  ligha 
^jja 
^nja 
^n^a 
W  tta 
^  trya 
idgha 
^  dbha 
ST  dwya 
•^ntra 
"R  pta 
"•^  psa 
w?mpa 
"^  scha 
?  sh{a 
^  ska 
^  spa 
^  swa 
5|'  hwa. 


PRONUNCIATION. 

Few  observations  are  required  regarding  the  pronunciation 
of  the  letters  of  the  Sanskrit  alphabet.  As  a  general  rule,  the 
vowels  are  to  be  sounded  like  those  of  the  Italian  alphabet, 
except  the  first,  the  short  *  a/  which  has  the  obscure  sound 
of  that  letter  in  such  English  verbs  as  ^  adorn/  "'  adore/  or  in 
the  word  ^  America  ^.^     The  vowels  ri  and   Iri   differ  not  in 

'  This  is  the  only  cause  of  embarrassment  in  the  system  here  followed  of 
expressing  Sanskrit  words  in  English  characters.  It  is  difficult  to  our 
practice  to  pronounce  *ban'  as  if  it  was  written  *bun;'  as  in  Sanskrit, 
Bandhana,  *  binding/  is  to  be  pronounced  Bundhunu ;  but  u  is  necessarily 
restricted  to  its  proper  office,  as  in  Italian,  *  fui,'  *  furore.' 


PRONUNCIATION.  5 

sound  from  the  syllables  so  compounded.  They  take  their 
place  among  vowels  as  subject  to  euphonic  changes,  of  which 
as  syllables  they  would  not  be  susceptible.  The  consonants 
are  in  general  pronounced  as  in  English,  and  we  have,  it  may 
be  suspected,  several  of  the  sounds  for  which  the  Sanscrit 
alphabet  has  provided  distinct  signs,  but  of  which  signs  are 
wanting  with  us.  This  seems  to  be  the  case  with  the  nasals 
and  the  cerebrals.  We  write  but  one  ^n,^  but  we  vary  its 
articulation,  according  to  the  consonants  it  precedes,  as  a  gut- 
tural, palatal,  cerebral,  and  dental,  in  such  words  as  ^  conquer,^ 
'  singe,^  ^  none,^  and  ^  content.^  So  w^e  write  but  one  ^  t'  and 
one  ^  d,^  but  their  sounds  differ  in  such  words  as  '  trumpet' 
and  ^  tongue,'  ^  drain'  and  '  den :'  in  the  first  of  which  they 
are  cerebrals,  in  the  second  dentals :  the  term  cerebral  has  been 
adopted  to  express  the  Sanskrit  Murddhanya  from  Murddhan 
^«|  ^  the  head,'  as  these  letters  are  articulated  by  touching 
the  palate  with  the  tongue  farther  back  in  the  mouth  than  is 
practised  in  other  articulations.  The  ^  v  when  compounded 
with  another  consonant  is  pronounced  and  WTitten  ^  w,'  as 
in  fi"  dwi,  '  two.'  Of  the  three  sibilants,  the  first  ^  s'  ^  is 
less  decidedly  '  sh'  than  the  second,  as  in  our  ^  ss'  in  '  ses- 
sion ;'  it  is  a  palatal  letter :  t^  sha  is  a  cerebral,  as  in 
*  shore :'  and  ^  is  a  dental  sibilant,  as  in  '  sun.'  Anuswara 
is  a  slight  nasal,  rather  stronger  than  the  ^n'  of  the  French 
'  bon.'  It  is  used  in  writing,  however,  as  a  substitute  for 
other  nasals,  and  then  in  general  retains  their  pronunciation ; 
as  ^  ahan  for  ^T^  aham,  ^  I,'  is  equally  pronounced  Aham ; 
and  ^T^cRTT:  ahankara  is  pronounced  ^TfUHl  ahaiikara,  for  which 
it  is  written.  Before  semivowels  and  the  aspirate  ^  the  Anu- 
swara is  most  appropriately  used,  and,  whether  original  or 
substituted,  has  the  same  nasal  sound,  as  in  ^T5r  ansa,  *  a  part,' 
and  iff^nr  sahsaya,  ^  doubt ;'  in  the  latter  of  which  it  takes  the 
place  of  the  final  of  ^  sam,  ^  cum.'  The  aspirate  denoted  by 
Visarga  is  rarely  marked :  TTR:  Ramah  is  commonly  articulated 
as  Rama. 


O  LETTERS. 

CLASSIFICATION. 

Besides  the  classification  of  the  letters  of  the  alphabet  spe- 
cified above^  there  is  another  which  it  may  be  sometimes  useful 
to  refer  to.      In  this  system  the  letters  are  thus  arranged : 

The  object  of  this  arrangement  is  to  provide  a  convenient 
mode  of  designating  any  particular  set  of  letters  to  the  exclu- 
sion of  all  others^  which  is  done  by  combining  any  prior  letter 
with  the  consonant  at  the  end  of  a  series^  so  as  to  form  a 
Pratyahara  or  syllable,  denoting  all  the  letters  that  intervene : 
thus,  ^r?^  means  the  whole  alphabet ;  "^  the  vowels  only ; 
^75^  the  consonants  only ;  ^nrr  means  W  ^  T,  inclusive  of  their 
corresponding  long  vowels ;  ^sr^  denotes  the  simple  vowels ; 
^  the  diphthongs ;  ^  the  semivowels ;  and  ^ffjj^  all  the  con- 
sonants exclusive  of  the  nasals  and  semivowels.  Other  com- 
binations may  be  formed  on  the  same  principle,  with  a  like 
purport. 

There  are  some  distinctions  also  affecting  the  vowels  and 
consonants  generally,  which  it  is  advisable  to  particularise. 

1 .  Vowels  have  three  times  or  quantities :  they  are,  TT^ 
Laghu,  ^  fight'  or  '  short  f  t^  Guru,  ^  heavy'  or  ^  long  f  and 
giT  Pluta,  ^  prolated.'  They  have  also  three  accents,  and  are, 
^<IW  Udatta,  ^ grave;'  W^TW  Anudatta,  ^ acute;'  and  ^fT5T 
Swarita,  '  compounded'  or  '  circumflex.'  The  long  and  short 
vowels  are  separately  represented,  as  ^  a,  ^rr  a :  the  prolated 
is  the  long  a  with  three  lines  underneath  it,  or  a  figure  of  three 
behind  it,  as  ^  or  ^  ^.  The  accents  are  thus  severally  marked; 
W,  ^,  ^.    They  are  rarely  used,  except  in  MSS.  of  the  Vedas. 

In  combination  and  in  inflexion  the  vowels  are  subject  to  two 
changes,  or  rather  substitutions,  in  which  other  vowel  forms 
take  their  places.  These  are  called  Jjm  GuAa  and  "^flf  Vriddhi, 
rendered  by  Dr.  Wilkins  ^  conversion'  and  '  augmentation.' 


COMBINATION   OF   LETTERS.  7 

The  Gufia  substitutes  are       ^  ^  ^  ^flT.    ^n^. 
The  Vriddhi  substitutes  are  ^  ^  ^  ^3rR  WToF. 

Thus  the  verb  H  bhu,  'to  be/  in  its  inflexions  is  subject  to 
Guiia ;  that  is,  it  becomes  ^rt  bho, '  o^  being  substituted  for  '  u.' 
In  some  of  its  secondary  derivatives  the  'uMs  subject  to 
Vriddhi :  thus  i|W  bhiita,  '  a  being/  '  an  element/  furnishes 
the  adjective  vufdch  bhautika,  *  elementary/  This  ^\^ll  be  more 
intelligible  as  we  proceed.  It  is  only  at  present  essential  to 
recollect  the  purport  of  the  terms  Guiia  and  Vriddhi. 

2.  Consonants.  It  is  at  present  more  important  to  notice 
a  distinction  of  the  consonants  into  two  classes  :  some  of  them 
are  hard,  some  soft.  Wilkins  calls  the  former  surds ;  the 
latter,  sonants ;  in  which  he  is  followed  by  Professor  Bopp. 
The  hard  or  surd  consonants  are  the  two  first  letters  of  the 
five  first  classes  of  the  alphabet  and  the  sibilants  ;  the  soft  or 
sonant  consonants  are  the  three  last  letters  of  each  class,  the 
semivowels,  and  the  aspirate. 

Hard  or  surd  letters,   oB;s'"^'S[7<r'iT"'!T'TTfi^"^^. 
Sofl  or  sonant,  iTXTT^^^ir^TTr^V^'^HiT^Tlc?^^. 


CHAPTER   II. 

SANDHI COMBINATION   OF  LETTERS. 

Contrivances  for  avoiding  the  concurrence  of  harsh  or 
incongruous  sounds,  or  the  unpleasing  hiatus  which  arises 
from  keeping  sounds  apart  that  are  disposed  to  coalesce,  are 
not  wanting  in  all  languages.  They  are  in  general,  however, 
rather  poetical  or  prosodial  than  grammatical ;  such  as  the 
elision  of  a  final  '  e'  before  an  initial  '  e^  in  such  a  concurrence 
as  "  the  etherial  height  of  heaven/^  which  it  was  formerly  the 
fashion  to  write,  as  the  measure  demanded,  '^  th'  etherial  -,"  to 
say  nothing  of  the  synalepha  and  ecthlipsis  of  Latin  verse, 
"  Monstr'  horrend'  inform'  ingens,"  &c.      Other  instances  of 


8  COMBINATION  OF  LETTERS. 

a  regard  for  euphony,  however,  do  occur  independent  of 
prosody,  and  especially  in  Greek,  in  which  many  of  the 
euphonic  changes  are  analogous  to  those  provided  for  in  San- 
skrit. In  no  language  has  the  subject,  however,  been  so 
systematically  investigated  as  in  Sanskrit ;  and  the  changes  to 
which  letters  are  subject  for  the  sake  of  euphony  are  nume- 
rous, and  carefully  defined,  forming  that  part  of  Sanskrit 
grammar  which  is  termed  wfsg  Sandhi,  '  a  holding  together,' 
*  a  junction  f  or  uTi^ril  Sanhita,  ^  an  association,'  ^  a  conjunc- 
tion ;'  either  being  derived  from  the  verb  compounded  of  the 
preposition  ^  sam,  ^  cum,'  and  VT  dha,  '  to  have,'  '  to  hold.' 

SECTION  I. 

Conjunction  of  vowels. 

1.  When  a  vowel  terminating  a  word  is  followed  by  a  similar 
vowel  beginning  another  word,  whether  they  both  be  short  or 
both  long,  or  one  be  short  and  one  long,  they  combine  into 
one  long  homogeneous  vowel :  thus 

a  with  a  makes  a;  as,  ^m  Daitya  +  ^rf^  ari  =^i«nft  Daityari, 

'  a  foe  of  the  demons,'  a  name  of  Vishiiu. 
a  with  a  makes  a ;  as,  ^  sa  -f  ^TTSn^  agachhat  =  ^Mi^^r^  sa- 

gachhat,  '  she  went.' 
i  with  i  makes  i ;  as,  ^fw  iti  +  ^  iva  =  ^[rfN"  itiva, '  so  indeed.' 
1  with  1  makes  i ;  as,  ^  S'ri  +  ^  isa  =  "^fhfr  S'risa,  ^  the  lord 

ofS'ri.'     - 
u  with  u  makes  li ;    as,  >TR  bhanu  +  Tc^  udaya  =  ^TPJ^ 

bhaniidaya,  '  sun-rise.' 
ri  with  ri  makes  ri ;  as,  <j  nri  +  "^f^  rishi  =  "^i^  nrishi,  ^  a 

man-  (a  mortal)  sage.' 

The  concurrence  of  a  final  and  initial  oS  never  perhaps  takes 
place.  TJ  may  however  follow  ^,  and  as  they  are  considered 
as  homogeneous,  a  long  "^  ri  may  be  the  result ;  as,  ^V^ 
hotri  +  o^chK  Irikara  makes  -^IrichK  '  the  letter  Iri  (a  sort  of 


CONJUNCTION  OF  VOWELS.  9 

incantation)  of  the  Hotri/  or  officiating  priest.  The  concur- 
rence of  "^5  however,  either  with  another  ^  or  with  oj,  is  not 
liable  to  any  very  strict  rule,  and  the  substitute  may  be  either 
a  short  or  long  ^;  as,  ^t^  with  either  ^<*ti.  or  o^ohii,  may  be 
either  ^"lij<+K  or  ^^ftt. 

2.  If  a  word  which  ends  in  either  "^  a  or  ^t  a  be  followed  by 
a  word  beginning  with  a  different  vowel,  then  a  Guiia  element 
is  substituted  for  both ;  that  is,  if  ^  or  ^TT  precedes  ^  or  ^,  the 
substitute  is  Tj;  if  "3"  or  "gi,  it  is  ^;  if  "^  or  "^j  it  is  ^;  if 
"^  or  '^,  w^ ;  as, 

Tcr  upa  +  ^  Indra  =  T^  Upendra,  a  name  of  Krishna. 
Tc^  yatha  +  ^fwff  ipsitam  +  "q-^f^ff  yathepsitam,  ^  as  desired.^ 
7T^  Gaiiga  +  "^^or*^udakam  =  7T^t^.?^Gangodakam,  ^Ganges 

water.' 
JT^  maha  -f  "^f^  rishi  =  iT^it  maharshi,  ^  a  great  sage.' 
W^  tava  -f-  oJ^BR  Irikara  =  IT^^R  tavalkara,  '  thy  letter  og.' 

3.  If  a  word  ends,  as  in  the  last  case,  with  ^  or  ^  and 
is  followed  by  one  beginning  with  a  diphthong,  a  Vriddhi 
letter  is  substituted  for  both  ;  that  is,  if  ^  be  followed  by  i» 
or  ^,  the  substitute  is  ^ ;  if  by  ^  or  ^r,  it  is  ^ ;  as, 

"^HIC    Krishna  +  ^oR^    ekatwam  =  <Jit^|a(ir4    Krishnaikatwam, 

'  oneness  with  Krishna.' 
fwr  vidya  -f-  ^^  eva  =  "f^&^  vidyaiva,  ^  knowledge,'  *  verily.' 
^    deva  +  <^»y-5i    aiswaryam  =  ^^vjSj    devaiswaryam,    ^  the 

divinity  of  a  god.' 
W^  alpa  +  ^iW^  ojas  =  "^r^if^  alpaujas, '  of  little  radiance.' 
•qiHT    bala  +  -41 14^44   autsukyam  =  ■ctlcflf^^M    balautsukyam, 

'  the  maiden's  sorrow.' 


There  are  some  exceptions  to  these  two  last  rules,  which  it 
may  be  convenient  here  to  insert.  With  regard  to  these  and 
to  other  anomahes  and  exceptions,  however,  it  may  be  advis- 

c 


10  COMBINATION   OF   LETTERS. 

able  once  for  all  to  recommend  to  the  student,  in  an  early 
stage  of  his  studies,  to  content  himself  with  a  passing  notice 
of  them,  and  not  allow  them  to  divert  his  attention  from  the 
general  rules.  Familiar  with  the  rules,  he  will  find  no  diffi- 
culty in  the  occasional  deviations  from  them  which  occur. 

a.  W^  aksha  before  "grf^t  uhiiii  makes  W«|l  f^nf)  akshauhini, 
'  a  large  army,^  instead  of  ^3T^frfl^,  as  it  should  do  by  rule  3. 

h.  When  "^  ir,  a  radical  signifying  '  go,^  or  any  of  its 
derivatives,  follows  the  '^  a^  of  ^  swa,  the  substitute  is  not  '  e,' 
but  ^  ai ;'  as  ^§t  ^  self-going,^  ^  independence  ;'  ^ri.#  ^  an  inde- 
pendent female  sen-ant,'  i.  e.  not  a  slave. 

c.  Verbal  derivatives  from  the  roots  ^ttt  in,  ^  go/  and  ^J 
edh,  '  increase,^  take  the  Vriddhi  substitute  after  the  vowel  ^ 
of  a  preposition  ;  as,  T^  +  ^frT  =  "^^fw  ^  he  approaches ;'  "gil  + 
^\|^  =  ■g^^iTfl'  ^  it  increases.^  In  general,  verbs  beginning  with 
IJ  or  ^  retain  their  own  vowel,  and  cause  the  elision  of  the 
final  ^  of  a  preposition  ;  as,  IT  before  ^»r^  makes  ^ir^  '  he 
trembles ;'  ir  before  ^^tWjT  makes  iff^  '  he  sprinkles.'  The 
^  which  is  evolved  from  "3^,  substituted  for  the  ^  of  ^  vah, 
^  bear,'  takes  Vriddhi  after  the  short  ^  a,'  as  fV^TT^  '  all- 
sustaining,'  becomes  in  the  ace.  plur.  f^^y!^: 

d.  Derivatives  from  ^^  ish,  ^  go,'  '  wish,'  take  the  Vriddhi 
letter  after  the  ^  a'  of  it  pra^  as  ^  praisha,  '  a  messenger ;'  so 
do  those  of  "35^  uh,  '  reason ;'  as  "m^  prau^ha,  ^  proud,'  '  arro- 
gant.' ^  ish,  ^  glean,'  takes  Guna  after  it,  as  Jn?  presha,  ^  a 
gleaner.' 

e.  Roots  beginning  with  "^  after  a  preposition  ending  in 
^  a,'  substitute  the  Vriddhi  form  ^n^  ar,  as  grr  +  ^^ifri  makes 
4m-q|rrt  uparchchhati,  '  approaches  ;'  by  rule  2.  it  should  have 
been  siM-clfw  uparchchhati.  The  Vriddhi  ^sn^  is  also  substituted 
for  an  initial  "^  when  the  word  it  commences  is  compounded 
with  a  preceding  word  ending  in  ^  a,'  and  having  the  sense  of  the 
instrumental  case  :  thus  "^  sukha  and  ^w  rita  may  be  joined 
together,  as  ^H\^  sukhartta,  '^  affected  by  joy ;'  "^ftlT  sita  and 
"^W  rita,   as   ^tlTT#  sitartta,   ^  affected  by   cold.'      If  the   first 


CONJUNCTION   OF  VOWELS.  11 

member  have  not  the  sense  of  the  instrumental  case,  the 
words  combine  agreeably  to  rule  2 ;  as,  in??  parama  and  ^fff 
rita  make  xn?T^  paramartta,  ^ last- gone:'  the  same  if  the 
first  word  retains  the  sign  of  the  instrumental  case,  the  words 
coalescing  in  virtue  of  their  juxta-position,  but  not  forming  a 
compound  :  thus  ^^  +  ^TT  makes  "JJ^W^  sukhenartta. 

/.  The  word  "^^  rifia  doubled  or  preceded  by  If,  ^ffnn:, 
cfi^fc5j  '^n^,  or  ^,  substitutes  the  Vriddhi  syllable  ^ix,  not  the 
Guna  ^TT:  ;  as,  "■^lilnS  rinarna,  ^  debt  of  a  debt  f  TH^  prarna, 
'  principal  debt ;'  ^r^nnrnj  vatsatararna,  '  debt  of  a  mule  ;' 
cifiHI^  vasanarna,  '  debt  of  a  cloth ;'  ^^TO  Dasarna,  name  of  a 
country;  r^^iiiBl  Dasarna,  name  of  a  river,  the  Dosaron  of 
Ptolemy. 

ff.  Verbs  formed  from  nouns  beginning  with  "^  take  either 
the  Guna  or  Vriddhi  substitute  after  the  ^  of  a  preposition : 
-^wNrfrf  rishabhiyati,  '  he  resembles  or  acts  like  a  rishabha,' 
i.  e.  a  bull,  with  iff  pra  makes  either  lT%>^hrfrT  or  XTrt^ft^rnr. 
So  with  an  initial  og^,  as  li«=hll3^rrt  or  XTT^RTCNfff.  When  the 
initial  is  the  long  vowel  ^^j  either  no  coalescence  takes  place, 
or  the  change  is  to  the  Guna  syllable ;  as,  "^  and  ^qhlO^fri 
make  either  <fq^cM<}nfrt  or  Tq^rc^lfd'. 

h.  When  "^  as  the  initial  of  a  noun  follows  an  inflected 
noun  ending  in  a  short  vowel,  it  may  remain  unaltered,  or 
follow  rule  2  :    thus  w^  and  "^fEf  may  make   either  ?rf fl  or 

i.  Verbs  formed  from  nouns  beginning  with  ^  or  ^  fol- 
lowing a  preposition  ending  in  ^,  either  cause  its  elision,  or 
substitute  the  Vriddhi  letter;  as,  "grxr  and  iid^fll^fd  e^akiyati 
make  either  dM^c^^ilfri  or  tIt^rHtI^  '  he  is  sheepish.' 

k.  When  the  particle  ^^,  '  verily,'  ^  indeed,'  is  used  to 
intimate  uncertainty,  it  causes  the  ehsion  of  a  preceding  ^; 
as,  ^  kwa  and  ^5^  eva  make  #"q'  kweva  in  such  a  sentence  as 
#^a*j&  ^  Where  will  you  dine  ?'  When  certainty  is  affirmed, 
the  combination  follows  rule  3 ;  as,  ^  i^xrr  ^%^  hV^  '  I  shall 
certainly  dine  with  you,  my  friend.' 

c  2 


12  COMBINATION   OF  LETTERS. 

/.  The  words  ^rtw  otu,  '  a  cat/  and  ^fti?  osht'ha,  ^  the  Up/ 
when  compounded  with  a  preceding  word  ending  in  ^^  either 
follow  rule  3,  or  cause  the  elision  of  the  preceding  vowel; 
as^  ^<55  sthdla  +  ^sitg  =  ^c^  or  ^|c5^  '  a  fat  cat  f  f^  vimba 
+  ^iV?  is  either  f%^^  or  fV^?  '  cherry-hpped/  If  the  words 
coalesce  without  forming  a  new  compound^  the  rule  is  adhered 
to  :  ir^  -f-  ^iW  make  rTTr?  ^  the  lip  of  thee.' 


4.  When  a  word  ends  with  any  simple  vowel^  except  ^  or 
"m,  and  is  followed  by  a  word  that  begins  with  a  dissimilar 
vowel;,  or  with  a  diphthong,  the  latter  is  unaltered,  but  the 
former  is  changed  to  its  analogous  semivowel :  thus  ^  and  ^ 
are  changed  to  ^  y,  "g"  and  "31  to  ^  v,  "^  "^  to  t:  r,  and  "c?  «|[  to 
■?J  1 ;  as, 

^fw  +  ^rnW!^  =  ^[im«R^  ityakarnya,  '  thus  having  heard.^ 
^^  +  WRTf  =  ^ip^l^ri  rijwayata,  *  simple-minded.' 
>JT5  +  W^T  =  >nw^  bhratransa,  ^  a  brother's  portion.' 
"55  +  'ilHVHi  =  HT^^  lanubandha,  '  the  adjunct  ( Anubandha) 
Lri.' 


a.  There  are  various  rules  for  the  correct  orthography  of 
words  coalescing  in  this  form,  but  they  are  amongst  the  incon- 
veniences of  Sanscrit  grammar,  and  are  little  observed  in  prac- 
tice :  it  is  enough  here  to  remark,  that  under  them  the  first 
word  may  be  also  spelled  ^^WHrS,  l^rurnfiT^,  or  ^^^nnr^iT!^, 
doubling  the  first  conjunct  consonant,  the  second,  or  both. 
In  general,  however,  the  simplest  form  is  used,  unless  the  first 
of  the  conjunct  consonants  be  ^,  when  the  second  should  be 
doubled ;  as,  iftd  '  Gauri'  (the  goddess)  +  ^fT^  '  here,'  is  most 
coiTectly  written  iTT^igr  Gauryyatra.  So  also  in  uncompounded 
words  the  letter  t:  doubles  the  consonant  conjoined  with  it, 
as  cirtr  kartta,  "sr?^  karmma,  \n#  dharmma,  although  it  is  not 
uncommon  to  omit  the  duplication  in  writing. 

b.  In  some  instances,  when  the  words  are  not  compounded, 


CONJUNCTION   OF  VOWELS.  13 

and  not  inflected,  a  final  simple  vowel  followed  by  a  dissi- 
milar vowel  may  either  conform  to  the  rule,  may  remain 
unaltered,  or,  if  long,  may  be  changed  to  its  short  vowel :  thus 
W^  chakri  +  ^T^  atra,  ^  The  discus -armed  (Vishnu),  here!* 
may  make  either  ^d^d  or  ^qfg?  ^^^  or  w^  ^ssr^.  If  a  new 
compound  be  formed,  the  rule  must  be  followed,  and  the 
semivowel  substituted ;  as,  i^  Hari  +  ^sr^  artha  makes  ^^Q 
Haryyartha,  ^  the  object  of  Hari :'  and  so  it  must  if  an  inflec- 
tive termination  be  added  to  the  word  to  form  a  case,  as  ttl^M 
Gauryyah,  '  of  the  goddess  Gauri/ 


5.  When  a  diphthong  ending  a  word  is  followed  by  any 
vowel  or  diphthong — even  though  the  latter  be  the  same — 
beginning  a  word,  the  following  syllables  are  severally  substi- 
tuted for  the  antecedent  diphthong : 

For  Tj — w^  ay,  as  '^  -|-  ^PT  makes  MM^i  chayana, '  gathering/ 

—  % — ^^rn^  ay,  as  %  +  ^ra  makes  Hm*  nayaka,  '  a  leader/ 

—  "^ — ^  av,  as  fTBrft  +  ^  =  PmilN  Vishnave, '  to  Vishnu/ 

—  ^ — ^rr^  av,  as  "5^  4-  ^  =  "ggrrfw  putravimau,  ^  these 

two  children/ 


«.  These  syllables  may  be  substituted  for  diphthongs  before 
Tl  when  it  is  the  initial  of  the  affix  ^,  forming  participial 
nouns  in  certain  senses. 

%  from  -(1^4-^=  'H^I  jayya,  ^  what  may  be  conquered/ 
>Tt  from  >T^+  in^  =  H^  bhavya,  '  what  may  be'  or  '  is  to  be/ 
•ft  +  TH^  =  fTT^  navya,  relating  to  ^  a  ship,'  ^  naval.' 
b.  ift  before   xn^   substitutes  ^  for  the  final,  iT^  gavya, 
^relating  to  a  cow;'    also  before  the  affix  ^,  as  iT^frT  ^a 
measure ;'  but  this  is  pecuhar  to  the  Vedas.     In  ordinary  use, 
the  words  are  ^  '^fw  '  a  measure  of  two  kos/ 


6.  Concurrent  heterogeneous  letters  in  some  cases  do  not 
follow  any  of  the  preceding  rules,  or  they  follow  them  option- 
ally ;  or  one  of  the  two  vowels  becomes  quiescent,  or  is  ejected. 


14  COMBINATION   OF   LETTERS. 

These  are  termed  TPpri  Pragrihya,   literally  ^  what   must  be 
taken  out/  '  excipienda/ 


a.  The  finals  ^  "gr  and  ij,  when  they  are  the  terminations  of 
nouns  in  the  dual  number,  are  unchanged  before  other  vowels 
or  diphthongs  :  ^^  im  '  these  two  Haris  /  >TT^  ^  '  these  two 
suns/  W^  ^n|^^ these  two  women/ 

h.  ^ml"  the  nom.  plur.  masc.  of  the  pronoun  ^^^  ^  that/ 
does  not  coalesce  with  a  following  vowel :  ^r^ft  ^^:  ^  those 
lords/ 

c.  The  ^  of  fofig  may  be  unchanged,  or  may  substitute  the 
semivowel  W^  before  a  vowel,  as  foR^T  "3^  or  f^m%  '^What  is 
said? 

d.  ^  or  "31  substituted,  as  they  sometimes  irregularly  are, 
for  the  proper  ending  of  the  locative  case,  are  unchanged,  as 
^ft^  nt^  ^fvfw:  '  Soma  relying  on  Gauri  /  ?n6"  for  i^^T'^. 

e.  Prolated  vowels,  pluta,  are  incapable  of  combination ; 
ijf^  "aiWT  ^I^  ^  Come,  Krishna  (as  if  in  calling),  here/ 

f,  ^  and  wt  being  the  terminations  of  an  inflected  word, 
cause  a  following  w  to  be  ejected ;  its  elision  is  however 
usually  denoted  by  a  pecuhar  character;  as,  ^P%s^  '  O  fire  ! 
here/    f^wtsw  ^O  Vishnu  !  here/ 

g.  The  ^  of  ift  is  subject  to  various  modifications  before 
^ :  both  may  be  unchanged,  ^  may  be  elided,  or  wt  may  be 
changed  to  ^r^  ava:  thus  Wt  and  ^lit  make  ift  ^nt?  'fts^,  or 
^TRI'  ^  is  changed  to  ^T^  ava  before  ^^:^  and  ^[^,  making 
by  rules  i .  and  i.  ^\^'\'^  ^  a  lattice,^  and  J|^r^  a  name  of 
Krishna ;  also  before  f  ^,  making  ^^^:  \  or  it  may  be  changed 
before  this  word  to  ^"^  av,  by  rule  5,  regularly  making  n^t^ 
'  lord  of  kine/ 

h.  When  the  short  vowel  ^  is  followed  by  the  sacred  mono- 
syllable ^sft'^  Om,  or  by  the  preposition  ^rr  compounded  with 
a  verb,  it  is  rejected :  thus  f^nTR  +  "^ft»(  becomes  f^rift^R: 
'Adoration  (Om)  to  S'iva !'  and  f^^  +  ^  (from  ^T  +  ^ff) 
makes  %^f^  '  O  S'iva,  come  !' 


CONJUNCTION    OF   CONSONANTS.  15 

i.  Particles,  when  single  vowels,  are  not  changed  before 
other  vowels  ;  as,  ^  ^ — t  -g^  ^  O  Indra  !  O  lord  of  Uma  !' 
^rr  is  an  exception,  if  it  implies  diminution :  ^rr  4-  Tcnf  makes 
^Ui|  oshnam,  '  a  little  warm.'  As  an  interjection  it  is  un- 
changed :  ^rr  ^  '  Ah,  indeed  !'  The  final  ^  of  a  particle  is 
unchanged  :  ^r^  ^"^t  '  Ho,  deities.' 

k.  The  final  ^  of  a  vocative  case  takes  various  forms  before 
the  particle  ^fiT ;   as,  fTOrft  ^fw,  f^W  ^W^  or  f^^fTfrT. 

/.  In  a  particular  class  of  compound  words  the  initial  of 
the  second  word  is  preserved,  and  the  last  vowel  of  the  pre- 
ceding word  is  rejected ;  in  one  case,  along  with  the  consonant 
by  which  it  is  followed :  thus 

^Tofi  +  W5^  =  "^T^F^  sakandhu,  '  a  sort  of  potherb.' 

"^  +  ^T^  =  "^"^  karkandhu,  ^  the  jujube.' 

c6l^-c^  +  ^T  —  cgl^^c^l^  laiigalisa,  '  the  handle  of  a  plough.' 

»T"rt -h  ^^  =  TT^ipr  marttanfl^a,  '  the  sun.' 

^TrRT  +  f^  =  T^TfNr  manisha,  '  intellect.' 

SECTION  II. 

Combiifiation  of  consonants. 

We  must  now  recollect  the  distinction  which  has  been 
pointed  out  (p.  7)  with  regard  to  the  two  classes  of  consonants, 
as  hard  or  surd,  and  soft  or  sonant ;  as,  in  addition  to  such 
rules  as  affect  peculiar  letters,  there  are  one  or  two  general 
rules  which  it  will  be  of  great  use  to  bear  in  mind. 

7.  When  two  consonants  come  together,  and  are  affected 
by  no  special  rule,  there  will  be  no  change,  if  they  are  both 
hard  or  both  soft;  but  if  they  are  of  different  enunciation, 
and  one  is  hard,  and  the  other  is  soft,  then  the  first  of  the 
two  must  be  changed  to  a  letter  of  the  same  quality  as  the 
second,  which  will  be  the  hard  or  soft  letter  of  the  class  to 
which  it  belongs  ;  as,  "SR  to  n,  or  n  to  ^ ;  ^  to  if,  or  »r  to  ^ ; 
7  to  ^  or  ^  to  ^ ;  W  to  ^  or  ^  to  W ;  xr  to  "^  or  -q-  to  "q.  The 
further  exemplification  of  this  rule  may  thus  be  stated : — 

«.   If  the  consonants   be   both   hard,  there  is  no  change: 


16  COMBINATION  OF  LETTERS. 

thus,  before  the  termination  ^,  the  nouns  skrvasak,  harit,  ap, 
retain  their  finals,  as  ^§5(<+^,  ^ftjf,  W^,  ^T^  before  t^fff  is 
^T^rrfw  ^  lord  of  speech/ 

b.  If  both  are  soft,  there  is  no  change :  ^  before  f>nT  is 
^^rfk:  adbhih,  ^  by  waters/ 

c.  A  hard  before  a  soft  consonant  must  be  changed  to  a 
soft  consonant  of  its  own  class :  thus  ^n^  iftwi '  the  song  of 
the  lord/  becomes  vrT^trTT  bhagavad-gita,  't'  being  changed  to 
^  d :'  W^  before  *f  changes  its  final  to  "sr,  and  becomes  ^nsr, 
^  water-born/  '  a  lotus/ 

d.  A  soft  consonant  before  a  hard  consonant  must  be 
changed  to  the  hard  consonant  of  its  own  class  :  fk^,  '  to 
break/  before  IT^  changes  ^  to  it,  >N^  ^  to  be  broken  /  so  it 
does  before  i|,  and  ^ft^H^  becomes  Tft^fnT^  ^  in  the  destroyers 
of  races/ 

8.  If  the  antecedent  consonant  be  an  aspirated  letter,  it  is 
not  only  modified  by  the  preceding  rule,  but  whatever  form  it 
takes  it  is  the  unaspirated  letter ;  an  aspirate  cannot  precede 
an  unaspirated  letter,  nor  can  two  aspirated  consonants  come 
together.  Thus  in  the  combination  ^fv+^T^dadhi-atra,  where 
by  rule  4.  it  makes  ^rzj^  dadhyatra,  and  by  the  following 
remark  a.  the  V  dh  may  be  doubled,  the  duplication  requires 
that  the  first  member  shall  be  unaspirated,  and  the  word 
must  be  written,  not  ^i»I^  dadhdhyatra,  but  ^W  daddhyatra : 
so  liV  and  11  become  "31^;  T^H  and  V,  c53T;  «fi^  and  fn^, 
•2B^^;  and  f^wfc?!^  and  «rnT,  fqc^fc^J**!!*!^,  the  73",  which  is 
a  hard  letter,  being  first  changed  to  the  unaspirated  or,  and  or 
being  changed  to  it  before  the  soft  aspirate  H. 

9.  A  hard  consonant,  when  final,  is  changed  to  a  soft 
consonant;  and  a  final  aspirated  consonant,  to  an  unaspi- 
rated :  thus,  ^T^  becomes  ^p^ ;  and  f%^fH^,  f%wfc5^. 

When  however  it  occurs  before  a  pause,  that  is,  when 
not  followed  immediately  by  any  letter,  the  change  to  a  soft 
consonant  is  optional :  thus  the  nom.  sing,  of  TT^  is  either 
^T^  or  "mJl ;   of  fq^f^J^,  f%wfc55^  or  -fc5'^. 


CONJUNCTION  OF  CONSONANTS.  17 

10.  Final  hard  consonants,  followed  by  words  beginning 
with  vowels,  are  changed  to  soft  (the  vowels  being  soft  or 
sonant  letters) ;  as,  ^t^  +  f;^  becomes  ^rrft^  Vagisa,  ^  god  of 
speech/  a  name  of  Vrihaspati ;  not  ^  the  god  of  wine/  as  Sir 
Wm.  Jones  conjectured,  from  the  accidental  resemblance  of 
Vagisa  and  Bacchus. 

When  hard  and  aspirated  consonants  are  followed  by  the 
terminations  of  the  cases  which  open  with  vowels,  they  are  no 
longer  regarded  as  final,  and  are  therefore  not  subject  to 
change:  ^f^^  makes  ^f^r^ — ^§^(ohT;  f%wfc5^j  fs^^fc?^ — 

r«ic^rc4^  &c. 

11.  A  consonant  of  the  dental  class,  it  "^  ^  V  «T,  preceding 
a  consonant  of  the  palatal  class,  ^  "S?  iT  ^  >T  ^^  or  of  the  cere- 
bral class,  7  7  "?  ^  W,  but  excepting  the  sibilant  (^),  is  changed 
to  the  corresponding  letter  of  that  class;  that  is,  IT  ^  are 
changed  to  ^  or  t;  ^  V  to  ifT  or  ^;  and  ^  to  ^r  or  w. 

^  +  f^  =  ^^  ^  pure  reason.' 

7T^+  ifl^  =  jtt^  '  that  life." 

TTi^  4-  "^1^  =  H^^HI  '  having  heard  that.' 

^rrf^^  +  'Ttl  =  "5nf#^^  a  name  of  Vishnu. 

inr  +  ^Nrr  =  TT^^  *  a  comment  on  that.' 

mP*^  +  ^^  =  ^f^iwl<*^  '  O  discus-armed  !  thou  goest.' 

Before  the  cerebral  sibilant,  the  dentals  are  unchanged,  as 
K»T  Wff  '  being  the  sixth.' 

12.  Dentals  are  also  changed  to  cerebrals,  when  following 
cerebrals;  as,  the  affix  1^  with  the  verb  fq^,  'to  grind/ 
forms  ^Y  pesht'ri,  '  a  grinder.'  They  are  not  so  changed 
when  they  are  radical  letters,  as  "^^  ^  '  they  six.' 

13.  Dental  consonants  before  the  letter  cj  are  changed  to 
c5;  as,  Trn;  +  fc5JWfiT=fTfw^ff 'he  writes  that/  H^  +  fc^^fw 
makes  >TTrfw^rfiT;  as  crvv  and  Xi'yw  make  crvWe'ya),  A  pecu- 
liar mark  is  sometimes  inserted  to  denote  the  change  of  the 
nasal,  as  H^ffw^fw. 

14.  A  nasal  of  the  same  class  may  be  substituted  for  any 

D 


18  COMBINATION   OF  LETTERS. 

final  consonant,  except  t  or  f ,  before  a  word  beginning  with  a 
nasal ;  as, 

^T^  +  JTUfff  =  "^T^  «rTfw  van  nayati,  ^  speech  guides/ 

"^  +  «T^fw  =  iiiU"c|  fri  shannavati,  '  ninety- six/ 

V7:  +  HTTT  =  M^HI^  shanmasa,  '  six  months/ 

Vj^  +  ^[TTft  =  ^fl^lft:  Etan-Murari,  "  that  Vishnu/ 

a.  This  rule  does  not  preclude  the  operation  of  the  general 
rule,  by  which  concurrent  consonants  must  be  assimilated ;  it 
only  makes  it  optional :  thus  for  "TT^  HilPcf  we  may  also  write 
^TT  H^Pd  ;  and  for  inn^  ^trfiC:,  TnT^uft:;  the  nasals  being 
sonants. 

b.  The  rule  is  absolute  in  one  case,  when  the  following 
word  is  a  technical  affix;  such  as  ^T[y  implying,  when  con- 
joined with  nouns,  ^consisting  of;'  and  iTTW^  implying  ^  so 
much,'  ^  merely ;'  as,  TH^  with  ifir  makes  only  '^r^*<n  vanmaya, 
'  made  of  speech,'  ^  eloquent ;'  and  WW  with  W(^  is  WSTT^  tan- 
matra,  '  merely  that,'  '  a  primary  element.' 

15.  «T  is  changed  to  TIT  in  the  genitive  case  of  leiT  ^six;'  also 
in  the  words  H^Pri  and  «T^  after  "q^ ;  as,  "^^  shaniiam,  "q^rrfw 
shannavati,  myj|0  shannagari ;  the  z  of  "q^  being  changed  to 
W  by  rule  14. 

16.  Before  a  sibilant,  T  and  w  may  insert  respectively  the 
letters  ^  and  z ;  as,  irr^  before  ^w  makes  tttt  ^  tr?  or  TTT^  "^ 
'  sixth  anterior,'  and  ^^TTtt^  +  "^  =  '^'T^  ^  "^  *  sixth  numerator :' 
and  7  or  ^  or  Tf,  before  the  dental  sibilant,  may  insert  the 
dental  w ;  as,  H^fc5^  "^r^  or  T^fcJ^  rFT^  '^  the  bee  endures ;' 
and  ^  ^:  or  lEnri^  ^:  ^  he  being.' 

17.  The  nasals  T  ^  «T,  terminating  a  word,  when  preceded 
by  a  short  vowel,  and  followed  by  any  vowel  as  the  initial  of 
a  subsequent  word,  may  be  doubled ;  as, 

irq^  +  ^^n^  =  Hi*|TI^  '  he  sits  facing  the  west.' 
wm  +  ^  =  ^iiiul^r  *  the  lord  of  an  excellent  class.' 
tT»T5|  +  ^  =  TT5Tf%fw 'O  king!   thus/ 

18.  rT  following  ^  immediately,  or  tc  or  "q  either  immedi- 


CONJUNCTION  OF  CONSONANTS.  19 

ately  or  separated  by  an  intervening  guttural  or  labial  conso- 
nant, a  vowel,  %  %  '^,  Visarga,  or  Anuswara  deduced  from  if  or 
»T,  is  changed  to  w;  as^  "^Tf  becomes  ^nn  ^debt;^  TTft:+ fTfr  = 
Mfuid  ^  bowed/      If  final  it  is  unchanged,  as  ^^. 

19.  A  final  jt  terminating  an  inflected  word  may  be  changed 
to  Anuswara  before  a  consonant;  as,  for  ^ft?^  read  ^  ^  '  I 
salute  Hari ;'  so  for  in^  read  w  "^^Rfff  '  he  laughs  at  him.'  Be- 
fore IT5^  the  final  of  ^  is  unalterable ;  as,  w?SVrf  '  a  universal 
monarch/  It  is  unchanged  before  a  vowel ;  as,  ^n^TTiT:  '  I 
(am)  come/ 

20.  TT  is  optionally  changed  to  Anuswara  before  ^  in  con- 
junction with  JT,  as  f^  or  f^  ?r?J"irfiT;  but  Anuswara  derived 
from  TR  may  become  %  "?j,  or  %  before  ^  combined  with  these 
semivowels  severally ;  as,  fsfi  or  f^  ^,  ftp  or  fo|r?5  ^T^xrfTT,  f^ 
or  foR"^  S^^^fiT.  It  may  become  rf  before  ^  combined  with  cf, 
as  f4  or  foFT  ^TT. 

21.  Anuswara  followed  by  any  consonant,  except  the  semi- 
vowels, sibilants,  and  ^,  is  changed,  if  in  the  middle  of  a  word, 
to  the  nasal  of  that  class  to  which  the  consonant  following  it 
belongs  :  ^  +  f^  =  ^H^^ti  '  marked  ;^  ^  +  fqw  =  ^f^H  '  wor- 
shipped.' 

a.  If  it  be  the  final  of  an  inflected  word,  the  change  is 
optional;  as,  ^Tf»^  +  "SfiK  =  "^^FR  or  ^TflJTt  ^egoism;'  T#  or 
H^^CIPm  ^  thou  doest ;'   r#  or  r^^  ^[^[rftr  ^  thou  givest.' 

b.  If  the  following  consonant  be  a  semivowel,  the  Anuswara 
may  be  optionally  changed  to  the  nasal  form  of  the  semivowel, 
which  is  denoted  by  a  peculiar  mark  above  it;  as,  ^inr  or 
^^hm  ^restraint;'  xi<^"3R  or  4wN  ^  to  what  world;'  WfF^  or 
^f^WX: '  a  year.' 

22.  Anuswara  may  be  substituted  for  a  medial  ^  or  ??, 
when  followed  by  a  sibilant ;  as,  >n|f^  ^  bows ;'  "q^rfftr  '  reputa- 
tions ;'  "SRr  a  proper  name. 

23.  A  final  it  or  ^  preceded  by  ^  or  ^TT  may  be  dropped 
before  any  letter  except  a  hard  consonant  or  a  sibilant,  as  ^ 
becoming  wiT  by  rule  5.  before  ^TRTH:  makes  w  ^trth:  ^  they 

D  % 


20  COMBINATION  OF  LETTERS. 

are  come:'  so  "^  changed  to  WT^  before  ^R^  becomes  ht  ^ 
^  those  two/ 

24.  When  ^  follows  any  consonant,  except  a  semivowel,  a 
nasal,  or  a  sibilant,  it  is  changed  to  "^ ;  as,  TT^  +  f^  S'iva  = 
wi%9r  tach-chhiva,  '  that,  S'iva.' 

For  by  rule  ii .  ^  has  been  changed,  before  the  palatal  ^, 
to  the  analogous  palatal  if;  but  the  soft  consonant  '^,  again, 
has  been  changed  to  the  hard  consonant  %  before  the  hard 
consonant  ^. 

25.  When  followed  by  '^n^  a  final  tf  may  interpose  the 
letter  w,  making  ^^^  i^  ^r»J ;  but  by  the  preceding  rule  ^^r  is 
changed  to  "S^ ;  and  by  rule  ii .  w  will  then  be  changed  to  "^, 
and  IT  to  ^,  and  the  compound  will  be  ^^^jr^.  By  a  subse- 
quent rule,  however,  the  terminating  letter  of  the  conjunct  ^ 
may  be  rejected,  and  the  word  will  finally  be  ^^^^^m. 

2i6.  The  augment  l^  may  be  inserted  after  a  word  ending  in 
a  short  vowel,  before  one  beginning  with  "^y  as  f^  i^  'S[nrr; 
but  as  "rf  must  be  changed  to  ^  in  such  a  position,  the  form  is 
r^HxriiNi  ^  the  shadow  of  Siva.' 

«.  The  same  augment  l^  is  optionally  inserted  after  a  long 
vowel,  whether  medial  or  final;  as,  7J^5ft"S[nn  or  c5^?teTm 
^  the  shadow  of  Lakshmi ;'  ^  or  ^^  ^  a  barbarian.' 

b.  It  is  also  inserted  optionally  after  the  particles  ^TT^  and 
»rr^  (leaving  ^  and  m)  prefixed  to  verbal  inflexions  or  deriva- 
tives beginning  with  ^  (it  is  in  like  manner  changed  to  ^) ; 
as,  vMltJ^K^Pri  or  ^TTSLT^xifiT  ^  he  covers ;'  iTlf^l^  or  mfe^l^  '  let 
him  not  divide.' 

27.  "^  is  changed  to  ^  before  ^,  as  "5"^  for  ^n,  '  see,'  makes 
with  ^irf^,  ^^Th  ^  will  see :'  (for  ^  after  a  guttural  becomes  % 
and  oR  and  "^  form  the  compound  ^,) 

28.  Before  a  palatal  consonant,  including  ^,  the  dental  Tff 
is  changed  to  i^;  and  before  a  cerebral,  including  ^,  it  is 
changed  to  "ET  ;  as,  TTTO  +  r^nlfrt  =  UHOaHlPd  ^  Rama  gathers  ;' 
TTR^4-^  =  tm^  'Rama  sleeps;'  U^HT  +  ^fNfi^  =  tTH^^ 
^  Rama  goes ;'  TI^  +  ^TO  =  CIH^itf  '  Rama,  sixth.' 


CONJUNCTION   OF  CONSONANTS.  21 

29.  "^y  not  being  final,  is  changed  to  i^  after  any  vowel 
except  ^  or  vTT,  a  guttural  consonant,  a  semivowel,  and  ^, 
though  the  augment  ^,  Visarga,  or  a  sibilant  intervene ;  thus 
VgTff  becomes  in  the  plural,  hhTm  ^ bows ;'  and  f^  and  ^  make 
%Tg  ^  in^  or  ^  on  S'ivas/ 

30.  \Mien  ^ff  in  the  verbs  WT  '  to  stay/  and  ^cT^T  ^  to  stop/ 
and  their  derivatives,  is  preceded  by  the  preposition  "giT,  it  is 
rejected;  and  as  the  final  ^  becomes  the  hard  consonant  it 
before  a  hard  consonant,  then  "^  +  ^T^T  =  ■3"r^n«T  ^uprising,' 
and  "^  +  ^tHH^  =  TW>T^  ^  upholding.^ 

31.  AVhen  "f  follows  any  consonant,  except  a  nasal,  semi- 
vowel, or  sibilant,  the  aspirate  of  the  preceding  letter  may  be 
substituted  for  it,  that  letter,  if  a  hard  consonant,  being  first 
changed  to  its  corresponding  soft  letter ;  as,  ^rsR  +  ^rfff  becomes 
first  Tfj^  -\-  "^rfff,  and  then  TFTRfff  '  speech  seizes.^ 

32.  "^  when  final,  or  before  any  consonant  except  a  nasal 
or  a  semivowel,  is  changed  to  ^,  as  TjfcJir,  '  a  bee,'  becomes 
JTufrifS ;  such  a  ^  is  changed  to  oR  before  ^,  as  ^^  for  ^^  ^  burn,' 
makes  with  ^qfrT,  ^^rfiT  ^  will  burn.' 

33.  Any  consonant  may  be  optionally  doubled  after  T^  or  ^ 
preceded  by  a  vowel ;  as,  ^  or  ^r^  '  the  sun  /  '^f^  or  ^§" 
'  fire.' 

34.  Any  consonant,  except  ^,  followed  by  a  consonant, 
may  be  doubled ;  as,  "J^  +  ^  may  be  "J^,  ^  a  son ;'  fkt[  +  ^  may 
be  "ftr^  ^  a  friend.' 

a.  But  when  three  or  more  consonants  are  joined  together, 
by  virtue  of  a  grammatical  rule,  one  or  more  of  the  interme- 
diate ones,  if  similar,  may  be  rejected ;  therefore  "J^  and  iwrf 
are  more  usually  written  "g^  and  f^T^. 

b.  A  semivowel  following  any  consonant,  except  a  semi- 
vowel, a  sibilant,  ^,  or  ^,  may  be  doubled;  as,  ^nf^  or 
^in^r«<  ^  the  sun.' 

c.  But  when  two  semivowels  are  preceded  by  a  different 
consonant,  one  of  them  may  be  rejected ;  so  ^rTf^rOT  becomes 
^rf^,  as  before. 


JSa  COMBINATION   OF   LETTERS. 

35.  When  a  conjunct  consonant  is  final,  whether  terminat- 
ing a  syllable  or  a  word,  the  second  member  is  rejected,  as 
^^,  'sL  lame  man/  becomes  T[^«|;  and  f^^,  ^what  injures/ 
f^rT:  so  after  nouns  ending  in  consonants,  the  sign  of  the 
nominative  case  ^  is  rejected,  as  XTTT"^,  ^  going,^  not  xhr^. 

If  the  preceding  letter  be  T:  the  final  is  retained,  as  ^"5^ 
'  strong  /  but  not  if  the  second  member  be  a  sibilant,  as 
fxi  Gh1  ^,  *  who  wishes  to  do,'  becomes  f^ibhT^. 

There  are  other  rules  affecting  the  mode  of  combining 
consonants,  and  the  changes  to  which  the  combinations  are 
subject ;  but  their  validity  is  matter  of  dispute :  accordingly, 
as  different  rules  are  followed,  the  derivatives  of  the  compound 
of  ^  ^  cum,'  and  "^  *  to  make/  may  be  WTitten  in  a  variety  of 
manners :  #^r#T,  for  instance,  may  be  written  in  a  hundred 
and  eight  ways.  These  are,  however,  matters  merely  of  ortho- 
-  epical  conceit,  and  in  practice  the  simplest  spelling,  consistent 
with  the  essential  elements  of  a  word,  is  to  be  preferred. 

36.  When  a  word  ending  with  t^  is  followed  by  one  begin- 
ning with  T,  one  is  rejected,  and  the  preceding  vowel,  if  short, 
is  made  long ;  as,  "grni  +  T]R^  =  ^HKH^  *  he  again  sports  / 
fj^  +  T^=  ffk^  '  unimpassioned.' 

SECTION  III. 

Changes  of  Visarga. 

As  preliminary  to  the  rules  for  those  changes  to  which  the 
soft  aspirate  termed  Visarga  is  subject,  it  may  be  useful  to 
premise,  that  they  contemplate  the  reciprocal  equivalency  of 
(:)  Visarga,  ^,  and  ^;  these  signs  being,  according  to  circum- 
stances, mutually  interchangeable.  There  are,  as  is  well 
known,  indications  of  similar  reciprocity  in  the  classical  lan- 
guages. The  Greek  e^,  eTrra,  aX?,  become  in  Latin,  sex, 
septem,  sal.  In  the  older  Latin  writers  a  final  ^s'  was  com- 
monly ehded,  at  least  for  prosodial  purposes ;  and  Pott  sug- 
gests that  its  place  may  have  been  suppUed  by  something  hke 


CHANGES   OF  VISARGA.  23 

Visarga.  Lucilius,  according  to  Quintilian,  wrote  "  Serenu' 
fuit  et  dignu'  loco ;''  and  Cicero  observes,  "  Plures  antiquo- 
rum  sic  locutos."  The  substitution  of  '  r'  for  '  s'  was  also  com- 
mon in  Latin,  and  arbor,  labor,  clamor,  were  originally  written 
arbos,  labos,  clamos.  The  '  s'  was  also  sometimes  preserved  in 
the  nominative,  but  changed  in  other  inflexions,  as  flos,  floris, 
and  the  like. 

The  meaning  of  Visarga  fV^  is  literally  ^  abandoning,' 
'  ejecting ;'  and  that  of  its  synonyme  fwit^fhT  Visarjjaniya  is 
*  that  which  may^  or  '  is  to  be  ejected,  or  abandoned/  It  has 
been  a  question,  therefore,  whether  the  symbol  to  which  it  is 
applied  ( : )  be  a  simple  mark  of  ehsion,  a  kind  of  apostrophe, 
or  whether  it  designates  a  sound.  It  would  be  out  of  place  to 
discuss  the  question  at  present.  It  is  usually  considered  to 
denote  a  very  soft  and  almost  imperceptible  breathing,  and  it 
is  sufficient  for  our  purpose  so  to  regard  it. 

37.  A  final  ^  is  changed  to  Visarga :  TTfnr  Ramas  becomes 
XJ^\  Ramah ;  and  TITO  Ramais,  ot:  Ramaih. 

88.  Before  a  hard  consonant  Visarga  again  becomes  ^: 
f^  +  Wnn  =  f^^m^nn  '  Vishnu  the  preserver.' 

a.  It  is  not  so  changed  before  a  hard  letter  foUow^ed  by  a 
sibilant,  as  "sji:  w^,  ^  Which  (is)  the  sword-hilt  ?' 

b.  Before  a  sibilant  the  change  is  optional,  as  TJHX  "^rff  or 
UHSt^lri.  (The  dental  sibilant  is  changed  to  the  sibilant  of  the 
class  of  the  consonant  by  which  it  is  followed :   see  rule  28.) 

c.  Before  the  hard  consonants  of  the  guttural  and  labial 
classes,  Visarga  may  be  unchanged :  ^:  "Sfittfw  '  who  does ;'  w, 
iT^ffT  ^  he  cooks.' 

d.  Before  these  letters  a  diiFerent  sign  X  called  Arddha- 
visarga,  ^a  half  Visarga,'  is  sometimes  used,  as  ^X  <*Cirri,  "^X  "T^. 
The  sign  before  a  guttural  is  described  as  ^1<^I*J<*'1^  '  proceed- 
ing from  the  root  of  the  tongue ;'  and  before  a  labial,  ^quiMlij 
^  to  be  gently  blown  or  aspirated.'  Modifications  of  aspiration 
are  no  doubt  intended,  which  might  have  been  of  consequence 
when  the  language  was  spoken,  but  are  now  of  no  importance. 


24  COMBINATION  OF   LETTERS. 

e.  The  permanence  of  Visarga  before  cR  is  liable  to  excep- 
tion, and  it  is  changed  to  '^  before,  i.  the  pronoun  oR,  as  oir^ 
^  quisquis  f  2.  the  affix  ^,  as  ^r^r^  '  famous ;'  and  the  parti- 
cles -SF^  and  "siimr,  as  tt^T^^  ^  of  little  fame  f  TJ[^r^!mf  '  desir- 
ous of  fame/  It  is  also  changed  before  xrr^,  as  m^|4:Mi^|  ^  of 
shght  renown/ 

/.  But  it  is  not  changed  before  "sf^,  if  that  follows  an 
indeclinable  word ;  as,  imT:  "^r^ff  ^  nigh  to  morning  ;^  nor 
before  "SR!^,  if  it  be  derived  from  a  radical  final;  thus  fjR 
makes  ift:  '  speech/  whence  ift:  ^fiTW?  ^  desirous  of  speech/ 

g.  It  is  changed  before  verbs  and  verbal  derivatives  com- 
mencing with  ^  when  compounded  with  ^tt:,  "gi::,  ^TT^:,  and 
^:;  as,  TpT^nr:  ^  salutation;^  "gt^idfrT  ^  he  places  before;' 
^nf^"3^  ^  manifested  ;^   dt-JPri  *  evil-doing/ 

h.  The  numerals  %:  f^:  and  ^:  change  Visarga  to  ^  before 
oil,  as  fM'*»=hCirri,  f^'^sjvdffT,  "^^^l^rfrT,  ^  he  makes  two,  three,  four/ 
But  if  repetition  is  implied,  the  change  is  optional,  as  f^tchClPri 
or  flr'E^fiT  ^  he  does  (any  thing)  twice/ 

L  fwr:  optionally  changes  its  final,  as  ffTC:  ^RR  or  Pril^l^hK 
*■  abuse/ 

j.  frrt:  becoming  f^:  also  optionally  changes  Visarga  to  ^ 
before  ^,  as  f^:  «»lP^if  or  Prfi^*!  P^H  ^  expelled/ 

k,  Visarga  is  changed  to  ^  after  ^rfiD^:  compounded  with 
the  particles  ^F^  and  xr^r,  as  <HPt^MigM,  ^ptQmi^i,  ^a  little 
butter/ 

/.  It  is  changed  after  ^ni:  and  f^R:  compounded  with  xy^, 
as  WM^sRf  ^  foot  below ;'  f^lTW^  '  foot  on  the  top/  If  the  words 
are  uncompounded,  the  change  does  not  take  place,  as  ^iv: 

39.  The  letter  t,  (in  technical  grammar  called  l^  ru,  to 
distinguish  it  from  the  mere  alphabetical  sign)  is  substituted 
for  Visarga  after  any  vowel  except  ^  or  ^  and  before  a  vowel 
or  a  soft  consonant ;  as,  tt§:  "^^  becomes  jj^'^mw  ^  endowed 
with  qualities ;'  ^f'H:  ^1^  =  ^uPh  ^^fw  '  fire  burns ;'  Hl5lPif 
'  the  boat  goes ;'  ^r^trfTT '  S'ambhu  takes/ 


CHANGES   OF  VISARGA.  O5 

40.  If  the  Visarga  be  preceded  by  ^,  and  the  initial  of  the 
word  following  be  ^,  or  a  soft  consonant,  T  is  substituted 
in  place  of  t:,  and  "g"  with  the  penultimate  ^  forms  the  final 
diphthong  ^;  as,  w»  W^"  makes  "Sfits^  ^  Who  here  ?^  w,  inn 
makes  "^  iTrTt  ^  Who  (is)  gone  ?' 

«.  An  initial  W  following  ^  so  formed  is  rejected,  but  its 
place  is  marked  by  the  sign  s.      See  rule  6./. 

b.  HrRT  changed  by  rule  37.  to  tt^:  becomes  by  this  rule 
^nft  in  such  compounds  as  JTTl»f,  K^fl'H^,  ^  mind-born  -/  H^IM 
'  mind-delighting.' 

41.  After  the  short  vowel  'ST,  and  before  any  vowel  except 
^,  Visarga  may  be  changed  to  ^,  which  by  rule  23.  may  be 
rejected ;  as_,  %^:  and  "^srrw  become  ^^ttt^  or  ^  ^rr^  '  a  god 
sits '/  ^:  and  i[;^  become  ^"^fqi^:  or  ^  ^j^  '  the  god  Indra ;' 
*Tc55:  TTT^  '  Nalah  spoke/  makes  r|c4^m-«<  or  more  commonly 

42.  After  the  long  vowel  ^5  and  before  any  vowel  or  soft 
consonant,  "^  is  substituted  for  Visarga ;  it  is  optionally  rejected 
before  the  vowels,  absolutely  before  the  consonants ;  as,  ^^r: 
"^W  make  ^TR^  or  ^^t  '^T^  'the  gods  (are)  here/  ^"qr:  and 
'H^i:  make  %^  ^rrm:  '  the  gods  are  to  be  reverenced  /  ^^n: 
wfWf^,  said  of  Devi,  makes  ^«miir*Tf^  or  ^^an  ^rftrfVit ;  fsnrr: 
H\c6\,  '  the  garland  of  S'ri,'  makes  Piim  iTTFJT. 

«.  After  the  interjections  H^,  vprfr^,  ^rxft^,  the  Visarga,  to 
which  the  final  is  changed,  is  said  to  be  again  changed  to  ^, 
which  is  ejected  before  a  vowel  or  soft  consonant ;  as,  >Tt  ^^5 
'  O  Indra  !'  ^  ^^  ^  O  god  !' 

43.  Visarga  substituted  for  a  radical  final  ^  may  become  i: 
again  before  a  vowel  or  a  soft  consonant;  as,  Trnn  for  HVUZ. 

+  ^TW  becomes  MIH^^  '  the  dawn  (is)  here.' 

a.  Such  a  Visarga  may  also  optionally  become  ^  again 
before  a  hard  consonant ;  as,  ift:  for  fn^  before  xrfir  may  make 
Tfh^fT  ^  lord  of  speech,'  or,  by  rule  38,  WturfTf,  Visarga  being 
changed  to  ^. 

b,  Visarga  substituted  for  the  final  of  ^r^  for  ^r^*^  '  a  day,' 


26  COMBINATION  OF  LETTERS. 

becomes  t^  again  before  any  consonant  except  i:  and  vr;  as, 
^r^t^fw  '  lord  of  day ;'  ^t^t^  '  a  number  of  days/  Before  t 
and  H,  "3"  is  substituted  for  it  j  as,  ^T^krW  ^  day  and  night ;' 
^r^VfW:  '  by  days/ 

44.  Visarga  is  substituted  for  a  final  Tf,  except  in  the  word 
TT^rnr,  before  a  hard  consonant  of  the  palatal,  cerebral,  and 
dental  classes,  if  followed  by  a  vovv^el,  a  semivowel,  or  a  nasal. 
Anuswara  is  prefixed  to  the  sibilant  to  which  by  rule  38. 
Visarga  is  changed ;  as,  "SFTlf^^  +  f^[f^  becomes  ^rTftpf^lrf^ 
^  O  bow-armed,  cut  ?  tH!^  +  lTt=  U^reJT'  O  king,  cross  !^  but 
TT^^  P^HliJ  ^ let  the  quiet  man  collect.' 

a.  Before  xr  the  substitution  is  optional,  and  the  Visarga 
does  not  become  a  sibilant,  as  by  rule  38.  c,  but  may  or  may 
not  substitute  the  Arddha- visarga :  ^  "qif^  '  cherish  men,^  is 
therefore  written,  ^rXfiff,  ^:  -gifV^  or  ^  X  ^if^^  also  with  a  mark 
denoting  the  Visarga  to  be  nasal,  as  W:  "^nf^,  or  ^  X  "^TTf^- 

b.  ^J|  in  combination  with  "^  and  its  derivatives,  the  word 
oRT^  repeated,  and  "q?^  derived  from  "g^  prefixed  to  a  word 
beginning  with  a  hard  consonant,  insert  the  augment  ^,  in 
which  case  Visarga  is  said  to  be  substituted  for  their  proper 
finals,  preceded  by  Anuswara,  and  changed  before  ^  to  ^  : 
15(1^  before  ortt:  therefore  becomes  ^m  ^R;  «fiT^  before  "^rr^, 
"sf!^  ^RT^  ;  and  "g^  before  ohlfohc^,  "g^  ^r<*c4.  By  clause  a,  of 
rule  34,  however,  one  of  the  sibilants  is  rejected,  leaving  ^^K 
'  initiation  ;^  "SEraiT^  ^  whom  !  whom  P  and  "g^'tfcRc^  ^  a  male 
koil  (Indian  cuckoo)'. 

45.  The  Visarga  which  is  the  sign  of  the  masculine  nomi- 
native of  the  pronouns  w^  and  t^^,  or  W*  '  he/  vy(\  '  that  per- 
son,' is  commonly  dropped  before  a  consonant;  as,  ^  '^^^i^ 
^he  goes;'  ^  ^T^^^  '^e  gives;'  ^^  f^GCj:  ^that  Vishnu;'  but 
not  if  the  negative  ^  is  prefixed,  as  ^m:  f^:  ^  not  that  S'iva.' 

a.  In  verse,  for  the  convenience  of  the  metre,  ^  not  only 
rejects  the  Visarga,  but  allows  the  final  ^  to  be  conjoined 
with  a  following  vowel,  by  the  rules  of  vowel- Sandhi ;  as,  ^if^^ 
Trnn  ^TErfir,  ^  that  Indra  the  king  conquers,'  for  ^  l^: ;  so  ^ 


DECLENSION.  SS^ 

^l^K^n  TTT:,  ^  that  very   Rama,   the   son   of   Dasaratha/   for 
CHAPTER   III. 

DECLENSION. 

SECTION    I. 

General  rules. 

46.  Most  nouns  in  the  Sanskrit  language  are  declinable  in 
one  or  more  of  three  genders.  They  admit,  with  very  few 
exceptions,  of  three  numbers,  singular,  dual,  and  plural ;  and 
of  seven  cases  in  each  number;  i.  the  nominative,  2.  accusa- 
tive, 3.  instrumental,  4.  dative,  5.  ablative,  6.  genitive,  7.  loca- 
tive :  of  these  it  may  be  remarked,  that  the  third  or  instrumental 
has  the  sense  of  ^  by'  or  ^  with ;'  the  ablative,  ^  from  -,'  and  the 
locative,  ^  in^  or  *  on  :^  the  rest  have  the  usual  powers. 

47»  Inflexion,  whether  of  declension  or  conjugation,  is 
contrived  by  the  Sanskrit  grammarians  on  the  same  principle. 
It  consists  of  two  parts;  i.  the  Anga,  ^body,'  or  inflective 
base,  that  is,  the  word  itself;  and,  3.  of  certain  particles, 
which,  being  attached  to  the  base,  complete  the  inflected 
word.  The  inflectional  terminations  of  conjugation  will  be 
hereafter  specified.  We  are  concerned  at  present  with  those 
of  declension  only. 

48.  The  inflectional  terminations  of  nouns  are  twenty-one; 
some  of  them  are  repetitions :  they  are  attached  to  the  inflec- 
tive base  in  each  of  the  seven  cases  of  the  three  numbers,  and 
are  as  follows : 


nom. 

ftr 

^ 

^ 

ace. 

^ 

■^ 

Tinr 

instr. 

.  z\ 

WIT 

fi»w^ 

dat. 

T 

wn 

«ni 

abl. 

Tftt 

«n 

«TO, 

gen. 

T^ 

^^^ 

^T^ 

loc. 

fT^ 

E  % 

1^ 

DECLENSION, 


The  vocative  has  no  separate  termination,  being  considered  as 
a  modification  only  of  the  nominative. 

49.  Now  of  these  inflectional  terminations  it  is  to  be  re- 
marked, that  some  of  the  letters  serve  only  to  form  syllables, 
and  facilitate  enunciation :  they  are  rejected,  therefore,  when 
those  letters  which  are  essential  are  applied  to  the  base.  These 
auxiliary  letters  are  the  ^  of  "ftr ;  the  if  of  ITFT ;  the  ^  of  ^;ff ; 
the  7  of  rr;  the  T  of  the  terminations  T,  Tftr  (in  which  also  ^ 
is  subordinate),  "3^,  and  fT :  and  the  tf  of  ^.  It  is  also  to 
be  recollected,  that  by  rule  37.  a  final  ^  is  changed  to  Visarga. 
The  actual  terminations  therefore  will  be. 


nom.  : 

^ 

w: 

ace.     ^ 

^ 

^ 

instr.  'srr 

vqf 

fk: 

dat.     T? 

«n 

«(: 

abl.     w: 

«if 

«t: 

gen.    ^ 

^: 

WT^ 

loc.     ^ 

wh 

50.  In  applying  these  terminations  to  the  final  letter  of  the 
inflective  base,  a  recollection  must  be  preserved  of  the  modifi- 
cations which  that  final  letter  must  undergo,  whether  it  be  a 
vowel  or  a  consonant,  before  the  initial  letters  of  the  termina- 
tions ;  as  in  the  following  example : 

ift  *  navis,^  ^  a  ship.' 


nom.  iTt: 

"5TT^ 

^TT^. 

ace.    'TR 

"TT^ 

^xm 

mstr.  ;tt^T 

^«n 

^f^l 

dat.    "^TT^ 

^«if 

^t^: 

abl.    TH^: 

^«if 

•^: 

gen.   TfT^: 

•{141: 

^m 

loc.     ^nf^ 

^^. 

^1 

It  will  be  observed,  that  before  the  consonants,  the  word  ^  is 

unchanged;    before   the 

vowels,  ^  becomes  ^srr^  by  rule  5. 

The  ^  of  ^  is  changed  after  ^  to  "^ 

by  rule  29. 

NOUNS  ENDING   IN  VOWELS.  gQ 

It  is  worth  while  to  pause  for  a  moment  upon  this  scheme  of 
inflectional  terminations,  and  to  understand  it  fully,  as  it  fur- 
nishes a  useful  clue  to  all  the  varieties  of  nominal  inflexion  which 
follow.  If  it  were  rigidly  apphed,  nothing  would  be  so  simple 
as  Sanskrit  declension;  and  even  as  it  is,  we  are  authorized 
to  affirm  that  there  is  but  one  general  declension  in  Sanskrit 
grammar.  There  are  however  various  modifications,  both  of 
the  bases  and  of  the  terminations,  in  the  individual  nouns, 
which  render  it  convenient  to  divide  them  into  classes;  and 
no  arrangement  admits  of  more  ready  reference  than  that 
which  classes  them  according  to  their  final  letters;  first,  as 
they  are  vowels  or  consonants ;  and  secondly,  according  to  the 
letter  or  class  of  letters  in  each  of  those  two  divisions. 


SECTION  II. 

Nouns  ending  in  vowels. 

Class  I.    Nouns  ending  in  ^  and  ^. 

51.  Nouns  ending  in  w  form  by  far  the  most  numerous  class 
of  nouns,  and  commonly  admit  of  three  genders,  forming  the 
feminine  by  adding  ^f ;  as,  masc.  "%"5r  S'iva,  the  god ;  fern. 
?\\^  I  the  goddess  S'iva. 

52.  In  forming  the  inflexions  of  all  nouns,  such  changes  as 
may  occur  are  of  two  descriptions;  i.  those  affecting  the  base, 
2,  those  affecting  the  termination. 

53.  Nouns  ending  in  ^  substitute  ^TT  for  the  final  before  if 
substituted  for  ;?  in  the  dat.  sing. ;  before  the  dual  termination 
wit ;  and  before  the  augment  tT,  in  the  genitive  case  plural,  and 
in  the  nominative  and  accusative  plural  neuter.  They  substi- 
tute ;j  for  their  final  ^  before  ^ft^  in  the  dual,  and  «nT  and 
^  in  the  plural.  They  insert  tT  before  the  signs  of  the  genitive 
case  plural,  and  the  nominative  and  accusative  plural  neuter. 
The  feminine  noun  changes  ^JTT  to  ^  before  the  ^TT  of  the 
instrumental  case  singular,  the  ^?r  of  the  dual,  and  in  the 


30  DECLENSION. 

vocative  case ;  and  inserts  tu  before  the  four  last  cases  of  the 
singular^  and  "^r  before  ^n^  in  the  gen.  plural. 

54.  Nouns  in  "^  substitute  other  terminations  for  those  of 
the  scheme^  in  some  of  the  cases :  thus. 

Singular.  Plural, 

acc.    ^      for  ^  ace.    ^  for  ^ 

instr.  ^    —  ^T  instr.  ^^  —  f^^ 

dat.     XT      —  ^ 

abl.    ^srr^  —  Tftr 

gen.   ^     —  ^ 

a.  The  feminine  noun  substitutes  ^  for  ^  in  the  nom.  and 
acc.  dual,  and  ^"F^  for  "%  in  the  locative  case  sing. 

b.  The  neuter  substitutes  in  the  three  numbers  of  the  nom. 
and  accus.  severally  '^  ^  ^,  the  latter  with  rf  prefixed,  as  f^^ 
in  place  of  the  terminations  of  the  masculine :  in  all  the  other 
cases  it  adopts  the  terminations  of  the  masculine. 

55,  We  are  now  prepared  to  understand  the  construction 
of  the  following  forms  of  f^^,  bearing  in  mind  the  alterations 
dependent  upon  the  laws  of  combination,  in  joining  the  in- 
flectional terminations  to  the  inflective  base. 

Masc.  f^  S'iva  the  deity, 
nom.  f^:  f^^  f^RT:     S'iva,  &c. 


acc. 

f^r^ 

fW 

r^Nii; 

SW,  &c. 

instr 

.  -M^ 

f^^T«?f 

f^: 

By  or  with  S'iva,  &c, 

dat. 

f^^nr 

f^mrwn 

r^r^«T: 

To  S'iva,  &c. 

abl. 

fW^ 

f^^T«Tf 

iV^: 

From  Siva,  &c. 

gen. 

r^mw 

f^^^: 

fW^T 

Of  Siva,  &c. 

loc. 

frjR 

%^^. 

r^i'i? 

In  or  on  S'iva,  &c. 

voc. 

f^ 

f^T 

%^t: 

O  S'iva !  &c. 

Fem.  f^'^J  the  goddess  S'iva. 

nom.  %"^  1^1%  f^rrr: 

acc.     f^rrf  f^?  f^T: 

instr.  f^Rin  fw^         f^^>T: 


NOUNS   ENDING   IN  VOWELS. 


31 


dat.    f^r^  f^mrwrf  %^TVq: 

abl.    f^rrnrr:  f^Ni^rf  f^rrw: 

fw^:  f^mt:  f^^rni 

%^rqf  P^rmTl:  fwi 

Neuter  f^r^  *  auspicious/ 

Nom.  and  accus.  f^r^       f^       f^RlffT. 

The  rest  as  the  masculine. 


gen. 

loc. 

voc. 


a.  Other  nouns  dechnable  on  the  above  models  are. 
Masculine.  Feminine.  Neuter. 


^r^:  a  horse 
»srT^RT^:  the  sky 
T^:  a  camel 
ofiTcji:  a  crow 
TTw:  a  quality 
^»^:  the  moon 
3^:  fever 
ir#:  reasoning 
^:  a  god 
VR:  virtue 
rT^:  a  nail 
tj^Tft  a  mountain 
TP[j^:  a  fish 
IT?:  sacrifice 

t::^:  flavour 

75^1^:  iron 
"^qfi:  a  crane 
'31J|lc5:  a  jackall 
f»*j^:  the  ocean 
^^:  the  hand 


•»il^'r|l  a  woman 
'm^fl  hope 
1[^T  wish 
^F^rr  a  girl 
3jHt  the  neck 
■^i^ofiT  moonhght 
tRT  decay 
TTRT  a  star 
^tc^  a  swing 
VRT  an  edge 
TfTHT  the  nose 
"qwr  worship 
wn^T  a  wife 
Jrr?5T  a  garland 
t:^  preserving 
c^Tiil  modesty 
^TTTT  a  lute 
-^fl^  beauty 
wn  an  assembly 
f^^  injury 


^n|5  an  egg 

wnnf  a  seat 

^^if  an  organ  of  sense 

Wc^  a  family 

n^  a  house 

"S^^  an  umbrella 

Wc4  water 

■fftt  a  shore 

5:^  pain 

■vnf  wealth 

T^jq  dancing 

■q^  a  leaf 

1^  a  root 

41m*  youtli 

t:^  blood 

TJ"^  salt 

^  a  wood 

^^  a  scripture 

^  a  rule 

f^  frost 


b.  Many  adjectives  and  participles  declinable  in  the  three 
genders  belong  to  this  class. 

c.  The  feminine  nouns  ^Sf^T,  ^iTT^  ^T^T,   signifying  chiefly 


DS5  DECLENSION. 

in  poetic  language  *  mother/  make  their  vocatives  ^rg,  ^T^, 
W^,  If  the  penultimate  be  not  a  conjunct  consonant^  other 
synonymes  follow  the  usual  form,  as  %  ^nPyi,  ^T^fT^^  ^f^TT, 
'  O  mother  ? 

56.  Besides  those  nouns  which  are  formed  from  masculine 
nouns  in  %  by  adding,  as  it  is  said,  the  feminine  ending  rPT, 
that  is,  W[p  there  are  nouns  derived  immediately  from  verbs 
ending  in  ^  as  tfT,  ?TT,  IJTT,  and  the  like,  in  which  the  final  ^rr 
is  an  essential,  not  an  accidental  letter.  Such  nouns  admit  of  a 
variety  of  gender.  The  declension  of  the  masculine  and  femi- 
nine noun  is  the  same.  In  the  neuter  the  final  is  made  short, 
and  the  word  is  declined  like  %"#. 

57.  Nouns  in  wr,  then,  in  which  the  final  is  a  radical  letter, 
combine  with  the  terminations  of  the  nominative  case,  and 
with  those  of  the  singular  and  dual  accusative,  agreeably  to 
the  laws  of  Sandhi.  In  the  accusative  plural  and  the  follow- 
ing cases  the  final  WT  is  cut  off  before  the  vowel  terminations, 
and  they  are  affixed  at  once  to  the  word,  as  if  it  ended  in  a 
consonant :  before  the  consonantal  terminations  there  is  no 
change;  as, 

Masc.  and  fem.  fV'^T  ^  all- preserving.^ 


nom. 

fw^T: 

fr^ 

fw^Ji^j: 

ace. 

f^T^iqf 

fw^^: 

instr. 

fTsg^TT 

fT'^trrwrf 

U^miCvt: 

dat. 

f^^^ 

f<T5fqT«T: 

abl. 

iwcr: 

gen. 
loc. 

iqf^fTT 

f^w^: 

fTsgnrr 

voc.  f^WTl  &c. 
So  T^t^m  '  who  drinks  the  soma  juice ;'  ^T^URT  '  a  shell-blower.' 
58.  The  word  ^T^T^  the  name  of  an  inferior  divinity,  a 
Gandharba,  is  considered  as  a  primitive,  and  is  inflected  there- 
fore throughout  without  any  elision  of  the  final,  which  com- 
bines with  the  vowel  terminations  agreeably  to  the  rules  of 
Sandhi,  and  is  consequently  in  every  way  regularly  declined. 


NOUNS  ENDING  IN  VOWELS.  SS 

—  ^T^:  or  ^TfT^ 


nom. 

^T^: 

ace. 

^T^ 

instr. 

ITfT 

dat. 

?lt 

abl. 

^i^t: 

gen. 

— 

loc. 

?T| 

voc. 

■^i^r  &c 

Class  II.    Nouns  ending  in  ^  and  "5". 

59.  Nouns  ending  in  these  two  vowels  may  be  conveni- 
ently classed  together,  as  they  are  analogously  inflected ;  recol- 
lecting only  that  the  semivowels  to  which  they  are  changeable 
before  other  vowels  are  respectively  i^  and  "5^. 

60.  In  the  masculine  gender  the  changes  of  the  base  are, 
the  substitution  of  the  long  vowel  for  the  final  in  the  dual  nom. 
and  accus.^  and  in  the  accus.  and  gen.  plural ;  the  Guiia  letter 
^  or  ^  is  substituted  for  the  final  before  ^nr,  T,  Tftr^  and  ^J^, 
and  in  the  vocative ;  and  the  final  is  dropped  before  the  termi- 
nation of  the  locative  case :  •?  is  inserted  before  the  termina- 
tions of  the  instrumental  case  singular  and  the  gen.  plural. 

61.  In  the  same  gender  the  dual  termination  ^is  rejected; 
J^  is  substituted  for  ^5  and  r^  for  the  ^  of  ^nT ;  the  vowel 
of  ^sr^  in  the  ablative  and  genitive  is  dropped ;  and  ^  is  sub- 
stituted for  fr ;  as  follows : 

'HDh  ^ fire.^  I  "^rg  ^ wind.^ 


nom.  ^hDh: 
ace.    ^fjif 

-m^m 

^nft  &c. 

^Tg«n 

'^i^^^: 

■   '    1 

instr.  ^uPhHT 
dat.    ^TTTR 
abl.    "^i 
gen.     — 
loc.     ^fpnft 
voc.    ^pr^  &c. 

"^m 

M  DECLENSION. 

62.  There  are  some  anomalies  in  nouns  in  i^.  Thus  ^d^, 
^  a  friend/  substitutes  ^  for  the  final  in  the  first  five  inflexions, 
and  inserts  t(  before  their  vowel  terminations.  In  the  other 
cases  of  the  singular,  and  in  the  gen.  and  loc.  dual,  it  is  more 
regular  than  ^rl^Tf,  the  final  ^  becoming  ly  before  a  vowel.  In 
the  abl.  and  gen.  singular  "TO  is  substituted  for  Tftr  and  TH. 

^^rfif  ^  a  friend.' 
nom.    ^T^T  ^r^TRt  14^1^: 

ace.  m^\il         —  ^r^«5r 

instr.  m$m  ^rf%«rf  ^rftffn: 

dat.  ^^  —  ^Frf%«r: 

abl.  ?T^r.  —  — 

gen.  —  "^r^:  m^Al 

loc.  ^IpmI  —  ^^rfi^ 

voc.  ^^  &c. 

a.  In  composition  this  word  may  be  inflected  regularly  in 
all  the  cases,  or  in  all  except  the  two  first ;  ^^rf^:  or  ^TO^T  ^  a 
good  friend ;'  W^n^  or  ^T^Tf^  ^  to  a  good  friend/  &c. 

b.  xrfff,  ^  a  master/  is  declined  like  "^rf^  in  the  five  last  cases 
singular ;   as,  xfiirr,  tf^,  ^1^:,  "^Ti^.      In  the  rest  like  ^rfrq-. 

xrfTT  in  composition  is  declined  like  ^srfrq' ;  as,  H^frT  ^  a  king,' 
(lord  of  the  earth,)  ^JxrfrT:  ^J^TTt  >JMri^:  ^MH^,  &c. 

63.  Feminine  nouns  in  ^  and  ■g'  differ  from  the  masculine 
in  the  accus.  plural,  and  in  the  third  and  following  cases  sin- 
gular. They  do  not  substitute  f|  for  the  Visarga  of  ^r^,  nor 
insert  •?  before  TT.  In  the  dative  and  following  cases  they 
have  two  forms,  one  like  the  masculine :  in  the  other  they 
insert  '^rr  before  the  affixes  of  the  dative,  ablative,  and  genitive 
cases ;  and,  like  feminine  nouns  in  WJ,  substitute  wnT  for  the 
sign  of  the  locative  f^ ;  as. 


Fem,  irfif  '  Mind.' 

nom.  nfw:  md  wfrm 

ace.    *ifff  —  »nft: 

instr.  fCFU  *rfwwn  flfwfH: 


^  ^  a  milch  cow.' 
^1  -  H: 


NOUNS   ENDING   IN   VOWELS. 


dat.  WK^  or  it's  TfTTwrf  5PTfw«i: 

abl.  vnt:  or  iTTrr:    —        — 

gen.     ^l^t  Hfdnf 

loc,  ?T1^orT?mT  —  ^rffTg 

VOC.  T»^  &c. 


V^or^ 
v»ft:  or  ^^?5rT: 


^or  v^ 


35 


64.  Neuter  nouns  in  ^  and  "3"  reject  the  terminations  of  the 
nom.  and  accus.  singular,  substitute  ^  and  ^  for  the  dual  and 
plural  terminations,  and  insert  ^  before  them  and  all  other 
terminations  beginning  with  a  vowel.  They  lengthen  the  final 
before  ^  in  the  plural. 


nom.)      f. 
ace.   j 

'  water.' 

JTW '  honey.' 

HWrf 

instr.   Trfw 
dat.      mH^M) 

abl.     4\rm: 

gen.       — 

mPciiri: 
t&c. 

loc.      mKUll 
VOC.     "^rft:  or  TP 

65.  There  are  a  few  neuter  nouns  in  ^  which  before  the 
vowel  terminations  of  all  the  cases  except  the  two  first,  and 
optionally  before  fr,  drop  the  final  vowel ;  as, 

^rf^  ^  a  bone.' 

ace.    ) 

instr,    ^^Hl  ^rfw^ 

dat.      ^rP(«T  — 

abl.       ^f^n:  — 

gen.        —  '^m^: 

loc.       ^i^fH  or  ^sr^rf^  — 

VOC.     ^rPw  &c. 
o.  ^^rf^  'an  eye,'  ^  'gbee,'  and  ^r^  'a  thigh,'  are  simi- 
larly declined :  the  fact  being,  in  all  probability,  that  as  nouns 

F   2 


S6 


DECLENSION. 


in  ^  they  are  defective,  and  their  deficiencies  are  supplied 
before  the  vowel  terminations  by  analogous  but  obsolete  nouns 
ending  in  r^,  as  'iJW*^,  ^T^^  ^^,  ^^^. 

b.    Other    nouns    in  ^   and  '3',   dechnable   on    the   above 
models,  are. 


Masc.  in  ^. 
^rftr:  a  sword 
"^f^  a  sage 
cfif^:  a  poet 
filfc:  a  mountain 
jrftir:  a  jewel 
TJ^:  the  sun 
TTfV*  a  ^^eap 
fM>T:  an  ordinance 
^kPvj:  a  charioteer 
^fb  a  name  of  Vishnu 


Fern,  in  i[. 

r:  agriculture 
■^if^:  patience 
Trfir:  going 
»nffr:  caste,  sort 
^:  light 
vfiT:  firmness 
ir^fH:  nature 
'^f^:  understanding 
"tTf:  rain 
^ijfifr:  remembrance 


Masc.  in  "l". 

^rrg:  fife 
f^l  sugar  cane 
^^:  a  season 
ij^  a  teacher 
"W^l  a  relation 
vrrj:  the  sun 
ijij:  death 
f^^[rr:  Vishnu 
^:  a  bambu 
"^W*  an  enemy 


c.  There  are  not  many  feminine  substantive  nouns  in  "3",  and 
but  few  neuter  either  in  ^  or  "g^.  Adjectives  of  course,  or 
substantives  used  attributively,  may,  with  few  exceptions,  be 
declined  in  three  genders. 

d.  When  a  noun  in  ^  or  T,  whether  substantive  or  attri- 
butive, is  used  in  the  neuter  gender  in  the  same  sense  in 
which  it  is  employed  in  the  masculine,  it  is  optionally  declin- 
able in  all  cases  of  which  the  terminations  begin  with  vowels, 
except  the  two  first,  either  after  the  masculine  or  neuter  form ; 
as  wrrf^  ^ eternal:^  neuter  nom.  and  ace.  ^r«TTf^>  -^NHlH^tfl, 
^^HltflPH;  instr.  ^hiP^ht;  dat.  ^RT^  or  WTri^;  abl.  and  gen. 
^SRT^:  or  "^HiHi^h:;  loc.  W»TT^  or  ^Rlf^f^;  gen.  and  loc.  dual, 
^"Trfrert:  or  ^HlH^rfi: .  If  the  sense  differs,  the  neuter  form  only 
is  admissible :  xfhj  masc.  '  a  kind  of  tree ;'  neut.  '  the  fruit  of 
the  Pilu  tree :'  dat.  Tfhj^,  abl.  and  gen.  iO<^h:,  loc.  tfhgf^,  &c. 

e.  Other  neuter  nouns  in  i[  and  T  are  derived  from  nouns 
terminating  in  the  long  vowels  ^  and  "31. 


NOUNS  ENDING  IN  VOWELS. 


37 


Class  III.    Nouns  ending  in  ^  and  m 

66.  The  chief  peculiarity  affecting  the  inflective  base,  or 
the  word  itself,  in  nouns  terminating  in  ^  and  "31,  regards  the 
substitution  in  some  cases  of  the  syllables  ^  and  "^^  for  the 
finals  f  and  "31  before  those  inflective  terminations  which  begin 
with  vowels.  When  these  syllables  are  substituted,  the  nouns 
are  inflected  before  the  vowel  terminations  as  if  they  ended 
with  the  semivowels  "^jr  and  ^.  When  those  syllables  are  not 
substituted,  the  final  vowels  combine  with  the  vowels  of  the 
terminations,  agreeably  to  the  laws  of  Sandhi,  with  very  few 
exceptions. 

67.  After  the  syllables  ^  and  T^  the  inflective  termina- 
tions undergo  no  changes;  after  the  finals  ^  and  "31  they 
undergo  a  few,  chiefly  afler  feminine  nouns,  analogous  to  those 
already  observable  in  feminine  nouns  of  the  preceding  classes, 
and  depending  on  the  same  conditions. 

68.  ^  and  "^  are  severally  substituted  for  the  final  ^  and 
"gi  of  masculine  nouns,  when  they  are  monosyllabic  verbal 
derivatives,  or  when  the  finals  are  preceded  by  a  conjunct  con- 
sonant ;  as,  \h  (for  "^)  ^  to  think,'  cj  ^  to  cut,'  ^  '  to  serve.' 


Masc.  ift  ^ 

who  understands.' 

Mas< 

nom.  "^ 

fV^ 

f^: 

W- 

ace.     "ftR 

— 

fvR: 

w 

instr.  fVnn 

>fh^ 

v^t: 

,^m 

dat.    fVj^ 

>ft«i: 

# 

abl.     fxR: 

— 

— 

^■. 

gen.    — 

f^nft: 

fw 

loc.    fVrftT 

— 

^ 

^ 

voc.    vh  &c. 

^&c 

Masc.  T^  ^  who  cuts.' 


"^ 


^«n 


<5^:  <5^ 


a.  Nouns  of  this  description  are  not  considered  as  ceasing 
to  be  monosyllabic  by  having  particles  prefixed  to  them,  which 
merely  qualify  their  application ;  therefore  "mfh  ^  a  man  of  good 
understanding,'  "qr^n^  '  a  man  of  excellent  understanding,'  and 
the  like,  substitute  ^^  for  the  final;  ^>ft:,  ^fv^,  ^fVnr:.     So 


DECLENSION. 


^^rpw:  ^  self-existent/  from  ^if  ^  self/  and  ^ '  being/  a  name  of 
Brahma,  makes  ^7T»t:,  ^xjwj^t,  ^rrp^T^:. 

b.  They  are  considered  as  polysyllabic  if  derived  from  a  com- 
pound verb,  as  inyt  ^  a  man  of  superior  understanding/  which 
is  a  derivative,  not  from  the  simple  verb  ^,  but  the  compound 
verb  inft  and  therefore  is  decHned  irift:,  "R"^,  Tfm:,  &c.,  the  final 
becoming  i^  before  a  vowel,  by  rule  4 :  and  they  are  also  con- 
sidered as  polysyllabic  if  the  first  member  of  the  compound  is 
a  subordinate  term,  or  one  not  in  opposition,  as  ^tpft  ^  born 
in  the  rains,^  ^  a  frog/  There  are  also  certain  compounds  of 
H^  which  are  by  special  rule  excepted  from  substituting  T^ ; 
as,  'J'T'^  '  born  again,^  ^^ '  a  snake/  oRTTPJ^  ^  born  in  a  prison/ 
cRC^  ^  produced  from  the  hand :'  these  are  all  declined,  as  "^tpg, 
^frvft,  ^T«^:,  ^tTV#,  &c. 

69.  Masculine  nouns  ending  in  ^  or  "gi,  when  consisting  of 
more  than  one  syllable  in  consequence  of  being  compounded 
with  another  noun  as  a  subordinate  term,  or  being  derived 
from  a  modification  of  the  verb,  merely  follow  the  rules  of 
combination ;  that  is,  f  becomes  t{^,  and  "31,  "^j  before  a  vowel 
affix. 


^HUl  ^a  genera?  (from 

t^  'an 

i^c5^^  a  sweeper' 

(Wc5'a 

army,^  and  »ft  ^  who  leads.' 

place/  ^c"^^  who  cleans'). 

nom.    ^r||rfl: 

«*1l»*4l 

JH*ii»*{; 

Wf^u:     kic6^ 

<«irt»«i; 

ucc.      ^^T»l 

w^T«ft«rr 

i^^Ui           — 

^i^c5y^: 

insLr,  i^HMI 
1  1      ^.— .^. 

i^HlfflPH: 

ls(f6MI     <4c*51^»^i 

<lat.     ^vfirM 

- 

<«rc*ki       — 

;sic*M**i: 

abl.     iHI.*^: 

%«rRft: 

^  ,     ♦ 

IpIc^M:        — 

— 

gen.       — 

—      i^ioiufi: 

^?lc4MI 

loc      mMI 

&c. 

^^r?5^:  &c. 

"^^^"i^ 

a.  "5(t,  '  to  lead/  and  its  compounds  substitute  ^TT^^  for  fr  in 
the  locative. 

b.  tnft  '  who  drinks  (moisture)/  i.  e.  the  sun,  derived  from 
m  '  to  drink  /  imt  '  a  road,'  from  irr '  to  go  /  ^nTOJft  ^  an  ante- 


NOUNS  BNDING  IN  VOWELS.  39 

lope/  from  ^TiT  ^  the  wind'  and  ipft  '  who  outstrips  ;'  and  n;  a 
demigod  so  named ;  differ  from  JiHI«fl  in  three  cases : 
ace.  sing,  tpft*  ace.  plur.  'qtfh»(  loc.  sing,  irft 

—  inft*  —      m\\A^  —      Tnft 

—  ff  —      ff^  —      f ^ 
They  may,  however,  be  also  regularly  declined  in  these  cases, 
as  "qw,  -qTin,  xrfoT,  &c. 

c.  fg^  in  composition,  as  tj^  ^  who  cuts  barley,'  makes 
either  ^r^^  or  imt^Hf  in  the  gen.  plur.,  and  i\^^\  in  the  loc. 
singular. 

70.  Feminine  nouns  in  ^  and  "31,  like  mascuHne  nouns,  are 
dechned  in  two  ways :  if  they  are  monosyllables,  or  contain  a 
conjunct  consonant,  they  substitute  ^  and  T^  for  their  finals ; 
if  polysyllabic,  they  change  the  finals,  agreeably  to  the  laws 
of  Sandhi,  to  ^  and  "^  before  the  affixes  commencing  with 
vowels. 

71.  Feminine  nouns  of  the  first  description  optionally  prefix 
wr  to  the  affixes  marked  by  a  mute  "3?,  like  feminine  nouns  in 
the  short  ^  and  "g". 

72.  They  optionally  prefix  t^  to  ^STR^  in  the  gen.  plural,  and 
substitute  ^ariH  for  fl?  in  the  loc.  singular ;  as,  "^  ^  prosperity,' 
and  ^  '  the  earth.' 


nom."^  Oftj^Tl  f^snn 

ace.   f^nf  —  — 

instr.fTjRT  "^fh^f  "^ftfir: 

dat.   f^JRorlV^     —  "^i^: 
abl.  f^jRtorl^snrr:  —     — 

gen.      f^^  Oil  ij  for  5*01111* 

loc.    fW^Torl^f    —  "^(^5 
voc.  "^t  &c. 


>j^ 

^orWl     —   >t«t: 
>p:or>j^T:  —    ■ — 


^or>T^    —    «| 

^:  &c. 

73.  Feminuie  nouns  of  the  second  description,  having  more 
than  one  syllable,  and  being  derivative  nouns  from  masculine 
nouns  by  the  substitution  of  the  terminations  ^  and  -gr  for  the 
masculine   final,  insert  ^TT  before  the   terminations  having  a 


40 


DECLENSION. 


mute  1?,  make  the  vowel  short  in  the  voc.  singular^  and  prefix 
•T  to  the  termination  of  the  gen.  plural. 

The  ^  of  the  nominative  is  rejected  after  such  nouns  in  ^, 
but  not  after  "31.  After  both,  Ti(^  is  substituted  for  ^sn^,  TT  for 
the  ^snr  of  ^r^,  and  ^rn^  for  fr ;  as. 


^ 

^  a  river.^ 

^^^  a  wife.' 

nom. 

^ 

^ 

^fra: 

^:         ^i^ 

^«r: 

ace. 

•fsfi' 

— 

^: 

^          - 

^: 

instr 

^rar 

^T^twn 

^^■^^5?: 

^vsn        i^rwqf 

^vfir. 

dat. 

^ 

— 

^T^: 

^^:         — 

^«i: 

abl. 

^rarr: 

«T^: 

— 

• 

gen. 

-~~" 

^^ 

loc. 

^raf 

•T^S 

^5^              — 

^?i 

voc. 

irf^&c. 

^&c. 

a.  The  rejection  of  ;^  after  a  feminine  noun  ending  in  ^ 
depends  upon  that  "^  being  the  feminine  termination,  or  sign 
of  the  feminine  gender.  If  it  is  part  of  the  word  itself,  the 
sibilant  becomes  Visarga,  as  usual ;  as,  cJ^:  '  the  goddess 
Lakshmi,'  in^fh  *  a  lute,'  ird:  ^  a  boat.' 

b,  T^,  '  a  woman,'  is  inflected  in  the  nom.  and  voc.  like  "q^, 

and  optionally  so  in  the  accus.   singular  and  plural:   in  the 

other  cases  like  ^.     But  the  insertion  of  rf  before  the  gen. 

plural,  and  of  ^frr  before  the  terminations  with  a  mute  T,  and 

the  substitution  of  wr^  for  fr  are  absolute,  not  optional  as 

in  y^, 

nom.  ^  %^ 

ace.  f^^  or  ;^*  — 

instr.  f^pn  W^ 

dat.  %|^  — 

abl.  r^^li:  — 

gen.      —  %nfti 

loc.  "fiE^nn  — 

voc.  f^  &c. 

*  Wilkins  has  ^fW  or  (tp|Mi,  but  the  Kaumudi  expressly  excepts 
^  from  the  alternative. 


-^pR:  or  ^: 
^1 


NOUNS  ENDING   IN  VOWELS.  41 

c.  Feminine  nouns  in  ^  and  ^  when  compounded  so  as  to 
form  attributes,  are  to  be  declined  like  nouns  masculine,  when 
used  in  the  sense  of  a  mascuhne  noun,  as  TT^,  '  a  prosperous 
man/  takes,  in  the  dative,  ablative,  genitive,  and  locative  cases, 
only  one  form,  viz.  WpJj^,  ^ftsRt^  and  ^f^rf^T.  If  the  compound 
is  only  a  qualification  of  the  substantive,  the  feminine  form 
may  be  followed,  as  ^fnsft, '  good  fortune,'  makes  ttPjr  or  ^Hfti^, 
&c.  If  the  noun  is  a  word  invariably  feminine,  it  retains  its 
feminine  terminations,  although  used  as  an  attribute  of  a  male, 
as   «jg^^^,  '  a  man  of  many  good  quaUties,'  makes   «i|^i|iS, 

d.  Feminine  nouns  formed  from  verbal  roots,  and  com- 
pounded with  subordinate  terms,  however,  when  used  in  a 
sense  analogous  to  that  of  the  masculine,  take  exactly  the 
same  form,  as  iiiHilD  ^  a  female  head  of  a  village,'  ^c6^  '  a 
female  sweeper,'  make,  accus.  sin.  and  plur.  i|iHil4,  iflHluc, 
^rtM,  i«Ic*m:  ;  dat.  yiH^,  ^^TJ^ ;  abl.  and  gen.  ijiHd^:,  i«(c4M:  ; 
gen.  plur.  i|lHlWI,  lsl<4Mf;  loc.  ijmiWI  (see  rule  69.  a.),  ^ciPM; 
voc.  iiiH^fl:,  ^^y^. 

e.  So  "5^  ^  twice-being,'  if  it  be  appUed  to  man  or  woman 
indifferently,  is  declined  in  the  same  manner ;  mf.  "J-T^",  "5^T^:> 
^jfTftt ;  but  if  it  mean  '  a  woman  twice  married,'  it  is  dechned 
Hke  Tf}  ^^,  g^T^tr:,  &c. 

/.  The  object  of  these  rules,  and  of  others  affecting  nouns 
ending  in  ^  and  'm,  is  to  intimate  that  a  word  which  may  be 
applied  to  an  object  either  male  or  female  is  dechned  in  a 
form  common  to  both;  that  is,  with  the  mascuhne  termina- 
tions :  when  it  is  hmited  to  a  distinct  female  object,  it  is 
dechnable  only  with  the  feminine  terminations,  as  in  the  in- 
stance of  "jqil.  So  also  ^ftr^  for  instance,  being  ^  a  male'  or 
*  female  frog,'  is  declined  alike,  ^T^,  -v^,  -f^,  -h:  ;  but  the 
same  word  being  the  name  of  a  plant,  in  which  sense  there 
is  no  male,  is  dechned  only,  ^tp^,  ^tr*^:,  ^tr^,  ^tpj. 

74.  Nouns  in  ^  and  "31  which  are  susceptible  of  the  neuter 
gender,  substitute  the  short  vowels  ^  and  T  for  their  finals. 

G 


{ 


iliHfiii  irm%^t  ifiHiinfVr 


42  DECLENSION. 

If  the  word  is  an  attributive,  and  the  sense  of  the  neuter  is 
analogous  to  that  of  the  other  genders,  the  word  is  dechned  in 
all  the  cases  of  which  the  affixes  begin  with  vowels,  except  the 
two  first,  optionally,  as  if  it  were  a  noun  ending  in  ^  long ; 
that  is,  the  final  becomes  i^  or  "^  before  the  vowel :  otherwise 
IT  is  inserted,  as  after  "^nft.  Thus  yjTTOt  ^who  leads  or  is 
chief  over  a  village  f  yiH^ult  WRRU:  '  a  head  man.  Brahman ;' 
illH^n  '^TSRlfl' '  a  Brahman  woman  head  of  a  village  f  iUHPill  "^ 
*  a  family,  chief  over  a  village/     The  inflexion  of  the  latter  is, 

nom. 

ace. 

instr.     ij^lWloriimPlUHl  ijlHPiH^rf  ?I1H  fill  f^T. 

dat.      jjinm  or  ijiH^ii^  —  qwfiir«r: 

abl.       illHim*  or  'JJTFrftjr«Tt  — -  — 

gen.  ijmiKfltorifiHriUHi:        uiHunni 

loc.      ii\Hm\  fTTHriir^ 

a.  Nouns  ending  in  ^  and  "31  as  derived  from  simple  verbal 
roots  are  not  numerous,  the  roots  not  being  in  any  number; 
but  they  admit  of  being  multiplied  as  compounded  with  other 
words.  Feminine  nouns  formed  by  the  affixes  ^  and  "gs,  and 
especially  the  former,  are  more  frequent. 

T^l  m.  a  leader,  a  guide.  "ffffPT:  m.  a  surety. 

*H\(\  f.  a  damsel.  ^i|:  f.  an  army. 

"^fjj^  f.  the  earth.  >|:  f.  the  eyebrow. 

hDthI  f«  a  sister.  "^g^  f.  a  mother-in-law. 

r^qitfl  f.  a  shop.  '^  f.  a  woman  with  good  eyebrows. 

Class  IV.    Nouns  in  "^  and  '^,  "^  and  T^. 

75.  Mascuhne  nouns  in  ^  substitute  ^  for  the  final,  and, 
according  to  the  analogy  of  nouns  in  ^n|,  form  the  nominative 
in  "m ;  as,  fV^  ^  a  father,'  nom.  fqiTT. 

76.  In  one  class  of  nouns  in  "^,  ^,  in  another  ^n^,  is 
substituted  for  the  final  before  the  vowel  terminations  of  the 
nominative  dual  and  plural,  and  of  the  accusative  sing,  and 
dual.      Before  the  accus.  and  gen.  plur.  the  vowel  is  made 


NOUNS  ENDING   IN   VOWELS.  43 

long.  ^  is  inserted  before  ^sn^.  Before  the  vowel  termina- 
tions of  the  instr.  and  dat.  singular,  and  gen.  and  loc.  dual, 
^  is  changed  to  the  semivowel  ^:  it  is  changed  to  ^n:  in  the 
locative  and  vocative  cases. 

77.  The  only  changes  in  the  affixes  are,  the  rejection  of  TT 
in  the  nominative ;  the  substitution  of  ^  for  ^  in  the  accus. 
plural,  and  of  ^  for  w  in  the  abl.  and  gen.  singular ;  ;ff  is 
rejected;  and  the  ^  of  "5^  is  prefixed  to  the  semivowel  jl, 
which  as  a  final  is  changed  to  Visarga. 


ftr^  *  a  father.' 

nom.  fqWT  PMriQ  PMriU 

ace.     fxnft  —  ^^^T\ 

instr.  fq^  f^t^  f^l[fvn 

dat.    fg^  —  fqnrw?: 

abl.     fiT^  —  — 

gen.     —  fxT^:  fqr^* 

loc.    fwfr:        —  PMijg 
voc.  ftnr*  Sec. 


■^  ^  a  doer. 

^T        ^«rt        "5jr|fH: 
^         —  — 

^:&c. 


a.  Most  masculine  nouns  implying  affinity  are  declined  like 
fm^ ;  as,  >?T^  ^  a  brother,'  vflHIiJ  ^  a  son-in-law,'  ^  ^  a  husband's 
brother :'  but  ^,  ^  a  grandson,'  makes  Tnrr,  HHlO,  "^TfrTC^  ^TTTR, 
HHlCl^  in  the  first  five  inflexions. 

b.  Feminine  nouns  of  affinity  are  declined  also  like  f^l^, 
except  in  the  accus.  plural;  as  HTIJ,  'a  mother,'  makes  »rnrr, 
HIdQ,  HlriC  ^TTrlT,  HIrtO,  TTTT:  ;  SO  ^f^J  ^  a  daughter :'  but  ^T|, 
^  a  sister/  is  dechned  hke  "qrrr ;  ^^WT,  *^yi9,  &c. ;  ace.  plural, 
^:. 

c.  ^,  ^a  man,'  is  declined  Hke  fxr^,  except  in  the  gen. 
plural,  where  the  vowel  is  optionally  short,  as  ^Tnf  or  ^nnrf. 

d.  Nouns  formed  from  roots  by  the  addition  of  the  particles 
"5^  or  ^  (in  which  the  finals  are  used  merely  to  distinguish 
them  from  each  other)  are  nouns  of  agency,  and  are  declined 
like  o|f#.     They  are  also  decUnable  in  three  genders. 

e.  The  feminine  is  formed  with  the  affix  ^,  before  which 

G  2, 


44  DECLENSION. 

the  semivowel  ^  is  substituted  for  ^ :  thus  oR#  becomes  oR^ 
in  the  feminine,  and  ofi^  is  declined  like  tT^. 

y.  The  neuter  is  formed  analogously  to  neuter  nouns  in  ^ 
and  ^;  and  as  there  are  no  substantive  neuter  nouns  in  ^^ 
the  neuter  of  attributives  being  mostly  usable  in  the  same 
sense  as  the  masculine,  then  by  a  similar  analogy  the  neuter 
nouns  in  ^  admit  also  of  two  forms  before  the  vowel  termina- 
tions of  all  the  cases  except  the  two  first ;  either  inserting  7f 
before  them,  or  taking  the  same  form  as  the  masculine : 
thus,  nom.  and  accus.  "Sfi^,  oh^iiO,  oh^^fill ;  sing,  instr.  oh-^mi  or 
oR^;  dat.  ^3jf|%  or  -^^'y  abl.  and  gen.  "SR^:  or  "SR^ ;  loc.  ^5r^% 
or  "^fr:;  gen.  and  loc.  dual,  ch^iifl:  or  oR|ft:.  Before  the  other 
terminations  the  forms  are  the  same  as  in  the  masculine. 

g.  "#f ,  '  a  jackay  has  lost  some  of  its  cases,  and  they  are 
in  part  supplied  by  the  inflexions  of  "^tj,  which  are  those  of 
nouns  in  T.     Some  of  the  cases  belong  to  both  nouns. 


nom. 

^StFT 

"^tKld 

-*lBIU 

ace. 

^Rhnt 



'^^x 

instr 

.  #FTor 

^%5n 

^tjvm 

•%f5T: 

dat. 

"?Kt^  or 

^t^ 

— 

'5Rlf»»j: 

abl. 

*1§:  or 

"^t^t: 

o'A'n 

^rf.or 

^ttjk 

^n^ 

gen. 

— "" 

lor 

^^t^oi 

"  "^rei 

*i§3 

J.UL/. 

""" 

voc. 

^tr.  or 

^^tFt  &c. 

h.  To  the  preceding  examples  of  nouns  in  ^  may  be  added 
'^^f  ^  a  man  of  the  military  caste ;'  %rr  m.  ^  a  conqueror,^  or 
mfn.  ^  victorious ;^  ^T^  m.  ^a  donor,^  or  mfn.  ^liberal;'  VT^  m. 
a  creator;'  mfn.  ^cherishing;'  '^ts  ^a  warrior,'  mfn.  ^war- 
like f  and  ^"^  m.  ^a  priest.' 

78.  There  are  a  few  roots  ending  in  "^  from  which  verbal 
nouns  may  be  formed;  as,  from  "^,  ^scatter,'  comes  "f  ^who 
or  what  scatters.'  These  are  usually  inflected  by  substituting 
^  for  the  radical ;  agreeably  to  which,  "^  becomes  f^,  and  is 
then  dechned  like  nouns  ending  in  t:;  as  f^:,  nom.  ^,  f^,  f^:. 


NOUNS  ENDING  IN  VOWELS.  45 

&c.  If  this  change  does  not  take  place,  the  noun  is  regularly- 
declined,  substituting  the  semivowel  ^  before  the  vowel  ter- 
minations ;  as  ^  ^  who  injures ;'  nom.  Y*9  ^^  ^}  &c.  These 
forms  are  of  rare  occurrence. 

79.  The  same  may  be  said,  with  still  greater  truth,  of 
nouns  ending  in  "^  and  o^;  but  grammarians  admit  the  possi- 
bility of  their  occurrence :  thus  iT*(j,  the  root  tt'^  ^  to  go,^  with 
the  affix  oj,  may  be  declined  analogously  to  nouns  ending  in 
^;  as  iTTT,  71?^^,  7T?|^:.  In  the  ablative  and  genitive  "3"  is 
substituted  for  the  ^  of  w^,  and  prefixed  to  the  final  semi- 
vowel ;  ^  is  rejected,  as  being  the  last  member  of  a  conjunct 
consonant :  the  form  is  therefore  T^.  This  is  of  little  prac- 
tical value. 

Class  V.    Nouns  in  ^. 

80.  There  are  no  simple  nouns  ending  in  ^,  but  compounds 
are  exhibited  to  illustrate  the  declension  of  nouns  so  terminat- 
ing ;  as  %,  which  is  compounded  of  ^,  '  with,^  and  ^,  *  love  f 
^one  who  loves.'  The  declension  is  regular,  except  in  the 
abl.  and  gen.  singular,  where  the  initial  of  ^RT  is  rejected ;  as, 
sing.  nom.  ir:,  ace.  w^,  instr.  w^T,  dat.  ^,  abl.  and  gen.  ^, 
loc.  ^rftr ;  dual  nom.  and  ace.  ^^,  instr.  dat.  and  abl.  %wrf,  gen. 
and  loc.  ^fnfh ;  plural  nom.  and  ace.  ^nn,  instr.  %fW:,  dat.  and 
abl.  ^:,  gen.  ^nrr,  loc.  ^. 

Class  VI.    Nouns  in  ^. 

81.  Nouns  ending  in  ^  are  declined  regularly,  the  termi- 
nations are  unchanged;  the  inflective  base  substitutes  ^STT  for 
its  final  before  the  consonantal  terminations,  and  is  changed 
to  ^rr^,  agreeably  to  the  laws  of  Sandhi,  before  the  vowels; 
as  ^  mf.,  ^  wealth,'  makes 

nom.  TJI  TIRi  TXm 

ace.     -CR  —  T!RI 

instr.  tPn  tT«rf  TjfWt 

dat.     Tl^  —  tT«n 


40 


DECLENSION. 

abl. 

Txm          tT«n 

tT«i: 

gen. 

i,l<4li 

TPTT 

loc. 

TTfT               — 

^ 

82.  The  neuter  of  nouns  in  ^  is  formed  by  changing  the 
final  before  the  vowel  terminations  to  ^5  and  inflecting  it  like 
neuters  in  ^.  Before  the  consonants^  "m  is  substituted  for  the 
final;  as  ift  ^ wealthy;^  n.  TTft;  sing.  nom.  and  ace.  vftf  instr. 
Tfftm,  dat.  Trfr^j  abl.  and  gen.  irfw:,  loc.  Trftftr;  dual  nom. 
and  ace.  uMi,  instr.  dat.  and  abl.  THTwrf,  gen.  and  loc.  irlwh ; 
plural  nom.  and  ace.  nOP^I^  instr.  injfW:,  dat.  and  abl.  Tnr^K, 
gen.  TifOTfj  loc.  ITCTg* 

«.  Some  grammarians  affirm,  that  when  it  is  used  attri- 
butively, a  neuter  noun  ending  in  ^,  like  those  ending  in  ^  or 
T  &c.  (see  rule  74),  may  take  also  the  mascuhne  form  before 
the  vowel  terminations  zi  &c.,  as  i\  ClM  I  or  im^;  but  this  is 
denied  by  the  best  authorities. 

Class  VII.    Nouns  in  ^. 

83.  Nouns  in  ^,  both  masculine  and  feminine,  substitute 
the  Vriddhi  letter  ^  for  the  final  before  the  three  terminations 
of  the  nominative  case  and  that  of  the  accusative  dual.  They 
substitute  W[  for  the  final  before  the  terminations  of  the  accu- 
sative singular  and  pliu-al.  Before  the  other  vowel  termina- 
tions ^  becomes  ^  by  rule  of  Sandhi  5,  except  before  irftr 
and  T^,  which  reject  their  initial  w,  and  consequently  the 
final  is  unchanged. 


ift 

^  a  cow.' 

nom.  xft: 

'U«?l 

tr: 

ace.    ITT 

— 

nr: 

instr.  i^T 

ift«n 

ifrfW: 

dat.    11^ 

...^ 

nt»r: 

abl.     nh 

— 

— 

gen.    jft: 

n^: 

TT^J 

loc.     vfw 

— 

^ 

NOUNS  ENDING  IN   CONSONANTS.  47 

84.  In  the  neuter  the  final  is  changed  to  T,  as  iniii|  i^ 

'  pasture  near  the  cow ;'  which  is  dechned  hke  neuters  in  T. 

a.  Here  also  authorities  differ  as  to  the  alternative  of  inflect- 
ing the  neuter  optionally  as  the  masculine  in  the  instrumental 
and  other  cases  singular,  Tq^pTT  or  "^xpT^T  &c. :  the  former  is 
to  be  preferred. 

Class  VIII.    Nouns  in  ^. 

85.  Nouns  in  ^,  masculine  and  feminine,  are  strictly  regu- 
lar, as  in  the  example  already  given  of  tft  ^  navis/  ^  a  boat.' 
In  the  neuter  the  final  becomes  "3" ;  as  ^rffl^  «r?J  '  the  water, 
beyond  the  boat  f  ^uPri^  ^^Pri^Ht,  wfrnrfrr,  &c. 

a.  The  nouns  that  end  in  diphthongs  are  not  numerous. 
To  the  preceding  may  be  added  ^  mf.  ^heaven/  and  ^  m. 
'the  moon.' 

SECTION  II. 

Nouns  ending  in  consonants. 

86.  Nouns  ending  in  consonants  may  also  be  conveniently 
arranged  according  to  the  classification  of  the  letters  by  analogy 
of  articulation ;  distinguishing  those  ending  with  the  nasals, 
semivowels,  sibilants,  and  with  ^,  as  constituting  separate 
classes. 

87.  Nouns  ending  in  consonants  modify  their  finals  before 
the  inflectional  terminations,  agreeably  to  the  rules  of  Sandhi : 
thus  a  hard  consonant  is  optionally  changed  to  a  soft  when 
it  is  final,  that  is,  in  the  nominative  singular :  absolutely, 
before  the  termuiations  of  the  dual  and  plural  beginning  with 
>T.  A  soft  consonant  must  be  changed  to  a  hard  consonant 
before  ^. 

88.  Whatever  other  special  modifications  the  inflective  base 
may  undergo,  they  are,  with  a  few  exceptions,  confined  to  the 
first  five  inflections;  that  is,  to  the  nominative  in  the  three 
numbers,  and  the  accusative  in  the  singular  and  the  dual. 
Whatever  form  the  word  assume  before  the  termination  of  the 


48  DECLENSION. 

accusative  plural,  is  preserved  before  all  subsequent  termina- 
tions beginning  with  vowels. 

89.  The  inflectional  terminations  are  attached  unchanged  to 
the  final  consonant  of  the  base :  the  only  seeming  irregularity 
is  the  rejection  of  ^  as  the  termination  of  the  nominative  sin- 
gular; but  this  is  the  result  of  the  rule,  that  of  a  final  con- 
junct consonant  the  last  member  shall  be  rejected.  (See 
rule  ^S') 

90.  As  the  inflectional  terminations  are  unchanged,  there  is 
of  course  but  one  form  for  both  masculine  and  feminine  nouns. 
In  the  neuter  gender  the  terminations  of  the  two  first  cases 
dual  and  plural  are  changed  to  ^  and  ^5  and  •?  is  prefixed  to 
the  latter. 

Class  I.    Nouns  ending  in  the  gutturals  ^,  w,  tt,  '^. 

91.  There  is  no  peculiarity  in  the  declension  of  these  nouns  ; 
their  inflexion  is  conformable  to  the  rules  of  Sandhi.  The  final 
of  the  nominative  may  be  either  of  the  unaspirated  letters,  0^  or 
i^ :  thus  ^rS"^,  ^  omnipotent/  makes  f(|^|a(i  or  ^rf^^ ;  and 
"Nwft??^,  ^  a  painter,^  makes  also  f^wfcTs^  or  fq^fcT'^.  Before 
the  vowels  the  termination  of  the  base  is  unchanged,  as  ^l^iojit; 
r^c^fcM^.  Before  H  the  final  must  be  the  unaspirated  sofl 
consonant,  ^rf^F^rf,  fs^^f^yrwrf.  Before  the  ^  of  ^  the  un- 
aspirated hard  consonant  must  be  placed,  v|^(aR  ^,  "N^rfcJ^  ^> 
or  the  sibilant  being  changeable  after  a  guttural  to  %  the  form 
may  be  ^Sl^  ^  or  in  the  compound  letter,  ^§^|v^. 

In  the  neuter,  the  nominative  and  accusative  forms  are, 
TRt^  or  i|;  *tS5l*1  ^t^ 

r^g^Pc^^  or  1^  P^dPc^WI  f^^ffjyff 

Class  II.    Nouns  ending  in  the  palatals  %  "%  *r^  )fB^. 

92.  Nouns  ending  in  a  palatal  commonly  substitute  oR  for  the 
final  before  the  inflectional  terminations  beginning  with  con- 
sonants ;  which  again  is  subject  to  the  usual  euphonic  changes. 


NOUNS   ENDING  IN  CONSONANTS. 


49 


TT^ 

^  speech 

> 

^"^  ^  who  eats 

> 

nom.  ^^or^TPT 

m^ 

^T^: 

^x< 

,v^ 

^ 

>F: 

ace.    tN 

— 

— 

^^* 

— 

instr.  c(TMi 

TF«rf 

^Tfnr: 

^^ 

wm^ 

Hfhr. 

dat.    "^r^ 

— 

tf«t: 

^ 

. — 

>jr«T: 

abl.    ^T^, 

— 

— 

>F: 

— 

— 

gen. 

WT^: 

m^f 

>pT>: 

^ 

loe.     ^f% 

^T^orciii^ 

HftT 

— 

^ 

voc.    "^TSR 

&e. 

^' 

&c. 

n. 

m^  or  ^7^ 

^Ht 
^ 

93.  There  are  several  anoinahes  in  this  class,  as  regarding, 
not  the  inflectional  terminations,  but  the  inflective  base. 

a.  Derivatives  from  the  roots  W5^  ^cut/  >j^w^  ^fiy/  ^^ 
^  create/  ^  '  rub/  Tj»f  ^  worship,^  TT5^  '  shine/  >JTif  ^  shine/  ^W 
^go/  substitute  "^  for  their  final  in  the  nom.  sing.,  and  before 
the  terminations  beginning  with  H  and  ^;  that  is,  they  are 
declined  hke  nouns  ending  in  "^,  which  in  those  cases  substi- 
tute z  before  a  hard,  and  "?  before  a  soft  consonant. 

b,  >J^  is  further  changed  to  >p^,  ^  who  fries,^  before  the 
terminations  beginning  with  consonants;  and  to  >J^  before 
those  beginning  with  vowels. 


nom.  >T^  or  >|^ 
ace.     >J^ 
instr.  >ji5rr 
dat.     >|^ 
abl.    >p5r: 
gen.    — 
loc.    >jf^ 


>IT«JT 


HWt: 


c.  So  "^^j  ^  who  cuts/  makes,  ^  or  '^^  ^^^  ^^^^ 
'fTwrf,  "^7^.  n=(  m^^,  '  creator  of  the  universe,^  makes,  nom. 
sing.  r^Hl^^  or  -w^,  nom.  dual  f^ng^[^,  nom.  ace.  plur. 
fr^^:,   instr.  dual  f%ig^^«rf,  loc.  plur.   fcfvj4j<^^;    but  F^, 


50  DECLENSION. 

a  garland/  derived  from  the  same  root^  makes,  nom.  w^  or 
Wl,  W^)  WW»;    instr.  dual  W^,  loc.  plur.  H"*^;    and  ^T^, 

*  blood/  is  differently  inflected,  as  will  be  noticed  below. 
VftjMa^',  ^who  cleanses/  makes,  nom.  sing.  "Tft^  or  -^,  nom. 
dual  -H^,  instr.  dual  -^^L  &c.  ^"3^,  *  a  worshipper  of  the 
gods/  makes,  ^7  or  ^"^j  nom.  dual  ^^^,  instr.  dual  ^^^wrf, 
&c. ;  but  "^5fr«r^5  ^  a  ministering  priest,'  which  is  also  derived 
from  W, '  to  worship,'  is  regular ;  nom.  sing,  '^r^  or  ^Ph^j 
nom.  dual  ^^Ph^,  instr.  dual  "^f^rwrf^  &c.  tr^i^,  ^a  ruler/ 
makes,  nom.  sing,  tt^  or  tTT,  nom.  dual  TI^,  instr.  dual  TTT«rf ; 
but  P^vyU'^5  ^  a  universal  ruler,'  has  this  peculiarity,  that  when 
the  final  of  TTW  is  changed,  the  short  final  vowel  of  f^  is 
made  long ;  as,  nom.  sing.  fTsSTTOT  or  -TJ^,  nom.  dual  fT'^rTT^, 
ace.  sing.  f^TSKnf,  instr.  dual  IV^rnT^^Tf,  &c.  f«i'*JT»^,  ^who 
shines  much,'  makes,  nom.  smg.  fWr^  or  ->n^,  nom.  dual 
fWnft,  instr.  dual  fWr^«rf ;  but  this  is  a  derivative  from  the 
root,  which  is  marked  in  the  lists  of  radicals,  as  J-^JT^.  There 
is  another  root,  >?T^  ^to  shine,'  without  the  prefix  j,  and  its 
derivatives  are  regular;  as,  nom.  sing.  fWT^  or  fwT^,  nom. 
dual  fwnft,  instr.  dual  fwF^TT,  &c.     nfCJim,  '  a  mendicant,' 

*  an  errant,'  makes,  nom.  sing.  "qft^T^  or  "^,  nom.  dual  XTpT^T^ff, 
instr.  dual  nPi^di^wrf,  &c. 

94).  Derivatives  from  roots  ending  in  ^  or  i^,  formed  by 
adding  the  affix  technically  termed  %?T,  insert  a  nasal  before 
the  final  in  the  first  five  inflexions ;  as,  "^i^,  ^  who  joins,'  from 
^1^,  'join/  makes,  nom.  ^^,  "J^,  ^:;  ace.  ^,  -g^;  in  the 
rest  it  is  regular,  ace.  plur.  gif:,  instr.  sing.  ^gpTT,  instr.  dual 
Trnarf,  loc.  plur.  "^^.  It  is  regular  throughout  in  composition; 
as,  ^-sgpjT^,  a  constellation  so  named,  makes,  nom.  "^sng^  or  -t[, 
^nigg^ft,  ^nisrg^:.  ^  also,  if  derived  from  "gft^C,  is  regular ; 
as,  "g^  '  one  who  meditates ;'  nom.  ^  or  ^t^,  &c. 

a,  '95^,  'a  curlew,'  retains  the  nasal  throughout;  as,  nom. 
^,  ^,  ^: ;  instr.  -^^  ^^,  ^^: ;   loc.  plur.  ^^g  or 


95.  Derivations  of  ^sr^  in  the  sense  of  '  going/  compounded 


NOUNS   ENDING   IN   CONSONANTS. 


51 


with  prepositions  and  with  certain  other  words,  are  very  irre- 
gular.    They  are, 

f^m^^  moving  all  round. 

44 «i^  moving  equally. 

5ffVT^  moving  with. 

f^^  moving  crookedly. 


HT^  eastern. 
UTI^  western. 
"3^^  northern. 
^TT^  southern. 

Which  are  thus  inflected  : 

m^  '  eastern.' 
nom.  UTT  TTT^ 

ace.     TTT^  — 

instr.  TTT^  lTF«n         xni^ 


m^: 


dat. 
abl. 
gen. 
loc. 


TTFWi: 


HI"*!! 

TTTf 


vm^^  western. 

Ui(\m\       tcw^       vimfnr* 
UrO-**:         —  — 

Tnftf%         —  in?m 


a.  They  form  the  feminines  by  dropping  the  nasal,  and 
adding  the  termination  ^,  as  irNt,  TUfi"^,  and  are  declined  like 
•T^.  The  neuters  are  regular;  as,  nom.  and  ace.  TTTofi,  TTT^, 
lTTf%;  "fflTSR,  TTrfNt,  IT?Tf^;  the  rest  like  the  masculine.  W^^ 
is  declined  like  ITT^ .  "3^^  substitutes  ^  for  the  antepenulti- 
mate before  the  accus.  plur.  and  following  terminations;  as, 
"3^,  '■df^41;  "3^,  "3"^Nr:,  '3^'Nt,  &c.  Those  derivatives  also  in 
which  the  semivowel  tj  occurs,  change  it  to  ^,  analogously  to 
the  similar  change  in  "Hm^.  frnt^  changes  its  nasal  to  a 
sibilant  before  the  vowel  terminations  beginning  with  the 
accus.  plur. 

nom.  -ftn^T  fffx^  PriiM^: 

ace.     ffTX^  —  ffTC^: 

instr.  friiHiii  fin§T«n  fd't^O*?: 

dat.    frrt^  —  fffxtrwi: 

abl.     ffil.'a:  —  — 

gen.    —  fin:^:  fwr^ 

loc.    fTRfej  —  fircS^ 

b.  When  the  derivatives  are  from  a  similar  root,  but  which 

H  3 


52  DECLENSION. 


has  a  different  meaning,  namely,  ^r^  ^  to  worship/  they  follow 
the  rules  of  Sandhi  only ;  that  is,  ^  is  rejected  when  final,  and 
before  a  consonant,  when  also  the  palatal  nasal  becomes  the 
guttural ;  as,  TTT^  '  who  worships  i'  sing.  nom.  VX^,  ace.  TTT^, 
instr.  irn^,  dat.  tt^,  abl.  and  gen.  in^:,  loc.  Trrf% ;  dual  nom. 
and  ace.  MI'JI^  instr.  dat.  and  abl.  TTTT^Tf^  gen.  and  loc.  ITT^ ; 
plur.  nom.  and  ace.  TTT^:,  instr.  Jir^P*?:,  dat.  and  abl.  TTT^^:,  gen. 
W^,  loc.  ITTf^.  Fem.  sing.  nom.  in^,  W^,  TTT^: ;  neut. 
nom.  and  ace.  in^,  VJ^,  inf%. 

96.  There  are  not  many  nouns  ending  in  -^,  but  they 
follow  the  model  of  WZ  &c.  before  the  consonants,  and  option- 
ally change  "?[  to  "^r  before  the  vowels  :  thus  ^rSlira,  ^  who  asks 
all,^  makes, 

nom.  ^"tirr^  or  -^  ^"trTT^  or  -TTT^  ^#TTTS[:  or -ITT^: 

ace.    ^"tTrrs[  or -irr^  


instr.  ^T'trrr^T  or  -H^TT  ^TTT^«rf  ^"iin^f^T: 

dat.     ^Swii  or  -TrT%  —  ^'tin"?«T: 

abl.    ^fin^:  or  -irr^,  —  — 

gen.       ^fin^:  or -irr^ft:       ^trnrarf  or -ii^rf 

loc.    "^rfrnf^  or -iTT%  ^fin^f 

97.  "^riT,  '  to  sacrifice,^  when  compounded  with  the  preposi- 
tion ^i^,  lengthens  its  penultimate  vowel  before  the  vowel 
inflectional  terminations,  and  is  declined  like  a  noun  ending 
in  ^  before  the  consonants,  as  if  it  was  an  imperfect  noun 
supplied  in  part  by  the  obsolete  noun  ^"^iT^.  Thus  W^tht, 
'  an  inferior  worshipper,'  makes. 


nom. 

^rtRT^ 

-ii'^^iTi: 

ace. 

vii-^m^f 

^mt«if 

— 

instr. 

'U'cfiftPH: 

dat. 

•s 

— 

.ii^ifl»*i: 

^M^r^ 

abl. 

"^ifciiiiiT: 

— 

gen. 
loc. 

^H'^i^i^: 

'i^^4lMl 

^i(cin:« 

voc. 

NOUNS  ENDING  IN  CONSONANTS.  53 

98.  ^^5  ^a  lame  man/  drops,  agreeably  to  the  rules  of 
combination,  the  last  member  of  its  conjunct,  when  final,  or 
when  followed  by  a  consonant :  hence,  sing.  nom.  ^"^r,  instr. 
dual  ^ivqf;  plur.  ^f»?:,  loc.  plur.  ^"t^.  Before  the  vowels 
there  is  no  change ;  ^^,  ^^^:,  ^^T,  &c. 

99.  "^T?^,  ^  strong,^  may  reject  one  IT  before  a  pause  or  a 
consonant,  but  is  in  other  respects  regular :  sing.  nom.  "gt"^  or 
"gPT,  ace.  "g?#,  instr.  ^tHI  ;  dual  instr.  "gsn^rf ;  plur.  instr.  "gr^fW:, 
loc.  "gr^,  &c.  The  neuter  plural  may  be  "gsfsS  or  "grf^;  but 
in  composition  with  '^,  ^much,^  the  nasal,  if  inserted,  must 
precede  the  final  consonant ;  as,  plur.  nom.  and  ace.  •^g^P^^  or 
"^r^^  ^  very  strong.^ 

100.  "^i^^,  'blood,^  a  neuter  noun,  optionally  borrows  its 
inflexions  in  the  accus.  plur.  and  following  cases  from  an  obso- 
lete noun,  ^RHT,  which  is  inflected  like  other  nouns  in  «T. 


nom. 

^^1^ 

^^ 

^rwf^ 

ace. 

— 

— 

—  or  ^reif^ 

instr. 

,  vitj^ii  or  ^ngrr 

-im^i^l  or  -im^\ 

-iUfjOn:  or  ^hh{U\ 

dat 

-hmJ^  or  -H^ 
^3|tt:  or  %s^: 

^I^Tvq:  or  ^^Rfvq: 

abl. 
gen. 
loc. 

^mi^:  or  "^mt: 

^^  or  ^m^ 

■^f^m  Ul   "ttltUI 

Class  III.    Nouns  ending  in  cerebrals,  or  7,  7,  T,  ^. 

101.  Nouns  terminating  in  these  letters  do  not,  as  far  as  is 
yet  known,  occur ;  but  z  and  "j  are  used  as  the  substitutes  of 
nouns  ending  in  ^,  The  first,  as  a  hard  consonant,  is  changed 
optionally  when  final,  and  absolutely  before  the  inflexions 
beginning  with  vr,  to  ^. 

Class  IV.    Nouns  terminating  in  the  dentals,  w,  "^T,  ^,  V. 

102!.  Nouns  terminating  in  consonants  of  the  dental  class 
are   for  the   most   part   regular,   being    subject    to   no   other 


s.  nom. 

-^rrr(;or-^ 

—  ace. 

^ru 

—  inst. 

^jon 

d.inst.&c.-^ftwf 

pi.  inst. 

^f^: 

—  loc. 

^PCrH 

54  DECLENSION. 

changes  than  those  which  the  laws  of  Sandhi  require.  The 
final  in  the  nominative  is  either  the  unaspirated  hard  or  soft 
letter  if  or  ^ ;  before  H  it  is  the  soft  ^ ;  and  before  ^  the  hard 
consonant  w ;  as  in  the  following  paradigmas  of  "^IriT  ^  green/ 
'HDhH"^  ^one  who  kindles  fire/  cfi^  ^a  bulPs  hump/  ^rfrnr 
'  fuel.'  ' 

^pHH^Mmfn.      ^^^  f.  ^rf^v  f. 

^TfTiTHiror-^       ^R^or-^        ^f^lfor-^ 
-Tifi^H'if  ^fi^  ^rftnl 

wfrjTH^  ^K^  ^rfinTT  &c. 

^rfTTR^  ^^3rf  TrfiTwf  &c. 

The  neuter  form  of  the  two  first  is  in  the  nom.  and  ace. ; 
^TT  or  -^,  ffbrt,  ^frfnT;  wfii^lf  or  -^,  ^iiDHH^ql,  ^rfrTmf^; 
but  %1^5  ^who  cuts  much/  and  similar  derivatives,  do  not 
insert  the  nasal  in  the  plural ;  as,  "^Ihit  or  -^,  ^ftr^t,  ^fWf^. 

a.  "^l^,  '  a  tooth/  and  tj?^,  ^  an  army/  are  considered  as 
optionally  substituted  for  ^  and  ijriHl;  as,  sing.  nom.  ^w  or 
^^  or  ^:,  ace.  ^  or  ^,  instr.  ^T  or  ^^«T;  dual  instr.  &c. 
^^  or  ^TTTwrf,  &c. 

h»  So  tr^,  ^  a  foot/  is  the  optional  substitute  for  xrr^  in  all 
cases,  and  absolutely  for  xn^  in  composition,  but  only  in  the 
accus.  plur.  and  subsequent  cases  beginning  with  vowels ;  as, 
sing.  nom.  "qTT  or  tj^  or  tri^:,  ace.  xnf  or  xn^,  instr.  tt^t  or  TI^H ; 
dual  instr.  &c.  "qrarf  xn^rwif,  &c. :  but  ^mRT^,  ^  tiger- foot,'  a 
plant  so  named,  makes,  nom.  "arnnrn^  or  ttrt,  ^lym^^l,  ^nnn^: ; 

ace.  ^arraxn^,  ^TTRT^,  ^mn?^:;  instr.  ^mPT^T,  «mMm«qf,  ^mr 

tnfkt^  &c.  In  like  manner,  ^^,  'the  heart,'  is  a  substitute  for 
f^;  nom.  fW  or  ^,  ^,  ^fi^,  &c. 

103.  'T^,  '  the  spleen,'  and  l^pBlTj  ^  ordure,'  neuter  nouns, 
are  declined  analogously  to  -^^A ;  that  is,  they  optionally 
substitute  in  the  accusative  plural  and  subsequent  cases  the 
inflexions  of  obsolete  nouns  ending  in  •^,  as  irsR^  and  "5r2R»|. 


NOUNS  ENDING  IN  CONSONANTS.  55 

nom.  ^q^  i|<Jffl  -Mjfnl 

ace.     —  —  —  or  ^^cmPh 

instr.  iTfin  or  "iT3iT  ^Tfwf  or  V^fm  'f^ff^**  or  "JT^fifW: 

dat.     -q^  or  i|^  T^f^:  or  it|iWK 

abl.     ^r^  or  irg}:  


gen.      ^rfffh  or  TT^Rt:  ^T^iff  or  xr^ 

loc.     ^<*rri  or  tr^rfVf  Ti-^  or  iToiiW 

So  T^r^ifnf  or  ^lefclfn,  ^fin  or  ^TSiT^  &c. 

G.  -^  ^who  knows/  ehanges  its  initial  to  H  whenever  it 
changes  its  final  to  the  unaspirated  letter^  that  is,  in  the  nomi- 
native singular,  and  before  the  inflectional  terminations  begin- 
ning with  a  consonant. 

nom.         ^  or  >j^  -^^  -^V: 

instr.        "^  ^J?lf  ^:  &c. 

loc.  pliu*.  >jig  &c. 

104.  Besides  nouns  of  a  general  character  ending  in  den- 
tals, there  are  certain  declinable  participles  ending  in  WW  and 
^,  and  certain  possessive  nouns  ending  in  T?^  and  Tfrf ,  which 
undergo  some  modification  of  the  inflective  base  before  the 
terminations  of  the  nominative,  and  before  the  accusative  sin- 
gular and  dual.  In  all  the  other  cases  they  are  regularly 
dechned  like  other  nouns  ending  in  T^;  that  is,  the  vowel 
affixes  are  attached  to  the  final  ^  if  is  unaltered  before  ^,  and 
becomes  ^  before  H. 

105.  These  participial  and  possessive  nouns  prefix  an  tf  to 

their  final  w  before  the  teiTninations  of  the  five  first  inflexions : 

\ 

thus  TT^  '  cooking,^  becomes  XR^.  Those  ending  in  ^  or 
JTf^  also  make  the  penultimate  vowel  long  in  the  nominative,  and 
accordingly  fH^  becomes  ^nr^Tn^  '  doing :'  but  by  the  rule 
that  the  second  member  of  a  final  conjunct  consonant  is  to  be 
rejected,  the  final  l^  is  thrown  out,  and  the  words  remain  in 
the  nominative  singular  ^M*\^,  ojiHNI«^.  Before  the  vowels  the 
compound  is  unchanged,  as  M-Mifl,  cjiH^^tfl,  &c. :   thus, 


56                                                     DECLENSION. 

H^r^  ^  being.' 

^Jirri[_^ '  going.' 

nom.  imf\^       H^^         H^til 
ace.    H4iT       —         vrwtn 

Jid^^qf    ntmfet&c. 

nom.   \rH<=(T^            VH^ 
ace.     \R^nr                — 
instr.  VRTcH  &c. 

f?rr 
asc. 

ft 

nom.  siflH^            'iOH'ii 
ace.     ^H7i^              — 

«5ftHd:    &C. 

«.  To  form  the  feminine  gender  of  these  nouns,  ^  is  added 
to  the  termination,  and  the  noun  is  decHned  like  »T^;  as, 
JIH^rt),   ^H«lri1,   ^iH'ril.       The    neuter   is    regular;     as,   TtrTTi^, 

b.  Participles  of  the  present  tense  formed  with  ^n^  some- 
times retain  the  nasal  augment  in  the  feminine  noun  through- 
out, and  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  dual  of  the  neuter ; 
as,  >T^  makes  H^^,  >T^rn^,  >T^t?t:,  &c.  in  the  feminine ;  and 
in  the  neuter,  >T^,  H^^t,  H'^Hfl. 

c.  This  insertion  of  the  nasal  is  imperative  in  the  participles 
of  all  verbs  of  the  first,  fourth,  and  tenth  conjugations.  It  is 
optionally  inserted  after  verbs  of  other  conjugations,  which 
either  in  their  simple  form  or  in  their  conjugational  bases  end 
with  ^  or  ^TT.     It  is  not  inserted  after  any  others. 


Verb. 

Part. 

pres.  masc. 

Fem. 

ist  conj.    >{^to  be 

>1^ 

H^i(\ 

3d    _    i^  *°  '''* 
(VTT  to  shine 

^51^ 

^T^lft 

^^ 

HTlft  or  HT^ 

f  1  *^  sacrifice  ;) 
^               (   repeated,  ^j 

I'^'^x 

l3r?ft 

4th  —      f^^  to  play 

^'Nnr 

^^ 

5th-    il  to  bear;., 
^              (     increment 

ith) 

1^ 

1^^ 

THTf^ 

riHrft 

■^1li{ri1or-^|i|>ri1 

•^11.^111 

NOUNS  ENDING  IN   CONSONANTS.  57 

6th  conj.  w^  to  torment 
7th  —      "^  to  obstruct 
«fV>  riR  to  stretch ;  with) 

(      increment  TTg     j 

nth—  |^.t«Hv;  ^j^i 

^  (    increment  'WWJ) 

loth  —     "^  to  steal 

So  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  dual  of  the  neuter,  H'^^ ; 

^i^t,  m?ft  or  m?rr%  &c. 

d.  The  participles  of  the  present  tense  of  verbs,  which  take 
a  reduplicate  form,  even  though  the  crude  verb  originally 
terminates  in  ^  or  ^rr,  do  not  insert  an  iT  before  their  final 
TT,  but  are  declined  like  nouns  in  general  ending  in  that  con- 
sonant ;  as  ^  ^  to  give :'  part.  pres.  ^^ ;  masc.  nom.  ;^^  or 
^[^,  ^^>  ^^l ;  ace.  ^^,  ^^5  ^^:  j  instr.  ^^TTT,  ^^wf?  &c. : 
fern.  sing.  nom.  ^^T";  neut.  nom.  ace.  dual  ^^;  plur.  ^^fnT 
or  1^^. 

e.  There  are  certain  other  verbs  w^hich  are  analogously- 
inflected  in  their  present  participles ;   as,  1{^  *  to  eat ;'   Tr^, 

»r^^,  ros^:,  &c. :  -^mr  ^  govern  f  '^rvsi{,  ^PET^,  ^rnaw:,  &c. 

/.  >T^,  when  a  term  of  address,  as  *  Sir,'  *  Your  worship,^ 
is  dechned  amongst  the  pronouns. 

ff,  "^in^  ^  a  deer,'  wut  '  the  world,'  and  "^^  '  great,'  are 
declined  like  participles  in  the  three  numbers  of  the  nomina- 
tive and  in  the  accusative  singular  and  dual ;  in  the  rest  they 
are  regular. 

nom.K  ITT^ 

ace.   -<  ifintT 

instr.    "^irr 
106.  H^T^,  ^great,^  makes  its  penultimate  long  before  the- 


IJMrrft 

'jtr^d": 

^illfl 

^jm: 

1^ 

'^^m: 

'jMff! 

?^* 

^Mlfi 

WTtf: 

f^t 

f^: 

^^iqi 

^^fkt  &c, 

58 


DECLENSION. 


first  five  inflexions  of  the  masculine^,  and  that  of  the  two  first 
eases  plural  of  the  neuter ;  as. 


nom.  »7^rT 
ace.  JT^Tnf 
instr.  ^T^iTT 


H^lifl 


Fem.  *r^;  neut.  nom.  and  ace.  T^,  JT^,  H^Tf%. 

«.  Nouns  of  every  description  ending  in  dentals  are  nume- 
rous ;  of  which  the  following  are  a  few. 


Substantives. 
^mPhm^  f.  a  sacred  treatise 
^Hff  n.  a  lotus 
■j*^^  mf.  a  cannibal 
5^  f.  a  stone 

TrffPT^  f.  ist  day  of  lunar  fortnight 
*T^  m.  wind 
f%^  f.  lightning 
^rr^  f.  autumn 
wm{^  f.  wealth 
Hf^^  f.  agreement 

Possessives. 
^rr^^^TiT  long-lived 
^gi"!^  abounding  in  lotuses 
iflrn^  sensible  . 
mAt[^  dependant 
"5^^  having  children 
^f^l^  having  form 
HJTTf^  majestic,  divine 
ir^r^l^  famous 
<;r85ftTf^  prosperous 
^i^^ff^  having  elegance 


Attributives. 
^  who  or  what  cuts 
"Nt^  who  or  what  gathers 
xn^  who  or  what  falls 
Yi[  who  or  what  is  or  abides 
'3f^^^  who  speaks 
JT^  who  or  what  churns 
ij^  what  torments 
"^  who  sends  or  drives 
fn^  who  or  what  breaks 
f^  who  or  what  knows 

Participles. 
ftT(  doing 
iT^ar?^  going 
"^^  going 
W^  conquering 
^TR"?^  knowing 
irn^  crossing 
^Jf?^  taming 
Vtj^  holding 
•T^  sounding 
^RTl^  flowing 


NOUNS  ENDING  IN  CONSONANTS.  59 

Class  V.    Nouns  ending  in  labials,  xr,  xfi,  "^^  vr. 

107.  These,  which  are  few  in  number,  are  for  the  most 
part  regular.  The  nominative  ends  in  t^  or  '^.  The  final 
remains  before  the  vowel  terminations,  and  is  "^  before  i?,  and 
TT  before  ^;  as  gii^  *  who  presences :'  nom.  ^  or  w^,  tj^j,  j^i ; 
ace.  Ti%  nm,  gir:;  instr.  Tvqj,  ^J^,  Tjf^:;  loc.  plur.  ij^. 
So  cfi^  ^  a  quarter  of  the  horizon :'  nom.  ofi"^  or  "^r^,  cK^>^, 
'^i^^t:  ;   ace.  cR^5  ofi^^ft,  cR^^t:  ;  instr.   oir^iTT,  ofi-^^orf ;  loc.  plur. 

108.  There  is  one  irregular  noun  in  this  class,  W^  ^  water,' 
declinable  only  in  the  plural  number :  plur.  nom.  ^HTt,  ace. 
W^:,  instr.  wf^:,  dat.  and  abl.  WSJl,  gen.  "^rqf,  loc.  ^3^. 

In  composition  it  may  be  declined  like  any  other  noun  in 
T^;  as,  ^T^,  from  ^  ^good,'  and  ^T^  ^  water,'  ^having  good 
water,'  makes,  nom.  sing,  ^t^  or  ^'^,  nom.  dual  ^t^,  nom. 
plur.  ^tt:,  instr.  dual  ^^]wrf,  loc.  plur.  ^^,  &c. 

Class  VI.    Nouns  ending  in  nasals,  T,  >T,  ^y  -T,  T. 

109'  Of  words  terminating  in  nasals  of  the  two  first  classes 
no  instances  are  known,  and  but  few  are  met  with  ending  in 
TIT.  They  are  quite  regular,  but  may  optionally  insert  ^  before 
^;  as  ^^^  ^of  a  good  class  :'  nom.  '^nm,  TnXJ^,  "^n^l;  instr, 
&c.  dual  ^TTTT!T«if :  loc.  plur.  mm^  or  ^JK'idfi. 

110.  Nouns  ending  in  «T  are  numerous,  and  present  many 
peculiarities.  They  may  be  divided  into  two  orders ;  one 
ending  in  ^T«^,  the  other  in  ^«^. 

Nouns  ending  in  ^rT. 

111.  When  regularly  inflected,  nouns  in  ^TJT  drop  the  final 
in  the  nominative  singular,  and  before  the  terminations  begin- 
ning with  consonants ;  and  in  the  masculine  and  feminine 
genders  they  make  the  penultimate  letter  long  before  all  the 
terminations   of  the   nominative,  and   those  of  the  accusative 

I  21 


60  DECLENSION. 

singular  and  dual :  the  vocative  singular  is  unchanged.     Thus 
WW«T,  ^  soul/  is  declined  as  follows : 


nom.  ^imi 

^\t*i\r{i 

^^rTr^Tirr: 

ace.     ^TWT^ 

-iiif*<H: 

iustr.  ->Mlr^HI 

^rrrff«iT 

dat.     -illrWH  &c. 

, 

loc.  "5!TfW^ 

voc.    W^m'^ 

In  the  neuter  form  the  vowel  is  made  long  only,  agreeably  to 
general  rule,  in  the  plural;  where  however  a  nasal  is  not 
inserted  before  a  nasal :  "^^T^T  '  Brahma/  '  the  Supreme  /  nom. 
ace.  'S^r,  "^^gnift,  ^3^^. 

112.  In  these  two  examples,  ^^fmTtT  and  '^^•T,  the  final 
'^  is  preceded  by  a  conjunct  consonant,  of  which  the  final 
letter  is  17.  If  the  last  of  such  conjunct  be  ^,  the  noun  is  simi- 
larly inflected ;  as  xng*!  ^  a  sacrificer :'  nom.  mSTT,  -M'^ I «ll,  ^3^ IH : ; 
ace.  ij3^|rf,  if^T^,  irs^rft,  &c. :  but  if  no  such  conjunct  precede, 
then  in  the  accusative  plural  and  following  cases,  of  which  the 
terminations  begin  with  vowels,  the  penultimate  W  is  rejected, 
and  the  antepenultimate  and  final  coalesce ;  as  TTifJ^  ^  a  king :' 
nom.  "cnTT,  tnn^,  tTiTT^:;  ace.  tT^n^,  TPTT^,  tT^;  instr.  TI^, 
Xi»rwn,  TT^rfWt ;  voc.  UST"^,  &c.  In  the  locative  sing,  the  rejec- 
tion is  optional ;  as  tlf^  or  tTWf^. 

a.  The  same  takes  place  before  the  feminine  affix  ^;  as  TT^ 
'  a  queen :'  and  optionally  before  the  neuter  dual ;  as  ^ftiT'T 
^  the  sky :'  nom.  ace.  ^iftT,  ^acfW  or  ^?Rt,  ^infw. 

b.  When  a  noun  ending  in  ^"5f^  is  derived  from  a  root 
ending  in  ^  or  ^,  preceded  by  ^,  "g",  or  '^,  the  vowel  is  made 
long  before  the  conjunct  consonant  of  the  accusative  plural, 
&c. ;  as  Mfl^n^^'^l  ^  who  sports :'  nom.  ""Tftf^^,  ■qftf^'TRl, 
T^ftf^^T^:;    ace.  -qftf^^T^,   xrlrf^Tnft,   TTftj^ti:;    instr.    "qft^IT, 

irftf^^f,  xrri:f^^rfH:,  &c. 

c.  Tni"^,  a  name  of  Indra,  may  substitute  l^  for  its  final, 
and  be  declined  like  a  noun  in  '^;  as,  nom.  iT''s?Tr*^,  HXRv^T, 
Hil^nt: ;  ace.  ?iTj^,  'T'^iwr,  HV^^rC,  &c. :   but  it  is  also  declin- 


NOUNS  ENBING  IN   CONSONANTS.  61 

able  as  a  noun  in  ^T  when  it  changes  its  semivowel  ^  to  "3" 
before  the  vowel  terminations  of  the  accusative  plural  and 
following  cases,  and  ^  is  substituted  for  "g"  and  the  w  of  jht; 


nom.  W^fWi 

JTV4H1 

^'^■^\■^: 

, 

HMMMI 

*?^>h: 

ace.    ^^^^H 

mstr.  ^^\^\ 
dat.    vr^^ 

WW^van 

H^fe 

loc.  HH^U 

voc.   irq^'^ 

d.  ig"^,  ^a  dog/  and  "^'^^  'a  youth/  are  declined  so  far 
analogously  to  HTr^"^,  that  they  change  ^  to  ^before  the  accu- 
sative plural  and  the  following  cases,  of  which  the  terminations 
begin  with  vowels.  In  ''g"^  the  "3"  is  of  course  merely  sub- 
joined to  the  ^;  in  "g"^*^  it  is  preceded  by  the  '3'  of  ^,  and 
consequently  the  two  short  vowels  combine  into  one  long  one ; 
they  then  follow  the  analogy  of  T.'R"'^,  as  by  rule  ii3,  and 
reject  the  penultimate  ^;  in  consequence  of  which,  "3"  or  ^ 
immediately  precedes  the  final  ^.  '^•^,  kvcov,  '  canis/  ^  a  dog  :' 
nom.  "^j  Wi^,  ^T^n ;  ace.  igTif,  "^TRT,  ^: ;  instr.  "sprr,  "^«lf, 
TgrfW: ;  dat.  T?r%,  "sgvqf^  &c.  "^TT,  ^ juvenis/  ^  a  youth :'  nom. 
^^,  5^nft,  ^T?T:;  ace.  ^^,  ^^Tift,  ^:;  instr.  t^,  ^^^, 
g^fk: ;  dat.  "^,  '^^,  &c. 

e.  'ws^^,  ^the  sun/  is  irregular  in  not  making  the  penul- 
timate long  before  the  terminations  of  the  nominative  dual  and 
plural,  and  accusative  singular  and  dual ;  in  the  rest  it  follows 
TT»T*T ;  its  "^  is  changed  to  ^  by  virtue  of  the  ^  in  "^T^. 

nom.  wc§Trr  ^i^RTcft  w^w: 

ace.    ^^nt?^^  —  ^nS?^ 

instr.  -^it^^^U  ^5T#?«n  --3ii§*<0r. 

loc.     ^n:q?rftii  or  ^s^^fw         —  ^nE§?f^ 

voc.     "»H't5*<H 

/.  Compounds  with  ^^,  ^to  kill,'  follow  the  analogy  of 
^n§H"?T,  i.  e.  they  do  not  make  the  vowel  long  in  the  nom. 


62  DECI^ENSION. 

dual,  &c.  They  also  change  ^  to  "set  before  the  vowel  termina- 
tions of  the  accusative  plural,  and  following  cases,  in  which 
also  the  penultimate  vowel  is  rejected,  and  accordingly  the 
antepenultimate  and  final  consonants  combine. 

^isr^";^,  ^  the  murderer  of  a  Brahman/ 
nom.  -^^T  w?r^  -pi^^iir: 

ace.    W^T^  —  "3^^: 

instr.  -^igrm  ^^vqf  "351^: 

dat.     '^^  &c. 

g.  ^\,  ^  the  sun,'  is  inflected  after  the  model  of  ^n§H'!^ ; 
but  in  the  accusative  plural,  and  analogous  cases,  an  imperfect 
noun,  '^,  is  optionally  substituted. 

nom.  "^  ijMlffl  "^[TO: 

ace.     MM  111  —  iiuii:  or  "^t 

instr.  MUill  or  Tjqr  "^^wf  "^^^fnt 
dat.     "JT^  or  "i|^  &c. 

h,  ^"ff^,  'a  horse,'  belongs  to  nouns  in  ^HT  in  one  case 
only,  the  nom.  sing. :  in  all  the  rest  it  is  declined  like  a  noun 
in  7^,  or  '^\',  as, 

nom.  ^rfr  *ii§Tn  ^^^*ax 

ace.    "^rtnt  —  ^i^: 

instr.  ^^rfin  ^^*  ^iflk: 
dat.    ^rt^  &c. 

If  compounded  with  a  negative,  and  used  attributively,  it  is 
declined  regularly  as  a  noun  ending  in  ^'t?  preceded  by  a 
conjunct  consonant,  of  which  the  last  member  is  ^;  as  ^^"t"^ 
^  one  who  has  not  a  horse :'  nom.  "Wr|"tT,  '^R't'nft',  WrrfTrT: ; 
ace.  wq#R,  W^#nn,  ^R#fr: ;  instr.  '^nrtiTT,  ^^#«?f,  &c. 

113.  ^3sr^  neut.,  ^a  day,'  is  very  irregular,  substituting  ic: 
for  the  final  in  the  nominative  singular  and  locative  plural, 
and  "g*  convertible  to  'sft  with  the  short  vowel  of  ^r^  before  H. 
In  the  other  cases  it  conforms  to  «ift?T^;  as. 


NOUNS   ENDING   IN   CONSONANTS.  63 

nom.)  g.      -         ^ 

ace.  J^^*  ^or^si^        ^sr^^ 

instr.  ^i^  ^^t«n  ^T^tftr: 

dat.      "^  —  ^T^twr: 

abl.      ^:  —  — 

gen.      —  ^I^.  ^ 

loe.      ^rf^  or  ^r^fVr         —  ^'^♦^  or  SH^^^g 

a.  Compounded  with  numerals^  with  f^,  or  with  ^THT^  ^rg  is 
substituted  before  all  the  terminations,  and  is  dechned  hke  a 
noun  ending  in  ^;  as  wnn^  ^  the  afternoon :'  M'lm^:,  Hm\^, 
'Wnu^ly  &c. :  but  in  the  locative  case  singular  these  com- 
pounds take  different  forms ;  as  ^ | i\ \^,  ^iimf^  or  ^I^I^Ph. 

b.  Compounded  with  other  words,  W^  is  declined  in  the 
mascuhne  and  feminine  like  other  nouns  in  ^SHT,  except  before 
the  terminations  of  the  dual  and  plural  that  begin  with  H,  where 
it  substitutes  "3"  for  "q" ;  as  ^^i^tt  ^  a  long  day :'  nom.  r()5i^|, 
<(19|^IHT,  ^-tr^T^: ;  ace.  <1Q|^IH,  ^{iQl^i^,  ^"t^^: ;  instr.  ^t%^, 
^(ttr^W,  ^fhtrftfn: ;  dat.  ^1^,  &c. ;  loc.  sing,  ^'ttlf^  or  ^ttr^frr, 
plur.  i^^^:w  or  rflQl^i^  voc.  ^ft^:,  &c. 

Nouns  in  ^^. 
114.  Many  possessive  nouns  are  formed  with  the  affixes 
^f^^  f^^,  and  f*T»T ;  as,  \rf^'5T  ^  having  wealth/  '  opulent  /  ^ft?*^ 
'having  a  staff/  'an  ascetic/  riqftjj'^  'having  devotion/  'a 
devotee  /  ^ifrRr^  '  having  speech/  '  eloquent :'  all  of  which  are 
declined  on  one  model.  They  reject  the  «T  before  the  conso- 
nants ;  retain  it  before  the  vowels ;  and  make  the  penultimate 
of  the  base  long  in  the  nom.  singular ;  in  all  the  other  cases 
the  inflectional  terminations  are  added,  without  any  change, 
to  the  final  of  the  base  :  as  vfVriT  mfn.  '  rich.^ 
masc.  nom.  "^"^  vf^T«ft  vf^: 

ace.     vf^  —  >Tf^: 

instr.  vfT?rr         vfjw  vf^fW: 

dat.     vf^  &c.  loc.  \rf^T| 

voc,      VfVfrf 


64  DECLENSION. 

The  feminine  affixes  ^,  as   vf^fR%  and  is  declined  like  "JT^. 
The  neuter  is  regular ;  nom.  ace.  vfJT^  vf^rft,  V^Tftr. 

115.  There  are  three  irregular  nouns  of  this  class;  Tffvji^ 
'a  road/  ttT^'T  ^a  churning  stick/  and  ^^jfj^^^r  ^a  name  of 
Indra.^  These  substitute  ^T  for  the  final  syllable  before  the 
affix  of  the  nominative  singular^  and  for  ^  before  the  other 
affixes  of  the  nominative,  and  those  of  the  accusative  singular 
and  dual:  before  the  vowel  terminations  of  the  accusative 
plural  and  other  cases  they  reject  the  final  syllable  altogether : 
before  the  consonants  they  reject  the  iT. 

The  two  first  also  prefix  a  nasal  to  the  consonant  "^r, 
before  the  first  five  inflexions ;  viz.  those  of  the  nominative, 
and  the  singular  and  dual  accusative  ;  as  "Cff^'^T  '  a  path/  ^  a 
road.^ 

nom.  "qr^:  tT^^TlTn  tp^THT: 

ace.    xff'MH*  —  xni: 

instr.  Jpsn  xjf^vqf  Xff^rfW: 

dat.     xf'^  &c.  loc.  xrfzrj 

voc.    '^f^^ 

So  TRf^^  makes  it^t:,  h^ph,  ^rm,  nf^«rf,  &c. 

Compounded  with  other  words,  these  are  dechned  in  the 
masculine  in  the  same  manner  as  the  uncompounded  word: 
in  the  feminine,  the  final  syllable  is  rejected,  and  the  affix  ^ 
is  added  to  the  antepenultimate  consonant :  in  the  neuter, 
•T  is  rejected  in  the  singular  and  dual,  and  prefixed  to  "^T 
before  the  plural:  as  ^qHii*^,  ^having  a  good  road,'  makes, 
masc.  ^xTPzrr:,  &c. ;  fem.  "'gtnfl',  Trqw,  &c.;  neut.  nom.  and  ace. 

^^^^  makes,  nom.  "^JipfT:,  ^^TO^,  "^^JWTW: ;  ace.  ^^^f^TO, 
'^5^'WT^^?  "^^JWi ;  instr.  ^^T,  ^^W^^  &c. 

116.  Nouns  ending  in  J^  are  few:  before  the  consonantal 
terminations  it  is  changed  to  *T ;  as  "R^rn^  ^  mild,' '  quiet/  makes, 
nom.  TJ^T^^,  Tr^n^ft,  TT^nw: ;  instr.  TT^TTHT,  TT^TT^f,  T^TT^: ;  loc. 
plur.  1T^^  or  IT^T^. 


NOUNS   ENDING   IN   eONSONANTS.  65 

Class  VIL    Nouns  ending  in  semivowels,  iT,  t,  T^,  ^' 

117.  Nouns  ending  in  if  and  c5  are  of  rare  occurrence :  if 
they  occur,  they  are  regular. 

118.  Nouns  derived  from  verbal  roots  ending  in  ^  or  "^  make 
a  preceding  vowel  long  before  the  inflectional  terminations  which 
begin  with  consonants.  ^  is  changed  to  Visarga  in  the  nomi- 
native singular ;  but  not  before  the  locative  plural,  if  it  be  a 
radical  letter.  ^  followed  by  a  vowel,  as  in  ^,  is  not  doubled 
after  ^.  Thus  fn^  fem.  '  speech :'  nom.  ift:,  fJT^,  fjR: ;  ace. 
fnt,  fn$5  f^TC ;  instr.  fiRT,  ^fb^,  'ftf^: ;  loc.  plur.  Tft|. 

Nouns  ending  in  semivowels  do  not  insert  a  nasal  before 
the  neuter  plural.  TTC:  n.,  *  water,^  makes,  nom.  and  ace.  "^:, 
TT^,  ^rft;  instr.  '^m,  '^T^,  "^jf^l,  &c. 

a.  f^,  ^  sky,^  changes  ^  to  ^  in  the  nominative,  and  to  "3" 
before  the  consonantal  terminations.  The  ^  of  f^  becomes  "^ 
by  the  rules  of  Sandhi.  f^^  f.  ^sky:'  nom.  ^:,  f^,  f^^:; 
ace.  f^,  f^^,  f^: ;  instr.  f^,  ^vqf,  ^f^: ;  loc.  plur.  ^. 

b.  Used  attributively,  as  in  ^f^?  ^  having  a  clear  sky  (a 
day),^  the  neuter  form  is,  nom.  and  ace.  ^,  ^f^^,  ^^^^  J  ^^^ 
rest  like  the  masculine. 

Class  VIII.    Nouns  ending  in  sibilants,  ^,  ^,  ^. 

^. 

119.  Nouns  formed  from  verbal  roots  ending  in  3(,  with 
the  affix  technically  termed  ffi''^,  substitute  for  the  final  the 
guttural  letter  "3^  before  all  the  terminations  beginning  with 
consonants;  as  f^  f.  ^space.^ 

nom.  1^  or  f^       G^^ii  f^: 

ace.     f^^  —  f^i^n 

instr.  f^^  f^'^TT        f^fnr:  &c. 

loc.     f^f^  f^'jft:         f^ 

When  formed  with  any  other  affix,  it  is  said  that  "^  is  sub- 
stituted for  the  final ;  and  for  1^  the  cerebral  ^  is  substituted 
in  the  same  cases. 

K 


66  DECLENSION. 

fVar  (f^)  Svho  enters/ 
nom.  f^  or  f%^      f^  f^: 

ace.     f^  —  — 

instr.  f%^  f^Tfwrf         fT^.  &c. 

loc.     f^  f%^.  f^^^ 

neuter  nom.  and  ace.  f^^  or  f^,  f^,  f^% 

«.   «=n^5  '  who  or  what  destroys/  takes  either  form. 

nam.  "^-^  or  "^^-^  ^  ^;t^. 

ace.     "q^  —  — 

instr.  iTW  ^F«lf  or  Tf^  rffhr:  or  iTf  fW: 

loc.     rr%  ffHT  or  «T^ 

d,  H^  ^who  sees/  with  its  compounds  ^?^,  ti\i^[,  ^¥^> 
*  such-like/  '  similar/  take  the  guttural  substitute :  so  do  the 
derivatives  of  ^p{^  ^to  touch/  WT^  or  ITT?^,  in^#,  TVCWW? 
WHT^Tt,  &c. :  so  "fH^iS^  ^who  touches  Ghee/  "f^^  ^^  ^^ 
^HfHj^ft^  ^d^^fT,  TJTT^^Twrf,  &c. 

c.  f?r3T  may  be  substituted  for  f«T5n  ^  night/  and  is  then 
declined  like  fV^T;  according  to  some^  a  palatal  may  be  sub- 
stituted for  the  cerebral  before  the  consonants,  except  in  the 
nominative  singular ;  as  f^r^^^  or  ffT»|^f,  "^^^?  ^^  ^^^^* 

1210.  Nouns  ending  in  "^  are  inflected  in  one  of  three  ways; 
I.  by  substituting  z  for  the  final  before  the  consonantal  inflex- 
ions ;  2.  by  substituting  oR  in  the  similar  cases ;  and  3.  by 
substituting  before  the  same  inflexions  '  ru^  or  ^. 

The  substitution  of  z  is  considered  the  regular  form  of 
inflecting  verbal  derivative  forms  in  "^ ;  as  fFT^  f.,  *  light,^  from 
fFr\  '  to  shine  .^ 

nom.  fNr^  or  fi^  fj^  ft^l 

ace.    fr^"R  —  — 

instr.  fr^m  fj^Twrf         fi^f^: 

dat.    frif^  &c.  loc.  frr^5  or  fr^^r^ 


NOUNS  ENDING  IN  CONSONANTS.  67 

121.  As  in  the  case  of  nouns  ending  in  ^,  those  in  "^ 
formed  from  verbs  by  the  affix  f^  take  the  guttural  substi- 
tute ;  as  ;^Y^  ^  arrogant/  from  y^  ^  to  be  proud.^ 

nom.  ^Y^  or  -"^  ^^m  ^vq: 

ace.    ^[V^  —  — 

instr.  ^v^  ^wwrf  &c. 

122.  In  the  case  of  ^r^  *  a  friend/  and  some  other  words, 
particularly  those  in  which  the  final  is  properly  ^^5  but  has 
become  "^  in  consequence  of  being  preceded  by  some  other 
vowel  than  ^  or  ^TT  (see  rule  29)5  ^  is  substituted  for  the  final 
before  the  consonantal  inflexions,  and  the  nouns  are  decHned 
like  nouns  ending  in  ^. 

^^  ^  a  friend.' 
nom.  ^m:  ^T^m  w^: 

ace.    ;=r^  —  — 

instr.  ^^  ^"ST^t  ^Rijl^: 

dat.    ^T^  &c.  loc.  ^"ST:"!  or  ^njBg 

(I.  ■^rrf^T'^  for  ^srrfV^  f*  ^  ^  benediction/  is  similarly  inflected, 
nom.  -i^i^f):  ^JT%^  ^nf^R: 

ace.     'Hlf^R  —  — 

instr.  'i^lP^im  ^^n^fh^  ^STT^fS: 

dat.     ^iP^R  &c.  loc.  ^r^fh"!  or  WT^fhg 

b.  cfl^  for  ^V^j  ^the  arm/  besides  being  declined  in  this 
manner,  admits  before  the  vowel  terminations  of  the  accusative 
plural  and  following  cases  the  optional  use  of  ^«f,  declined 
like  nouns  in  w^. 


nom.  ^: 

^t^ 

^. 

ace.     ^ 

— 

—  or  ^h^r: 

mstr.  ^>m  or  ^H^n 

^^ 

TrfSI: 

dat.    ^  or  ^tcSr 

^: 

abl.     i^t^  or  ^totJTI 

— 

— 

gen.    ^Yr.  or  ^^; 

tfN^or 

^triifh 

^>Mf  or  ^hcin 

loc.     ^  or  ^tfon 

^:g  or  ^>ig 

It  is  also  neuter :  nom. 

and  ace.  ^: 

K   2 

,  ^^, 

iri^. 

08  DECLENSION. 

c.  Neuter  nouns  with  a  penultimate  ^  or  "g"  shorty  make 
the  vowel  long  only  before  the  nasal  augment  of  the  nomi- 
native and  accusative  plural  ;  as^  \T7r^  ^  a  bow/  ^TST"^  '  the 
eye/  df%^  ^  light/  "^fV^  *  Ghee/  severally  for  V^^,  ^^\?  &c. ; 
as,  nom.  and  ace.  ^^:,  dfMt,  tNff^;  instr.  df^^L  df^*^, 
^rf^f^:^  &c. :   so,  nom.  and  ace.  ^rcr:,  "^1^%  '^''^f^;  instr.  'qw^, 

d.  Nouns  derived  from  the  desiderative  form  of  the  verb 
are  declined  after  this  manner ;  as  ftnTfe"^, '  one  who  wishes  to 
read/  makes,  mf.  frrxT^:,  fxprfST^,  f'T'??(tv|f,  &c. ;  neuter  nom. 
and  ace.  fxRf?:,  fxfxrlW,  f^T^TfTf^.  It  does  not  insert  the  nasal 
in  the  neuter  plural,  f^^,  ^one  who  wishes  to  do/  rejects 
the  sibilant  before  a  consonantal  inflection  (see  rule  35);  as, 
f^:,  "N^lt,  f^^R^t:,  f%^^h^,  &c. 

12(3.  Nouns  formed  from  verbs  ending  in  the  compound 
letter  "^  reject  before  the  consonantal  inflexions  either  the 
first  member  of  the  compound  or  '^,  and  are  then  declined  like 
nouns  in  T^;  or  they  reject  the  second  member  t^,  and  are 
declined  as  if  ending  in  o^. 

The  same  words,  accordingly  as  they  are  said  to  be 
formed  with  different  affixes,  may  take  both  modifications ;  as 
TT^  mf.  ^  who  or  what  pares'  or  ^  makes  thin  :'  nom.  sing.  TT^ 
or  ITT,  If^  or  w^  ;  instr.  dual,  &c.  iT^^rf  or  iTTWjf ;  loc.  plur.  K^ 
or  ir^',  so  ifta^,  ^a  cow-keeper,^  makes,  nom.  sing.  ^ftT^  or 
^frt:?,  Tplr:^  or  -tn ;  instr.  dual,  &c.  ifk^«rf  or  TftT7«rf ;  loc.  plur. 
ifte^  or  Wk.^*  Before  the  vowels  the  final  is  of  course 
unchanged ;  as  irsll,  tvIt;^. 

a.  Nouns  in  "^  formed  from  desideratives  reject  the  sibilant 
only ;  as  fxnr^,  ^  who  desires  to  cook/  makes,  fv^^'^  or  -t^, 
frpT^,  f^nF^rf,  f^W^,  &c.  fsR^  ^  who  wishes  to  speak,^  ^^^^ 
'  what  desires  to  burn,'  are  similarly  inflected. 

^. 
124.    Nouns  masculine  and  feminine  ending  in  ^,  when 
preceded  by  ^,  make  the  penultimate  long  in  the  nominative 


NOUNS   ENDING  IN   CONSONANTS.  69 

singular,  and  substitute  T  for  the  sibilant  before  the  inflexions 
beginning  with  vr,  which  with  a  preceding  ^  makes  ^. 


'^vm  '  Brahma 

} 

nom. 

w. 

^v^ 

hm 

ace. 

^v^ 



instr. 

.  %>reT 

^vtwn" 

^>itfH: 

dat. 

^>i^ 

^vr«i: 

abl. 

^vw: 

— 

gen. 

^v^: 

Iw* 

loc. 

Wh 

^:^  or  ^fg 

voc. 

^: 

a.  The  vowel  is  not  made  long  in  the  nominative,  if  the 
noun  retain  the  form  of  the  radical  whence  it  is  derived;  as, 
^  ^  to  clothe  f  WW^  '  who  dresses  well ;'  nom.  sing.  ^: .  So 
fmiiil^  ^  who  takes  a  funeral  cake/  from  frri^?  and  T^^^  '  to 
take/  nom.  sing.  fxRIJir:. 

h.  Three  masculine  nouns  in  w^  are  irregular,  »hh^^  ^  time/ 
"g^ffriTFr  ^  the  regent  of  the  planet  Venus/  and  "g^^t^^  ^  name  of 
Indra.  They  are  declined  in  the  nominative  singular  as  if 
ending  in  w^ ;  ^R%^,  "3^RT,  "J^W*  I^^  the  vocative  the  first 
and  last  are  regular,  ^R^:,  "cr^^: ;  the  second  has  three  forms, 

^"^nr:,  "t^ft,  or  "g^r^. 

125.  Neuter  nouns  in  ^W  do  not  make  the  penultimate 
long  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  singular,  but  make  it 
long  in  the  plural ;  as  ttxtR'  ^  water  :^  nom.  and  ace.  ttti:,  xnRft, 
"qiiiPfi ;  xpT^T,  xpft^rf,  trzftfiT:,  &c. ;   "'Txr:^  or  Mi|^. 

126.  Nouns  ending  in  ^  in  conjunction  with  a  consonant 
drop  the  final  (by  rule  '>,^  before  the  consonantal  inflexions ; 
so  f^^  mf.,  ^who  or  what  injures/  becomes,  nom.  f^,  H^fHi, 
f^^\ ;  ace.  f^^,  n^««Ht,  f^^: ;  instr.  f^^,  f^^wrf,  f^fr^:, 
&c. 

a.  Derivatives  from  H^  and  s^,  Ho  fall/  with  the  affix 
ffi^,  substitute  ^  for  the  final  (which  becomes  ^  and  's)  before 
the  consonants,  and  reject  the  nasal  throughout,      ssi^  ^  who 


70  DECLENSION. 

falls :'  nom.  sr^  or  uf^,  jsr^,  «PR: ;  ace.  m^,  SEJ^,  um: ;  instr. 
ts(m,  vsfff^,  s^fW:^  &c. 

127.  "5^5  ^a  man/  drops  the  final  sibilant  before  the  con- 
sonantal inflexions  ;  and  it  is  otherwise  peculiar  in  the  ^nomi- 
native, and  in  the  singular  and  dual  of  the  accusative ;   as, 

nom.  "JTHT  gni^SI  "gm^: 

ace.     «4HI*^  —  "5^: 

instr.  xprr  '^^  "gf^r: 

dat.    Tj%  —  ■g«T: 

abl.     g^:  —  — 

gen.    "5^:  ^:  ^ 

loc.     ^  —  ifor^ 
voc.    "g^r?^  &;c. 

It  may  be  declined  in  three  genders  as  an  epithet ;  as  "5^ 
^of  a  good  man:'  mf,  ^gni*^  &c. ;  neut.  nom.  and  ace.  ^ry^, 

128.  There  are  some  participial  nouns  formed  with  ^pff, 
which  before  the  inflexions  of  the  nominative,  and  of  the  accu- 
sative singular  and  dual,  prefix  a  nasal  to  the  sibilant,  and 
make  the  preceding  vowel  long.  In  the  nominative  singular 
the  "IT  is  rejected,  as  the  final  of  a  conjunct  consonant :  before 
the  accusative  plural,  and  following  vowel  inflexions,  "^  is 
changed  to  "3",  as  also  before  a  feminine  formed  with  ^,  and 
the  dual  neuter :  the  sibilant,  when  final  (as  in  the  neuter 
singular),  and  before   the   consonantal   inflexions,  is  changed 

tof. 

fVi'^^  *  who  is  knowing,  wise.' 

masc.  nom.  "RIT*^  frg'T^  fTiTO: 

ace.     f^irM  —  r^riM: 

instr.  f%5^         f%irarf        f^nrfk: 
dat.    f^^  &c.  loc.      f^rarr5[ 

voc.     f^*^ 

fem.   fw^  f^'sft  ik^W* 

neut.  f^i{  f^^  f^^WTf^ 


NOUNS  ENDING   IN   CONSONANTS.  71 

«.  If  the  termination  Tff  be  preceded  by  ^,  that  vowel  is 
rejected  when  the  W  is  changed  to  "g" ;  as  ^f^^  ^  Vvho  is  sit- 
ting:' nom.  «G(cnv^5  ^f^r^j  ^f^^rnr:;  ace.  ^^m,  Sfr-^i^t, 
&g^: ;  instr.  ^^,  ilP^MiJji,  &c. :  fern.  nom.  sing.  ^^'^ :  neut. 
nom.  and  ace.  ^f^T?^,  ^JM^  ^f^f^ffir. 

129-  Superlatives  formed  with  the  termination  ^x^T  are 
declined  in  the  three  numbers  of  the  nominative,  and  in  the 
singular  and  dual  accusative,  analogously  to  participles  in  "srw ; 
in  the  other  cases  they  follow  the  analogy  of  nouns  in  '^m ;  as 
TH^THT  '  most  heavy.' 

masc.  nom.  i|0^!^  JlO^lf^  'lO^lfC 

ace.    -rrdw^  —  ^vdT^: 

instr.  Tr^ij:m        n^T[tvin        TRNfrfW: 
dat.    ircNiir  &c.  loc.  TRShETH  or  J|0^^ 

voc.   iiCjmr\^ 

fem.  i\()mH\         iiijmvti         TT^T^r^: 

neut.  in^:  Ji0^^1  TT^^riftr 

Class  IX.    Nouns  ending  in  ^. 

130.  Nouns  ending  in  ^  substitute  ^  for  it,  agreeably  to 
rule  33  :  ^  undergoes  the  changes  to  which  the  rules  of  Sandhi 
subject  it.  Tjfc?^  '  a  bee/  from  ^^  '  honey/  and  f<^  '  who 
or  what  sips/  is  thus  decHned : 

nom.  'ivf^j^  or  -f^f         w^fc^J^  Jr^f^: 

ace.     ^fc^^  —  — 

instr.  JTvf^r^  ^vni^^wn       i^^fc5|fW: 

dat.    ?TYfc5^  —  ?r^T«i: 

abl.    JfvfH^:  —  — 

gen.       —  Ji^fc^^l:  h^Pc^^i 

loc.      Hvf^^jf^  ''^^^  or -fcJTrW 

voc.    5R^^ 
The  feminine  is  the  same  as  the  mascuhne.    f?5^  in  the  neuter 
makes,  nom.  and  ace.  fc5T  or  -^,  fc5^,  fc5f^. 


72  DECLENSION. 

a.  "gtnrr^j  a  name  of  Indra,  is  inflected  like  ^T^^^^  ^"^ 
has  the  peculiarity  of  changing  ^  to  "^  when  the  final  is 
changed ;  as  ^um^  or  -T,  "gnWT^,  "gTT^T^wrf,  &c. 

131.  Words  formed  with  the  affix  ffi»T  substitute  "^  for  a 
final  ^5  which  becomes  c^  or  t\^^  agreeably  to  the  rules  of  San- 
dhi,  before  the  consonantal  inflexions ;  as  tIw^,  '  a  metre  of 
the  Vedas.' 

nom.  "grfw^  or  tt        ^w^  TfoH^: 

ace.     "Tfwr^  —  — 

instr.  Tfw^  "^laiFwrf         ■^farrf^: 

dat.    '^  fuil^  &c.  loc.  Tfw"^ 

a.  Other  verbal  nouns  formed  with  the  same  affix  substi- 
tute either  a  guttural  or  a  cerebral  for  the  final;  as  ^  mf. 
'  one  who  is  perplexed.' 

nom.  g^-g^  or  g^-g^  g^  g^: 

ace.    g"^  —  — 

instr.  g^  Sf**^  ^"^  W^  gf^  or  gf^J 

dat.    g%  &c.  loc.  g^g  or  g^ 

So  ^1?  'one  who  vomits;^  %^  'one  who  is  kind;'  ^r?  ^one 
who  hates.' 

h.  But,  monosyllabic  verbal  derivatives,  ending  in  an  aspi- 
rated soft  consonant,  change  their  initial,  if  it  be  any  unaspi- 
rated  soft  consonant,  except  ir^  to  its  corresponding  aspirate, 
whenever  the  final  is  changed :  therefore  tttt  for  "^^^  becomes, 
nom.  sing,  "g^  or  "giT,  ^  or  "g^;  instr.  dat.  and  abl.  dual 
-grwrf  or  'g|«rf ;  instr.  plur.  g^: ;  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  grwc  or 
gpr: ;  loc.  plur.  g^  or  g^g ;  in  the  other  cases,  ^,  ^:,  ^r^, 
&c.  So  ^  *  what  burns :'  v^  or  >PT,  \i^  or  Vf ;  W^  or 
Vfwrf  &c.  H^,  who  or  what  milks/  takes  the  guttural  substi- 
tute only ;  as, 

loc.  Y^ 


nom.  g^ory^ 

3^ 

ace.     5^ 

— 

instr.  51^ 

gr«if 

dat.     ?^  &c. 

NOUNS  ENDING  IN  CONSONANTS.  73 

^'  "^T^5  ^what  bears  or  carries/  substitutes  ii  for  the  first 
two  letters  in  several  compound  nouns  before  the  accusative 
plural  and  subsequent  vowel  inflexions  :  this  "gi  (by  rule  3. 
clause  c.)  makes,  with  a  preceding  ^,  ^  not  ^;  as  P^vycii^ 
mf.  ^  all- sustaining/ 

nom.  r^jy^r^or-^  H^^^lt  f^^Hi^: 

ace.    r^iiym^*  —  fr^s^: 

instr.  r^iyi^i  f^mmTWif  fTss[^T^ 

dat.     Pm^^  &c.  loc.  r^mcji^^ 

fern.  nom.  sing,  fr^ftl^ 

If  the  preceding  vowel  be  not  ^  or  ^ir,  the  "31  to  which  ^  is 
changed  combines  with  it,  according  to  rule :  thus  ^f^T^  ^  earth- 
sustaining;'  nom.  *T^,  *^NI^,  ^^T^t;  ace.  plur.  ^:;  instr. 
sing.  >j^,  &c. 

d.  "%fr^T^,  ^Indra/  (he  who  is  borne  on  a  white  horse,) 
presents  several  anomahes.  In  the  nominative  and  vocative 
singular,  and  before  the  consonantal  inflexions,  it  is  declined 
as  if  ending  in  ^aw ;  as  "^rfr^^.  In  the  accusative  plural  and 
following  cases  mth  vowel  inflexions  it  retains  its  final,  but 
optionally  substitutes  "gr  for  TT;  as, 

nom.  "^^t  »ydm^  f^rim^: 

ace.     ^d«(l^  —  iUfTl^:  or  nin«ii^: 

instr.  iyril^i  or  ^ri^i^i  %r^«lf  ^TfTTrfir: 

dat.     fiSrtl^  or  T^rt^l^  —  *5d«ri«T: 

abl.     %^;or^ri^l^:  —  — 

gen.        *5Hl^"l;or^fT^Ti^.       i&Hl^l  or  iyrt^l^l 

loc.     wf^or^riMlT^  -^nrntforw^ 

e.  ^MMf  f.  ^a  slipper,'  substitutes  "i^  for  the  final  before 
the  consonantal  inflexions ;  making  T^rRT^  or  <JMM^,  TTT^wf, 
^MmP^:,  "^ttt^TST:,  ^JMMi^;  before  the  vowels,  ^MM^^  &c. 

/.  >HH  j^,  ^  an  ox,'  is  very  anomalous.  In  the  nominative 
and  vocative  singular  r^  is  substituted  for  the  final ;  and  in  all 

L. 


74  DECLENSION. 

the  numbers  of  the  nominative,  and  in  the  accusative  sin- 
gular and  dual,  wt  is  prefixed  to  the  final;  before  which,  "^r 
regularly  becomes  ^.  Before  the  consonantal  inflexions  ^  is 
changed  to  ^. 

nom.  ^HHjIH  vHHjl^  ^SHTfT^: 

ace.     -Hr{^\4              —  -HH^^: 

instr.  ^HJ^l  ^T?T|3Bf  ^Rffk: 

dat.     ^R^  &c.  loc.  ^Hdr*j 


voc. 


^^HTf^ 


Compounded  so  as  to  form  an  epithet,  this  word  may  become 
feminine  and  neuter;  as  ^^f"^^  ^having  good  cattle,^  makes, 
fem.  nom.  ^^tT|^?  neut.  nom.  and  ace.  ^riji^,  ^Rf^;,  ^^Tfff)^. 

SECTION  III. 

Ad/ectives, 

132.  Adjective  or  attributive  nouns  are  inflected  in  the 
same  manner  as  substantive  nouns :  admitting  of  the  three 
genders,  and  varying  as  to  their  inflectional  terminations 
according  to  their  proper  finals,  agreeably  to  the  rules  already 
given  for  the  inflexions  of  nouns. 

133.  Adjectives  admit  of  the  variations  of  degree  common 
in  other  languages,  as  comparatives  and  superlatives.  When 
regular,  they  are  formed  by  adding  to  the  crude  noun  the 
terminations  IR  and  THT  (technically  called  inT^  and  "inTxr) :  in 
the  former  of  which  we  have  the  Greek  repo?,  and  in  the 
latter  an  approximation  to  raros  and  the  ^  timus^  of  the  Latin. 
Thus, 

'grrar  holy  "grnnrc  more  holy  ij^MriH  most  holy, 

xrj  eloquent       ""T^TTC  more  eloquent        iT^TR  most  eloquent. 

a.  Before  these  affixes  a  final  «^  is  rejected,  and  the  final 
^  of  the  participial  affix  ^  is  changed  to  1[^;  as. 


ADJECTIVES.  75 

^^  young  ^pnrc  younger  4Jc|hh  youngest. 

fwg^^  wise  f^^r^n  wiser  f^nriT  wisest. 

b.  The  same  affixes,  with  a  Uke  import,  are  added  to  some 
particles ;  as  "^[fif,  '  more  than/  may  make  ^rffTiR  and  ^rfrnnT 
^  still  more'  or  ^  most :'  and  although  different  etymologies  are 
assigned  to  T^  and  "^TWR,  which,  besides  other  meanings, 
denote  degrees  of  excellence,  or  ^better/  ^best,'  they  are  most 
probably  formed  from  "gr^  ^  up,'  with  the  terminations  of  the 
comparative  and  superlative  degrees. 

c.  The  terminations  are  sometimes  added  to  substantive 
nouns ;  as,  ;^  *  a  king  f  hmhi.  ^  more  a  king ;'  HCfriH  '  most  a 
king/ 

d.  When  added  to  feminine  nouns  in  ^  or  "gi,  the  finals 
may  be  made  short ;  as,  HilriC  or  'ifldi. '  more  fortunate  f  O^rlH 
or  ^1hh  ^most  fortunate/ 

€.  The  same  terms,  with  the  syllable  ^TTT  added,  give  a 
comparative  and  superlative  force  to  the  personal  inflexions  of 
verbs ;  as,  iT^qfw  ^  he  talks ;'  aT^TfrraTm^  '  he  talks  more  than 
he  ought '/   *i«d4rHrtHI*i^  ^  he  talks  without  stint  or  measure/ 

134.  Attributives  formed  with  irc  and  im  are  decUned  in 
three  genders  like  other  nouns  in  '^^  and  like  them  offer  a 
marked  resemblance  to  Latin  attributives  in  '  us  ;*  as  "giWrtC, 
g^nrsTT,  ^rnnrt,  &c. 

135.  Attributives  of  comparison  are  also  formed  with  tlie 
affixes  ^xr^  and  jw,  which  are  analogous  to  the  Icov  and 
i(TTog  of  the  Greek ;  the  former  properly  denoting  the  com- 
parative, the  latter  the  superlative ;  although  the  distinction  is 
not  always  carefully  observed.  Those  which  are  formed  with 
^  are  dechned  like  nouns  in  ^ ;  those  with  frr^  in  the  man- 
ner explained  under  nouns  ending  in  ^^  (see  rule  129).  They 
take  the  three  genders;  as,  ^^15  'strong;'  "^T^hnr  'stronger,' 
nom.  cic^l^lH,  "^r?5hrat,  ^c^m ;  ^tfc^a  '  strongest,'  "^fn^:,  "^ffSOT, 
'?Tf<5J¥,  &c. 

a.  These  affixes  have  the  effect  of  causing,  as  in  the  example 
given,  a  final  vowel  to  be   dropped.     "^H  rejects  its  own  ^, 

L    2 


76 


DECLENSION. 


and  consequently  the  vowels  ^  and  ^  are  attached  at  once  to 
the  consonant ;  so  tyj,  ^  eloquent/  makes  tR^THT  and  vfzw.  If 
the  word  be  a  monosyllable,  however,  the  final  ^  is  not 
rejected,  and  the  usual  change  by  Sandhi  takes  place ;  as  Jf 
for  finr,  *  dear/  with  f xth  and  ^  makes  ftxT^,  W ;  and  ^ 
for  TT^rW,  ^  excellent/  ^^,  W.  They  also  cause  the  elision 
of  the  possessive  affixes  Wi[^,  ^5  f^,  and  of  "^  when  an  affix 
forming  nouns  of  agency  5  so  irfrRlf ,  '  having  sense/  '  sensible/ 
becomes  »T?ftir^  ^  more  sensible/  irfw?  '  most  sensible  /  ^vrf^, 
'  possessed  of  intelligence/  makes  ^^fhr^  ^  more  intelligent/ 
^fw  ^most  intelligent/  vf^,  ^having  wealth/  ^rich/  vrfhnr 
'  richer/  vfrRr  '  most  rich  /  ^  from  ^i  '  to  do/  ^  an  agent/ 
*  active,^  <+0^^  *^more^  or  '  very  active,'  cfife  ^  most  active/ 

6.  The  affixes  ^ir^  and  ^  are  attached,  however,  most 
commonly  to  modifications  of  the  original  noun,  or  to  what 
are  considered  as  substitutes  for  it ;  although  possibly  in  some 
cases  they  are  the  proper  originals  become  obsolete.  The 
following  is  a  list  of  the  principal  instances. 


Primitive.  i 

^rPinfi  near 

^r^  little,  young 

■^  large 

1»5F  thin 

fTBpr  quick 

"^  small  or  mean 

Tj^  heavy 

jpn  content 

^  long 

^  distant 

^  firm 

Vft^  large 

^  large 

U^rW  excellent 


ibstitute. 

Comparative. 

%^ 

^^TTT 

^Rift^ 

^Ffhm^ 

^ 

^^^^ 

•ai^r 

'jii^rlii^^ 

^ 

^Ml^fl^ 

TBJ^ 

■^til^^ 

'R 

»TONm^ 

Wf 

w^^. 

^TT^ 

<iim)*i^ 

^ 

<^<lf^ 

^ 

'5<il^^ 

Mfcd^ 

iTOCpf-^tq^^ 

Tnr 

Tnftxnr 

(^ 

^IT^ 

i^ 


^MH 


Superlative, 
oh  fill  8 

ilfiB 


PRONOUNS  AND  PRONOMINAL  NOUNS.         77 


frnr  dear 

IT 

^T^ 

^ 

•^  much 

^ 

-^iftr^ 

^f^ 

>pr  much 

H^ 

>j^fhr^ 

>J%¥ 

^soft 

^ 

H^^\ 

^f^ 

r^ 

M'H\i\\ 

Tjfk^ 

1^^  young 

<  -^m 

dkliD^^^ 

«=Br<j.i« 

(^ 

<*^^^^ 

c*r*i^ 

^rar  heavy 

^HTV 

H\^i\H^ 

^RTfW 

^old 

V^ 

1^1^«x 

T^ 

f^iR  firm,  stable 

^ 

wTF^ 

^ 

^75  gross,  bulky 

^w^ 

^■^44^ 

^JiiP^a 

"ftqiC  much 

^ 

Wii^^ 

^ 

"g;^  short 

Fff 

f^fhnr 

"gftr? 

c.  "^y  ^  much/  substitutes  >jxr,  and  is  anomalous  in  the  first 
form,  as  w^^,  >Tfxn?. 

d»  Occasionally  the  regular  terminations  are  superadded  to 
these  superlatives  to  imply  excess  in  a  still  greater  degree ;  as, 
WrTt  ^  more  excellent  f   ^»riH  '  most  excellent,^  '  most  best.' 


SECTION  IV. 

Pronouns  and  Pronominal  Nouns. 

136.  Pronouns  and  certain  other  nouns  are  classed  toge- 
ther, as  agreeing  in  some  pecuharities  of  inflexion,  by  which 
they  are  distinguished  from  all  other  nouns.  The  Hst  com- 
mences with  the  distributive  pronoun  ^"t  '  all ;'  whence  they 
are  called  ^"frf^  or  Sarva  and  others. 

137.  Besides  the  meaning  ^all,'  ^"t  is  a  name  of  S^iva,  and 
in  that  sense  it  is  declined  hke  any  other  noun  in  ^;  but 
when  it  is  a  pronominal  noun  it  differs  from  its  regular  in- 
flexion in  the  following  respects  : 


DECLENSION. 


nom.  plur.  u     is  substituted  for  ^^:,  as  '^^        for  ^tSt: 
dat  sing.     ^  "  "^     —  ^t^     —  ^#nT 

abl.  sing.    WITT  Tftr — ^rtwTiT  •— "5#n^ 

loc.  sing.    "ftRt^         fr   —  Tf^fe^  —  "^W 

gen.  plur.  ^ ^     —  ^FTl^m'^   —  ^frof 

138.  After  the  feminine  form  ^t,  ^  is  prefixed  to  the 
terminations  of  the  dative^  ablative,  genitive,  and  locative  sin- 
gular ;  and  the  final  of  the  inflective  base  is  made  short.  In 
the  genitive  plural  T(  is  prefixed  to  'm\. 

^t^all.^ 


Masculine. 

Feminine. 

nom 

.  ^: 

^ 

^ 

^tT 

^t 

^ir: 

ace. 

^W 

^gfr^ 

^tf 

— 

— 

instr 

.  ^^ 

wtT«rf 

^^. 

^rf^ 

^trvqf 

^fr^: 

dat. 

^t^ 

^it«T: 

^rt^ 

_ 

^^«t: 

abl. 

^fiwrit^ 

— 

^Iwi: 

— 

— 

gen. 
loc. 

...Sr        r. 

f«|^fl: 

^rfift: 

«iWV( 

— . 

^§^1 

^•~~ 

Neuter 

nom.  and  ace.  ^ 

1*    ^' 

^llP^l  &c. 

139.  All  the  words  of  this  class  follow  this  model,  as  far  as 
regards  the  inflectional  terminations,  with  exception  of  the 
two  first  personal  pronouns,  which  are  altogether  anomalous. 
The  class  consists  of  the  following  pronouns  and  pronominal 
nouns. 

I.  Personal  pronouns. 
^RR^  I. 
3^^  thou. 

a.  Demonstrative  pronouns. 
^W^  this  or  that. 
^Tf^  this. 

^1^  this. 


^1 


that,  or  he,  she,  it. 


PRONOUNS  AND  PRONOMINAL  NOUNS.  79 

3.  Relative. 
71^  who,  which,  or  what. 

4.  Interrogative. 
fojiJ^  who  ?  or  what  ? 

5.  Honorific. 
^TfT  your  honour,  your  excellency. 

6.  Pronominal  nouns. 
I.  Distributives. 

^r^one.  f^wxr)   .  .  , 

_  __  >•  third. 

idcfcHl.  one  of  two.  ^Hl^  j 

iJohHH  one  of  many.  xn^JT  first.  * 

^STHT  other.  ''qTiT  last. 

^THTrR  either.  ^^  half. 

^in:  other.  ^r^  few. 

omfn:  which  of  two.  cfrfinrxr  how  many. 

cRim  which  of  many.  "^n?  all. 

Tcnx.  whether  of  two.  "ftm  whole. 

^nnT  whether  of  many.  ^  half. 

IT'T  two,  twofold.  R  all. 

.J 

2.  Locatives. 
"^  prior,  east.  "^nrc  inferior,  west. 

"qn  after.  ^ft^  south,  right. 

W^  posterior,  west.  '^'WT:  subsequent,  north. 

^nn:  inferior,  other,  ^t^iTT:  outer. 

140.  The  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons  are  very 
anomalous,  but  their  irregularities  are  of  exceeding  interest,  as 
they  present  striking  analogies  to  those  of  the  pronouns  of  the 
same  persons  in  the  classical  and  teutonic  languages. 


.  both.  ^  own 

"5^Tq 


80 


DECLENSION. 

wiit'i.' 

nom. 

^I^ 

^mf 

^4 

ace. 

ITT  or  m 

• 

^rWT^  or  -Pfi 

instr 

wm 

^srmrwn 

^IWTMt 

dat. 

i^^or^ 

^TT^Ivqf  or  ift 

^T^TWI^  or  ^: 

abl. 

^■<Twrf 

^^Rll(^ 

gen. 

■»Hf*{I«h*i^  or  «Tt 

loc. 

T(f^ 

^5^thou.^ 

^STOTT^ 

nom 

.1^ 

^ 

^ 

aec. 

Frf  or  FTT 

T^^i  or  ^ 

^*m\  or  ?: 

instr 

.  FRT 

grrwqf 

g^mf>?: 

dat. 

"5«r»T  orw 

:gcCT«rf  or  ^ 

^^T«n^  or  m 

abl. 

^ 

^^T«rf 

amrt^ 

gen. 

inr  or  ^ 

5^:  or  ^ 

^jmioRJT  or  T. 

loc. 

1^ 

^H^: 

g^l 

141.  The  other  pronouns  are  declinable  in  three  genders,  and 
follow  more  nearly  the  model  of  the  class,  ^"j,  in  their  inflexions. 

Those  which  end  in  ^,  as  IT^  &c.,  reject  their  final  conso- 
nant before  all  the  inflexions,  except  in  the  nominative  singular 
of  the  neuter ;  and  they  thus  become  words  terminating  in  m. 

Before  the  nominative  masculine  and  feminine,  w^,  w^,  and 
Vl^  change  their  it  to  ^ ;  becoming  therefore  ^,  m?  W,  Wf?  W^) 
V^;  as, 

IT^  '  that,^  or  ^  he,  she,  it.^ 


Masculine. 

Feminine. 

nom. 

W. 

ift 

^ 

^ 

^ 

in: 

ace. 

W 

^ 

rTT^ 

irf 

^ 

m: 

instr 

.^ 

WTwrf 

Th 

mn 

(TTaif 

wrfW: 

dat. 

ITw 

— 

>r. 

TT^ 

— 

TTTW?: 

abl. 

nwin^ 

— 

— 

Tiwr: 

— 

— 

gen. 

ir^ 

iT^>. 

^• 

— 

TRh 

Trraf 

loc. 

FftR^ 

Neuter 

W^  or  in^ 

— — 

TTT^ 

PRONOUNS  AND  PRONOMINAL  NOUNS. 


81 


/  ma] 

kes, 

and  iTrT^, 

Hhis:' 

T^ 

^ 

^J^:          ^^ 

^ 

^ 

mi: 

^r^         FfT 

inn: 

•^ 

"pnf^ 

^TfT^            ^ 

^ 

m 

*irilH 

masc.  ^: 
fern.  ^^JiT 
neut,    7^ 

The  other  inflexions  are  also  like  those  of  ir^ ;  but  in  the  accu- 
sative singular,  dual,  and  plural,  in  the  instrumental  singular, 
and  the  genitive  dual,  in  the  three  genders,  ^iT  i«  sometimes 
used  for  ^w;  as. 


^iTT«^  or  ^HTT"*^ 


Tj^  or  ^        wm:  or  T^yrr. 


masc.  ace.        ^  orir^  ^^  or  Tsrift 

instr,  s.  ^^  or  ^^ 
gen.  d.  ^inft:  or  ^^H^Tl: 

fem.  ace.         win  or  ij^ 
instr.  s.  l^ri^l  or  vypH 
gen.  d.  ^rnft:  or  liH^fl: 

neuL  ace.         ^  ^  idHlPH 

G.  The  second  form  is  employed  in  the  subsequent  member 
of  a  sentence  in  which  the  first  has  already  been  used ;  as, 
^^  ^l°KiimMlriHH  f^iftq^^r  '^T7^^,  ^The  grammar  has  been 
studied  by  him ;  now  set  him  to  read  the  Hitopadesa.' 

142.  The  other  two  demonstrative  pronouns,  ^^  ^this^  or 
^that,^  and  ^;^  ^  this,'  undergo  various  modifications,  chiefly 
of  the  inflective  bases. 

^'sr^  '  this'  or  *  that.' 


Masculine, 

nom.  ^THt  ^n|^  ^nfft 

ace.    ^r^  —  '^''l?!, 

instr.  ^T^TT         ^TWn  ^nftfW: 

dat.     ^n^^^{  —  ^nftwi: 

abl.     >3{<^m[ri^      —  — 

gen.   *!iijm         -iHHift;  4i*jlm* 

loc.    ^wf^'t^      —  ^nftT| 

Neuter  nom.  and  ace.  ^: 

M 


Feminine. 

^  —  — 

^Hm       "^ff^^f      ^w5t: 


*  this/  or 

Uhat.' 

Maseuline. 

Feminine. 

nom. 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^'T 

^ 

^[ht: 

ace. 

^ 

^«"i 

^* 

— 

— 

instr 

.  ^^ 

^rrwif 

^fir. 

^^rm 

^5rT«n 

^sTrfW: 

dat. 

^T^ 

— 

^«j: 

^ 

— 

m^: 

abl. 

^^RTi^ 

— 

— 

^wi» 

— 

— 

gen. 

^^r^ 

^sTFnft: 

^ 

— 

•iMHqh 

^raf 

loc. 

■1  /-wnr*       o  VI  /I 

a<^/->        J.  J  U 

^^ 

This  pronoun  also  substitutes  ^Tf  for  the  base  in  the  same 
cases  as  ^w^.    See  above,  rule  141. 

143.  The  relative  pronoun  xr^,  ^who'  or  ^  which/  is  declined 
like  w^;  as,  masc.  nom.  tji,  '^,  ^;  fern.  nom.  tu,  %  irr: ;  neut. 
nom.  and  ace.  tc^,  %  "^J?^,  &c. 

144.  f^5  'who'  or  'what/  is  also  declined  analogously  to 
ir^y  substituting  "^  for  its  final  and  preceding  vowel,  except  in 
the  nom.  neuter,  and  thus  becoming  a  noun  in  ^;  as, 

^  for  f^  '  who/  '  which.' 


Masculine. 

Feminine 

. 

nom.  w. 

^ 

^ 

■sn 

^ 

^: 

ace.     ^ 

^ 

^ir^ 

w 

^ 

m: 

instr.  ^ 

^RTwrf 

% 

•sfim 

^KTwrf 

wfn: 

dat.    'SR# 
^"11       

— 

^: 

^ 



-afiTvq: 

abl.     chwir^ 

— — 

— — 

"^iwrt 

— " 

gen.  -aim 

^irtft: 

%^ 

^sift: 

^RTOT 

loc.     ohfw^^ 

— 

^I 

"^iWf 

^ 

Neuter  nom.  and  ace.  f^ 


oRtItt. 


a.  f%J^  to  various  of  its  inflexions  may  affix  f%T^  or  ^iT, 
giving  to  it  a  more  general  and  indefinite  signification;  as, 
oirftjT^  'some  one,'  'any  one,'  'a  certain  one/  ofi^f^  'to 
some  one  /  %f^  '  some  ones,'  '  any  ones  /  f%f^^  '  some- 
thing/ 'any  thing.'     The  neuter  also  occurs  in  the  obsolete 


PRONOUNS  AND  PRONOMINAIi  NOUNS.  83 

form  of  oKrf;  as  ofif%7^  *  any  thing/  ^^  is  also  added  to 
inflexions  of  f^»^  in  a  like  sense ;  as,  «R^3^  '  some  one  ;'  f^fi^^R 
*any  thing,  something.' 

b.  The  preceding  pronouns  may  be  compounded  with  ^75^, 
1^5  or  ^^5  derivatives  from  ^^  ^  to  see/  to  signify  '  similarity  / 
when  IT^,  TTiT^,  "J?^,  &c.  become  "rTT  &c.  ^  is  substituted  for 
^T^  and  ^;^,  and  crI'  for  fsfi?^;  as, 

WTg^?  ril^^i»  or  ril^Kj,  such  like. 
^cTTFJi;:.  ^nrn^,  or  ^in?^,  this  Hke. 
7nF5^^  Tir^^^  or  ifi^Hi,  how  or  what  like. 
^^,  f^,  or  ^^,  that  or  this  like. 
<^t\,  chl^^r,  or  ofi^g^Blf,  how  like. 

These  are  dechnable  in  three  genders,  forming  the  feminine  in 
^;  mn.  "37?^,  f.  ril^^O  ;  or  as  nouns  ending  in  ^,  as  dl^^C, 
TTFl^,  nig^ii,  &c. 

b.  To  TT^,  ^IT^,  XT^,  may  be  added  Ti^,  implying  ^  quantity,' 
when  they  are  similarly  changed ;  as,  WTT?^  ^  so  much  /  ^mT?^ 
*  so  much ;'  iHTff  '  how  much  /  which  are  dechnable  hke 
nouns  in  ^ ;  as,  dNI»^ ,  riNrfl,  UTTr^,  &c. :  they  are  also  used 
in  the  neuter  form  as  adverbs,  as,  i\\^^  '  how  much,'  ITT^  '  so 
much ;'  and  correlatively,  as  TJXWf[^  HNit^  ^ as  much  as.' 

c.  ^;^  and  f^  in  a  similar  sense  have  ^n^  joined  to  the 
vowel  of  the  base  ;  as,  ^in^  ^  so  much  /  H+ai^  ^  how  much :' 
nom.  ^^•T,  ^[mft,  ^[Tf^j,  &c. 

d.  To  ofi  substituted  for  fopi^  may  be  also  added  fk,  to  form 
"Sfifif  ^  quot,'  ^  how  much,'  ^  how  many.'  It  is  the  same  for  aU 
genders,  and  is  declinable  in  the  plural  only;  as,  nom.  and 
ace.  ojrfTT,  instr.  "Sfifffik:,  dat.  and  abl.  "5fifw«i:,  gen.  ofcHldlH^,  loc. 
ohPrig.  Similar  derivatives  may  be  formed  from  TT^  and  xi^,  as 
irfir  and  xrfw,  but  they  are  of  very  rare  occurrence. 

145.  iTTfl',  an  honorific  term  for  ym^,  and  which,  hke 
^  Your  honour,'  '  Vossignoria,'  &c.,  although  used  for  the 
second,  is  a  pronoun  of  the  third  person :  it  is  decHned  like 
other  nouns  in  ^;  as, 

M   2 


84  DECLENSION. 

nom.  H^^  vRnft  vr^nr: 

ace.    H^             —  >T^t 

instr.  HTffT  >T^?n  H^fk: 

dat.    H^  &c.  loc.  iT^ 

fern.    >TTift  H^  >TqTiT: 

neut.  >l^  H^  H-^f^ 

146.  With  respect  to  some  of  the  following  pronominal 
nouns^  a  few  observations  will  be  necessary. 

a,  ijofi,  ^  one^^  ^  some  one/  is  also  the  numeral  ^  one,'  and 
will  be  again  noticed.  In  this  place  it  admits  of  three  num- 
bers ;  as,  ^joK  ^  one  /  t^  ^  two  ones  /  ^ '  some  ;'  as  ^  ^T^f^T 
^  some  ones/  or  ^  some,  say.' 

b,  ^^  and  the  six  following  words  in  the  list  of  pronominal 
nouns,  which  are  analogous  to  comparatives  and  superlatives, 
differ  from  them  in  being  inflected  like  ^"f.  They  are  also 
peculiar  in  forming  the  neuter  in  "ff ;  as,  ^nqiT,  ^nmnj^, 
^nqimTl^.  The  two  terms  preceding  w^,  <e<*Hi:  and  i^ohdH, 
make  their  neuters  like  other  nouns  in  ^,  as  ^T^irfT^,  ^"^iiT'f. 

c,  "g^T,   ^  both,'  is   dechnable   in   the   dual  only ;    as,   "3^, 

d,  "^^nr,  ^  both,'  has  no  singular :  nom.  dual  "^vr^,  pi.  "^i^. 

e,  fsTHT  and  f^THT  have  two  forms  in  the  nom.  plural,  f^f^ 
or  %Tnrr:  &c. ;  so  have  fklThr>  ijril^  ;  and  the  two  last  have 
also  two  forms  in  both  the  masculine  and  feminine  before  the 
inflexions  of  the  dat.,  abl.,  gen.,  and  loc.  sing. ;   as,  f^ril^l^  or 

%ffhr#,  fsnfHn^,  fkiftxi^,  &c. 

f,  ir^R  '  first,'  ^tH  ^  last,'  w^  ^  few,'  "SfiffHR  '  how  many/ 
have  two  forms  in  the  nom.  plur.,  THHTT:  or  w^,  ■m.Hi:  or 
^TH,  &c. 

g,  W{,  when  meaning  ^  equal,'  ^  same,'  is  not  a  pronoun :  it 
is  declined  like  nouns  in  IST;  nom.  plur.  ^fmr:,  dat.  sing.  ^TRTT. 

h,  %H  has  two  forms  in  the  nom.  plur.,  %^,  ^rn: . 

i.  ^,  when  implying  ^  property,'  is  a  noun ;  as  a  pronoun 
it  has  two  forms  in  the  abl.  and  loc.  sing.,  ^ni[  or  ^^9TT?^,  ^ 
or  ^^R^. 


NUMERALS.  85 

y.  T|^  and  the  remaining  terms  have  two  forms  in  the  abl. 
and  loo.  sing.,  and  nom.  plural,  ^Tli;  or  «^Swir(^,  ^" or  TJ^fe"!^, 
Tjlf  or  ^t:  ;  so  XHTf^  or  M^^wiit^,  &c.  They  are  pronouns  only 
as  signifying  relation  in  time  or  space ;  ^  before/  '  after/  ^  east/ 
'  west/  and  the  like.  In  any  other  sense  they  are  nouns ;  as 
^^pr  ^  clever :'  nom.  plur.  ^fj^^:,  dat.  sing,  ^ftpin^. 

k,  ^SFin:  is  a  pronoun  in  the  sense  only  of  ^  outer  /  as,  ^rttt: 
or  ^Tnft  I^T:  ^  outer  houses  /  W^flT^qT:  ^lld°hl^i:  '  of  the  outer 
petticoat:'  but  if  a  city  be  intended,  it  does  not  take  the 
pronominal  form ;  as  W^axnTf  (not  Wnn:^)  "jft:  ^  in  the  outer 
town,'  the  suburb  or  Pettah. 

SECTION    V. 

Numerals. 

147.  The  first  ten  numerals  are^  i^  one,  %  two,  f^  three, 
'^r^  four,  -q^";^  five,  ^  six,  ^TW^  seven,  ^r^"^  eight,  T|^^  nine, 
^^^n^  ten. 

148.  The  nine  first  are  compounded  with  ^-T,  '  ten/  to 
form  the  next  nine,  undergoing  in  some  instances  slight  changes 
of  termination ;  as, 

^<*^^l»^  eleven.  'qt?:^!*^  sixteen. 

IT^*^  twelve.  ^Hd^|«^  seventeen. 

^Tft^r^  thirteen.  ^TFf^^  eighteen. 

-^iril^CtT  fourteen.  rT^^«^  nineteen  or 

xr^'^T^  fifteen.  "grrffwffT  one  less  than  twenty. 

149.  With  fq^frffT^  '  twenty,'  the  simple  numerals  are  com- 
bined on  much  the  same  plan  ;   as, 

^^fifr^rffT  twenty-one.  'qrf^'fiT  twenty-six. 

^if^^rfiT  twenty-two.  ^Hr^^lPrt  twenty-seven. 

c^^lR^lPri  twenty-three.        wrrfw^T  twenty-eight. 
-^j^r^'^lfri  twenty-four.  H^f^^lTw  twenty-nine  or 

U^R^lPri  twenty-five.  ^Rf^T^  one  less  than  thirty. 

150.  The  rest  of  the  series  and  4t^ decimal  subdivisions 
are  composed  analogously  to  fr^rfw  and  its  subdivisions. 


Ob  DECLENSION. 

f^"^  thirty.  ^rrrftr  seventy, 

^r^rfr:^  forty.  ^H^flPri  eighty, 

■q^mi^  fifty.  ^mfri  ninety. 
"qfF  sixty. 

Higher  numbers  have  distinct  denominations. 

"^nf  a  hundred. 

Tff^  a  thousand. 

wgiH  or  ^rgif  ten  thousand. 

cT^I  or  c5^  a  lac,  a  hundred  thousand. 

5.  *        ♦  ?-one  million. 

Hgin  or  -IT  j 

ofitftrt  a  krore,  ten  millions. 

W%^:  or  -^  a  hundred  millions. 

H^ri^t  or  -^  a  thousand  millions. 

int  ten  thousand  millions. 

¥TfTtnf  a  hundred  thousand  milUons. 

^§:  a  billion. 

a.  Numerals,  when  declinable,  are  inflected  upon  the  same 
principles  as  other  nouns,  but  in  some  cases  they  undergo  pecu- 
liar modifications  of  the  base,  which  it  is  necessary  to  notice. 

b.  ^oR,  ^one,'  is  dechned  as  a  numeral  in  the  singular 
number  only,  in  the  three  genders,  ^or:,  ^oRt,  tjcf.  It  retains 
the  pronominal  form  of  inflexion  ;  as,  IT^R^  ^  to  one  f  ii<^kH\\ 
^from  one,^  &c. 

c.  %  is  declined  in  the  dual  only,  substituting  ^  for  its 
final;  as,  nom.  and  ace.  masc.  ^,  fern,  and  neut.  ^^  instr.  &c. 
?rT«Tf,  gen.  and  loc.  17ft: . 

d.  fw  and  the  rest  are  declined  in  the  plural  only,  f^ 
substitutes  "firo  in  the  feminine  gender. 

Masc.  Fem. 


nom.  ^7j: 

frrer: 

ace.     ^t^ 

fro: 

instr.  fwf>T: 

fif^: 

NUMERALS.  87 


^^*  ^f^:  fw^: 


abl. 

gen.    Wiwi  friljilll 

loc.     f^  fiT^ 

Neuter  nom.  and  ace.  ipftfw.  The  rest  as  the  mascuUne. 

€.  '^f^,  'four/  inserts  ^  before  the  final  in  the  nom.  masc. 
and  nom.  and  ace.  neuter^  and  substitutes  TPJ  for  the  last 
syllable  before  the  inflexions  of  the  feminine. 


nom.  ^rc(K: 

f .  -^na* 

n.  ^T^rft: 

ace.     -"(jJU 
instr.  ^sr^f^, 
dat.  )        ^ 
abl.  \^' 

'«4Hiri.&c. 

gen.    ^rJ^SlH 
loc.     ^^tjeI 

y*.  The  remaining  numbers  to  twenty,  declinable  in  the 
plural  only,  are  the  same  in  all  genders.  A  final  H  is  rejected 
before  all  the  affixes,  and  the  terminations  of  the  nominative 
and  accusative  are  dropped :  ^r?^  substitutes  ^  for  its  final 
vowel  in  the  two  first  cases,  and  optionally  elongates  it  in  the 
rest :  thus  "^^»T, '  five,^  makes,  nom.  and  ace.  t^,  instr.  XT^fn:, 
dat.  and  abl.  tt^wt:,  gen.  tt^t^TT'T,  loc.  xf^.  After  which 
model  are  inflected  ^nr'T,  «1M"4,  ^"T,  FofiT^^»T,  &c. 

"q^  'six,^  makes,  nom.  and  ace.  '^^,  instr.  "^rfvn,  dat.  and 
abl.  "^twt:,  gen.  "qirf,  loc.  ^^. 

"^rr^  '  eight  /  nom.  and  ace.  "^r^,  instr.  ^sif5t:  or  ^rgrfWt,  dat. 
and  abl.  "^TFwn  or  ^rrw:,  gen.  ^TTRf,  loc.  W?^  or  ^TFT^. 

g,  fr^rfff  'twenty,^  f^^  'thirty/  &c.  are  decUned  Hke 
other  nouns  with  similar  terminations ;  but  they  are  confined 
to  the  feminine  gender,  and  to  the  singular  number,  unless 
midtiples  of  them  be  signified,  when  they  take  the  other 
numbers ;  as,  sing.  R^rPd  '  twenty,^  dual  fr^nft  ^  two  twenties/ 
plur.  r^^lri^jt  '  many  twenties  i'  otherwise  the  number  does  not 
vary  with  the  substantive  with  which  it  may  be  connected ;  as 


88  DECLENSION. 

f^^Tim,  f^^TiTT,  '"JHinC^lril  ^:5  ^  with  twenty,  thirty,  forty 
arrows,  &c.  Instances  however  do  occur  where  they  take 
the  plural  number,  to  agree  with  a  plural  substantive ;  as 
TTW^rfkt^:  ^  with  fifty  horses/ 

h.  ^  ^  a  hundred,'  and  IT^  ^  a  thousand,'  are  both  neuter 
nouns,  and  are  usually  limited  to  the  singular,  except  when 
repetition  of  them  is  intended ;  as,  "^r^  '  two  hundreds,'  ^r^ 
^  two  thousands,'  "^irfif-f  ^  many  hundreds,'  ^^^ifiiji  ^  many 
thousands.'  In  construction  they  are  commonly  employed 
with  nouns  in  the  genitive  plural,  as  ^  ^nftrff  *a  hundred 
(of)  female  slaves ;'  although  they  are  also  used  attributively 
with  plural  nouns,  as  i^r^  f^TlTt:  ^  a  thousand  ancestors.'  The 
other  numerals  are  inflected,  like  nouns  in  general,  according 
to  their  gender  and  termination. 

151.  Numerals  in  composition  with  nouns  to  form  attri- 
butives are  inflected,  like  other  nouns,  according  to  their 
finals ;  as,  ftnrf<3':  T^tsk  '  a  man  having  three  friends ;'  ftrirf^: 
^  ^  a  woman  having  three  lovers ;'  finrfw  ^c5  '  a  family  hav- 
ing three  agreeable  persons :'  but  finrfw^,  ^  a  man  who  has 
three  mistresses,'  makes  fii^frifil,  flT^rrirf^,  frnrfw^:,  finifwwqf, 
&c.  The  same  term  may  be  used  in  the  neuter ;  as  fn^frifj  '^ 
^a  family  with  three  beloved  females;'  nom.  and  ace.  ftnrf^, 
frnrfif^^,  ftnrfrrfw,  &c.  "^w^  in  such  a  compound  becomes 
^i^T^  in  the  nominative  and  in  the  accusative  singular  and 
dual ;  as,  nom.  Ph^-cjhi:,  fil^^rflO,  ftnr^r^Tt: ;  ace.  ftni^n^Tt, 
Pnn-ciHlO,  ftnr^wr. ;  instr.  fu^xjriii,  &c. 

a.  Similar  compounds  of  "qi^  are  inflected  like  nouns  in  '^, 
and  those  of  the  numerals  ending  with  tf  like  nouns  in  ^t^; 
but  ^rF«^  may  in  composition  be  inflected  like  a  noun  in  "^P^ 
(p.  59),  or  like  a  primitive  noun  masculine  in  ^STT  (p.  33), 
or  in  the  plural  number  like  the  simple  numeral;  as,  nom. 
ftnTTFT,  fiRT^T^,  ftniTFT?T:,  or  ftnnFr:,  ftnim,  ftnnFT:  or  ficRm; 
ace.  PHuiyH*,  finiwT^,  ftnn^:,  or  ftr^rm,  frnn^,  fw^iyi:, 
finnFr'?[  or  frnrreT;  instr.  fir^rr^,  frnmrwrf,  fiRFfW:,  or  frnrr^r, 

ftnTTFTWlf,  fWFTfW:,  &c. 


ORDINALS.  89 

b^  "gifT,  implying  ^  less/  is  used  alone,  as  above  exhibited,  to 
signify  one  less  than  the  numeral  to  which  it  is  prefixed ;  as^ 
^hR^iPh:  '  twenty  minus  one/  i.  e.  nineteen  ;  "gR"^^^  '  thirty 
minus  one/  i.  e.  twenty-nine.  It  may  also  be  used  with  a 
definite  number;  as,  ^dcitlHR^lfd:  ^twenty  minus  one;'  xpg^ 
f#^  ^  thirty  minus  five,'  i.  e*  twenty-five ;  t^^flH^iH  ^  a  hun- 
dred minus  ten/  i,  e.  ninety.  The  term  ^f^jcfi,  '  more/  but 
which  is  declinable,  is  also  compounded  with  numerals  to 
denote  addition,  as  xr^rrfVcR  ^TT  ^  a  hundred  plus  five/  or 
'^  one  hundred  and  five.* 

Ordinals. 

15^.  The  ordinal  equivalent  of  ^  one*  or  ^  first*  is  most  com- 
monly inm,  declinable  in  three  genders,  TT^m:,  -iTT,  -4,  and 
according  to  the  rules  of  pronominal  inflexion  (p.  77).  Other 
synonymes  are,  ^rf^:,  "^rrer:,  Wlf^: ;  the  first  is  restricted  to  the 
masculine  gender,  the  others  are  declinable  in  three  genders* 

153.  In  forming  ordinals  from  the  other  cardinal  numbers, 
certain  terminations  are  either  added  to  or  are  substituted  for 
their  proper  finals,  and  the  word  is  declinable  in  the  three  gen- 
ders. In  the  case  of  ^"J^?  '  four,'  other  words  are  optionally 
substituted. 


fiTfm: 

-in 

--^ 

second. 

w: 

-^t 

-i 

sixth. 

^rfhr: 

-^ 

-^ 

third. 

TETBPRft 

-^ 

-^T 

seventh 

^^: 

-^ 

-%^ 

1 

-m»h: 

-Ht 

-^ 

eighth. 

^^: 

-"m 

■M 

s  fourth. 

^;t^: 

-T# 

-H 

ninth. 

^: 

•^ 

-^\ 

1 

^^: 

'^ 

-TT 

tenth. 

^"t^r: 

-^ 

-*T 

fifth. 

154.  The  termination  ^,  derived  from  the  technical  affix  ^, 
being  added  to  ^^T^»T  and  the  rest  as  far  as  twenty,  is  substi- 
tuted for  the  final  syllable,  leaving  ^^iST^-^:,  -^,  -H,  '  eleventh ;' 
iTT^^,  --^ft,  -"^,  '  twelfth,'  &c. 

155.  The  same  affix,  causing  the  elision  either  of  the  final  syl- 
lable or  final  vowel,  is  also  added  to  the  numerals  from  twenty 
upwards.      In  another  form  they  add  TTR  to  their  finals ;  as, 

N 


90  INDECLINABLES. 

r^^lPHriH:  or  fr^F:  twentieth.  ^MPririH:  or  iswtf:  seventieth. 

fci^lrlH:  or  fcT^:  thirtieth.  'il^nPririH:  or  ^r^ftw:  eightieth. 

^HlHCj^JriH:  or  'cihiPl^i:  fortieth.  "fl^frnw:  or  "JrTff:  ninetieth. 

^T^I^It^h:  or  M^i^i:  fiftieth.  '^iTWlVR:  or  ^nr:  hundredth. 
MpgrfH:  or  "^t  sixtieth. 

a.  In  these  as  in  the  cardinal  numbers  the  decimal  subdivi- 
sions are  expressed  by  prefixing  the  numeral^  as  ij^cf^PririH:  or 
^cRf^:  ^  one  and  twentieth.' 

b.  There  are  other  modifications  of  the  numerals,  declinable 
or  indeclinable,  in  different  shades  of  meaning ;  as,  "§^1^^ '  a  two/ 
^  a  duad  f  W^,  W^,  ^a  triad ;'  also  fkl!^  and  f^irq^  in  simi- 
lar senses.  f§t  '  twice  ;'  f^:  '  thrice ;'  J^fi^  or  ^^^i  '  once  -,' 
fsm  '  twice/  &c. :  but  these  belong  more  especially  to  the 
subject  of  derivation. 


CHAPTER   IV. 

INDECLINABLES. 

156.  The  indeclinable  words  of  the  Sanskrit  language  com- 
prehend nouns  used  as  nouns,  and  nouns  or  particles  used  as 
particles,  that  is,  in  some  other  sense  than  that  which  is 
expressed  by  a  noun  or  a  verb. 

157.  I.  Nouns  w^hich  retain  their  character  of  the  names  of 
things  or  notions,  but  which  are  employed  in  one  unalterable 
inflexion,  w^hatever  may  be  their  relation  to  the  other  members 
of  the  sentence  in  which  they  stand,  may  be  either  simple 
monoptote  nouns,  or  compounds  of  the  indeclinable  class :  the 
latter  will  be  noticed  when  treating  of  the  different  classes  of 
compounds :  the  former  are  not  numerous ;  the  principal  are 
the  following : 

^ki{*{  setting,  decline,   of  the      ^if^  remainder,  et  cetera. 

sun  or  of  fortune.  "sp^  water,  head,  happiness. 

^rftcT  what  is,  existence.  '^^Wl  patience,  pardon. 


ADVERBS.  91 

FT  food.  Ph*^^  a  pair. 

rpRTT  reverence,  salutation.  "^tt  a  year. 

^rrftcT  non-existence.  ^  the  fortnight  of  the  moon's 
"^f^  the  fortnight  of  the  moon's  increase. 

wane.  ^^  heaven. 

^^  sky,  atmosphere.  ^r%  salutation,  greeting. 
^  earth. 

«.  Besides  ^rf%,  as  specified  in  the  above  list,  there  are  a  few 
other  verbal  inflexions  which  may  be  used  in  the  sense  of 
nouns ;  as  H^frr  and  f^w  '  what  is,'  '  existence  ;'  ^ini^  ^  what 
may  be,'  ^  scepticism  :'  or  of  pronouns ;  as,  ^TftR  ^  I,'  properly 
*  I  am ;'  ^rftr  ^  thou,'  properly  ^  thou  art.'  They  are  also  used 
absolutely,  or  as  particles ;  as,  w^,  ^^  '  so  be  it,'  implying 
assent ;  ^f^  ^  come,'  ^  begin ;'  xf^  and  t[^^T(  '  see  !'  Ho  !'  ^  be- 
hold !'   and  a  few  others  of  rarer  occurrence. 

158.  2.  The  other  division  of  Indeclinables,  termed  PHmrii:, 
comprises  a  variety  of  terms,  the  origin  and  character  of  which 
are  sometimes  of  difficult  determination,  but  which,  from  the 
functions  they  fulfil,  may  be  considered  as  adverbs,  prepositions, 
conjunctions,  interjections,  expletives ;  and  particles  properly 
so  termed;  that  is,  syllables  which  are  affixed  or  prefixed  to 
words  to  modify  their  meaning,  although  in  themselves  they 
are  apparently  insignificant. 

Adverbs. 
159-  Adverbs  are  numerous,  and  are  variously  formed,  but 
they  are  in  most  instances,  and  very  possibly  in  all,  attributive 
nouns  adverbially  employed  in  some  one  or  other  unvarying 
inflexion.  The  prevailing  form  is  that  of  the  neuter  accusa- 
tive ;  offering  in  this  respect  an  analogy  to  such  Latin  adverbs 
as  ^  facile,'  *  difficile,'  '  dulce,'  '  ceterum,'  ^  multum,'  and  the 
Uke :  but  other  inflexions,  either  regularly  or  irregularly  con- 
structed, are  also  in  use  as  adverbs.  Thus  ^?PT,  ^  truth,' 
means  also  Hruly ;'  ^g^,  ^happiness,'  occurs  as  ^^  ^happily ;' 
fiT:,  -in,  -TT,  ^  done,'  furnishes  ^^^  ^  done  with,'  "^  enough  :' 

N  2 


9^ 


indeclinabl.es. 


from  wnf ,  *  place/  comes  wr%  ^  in  place/  ^  suitably/  *  fitly  / 
and  from  '^,  '  strength/  '  force/  ^^\^  '  by  force/  '  forcibly/ 
^  violently/  It  may  be  a  question  if  every  Sanskrit  noun  which 
is  capable  of  being  used  attributively  may  not  be  employed 
as  an  adverb,  to  denote  the  variations  of  mode,  circumstance, 
kind,  degree,  or  those  modifications  which  adverbs  are  intended 
to  express.  The  following  list  furnishes  some  of  those  in  most 
familiar  use.  The  manner  in  which  such  are  formed  as  differ 
from  the  inflexions  of  the  nouns  hitherto  described^  belongs 
to  the  head  of  derivation. 


^<*Wlf^   suddenly,   unexpect- 
edly, without  a  wherefore. 
^i|fi^  before,  preceding. 
^r$  before,  in  front  of. 

>Hp*(Urt^  >  without  delay. 

^ss^fer?^  continuously,  continu- 
aUy. 

^S^TRH^  ignorantly. 

^'»A^\  quickly. 

^Ri^  henccj,  hereafler,  more- 
over. 

^nft^  very  much, 

^rw  here. 

^n^r  so,  thus. 

^sr^f^  how-else,  yes. 

^rST  rightly,  truly,  clearly. 

^srer  to  day. 

^^1^  now,  at  present. 

Y  down,  downwards. 

^rV^cTT?^  below. 

^sn^T.*^  moreover,  further. 

>Hm\§^  the  day  after. 


^Y^  now. 

^gfTf^  always,  eternally. 

^(pfTO^    I  without,  except; 
^3nfi     [within,  among. 
'^RTTTir  J 

^HTir  moreover, 
^sn^  other,  otherwise. 
^niT^  elsewhere, 
^v^nn  otherwise. 
^rfHTT^quickly,  entirely , around. 


near. 


repeatedly,  quickly, 

^J^  quickly,  a  little. 

^^  there,  in  the  next  world. 

'sn?^  quickly. 

^rsfi  behind  in  time  or  place. 

'^rc?'^   enough;    it   is   also   a 
prefix. 

^r;?  without,  outside. 

^re^if^  repeatedly,  more  than 
once. 

^mrgfw  improperly,  unfitly. 

^ifrn=gr?nT    improperly,    unsea- 
sonably. 


ADVERBS. 


93 


SHjjIH  by  day. 

'51l»4Koh  1    successively,    seria- 

^n"5^  )         tim. 

^STRTTT  near,  afar. 

^m-t^^M^^  forcibly,  violently. 

wrf%^  present,  in  sight. 

^THT  hence,  from  hence. 

3[d^rif|^  here  and  there. 

^fiT  so,  thus,  ita. 

1[1R?T  again,  another, 

^rt\^^  either  day. 

^f^  traditionally. 

^7^  thus. 

^r^MlH,  now. 

H;^  clearly,  truly. 

^  like,  as,  so. 

1[5  here,  in  this  place,  in  this 

world. 
|;qi^  a  httle. 
■g^^  high,  loud. 
>Jrll*i,  subsequently. 
■g^^Tfr  a  subsequent  day. 
grrf^  secretly,  privately,  in  a 

whisper. 
'grn^lH^^  on  both  sides. 

"3"^  dawn. 

^^in^  rightly,  truly. 

"^V^  rightly,  truly. 

IJSRW  at  one  place,  together. 

itdhf^y  at  one  time. 

^oRVT  once. 

ijoCT^  at  the  same  moment. 

5Trff  at  this  time. 


^^  also,  verily,  so. 

^^  thus,  so,  as. 

^rt?^  yes,  so  be  it:  it  is  also 
an  inceptive  mystical  term 
prefixed  to  prayers  and 
charms. 

-.       >■  What  if,  how,  if  ever. 
«hvji|^  how. 

^       }•  some  how. 

c(iV|7(IH  how  then,  how  indeed. 

iR^  when. 

cfi^rf^  some  when,  some  time : 

^  ^R^tNt^  never. 
oRff  when,  at  what  time, 
cfif^f^  some  when,  at  some 

time. 
f<+r^'c4  what  truly,  what  indeed. 
f^R^  further,  moreover. 

f  a  little,  something ;  as 
^  ■<       Vvdth  a  negative  "^ 

^  I       fw^  nothing, 
"ftfi^  but,  also, 
f^  but  what,  but  how. 
fw^  what. 

f^pn^  what,  what  how. 
fcPTir  or  what,  or  also, 
fifig^  what,  how. 
f^Vr  or,  either,  but  how. 
f^hfel^  or  perhaps. 
f^R?5  indeed,  possibly, 
f^g  what  then,  how. 
^fW  whence,  how. 
"^  where. 


u 


INDECLINABLE^. 


^^P^rl^  somewhere. 

"^fVf^  abundantly. 

"^^  excellently. 

"^jqi^  excellently,  well. 

Y^  enough. 

■gi  where. 

^f^l^  somewhere  ;  7f  -^ifqif 
nowhere. 

Wf^  certainly. 

"Nl?^  a  long  time.  Other  cases 
of  this  noun  are  used  in  the 
same  sense,  as  Tmum,  f^m, 

INtxt^FT  for  a  long  time, 
^rr^  sometimes_,  some-w^hen. 
»fl^*^  silently,  happily, 
aift^  quickly,  frequently. 

^^^   I  quickly. 

■fTf^  (tt^)  therefore,  then. 
innr  thence,  from  or  after  that. 
ff^  there. 

iT^T  then,  at  that  time. 
ri<Hl'\  then. 

Tnrr  thus,  so. 

"rnnf^  thus,  thus  even. 
H^^  in  like  manner, 
ri^lrl^  therefore,  from  that. 
wf^  then,  at  that  time. 
iTRiT  so  far,  so  much. 

fcnS^  J         honestly, 
jm  thouing. 
^Uiflqhl*^^  silently. 
?^  silently. 


ffTC^    )    crookedly;   also  dis- 


^  by  that,  therefore. 

f^TT  by  day. 

f^^iTT  fortunately,  luckily. 

^t^R^  vilely,  badly. 

F^  badly. 

JTTT  far  off,  distant. 

^t^^  in  the  evening. 

^  I   speedily. 

fTf«FT  1  no-what,  nothing,  ex- 
ttT^  j       cept. 
iT^  by  night. 

>■  no,  not. 

'i'-H.^  only. 

^  I  no,  not. 

H  n  I  many,  various. 

"qTT  evidently,  verily. 

fH<*m  near. 

frRW^  willingly,  readily,  very. 

"^qTT  perhaps, 

"^rp^  certainly,  truly. 

rft  no,  not. 

^  perhaps. 

xnc?T^  after,  afterwards. 

"qt:^^  day  after  to-morrow. 

Xfirff^  all  round. 

xj^^pdfthe  morrow,  the  day  after. 

xn^TTW  sufficiently, abundantly. 

xj"3T  well,  good,  right. 

XHSTTf^  after^  afterwards,  behind, 

east. 
^^  again ;  ^:  ^^=R  again  and 

again,  repeatedly. 


ADVERBS, 


95 


"qtlHT    ^  before  either  in  place 

■gx^       >      or  time,  in  front, 

ycwift^ )       formerly. 

"TO  in  the  east,  in  front,  for- 
merly. 

YStt^  formerly,  in  front. 

H^-iff  day  before,  yesterday, 
forenoon. 

w^     separately,     distinctly, 
apart. 

vin  in  the  morning. 

HWT^  widely. 

Tfn'T  1  .  ,  . 

>■  wearily,  with  fatigue. 

irffff^^  daily,  day  by  day. 
injTT  on  the  contrary,  otherwise. 
TWT^  early,  in  the  morning. 

Tm'^  violently,  forcibly. 

irr«^  before  in  place  or  time, 
in  front,  formerly,  in  pre- 
sence of,  east,  hereafter. 

irrfl^  early,  in  the  morning. 

T^t^^^  in  a  contrary  way,  con- 
tinuously. 

VT^^  mostly,  for  the  most 
part. 

ill^  in  the  forenoon. 

^Tqr  after  death,  in  the  next 
world. 

'qTHTr^  1  violently,  by  violence 

'4c6[t{  )        or  force. 

"^rf^^  out,  without,  outside. 

>Tnr^  speedily,  quickly. 


} 


at  the  same  time. 


i|Tnr  again,  repeatedly ;  much, 

abundantly. 
>J^P^  much,  very  much. 
?r^  speedily,  quickly. 
i1HI<*  a  httle,  slowly,  dully. 
ITT  or  »rrT  1    no,    not ;    prohi- 
HT^  )       bitive  ^  do  not.* 

/^  >■  no,  not,  except. 

HlP^iii^  without  delay. 

fir!m^  )  together,  mutually,  in 

frnft  j       conjunction. 

f«T2iyT  falsely. 

gVT  vainly,  idly,  unprofitably. 

g^  repeatedly. 

^^  falsely. 

^^  (^5)  whcit ;  Tnr,  TTi^,  that- 

which. 
irnTfT  whence,  wherefore. 
"H^  where. 

"ZHTT  as ;  if^,  wm,  so-as. 
xnn^rqT^  any  how ;   seldom, 
xnrr^^  in  order  or  succession. 
^r^rTfT^  properly,  rightly. 
^T  when. 
iTT^  as  far  as,  as  much  as ;  ^Nrf^, 

TTTTi^,  as  much  as,  so  much. 
XToR  bad,  ill. 
'^W{  fitly,  properly. 
^nm{  (--q^)  at  once. 
'^  bad,  ill. 

^  wherefore,  why,  because. 
TT#  by  night. 
^^  like,  as. 
^T^  only. 


96 


INDECLINABLES. 


r^Him  in  two  ways,  optionally, 

alternately. 
r«im<*  universally. 
fVg  many. 

f^^TTmr  aloft,  in  the  air. 
^T  vainly,  idly. 
%  verily,  indeed. 
51^^  slowly. 

^rn^  eternally,  continually. 
5To|3^  quickly. 

^^  speedily. 

^7^  well,  good,  right. 

^nnnT  always. 

"^^j  always. 

^renr  at  the  same  time. 

f     always,    continually, 
j  eternally. 


^nfHt^  entirely,  rightly. 

lErginftT^  happily. 

'^'Hlfri  now,  at  this  time. 

^'iJ^H  before,  in  the  presence 
or  face  of. 

^IT?[T^    entirely,     completely ; 
rightly,  properly. 

"^"tinr     wholly,     every    way, 
every  where. 

^"t^  every  where. 

^^^  always. 

^^4^1  hastily,  precipitately. 

^IHflt^  visibly,  manifestly ;  be- 
fore or  in  sight. 

^rrf%  awry,  indirectly. 

wrfJT  half,  equally. 

^TFgrm  now,  opportunely,  fitly* 

^i\^^^  evening. 

TTofiJ^  very,  exceedingly. 


^'gUTC.  in  concealment,  privily.      ^"Ntw  for  a  long  time. 
W^f^  at  once.  KiTT  uselessly,  idly. 

^»TRnr^  wholly,  altogether,  all     ^  good,  excellent,  very 

about,  all  round,  on  every     W^^  of  one's-self. 

side. 
W{\  together,  equally. 
W^l  near  to. 

^nfhr'^  1  near  to,  in  the  pre 
^rrft^    j        sence  of. 


f^  verily,  for,  because, 
f^^^  without,  except. 
%fft:  ^  because,   by   reason 
^7^  j        on  account  of. 
i?rF  yesterday. 


or 


The  same  difficulty  that  exists  in  other  languages  applies  to 
various  terms  in  the  preceding  list,  and  they  may  be  sometimes 
thoyght  to  be  rather  conjunctions  or  prepositions  than  adverbs. 
Several,  no  doubt,  fulfil  either  office,  and  in  any  case  the 
embarrassment  is  that  rather  of  denomination  than  of  appli- 
cation, as  the  connexion  of  the  sentence  will  readily  point  out 
the  sense  in  which  they  are  to  be  employed. 


INDECLINABLES.  97 

Prepositions* 

160.  The  most  important  of  these  are  used  chiefly  in  com- 
bination with  simple  verbs,  and  form  with  them  compound  or 
derivative  verbs,  which,  either  in  their  own  inflexions,  or  those 
of  the  nouns  derived  from  them,  constitute  the  bulk  of  the 
language.  The  verbs  thus  compounded  sometimes  retain  the 
meaning  of  the  original,  or  more  frequently  they  have  the 
sense  of  their  component  elements;  but  in  many  instances 
they  express  significations  which  depart  widely  from  those 
which  they  might  be  expected  from  their  composition  to  con- 
vey. In  all  these  respects  they  offer  striking  analogies  to  the 
compound  verbs  of  the  Greek,  Latin,  and  German  languages. 
A  preposition  combined  with  a  verb  is  termed  an  Upasarga 
(•g-iT^:).  The  name  Gati  (irfiT:)  is  also  given  to  it,  as  well  as 
to  other  verbal  prefixes.  The  Upasargas  are  twenty-one  in 
number. 

a.  The  principal  or  primary  notion  conveyed  by  these  prepo- 
sitions is  in  general  sufficiently  obvious,  and  may  be  rendered 
by  equivalents  in  English  or  in  the  classical  languages.  Usage, 
convention,  and  metaphor,  however,  extend  the  primary  notion 
through  a  variety  of  modifications,  which  can  become  familiar 
only  by  practice.  The  explanation  of  them  all  is  the  province 
of  a  dictionary,  and  in  this  place  all  that  can  be  attempted  is 
the  explanation  of,  i.  the  principal  purport  of  each  preposi- 
tion ;  2.  the  equivalents  by  which  it  is  usually  translated ; 
and  3.  its  exemplification  by  nouns  of  frequent  occurrence, 
derived  from  verbs  compounded  of  a  simple  verb  and  a  prepo- 
sition ;   as  in  the  following  arrangement. 

wfir  I.  Going  beyond  a  real  or  imaginary  limit:  2.  ^  over,* 
'beyond,^  Urans,'  ^ex:^  3.  "^rfirWH:  (i)  Agoing  over  or 
beyond  f  (3)  ^  transgression  f  ^aCA^m:  '  excess.' 

^^riV  I.  Being  above  in  place  or  degree:  2.  ^  over,' '  above/ 
'upon,'   'super:'    3,   'grfvHH:    (i)   'going    over    or    on;' 

Q 


Q8  INDECLINABLES. 

{2,)  '  going  over  or  through/  as  a  book  ;  ^rfVofiTt:  *  office/ 
^  superintendence  /  ^nzTTWT  ^  presiding  spirit.' 

^nr  I.  After  in  order  or  manner:  2.  '  after/  Mike:'  3.  ^T^^^: 
^  a  follower  /  ^r^^w:  '  an  index,'  '  a  series  /  ^g^rfin  ^  imi- 
tation/ 

^FfR  I .  Coming  within  a  space  or  interval :  %,  ^  inner/ 
^  within/  '  inter/  ^  unter  :'  3.  'SRrtirf  '  disappearance  / 
WnrtTJft  '  the  pervading  or  inner  soul/ 

^Ttr  1.  Taking  away  in  substance  or  kind:  2.  'from,'  'away/ 
'  oiF/  airo,  '  de/  '  dis/  '  ex  :'  3.  ^iicj^n::  '  carrying  off  / 
^nm^:  '  detraction,'  '  censure.' 

^srfiT  I.  Affirming  of  a  certainty:  2.  'verily/ 'indeed'  (but  this 
is  more  frequently  used  alone,  as  an  adverb  or  conjunc- 
tion): 3.  wftniFf  ^  a  covering :'  it  is  also  fwFf,  the  initial 
being  rejected. 

^rfk  I .  Being  present,  opposite,  or  near  to ;  also,  being 
above  in  place  or  degree  :  2.  '  to,'  '  unto,'  '  ad  /  '  before,' 
'  opposite,'  '  ob  /  '  up,'  '  super :'  3.  ^rfW^  '  in  front  or  in 
presence  of/  shPhjih:  'approach/  ^riWR:  'a  high  land/ 
"^mnr:  '  a  person  of  high  rank.' 

^r^  I.  Being  below  in  place  or  degree ;  also,  being  sepa- 
rated :  2.  '  down/  *  off/  '  from,'  '  de/  '  dis,' '  ex :'  3*  ^TTiTTT: 
'  coming  down  as  from  heaven  to  earth  /  SH'^oh^H  '  cutting 
off,'  '  excision  /  ^M'lri:  '  gone  away/  '  departed  /  sh'^jOh: 
'  despised.' 

^T  or  ^^rr^  J.  Bounding  or  limiting;  also  reversing:  2.  'to,' 
'  unto/  '  as  far  as,'  '  ad,'  '  re :'  3.  *ii|<*K:  '  form  /  ^srnfiTZfT: 
'sky;'  ippnf  'going;'  ^TPm^  'coming;'  ^  ^  gift'  or 
'  giving ;'  ^TT^'pf  '  taking.'  It  is  also  used  conjunctively 
with  nouns  in  the  ablative  case :  as,  ^i^lHIrt^  '  as  far  as  to 
the  village ;'  ^rra^'^Tl^  '  as  far  as  to  the  ocean.' 

T7^  or  "^  I.  Being  high  in  place  or  excellent  in  kind  :  2. '  up,' 
'  above,'  '  superior,'  '  super,'  '  valde  :'  T^*  '  flying  up  ;' 
Ti^:  '  excellent ;'  TSR:  '  great  effort.' 

TH  I .  Being  near  or  next  to ;  whence  also,  being  less  than : 


PREPOSfTIONS.  99 

2.  *  near/  *  less/  viro,  '  sub/  '  infra:'  3.  Ttpm:  *  approach  / 
^M^r^:  ^  a  minor  Veda  or  scripture.' 

ft:   1.  Condition   of  badness,  pain,  difficulty,   and    the    like: 

3.  ^  in/  '  un/  ^i;?,  '  dis  :'  3.  ^i^mk:  ^  wicked  /  ^:#  ^  un- 
happiness/  ^  pain  /  ^W^:  '  unbearable  /  ^t^:  '  difficult  of 
access.' 

frf  I.  Being  within,  below,  or  under ;  also,  being  contrary 
or  reverse :   2.  ^  in,'  ^  on,'  ev,  ^  in  /  ^  down,'  ^  sub  /  ^  un'  or 

*  in/  ^  r€  :'  3.  f^JT^rr:  *  a  dwelling  /  f^T^ir:  '  a  heap  /  PHMriH 
^  coming  dow^n  /  fn^fd:  ^  iniquity.' 

ftfiC.  I.  Being  out  or  exempt  from;  whence  also  affirmation, 
as  excluding  doubt :  2.  ^  out,'  ^  without,'  ^  ex,'  ^  ab/  ^  ne :' 
3.  f^^.  ^  going  forth,'  '  exit  /  fw^:  ^  certainty  /  Ph^m: 
^  faultless/ 

^TTT   I.  Being  opposite  or  opposed   to;  whence  also  reverse: 

2.  ^  over,'  ^  back,'  xa^a,  '  ob,'  ^  re,'  ^  de  :'  3,  tto^  ^  turned 
back ;'  ijCR^t  '  defeat.' 

ijfc  I .  Being  all  round  or  about ;  whence  also  fulness, 
completeness  :   2.  ^  about,'  '  around,'  irepi,  '  per,'  *  circum :' 

3.  'qfftfv:  ^  circumference ; '    T^fWR:   ^  maturity  ;'    irft^RTO 

*  perfection  of  fabric/ 

H  I.  Being  before  in  time,  place,  or  quality:  2.  'fore/  'be- 
fore,' '  above,'  irpo,  '  pro,'  '  prae  :'  3.  TW^:  '  first  birth ;' 
inrraf  '  going  forth,'  '  proceeding ;'  IWT^:  '  preeminence.' 

nfw  I.  Reverted,  or  reflected,  or  repeated  action  or  condi- 
tion :  2.  'again/  'back/  're:'  3.  Tlfff^RR:  '  retaUation/ 
'  requital ;'  uPriHim  '  reply ;'  irfflf^^  '  a  reflected  image  ;' 
irfirf^  '  day  by  day/ 

f^  I.  Being  several  or  separate;  whence  also  privation: 
2.  '  apart,'  '  away/  '  without/  '  dis,'  '  de/  *  se :'  3.  "N^fiTC 
'  separate  or  new  form/  '  change  of  form ;'  Pm^I'I:  '  dis- 
junction/ '  separation  ;'  f^%^:  '  distinction ;'  fr^^t;  '  with- 
out ears.' 

TO  I .  Being  conjoined  with ;  whence  also  completeness : 
2.  '  with/  '  together  with/  avv,  '  con  :'  3.  ^T^:  '  associa- 

o  2 


100  INDECLINABLES. 

tion ;'  ^nftt:  *  union ;'    4i«hK:  *  perfect  fabric  or  perform- 
ance.' 
^  1.  The  opposite  of  H^,  or  condition  of  happiness,  ease,  and 
the  like  :   3.  '  good,*  *  well,'  eu,  *  bene  :'  ^^  *  happiness  ;' 
?r^xr:  '  handsome.' 

b.  Some  of  these  prepositions  are  used  separately  or  without 
verbs,  especially  ^rfir,  ^rfv,  ^^,  w^^,  ^R,  wfvr,  Wi,  T^,  xrft, 
and  irfw;  and  there  are  others  which  are  not  subject  to  be  com- 
pounded with  verbs;  as,  "^sptftir  *  except,'  ^<mT  *  with,'  ^^ '  except,' 
f^irfr  *  without'  or  '  except,'  and  ^^,  ^,  ^rf^TH^,  TETRiJ^,  or  ^RTt»^, 
'  with,'  *  together  with.'  Some  of  the  words  given  as  adverbs 
may  be  considered  as  prepositions ;  as  w(f^,  «*flq,  'near  to.' 

c.  Besides  prepositions  in  the  sense  in  which  they  are  usually 
understood,  a  number  of  words  which  are  actually  or  were 
originally  nouns,  of  which  some  are  included  in  the  above  list 
of  adverbs,  are  prefixed  in  one  unvarying  or  uninflected  form, 
analogously  to  particles,  to  the  verbs  w^  *  to  be,'  ij^ '  to  be'  or 
*  become,*  and  cfi  '  to  do.'  To  these,  in  native  gi'ammars,  the 
term  Gati,  '  motion'  or  '  transition,'  is  extended ;  and  a  few  of 
them  may  be  conveniently  specified  here,  as  illustrative  of  the 
manner  in  which  they  are  used  with  nouns  derived  from  the 
verbs  above  specified. 

^n^T%  assisting  the  weak ;     %M.Ni^<*uii  giving  such  assistance. 
^rt*|^  ornament ;  WcJljTT::  decoration. 

'fiilP^^  manifestation  ;  ^rRb|if:  appeared. 


"rt     I  f  ^t^Not  &c.  promising,  making 

^  assent ;  "^ 


gitT^  f  '  I       assent. 

^  J 

dk^\(6i   V  striking;  *«llc!0*J7r:  &c.  wounded,  slain. 

WR^  diffusion  ;  rTTTI^tHlf:  diffused. 

rf»nr  reverence  ;  HHl<hK:  reverential  salutation. 

TT^  an  animal,  a  victim ;  ^T3[p|Tf:  hurt,  slain. 


CONJUNCTIONS, 


101 


tnrj^  in  the  hand  ; 
Hlgfi^  manifestation 
Tfizsp^  continuity ; 
T5r^  faith ; 
.^1^  good ; 
;frr^Tc^  manifestly ; 


miiffcfclAU  marriage. 

Trr^tftcT  appearance. 

mwfrf  tied  in  regular  order. 

^r^rr^raf  believing,  trusting. 

^(c^lU  treating  kindly  or  hospitably. 

^IKjI^'cf:  being  manifest. 

Most  nouns  may  also  be  combined  in  this  manner  with  verbs 
by  the  substitution  of  the  technical  affix  f^,  leaving  the  vowel 
^  for  their  finals;  as,  ^raiT  ^  black;'  ^U»n<*^^i  'blackening,' 
'  making  black,'  &c, :  but  this  subject  belongs  to  derivation. 


Conjunctions, 
161.  The  principal  conjunctions  are  the  following: 

r  inceptive,  used  to  begin  a  fsR^  but,  or,  moreover. 

'  ^  -^       sentence  or  a  subject;  fopfT^iT  or,  perhaps. 

V.      'now,' 'then,' *  thus.'  "^  and,  or,  but. 

^rfiT  and,  also.  %?^  if. 

^rr^  1  %^  and  also. 

*>,  >-  but,  how.  ,    ^ 

^^HfT  j         '  W  but. 

^sm^tfer^  inceptive,  and  imply-  ^  but  how ;  implying  doubt. 

ing  doubt.  "qTr  but  not. 

^fcT  conclusive,  used  to  finish  Tfg  but,  if,  is  not,  nonne. 

a   sentence    or    a   subject ;  fTTr  or  not,  if  not. 

'  so  it  is,'  '  finis.'  •?  if,  how ;  implying  doubt. 

"^TT  also,  or.  "^op^  either,  or. 

TiTT^  ]  whether ;  implying  g^  perhaps,  or  if. 

TfTT^j    doubt  or  interrogation.  %T^  if . 


^^  also. 

f%^  but. 

f^fi^  but. 

f^^  but  how ;  implying  doubt. 

f^  how,  but. 

n+^rr  or  how,  or  also. 

r**j^  or  how,  or  what. 


?ft^  if  not. 

^  if,  perhaps. 

iTf^if. 

TT  or,  either. 

^if. 

f^  for,  because. 


102  INDECLINABLES. 


Interjections. 


162.  These  are  numerous  :  they  are  mostly  sounds  devoid  of 
signification,  other  than  the  unpremeditated  utterance  of  natural 
emotions :  some  are  significant  words,  and  of  them  some  are 
capable  in  other  senses  of  inflexion,  although  others  appear  to 
have  become  obsolete  both  in  inflexion  and  meaning. 

Of  the  simple  exclamations  the  principal  are  the  vowels,  as 
^  ^srr,  ^  ^5  T  "31,  "^  ^,  ^,  ^,  which  may  express  surprise  or 
sorrow,  Hke  ^  ah !'  '  eh  !^  and  ^srfiT,  ^l^,  ^^r^,  ^r^,  ^n^>Mri,  l^,  ^, 
"^T^,  are  exclamations  of  a  similar  kind.  Others  are,  f^ff 
implying  *  contempt  -'  f^  importing  the  same,  also  ^  grief,^ 
'  alas  !'  ^  ah  me  !'  ^TT  implying  ^  grief;'  ^  '  anger'  or  ^  sorrow ;' 
^T^  or  ^T^  ^  grief;'  f%i^  '  alarm ;'  ^  *  displeasure,'  &c. 

a.  Vocative  particles,  used  in  speaking  or  calling  to,  are 
frequently  employed  ;  some  of  which  are  respectful,  others 
disrespectful.  Of  the  former  class  are,  ^ift,  ^r^,  ^T^,  ^T^^t^^, 
^,  ^,  ^,  w,  VJZ,  'on^,  >TTf^  H^T,  ^^,  %,  %  ^.  Of  the  latter 
are,  ^,  W^,  t,  ^.      'W5F  may  be  used  in  either. 

b.  Some  ejaculatory  syllables  are  mystical,  like  the  monosyl- 
lable ^ft?^,  which  is  typical  of  the  three  great  deities  of  the 
Hindu  mythology,  Brahma,  Vishnu,  and  S'iva,  and  of  the 
three  Vedas,  and  should  never  be  uttered  in  the  hearing  of 
ears  profane.  Others  are  used  with  charms  and  mystical 
prayers  peculiar  to  certain  sects ;  as  ^,  ^,  ^*,  1^^.  Others, 
again,  of  which  some  are  significant  words,  are  uttered  in  the 
act  of  pouring  oiled  butter  on  the  sacrificial  fire,  as  a  libation 
to  the  manes  or  the  gods ;  as  ^TT,  ^,  ^^,  ^^,  ^^^j  ^VT, 
and  ^rr^. 

Expletives, 

163.  Syllables  used  mostly  to  complete  the  metre  of  a  line 
are  considered  to  be  devoid  of  signification  ;  they  are,  fsFcJ,  ^^, 
^^  ^5  ^5  %  Wj  ^  "f^  j  being  identical,  therefore,  for  the  most 
part  with  the  conjunctions. 


INTERJECTIONS EXPLETIVES PARTICLES.  103 

Particles, 

164.  These  are  syllables  added  to  words,  either  as  prefixes 
or  affixes,  to  qualify  their  purport.  The  specification  of  them 
properly  belongs  to  derivation,  but  a  few  may  be  advantage- 
ously noticed  here. 

^  may  be  prefixed  to  nouns  of  any  kind,  to  give  them  a  con- 
trary or  negative  sense ;   as,  V'^:  *  virtue/  wir»#:  *  vice  ;'  ^ 
'  being,^  ^mi^  '  non-existent.'    Before  a  vowel  it  is  changed 
to  ^T^;  as,  "^^R^:  '  finite,'  ^m^d:  '  infinite,'  *  eternal.' 
^  is  a  prefix  implying  '  surprise  ;'  ^?^w  *  wonderful  !' 
oRT  prefixed  to  nouns  gives   them  a  depreciatory  sense;    as, 
yi%M:  *  a  man,'  cfiiy^-tc:  *  a  contemptible  man,'  *  a  wretch.' 
It  also  signifies  '  diminution  ;'   as,  cRT  +  THU  =  ohluil  *  a  little 
warm.' 
^  is  also  a  depreciatory  prefix ;  "^p^  *  wickedness.' 
'qiT  1  These  are  added  to  pronouns  and  adverbs  to  give  them 
f%7^  )       a  more  extended  sense ;   as,  cfT^y^,  cfcOyif^  '  any  one,' 

*  some  one ;'  ^5r5zng^,  ^SR^rf^ff  '  any  how ;'  ^ifff^  '  any  where,' 
&c. 

Wf^  implies  ^  resemblance,'  as  "^l^l^lMit^  ^  like  a  Brahman.' 

I5R  is  usually  an  expletive,  but  when  affixed  to  a  verb  in  a 

present  tense  it  gives  it  a  past  signification ;  as,  H^rfrT  '  it 

is,'  ^^PriW  *  it  was.'    It  is  also  used  with  the  prohibitive  m 

or  ?nT ;  as,  HWT  *  no,'  '  not,'  '  do  not.' 
i%f^  is  added  to  particles  to  imply  *  doubt  and  interrogation ;' 

as,  i^fi^Ti;  *  How  is  it?'  'Is  it  so?'  'sr^tf^  *  Whether?' 

*  Is  it  so  ?'  and  the  like. 

^  prefixed  to  cB  and  its  derivatives  implies  '  consent ;'   <a1«niO 
'  assent,'  '  promise.' 


104  CONJUGATION. 

CHAPTER    V. 

CONJUGATION. 

SECTION  I. 
Roots  and  indicatory  letters. 

165.  The  vrj  or  '  radicaP  of  the  Sanskrit  language^  although 
in  strictness  it  fulfils  no  specific  grammatical  function^  and  is 
equally  the  theme  of  a  noun  as  of  a  verb,  may  be  most  con- 
veniently considered  as  identical  with  the  latter,  or  as  the 
crude  verb ;  in  which  condition  it  undergoes  the  usual  modi- 
fication of  conjugation,  and  the  varieties  of  voice,  mood,  and 
tense. 

166.  As  arranged  in  the  Dhatu-pafhas  (illijm^i:)  or  ^glossaries 
of  roots,^  the  root  is  usually  interpreted  by  an  active  or  abstract 
noun  in  the  locative  case ;  as,  ^^-f^HPt  '  in'  division  ;  JFT-TTlft 
^in^  going;  ^J^^TfTRf  ^  in'  being;  ^T-FR  ^  in'  knowledge; 
and  the  like ;  intimating  one  general  and  comprehensive  idea 
to  which  the  different  modifications  expressed  by  its  deriva- 
tives may  be  referred. 

167.  AH  the  roots,  with  a  few  doubtful  exceptions,  as 
WTf^t^  *  swinging,'  -sHNUlt '  ascertaining,'  ^Ic4  *  playing,'  tj^ 
'  seeking,'  are  monosyllables :  many  of  them  are  unihteral,  as 
^  '  going,'  "^  '  injuring :'  the  greater  number,  however,  termi- 
nate in  consonants,  as  w^  '  discussion,'  VM  *  sounding,'  KT^ 
*  shining.'  In  all  cases,  however,  the  root  has  some  vowel, 
most  usually  the  short  ^,  attached  to  the  final  consonant,  not 
as  a  radical  letter,  but  for  the  sake  of  pronunciation  or 
accentuation,  and  the  mark  of  quiescence  is  therefore  not 
subjoined :  the  roots  specified,  although  ending  as  radicals  in 
consonants,  are  written,  it#,  JT»f,  >TRr.  The  whole  number  is 
about  nineteen  hundred. 

168.  In  the  original  lists  the  roots  have  attached  to  them 
certain  supernumerary  letters  or  Anubandhas  (^g^»vr:),  which 
have  one  of  two  objects ;   i .  Some  of  them  denote  the  class  or 


ROOTS  AND  INDICATORY  LETTERS.  105 

conjugation  in  which  the  verb  is  inflected ;  ;2.  Others  intimate 
those  pecuUarities  to  which  each  single  verb  is  subject  in  its 
inflexions.  It  will  be  useful  to  specify  the  principal  of  either 
class  for  the  sake  of  occasional  reference. 

I.  General  Anubandhas. 


lign. 

Verb. 

Conjugation. 

H 

'^  75 

second. 

fH 

1  f75 

third. 

"JT 

f^^ 

fourth. 

^ 

I^ 

fifth. 

^ 

I^^ 

sixth. 

XT 

^V^ 

seventh. 

^ 

THT^ 

eighth. 

n 

^n 

ninth. 

^ 

T^^ 

tenth 
(  a  subdivision  of  the  first  conju- 

^ 

1^^^ 

(      gation,  ^  and  other  verbs. 

^ 

^qil$ 

another  subdivision. 

2.  Special  Anubandhas, 

^  is  added  to  all  roots  not  terminating  in  any  other  radical 
or  indicatory  vowel ;  as  TJV  (^  +  ^).  This  vowel  should  be 
accented,  and  the  accents  mark  the  voice  in  which  the  verb  is 
conjugated.  The  grave  shews  that  the  verb  takes  the  voice 
which  is  termed  the  i^tmane-pada,  'the  reflective;'  the  acute 
accent  indicates  the  Parasmai-pada  or  *  transitive ;'  and  the 
circumflex  denotes  that  the  verb  takes  both  voices.  The 
accents,  however,  are  no  longer  marked  in  manuscripts. 

^!rr  denotes  the  optional  insertion  of  i^  before  the  affix  of  one 
of  the  past  participles,  and  its  absolute  insertion  before  an- 
other; as,  Pn^I  (fE^  +  ^  ^  to  perspire;^  indef.  past  part. 
^Q^ri:  or  "fisrw:  ;   perfect  past  part,  'ftrf^f?^'^. 

^  indicates  the  insertion  of  a  nasal  after  a  radical  vowel  in 
all  the  tenses ;  as,  fiFff^  for  f^  '  to  abuse  ;^  nin^fd,  fHf^ff^ 
f«Tf^Trr,  &c. 


106  CONJUGATION. 

^^  indicates  two  modes  of  inflecting  the  indefinite  past ;  as, 
^5^^  (^  +  ^)j  '  to  swell/  makes  either  ^TBRtrh^  or  ^^^. 

^  prohibits  the  insertion  of  ^  in  the  past  participle  ;  as, 
"3^  ("^  +  %)  ^  to  wet  /  past  part.  "^^. 

T  marks  the  optional  insertion  of  ^  in  the  indeclinable  past 
participle  ;   as,  ^  '  to  tame'  (^^  +  "3-),  ^f»n^T  or  ^Tn^. 

"31  indicates  the  optional  insertion  of  ^  in  certain  of  the 
tenses ;  as,  fqv  (f^  +  "gj),  '  to  accomplish ;'  definite  future, 
&^  or  ^fvnT ;  indefinite  future,  ^M^fri  or  ^fVoTfiT ;  indef.  past 
^?fr^  or  ^V^rT. 

^  prohibits  the  substitution  of  a  short  vow^el  for  a  radical 
long  one  in  the  indefinite  past  of  the  causal  verb;  as,  ^ft^ 
(^ft^  +  '^)  ^  to  sprinkle,'  ^rf^n^fhBTf^. 

"^  denotes  that  this  is  optional ;  as,  >?T5{  (^JT»r  +  "^),  ^  to 
shine,^  makes  either  ^rf%>JMH^  or  ^^^nn^. 

o5  restricts  the  indefinite  past  of  the  simple  verb  to  one 
form ;  as,  xfH  (xpsr  +  oj)  ^  to  eat ;'  indef.  past  ^nmif . 

^  prohibits  the  substitution  of  a  Vriddhi  letter  in  the  inde- 
finite past ;  as,  's^  ( ofi^  +  ^)  ^  to  encompass ;'  indef.  past  Wofi^fhr 
not  ^°M<f1ri^. 

^  indicates  the  change  of  the  usual  termination  of  the 
past  participle,  W  to  fT  ^  as,  HW^  (h^  +  ^)  '  to  break  /  past 
part.  Httt:. 

^  prohibits  the  insertion  of  ^  in  those  tenses  in  which  it 
might  else  be  inserted ;  as  T>ft  (t>T  +  ^)  '  to  begin ;'  def.  fut. 
T3TT;  indef.  fut.  1:4^ frl ;  indef.  past  ^TCST. 

1?  indicates  the  reflective  voice  ;  as,  f«il^  (f»5R  +  '^)  ^  to  smile,' 

^  indicates  both  voices  ;  as,  fjT's^  (f^  +  ^ )  '  to  serve,^  ^^fif 
or  ^RW. 

fsT  indicates  the  optional  employment  of  the  past  participle 
in  the  sense  of  the  present ;  as,  fsyfi^  ^  to  perspire ;'  "fe^ 
^  perspiring,'  ^  perspired.'  This  is  an  instance  of  what  is  not 
uncommon,  the  annexation  of  more  than  one  Anubandha  to  a 
verb.     The  present  occurs  in  the  lists,  as  fHftNc^l. 


VERBS.  107 

J  indicates  that  the  verb  may  take  the  affix  ^  to  form 
abstract  or  active  nouns ;  as,  7^xr  ^  to  tremble  ;'  wg:  *  a  trem- 
bling/ ^  a  tremor/ 

T  indicates  the  formation  of  participial  nouns  with  the  affix 
fpnr;   as,  Tcr^  ^to  cook'  or  ^ ripen;'  ^f=m  ^cooked/  'ripened/ 

"ET  indicates  the  formation  of  feminine  derivatives  with  7V{, 
as  in  the  case  of  the  last  quoted  verb  X(^,  which  occurs  ^^T^, 
and  therefore  forms  the  derivative,  xp^  '  cooking,'  '  maturing.' 

With  regard  to  the  roots  themselves  it  may  be  added,  that 
those  which  in  the  lists  are  marked  as  beginning  with  the 
cerebral  nasal  or  sibilant,  w  or  "R,  change  usually  those  letters 
in  inflexion  to  the  corresponding  dentals ;  so  ^PT,  ^  to  bow,' 
makes  fTrrfTf  '  he  bows ;'  ^,  '  to  bear,'  ^^n|W  '  he  bears.'  There 
are  a  few  exceptions. 

SECTION    II. 
Classes  or  Conjugations  of  Verbs, 

169.  The  conjugational  inflexion  of  Sanskrit  verbs  is  effected 
by  a  scheme  similar  to  that  which  has  been  described  under 
the  head  of  the  Declension  of  nouns.  The  verb  in  its  inflected 
form  is  composed  of  two  elements ;  i .  the  Anga  or  '  base,' 
the  modified  verb  to  which  the  inflexions  are  subjoined;  and 
%.  certain  letters  or  syllables  which  constitute  the  inflectional 
terminations,  and  are  subjoined  to  the  base.  These  termina- 
tions, which  will  be  presently  specified,  are  subject  to  but  few 
changes  in  themselves ;  but  there  is  some  variety  in  the  man- 
ner of  attaching  them  to  the  base.  The  crude  verb,  on  the 
contrary,  is  liable  to  a  greater  number  of  modifications,  most 
of  which  are  special ;  that  is,  they  are  restricted  to  the  indi- 
vidual instance  ;  and,  as  not  being  reducible  to  general  rules, 
they  constitute  the  chief  difficulty  of  Sanskrit  grammar. 

170.  Certain  changes,  affecting  a  greater  or  lesser  number 
of  verbs  ahke,  have  the  effect  of  distributing  them  into  ten 
classes  or  conjugations.  These  changes  regard  the  manner  in 
which  the  base  is  fitted  to  receive  the  affixes,  either  immedi- 
ately, or  mediately  through  the  intervention  of  a  vowel  or  a 

p  z 


108  VERBS. 

syllable,  accompanied  in  some  instances  by  the  substitution 
of  a  GuAa  vowel  for  the  vowel  either  of  the  base  or  of  the 
adjunct,  when  it  is  capable  of  such  substitution. 

a.  Each  conjugation  is  designated  by  a  word  compounded 
of  the  first  verb  of  the  conjugation  with  the  term  ^rrf^,  equi- 
valent to  *  et  cetera/  added  to  it.  They  are  severally,  i .  v^rf^ 
or  >T 'to  be,'  and  other  verbs;  2.  "^l^Tf^  or  ^  '  to  eat/  and 
others  ;  3.  ^3fTfc^  or  ^  ^  to  sacrifice/  &c. ;  4.  f^^^  or  f^^ 
*  to  sport,'  &c. ;  5.  W^  or  "^  *  to  bear,'  &c. ;  6.  "g^lf^  or  ^ 
'  to  tease,'  &c. ;  7.  "^vrf^  or  ^v  '  to  obstruct/  &c. ;  8.  TRTf^  or 
TR  '  to  stretch/  &c. ;  9.  ^^^^  or  ■#  '  to  buy,'  &c. ;  10.  "^^ 
or  ^t:  '  to  steal,'  &c.  The  following  are  the  characteristic 
peculiarities. 

I.  The  first  conjugation,  ^^rf^,  interposes  ^  between  the 
final  of  the  verb  and  the  inflectional  termination,  and  requires 
the  Guna  change  of  the  simple  vowel.  Thus  before  fw,  the 
affix  of  the  third  person  singular  of  the  present  tense,  the  verb 
i|^  ^  to  be'  substituting  GuAa  becomes  ift,  and  ^  being  inserted, 
^  with  ^  becomes  wm  the  entire  form  therefore  is  (n^-fff) 
H^fifr.  Before  the  letters  %  ^,  of  a  termination  this  ^  is  made 
long ;  as,  H^lfn  *  I  am.' 

Q,.  In  the  second  conjugation,  ^^iH^,  the  affixes  are  attached 
immediately  to  the  base,  with  only  such  change  as  the  rules  of 
Sandhi  require :  ^,  ^  to  eat,'  with  fw  makes  ("^-fiT)  ^r%. 

3.  The  third  conjugation,  called  »T5|Tf^,  requires  the  redu- 
plication of  the  base,  and  the  substitution  of  the  Guna  vowel 
before  certain  terminations :  no  vowel  is  interposed,  "g,  ^  to 
sacrifice/  becomes  W^;  and  with  "fir,  (^^-fir)  '^^Vrf. 

4.  The  fourth  conjugation,  f^^rrf^,  interposes  ir,  and  in 
some  cases  elongates  a  radical  vowel :  f^,  '  to  sport/  thus 
makes  (^Nr-fw)  ?(t^rfif. 

5.  The  fifth  conjugation,  ^StI^,  is  chai'acterised  by  the  addi- 
tion of  g  to  the  base ;  the  T  of  which  substitutes  the  Guna 
letter  ^  before  certain  affixes  ;  as  ??, '  to  bear  young,'  becomes 
^^  and  in  inflexion  (^«ft-"fiT)  ^^fir. 


CONJUGATIONS.  109 

6.  The  sixth  conjugation,  ^^if^,  Hke  the  first,  intei-poses  'sr; 
but  it  differs  from  the  first  in  not  substituting  a  Guna  letter  for 
the  vowel  of  the  base  :   W^,  *  to  torment/  makes  (^-fw)  Tf^. 

7.  The  seventh  conjugation,  ^^^nf^,  subjoins  Tf  to  the  last 
vowel  of  the  base :  15V,  ^  to  obstruct/  becomes  therefore  ^w . 
The  vo\yel  ^  is  however  inserted  between  the  members  of  the 
conjunct  consonant  before  certain  afiixes ;  and  in  combination 
with  fff  the  verb  makes  (^7JT^-fv)  ^lilf^. 

8.  The  eighth  conjugation,  THTTf^,  adds  ^  to  the  final  of  the 
base ;  for  which,  before  certain  affixes,  the  Gufia  element  ^  is 
substituted  :  thus  Tfg  for  TT^,  ^  to  stretch,^  makes  (w^-frf)  TnftfrT. 

9.  The  verbs  of  the  ninth  conjugation,  ^\  H^ ,  take  ttt  after 
the  final ;  as  ^  '  to  buy,^  ("^tel-fw)  -^liiilPri. 

10.  The  tenth  conjugation,  ^i^iH^,  inserts  ^ni  before  the 
affixes,  and  substitutes  the  Guna  letter  for  a  radical  vowel: 
^,  ^  to  steal/  becomes  (^^k^-fji)  ^k^rfrT. 

b.  Of  these  conjugational  distinctions  it  may  be  remarked, 
that  their  especial  object  is  obviously,  in  every  conjugation 
except  the  second  and  third,  to  interpose  a  vowel  between  the 
base  and  the  terminations.  In  four  of  them  the  vowel  is 
either  mediately  or  immediately  ^,  and  consequently  an  ana- 
logous mode  of  adapting  the  terminations  to  the  base  prevails 
in  all  of  them ;  that  is,  in  the  first,  fourth,  sixth,  and  tenth. 
The  vowel  of  the  fifth  and  eighth  classes  is  "3";  of  the  ninth 
wr.  The  second  and  third  dispense  with  any  vowel.  Professor 
Bopp  has  accordingly  distributed  the  verbs  into  two  principal 
conjugations ;  the  first  composed  of  the  first,  fourth,  sixth, 
and  tenth ;  and  the  second  of  the  remaining  conjugations. 
The  first  he  considers  as  agreeing  most  nearly  with  Greek 
verbs  in  w ;  the  second  with  those  in  /uli, 

c.  It  is  also  to  be  borne  in  mind  with  regard  to  these  con- 
jugational characteristics,  that  they  are  limited  to  four  tenses, 
the  present,  the  first  praeterite,  the  imperative,  and  the  potential, 
in  all  the  conjugations  except  the  tenth,  in  which  the  distinctive 
sign   is  preser\^ed  in  some  other  tenses.      In  the  other  nine 


110  VERBS. 

conjugations  the  tenses  beyond  the  four  above  named  have 
not  the  conjugational  characteristic  distinctions.  Accordingly 
Dr.  Wilkins  has  given  the  four  tenses  specified  above  alone 
under  each  conjugation,  and  has  classed  the  other  tenses  pro- 
miscuously together.  Professor  Bopp  has  followed  a  similar 
distinction  in  regard  to  the  same,  under  the  denomination  of 
^^  Tempora  specialia^^  and  ''  Tempora  generalia.'^  The  incon- 
venience however  of  searching  for  different  tenses  of  the  same 
verb  in  different  places,  seems  to  be  more  than  equivalent  to 
any  advantage  resulting  from  the  more  distinct  exhibition  of 
conjugational  peculiarities  in  the  four  special  or  conjugational 
tenses ;  and  although  the  peculiarities  of  these  will  be  noted 
in  the  following  pages,  yet  the  whole  of  the  tenses  of  each 
verb,  when  particularised,  will  be  kept  together. 

SECTION  III. 

Moods  and  Tenses, 

171.  The  moods  are  not  distinguished  from  the  tenses  by 
native  grammarians,  who  arrange  the  inflexions  of  the  verb 
under  nine  subdivisions.  One  of  these,  however,  being  again 
subdivided,  we  have  ten  divisions,  tenses  and  moods,  of  which 
the  verb  consists.  There  is  another,  an  imperative,  peculiar 
to  the  Vedas ;  which,  not  occurring  in  other  books,  need  not 
be  farther  noticed  in  this  place.  Adopting  the  principle  of 
classification  common  in  European  grammatical  systems,  we 
shall  arrange  the  Sanskrit  verb  in  the  following  manner : 

Indicative  mood. 
Vi.   Present  Tense. 
v-^2.   First  praeterite  or  imperfect  tense. 

3.  Second  praeterite  or  perfect  tense. 

4.  Third  praeterite,  indefinite  praeterite,  or  aorist. 

5.  Absolute  future. 
k/6.  Indefinite  future. 
^^7.  Imperative  mood. 


MOODS  AND  TENSES.  Ill 

8,  Potential  mood. 

9.  Benedictive  mood. 
10.  Conditional  mood. 

On  which  distinctions  a  few  observations  may  be  necessary. 

172.  The  present  tense  requires  no  remark;  it  is  defined 
as  denoting  present  action — action  begun^  and  not  completed : 
^  "Sfirrfw  ^  he  does'  or  ^  is  doing ;'  ^t  Tnacfir  ^  she  goes'  or  '  is 
going.' 

173.  The  first  praeterite  corresponds  in  the  adoption  of  the 
temporal  augment,  and  apparently  in  application,  with  the 
imperfect  of  the  Greek  verb.  It  is  defined  as  denoting  action 
recently  past — action  only  not  of  to-day.  But  it  seems  espe- 
cially used  to  signify  action  past,  but  not  perfected ;  or  "  it 
represents  a  past  action  continuing  during  another  past  action, 
and  accompanying  it ;"  as,  ^Hil\  ^'^RfHn^  ^^-^HH^^*^  ^  The 
Rishis  having  gone  to  Manu,  spake  this  speech.'  What  they 
said  then  follows;  so  that  the  act  of  speaking  was  not  then 
perfected.  Again ;  ^  riMMill^W  ^llHI^t^'a  ft^^  f^^:  '  The 
hostile  Rakshasas  regarded  not  all  those  (omens),  but  attacked 
their  enemies.'  In  both  cases  we  have  the  action  accompany- 
ing another  action,  and  only  begun,  not  done  and  past. 

174.  The  second  praeterite  is  the  absolute  past;  it  relates 
to  an  action  entirely  out  of  sight,  or  concluded,  and  also  agrees 
in  purport,  as  well  as  construction  by  reduplication,  with  the 
Greek  praeterite ;  as,  »iMHI(*il  iT^  ITHITT^  ZTT^Jtrrr  HI^NpriHI  ^cH 
^  Jambumali  abandoned  life,  slain  by  the  son  of  the  wind  with 
a  stone.' 

175.  The  third  praeterite  is  the  past  of  any  period,  but 
usually  remote  ;  as,  ^^mffr^T^  '  There  was  a  king ;'  ^nj^tft 
"frgv^n^:  ^  There  was  a  prince,  a  friend  of  the  gods  ;*  that  is, 
they  were,  at  some  time  or  other,  in  fact  long*ago ;  but  this 
is  undetermined.  The  application  of  this  tense  is  both  that  of 
the  Greek  aorists  and  "  plusquam-perfectum  ;"  and  in  its  forms 
it  varies  so  as  to  correspond  more  or  less  with  them,  sometimes 


112  VERBS. 

taking  only  the  augment,  and  sometimes  taking  the  reduplica- 
tion and  the  augment  also.  It  has  hence  been  termed  by 
Professor  Bopp  the  '^  Praeteritum  augmentatum  multiforme/' 
and  may  be  suspected  of  being  an  aggregate  of  more  than  one 
tense  under  a  common  denomination. 

176.  The  first  future  is  the  definite  future,  denoting  action 
which  will  be  after  a  fixed  period,  not  remote,  although  not 
immediate ;  as,  ^OTtw  "^ET:  ij^lrilfa  ^  Thou  shalt  depart  to- 
morrow to  Ayodhya.' 

177.  The  second  future  defines  no  limit  to  the  commence- 
ment of  the  action :  it  will  be  at  some  future  period,  or  it  will 
be  contingent  on  some  future  event ;  as,  cf^^W^rd  f^:^ 
"^T^iqfVnnf  JH^T^  '  The  sun  will  shine  without  fear ;  the  wind 
will  blow  unrestrained;'  that  is,  when  the  power  of  the 
enemy  Ravana  shall  be  overturned. 

178.  The  imperative  mood  is  defined  as  implying  not 
simply  command,  but  the  various  significations  of  the  poten- 
tial. In  general^  however,  it  denotes,  in  the  second  and  third 
persons,  injunction,  advice,  or  command ;  as,  f^T  ^TTJ  W 
'^ftJTirrg  ^  fngC  ^  Let  thy  purpose  be  cruel,  shew  sternness, 
to  these  (thy  guards).'  In  the  first  person  the  senses  are 
those  of  intention  or  volition,  and  the  verb  is  commonly  put 
interrogatively,  as  asking  for  acquiescence  or  command ;  as,  fofi 
-SR^rfw  w  '  What  may  I  do  for  thee  ?'  ohMl^rifrH^  ^f^  ^  Tf^ 
'  Let  us  do  that  which  is  agreeable  to  thee,  O  queen.' 

179.  The  senses  of  the  potential,  which  may  be  also  ex- 
pressed by  the  imperative,  are  said  to  be,  i .  ^w  '  command- 
ing ;'  as,  r3(  ajR  tx^\  '  Thou  mayest  go  (i.  e.  Go  thou)  to  the 
village  :'  2.  Ph HnsTJT  '  directing ;'  as,  l[;^  0ffWt  ^f^^T  ^  Let  the 
daughter's  son  eat  in  this  place :'  3.  ^TPRT^W  ^  inviting ;'  as, 
>T^Tf^  wr^fhf  ^  Let  your  honour  sit  here  :'  4.  ^nifly  '  expression 
of  wish  ;'  as,  »71^.  "JWfTHrnJR TT  ^  Let  the  Guru  teach  the  boy :' 
5'  "'^'^rw:  ^  interrogation'  or  '  inquiring ;'  as,  ^^iHhfhT  TIT  ri^H^t- 
xfhr  '  Shall  I  peruse  the  Veda  ?  or  shall  I  study  logic  ?'  and 
6.  m^f^\  '  asking ;'  as,  >ft  Htirf  <?J^?T  '  O  may  I  obtain  (i.  e. 


VOICES.  lis 

give  me)  food.  It  is  also  very  commonly  used  as  the  subjunc- 
tive mood  with  the  conjunction  ^if;'  as,  "Pg^  ^  ^IM  ^  ^ 
irfw:  '  If  thou  be  not  my  protector,  then  I  may  (or  shall)  die.' 

180.  The  benedictive  or  optative  mood  is  considered  as  a 
modification  of  the  potential;  as,  ^irT  ^ili^HH-^^ri*  ^^:  ohiufn 
«l»yHI  ^  Mayest  thou  preserve  unshaken  firmness,  and  be  steady 
in  the  afiairs  of  thy  friends.' 

181.  The  last  tense  is  the  conditional,  which  is  susceptible, 
like  the  moods,  of  all  times,  and  is  commonly  used  with  the 
conjunctions  irf^  and  ^ ;  as,  ^TWfTorf^  ^rgn  ^^MI^H^  ^  "rrf 
^  She  (Sita)  would  not  have  been  purified,  if  I  had  not  pro- 
tected her ;'  i|NWl'4H^nP**U4l  HI^I^^O^^  im:  '  You  will  grieve 
as  long  as  you  live,  if  you  do  not  relinquish  this  error.' 

SECTION  IV. 

Voices, 

182.  The  preceding  moods  and  tenses  are  common  to  the 
usual  distinctions  of  active  and  passive  voices ;  but  the  San- 
skrit verb,  Hke  the  Greek,  has  two  active  voices,  as  well  as 
one  passive:  they  are  called  severally  Parasmai-pada  and 
Xtmane-pada,  which  terms  are  retained  by  Professor  Bopp, 
and  rendered  by  Dr.  Wilkins  ^  common'  and  ^  proper'  forms. 

183.  The  Parasmai-pada  is  that  inflected  word  or  verb 
(pada)  the  action  of  which  is  addressed  to  another  than  the 
agent  (from  Parasmai,  dative  of  Para,  ^  another'),  ^tmane-pada 
is  a  word  or  verb  the  action  of  which  is  addressed  or  reverts 
to  the  agent  himself  (from  i^tmane,  dative  of  i^tman,  ^self'). 
These  might  be  rendered  therefore  '  transitive'  and  ^  reflective' 
verbs,  but  that  it  is  in  a  peculiar  sense  that  the  action  is  said 
to  affect  either  a  different  agent  or  the  agent  himself:  it  is 
the  result  rather  than  the  action,  and  this  is  therefore  com- 
patible with  an  intransitive  verb.  Thus,  '  Devadatta  cooks :' 
in  the  one  case  he  cooks  for  his  master,  the  verb  is  then  put 
in  the  Parasmai-pada,  ^^^^   m-^iPh  ;   but  in  another  case  he 

Q 


114 


VERBS. 


cooks  for  himself,  the  Atmane-pada  is  then  employed,  and  the 
phrase  is  ^^^^  tf^.  In  ordinary  usage,  however,  the  dis- 
tinction of  import  is  little  observed,  and  some  verbs  are  conju- 
gated in  one  voice,  some  in  the  other,  and  some  in  both, 
without  much  attention  being  paid  to  their  signification  or 
relations. 

184.  The  passive  voice  takes  the  terminations  of  the 
-^tmane-pada,  and  prefixes  xi  ya  or  in  some  cases  ir^  to  them 
before  those  of  the  four  conjugational  tenses.  Before  tt  the 
radical  vowel  takes  neither  GuAa  nor  Vriddhi.  In  the  other 
tenses  the  form  is  the  same  as  in  the  active,  with  a  few 
special  changes  to  be  hereafter  noticed. 


SECTION  V. 

Numbers  and  Persons. 

185.  The  Sanskrit  verb  in  its  different  tenses  has  three 
numbers,  singular,  dual,  and  plural;  and  three  persons  in 
each  number.  They  are  arranged  in  native  grammars  in  an 
inverse  order  to  that  which  we  follow,  the  third  person  being 
placed  first,  and  the  first  person  last;  but  it  may  be  more 
convenient  to  follow  the  European  order.  The  terminations 
by  which  the  persons  are  distinguished  are  shewn  in  the 
following  scheme. 

Indicative  mood. 


Present  tense. 

Parasmai-pada. 

Atmane-pada. 

Pers.  Sing.           Dual. 

Plural. 

Sing. 

Dual. 

Plural. 

I-    M              ^ 

'^ 

^ 

'»% 

^ 

2.    "ftn^          "T^ 

^ 

^ 

'm^ 

a 

3-    M          ^ 

^5ri^ 

^ 

w^ 

^ 

First 

praeterite  or  imperfect. 

I.   wf?n^        w 

^ 

^ 

If? 

«rf? 

%.   ftf^          if 

IT 

^^ 

■amf 

vi 

3.   f^          m 

^ 

^ 

WMl' 

^am 

NUMBERS  AND  PERSONS. 


115 


Second  praeterite  or  perfect. 


I. 

iin^ 

^                    »T 

^ 

^ 

«?% 

2. 

^ 

^3r^^         ^ 

^ 

'm^ 

^ 

3- 

w^ 

n^      ^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

Third  praeterite  or  indefinite 

past. 

I. 

^ 

^               W           ftl 

^^ 

wff 

2. 

^J^ 

W               W            t?m^^ 

'RTOT 

^ 

3- 

^iftf^ 

First  or  definite  future. 

FTirf 

Wif 

I. 

Hifm 

m^          iTT^R^ 

cn% 

ni«^ 

niw^ 

2. 

irrf^ 

ITT^m^          TTTW 

TTRI 

irraT^ 

WT^ 

3- 

in 

wrd          im:^^ 

m 

ITTO 

inr^ 

Second  or  indefinite  future. 

I. 

^tnftr^ 

^H«^         iM\HH^ 

^ 

^JIT^ 

5WW^ 

2. 

WftT»3[ 

w^        ^m 

^H 

^ivi 

^^ 

3- 

^irfrrn 

tflfit^          ^rfnf 

^ 

wS^ 

^ 

^nf^ 

Imperative  mood. 

^ih|»( 

I. 

^N»(          'eilH*^ 

^^ 

^n'^H^ 

2. 

f^ 

W                     TT 

^ 

-iiivn 

l^ 

3- 

Tl 

irf              ^ 

in 

viifli* 

'STfTl 

Potential  or  subjunctive  mood. 

I. 

uf 

ViX^             TR 

t^ 

f^ 

^^ 

2. 

^qi^ 

^msf           ^rnr 

t^ 

t^ 

3- 

^ 

^TTirf          g^^ 

^ 

t^lTlTf 

tt^ 

Benedictive  or  optative  mood. 

1. 

im 

irr^          ^nw 

Htw 

^^(hf^ 

2. 

m^ 

Tref          Trer 

_n _♦ 

mm 

3- 

"^ 

Tjjmt         ^1^^ 

^nrrerT 

Conditional  mood. 

_>^ 

I. 

^ 

FTR             ^TTT 

w 

f^iNPc 

2. 

^1^ 

^nf            Wff 

jpniT^ 

^*n^ 

^irs# 

3- 

^3ni: 

Q  2 

WfH 

^«nin 

WiT 

116  VERBS. 

a.  In  the  passive  voice  ^  is  substituted  for  ^5  the  termina- 
tion of  the  third  person  singular  of  the  Atmane-pada. 

h.  Of  these  inflectional  terminations  it  is  to  be  remarked,  that, 
like  those  employed  for  the  construction  of  the  cases  of  nouns, 
they  comprehend  some  letters  which  are  not  retained  in  the 
inflexion,  being  introduced  merely  for  the  sake  of  enunciation, 
or  of  indicating  some  change  in  the  base. 

c.  T|  in  "fin^a  "ftn^^  f'T^j  and  every  where  else,  is  rejected; 
but  it  is  an  indicatory  letter,  denoting  that,  where  there  is  no 
rule  to  the  contrary,  the  vowel  of  the  base  is  to  be  changed  to 
its  Guna  substitute:  thus  f^  v.  3d  conj.  ^to  know,^  before 
the  terminations  of  the  singular  in  the  present  tense,  makes 
^i^i  tIw,  Tfw.  Before  those  inflexions  which  have  not  an 
indicatory  xr  the  vowel  is  unchanged ;  as,  i^^,  f^^f^jT,  &c. 

d.  In  the  first  praeterite  the  ^  of  f^,  "ftrc|[,  ^^rftr^,  is  inserted 
merely  for  articulation :  the  real  terminations  are  therefore  ^, 
^,  »^.  In  the  i\[tmane-pada  in  this  tense  the  f^  of  IT'^^  is 
superfluous. 

e.  In  the  second  praeterite  w  is  indicatory,  and  denotes 
that  in  some  cases  the  Vriddhi,  and  in  others  the  GuAa 
element  is  to  be  substituted  for  a  radical.  A  final  ?T  is  every 
where  commuted  to  Visarga,  agreeably  to  the  rules  of  Sandhi 
(see  rule  37).  Other  modifications  of  a  less  general  nature 
we  shall  now  proceed  to  notice  under  each  tense  separately, 
together  with  such  modifications  of  the  base  as  are  not  exclu- 
sively of  a  special  or  conjugational  character. 

General  principles  of  Conjugation, 

186.  Present  tense.  The  inflective  terminations  are  subject 
to  few  changes.  The  initial  ^  of  the  third  person  plural  is 
rejected  after  an  inflective  base  ending  in  "^;  that  is,  after 
those  of  the  first,  fourth,  sixth,  and  tenth  conjugations ;  so 
that  ^t,  '  to  go,^  makes  -^difnf  not  ^?uf^  '  they  go  ;^  ^V,  ^  to 
increase,^  ^V^  not  ^^[VT^  ^  they  grow.'  In  other  cases  it  is 
preserved ;  as,  ^  ^  to  eat/  ^fnT ;  ^  ^  to  mix,'  ^hTm.    Afler 


PRINCIPLES  OF  CONJUGATION.  117 

verbs  which  are  either  polysyllabic^  or  become  so  by  redupli- 
cation, the  nasal  is  rejected ;  as,  i^'^^U  '  to  be  poor/  makes 
<^ri.<rri  ^  they  are  poor  f  ^  for  ^  ^  to  sacrifice/  ^jd^fd  *  they 
sacrifice/  Verbs  of  which,  although  monosyllabic,  the  inflec- 
tive base  ends  in  a  consonant,  or  in  any  vowel  except  ^,  also 
reject  the  nasal  in  the  j^tmane-pada ;  as,  ^rPff  2d  conj.  ^  to 
rule  /  ^rra^  ^  they  rule  /  f  ^  to  do  /  ^t^  '  they  do.'  The 
same  applies  to  the  analogous  terminations  of  the  first  prae- 
terite  and  imperative,  '^SRT  and  'snirf.  For  the  initial  ^i  of  the 
second  and  third  persons  dual,  and  for  ^  of  the  first  person 
singular,  in  the  ^tmane-pada  of  the  first,  fourth,,  sixth,  and 
tenth  conjugations,  ^  is  substituted,  which  with  the  conjuga- 
tional  affix  ^  becomes  ^ ;  as,  ^,  ^^,  ^^.  The  initial  w  or 
■^  of  a  termination  in  this  or  any  other  tense,  when  following 
an  inflective  base  ending  with  an  aspirate,  is  changed  to  V, 
before  which  the  aspirate  becomes  the  unaspirated  letter  (r.  8); 
as,  1^,  '  to  oppose/  makes  ^^irfe. 

The  changes  of  the  base  in  this  tense  will  be  specified 
under  each  conjugation, 

187.  First  praeterite.  The  ^  of  wfir^,  ^,  and  ^RT  is 
rejected  after  ^;  and  after  some  verbs  TH  is  substituted  for 
^n^.  The  'm  of  ^mrf  and  wmf  substitute  ^,  as  in  the  present 
tense. 

Besides  the  special  changes  to  which  the  base  is  subject  in 
this  tense,  there  is  one  modification  which  is  universal,  the 
prefixing  of  the  temporal  augment  ^  to  a  verb  beginning  with 
a  consonant ;  thus  ^^  makes  ^sn^lj^  ^  he  went  /  and  ^TT  to  one 
beginning  with  a  vowel.  In  prefixing  the  temporal  augment 
to  a  verb  beginning  with  a  consonant,  no  change  takes  place. 
For  ^n  and  the  radical  vowel  the  Vriddhi  equivalent  of  the 
latter  is  substituted ;  as,  ^T7  ^  to  go,'  ^riTTT  ^  he  went  /  ^  ^  to 
wish/  ^^  ^  he  wished.'  If  the  verb  be  a  compound  with  a 
preposition,  the  augment  is  inserted  between  the  preposition 
and  the  simple  verb :  thus  from  vtr,  ^  to  speak,'  comes  nfrfiTR 
Ho  speak  again/  Ho  reply/  first  praeterite,  Mi<4Hmri  'he  replied.' 


118  VERBS. 

188.  Second  praeterite.  In  general  the  terminations  un- 
dergo no  other  changes  than  those  which  arise  from  the  rejec- 
tion of  the  indicatory  or  servile  letters.  After  roots  in  m,  ^ 
is  substituted  for  the  vowel  '^  left  by  w^ ;  as,  ^  '  to  give  ;' 
first  and  third  pers.  sing.  ^. 

The  changes  of  the  base  are  more  numerous,  and  the  most 
important  may  be  conveniently  noticed  here.  One  of  these, 
which  may  be  regarded  as  universal,  although  subject  to  a  few 
exceptions,  is  the  reduplication  of  the  root ;  in  effecting  which, 
certain  substitutions  for  the  radical  letters  sometimes  take 
place. 

a.  If  the  verb  commences  with  the  vowel  ^,  the  repeated 
vowel  is  ^  which  combines  with  the  radical  ^^r ;  as,  w^  ^  to 
eat,'  ^rr^  '  he  ate.'  But  if  the  verb  contain  a  double  con- 
sonant, «T  is  inserted  after  the  reduplication,  and  before  the 
radical  vowel ;  as,  w#  ^  to  worship,'  4{M^  he  *  worshipped.' 
It  is  also  inserted  before  ^5?^  *  to  spread ;'  as,  "^R^i '  he  spread :' 
but  not  before  ^T^  '  to  eat ;'  as,  ^rr^  '  he  ate.' 

b.  If  the  verb  begins  with  ^  or  "3",  convertible  to  the  Vriddhi 
or  GuAa  element,  the  substitutes  in  the  reduphcation  are  ^ 
and  '^;  as,  ^  ^  to  go,'  ^i||i4  ^he  has  gone,'  ^([^  ^  thou  hast 
gone ;'  "^^  ^  to  wither,'  wt^  '  it  has  withered :'  when  the 
initial  is  not  so  changed,  the  reduplication  of  the  initial  pro- 
duces a  long  vowel ;  as,  f;^:,  ^S^:. 

c.  An  initial  ^  substitutes  "^ ;  as,  ^  ^  to  go,'  ^TR  *  he 
went :'  followed  by  a  consonant  it  inserts  tT ;  as,  ^if,  *  to  be 
firm,'  makes  ^rnj%  *  it  was  firm.' 

d.  A  verb  beginning  with  a  single  consonant,  not  a  guttural 
nor  an  aspirate,  is  simply  reiterated ;  as,  t:^  '  to  sound,'  tti^  ; 
"q^  '  to  cook,'  MMW. 

e.  A  guttural  consonant  is  changed  to  the  corresponding 
palatal,  or  "sfi  ^  to  %  and  it  xr  to  "ST;  as,  "^  *to  make,'  ^crr; 
;ST^  ^  to  dig,'  ^^TiT ;  ?Tf  *  to  take,'  ^*\\t  5  'qrr '  to  eat,'  W(PS' 
If  is  also  substituted  for  ^ ;  as,  ^  Ho  take,'  »T1TC.  In  some 
cases  the  reduplication  of  an  initial  semivowel  is  the  corre- 


PRINCIPLES  OF  CONJUGATION.  110 

spending  vowel ;  as,  mf  ^  to  sacrifice,  ^ttHT  ;  and  ^^  *  to 
speak/  T^T^. 

/.  The  unaspirated  is  substituted  for  an  aspirated  conso- 
nant ;  as,  >iiT  '  to  whirl/  ^HTH. 

g.  When  the  initial  is  a  double  consonant,  the  first  only  is 
redupUcated  ;  as,  "Pit  *  to  serve/  f^r^rnr ;  f^^  '  to  throw,' 
r«<i^M.  If  the  compound  be  a  sibilant  and  a  hai'd  consonant, 
the  latter  is  reduplicated ;  as,  ^  '  to  praise,'  WFR" ;  WT  ^  to 
stay^  or  ^  stand,'  iT^.  If  the  consonant  is  soft,  the  sibilant  is 
repeated ;  as,  ^  ^  to  remember,'  ^rwR.  If  a  sibilant  and  hard 
consonant  followed  by  ti  occur,  the  medial  is  repeated;  as, 
^^  '  to  ooze/  -j^^rt. 

h,  w  is  the  reduplicate  of  a  medial  or  final  ^,  ^rr,  ^,  '%, 
and  for  a  final  t^,  ^,  ^ ;  as,  "^i '  to  make,'  -"icfcK ;  m  ^  to  shine, 
"51^ ;  ^  ^  to  sing,'  »nft ;  also  for  the  "31  of  ^'  to  be,'  '^^. 

t.  Any  other  short  vowel,  medial  or  final,  is  repeated ;  as, 
gi^  *  to  be  pleased,'  ^[g^.  A  long  vowel  is  made  short ;  as, 
l^fNs  '  to  sprinkle,'  f^nrft^.  For  a  medial  diphthong  the  analo- 
gous short  vowel  is  repeated ;  as,  ^  ^  to  go,'  Pmmc*  ;  cytoR  ^  to 
see,'  t^cil<*. 

k.  Verbs  which  begin  and  end  with  a  simple  consonant,  hav- 
ing a  medial  '^,  and  of  which  the  first  consonant  is  unaltered 
in  the  repetition,  do  not  double  the  verb  before  the  termina- 
tions of  this  tense  beginning  with  a  vowel,  whether  it  be  the 
vowel  of  the  termination  or  the  augment  ^,  to  be  presently 
noticed.  Such  verbs  change  the  radical  ^  to  if ;  thus  T^q 
makes,  dual  and  plural  in  the  third  person,  m-*!^:,  ^: ;  and  in 
the  first,  mP**^,  mP«4H. 

L  Of  those  changes  which  afiect  the  primitive  or  unredu- 
plicated  syllable  of  the  inflective  base,  some  are  special,  and 
will  be  hereafter  noticed :  the  most  general  are  the  following, 
and  concern  chiefly  the  vowels. 

m.  The  terminations  of  the  first  and  third  persons  singular 
having  an  indicatory  TU  are  said  to  require  the  substitution  of 
the  Vriddhi  letter;    but  this  affects  only  final  vowels  and  a 


120  VERBS. 

medial  ^;  as,  Tjft  ^to  guide/  third  pers.  sing.  ffTTR;  ^  ^  to 
run/  ff^TH  (^  and  T  becoming  severally  ^  and  ^,  changeable 
before  a  vowel  to  ^rn^  and  ^^rr^ ;  see  rule  5) ;  im  ^  to  go/ 
WU^'  The  termination  of  the  first  person  singular  is  option- 
ally %  and  it  has  therefore  two  forms,  wi^  or  ^j||H. 

n.  An  initial  short  vowel,  and  a  medial,  except  ^,  takes  the 
Guna  substitute  before  TJirt^ ;  as,  ^,  '  to  wish,'  makes  ^^ ; 
^  ^  to  know,'  '^•^t^T.  A  vowel  long  either  by  nature  or  posi- 
tion, when  initial,  requires  a  different  form  of  inflexion,  as  will 
be  presently  explained :  when  medial,  it  is  unaltered ;  as,  ifl^ 
*  to  live,'  finfNr;  %W  '  to  learn/  r^iP^inj. 

o.  The  second  person,  "^n^,  requires  the  GuAa  change  of 
any  final  vowel,  and  of  a  short  medial  vowel ;  as,  "ftf  '  to  con- 
quer/ iwt^ ;  fs^  '  to  hate/  f^%^.  The  same  if  ^  is  inserted ; 
as,  r^TJlHlvj,  f^[tf^. 

p.  Before  the  other  terminations  of  this  tense  in  the  Pa- 
rasmai-pada,  and  all  those  of  the  Atmane-pada,  the  radical 
vowel,  if  initial  or  medial,  is  unaltered ;  as,  T^  '  to  burn,' 
^Mj:  ("gr  becoming  "gj  by  virtue  of  the  reduplication  only,  as 
above,  clause  b) ;  f^  ^  to  hate,'  f^PirM^:,  "f^ft^.  A  final  vowel 
is  unaltered  before  the  consonants  ;  as,  cR  ^  to  do,'  ^^r^,  "^^ ; 
and  is  changed  before  the  vowels  only  according  to  the  rules 
of  Sandhi,  ^"sr^:,  ^T^.  A  final  "^is  rejected  before  a  vowel ;  as, 
^  ^  to  give,'  ^^^:,  ^ ;  and  roots  ending  in  diphthongs  change 
them,  with  few  exceptions,  to  "^y  and  are  similarly  inflected.  ^ 
and  ^  final  undergo  the  changes  of  Sandhi,  as,  f%  ^  to  gather/ 
"N^irj:,  except  when  the  root  consists  of  a  single  vovv^el,  or 
when  ^  is  preceded  by  a  conjunct  consonant,  in  which  cases 
i;;5^  is  substituted  ;  as,  ^  *  to  go,'  ^^  ;  f^  Ho  serve,'  f^rf^RTj:. 
A  final  ^  or  -gj  substitutes  ^,  as,  ^  *  to  run,'  J^T^:,  except  H, 
which  substitutes  -gr^,  '^ij^g: .  A  final  ^  substitutes  the  GuAa 
^,  and  so  does  ^  when  preceded  by  a  double  consonant ;  as, 
^  '  to  remember,'  ^r^rq:,  fiwv*-  There  are  some  anomalies 
in  regard  to  the  changes  of  the  radical  vowels ;  but  these  will 
be  pointed  out  as  they  occur. 


PRINCIPLES  OF  CONJUGATION. 


121 


q.  Initial  semivowels  are  sometimes  changed  to  their  corre- 
sponding vowels,  and  the  verb  is  inflected  as  if  commencing 
with  them  ;  as,  ^^  ^  to  speak/  "grrr^,  "^i^p^  "^T^t  • 

r.  Some  verbs,  having  ^  between  two  consonants,  of  which 
the  latter  is  a  nasal,  reject  tjie  medial  before  all  the  termina- 
tions except  those  of  the  singular  in  the  Parasmai-pada ;  as,  iftT 
*  to  be  born,^  ^»nTPT,  W^?  'T^ ;  n^T  ^  to  go,'  ^i^H^:,  &c. 

8,  Before  "^rc^  and  the  other  affixes  of  the  second  praeterite 
beginning  with  consonants,  as  ^,  H,  ^,  »r^,  %,  ^,  all  roots, 
except  ^,  ^,  ^,  "^^  ^3  "^  ^  ^5  insert  \\  as,  tt^  makes  ^fq^ZT, 
^fq^,  ^f^,  ^fq^,  ^^,  ^f^,  ^f^%.  Before  ^t^  it  is 
sometimes  optional ;  as,  ^f%^  or  qqoj«'i| ;  the  v  in  set  is  changed 
to  cT. 

189.  Besides  the  formation  of  the  second  praeterite  upon 
the  principle  of  reduplication,  there  is  another  form  of  it, 
which  may  be  regarded  as  a  compound  praeterite  tense,  the 
radical  verb  being  combined  with  the  inflexions  of  the  auxiliary- 
verbs  ^nj  '  to  be,'  ^'  to  be,*  and  "^  ^  to  make.'  The  syllable 
^Ti^  is  interposed  between  the  radical  verb  and  the  auxiliary 
inflexion :  thus  ^v,  '  to  increase,'  becomes  in  this  tense, 


T^^rmnr 

^imnn^ 

^^nH!f«H 

^VTHlftl^ 

^VT^mr^: 

^vmi^ 

^vmro 

^^VTTTOW: 

^i*<  1^: 

^>it^^ 

^vf^»j5f: 

^vr^^: 

a.  Verbs  of  which  the  initial  is  any  vowel  except  ^  or  ^, 
and  which  is  long  either  by  nature  or  position,  before  two 
consonants  (except  ^^  '  to  go,'  and  -gi?!  '  to  cover'),  also  the 
roots  ^^R  '  to  go,'  ^rm  '  to  sit,'  and  ^  '  to  hurt' — verbs  of 
more  than  one  syllable — all  verbs  of  the  tenth  conjugation — 

B 


122  VERBS. 

and  all  derivative  verbs,  as  causals,  frequentatives,  desidera- 
tives,  and  nominals — take  the  compound  form  of  the  second 
praeterite. 

h.  In  inflexion,  H^and  'sra  always  follow  the  Parasmai-pada ; 
ofi  takes  either  Pada,  according  to  the  voice  of  the  primary 
verb. 

c.  ^SRT^T  and  ^FTO  '  to  shine,^  ^ft^T  ^  to  be  poor,'  f^  '  to 
know,'  WPJ  ^  to  be  awake,'  and  ^^  '  to  bum,'  may  be  conju- 
gated either  in  the  reduplicate  or  compound  praeterite. 

190.  Third  praeterite  or  indefinite  past.  The  inflexions  of 
this  tense  are  so  various,  that  it  has  been  termed  by  Professor 
Bopp  the  "  praeteritum  multiforme ;"  and  Dr.  Wilkins  has 
specified  eleven  modes  in  which  they  are  formed.  In  these 
latter,  however,  he  comprises  not  merely  changes  of  termina- 
tion, but  modifications  of  the  base,  and  those  affecting  the 
terminations  by  the  insertion  of  certain  augments. 

a.  The  alterations  of  the  terminations  are  not  many,  but 
the  terminations  themselves  are  referrible  to  two  classes.  They 
are,  i.  the  terminations  of  the  tense,  as  specified  in  the  scheme, 
p.  115;  or  they  are,  %,  those  of  the  first  praeterite,  as  found 
in  the  same  place,  p.  114. 

h.  The  changes  of  the  first  class  are  confined  to  the  elision 
of  the  ^  combined  with  rT  or  "^i  afler  a  short  vowel,  or  any 
consonant  except  a  nasal,  a  semivowel,  and  ^.  ^,  w,  ^  of 
the  Parasmai-pada,  and  ^,  wf  of  the  i^tmane-pada,  become 
irf,  if,  W,  and  w,  m  The  only  change  of  the  second  class  is 
the  optional  substitution  of  T?fT'  for  ^i^,  the  termination  of  the 
third  person  plural. 

c.  The  principal  modifications,  however,  arise  from  prefixing 
certain  augments  to  these  terminations.  To  the  tenninations 
of  the  first  class  ^  is  prefixed,  either  singly  or  with  ^,  as  "ftf ; 
to  those  of  the  second  class,  in  like  manner,  ^  is  prefixed, 
either  singly  or  with  the  sibilant,  as  ^. 

d.  When  1^  is  prefixed  alone  to  the  terminations  of  the  first 
class,  the  ^  of  the  second  and  third  persons  singular  of  the 


PRINCIPLES  OP  CONJUGATION. 


123 


Parasmai-pada  is  rejected.  In  the  other  persons  the  dental 
sibilant  is  changed,  of  course,  to  the  cerebral  after  ^  (rule  29). 
We  have  then, 


Parasmai-pada. 

Atmane-pada. 

:^        ^ 

JW 

^ 

l[^f^           3[^f 

;:         ^ 

^ 

jnr: 

d^Mmf          ^or^* 

?{       ^ 

^: 

JB 

^MIHI            iHd 

In  the  Parasmai-pada  only,  ^  may  be  prefixed  to  these  termina- 
tions, making  ftr^,  ftTE^,  "ftn*? ;  ^,  "ftr?,  fw ;  ^^ftl^,  fwf,  f^'5« 
e.  The  inflexions  of  the  third  przeterite  becoming  those  of 
the  first,  the  tense  preserves  an  analogy  throughout,  and 
instead  of  inserting  the  augment  ^,  which  cannot  belong  to 
the  first  praeterite,  inserts  %  which  does  belong  to  it  in  several 
conjugations.  The  terminations  of  the  base  then  become, 
Parasmai-pada. 

^:         Wrf         ^nr 

^        ^snrf        ^"'^  or  "gr: 

Here,  agreeably  to  rules  already  specified,  ^  has  become  ^rr 
before  ^  and  H ;  the  initial  of  ^,  ^T^,  ^sfjt  is  rejected  after  a 
vowel;  ^  is  dropped  before  '^;  and  the  ^TT  of  ^mrf  and  ^rnrf, 
having  been  changed  to  ^,  form  "^  with  the  augment  ^;  so 
does  the  ^  of  the  first  person  singular. 

/.  Sometimes,  but  rarely,  and  only  after  a  verb  ending  in  a 
vowel,  the  augment  ^  is  rejected,  when  the  terminations  of 
the  first  praeterite  are  attached  directly  to  the  base.  It  is 
more  usual,  however,  to  prefix  ^  to  them  in  both  voices; 
making  therefore. 


Atmane-pada. 

^ 

^TT^           ^3Tmf^ 

^m: 

5^^f             ^s# 

^nr 

inri           ^^  or  ^ff 

Parasmai-pada, 
Modifications  of  the  base 


Wff 


Atmane-pada. 


These  are  for  the  greater 


part  of  a  special  description,  and  will  best  be  adverted  to 


R  a 


124  VERBS. 

under  each  particular  case.  A  few  of  the  most  general  ones 
may  be  here  inserted. 

h.  The  indefinite  praeterite  prefixes  the  temporal  augment, 
whether  it  retains  its  own  terminations,  or  adopts  those  of 
the  first  praeterite;  as,  ^  'to  go,  ^^rto^;  ^^to  be,'  ^HTT^. 
In  a  few  verbs,  w  hich  take  the  terminations  of  the  first  prae- 
terite, the  root  is  also  doubled ;  as,  "Psf  ^  to  serve,'  ^rf^rf^T^Tl^. 

«.  Before  the  terminations  of  the  first  class,  or  those  which 
are  its  own,  verbs  having  simple  final  vowels  commonly  sub- 
stitute for  them  the  Vriddhi  element  in  the  Parasmai-pada, 
and  the  Guiia  in  the  Atmane-pada ;  as,  lift  ^  to  take,'  ^T^^^, 
^¥ ;  Y  ^  ^^  shake,'  w*n^,  ^nftF ;  ^  *  to  make,'  W3RT^.  A 
short  vowel  is  however  sometimes  unchanged  before  W^  when, 
agreeably  to  clause  h,  the  sibilant  is  dropped;  as,  third  pers. 
sing,  ^tmane-pada,  ^r^.  Verbs  ending  in  diphthongs  com- 
monly change  this  to  WT ;  as,  wt,  ^  to  destroy,'  makes  ^r^rati^ 
or  ^nrnr . 

Of  roots  ending  in  consonants,  those  which  take  the  aug- 
ment 1^,  either  with  or  without  the  sibilant,  and  have  a 
medial  "^,  optionally  substitute  the  Vriddhi  'STT  in  the  Parasmai- 
pada  ;  but  not  if  they  end  in  H,  "^j  "5,  or  a  double  consonant, 
or  are  distinguished  by  an  Anubandha  ^;  nor  do  the  roots 
TJ^TFT  and  ''j^  admit  of  the  alternative  ;  as,  iTT,  '  to  read,'  makes 
^mi)f^  or  'HMdlrt^;  but  >m  *  to  w^ander,'  WjrftT^;  tr  *  to  restrain,' 
^nNh^.  If  they  end  with  ^  or  c^,  the  vowel  is  invariably  long ; 
as,  ^^  or  ^75 '  to  go,^  ^r^T^,  ^!r^T<^^.  So  it  is  in  ^  '  to 
speak,^  and  -gr^ '  to  go,^  W^T^,  ^T^TTifti^.  In  the  i^traane-pada 
the  change  does  not  take  place ;  as,  1^  '  to  hasten,^  ^H^fr?. 

j.  Any  other  medial  short  vowel  substitutes  the  Guna 
element  in  both  voices,  except  in  certain  verbs.  If  the  final 
is  a  double  consonant  no  change  takes  place,  nor  is  a  long 
vowel  changed ;  as,  f^  '  to  know,'  ^1^"^;  "J^T  ^  to  flower,' 
^f^^;  ^  '  to  shine,'  ^srsftfw. 

k.  Of  those  which  do  not  take  the  augment  ^,  and  w  hich 
are  marked  in  lists  of  roots  by  the  Anubandha  '^,  the  medial 


PRINCIPLES  OP  CONJUGATION.  125 

vowel  substitutes  the  Vriddhi  element  in  the  Parasmai-pada, 
before  the  proper  inflexions  of  the  tense ;  as,  ^T»f  ^  to  worship/ 
-ciijUSjIfi^;  but  not  in  the  ^tmane-pada ;  as,  ^  ^  to  hberate/ 
w^ ;  ^  of  w  being  rejected  (clause  b),  and  ^  becoming  oR 
before  TT,  as  in  declension  (rule  9a). 

I.  Before  the  terminations  of  the  first  praeterite — and  before 
which,  it  should  be  remembered,  the  augment  ^  cannot  be 
inserted — ^verbs  ending  in  vowels  undergo  the  GuAa  change 
when  the  affix  begins  with  ^;  when  the  augment  ^  is  not 
inserted,  they  are  unchanged ;  as,  ^  ^  to  go,'  makes  ^TOTjT ;  ^ 
*  to  give,'  ^T^Tf^;  and  final  diphthongs  are  changed  to  ^STT;  so 
that  ^,  '  to  drink,'  makes  ^snm^.  The  verbs  that  insert  the 
sibilant  before  the  terminations  of  the  first  praeterite  in  the 
sense  of  the  third,  are  those  which  end  in  '^Tj  ^,  or  ^,  having 
any  other  penultimate  than  ^  or  ^TT.  There  are  a  few  excep- 
tions. The  final  sibilant  or  aspirate  is  changed  to  "Sfi  before  ^, 
and  that  again  is  changed  to  "^  (rules  27,  28),  making  the  com- 
pound Ty ;  as,  f^  '  to  shew,'  ^^rf^^ ;  ^  *  to  be  thin,'  ^r^refl^. 
Before  a  double  consonant  a  vowel  is  unchanged.  Verbs  of 
the  fourth  conjugation  of  the  class  gmH^  are  inflected  with 
the  terminations  of  the  first  praeterite  in  the  Parasmai-pada 
with  the  augment  ^,  when  the  radical  vowel  is  unaltered ;  as, 
"J^  '  to  nourish,^  ^'"S^*  So  are  verbs  of  the  class  ^rtlH^'  of 
the  first  conjugation,  ^T^TTr^;  and  verbs  distinguished  by  an 
Anubandha  oE ;  as,  ^  ^  to  be  able,^  ^T^nfir^.  In  the  -^tmane- 
pada  some  of  these  verbs  may  take  ^,  and  undergo  the  usual 
changes  ;  as,  ^,  '  to  shine,'  makes  ^i^tTirrig. 

m.  Verbs  which  have  an  Anubandha  ^  are  conjugated  in 
the  indefinite  praeterite  with  both  classes  of  terminations ;  as, 
(fS[f^)  f^,  *  to  cut,'  makes  either  'njrfflrt^  or  "^rf^l^. 

n.  Verbs  having  an  Anubandha  ^  do  not  insert  ^  before 
the  terminations  of  the  third  praeterite ;  as,  (^>ft)  ^  '  to  ob- 
struct,' ^rdr^ftf^,  -^Orlf,  '^Or*j: ;  or  Atmane-pada,  ^r^,  -^^^^kjihI, 

0.  Verbs  with  an  Anubandha  "35  optionally  insert  ^;    as. 


126  VERBS. 

(fi?v)  f^  ^  to  be  perfect/  ^rtwtir,  ^it^,  ^itif : ;  or  ^ri>fh^, 

jo.  All  the  verbs  of  the  eighth  conjugation,  except  cfi  ^  to  do,' 
besides  taking  ^5  and  being  inflected  on  the  principle  of  clause 
df  may  dispense  with  the  ^  in  the  Atmane-pada,  before  the 
terminations  of  the  second  and  third  persons  singular ;  before 
which  also  they  drop  their  own  finals ;  as,  inT  ^  to  stretch/ 
^TiTfT,  ^nnrr:  (the  ^  of  ^  and  FTT^  being  rejected  by  clause  b). 

g.  All  verbs  of  the  tenth  conjugation,  and  causal  verbs,  are 
inflected  with  the  terminations  of  the  first  praeterite  with  the 
augment  ^.  The  root  is  doubled  before  them,  according  to 
rules  to  be  given  when  treating  of  the  causal  praeterite ;  thus, 
^,  '  to  steal,'  makes  ^i^^gTj^. 

Of  the  augment  ^. 

191.  The  insertion  of  this  augment  is  not  restricted  to  the 
cases  in  which  it  has  already  been  pointed  out  in  the  second  and 
third  praeterite,  but  is  extended  to  the  terminations  beginning 
with  consonants  in  the  other  tenses  which  are  not  comprised 
within  those  that  take  the  conjugational  distinctions,  except 
the  benedictive  of  the  Parasmai-pada.  The  objects  of  the 
insertion  and  exception  may  be  easily  understood.  In  the 
former  case  it  is  intended  to  supply  the  place  of  the  conjuga- 
tional vowel;  in  the  latter,  the  initial  of  the  termination  is 
the  semivowel  if,  which  may  be  united  with  a  preceding  con- 
sonant, and  does  not  need  the  interposition  of  a  vowel. 

a.  Although,  however  enjoined  in  most  cases,  there  are 
many  exceptions  to  its  insertion.  In  the  two  futures,  the 
conditional,  and  the  benedictive  Atmane-pada,  as  in  the  third 
praeterite,  ^  is  not  inserted  after  verbs  distinguished  by  an 
indicatory  5^ ;  T>T-^  *  to  begin,^  T^TT '  he  will  begin  :'  and  it  is 
optionally  inserted  in  verbs  having  an  indicatory  ^;  as,  i^v, 
*  to  accompHsh,'  makes  in  the  first  future  %^  or  ^fiiril.  In 
the  tenses  now  named,  however,  a  more  general  prohibition 
to  the  insertion  of  i^,  and  which  is  not  applicable  to  the 


PRINCIPLES  OF  CONJUGATION. 


127 


praeterites,  is  when  the  vowel  of  a  verb  has  the  grave  accent. 
These  verbs  are  specified  as  follows. 

h.  Monosyllables  ending  in  any  vowels  except  "31  and  ^, 
and  except  ^,  ^,  ^,  t^  ?  (^d  conj.),  ^,  ^,  -^^  ftr,  frg,  m 
Verbs  ending  in  ^  also  insert  ^  before  the  terminations  of  the 
indefinite  future. 

c.  The  following  verbs  ending  in  consonants  do  not  insert 
this  prefix. 


^T^  to  eat. 

^TR  to  obtain. 

^  to  attract,  (i.  6.) 

^  to  be  angry. 

"^  to  cry  aloud. 

f^Tl  to  throw. 

■^  to  pound. 

"^V  to  be  hungry. 

f^  to  be  distressed. 

'TT  to  go. 

TRT  to  eat. 

f%^  to  cut. 

"^  to  touch. 

TJTR  to  bow. 

mil  to  tie. 

"ftjinT  to  cleanse. 

ITT^  to  send. 

mr  to  inflame,  (i.  4.  10.) 

■fifxj  to  drop. 

^  to  torment. 

^  to  be  satisfied. 

HTT  to  be  satisfied.  (4.) 

?nf  to  abandon. 

f?^  to  shine. 

^  to  bite. 

^  to  bum. 


f^  to  shew. 
f|[^  to  smear. 
J^  to  do  wrong. 
5^  to  milk.  («.) 
CT  to  be  proud. 
g^  to  see. 
■fe"^  to  hate. 
"q^  to  cook. 
^  to  go. 
frr^  to  grind. 
Y^  to  cherish.  (4.) 
TT^  to  ask. 
"qv  to  bind. 
-q^  to  bind. 
mr  to  serve. 
H^  to  break, 
fn^  to  break. 
^  to  enjoy. 
>J^  to  fry. 
ir?r  to  think. 
JT^  to  merge, 
fir^  to  urine. 
?r^  to  be  free. 
^  to  perceive. 
THT  to  sacrifice. 
TW  to  copulate. 


128 


VERBS. 


TR   to  stop. 

Tpf  to  join. 
^  to  fight. 
T^  to  colour. 
T>T  to  begin. 
TH  to  sport. 
TIV  to  accomplish, 
ft^  to  purge. 
ftSH'  to  hurt. 
^»T  to  be  sick. 
^  to  obstruct. 
^T^  to  hurt. 
^  to  ascend. 
c3H  to  acquire. 
fc5xy  to  smear. 
■fe^  to  lessen. 
ff^  to  lick. 
<5Tf  to  disturb. 
T^T^  to  speak. 
^TT  to  sow. 
^?r  to  dwell,  (i.) 
^  to  bear, 
f^  to  differ. 


f^iT  to  differ. 

f%^  to  know.  (4.  6.  7.) 

f^  to  enter. 

f^^  to  pervade,  (i.  3.  9,) 

^l\r  to  pierce. 

i^rsfi  to  be  able.  (5.) 

^  to  wither. 

^R  to  vow. 

f^  to  hurt, to  distinguish.(  1.7.) 

^  to  be  pure.  (4.) 

3R  to  dry. 

fW"Er  to  embrace.  (4.) 

"q^  to  embrace. 

■R^  to  wither. 

fw^  to  sprinkle. 

fiTO  to  accomplish. 

lE^I^  to  embrace. 

r^  to  sleep. 

^nv  to  accomplish. 

T^  to  abandon, 

1^  to  creep. 

^«^  to  go. 

w^  to  touch. 


The  figures  mark  the  conjugations  in  which  the  verbs 
are  inflected  without  l^;  in  any  others  they  may  insert  it. 
The  same  verb  sometimes  belongs  to  more  than  one  conju- 
gation, either  with  the  same  or  with  a  different  sense. 

192.  First  future.  The  terminations  undergo  no  change 
whatever,  except  when  the  verb  ends  with  an  aspirate,  when 
IT  is  changed  to  v,  as  in  the  present  tense.  The  changes 
of  the  base  are  few  and  simple.  The  final  vowels  i[,  %  ^, 
"31,  ^,  '%,  substitute  the  GuAa  elements,  ^,  ^,  ^,  whether 
the  augment  ^  be  inserted  or  not.  If  inserted,  the  first 
two  are  changed  by  the   rules  of  Sandhi  to  ^,  W^;    as. 


PRINCIPLES  OP  CONJUGATION.  129 

f»f  *  to  conquer,'  ^WT  *  he  will  conquer ;'  ^  Ho  sleep/  ^if^ril '  he 
will  sleep  /  ;^  ^  to  cry/  iS^A\,  A  final  ^  and  ^  are  changed 
to  ^rr,  and  this  vowel,  as  well  as  ^,  undergoes  no  change; 
as,  ^  '  to  give/  ^TiTT  '  he  will  give ;'  ^  '  to  drink/  VTrTT ;  ^ 
*  to  sharpen,'  ^fftirr.  The  medial  vowels  ^,  T,  "^,  if  followed 
by  a  single  consonant,  also  substitute  the  Guna  letters ;  but 
"^  is  sometimes  changed  to  ^;  long  vowels  are  unchanged ;  as, 
fir^  ^to  sprinkle/  %^;  ^  'to  be  sad/  ^ftf^WT;  1^  'to  see/ 
^STT ;  'fN'  '  to  live,'  ifHVirr.  The  final  consonants  when  not 
separated  by  the  augment  ^  from  the  dental  w,  which  is  the 
initial  of  all  the  terminations  of  this  tense,  combine  with  it, 
according  to  the  rules  of  Sandhi:  thus  xr^  makes  tj^;  tth, 
iRrr.  After  an  aspirate,  TT  is  changed  to  V ;  as,  H>?  ^  to  gain,' 
cTSErr.  >T  after  ^  derived  from  a  final  ^  (rule  3:2)  is  changed  to 
^,  and  the  first  ^  is  rejected  ;  as,  ^  '  to  grow,'  TfeT. 

193.  Indefinite  future.  The  terminations  of  this  tense 
differ  from  those  of  the  present  only  in  having  ^  prefixed  to 
them,  on  the  same  principles  as  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation ; 
making  therefore  mC^,  W^y  not  wifnT,  &c. ;  5^^,  ^^,  not 
^tTT^,  WI^.  After  ^  the  sibilant  is  changed  to  "q ;  and  after 
a  final  vowel  or  consonant  it  undergoes  such  changes  as  the 
rules  of  Sandhi  enjoin. 

a.  The  changes  of  the  base  are  not  numerous.  A  final  or 
medial  short  vowel,  the  latter  not  being  long  by  position, 
substitutes  the  GuAa  element,  which  before  ^  is  changed  to 
the  form  which  the  laws  of  combination  require.  Final  con- 
sonants are  also  modified  according  to  the  same  rules.  A 
final  palatal  is  changed  before  ^  to  the  hard  guttural  ^  and  ^ 
after  "SR  becoming  %  the  compound  TJ  is  formed ;  as,  tr^  '  to 
cook/  TT^^fiT;  ftuftr  '  to  wash/  f^ferfw.  After  a  final  cerebral 
sibilant  the  same  change  takes  place ;  as,  ^  for  1^,  '  to  see/ 
makes  "^^jl^.  "^  also  is  changed  to  ^ ;  and  as  in  the  declen- 
sion of  nouns  in  ^  when  the  final  is  so  changed  the  initial  is 
changed  to  its  aspirate  (rule  131,  6),  so  ^,  '  to  bum/  makes 
V^rfir ;  5?  *  to  milk/  Vlvt^ifri. 

194.  Imperative.      The   changes   of  the   terminations   are 


130  VERBS. 

few,  and  where  the  terminations  are  analogous  to  those  of  the 
present,  as  ^3r^,  ^?^f,  W\yn,  ^rnrf,  they  undergo  similar  modifi- 
cations, when  such  are  necessary,  as  in  the  first,  fourth,  sixth, 
and  tenth  conjugations.  In  the  same  conjugations,  f^,  the  sign 
of  the  second  person  singular,  is  rejected,  leaving  only  the  con- 
jugational  sign  W;  as,  >j;^+f^  becomes  >1^  'be  thou.^  In  the 
other  conjugations,  after  any  consonant  except  a  semivowel  or 
a  nasal  or  ^,  fxf  is  substituted  for  f% ;  as,  ^^ '  to  speak,^  ^^fnr ; 
also  after  ^  '  to  sacrifice,*  as  ^ff>T-  TTTW  is  substituted  for  the 
terminations  of  the  second  and  third  persons  singular  in  a 
benedictive  sense  ;  as,  H^rilH^  '  may  thou'  or  '  may  he  be.' 

a.  The  changes  of  the  base  are  conjugational,  and  analogous 
to  those  of  the  present. 

195.  Potential.  ^  is  substituted  for  the  xrr  of  all  the  termi- 
nations of  this  mood,  and  is  prefixed  to  ^if,  which  becomes  xf, 
and  also  to  ^,  in  the  Parasmai-pada  of  the  first  class  of  conjuga- 
tions, and  with  their  conjugational  sign  ^  becomes  by  the  rules 
of  Sandhi  (rule  2)  ^;  as,  ^T^l^,  ^(t^l^^  ^^^  ^sftT^"r^.  In  the  second 
series  xrr  is  unchanged ;  as,  ^rem^,  &c.  In  the  first  class  of  con- 
jugations the  initial  ^  of  the  terminations  of  the  i^tmane-pada  be- 
comes with  the  conjugational  ^,  ^;  as,  1^^,  ^aimi.  In  the  second 
class  it  is  unchanged ;  as,  wm  Ho  sit,'  ^rratrT,  ^STTOhncrf,  ^rnftt5|,&c. 

a»  The  changes  of  the  base  are  conjugational. 

196.  Benedictive  mood.  The  terminations  are  not  liable 
to  change  :  ^  may  be  inserted  before  those  of  the  i^tmane- 
pada,  when  ^  becomes  ^. 

a.  The  following  are  the  principal  changes  to  which  the 
inflective  base  is  subject  in  the  Parasmai-pada,  and  when  ^  is 
not  inserted  in  the  i^tmane-pada. 

b.  Of  verbs  ending  in  vowels,  most  of  those  which  termi- 
nate in  ^T,  either  as  a  primitive  or  as  derived  from  ^  or  ^, 
substitute  ^  in  the  Parasmai-pada ;  they  are  unchanged  in 
the  Atmane-pada ;  as,  ^T  '  to  give,'  ^^,  ^V^.  Some  change 
it  optionally  before  ti;  as,  ^  'to  sing,'  irnm^  or  Ttirn^.  Those 
in  which  ^t  is  preceded  by  a  conjunct  consonant,  except  wi 
'  to  stay,'  do  not  change  the  ^rr  j  as,  wn  *  to  blow,'  wmrn^. 


PRINCIPLES  OF  CONJUGATION.  131 

Those  ending  in  ^  or  ^  substitute  ^  in  the  Parasmai-pada,  and 
the  Guiia  letter  ^  in  the  j^tmane-pada ;  as,  ^ '  to  take/  ^mi\^, 
^rg.  Those  ending  in  "g"  and  "gi  substitute  "gi  and  ^ ;  as,  ^ 
^  to  hear,'  ^Ulr^;  ^  ^  to  praise,*  ^^\t{9  Wl*flv.  "^  short  sub- 
stitutes ft,  and  ^  long  ^,  in  the  Parasmai-pada ;  as,  ^  '  to 
make,'  P^HIH;;  W  ^  to  cross,'  "rfhtril^.  Verbs  ending  in  ^,  and 
beginning  with  a  compound  consonant,  substitute  the  Guna 
^  for  their  final ;  as,  ^  *  to  spread,'  ^cntr?^.  In  the  ^tmane- 
pada  the  vowel  is  unchanged ;  as,  ^  '  to  make,'  ^irh?.  A  final 
^  is  unchanged ;  as,  ^  ^  to  wither,'  ^fhniT . 

c.  Verbs  ending  in  consonants  change  their  finals  accord- 
ing to  the  rules  of  Sandhi,  or  others  of  an  analogous  appli- 
cation, only  before  the  sibilants  of  the  i^tmane-pada ;  nor  do 
their  preceding  vowels  undergo  any  alteration ;  as,  f^  ^  to 
cut,'  f^^TTi;,  fiS(W\^ ;  xr^  '  to  cook,'  M^mt\^,  tt^^f.  If  the  final 
be  a  compound,  of  which  a  nasal  is  the  first  member,  it  is 
rejected  in  the  Parasmai-pada,  as  ^"^r  ^  to  bite,'  ^^TTTrT ;  not  in 
the  i^tmane-pada,  as  t^^  ^  to  embrace,'  w^ ;  nor  does  this 
apply  to  roots  inserting  a  nasal  in  consequence  of  an  Anu- 
bhandha  ^;  as,  ^f^  *  to  rejoice,'  rrs^rnr. 

d.  Some  verbs  containing  semivowels  change  them  to  their 
corresponding  vowels  in  the  Parasmai-pada ;  as,  tt^  '  to  ask,' 
•J^-llft;;  T^  ^to  speak/  "gnni^;  ^^r  ^to  sew/  ^mict;;  ^Hf  ^  to 
worship/  ^i<j|f^;  ^  ^  to  bear/  ^r^TTW;  ^RT  'to  dwell/  TBTTTI;; 
^  ^  to  subdue,'  "g^xrn^.  There  are  a  few  verbs  containing  the 
semivowel  %  and  ending  in  ^,  which  admit  of  a  similar  modi- 
fication, and  reject  the  diphthong ;  as,  ^  ^  to  weave,'  "gnrnr ; 
^  '  to  conceal/  ^fhm^;  and  ^  '  to  call/  f^T?^. 

€,  When  ^  is  prefixed  to  the  terminations  of  this  tense  in 
the  Atmane-pada,  the  changes  of  the  base  are  analogous  to 
those  of  the  other  tenses  before  the  same  augment. 

197.  Conditional  mood.  The  terminations  generally  follow 
the  analogy  of  those  of  the  indefinite  future  (see  p.  115). 

a.  The  base  prefixes  the  temporal  augment,  but  in  all  other 
respects  is  analogous  to  the  inflective  base  of  the  indefinite 

s  2, 


132  VERBS. 

future;  as,  ind.  fut.  viP^qPri  'will  be/  cond.  ^wfw?^;  ^siwfw 

*  will  eat/  cond.  ^STTiWrl]^. 

SECTION  VI. 

Formation  of  the  Verb, 

198.  From  this  general  view  of  the  formation  of  the  tenses, 
we  may  now  proceed  to  trace  an  entire  verb  through  all  its 
inflexions  in  the  two  active  voices  and  in  the  passive  voice. 
In  following  the  example  of  Mr.  Colebrooke,  and  offering  ^,  'to 
be/  as  an  example,  we  select  a  verb  of  general  usefulness,  and 
frequent  recurrence,  ^is  a  verb  of  the  first  conjugation:  it 
is  properly  confined  to  the  Parasmai-pada,  and  in  its  character 
of  a  substantive  verb  cannot  well  admit  of  any  other.  With 
prepositions,  however,  it  takes  a  transitive  sense,  and  may  then 
be  both  active  and  passive;  as,  ^r^H^  'he  perceives/  ^5r5>J3J^ 

*  it  is  perceived.*  We  may,  however,  lay  aside  the  preposition 
for  the  present,  that  the  purpose  for  which  the  verb  is  exhi- 
bited, that  of  supplying  a  model  of  extensive  application,  may 
not  be  embarrassed  by  unnecessary  complexity. 

199.  >T^as  a  verb  of  the  first  conjugation  changes  its  vowel 
to  ^  before  the  sign  of  the  conjugation  ^.  It  changes  it  to 
^  also  before  the  augment  ?f,  which  it  admits  :  and  before  ^ 
and  \,  ^  becomes  ^r^.  The  inflective  base  with  the  augments 
is  therefore  >T^  and  >Tf^.  In  the  second  praeterite  ^  is  added 
to  the  radical  vowel,  and  the  verb  being  repeated,  the  base  is 
^^.  In  the  third  praeterite  in  the  Parasmai-pada  the  verb 
takes  the  terminations  of  the  first :  in  the  iitmane-pada  it 
retains  its  own  terminations  with  the  augment  ^. 

^j^^tobe.' 
Indicative  mood. 

Present  tense,  *  I  am/  &c. 
Parasmai-pada.  Atmane-pada. 


H-^rft? 

H^T^: 

>t^t»t: 

H^ 

H^^ 

h^utI 

H^ftr 

H^^: 

>TT?T 

>T^ 

H^^ 

>?^5^ 

«^ 

h^ct; 

H^fw 

>T^ 

>T^ 

>J^ 

FORMATION   OP  THE  VERB. 


133 


First  praeterite  or  imperfect,  *  I  was/  &c. 


-SM^ 

'SM^T^ 

^>T^T1T 

^M^ 

^>T^^    ^nH^mH^ 

ysnm 

^I^Trf 

^M^ff 

^M*^^v^^: 

^M^      ^w^ssr 

^>T^ 

^^H^dl 

^fW^ 

-iWMri 

^*T^Hl          ^H^ni 

Second  praeterite  or  perfect 

,  *  I  was " 

or  have  been/  &c. 

^^ 

^^^ 

•^■>jf^ 

^ 

c^^ifci^^      <4Hr=JH^ 

^^Jf^ 

^»25T 

^^ 

^^ 

^SPI^T^         ^^(|) 

■^1? 

"^^IFS^ 

^^• 

^ 

^H^T^         ^^ 

Third  praet.,  indefinite,  or  aorist  past, '  I 

was  or  had  been/  &c. 

"»P??^ 

^3nj5 

^T^ 

^^Wf^ftf 

^wfcj^jH^  ^wf^^irf^ 

^!P|: 

^ 

W^ 

-^Hf^ai: 

^Hp^mvii  ^HrMuf(g') 

''^ 

^^* 

^^f?^ 

^wf^ 

'3r*Trtr»(Trff  ^hH^mh 

/*         ^ 

First  or 

definite  fut 

lire,  '  I  will  be/  &c. 

H^^rilm: 

HNrtlf<*^        HmrtlW^ 

>TfT?nr. 

>Tf^ 

HTcJril 

Second  or  indefinite  futur 

e,  '  I  will 

or  shall  be,'  &c. 

nr^m^H 

HNuim: 

^iPcimm^      HP^ttliH^ 

^ff^mv)        Hpciuju^ 

HrmMPfi 

Hf^mri: 

♦ifciui^           *«r4U*ni 

Imperative  mood^ 

'  May  I  be/  &c. 

H-^rf^ 

H-^T^ 

HTR 

>^t 

H^i|^           H^wi 

>T^ 

vr^^ 

^r^ 

i?^^ 

«^          *i^s4 

H^ 

H^ 

m^ 

^Tfrff 

*T^riI                H^iil 

Potential  or 

subjunctive 

mood,  ^ 

I  may  be/  &c. 

H^ 

H^ 

H^ 

M^ 

H^^          H^id^ 

vfhwm       ^^ 

H^^ldf          Hc^i^f^ 

Benedictive  or 

optative  mo 

od,  *  I  wish  I  may  be,'  &c. 

^HI«H 

^M\^ 

ii\m 

HNMN 

Hic(mm^      Hi«4Mmi^ 

^^* 

1^'« 

^^'« 

♦ffciiflai: 

hPc* Ml^^i^f  hP^mIi4(^ 

^^x 

^^IWI 

'^^ni: 

HN»(ly 

HP^»O^I«f    HpcJMtJC^ 

134 


VERBS. 


Conditional  mood,  ^  I  shall  be^  if/  &c. 


"^WpcliMrt      ^>Tf%^irf      ^wf^Ui^ri 


Passive  voice, 
200.  In  this  voice  ^  is  prefixed  to  the  terminations  of  the 
conjugational  tenses  in  the  Atmane-pada;  and  before  ^  the 
radical  vowel  is  unchangeable.  In  the  non- conjugational  tenses 
the  radical  vowel  optionally  substitutes  the  Guna  or  Vriddhi 
diphthong,  and  thus  >T^  becomes  >ft  or  >^;  making  consequently 
before  a  vowel  >T^  or  HT'^.  It  takes  the  latter  only  before  the 
termination  3(  of  the  third  praeterite.  In  every  other  respect 
there  is  no  difference  between  the  tenses  of  the  passive  voice 
and  those  of  the  active  in  the  Atmane-pada  of  the  first 
conjugation. 


Present  tense. 


I 


First  praeter. 
Second  praeter. 
Third  praeter. 

ist  pers. 
2d  pers. 
3d  pers. 
First  future. 

Second  future. 

Imperative. 
Potential. 

Benedictive. 


^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 

^ 


^nj^iRf^^  &c. 
-^^^PR^   &c. 


f  HP«4«i 


^W  P"=l  M  Pt^ 
^TH I  Pq  «i  P^ 
^I^P^Hl'm* 

{^THp^Mlrif 
^THiP^Hifif 
VP^ril^^ 
NlPMril^^ 
><Pc|UfH^ 


^wip«i"^ni 

HlP^rilW^ 
H  P«l  m  IH% 

^JTTRt   &C. 

>u1hP^  &c. 
Hp^mlnf^  1 


&c. 


} 


&c. 


&c. 


DERIVATIVE  VERBS.  185 

Conditional,      j""^       'SMf^^RT^       """"^T^  \&.c. 


SECTION   VIL 

Derivative  Verbs, 

201.  Before  proceeding  to  any  detail  of  individual  verbs,  it 
is  desirable  that  some  notion  should  be  entertained  of  those 
secondary  or  derivative  forms  of  which  the  simple  verb  admits. 
Some  of  these  might  perhaps  be  more  correctly  designated  as 
moods;  for  causality,  desire,  frequency,  or  intensity,  are  but 
different  modes  or  conditions  of  the  same  action ;  and  the  modi- 
fications by  which  they  are  expressed  are  no  more  to  be  regarded 
as  distinct  verbs  because  they  take  all  the  tenses  of  the  simple 
verb,  than  are  the  moods  of  the  Greek  verb,  of  which  the 
same  circumstance  may  be  predicated.  As  however  the  deriva- 
tive forms  have  been  hitherto  given  separately,  and  as  their 
annexation  to  the  simple  verb  as  moods  would  present  to  the 
learner  a  rather  formidable  array  of  verbal  inflexion,  the  distinct 
explanation  of  them  may  be  here  also  observed. 

Causals, 

0,02.  All  verbs  admit  of  a  modification  implying  causality, 
as  causing  to  be,  to  do,  &c.  In  the  language  of  the  original 
grammarians,  "ftrj^  is  added  to  the  verb ;  that  is,  the  vowel  ^, 
which  is  convertible  to  ^,  and  becomes  ^n^  before  a  vowel ;  the 
W  in  the  afiix  indicates  the  substitution  of  the  Vriddhi  element 
for  the  radical  vowel ;  ^  therefore  becomes  ift,  which  with  ^ 
makes  Hlf^,  or  before  a  vowel  ^TT^. 

a.  The  causal  verb  may  be  conjugated  with  the  termina- 
tions of  either  voice;  with  those  of  the  Parasmai-pada  when 
it  is  strictly  transitive;  with  the  Atmane-pada  when  it  is 
reflective,  or  when  the  consequence  of  the  action  reverts  to 
the  causer  or  instigator.  ^  is  inserted  before  the  terminations 
in  the  conjugational  tenses,  and  ^  in  the  non-conjugational ; 


130  VERBS. 

except  in  the  third  praeterite,  which  takes  the  terminations  of 
the  first  praeterite.  The  second  praeterite  is  formed  with  the 
auxiHary  verbs  "^^  ^5  '^T^. 

b.  Verbs  ending  in  ^J,  whether  primitive  or  derived  from 
the  change  of  a  final  diphthong  to  'm,  insert  it,  fj,  or  "g,  before 
the  causal  augment ;  as,  xrr  '  to  drink/  xninTfiT  *  he  causes  to 
drink  ;'  v^  *  to  preserve/  tnc^^rffT  '  he  causes  to  preserve  /  ^ 
*  to  know,'  ^rnrrffT  ^  he  causes  to  know/  ^  he  teaches/  In  some 
instances  the  radical  vowel  is  optionally  made  short;  as,  ^ 
^  to  sharpen'  or  *  kill/  inTnrfw  or  ^q^fri  '  he  causes  to  kill  / 
Wr  ^  to  bathe/  "^^T^-gfiT  or  t^M^ifri  ^  he  causes  to  bathe.' 

c.  Roots  ending  in  ^  or  ^  when  substituting  the  Vriddhi  ele- 
ment ^  change  the  latter  of  course  before  the  vowel  of  the  causal 
form  to  ^BTT^;  as,  f^  ^  to  collect,^  ^^TTgfw  ^  he  causes  to  coUect  :* 
but  IT  is  sometimes  replaced  by  xf,  and  the  vowel  in  both  cases 
made  optionally  short ;  so  that  fsr  makes  also  MRilftf,  '^^^frf, 
or  -ciM^fH.  Roots  in  ^  long  sometimes  either  change  the  radical 
to  the  GuAa  element,  or  preserve  it  unchanged,  interposing  a 
consonant  before  the  causal  augment ;  as,  "^  ^  to  be  ashamed,' 
\^^?^ ;  ift  Ho  be  pleased/  Tft^rnrfiT  or  Mlniifri,  Roots  ending 
in  '3',  "3i,  ^,  and  "^  mostly  change  their  finals  to  the  Vriddhi 
substitutes. 

d.  Roots  ending  in  consonants  usually  change  a  medial  ^ 
to  ^rr ;  and  ^,  T  and  ^  to  ^,  ^  and  ^.  Long  vowels  are 
unchanged.  There  are  exceptions,  ^s  in  the  class  of  roots 
called  Hdlft*  or  "q^  ^  to  endeavour,'  with  other  verbs  of  the  first 
conjugation,  which  do  not  make  the  vowel  long,  as  xr?,  MdAlfri. 
Of  roots  ending  in  H,  some  do  and  some  do  not  make  the 
vowel  long;  as,  itH  'to  go/  iiH^fri  ;  W\  'to  wish/  "^mRrqfrT. 
^,  'to  kill,'  substitutes  "qTrr;  as,  Miri^fii  'he  causes  to  kill.' 
^,  '  to  ascend,'  optionally  substitutes  xf  for  the  final ;  as, 
Cl^^fri  or  Jcmnfrf  '  he  causes  to  ascend  or  grow/  '  he  plants.' 

e.  These  general  rules  for  the  modification  of  the  base 
are  applicable  to  all  the  tenses  except  the  benedictive  in  the 
Parasmai-pada,  and  the  third  praeterite.     In  the  former  the 


DERIVATIVE  VERBS.  137 

causal  augment  is  rejected,  although  the  vowel  of  the  base 
undergoes  the  change  to  which  it  is  Uable  in  this  form,  as 
>J^  becomes  irnqTff.  In  the  third  praeterite,  which  takes  the 
terminations  of  the  first,  and  the  conjugational  augment  ^ 
before  them,  the  root  undergoes  reduplication,  with  some 
peculiar  modifications  of  the  radical  vowel.  With  very  few 
exceptions  the  causal  augment  is  rejected ;  as,  ^rr^,  ^  to  ask,* 
makes  ^jrqrrpqi^  not  ■»i(i|^M^f^.  In  general  the  radical  vowel, 
if  long,  is  made  short ;  as,  ift  ^  to  please,'  ^tftfwr^  *  he  caused 
to  please  ;  ^ '  to  shake,'  ^^TiT  '  he  caused  to  shake.*  There 
are  some  exceptions,  as  in  the  instance  of  "m^ ;  so  also  ^pTff, 
^  to  govern,*  makes  ^r^r^mn^.  Some  verbs  take  both  forms ; 
as,  HT^  *  to  speak,'  wf^HTWl^  or  ^rf^>T^  ^  he  caused  to  speak.' 

/,  In  doubling  the  root  before  the  third  praeterite  of  the 
causal,  the  general  rules  are  mostly  to  be  observed  (see  p.  ii8); 
but  there  are  also  some  peculiarities. 

ff.  If  the  verb  consists  of  a  vowel  followed  by  a  consonant, 
the  first  member  of  the  reduplication  is  the  entire  root,  with 
the  vowel  modified  as  usual:  to  this,  ^  is  added,  with  the 
radical  consonant ;  as,  ^T^  *  to  go,*  "^jftZrl  ^  he  sent,*  or  ^  caused 
to  go  ;*  "^  '  to  worship,*  $fc5c5ir  ^  he  caused  to  worship.* 

h.  If  the  verb  begin  with  a  consonant,  the  reduplicated  con- 
sonant wiU  conform  to  preceding  rules  (p.  ii8).  The  redupli- 
cate vowel  will  be  ^,  ^,  or  'g'. 

i.  ^  is  repeated  for  a  radical  ^  prosodially  long ;  as,  H»T, 
^  to  obtain,'  makes  ^c^rtWTr^  '  he  caused  to  obtain  ;*  and  for  ^ 
when  it  is  preceded  by  a  double  consonant ;  as,  ^  ^  to  tram- 
ple,' ^nTO(^  '  he  caused  to  trample :'  for  ^rr  medial,  which  is 
preserved  in  the  inflexion ;  as,  ^^rro  ^  to  govern,*  ^T^nfTT^ ; 
and  for  ^  and  ^  in  some  verbs ;  as,  TiT  *  to  be,'  '^5r^^#f^  '  he 
caused  to  be  ;*  ^  ^  to  tear,'  ^l^T^^  '  he  caused  to  tear.' 

j,  \,  becoming  ^  before  a  single  consonant  followed  in  its 
inflected  form  by  a  short  vowel,  and  remaining  unchanged 
before  a  double  consonant,  or  before  a  single  consonant  if 
followed  in  its  inflected  form  by  a  long  vowel,  is  repeated — 


138  VERBS. 

I,  for  ^  or  ^sn  when  not  followed  by  a  double  consonant ;  as, 
TT^  Ho  cook/  ^nfhr^;  ^T  Ho  shake/  ^Hp^iaH^;  V^  ^to 
stand/  ^fiffsxTrT  ^  he  caused  to  stand  :'  ^,  for  ^,  ^,  ^,  ^ ;  as,  f*r 
**to  conquer/  ^nft^nTTT;  T?  Ho  surround/  ^^^Trf  :  3,  for  "g"  or 
■gi  preceded  by  »r,  a  labial,  or  a  semivowel ;  as,  »T  ^  to  make 
haste/  ^^^lTic(t|  ^he  caused  to  make  haste  /  H  Ho  be/  ^iisHH^ri^ 
*  he  caused  to  be  /  p5  '  to  cut/  ^r<^h55^ :  4,  optionally  for  "gr  or 
"31  preceded  by  the  same  consonants  in  composition  with  others ; 
as,  "^  ^  to  hear,^  wfi^TJT^l^  or  ^sr^'sjsr^:  5,  for  ^,  when  that  does 
not  substitute  ^ ;  as,  ^  Ho  be/  ^Hc/l^jriii^,  otherwise  ^s^^rtr^ ; 
or  in  some  cases  where  it  does  take  Guiia ;  as,  "35 '  to  make,^ 
^NhKTi^  '  he  caused  to  make/  # 

k,  "3",  liable  to  be  changed  to  "3!  by  the  same  circumstances 
which  require  the  alteration  of  ^  to  ^,  is  repeated  for  T,  ^,  ^, 
^ ;  as,  ^  ^  to  grow,'  ^ST^^^  ^  he  caused  to  grow/  '  he  raised  / 
^cfi  ^  to  seek,^  w^^cfil^  ^  he  caused  to  seek  ;*  "b^  ^  to  sleep,^ 
^^MMri  ' he  caused  to  sleep/ 

/.  Some  of  the  forms  of  this  tense  are  apparently  anomalous, 
although  they  arise  out  of  previous  rules  :  thus  ^  ^  to  go,'  with 
^srfv  prefixed,  ^  to  read,'  makes  ^srarrfwi^  or  "^arwifhrTif  '  he 
taught'  or  ^  caused  to  read  /  ITT  Ho  smell/  ^wfinTT^  or  ^r»fHM7^ 
^  he  caused  to  smell  /  ^«T  Ho  kill,'  W5fhnrf|[;  and  ttt  Ho  drink,' 
^snfhm^  *  he  caused  to  drink/ 

m.  It  is  not  necessary,  either  in  the  case  of  causal  deriva- 
tives or  those  about  to  be  described,  to  multiply  examples 
under  their  several  rules.  In  the  succeeding  pages  para- 
digmas  will  be  given  of  many  of  the  most  useful  verbs,  and 
these  will  include  examples  of  their  derivative  verbal  inflexions, 

Desideratives. 

203.  When  the  agent  wishes,  intends,  or  expects  to  do  the 
action,  or  be  in  the  condition,  which  the  verb  imports,  ^, 
technically  called  ^t^,  is  added  to  the  root.  The  ^  is  rejected 
before  the  terminations  of  the  non-conjugational  tenses.     The 


DERIVATIVE  VERBS.  139 

root  undergoes  reduplication,  and  is  conjugated  in  the  same 
voice  in  which  the  primitive  is  conjugated. 

«.  Before  ^nr  the  augment  ^  is  very  commonly  prefixed. 
Its  exclusion  occurs  for  the  most  part  after  those  roots  v^^hich 
do  not  take  the  same  augment  before  the  non-conjugational 
tenses  (see  p.  137).  This  does  not  prevent  the  use  of  the 
augment  before  the  personal  terminations  in  those  tenses  in 
which  it  is  enjoined  in  all  derivative  verbs.  After  ^  the  ^  of 
T^  is  changed  to  "^. 

b.  The  reduplication  of  the  radical  syllable  follows  the  rules 
affecting  consonants  (r.  188.  cl.  dio  g).  There  are  some  pecu- 
liarities in  regard  to  the  vowels  ;  ^  being  usually  substituted  for 
a  radical  medial  or  final  'sr,  ^T,  ^5  ^5  "^,  "^j  ^,  ^ ;  and  ^  for  "7, 
^gi,  ^,  ^.  When  the  root  begins  with  a  vowel,  the  redupli- 
cation is  the  radical  syllable  itself,  followed  by  the  final  con- 
sonant with  ^  prefixed ;  as,  ^T^  ^  to  eat,'  ^%f^r^  ^  to  wish  to 
eat.'  Very  commonly,  however,  there  is  no  reduplication,  but 
the  initial  letter  or  the  whole  syllable  is  changed ;  as,  ^sm^  '  to 
obtain,'  ^  '  to  wish  to  obtain ;'  ^V '  to  increase,^  ^r^  ^  to  wish 
to  increase,'  &c.  The  same  occurs  with  verbs  beginning  with 
consonants ;  as,  ^  '  to  give,'  f^,  "ft^rRfw  '  he  wishes  to  give ;' 
ft{  ^  to  scatter,'  and  »ft  *  to  kill,'  f?n^,  "ft  rFfw  ^  he  wishes  to  scat- 
ter' or  '  kill ;'  ^Hfi  '  to  be  able,'  f^"2^,  as  f^i^fw  '  he  wishes  to  be 
able,'  ^  he  learns ;'  cJH  Ue  obtain,'  fc^,  as  fc^Htfcf  '  he  desires 
to  obtain ;'  ^  *  to  go,'  fqiflri  ^  he  wishes  to  go ;'  ^nr  *  to  fall,' 
PMi^fri  *  he  expects  to  fall,'  &c. 

c.  Besides  the  changes  to  which  the  radical  vowels  are 
subject  in  the  syllable  of  redupHcation,  they  are  occasionally 
subject  to  the  same  or  similar  changes  in  the  radical  syllable 
also.  When  ^  is  not  prefixed  to  ^"^5  a  radical  short  ^  and  T 
become  long ;  as,  f^y '  to  conquer,'  makes  lirfWiT ;  "J  ^  to  join,' 
^jj^Mfri.  The  long  vowels  remain  for  the  most  part  unaltered ; 
as,  ^T  '  to  know,'  fif^^rfifT  '  he  wishes  to  know ;'  >J^ '  to  be,' 
"^iT^filT  ^  he  wishes  to  be.'  "^  and  ^  are  commonly  changed 
to  ^;   as,  ^  Ho  make,'  "N^fitffiT  ^  he  wishes  to  make:'  but 

T  2 


14)0  VERBS. 

when  preceded  by  a  labial,  the  substitute  is  "3i^;  as,  H, '  to  die/ 
makes  g^jSfri  '  he  wishes  to  die.' 

d.  When  ^  is  prefixed  to  t^,  a  final  ^  may  be  dropped ; 
as,  ^fic^T  ^to  be  poor/  ^W^fff;  otherwise  <^n.<[lf(rri.  Other 
final  vowels  may  substitute  the  Guna  or  Vriddhi  elements, 
changed  before  ^  agreeably  to  the  rules  of  Sandhi.  Thus  f^, 
^  to  serve/  makes  ^^^'^^^^^^f^ ;  otherwise  f^i^^lqfri.  ^,  ^  to  go/ 
substitutes  im,  which  takes  ^  and  makes  fiTTfwfrT ;  but  not  if 
^rfv  be  prefixed,  as  ^rfvftTTra^.  '^,  ^  to  purify,'  substitutes  ^ 
for  its  radical,  which  becomes  the  Guna  5^,  and  by  Sandhi 
^  before  the  augment  fqiir^Mpri.  "3r|,  ^  to  cover/  takes 
different  forms,  ^^^-jr^Mfri,  'g^l^^^ffl',  or  ^4*1?*  Pri.  Those 
verbs  in  ^  or  "^  which  prefix  ^  to  ^,  change  the  radical  letter 
to  ^;  as,  ^  ^  to  go/  wfrfWiT  '  he  wishes  to  go.'  w  ^  to  cross/ 
with  ^,  is  ffTlfft:^ ;  without  it  fwiftf fw. 

€.  Most  roots  ending  with  consonants  prefix  ^to  ^"JT.  When 
they  do  not,  the  finals  combine  with  the  sibilant,  agreeably  to 
the  laws  of  Sandhi ;  as,  xj^  '  to  cook,'  fxR"^  *  to  wish  to  cook.' 
Of  i|Hj  Pri ;  V[Zy  which  takes  ^,  makes  PirMP<SiiPri  ^  he  wishes  to  read.' 
inr  ^  to  spread/  and  "^  ^  to  serve,'  take  both  forms ;  as^ 
Priril^Pri  or  PrirtPHNPrf,  ftRrnrfrT  or  ftref^T^fiT. 

/.  Verbs  having  a  medial  ^,  ^,  "g-,  "gr,  when  ^  is  prefixed  to 
%  optionally  substitute  the  Guiia  letter ;  as,  ^^  '  to  please,' 
^^px(t(Prt  or  'ijClP«m Ph.  There  are  a  few  exceptions ;  as,  ^ 
*  to  weep/  ^ivP<^MPri.  When  the  final  is  ^  it  is  changed  to  T, 
when  ^  is  not  inserted ;  so  f^,  '  to  play/  makes  f^H;5fif, 
f^f^f^Brfif,  or  Pt^^Pm^Prt  ^  he  wishes  to  play.'  A  medial  "^  or  ^ 
is  usually  changed  to  ^  when  ^  is  inserted,  but  remains 
unchanged  when  it  is  not ;  as,  "gir,  ^  to  dance,'  makes  either 
PhhP54Ph  or  fVT.JrWPrt. 

ff.  Some  verbs  take  the  form  of  the  desiderative,  although 
they  have  the  meaning  only  of  the  simple  verb ;  as,  ^"q  '  to 
blame/  ^Jjm^  '  he  blames  /  f^  ^  to  cure,'  P^ofcrMPd  '  he  cures  / 
^Tf  '  to  investigate,'  Hlnrnfi ;  and  a  few  others. 


DERIVATIVE  VERBS.  141 

Frequentatives, 

204.  When  repetition  or  intensity  of  the  action  or  condi- 
tion is  signified,  x[,  technically  called  tt^,  is  added  to  the  verb. 
The  nasal  '^  intimates  that  it  is  to  be  conjugated  in  the 
-^tmane-pada  only.  The  root  is  doubled.  Again,  it  is  said 
that  the  affix  is  rejected ;  when  tt  is  not  inserted,  although  the 
verb  retains  the  reduplication.  In  that  case  the  frequentative 
form  may,  according  to  some  authorities,  be  conjugated  in 
either  voice,  although  others  restrict  it  to  the  Parasmai-pada. 

«.  Verbs  implying  motion  take  the  frequentative  form  in 
the  sense  of  tortuous  motion,  and  some  others  in  an  ill  sense 
of  the  verb. 

b.  When  conjugated  with  ir,  the  verb  follows  the  model  of 
verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  ;  that  is,  it  inserts  ^  before  the 
terminations  of  the  four  conjugational  tenses.  When  i^  has 
been  rejected,  it  follows  that  of  verbs  of  the  second  conjuga- 
tion, or  is  inflected  without  the  intermediate  vowel  ^. 

Frequentatives  inserting  i^. 

205.  In  the  reduplication  initial  consonants  are  repeated, 
agreeably  to  general  rules  (p.  ii8).  A  verb  beginning  with  a 
vowel  repeats  the  whole,  and  makes  the  vowel  of  the  primitive 
syllable,  if  short,  long ;  as,  ^r^  ^  to  wander,^  ^dl<WH  ^  he  wan- 
ders much.'  A  monosyllabic  vowel  is  changed  to  its  GuAa 
representative  in  both  syllables ;  as,  "^  ^  to  go,'  ^n:nS^  ^  he 
goes  often  .^ 

a,  A  medial  ^  or  ^n  is  represented  in  the  reduplicate 
syllable  by  ^:[',  as,  xr^  ^to  cook,'  qm*i|^ ;  f^T^  ^  to  ask,^ 
m^lx^ri.  If  a  root  with  a  medial  ^  ends  in  a  nasal,  the  nasal 
is  repeated ;  as,  tth  ^  to  go,'  »<^«|7l  ^  he  goes  frequently,^  or 
'  crookedly.'  Some  follow  different  forms ;  as,  inr,  ^  to  be 
born,'  makes  either  ^T^R^  or  MNI^ri  -,  and  ^  ^  to  kill,'  »ffTiT^, 
^^'>Mri,  or  ^^i(H.  Some  verbs  insert  a  nasal  in  the  redupli- 
cate syllable ;  as,  w^  '  to  speak,'  «iy<^ri  ^  he  talks  much.' 
Some  with  a  nasal  in  the  primitive,  retain  it  only  in  the  redu- 


14S  VERBS. 

plication ;  as,  ^  ^  to  bite,'  ^«S[^^  ^  he  bites  much  :'  and  verbs 
ending  in  xf,  "FS,  %  insert  a  nasal  optionally ;  as,  ^erc5  ^  to  go/ 
^^^W  or  'MMt-M^  ^  he  goes  crookedly'  or  ^  repeatedly  3'  th??, 
^  to  bear  fruit/  has  only  one  form,  xf  jj^^.  The  verb  '^er,  *  to 
go/  also  inserts  a  nasal,  ^^^§ir.  Some  verbs,  having  a  medial 
^,  require  ^Ttfl"  to  be  placed  after  the  reduplicated  consonant, 
and  if  they  have  nasals,  drop  them ;  as,  "q^  *  to  go,'  mlM^^ ; 
or  ^  *  to  fall,'  i^rnl'ilW^. 

b.  The  simple  vowels  i[,  ^,  T,  "3?,  '^,  "^  final  or  medial,  and 
whether  radical  or  derived  from  the  changes  to  which  a  radical 
vowel  or  diphthong  is  subject  in  this  form,  substitute  the 
GuAa  letter  in  the  reduplication ;  as,  f^  ^  to  know,'  TfTO^ ; 
H  *  to  be/  "^^t^ixi^.  ^  ^  to  give,'  becoming  ^1,  makes  ^^hl^ ; 
and  ^  ^to  sing,'  first  changed  to  m,  makes  ift,  and  then 
^7fhr?r.  The  vowel  ^  is  put  after  the  Gufia  substitute  of  ^ ; 
as,  "^?r  '  to  dance/  "^^m^. 

c.  The  radical  syllable  is  also  subject  to  various  modifica- 
tions, affecting  chiefly  the  vowels.  A  final  ^rr,  whether  primi- 
tive or  substituted  for  a  final  diphthong,  is  changed  to  ^;  as, 
^  ^  to  give/  ^^^.  ^  and  ^,  when  final,  are  made  long ;  and 
if  long,  are  unchanged  ;  as,  f%  *  to  gather/  ^^hl^ ;  "^  *  to  coo,' 
^'^oMi'^  or  oRjbM^Ti.  "^  preceded  by  a  single  consonant  is  changed 
to  ^ ;  as,  "^5  ^  to  make,'  becomes  ^^hiiiri  ^  he  makes'  or  '  does 
incessantly.'  If  the  initial  is  a  double  consonant,  the  vowel  is 
changed  to  ^;  as,  ^,  '  to  remember/  makes  ^rr^R^"^.  When 
medials,  the  radical  vowels  are  for  the  most  part  unchanged. 

d.  Some  verbs  containing  semivowels  combined  with  con- 
sonants change  them,  and  the  vowels  following  them,  to  their 
analogous  vowels  :  thus  ^,  ^  to  cover/  becomes  ^ ;  as,  ^«(lti^ 
'he  hides  repeatedly:'  fsj,  *  to  increase,'  becomes  zj,  and 
makes  ^r)'9Nr)  '  he  increases  constantly :'  ^r^,  '  to  sleep,'  be- 
comes wq  ;  as,  "Jfftxrar^  '  he  sleeps  frequently'  or  '  soundly :' 
^tpT,  *  to  make  a  noise,'  becomes  ftn^;  as,  ^Pm*^^  '  he  makes  a 
great  noise :'  n,  *  to  swallow/  becomes  frr^,  and  again  changes 
^  to  c5 ;  as,  ^Jf^q^  *  he  swallows  voraciously/    In  others,  the 


DERIVATIVE  VERBS.  143 

changes  are  arbitrary ;   as,  '^j  Ho  go/  changes  its  ^  to  "^i : 
and  TRFJ,  '  to  bear  fruit/  changes  it  to  '3' ;  as,  i|i^i5^,  if^^fi. 

Frequentatives  rejecting  tt. 
206.  The  rules  regarding  reduplication  are  generally  the  same 
for  this  as  for  the  preceding  form  of  the  frequentative  verb. 

a.  The  vowel  of  the  reduplicate  syllable  is  the  Guna  equi- 
valent of  that  of  the  base  ;  or  ^  for  ^,  ^ ;  ^  for  "g",  "g; ;  ^  for 
^,  '^.  The  vowel  ^  or  ^  may  be  optionally  subjoined  to  ^; 
thus  "oR,  '  to  make/  in  its  reduplication  becomes  ^rrNi,  ^ItoR, 
or  ^ ;  "^,  Ho  go/  becomes  w^  or  ^rfbj.  The  final  ^  of  n 
'  to  swallow/  and  w  '  to  cross/  becomes  ^srr ;  as,  WTT,  ITTW.  The 
changes  of  medial  vowels,  and  the  rules  affecting  the  insertion 
or  ejection  of  a  nasal  in  the  reduplicate  syllable,  are  the  same 
as  those  of  the  preceding  class  of  frequentatives. 

b.  As  being  inflected  in  the  second  conjugation,  no  vowel 
is  interposed  between  the  terminations  and  the  base :  ^,  ^  to 
give,'  therefore  makes  ^T^rfff,  and  tt^  '  to  cook/  mqf^,  in  the 
third  pers.  sing,  present  tense.  Optionally,  however,  ^  may 
be  prefixed  to  terminations  containing  a  mute  xr,  and  begin- 
ning with  a  consonant.  Before  the  same  terminations  a  final, 
and  if  short,  a  medial  vowel  undergoes  the  usual  Guna  sub- 
stitution ;  and  when  "^  is  inserted,  the  final  combines  with  it, 
according  to  the  rules  of  Sandhi ;  as,  "Sfft  ^  to  sleep,'  jj^ifrf  or 
^^I^IPri;  and  H  '  to  be/  ^WrfrT  or  -^W^flr. 

c.  Verbs  ending  in  ^TT  change  the  final  to  ^  before  the 
terminations  of  the  conjugational  tenses  beginning  with  conso- 
nants not  having  a  mute  t^;  as,  "^  Ho  abandon,'  in^t^:,  ^ii^ln:; 
but  ^  '  to  give,'  and  VT  ^  to  have,'  before  the  same,  drop  their 
final  vowel,  as  ^Ti":,  ^T^t.  Before  terminations  containing  xj 
the  change  is  optional,  as  iTT^rfw  or  WT^ffT,  ^  being  changed 
to  its  Guna  equivalent.  Before  vowels  the  final  is  dropped, 
as,  third  pers.  plur.  irr^fir,  ^T^[fiT;  the  nasal  being  rejected  after 
a  reduplicate  (r.  i86).  Before  tt  the  final  is  optionally  changed 
to  I5r,  as  wr^TTTl^  or  ^n^XTTif ,  "»rr  and  ITT,  change  the  final  to  \, 
and  are  inflected  like  verbs  ending  with  ^. 


144 


VERBS. 


d.  The  changes  of  ^^  ^,  "g*,  "gi,  ^,  ^,  when  final,  are  analo- 
gous to  those  to  which  they  are  subject  in  conjugational 
inflexion.  Before  those  terminations  which  reject  x^  they 
substitute  the  GuAa  letters  ij,  'sft,  ^,  which  undergo  the 
usual  changes  before  vowels.  Before  a  termination  beginning 
with  a  vowel,  and  not  containing  a  mute  "t^,  they  are  changed 
according  to  the  rules  of  Sandhi,  or  in  some  cases  i^  ^  make 
^1^,  and  "3"  "31  become  T5[,  before  such  a  vowel.  Before  similar 
terminations  beginning  with  consonants  they  are  unchanged. 
In  like  manner  medial  short  vowels  are  changed  to  GuAa 
vowels  before  the  terminations  rejecting  "i^. 

e.  There  are  some  special  modifications,  which  will  be 
noticed  in  the  paradigmas.  We  may  now  give  the  continua- 
tion of  >j^  in  its  derivative  modifications. 

Causal  form  of  >T  Ho  be :'  vrrf^  '  to  cause  to  be.' 


Present  tense,  '  I  cause  to  be,^  &c. 
Parasmai-pada.  Atmane-pada. 


>TT^TfiT      ><n^r:       NNiim: 
\RJ^^f^      HHnvi:        ht^^to 
HRxrfir       htt^tit:        >TRTrfnr 


m^ll^         HT^^  W^Xfd 

HTTtrW         iTT^  >TRW 


First  praeterite,  ' 
'^f^iT^^f{^       ^WN^m        ^WNAiiH 
^WN^Ii  ^WI<4^H  ^nTRTTfT 

^WN-Mrl^        ^WH-Hdf        ^WTsnT"*^ 


I  caused  to  be,'  &c. 


Second  praeterite,  '  I  have  caused  to  be,^  &c. 


>4I4^I^<*^     >TT^RT^^^ 


Third  praeterite,  *  I 


^\^i\\H^  HT^m^raiT^  HT^xmgf^ 

had  caused  to  be,^  &c. 

^i^hr^^:  ^a^fHr^^     ^Rtn^sEi 
■^i^fbT^     ^ni^wf     ^sNt^"^"^ 


DERIVATIVE  VERBS. 


145 


First  future,  *  I  will  cause  to  be/  &c. 


HNf-Hriin??   ^NPilril^:    HT^fTfTTFT: 

HTTftnrrftr  >Tt^fwrwt  HT^ftnn^ 
m^ftnn      HNfMriiu     HRpMriK: 


Second  future,  '  I  shall  or  will  cause  to  be,'  &c. 


^mPMtinrH  hnP^uit^:  ^TRf^TBnrT: 
jTTTftrsrftr  vrr^ftrHr^:    HNriim'ii 
HNP^mfri  ^n^^PTBTrr:    xNT^mrnt 


Imperative,  '  May  I  cause  to  be/  &c. 


Potential,  *  May  I  cause  to  be/  &c. 


>4|c(Hril 


Benedictive  or  optative,  '  I  pray  I  may  cause  to  be,'  &c. 


>TT^mT 


HT^rren 


HTarr^: 


Conditional,  ^  I  shall  cause  to  be,  if,'  &c. 


^3i^mPi4U(iT  ^w  m  p44 u{ I c|  ^rHi^pMU4i*i 

WTT'^f^:    ^MT^XTHTrf   'SMT^fWrT 
^MT^franT  ^MNP^tt(ri(  ^^WT^'^niT^ 


^MMPm^I^MI:  ^JHNpM«)«iif     -^HNP^^lMi^ 
^WNP^Iuirt     ^MMPnuidf     WHmPq«4'n 


Desiderative  form  of  >T^  Ho  be  :'  ^iji^  ^  to  wish  to  be.' 

Present  tense,  ^  I  wish  to  be,'  &c. 
Parasmai-pada.  Atmane-pada. 


TI?T^    TJ?T^-    Ti"^* 
Tf?^     Ti^»     11?^ 
^J?^     Tl?^-     Tl?^ 


u 


346 


VERBS. 


First  praeterite,  '  I  wished  to  be/  &c. 


Second  praeterite,  *  I  have  wished  to  be/  &c. 


or  -^^cj:^  I  o  c^.       t      o  cv       e 

w^T^^iR  w5T^r^:  ^iJ5T^: 


Third  praeterite,  '  I  had  wished  to  be/  &c. 


^a^nfi^^TT  ''sr^^TfT^:  ^rwHTtcm: 
^ijT^:      ^f^!^     ^^^ 
^>T5hr    ^3rf>|f^*    '^if^: 


First  future,  '  I  will  wish  to  be/  &c. 


■j^ffVrrrftR  "^^rfwr^:  ^j^rfwr^Rt 
^^jPTrrrftf  w^rfMriii^:  '^Hfwrrr^ 
^^^m     ^^rmiiS    fHfT^rnr: 


Second  future,  *  I  will  or  shall  wish  to  be,'  &c. 


^^jfMmirH  "^Hf^wr^:  ^^jfronr: 
g^rfTTorft?   ^ijfMttCM:   ^^Pmuivi 

^^rMUifcT    ^Hf^xqin     W^fmuP'ri 

Imperative,  '  May  I  wish  to  be/  &c 

Ti^rfVr     ^pjm^      ^^tr 
TI?I       Tf?^*      Tf?^ 


T3^ 
T^* 


Potential,  ^  I  may  wish  to  be/  &c. 


Benedictive,  *  I  pray  I  may  wish  to  be/  &c. 


-DERIVATIVE  VERBS.  147 

Conditional  ^  I  shall  wish  to  be^  if/  &c. 


^T^jjfTTST'^  ^sr^Hf^^TR  w^^jfTTOTW 
^rj^ff^w:  ^swfq'Bnf  ^r^^HfMuirt 
^r|HfM«iH^  ^Tw^rMUirii  ^r^^***M*^ 


^rwHTMmd    ^^jf^uidf    ^r^>|fM***nT 


Frequentative  form  of  >|^'  to  be/  with  the  affix  xr^;  ^fl^  *to 
be  repeatedly ;'  conjugated  in  the  i^tmane-pada  only. 

Present  tense,  '  I  am  repeatedly/  &c. 

"^^ni^  '^hr^^  "^^^l^ 

First  praeterite,  ^  I  was  frequently/  &c. 

'5R^t>T<crqT:        ^N^>|wf  W3ft>|jrs4 

Second  praeterite,  ^  I  have  been  frequently/  &c. 

Third  praeterite,  '  I  had  been  frequently/  &c. 

First  future,  '  I  will  be  frequently/  &c. 

Second  future,  '  I  will  or  shall  be  frequently,'  &c. 
-^V^^rrrn^         "^ijfq^  -^^iftroTs^ 

U  2, 


148  VERBS. 

Imperative,  ^  May  I  be  frequently/  &c. 

■sflmi^  vsTlmlv^i  «ri«i<^*^ 

^sft^^m  "^^h^tTrf  "^^ifwr 

Potential,  ^  I  may  be  frequently/  &c. 

■cfi*u|iiii:  ofjHiim'qf  '^t^r^ 

Benedictive,  *  I  wish  I  may  be  frequently/  &c. 
'^tJjfMMlM  "^t^jftT^fW^  "^t^Tftr^Nrf^ 

Conditional,  ^  I  will  be  frequently,  if,'  &c. 

^T^t^jftwrn     ^R^>|ftr^^         ^«ri*^<4*ui4  (^) 
^r^tiTfti'BTiT       ^r^t^^ftrsTcrf  ^R^fM^Mf* 


Frequentative  form  of  >|^Ho  be/  after  rejecting  the  affix  "H^  in 
the  Parasmai-pada. 

Present  tense,  *  I  am  frequently/  &c. 
•TlHcflrH  or  cflHirH  ^^H^:  Wt^t 

^H'«nOsr  or  m^^TiPm  ^ft^j^t  «flHXf 

■ofl^^lfri  or  ^iflfiT  ^^^*  ^iHclPri 

First  prseterite,  '  I  was  frequently,'  &c. 

^?^ft>T^:  or  ^?^^:  ^r^^t^Jif  ^T^tHTT 

^nftH^jtrf]^  or  ^fsftVptr^  ^r^t^fTT  ^sr^tHjt 

Second  praeterite,  *  I  have  been  frequently/  &c. 
^^H'Ni'^^ii:  ^^m^si^^         •Nlnm^^cjiH  &c. 

or 
^Hl<  or  "^t^  «jn*}n^^  or  ^fl^jT^^*     ^Ft^jf^  or  «fl*4r^H 

if|*^r4V4  «r)^^^:  or  ^Tt*JTg:     ^tg^  or  ^>|5 

^^tm^  or  ^^        ^^^^«  or  ^Tt^j^g:    ^^:  or  'ftHj: 


DERIVATIVE  VERBS.  149 

Third  praeterite,  '  I  had  been  frequently/  &c. 
^nft>T^:  or  wtnh  w^^^  ^R^^ 

^ET^W^   or  'H^TlHiri  )  ^       .  ^  ^ 

or 

First  future,  ^  I  will  be  frequently,'  &c. 

Second  future,  *  I  will  or  shall  be  frequently,'  &c. 
^H  r«i  m  I  Ph  cfiHP^mici:         ^Tciujih: 

^Hpsmfy  ^^t^rfrsT^:  ^^Hfrnnr 

^^^rf^Rrfif  ^W^tqif:  ^rtHf^^rf^ 

Imperative,  ^  May  1  be  frequently,'  &c. 

^^tH^  or  ^W^  ^t^Jfff  ^^ 

Potential,  '  I  may  be  frequently,^  &c. 

Benedictive,  '  I  wish  I  may  be  frequently,'  &c. 
^^^JTTPff  ^TtH^rra"  Wt^TTPW 

^^■^ttt:  ^^t^j^rref  ^^tHxrrer 

^^tH^rn^;  ^'tmrrerf  ^Iwn^: 

Conditional,  '  I  shall  be  frequently,  if,'  &c. 
^T^t^rf^Hp^  ^ErrNf^ujc^  •»iJ«fiHr^u|iH 


150  VERBS. 

The  conjugation  of  the  frequentative  form  of  the  verb,  after 
rejecting  IT^,  in  the  ^tmane-pada,  is  not  admitted  by  all  gram- 
mariansj  and  it  is  unnecessary  therefore  to  exhibit  it  at  length. 
The  following  exemplification  of  it  in  the  third  person  singular 
of  each  tense  will  be  sufficient. 

Pres.  "^^ij^,  ist  praet.  w^t^,  iid  praet.  "qW^T^,  3d  praet. 
^fR^hrf^,  ist  fut.  "^Wfrnr,  ;ad  fut.  ^^H^  u{^,  imp.  '^t^Jfrf,  pot. 
■«flH «i) ii)  bened.  ^tHfqMlg,  cond.  ^H^tHf^mri. 

These  derivative  forms  or  moods  may  be  used  also  in  the 
passive  as  well  as  in  the  active  voice ;  as,  HT^  ^  it  is  caused 
to  be  5'  "^^f^  ^he  is  desired  to  be;^  "^^J^  ^  he  is  to  be 
frequently.'  They  may  also  take  other  derivative  forms ;  as, 
the  causal  of  the  passive,  vrr^^  '  he  is  caused  to  be ;'  the 
desiderative  of  the  causal,  HTTfwffT  'he  wishes  to  cause  to 
be :'  or  more  than  one  desiderative  may  be  combined ;  as, 
^vuir^MuHr  ^  he  causes  the  wish  to  occasion  frequent  exist- 
ence.' These  complex  forms,  and  even  the  simple  derivative 
forms,  seldom  occur,  except  the  causal.  The  desiderative 
form  is  most  frequently  met  with  in  the  derivative  nouns ;  as, 
Hd^l^l  '  the  wish  to  know ;'  g^§  '  one  who  desires  to  die.' 
The  frequentative  is  rarely  used. 

Impersonals, 

There  is  another  specified  form  of  a  verb,  which  can 
scarcely  be  considered  as  distinct — that  of  the  impersonal — as 
it  is  nothing  else  than  the  third  person  singular  of  each  tense 
of  the  passive  form,  either  of  the  simple  or  derivative  verb, 
being  used  with  a  noun  in  the  instrumental  case ;  as,  >niw  ^  it 
is ;'  wm  >J5^  ^  it  is  by  me,'  i.  e.  I  am  ;  "^ij^  '  it  was ;'  ^Pcfdl 
*it  will  be;'  f^J^  ^  it  is  desired  to  be;'  ^^mm  'it  is  fre- 
quently,' &c. 

Nominals. 

Nouns  are  also  not  unfrequently  employed  as  verbs.  In- 
stances of  this  are  not  wanting  in  other  languages,  but  not 


DERIVATIVE  VERBS.  l5l 

perhaps  to  a  like  extent.  At  the  same  time  it  is  to  be 
remarked,  that  the  verbal  form  of  the  noun  occurs  only  in 
specific  inflexions,  and  that  its  conjugation  in  every  pejson 
and  tense  is  only  theoretically  allowable.  The  most  common 
inflexion  is  that  which  is  usually  given  in  example  of  the 
formation  of  such  verbs,  the  third  person  singular  of  the  pre- 
sent tense,  and  it  is  that  of  the  first  conjugation.  There  is 
no  peculiarity  in  the  mode  of  inflexion :  the  modification  is 
confined  to  the  base,  and  is  chiefly  the  insertion  of  cjrrRT,  or 
of  "XT  called  technically  isr^  or  ^T^,  between  the  noun  and  the 
verbal  terminations. 

ofiTT^  is  inserted  before  the  terminations  to  imply  desire; 
as,  (jcNchiH^Pd  '  he  wishes  for  a  son  ;^  ^^ojni^rfff  '  he  desires 
heaven.' 

IT  is  more  extensively  employed,  and  in  most  cases  with 
some  modification  of  the  vowel  of  the  noun.  The  principal 
changes  are  the  substitution  of  ^rr  for  ^ ;  ^  for  ^  and  ^ ;  "38 
for  "g";  and  tc^  for  '^.  A  final  "^  or  ^  is  usually  rejected. 
The  senses  expressed  by  these  forms  may  mostly  be  resolved 
into  desire  and  imitative  action :  thus  from  xj^,  ^  a  son,'  comes 
ggfHrfiT,  I.  'he  wishes  for  a  son;'  2.  '  he  treats  as  a  son:* 
CMI^Ph,  I.  'he  wishes  for  a  king;'  2.  'he  acts  like  a  king:' 
\jrft¥ftr  '  he  desires  wealth ;'  VHinfri  '  he  longs  to  acquire 
wealth :'  P^UJJ '  Vishnu ;'  f^tonrfif  fl"3nT  ^  he  treats  the  Brahman 
as  if  he  was  Vishnu :'  irnn^  '  a  palace ;'  m^^lMPri  "^^f  f^"^: 
'  the  beggar  acts  or  Lives  in  his  hut  as  if  he  were  in  a  palace :' 
^^  '  a  kite ;'  ^^TRTfl'  ^STSfi:  '  the  crow  acts  like  a  kite  :'  ^j{imi.><^ 
'  a  nymph ;'  ^"^TT^  '  she  acts  like  a  nymph.'  A  final  ^  is 
sometimes  retained ;  as,  "^^T^,  '  fame,'  makes  either  xr^TPTW  or 
AI^H^^W  ofiTJ^:  '  the  vile  man  acts  as  if  he  were  famous.' 

In  some  cases  ^  is  prefixed  to  tt,  implying  desire ;  as,  "sfhc 
'  milk  ;'  ^li^^Pri  ^TH:  '  the  child  longs  for  milk  :'  ^ig  '  a  horse ;' 
^T^r^fiT  ^"^TT '  the  mare  longs  for  the  horse.' 

Sometimes  the  augment  is  dropped ;  as,  '  he  acts  like 
Krishna'  may  be   either   ^Uii|i(ri   or  ^wrfcT ;    'he  acts  Hke  a 


15^  VERBS. 

father'  may  be  f«T^phTf^  or  fqirrfiT;  tr^t  'arrogant/  it^  or 
^'^►Tru^  '  he  acts  arrogantly.' 

The  class  of  words  called  H^iiH^  takes  t(  in  the  i^tmane- 
pada  to  imply  becoming  or  acquiring  that  which  the  word 
denotes  ;  they  lengthen  a  final  vowel  before  tt  ;  and  optionally 
adopt  the  Parasmai-pada,  rejecting  the  augment ;  as,  >pT 
'much/  'many;'  ^prRW,  >J5rfiT,  'becomes  much :'  xrft^  'learned;' 
TTfefTT^,  xrftlTfTfrr,  ^  becomes  learned/  &c.  The  class  termed 
Hir^rilH^  in  a  similar  sense  may  take  th  in  either  Pada,  or 
reject  it  in  the  Parasmai-pada ;  as,  ^H^rilM^,  cfin^ril^fri,  or 
cyrf^TrflT  '  becomes  red/  '  reddens.' 

^r^  and  other  words  are  conjugated  with  xr,  in  the  ^tmane- 
pada  only,  to  signify  making ;  as,  ^|«<^i^^  '  he  makes  a  noise.' 
^r^  and  others  are  so  conjugated  to  signify  feeling  or  experi- 
encing /  as,  ^i«i|i4ri  '  he  enjoys  happiness ;'  oRST^  '  he  suffers 
pain.'  The  last  also  denotes,  doing  what  will  incur  pain ;  as, 
"cirrn^  5^»  '  ^^^  wicked  man  commits  what  will  bring  him 
pain,'  i.  e.  sin.  vir  '  smoke,'  "gr^rT  '  heat/  "^rf  '  froth,'  TT^ 
steam,'  are  used  exactly  as  in  English :  wtr^  '  it  smokes ;' 
T^nm  '  it  grows  warm,'  '  it  heats  /  thHI^fl  "  it  froths'  or 
'  foams  ;'  ^TOITO^  '  it  steams.' 

tTTT^  '  reverence,'  THT^  '  penance,'  ^ft^  '  service,'  do  not 
reject  ^  before  ^ ;  as,  riH^fri  ^"^"5?  '  he  salutes  the  gods ;' 
HM^Pri  Trq:  '  he  performs  penance  /  ^ft^^trfif  ^  '  he  serves 
his  Guru.' 

A  class  of  words  called  ohu^  i  H^'  is  conjugated  with  tt  in  the 
sense  of  doing  or  suffering  what  the  noun  implies ;  as,  oia!| 
'  scratching,'  ohll^^fd  or  ch^j^JHW  '  he  scratches;'  h^  '  sin/ 
»r|TjfTT  or  Tf(mT^  '  he  sins ;'  "3^  '  dawn,'  "gr^^fiT  '  it  dawns ;' 
iT^  '  worship,'  iT^hr^  '  he  is  worshipped,'  &c. 

There  is  no  apparent  limit  to  this  conversion  of  a  noun 
into  a  verb,  but  the  pleasure  of  the  writer,  or  the  practice  of 
his  predecessors.  Little  or  no  difficulty  can  arise  from  it, 
however,  as  the  context  will  sufficiently  explain  the  meaning 
of  such  a  term,  whenever  it  occurs  in  a  sentence. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  153 

The  general  construction  of  the  Sanskrit  verb  having 
been  thus  premised,  we  now  proceed  to  offer  paradigmas  of 
individual  verbs  which  are  of  most  frequent  occurrence,  with 
such  occasional  remarks  as  they  may  seem  to  require ;  arrang- 
ing them  under  the  conjugation  to  which  they  severally  belong, 
in  alphabetical  order.  The  person  given  is  the  third  person 
of  each  tense  in  the  primitive,  and  of  the  present  tense  in  the 
derivative  forms ;  with  an  occasional  notice  of  other  persons 
in  the  former,  and  other  tenses  in  the  latter.  When  there  is 
no  sufficient  authority  for  the  derivatives  they  will  be  omitted. 

SECTION  VIII. 

I.  First  Conjugation. 

212.  The  modifications  of  the  inflectional  terminations  in 
this  conjugation  have  been  pointed  out  (rules  i86,  187,  194, 
195).  Those  of  the  inflective  base  arise  out  of  the  charac- 
teristic insertion  of  ^  before  the  terminations  beginning  with 
consonants,  and  its  elongation  before  ^  and  it.  As  it  is  de- 
rived from  the  syllable  ^t;^,  which  contains  a  mute  t^,  a  medial 
or  final  radical  vowel  is  changed  to  its  GuAa  substitute,  and 
the  latter  is  combined  with  ^  agreeably  to  the  rules  of 
Sandhi ;  that  is,  ^  and  ^  become  ij,  which  before  a  vowel  is 
changed  to  '^^J,  t  and  "gi  becomes  ^,  which  is  also  changed 
to  ^^  before  ^ ;  "^  and  "^  are  changed  to  ^.  Thus,  as  has 
been  seen,  ^,  '  to  be,'  makes  HTrf^,  ^3M^,  &c.  As  further 
exemplifications  of  the  peculiarities  of  this-  conjugation,  the 
following  conjugational  tenses  of  f«T  ^  to  conquer,'  and  ^V  ^  to 
increase,'  are  subjoined. 

f»T  ^  to  conquer.'  ^V  *  to  increase.' 

Present. 


] 

conquer,  &c. 

I  increase, 

&c. 

^^iiffr 

»!^ 

^VT^ 

F^IPT^ 

^nHir 

snrr.        inm 

1JV% 

1!^ 

F^ 

^fPTfw 

3^-Mfit         'snTT'ir 

»na 

IJ^ 

1»V^ 

154 


4 

VERBS. 

First  praeterite. 

I  conquered,  &c. 

'ii»t*|IH 

^^m       -n^^^ 

*i(»<A(H 

'il»i^4'^ 

^VfT 

Imperative. 

May  I  conquer. 

&c. 

] 

^hiPh        ^^I^ 

^mn 

^nr          w^nr 

»rTfT 

5[nm 

^^■^           ^Mril 

^nrj 

vym 

I  increased,  &c. 


May  I  increase,  &c. 


Potential. 


I  may  conquer,  &c. 

^I^  «T^  »r^ 

w^        ^irf        w^J 


I  may  increase,  &c. 


a.  Of  the  remaining  tenses  of  f^  it  may  be  observed,  that,  as 
a  monosyllable  ending  in  a  short  vowel,  it  does  not  take  the 
augment  3^  (rule  191,  b).  In  the  reduplication  of  the  second 
praeterite  and  of  the  desiderative  it  substitutes  fn  for  f*r  in  the 
radical  syllable,  thus : 

2d  praet.  fiFTTir  (ftFTj:,  IV5:,  f^T^  or  ftpTftnr,  f^tfrir^,  &c.) ; 
3d  praet.  -ei^iflfl  (^T^FT  &c.) ;  ist  fut.  ^WT;  2d  fut.  viuifri ; 
bened.  *fhrn^;  cond.  ^»)tt|H^.  Pass.  pres.  ^fhr^ ;  3d  praet.  ^nrrftr; 
1st  fut.  l^frnn  or  "^ilAlril.  Cans.  pres.  ^iM^fri;  3d  praet. 
Wiflipn^.  Desid.  "ftpft^.  Freq.  ^ijhj^,  and  %%%  or  ^^i^lPri. 
Other  verbs  ending  in  ^  will  be  analogously  conjugated. 

b.  ^v,  as  beginning  with  a  diphthong  prosodially  long,  is 
conjugated  in  the  second  praeterite  with  the  auxiliary  verbs. 
It  takes  the  augment  ^. 

2d  praet.  TJVT^,  ^Er*ng>|5,  ^fVTRT^;  3d  praet.  ^fw;  ist  fut. 
;^\lirr;  2d  fut.  idPimr) ;  bened.  ^fMt^;  cond.  ^fVarff.  Pass. 
Hjxrk.    Caus.  innrfk  or  -?!■.    Desid.  i^n^fuM^. 

The  most  useful  verbs  of  this  conjugation  are  the  following. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  155 

^ra  (^f^)  *  to  mark/ 

The  ^  which  is  added  to  the  verb  in  the  Hst  of  roots  is 
indicatory,  and  denotes  the  insertion  of  a  nasal  before  the  final 
consonant  in  all  the  inflexions  (p.  105). 

Pres.  '^Tf^;  ist  praet.  'HlfH;  3d  praet.  ^iiMJi;  3d  praet. 
^srrflj^;  1st  fut.  ^ffTTT;  2d  fut.  '^rffj^;  imp.  ^ffcTf;  pot. 
'3r%!T ;  bened.  'iif^fMlK  ;  cond.  ^TPfuiri.  Pass.  ^W^.  Cans. 
'SfqfrT  or  -tI".     Desid.  ^f^f^R^. 

W^  (^^rcj^)  '  to  pervade.' 

The  indicatory  ^  shews  the  insertion  of  ^  before  the  non- 
conjugational  tenses  to  be  optional  (p.  106).  The  cr  of  "Sf  is 
rejected  before  a  rf  and  t;,  with  which  the  sibilant  combines, 
and  they  become  cerebrals  after  "^. 

Pres.  ^^^;  ist  praet.  VNiHJct^;  2d  praet.  ^IHH|  (-^UmPhjvj  or 
thmh)  ;  3d  praet.  ^T^|^,  ^rrftpf,  ^rf^:,  or  ^T^fhr,  ^rr^f,  ^^tt^:  ; 

1st  fut.  ^pHiril  or  ^l^;   2d  fut.  -^ife^urfrf  or  ^T^rfl!;  imp.  ^T^; 
pot.  ^^1^;    bened.  »!ia^li|^;    cond.  ^Klf^jmrt^  or  ^T^Tc^.      Pass. 
W^^.    Caus.  ^HHj^Pri  ;  3d  praet.  ^rrf%^.    Desid.  ^iiP^PtijMPff. 
This  is  also  a  verb  of  the  fifth  conjugation,  q.  v. 

^rsT  '  to  go.' 

This  verb  is  defective  in  the  non-conjugational  tenses,  and 
its  place  is  supphed  by  ^  before  the  terminations  beginning 
with  a  vowel  or  with  ir,  and  optionally  before  the  rest ;  when 
^  does  not,  and  ^nr  does,  take  the  augment  ^. 

Pres.  ^»iPH  ;  ist  praet.  »MMr^;  2d  praet.  r<^m  (P^^t|:,  f^^, 
fW^,  f^^  or  -mPiT'if,  f¥^  or  ^niPdM,  M^H  or  ^jiiP^h)  ; 
3d  praet.  ^rl^  or  ^n*fhf ;  ist  fut.  WT  or  ^ifsnrr;  2d  fut.  ^mPd 
or  'iiPiimPri  ;  imp.  ^SHT^;  pot.  ^liin;  bened.  "qrhm^;  cond.  ^n^uji^ 
or  ^rrftnm^.  Pass.  ^hr^.  Caus.  ^i^i^Pd.  Desid.  ^kP^P^^mPh  or 
f^^Wff.     Freq.  ^*i^. 

^Z  *  to  go.' 

This  and  the  next  are  examples  of  a  verb  regular  throughout. 
Pres.  ^S[zfif ;  ist  praet.  '^TTrf ;  2d  praet.  ^TZ ;  3d  praet.  ^ffT^; 

X  2 


156  VERBS. 

1st  fut.  ^fdjfT ;  2d  fut.  ^dmfd  ;  imp.  "^fZ^;  pot.  "^f^;  bened. 
^R5m^;  cond.  >5{ir^m>t;.  Pass.  "^i^.  Caus.  ^l^qftf  or  -7^. 
Desid.  ^rf^f^:^.  Freq.  (but  meaning  ^  to  go  crookedly')  ^diwd, 
^rrf^  or  "STRlffT. 

^  ^  to  be  fit'  or  '  worthy.' 

Pres.  ^"fir;  ist  praet.  ^nfl^;  2d  praet.  '3TH| ;  3d  praet. 
^rr^i^;  ist  fut.  ^firr;  2d  fut.  ^ff'Hrfrr;  imp.  ^^;  pot. 
^'7l(;;  cond.  "^nff^-  Pass.  ^i^.  Caus.  ^^^Pri  or  -^.  Desid. 
wf^ff'qflT.    Freq.  ^5rf#^. 

1^  '  to  go.' 

In  the  conjugational  tenses  ^  is  changed  to  the  GuAa 
element  Ji,  which  becomes  ^ni  before  the  vowel  'sr.  It  does 
not  take  i^  except  in  the  2d  praet.,  and  becomes  ^  before  a 
vowel  termination,  and  ij  before  a  consonant.  Its  derivative 
forms  are  those  of  the  same  root  conjugated  as  a  verb  of  the 
second  conjugation,  in  which  it  is  most  usually  inflected. 

Pres.  ^nrftr;  1st  praet.  "^rnn^;  2d  praet.  ^xmT  (^^t,  tj:, 
-^vfjT^  or  ^^,  ^%  tftnr);  3d  praet.  $^;  ist  fut.  ^nfT; 
2d  fut.  limPd  ;    imp.  ^snrj ;    pot.  ^rt^;    bened.  ^^rn^;    cond, 

^  '  to  see.' 
Pres.  1;^^;    ist  praet.  ^-^pr;   2d  praet.  ^^fTg?nt;    3d  praet. 
^fvjjK  ;   ist  fut.  ^f^pr ;  2d  fut.  ^ft^Hi^ ;  imp.  ^vjfHl ;  pot.  ^^; 
bened.  t%^ ;    cond.  ^ft^jHTri,      Pass.  f;^.      Caus.  I^HlMPd. 
Desid.  ^P^pHj^^. 

^x|  ^to  envy.' 
Pres.  ^T^ ;    ist  praet.  $^;   2d  praet.  ^^i^^ij. ;  3d  praet. 
^^;    1st  fut.   ^^in;    2d  fut.  ^tqfrr;    imp.   ^^ ;    pot. 
t^;  bened.  ti^Tri;;  cond.  ^^Tinr.    Pass.  f;^.    Caus.  j^i^<<Pri  ; 
3d  praet.  ^fi^^  or  ^^i^.      Desid.  ^^P^MPrf  or  ^PulfMMPri. 

^  '  to  sound.' 
Pres.  ^3nr?^  (laiL-^);  1st  praet.  >iiNH;  2d  praet.  "3!^  ("^rf^); 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  157 

3d  praet.  ^^ ;  ist  fut.  ^fhn;  2cl  fut.  ^ft^;  imp.  ^ST^mf;  pot. 
^f^;  bened.  ^fWt^  ;  cond.  WSTif.  Pass.  "gjil^.  Caus.  ^Rl^^iw. 
Desid.  'grfwi'.     Freq.  ^r|5^. 

So  other  verbs  ending  in  ^ ;  as^  ^  ^  to  sound  ;'  ^  ^  to  go  ;' 

g  '  to  jump/  &c. 

T^  '  to  go.' 

Pres.  ^ft^rffT;  ist  praet.  '^^;  3d  praet.  ^NW  ("^s^, 
T^3^^) ;  3d  praet.  ^^^h^;  ist  fut.  ^Jlfisirii;  2d  fut.  'innymPH; 
imp.  ^iWj;  pot.  ^ft^;  bened.  gfioMir^;  cond.  "^^r^.  Pass. 
>j^^.     Caus.  ^^Tifk.     Desid.  ^ftf%f^^^. 

"gn^  ^  to  reason.' 
Pres.  "3!^;    ist  praet.  >iit^H  ;    2d  praet.  vJi^M^;   3d  praet. 
■4!n^y ;  ist  fut.  "grf^irr,  2d  fut.  *n^uj"S  ;  imp.  '*^HI ;  pot.  "3!^; 
bened.  "grf^^;    cond.  ^H^uih.      Pass.  "^r^^.      Caus.  ^^i(^. 
Desid.  ^hHiir^M'i^. 

With  a  preposition  it  takes  both  Padas  ;  as,  ^nj^fff  or  ^PT^ 
^  he  assembles.' 

■^  ^  to  go/  '  to  gain.' 

This  substitutes  ^^  before  the  conjugational  tenses.  Its 
other  changes  are  to  the  GuAa  or  Vriddhi  substitutes  required 
by  rules  previously  stated. 

Pres.  "^^aefw;  ist  praet.  ^^n^T^;  2d  praet.  '^TTt  (^nfor,  ^rrft^, 
^nfbr) ;  3d  praet.  "^rNf?^  {mil) ;  ist  fut.  ^rtr ;  2d  fut.  ^ri.mrri  ; 
imp.  '=^'051^  ;  pot.  "^^nr ;  bened.  ^i^li^ ;  cond.  '^srrftrHn^.  Pass. 
^?x^.  Caus.  ^r^irfiT.  Desid.  ^srftJWff.  Freq.  ^su^ri^  and  ^rtf^, 
^rfbrff,  ^rt^dfiT  or  ^rfbrfirt^. 

With  ^  it  takes  the  iitmane-pada,  if  used  intransitively ; 
as,  ^^53^  '  it  collects.' 

"^af  ^  to  be  straight'  or  ^  honest/  ^  to  gain,'  ^  to  go/  '  to  live.' 

Pres.  ^r^;  ist  praet.  ^STT^;  2d  praet.  ^T^;  3d  praet. 
^if^g  ;  1st  fut.  ^r^ril ;  2d  fut.  ^nSuj^ ;  imp.  ^^Hl ;  pot. 
^53TWcT ;  bened.  -erf^MlK ;  cond.  THlP^mri.  Pass.  ^i^d.  Caus. 
^^qfiT ;  3d  praet.  'anHS'lff.     Desid.  ^Tf^*R^.     Freq.  ^r^Tr?^. 


158  VERBS. 

^i^  '  to  be  dry'  or  ^  arid.' 
Pres.  wt^rfir ;   ist  praet.  ^^;   2d  praet.  ^hifT^RiR;  3d  praet. 
'^^i^;    ist  fut.  ^frfWT;   2d  fut.  wVT^iqfw;   imp.  ^Tt^;   pot. 
^ft^;  bened.  ^^ft^iTTr^;   cond.  ^stftsimi^.      Pass.  ^f^w^.     Caus. 
^fh!nrfiT ;  3d  praet.  ^h1P^ji^t|^.    Desid.  ^^V-^faMPri. 

^  *  to  desire.' 

This  verb  by  special  rule  becomes  WW^  in  the  conjugational 
tenses,  and  optionally  so  in  the  non-conjugational. 

Pres.  dkiH^k  ;  ist  praet.  'sr^fimxnr ;  2d  praet.  'g^  or  ^rffrt^R^I  ; 
3d  praet.  '^NhfiJnr  or  ^r^^CTlT;  ist  fut.  ohmrMril  or  4rHHI;  2d  fut. 
<*IHr^«M^  or  ohHHui^  ;  imp.  wwmn ;  pot.  -ajimw ;  bened.  cMnrMMl^ 
or  c|rf?T"Efl¥ ;  cond.  ^sr^rnrfxrHTiT  or  ^ToRfN^Hnr.  Pass.  cFmf^ ;  3d  praet. 
^SehlfH.     Caus.  "SfimrrfK.     Desid.  f^^cj,^*^^n^^. 

f^  '  to  cure.' 

In  this  sense  the  verb  is  conjugated  in  the  desiderative 
form  only. 

Pres.  r^rohrMfrt  ;  ist  praet.  ^^rNfsfiWT^;  2d  praet.  r^fchf^l^chK; 
3d  praet.  ^rf^f^Fl^;  ist  fut.  -Nf^fifknn;  2d  fut.  fqf^rfw^fir; 
imp.  r^r*rt{j  ;    pot.  f^r<*fSri^ ;    bened.  f^f^Ju^m^ ;    cond.  ^f%- 

^  Ho  be  able.' 

The  Anubandha  "gj  renders  the  insertion  of  ^  optional 
(p.  106) ;  the  radical  vowel  is  changed  throughout  to  oj,  which 
becomes  ^Hc^,  the  GuAa  substitute  of  oj,  where  that  substitu- 
tion is  required.  As  belonging  to  the  class  ^Wlf^,  it  may  be 
conjugated  in  the  third  praeterite  in  the  Parasmai-pada  also. 
This  verb  may  likewise  be  conjugated  in  both  voices  in  the 
two  future  and  the  conditional  tenses. 

Pres.  <*<^^  ;  ist  praet.  ^^ch^d  ;  2d  praet.  ^r^  (^aPm^  or 
^^) ;  3d  praet.  W^TT^  and  ■sHchr<:Mg  or  ^njgff ;  ist  fut.  "^TH 
or  oHn^rtl  ( cfc^d^^iTii)  or  ^KJ^ffir!^,  and  ^fi^7nf5ff  or  ^fi1%nnilT)  ; 
2nd  fut.  oh<d^|44d  or  ^^Thj^,  and  ch^jt^f-Mfd  or  <*rgMmrri  ;  imp. 
olKd^Hl* ;  pot.  "SR^^;  bened.  "Sfif^T^  or  ^^^  ;  cond.  ^^^(^Tr 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  159 

or  »n<*r<4jiqrt,  and  ^oR^t^  or  Wofif^Toni^.     Pass.  ^an^.     Caus. 
^i^nrftr.     Desid.  r^qhfglUM^  or  f%^^. 

^gw  ^  to  go/  '  to  walk.' 

This  verb,  under  different  circumstances,  may  be  conjugated 
in  either  voice.  In  the  Parasmai-pada  it  makes  the  radical 
vowel  long  in  the  conjugational  tenses,  and  prefixes  ^  to  the 
terminations  of  the  rest.  Not  so  in  the  Atmane-pada.  In 
the  conjugational  tenses  it  is  also  optionally  conjugated  in  the 
fourth  or  the  first  class.  The  vowel  is  short  in  the  causal,  as 
the  verb  ends  in  ?t. 

Pres.  -^ihPh  or  -^iw^frf,  -^mk  or  "^3^;  ist  praet.  ^-rhlHif;  or 
W^JTHHTj  W^RTiT  or  ■»H'*«^1T ;  2d  praet.  M^\H,  'sp^ ;  3d  praet. 
^T^ppftl^,  ^TW ;  ist  fut.  ^r*j-Hr,  "^mn ;  2d  fut.  "^rfTrarfrT,  '^Tt ; 
imp.  "^HT^  or  ^|W|H,  -^Hrlf  or  "^i^qiff ;  pot.  "^iT^  or  -^iwir^,  "^F^ 
or  "^ff^TT ;  bened.  ^^jHTTr^,  W^  ;  cond.  ^r^ifHn^,  ^T^^qiT.  Pass. 
'^snjjt.  Caus.  -gpnrfiT;  3d  praet.  ^rf^Rjrn^.  Desid.  P«|'^^^H^^H. 
Freq.  ^^brtw,  ^^fPRtfifT  or  ^^^rf^. 

^  '  to  cry.' 

This  does  not  take  ^  except  in  the  second  praeterite.  The 
third  praeterite  is  formed  with  the  terminations  of  the  first.  A 
final  palatal  sibilant,  not  followed  by  a  vowel  or  %  is  changed 
to  '^;  and  "^  before  ^  becomes  "^,  which  with  the  following 
sibilant  forms  "SJ ;   see  rule  27. 

Pres.  ^^\rA  ;  ist  praet.  ^^HRt^;  2d  praet.  ^-*)^J  (^|^t%^, 
-jslt^lrf:,  "f^f^) ;  3d  praet.  "^T^i^j^;  ist  fut.  -^m ;  2d  fut. 
^VJ^fff  ;  imp.  ^^iri  ;  pot.  -^l^c^;  bened.  ^^Tn^;  cond.  ^r^t^T^. 
Pass. '^^.  Caus. -^t^Rfw ;  3d  praet.  ^'5:5ri^.  Desid.  -m^kiTh. 
Freq.  "^^xr^,  -J^ntiii^firri,  ^'^^fF. 

"SSPj^^  to  bear'  or  '  be  patient.' 
The  final  H  becomes  ^  in  conjunction  with  the  ^  or  H  of  a 
termination,  and  is  changed  to  ttj  by  virtue  of  the  preceding  "Cf . 
It  becomes  Anuswara  before  any  other  consonant :   see  rules 
14,  18—22,  &c. 


160  VERBS. 

Pres.  '^HTt ;    ist  praet.  ^\^ha  ;    2d  praet.  ^^fS^  (^nB^fW^  or 

^q^,  ^qr^s^  or  ^^,  ^«fe|rH^^  or  ^r^Tlsrt,  ^VifpHH^  or  ^^^hI)  ; 

3d  praet.  ^re|f?7¥  or  W^H ;    ist  fut.  '^fkin  or  -^m;    2d  fut. 

^pHm'i^^  ^^^;    imp.  -^wm;    pot.  -^^i     bened.  "^^  or 

-ct^ ;  cond.  xMHjPHmri  or  ^sr^t^JTW.    Pass.  ^IM^.     Caus.  ^^^^1\ ; 

3d  praet.  ^^P^ti^Hri.     Desid.  pMHirHMf^  or  PMHJ^^.     Freq.  ^l^i^TW, 

and  ^vjjhIPh  or  ^^"fir. 

"ft^  ^  to  waste.^ 

It  takes  ^  only  in  the  second  praeterite :  ^  is  substituted 
for  the  radical  vowel  before  a  vowel  termination  not  requiring 
Guna  or  Vriddhi. 

Pres.  Hl^Pfl ;  ist  praet.  ^SHj^il^;  2d  praet.  "Nr^  (P"MP«|i|rj:, 
f-ctHiP^iMj  or  P^^m,  fq^^rfq^)  ;  3d  praet.  ^^T^^;  ist  fut.  "^th ; 
2d  fut.  %HrfiT;  imp.  W^i  pot.  "S^^;  bened.  "C^fhrnr;  cond. 
^T^onr.  Pass.  -^N^.  Caus.  "SfT^nrfw  or  -w.  Desid.  f^ia^f^. 
Freq.  ^^jhnl',  %«i(^Pri  or  ^^Pd. 

'^  '  to  waste'  or  *  decay.' 

Verbs  ending  in  ^  adapt  their  final  to  the  ^  of  the  conju- 
gational  tenses,  agreeably  to  the  laws  of  Sandhi ;  that  is,  they 
change  it  to  ^TRT.  Before  the  terminations  of  the  non-conju- 
gational  tenses  they  change  the  final  to  ^tt.  Verbs  ending  in 
^rr  change  the  final  to  ^  in  the  first  and  third  persons  singular 
of  the  second  praeterite  of  the  Parasmai-pada,  and  reject  it  before 
the  terminations  of  the  same  tense  in  either  Pada  beginning 
with  a  vowel,  and  before  the  augment  ^.  In  the  benedictive 
they  change  WT  to  Tf ;  optionally  if  beginning  with  a  conjunct 
consonant. 

Pres.  "S^TUfff  ;  ist  praet.  ^TC^T^;  2d  praet.  ^^^  (^^%  -^^1% 
or  ^^^,  ^^^,  ^ftgR,  ^^^) ;  3d  praet.  ^H|l^1f^;  ist  fut.  T^mr ; 
2d  fiit.  "sp^fw ;  imp.  H|Nri  ;  pot.  Hjl^i^^;  bened.  Hfl^lrl^  or 
^^If^;  cond.  ^HH^f^.  Pass.  Hjfl<4^.  Caus.  H|qi|PiT.  Desid. 
ft<H|!MpH.     Freq.  %^fhT^. 

So  %  ^  to  sound,'  ^ '  to  sing,'  %*  to  be  weary,'  ^ '  to  cleanse,' 
"5^  '  to  meditate,'  "^  ^  to  sound,'  ^  ^  to  melt,'  %  '  to  decay,'  and 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  161 

others ;  as  "^rnrfif,  ^^,  cfinrr ;  jinPh,  wft,  ttttt  ;  wnrfw>  ^^, 
xirnrr.     %  has  but  one  form  in  the  benedictive,  ^rnrn^. 

^iT  '  to  dig/ 

This  takes  both  Padas.  The  penultimate  is  rejected  before 
the  terminations  of  the  second  praeterite,  not  having  a  mute 
%  except  that  of  the  second  person  plural,  and  becomes 
optionally  long,  with  rejection  of  «^  before  xr* 

Pres.  wrfw  or  -T( ;  ist  praet.  ^^^,  W^r^TiT;  sd  praet.  'srijfH 
(^•^^:,  ^^^g:),  "^^ ;  3d  praet.  ^si^Tlhr,  -^mf^ ;  ist  fut.  wT^m ; 
2d  fut.  ^rf^T^rfw  or  -^;  imp.  K^^,  ^im;  pot.  ;^%i^,  wkif; 
bened.  ^»^ir^  or  WUTftr^,  ^^T^t^;  cond.  ^^r^fH^,  ^^li^fHmrt. 
Pass.  i^'iiA  or  4sllM^.  Cans.  IsJUnPrf  ;  3d  praet.  ^^lijfHft^.  Desid. 
r^^^rHMpH   or  -^.      Freq.  ^^^^tT  or   ^K^i^i^,  and  ^i^HlPri    or 

iT^'togo/ 

This  verb  substitutes  tv^  in  the  conjugational  tenses.  It 
takes  ^  only  in  the  second  praeterite  and  second  future.  In 
the  former  the  penultimate  is  rejected,  as  in  the  last  example. 
The  indicatory  oj  denotes  the  inflexion  of  the  third  praeterite 
with  the  terminations  of  the  first. 

Pres.  iiTjdlPd ;  ist  praet.  ^nT^[7^;  2,d  praet.  1{JU^  (WT^l?  Tfip^ 
or  »fJ|PHVj,  ^Ph^);  3d  praet.  ^RHT^;  ist  fut.  Tpjn;  2d  fut. 
ilPHmPri;  imp.  TIW^;  pot.  TT^i^;  bened.  1TiTT»^;  cond.  »3|/|pHU|i(^. 
Pass.  Tir^k.  Cans.  JiH^Pd;  3d  praet.  ^nftirm^.  Desid.  frfJiPHMPif. 
Freq.  ^^Hj^,  if^-HlPd  or  wwf^. 

With  certain  prepositions  this  verb  may  be  conjugated  in 
the  iitmane-pada,  as  ^^tsI^.  In  this  Pada  the  nasal  of  the 
verb  is  optionally  rejected  before  the  terminations  of  the  third 
praeterite  and  benedictive  tenses,  as  wm,  ^to  go  together,' 
making  WUVtf  or  ^mrrer,  WV^  or  «i|Vl«.  It  is  inflected  also 
in  the  Atmane-pada  of  the  causal,  when  compounded  with  ^rr 
to  signify  delay  ;  ^|J|H^I<<  TrTTr^  '  wait  a  little :'  with  ^  in  the 
Parasmai-pada  it  means  ^  to  come  ;'  ^TWFT^  '  come  hither.' 

Y 


162  VERBS. 

TTT^  *  to  agitate.' 

The  changes  of  the  final  before  a  consonant  are  those  of 
Sandhi  (rule  32),  and  in  some  cases  require  the  aspiration  of 
the  initial,  as  in  declension  (rule  131,  b):  ^  being  changed  to 
the  aspirate  ^,  a  following  ir  or  "^r  is  changed  (rule  186)  also  to 
If;  that  again  becomes  also  ^,  and  the  first  ^  is  rejected.  The 
sibilant  of  ^  WW  is  rejected  between  two  consonants  not 
being  nasals  or  semivowels,  and  the  IT  and  "q  are  permuted  to 
^  as  before  :  ^  is  optionally  inserted. 

Pres.  m^;  ist  praet.  ^5|J||^ri  ;  2d  praet.  ^PTT^  (»rMI^  or 
»rTTf^,  M^l^  or  iTTrf^J^  -|^) ;  3d  praet.  WTT3"  (^ilMIVijIdf,  ^mTST:, 
wmssi,  ^4111  r«ij)  or  ^^JnP^g  (^RTf^mm  &c.);  ist  fut.  JTrar  or 
^llP^Hl;  2d  fut.  mvw^  or  Jiif^mH;  imp.  JU'^Hf;  pot.  m^; 
bened.  iii8|l»  or  inff^;  cond.  ■^mviMri  or  ^JuH^md.  Pass. 
nv^.    Caus.  m^^k.    Desid.  ^JiiP^Mri.     Freq.  WHTT^^. 

g^  *  to  protect.' 

This  verb  with  a  few  others,  as  fV^  '  to  go/  and  trrii  and 
XPT  *  to  praise,'  inserts  ^(V\  before  the  terminations  of  the 
conjugational  tenses,  and  optionally  before  those  of  the  rest. 
It  takes  ^  optionally. 

Pres.  jflm^jPfi ;  ist  praet.  ^jflMl^ri^;  3d  praet.  jflm^NK  or 
1^*^  (fT'I*'  ffrfxnr,  or  fjfVqnzr) ;  3d  praet.  ^nf^rnrf^,  wMl^, 
or  ^snft^fh^;  ist  fut.  Jilmi^rii,  ifrftnTT,  TXtsu;  2d  fut.  iflmPM^iPff, 

JnPMmffT,  'fmrHPri  ;  imp.  iftqi^j;  pot.  Tflxn^T^;  bened.  7fmiu(n|^; 
gam^;  cond.  ^jriMiP^mi^,  'snftftr^,  ^^r^fh:^.  Pass.  grq^. 
Caus.  jftui^j^Pff  or  iftxnrfw;  3d  praet.  ^lijiriMNit^  or  ^r5[g^. 
Desid.  gnimPMMpH,  fg«^,  ^^nPMMPd.     Freq.  ^1jjm^. 

7p(  *  to  blame.' 

This  takes  the  desiderative  form  (see  f^)>  but  is  in  other 
respects  regular. 

Pres.  fg^;  ist  praet.  ^  jJjmri  ;  2d  praet.  fgwng^;  3d 
praet.    ^i^JJPmy ;    ist  fut.  ^^ijPmdl;    2d  fut.    ^JJPmm>^ ;    imp. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  163 

fijmril;     pot.    ^Jj'iiri ;     bened.    ^Jjrmiflg ,    cond.    ^^JjfmiMH. , 
Pass,  jiji^ri.    Desid.  ^J|r»*mrt. 

7^  *  to  take.' 

When  ^  is  not  inserted,  the  changes  of  the  final  are  those 
specified  under  xrr^.  This  is  also  a  verb  of  the  ninth  conjugation. 

Pres.  irtTi" ;  ist  praet.  ^n^rt  ;  2d  praet.  Wjt  ('T'jff^  or 
arj%);  3d  praet.  '^nrrffF  or  ^r^re^TT;  ist  fut.  Trffin  or  irtt; 
3d  fut.  irft^  or  rji^ ;  imp.  irfirf ;  pot.  ir^ff;  bened.  irff^ 
or  TJ^^ ;  cond.  HiTJif^mH  or  ^MVtSri.  Pass.  r^.  Cans,  'l^ilfrt. 
Desid.  fanrff^  or  fw^W^*    Freq.  ip^Nj^,  'HO'l^TTrt  or  aiO'lf^. 

xr^  '  to  eat.' 

In  the  second  praeterite,  before  the  vowel  terminations,  this 
verb  rejects  its  radical  vowel,  and  xr  in  composition  with  ^ 
necessarily  becomes  or,  which  with  the  sibilant  makes  "BJ". 
Before  a  termination  beginning  with  ^,  the  final  is  changed 
to  w.  The  verb  is  imperfect,  and  wants  the  third  praeterite 
and  benedictive  in  the  active  voice,  and  all  the  tenses  except 
the  two  futures  and  conditional  in  the  passive. 

Pres.  xnrfiT;  ist  praet.  ^nmTr;  2d  praet.  mm\h  (^TE^:,  »r^:) ; 

ist  fut.  Jim;    2d  fut.  TlwrfiT;    imp.  xmf;   pot.  xmii;;    bened. 

Tr^trnr;    cond.  SMili^^it^.     Pass,  ist  fut.  xren;    2d  fut.   XTr^; 

cond.  ^Mr^jri. 

W  *  to  smell.' 

This  in  the  conjugational  tenses  has  for  its  base  ftnr.  In 
the  other  tenses  it  is  unchanged.  It  is  one  of  the  verbs 
which  optionally  attach  to  the  final  the  afl&xes  of  the  first 
praeterite  in  the  third. 

Pres.  rHuPri  ;  ist  praet.  '^rftTTn^;  2d  praet.  if^ ;  3d  praet. 
^nrrw  or  iHiiifflf^  (^iiihi,  winwf,  ^:,  or  ^Enrr^:,  &c.) ;  ist  fut. 
irnn ;  2d  fut.  mwfir ;  imp.  fwsrif ;  pot.  f»r&i^ ;  bened.  iinii^ 
or  ^xm^;  cond.  ^sniT^m^.  Pass.  XTTq?^.  Cans,  irnnrffr ;  3d  praet. 
^HifUMft^  or  ^rftrftRfi;.  Desid.  nHHI^fd.  Freq.  i^lll^rt,  and  %^ 
or  %xnftfw. 

Y  2 


164  VERBS. 

^m  '  to  eat.' 

As  a  verb  having  a  short  ^  between  two  consonants,  of 
which  the  former  is  repeated  without  change  in  the  reduplica- 
tion, it  substitutes  ij  for  the  radical  vowel,  and  is  not  doubled 
before  the  terminations  of  the  second  praeterite,  which  begin 
with  a  vowel  except  that  of  the  second  plural. 

Pres.  -ciHTri  ;  ist  praet.  ^T^HTT;  2d  praet.  ^^mn  (^^t,  ^g:, 
^^iTT^r,  &c.)  ;  3d  praet.  ^r^rfti^;  ist  fut.  ^fNin ;  2,d  fut. 
Mfnuifw;  imp.  ^qJTg;  pot.  ^^;  bened.  ^wrn^;  cond.  ^T^rfiraTrl^. 
Pass.  ^qr^j^.    Cans.  xjih^Ph.    Desid.  -cj^rHMfrt.    Freq.  ^^^mr^. 

With  ^rr  prefixed,  in  the  sense  of  sipping  water,  it  lengthens 
the  radical  vowel,  ^TRFTfir. 

^qrt '  to  go.* 

As  ending  in  ^,  the  radical  vowel  is  made  long  in  the  third 
praeterite  :  rule  190,  L    See  p.  1^4. 

Pres.  ^qrfff ;  ist  praet.  ^r^RT^;  2d  praet.  ^q^rt  (^t:^:)  ;  3d 
praet.  '^T^T^;  ist  fut.  ^fcffl ;  2d  fut.  ^ri^uifd  ;  imp.  ^^tj;  pot. 
'^fb^;  bened.^qr^TT^;  cond.  ^^r^ircni;^.  Pass. '^w.  Caus.  ^kaiPh 
Desid.  P^-cjn.Mrri.    Freq.  ^^^3^5  ^^fri  or  ^^^. 

It  is  conjugated  in  the  Xtmane-pada,  preceded  hj  Tif  with 
a  transitive  import ;  V^^^tc^  ^  he  goes  beyond  or  transgresses 
duty :'  and  by  ^  with  a  noun  in  the  instrumental  case  ; 
f^  #^W  '  he  travels  with  a  chariot.* 

^sgfw^: '  to  drop*  or  '  sprinkle.' 

The  indicatory  ^  denotes  the  optional  inflexion  of  the  third 
praeterite  with  the  affixes  of  the  first  preceded  by  '^. 

Pres.  x^^riPfi  ;  ist  praet.  '^rnftin^;  3d  praet.  ^xijlrt  (^[^jftfrn?, 
^^girg:,  ^pgf^^) ;  3d  praet.  '^T^gin^  or  ^T^xfhfti^;  ist  fut.  x^^Prfdl; 
ad  fut.  xiflPriuiPri;  imp.  ^iftiTf;  pot.  TiftTh^;  bened.  "^gwTr^;  cond. 
^T^zftfirsn^.  Pass.  ^Jiq^.  Caus.  T^fld^Pri  or  -^ ;  3d  praet.  ^^T^^gWi^ 
or  ^M-jx<4rict^.  Desid.  -gx^PriMPri  or  -jx^flPriMPrf*  Freq.  '^Hgm^  or 
Vi^^rilPri,  M>*iriPr(. 

So  "sgffqc  in  the  same  senses.  The  reduplication  is  as  m 
the  second  praeterite,  ^Wtlf. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  165 

»PT  '  to  yawn.' 

This  verb  prefixes  rf  to  the  final,  whenever  that  is  followed 
b^  a  vowel.  In  the  frequentative  the  nasal  is  confined  to  the 
reduplication.  «t  before  any  consonant  except  a  semivowel  or 
a  nasal  becomes  Anuswara,  which  before  i?  is  changed  to  it. 

Pres.  "3n*»^;  ist  praet.  ^np^TTT;  2d  praet.  »nr^;  3d  praet. 
^gnrfTH^;  ist  fut.  9ir*HHl;  3d  fut.  ^ffrH^;  imp.  »iMdl;  pot. 
"5T»TiT ;  bened.  5ffwTi(l8  ;  cond.  ^ii^if^Hmri.  Pass.  ifw!^.  Caus. 
^♦HUfri.    Desid.  n»i'ir*'HM^.    Freq.  »fw«l^^  ^i^HlPn,  ^i^iPm. 

,fk  ^  to  live.* 

Pres.  ^eiPri  ;  ist  praet.  wwNt^;  2d  praet.  ftnfl^;  3d  praet. 
^nfN^;  ist  fut.  iftfVfTT;  2d  fut.  ^fir^mfrt  ;  imp.  *fl^;  pot. 
ift^;  bened.  iftgn^;  cond.  ^infifVon^.  Pass.  "sfNr^.  Caus. 
^fMfiT;  3d  praet.  ^MP^'^'^ft^  or  ^nfH^Rii;.  Desid.  f^nfHWw. 
Freq.  ^ifN^. 

So  ^^qf  ^  to  spit,'  and  TfNr  or  tft^  Uo  be  fat/  &c. 

Wf^T  ^  to  yawn.' 

This  verb  inserts  a  nasal  by  virtue  of  the  indicatory  ^.  In 
the  frequentative,  ^  is  substituted  for  the  vowel. 

Pres.  iTwr^;  2d  praet.  "sr^p^;  ist  fut.  »jP**{ril.  Caus.  ^wnrfir. 
Desid.  ^iijPMMri.     Freq.  ^n5t^«r^,  ^O'J^^IPd. 

ijt:  ^  to  have  fever.' 

Pres.  ^rcfw;  ist  praet.  ^sjifTj^;;  ^d  praet.  iiirTt;  3d  praet. 
^:»jlOri^;  ist  fut.  ijPui;  2d  fut.  ^Pc«MPd  ;  imp.  ^ft^ ;  pot. 
,5^;  bened.  ^fj^lrf^;  cond.  ^^P^^mit^.  Pass.  i^r^.  Caus. 
T^rrfw;  3d  praet.  ^rfiHi^.  Desid.  Pd^Pi^MPd.  Freq.  in53^^ 
WT5|T^or  ^rnjft. 

r^,  ^  to  hasten,'  takes  the  iitmane-pada :  it  is  else  similarly 

conjugated. 

%  '  to  go.' 

Pres.  ^^;    ist  praet.  *^<fichri  ;    2d  praet.  t:^;    3d  praet. 

^<glP<*« ;   ist  fut.  ^^ftfifrTT;   2d  fut.  d\^<mA ;  imp.  ^^;  pot. 


166  VERBS. 

;8T^;  bened.  ^f^R^;  cond.  vM<g1r<*mri.  Pass.  ^?RW.  Caus. 
^c^nPri.     Desid.  ^<nr<*M^.     Freq.  J^^TFT. 

WT  *  to  bow.' 
This  verb  takes  !^  only  in  the  second  and  third  praeterites, 
and  prefixes  ^  to  the  latter ;  in  which,  tr  '  to  refrain/  and  t]R 

*  to  sport/  agree  with  it.' 

Pres.  "ifirfw;  ist  praet.  ^PTHl^;  3d  praet.  HHIH  (^^^  hPhvi 
or  ^R^,  %i^) ;  3d  praet.  ^snW^  (^snT^gf,  ^Rftr^:) ;  ist  fut. 
^ST^fTT ;  2d  fut.  if^fjT ;  imp.  "^"j ;  pot.  tt^i^ ;  bened.  r|«|it(^; 
cond.  ^nfen^.  Pass.  H«|^.  Caus.  HH^fd  or  "Tnnrfw.  Desid. 
ffifi^rri.     Freq.  "5RT?rff,  nHHlPri  or  Tfrrf^. 

#  (^)  '  to  lead.' 
The  ^  intimates  its  being  conjugated  in  both  voices. 
Pres.  H^fd  or  -^ ;    ist  praet.  ^BRXTi^,  ^H^d  ;    2d  praet.  f^RT^ 

(fiRfinT  or  fiT%^,   f^T^:),   f^  (rnf-ilM) ;    3d  praet.  ^5?%^ 

(^»^),  ^T^  (-HHmdl);     ist  fut.   ^;    2d  fiit.   ^uifd  or-^; 

imp.  .TiT^,  •T^rrrf ;   pot.  "JT^,  "^T^ ;   bened.   nl^Id^,  %^ ;    cond. 

^T^^  or  -xqiT.      Pass.  '^t^.      Caus.    Hiiinfd  or  -^.      Desid. 

CwWlMfd  or  -^.     Freq.  %^fhr^,  HH^Ofd  or  ^^iT. 

xift  is  used  in  the  ^tmane-pada  in  the  sense  of  preceding  or 

worshipping,  as  "Jni^  *  he  leads'  or  '  precedes,'  '  he  worships  ;' 

also  after  different  prepositions,  as  Tif ,  ^^^rl  ^ he  leads  up'  or 

*  raises  ;'  "Ttr,  ^MH^ri  '  he  gives'  or  ^  pays'  or  ^  averts  :'  but  if  it 
is  transitively  used,  it  is  regular,  P^H^Pfl  ;  also  if  it  concerns 
part  of  the  body,  as  in^  f^Tfirfw  '  he  averts  or  turns  away  the 
cheek.' 

ftrf^  ^  to  blame.' 

Pres.  r^r^Pd ;  ist  praet.  ^siPh^c^;  2d  praet.  PiiPHr<^;  3d  praet. 
^Ff5Tn(^  ('ilP^f^KJ) ;  ist  fut.  PHP><df ;  2d  fut.  P^Pn^mPd  ;  imp. 
"ftn^;  pot.  "ftr^;  bened.  f^r^m^;  cond.  ^rfVri^^^.  Pass. 
fVnr^.    Caus.  r>i»<<JPd.    Desid.  PHP^Pn^MPd.    Freq.  f^rf^T^. 

So  may  other  verbs  ending  in  5,  with  an  indicatory  ^,  as 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  "167 

^,  ■^,  ^  to  call ;'  %f^  '  to  be  moist ;'  ^  *  to  be  happy/ 
&c. 
i  f(fr5r  ^  to  endure/ 

The  verb  in  this  sense  is  conjugated  in  the  desiderative 
form :  in  the  sense  of  ^  sharpen'  it  is  a  regular  verb  of  the 
tenth  conjugation. 

Pres.  rriPriHI^;  ^st  praet.  wfifrfiT^ffT;  2d  prset.  firfiT^fT^; 
3d  praet.  ^rfirfrPE^f^;  istfut.  ffrfrrft^;  2d  fut.  ffTfirft^wS';  imp. 
rriPriHIHf;  pot.  fn fff^ "rf ;  bened.  frfffTf^T^;  cond.  ^rrirrif^mrf. 

"ff  ^  to  cross  over.' 

The  verb  substitutes  the  Guna  syllable  ^  in  the  conjuga- 
tional  tenses,  and  changes  ^  to  ??:  in  the  second  praeterite, 
except  in  the  first  and  third  persons  singular.  The  augment 
^  may  be  made  long  every  where  except  in  the  third  praeterite 
of  the  Parasmai-pada ;  and  it  may  be  omitted  in  that  tense, 
as  well  as  in  the  benedictive  of  the  Atmane-pada.  When  ^  is 
not  inserted,  "^  is  changed  to  ^.  In  some  senses  the  verb  is 
conjugated  in  both  voices. 

Pres.  irrfff  or  -i(;  ist  praet.  ^r?nj^,  ^riM ;  2d  praet.  intxt 
(^:,  ^fbr,  ik,  irwrn  or  ina),  ft;  3d  praet.  ^sriiOf^  (^nnficsf) — 
Atmane-pada  ^nftt,  '^nrfe  or  ^tiO^ ;  ist  fut.  irftlfT  or  riOdl ; 
2d  fut.  -rrftarfff  -W  or  iT^Nfw  -W ;  imp.  iniW,  Trcnf  ;  pot.  Tlbt^, 
Ifbr;  bened.  TfWn^,  Kftj^  or  hOmIs  or  riW^;  cond.  ^nrtrw^-'anT 
or  4<riOu{fl^  -WfT.  Pass.  iftx^.  Cans.  TTRTTfir.  Desid.  rririri.Mrri, 
rririOHrri  or  rriifi^Pri.      Freq.  "aSmX  imrdflf  or  ITTrrft. 

aqif  *  to  abandon.' 

The  root  does  not  take  ^;  and  before  a  hard  consonant  the 
soft  final  palatal  is  changed,  agreeably  to  rule  7,  c?,  to  ^. 

Pres.  TlwfiT;  ist  praet.  ^snqin^;  ad  praet.  imr^  (WHHTj:, 
rnirf^  or  im^) ;  3d  praet.  ^nm^  ('^IWTW,  ^t<jiva:) ;  ist  fut. 
mw^;  2d  fut.  l^n^rfw;  imp.  WiTf ;  pot.  "RT^i^;  bened.  iq^crTT^; 
cond.  ^TiiT^n^.  Pass.  ?T5?r^.  Caus.  KIN^lfd.  Desid.  fffl^reffir. 
Freq.  riltM^ii^,  iTTiinftfiT  or  inwf^. 


168  VERBS. 

^  ^  to  give.' 

This  is  an  exception  to  rule  i88,  k^  not  substituting  ^  for 
the  vowel  in  the  second  praeterite. 

Pres.  ^;  ist  praet.  "^I^^;  :^d  praet.  ^  (^^^,  ^f^^) ; 
3d  praet.  '^I^f^;  ist  fut.  ^f^ffT ;  ^d  fut.  ^ff^uiri  ;  imp.  ^^; 
pot.  ^^ ;  bened.  ^^^ ;  cond.  »n<^n^mrt.  Pass.  ^?r^.  Cans. 
f^I^nPri  or  -^.     Desid.  1^^^^.     Freq.  c^^^ri,  and  ^T^^Hw  or 

^  ^  to  have'  or  ^  hold.' 

Pres.  ^>J^;   ist  praet.  "^>nT ;   2d  praet.  ^  (^>n^^  ^^^)  5  3^ 

praet.  '^r^fw;  ist  fut.  ^virr;   2d  fut.  ^fv^;  imp.  ^VcTT;  pot. 

^^ ;    bened.   ^^fvMly ;    cond.    -^Hf^rnmii.      Pass.   ^^n^.      Cans. 

^T>rqfiT  or  -W.    Desid.  f^f^ftrq^.    Freq.  ^T^iiq^,  ^T^^ftfiT  or  ^T^. 

^  ^  to  bite.' 

This  verb  drops  its  nasal  in  the  conjugational  tenses ;  also 
before  any  termination  beginning  with  it,  and  in  the  radical 
syllable  of  the  frequentative.  The  final  ^  before  a  consonant 
becomes  ^y  and  "R  before  a  sibilant  becomes  cR  (rule  27). 

Pres.  ^^;  ist  praet.  W^^;  2d  praet.  ^^  (^^f^  or 
1^)  ;  3d  praet.  ^I^t85ftf^  (^m) ;  ist  fut.  ^ ;  2d  fut.  ^^rfw ; 
imp.  ^^;  pot.  ^^;  bened.  ^fmiT;  cond.  'Hr(vi*jT^.  Pass. 
^^.  Cans.  ({^mPri.  Desid.  f^-Sfflf.  Freq.  ^^^  or  ^^^ftfw 
or  ^^. 

;^15  *  to  burn.' 

The  changes  of  the  final  before  a  sibilant,  and  the  concur- 
rent change  of  the  initial,  are  like  those  of  ttt^  ;  p.  62.  Before 
a  dental  the  substitute  of  ^  is  tt  ;  w  or  ^  after  an  aspirate 
become  V;    and  if  as  the  initial  of  a  compound  is  changed 

to  TT. 

Pres.  ^^ ;  ist  praet.  ^T^^ ;  2d  praet.  ^^T^  (^^j  ^fV^  or 
^^prv) ;  3d  praet.  ^^rvTsfhr  (^r^rnn) ;  ist  fut.  ^nn ;  2d  fut. 
V^^ffw ;  imp.  ^^ ;  pot.  ^^^;  bened.  ^^\\\  cond.  ^nr^n^. 
Pass.  ^?r^.  Cans.  ^T^Trftr  or  ^.  Desid.  f^T^.  Freq.  ^T^^, 
r^^^frt  or  ^T^fHy. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  169 

^(^  Uogive.' 

^  is  also  a  verb  of  the  second  and  third  conjugation,  and 
in  order  to  distinguish  it  from  them,  an  indicatory  ttt^  is  added 
to  it  in  the  first.  This  verb  substitutes  tt^  in  the  conjuga- 
tional  tenses.  In  the  third  praeterite  it  takes  the  terminations 
of  the  first,  and  substitutes  ^  for  "m  in  the  benedictive ;  in 
which  some  other  verbs  ending  in  W[,  either  as  a  primitive  or 
as  substituted  for  a  diphthong,  concur :  see  "%  and  TTT. 

Pres.  M^Ca  ;  ist  praet.  ^nr^SfT;  2d  praet.  ^  (^f^  or  ^^9 
;^w:)  ;  3d  praet.  ^H^\i{  ;  ist  fut.  ^TfTT;  2d  fut.  ^TWfff ;  imp. 
TT^jf ;  pot.  ^ratlT  ;  bened.  ^TTTrT ;  cond.  ^I^T^qiT .  Pass.  c(h(^. 
Cans.  ^in^Pri.     Desid.  f^wf^.     Freq.  ^^hrff,  ^T^lfir  or  ^T^. 

With  ^T  or  ^q  prefixed  in  the  sense  of  receiving,  and  with 
^BP^  or  ^1^  and  T(  in  its  own  of  giving,  it  takes  the  Atmane- 
pada ;  as,  ^rnrssw  ^  he  takes ;'  ^snr^  or  ^hnrsar^  *  he  gives.' 

I  '  to  run.* 
Pres.  ^^ ;  ist  praet.  -Hf^^A^;  2d  praet.  5^  (ggc(H;,  d^Pclvi 
or  5^)j  3d  praet.  ^?^T^,  ^^Mlif^;  ist  fut.  ^ttH;  2d  fut. 
ffimPrt;  imp.  ^^;  pot.  ^^;  bened.  ^^TiT;  cond.  >H(^1«4H^. 
Pass.  i|Tm.  Cans.  ^T^Trf?r.  Desid.  rf^MPif.  Freq.  ({t<^ri,  ^t^eflfri 
or  (^'^^flPrt. 

?^  (jf^)  '  to  see.' 

This  is  another  verb  of  the  first  conjugation  inflected  by  a 
substitution,  as  it  takes  tf^T^  before  the  conjugational  tenses. 
Before  the  terminations  of  the  other  tenses  beginning  with  any 
consonant  except  it,  ^  is  changed  to  t.  The  changes  of  the 
sibilant  are  as  usual.  ^  indicates  two  forms  of  the  third 
praeterite  (p.  106). 

Pres.  TT^^ifw ;  ist  praet.  ^M^i^ri^;  2d  praet.  ^^  (t^^^rj:,  ^^f^ 
or  ^^);  3d  praet.  xSr^^lff  or  ^r^T^TT;  ist  fut.  "^ft;  2d  fut. 
i\4*iPH;  imp.  M^HH  ;  pot.  "«T^^;  bened.  irmff;  cond.  ■gr^^^nr. 
Pass.  ^^TT^.  Cans.  (^  ji^^Pri  ;  3d  praet.  ^MtO^^I't,  or  ^<<jiH. 
Desid.  Pf^^Hi'^.     Freq.  c^Pi^^^jd  or  t^Pc^^ilPn  or  ^|ff . 


170  VERBS. 

With  ^  prefixed  in  an  intransitive  sense  it  takes  the 
Atmane-pada ;  fiui^ij'!)  '  he  contemplates/ 

^  (^)  ^  to  protect/ 

The  "^  denotes  its  being  restricted  to  the  i^tmane-pada.  In 
the  conjugational  tenses  it  is  regularly  inflected^  ^  becoming 
^TT  before  ^.  In  the  second  praeterite  it  substitutes  f^fn  for 
the  reduphcate ;  and  in  the  third,  ^  for  the  final ;  after  which 
the  ^  of  ^  and  WT^  is  rejected.  In  the  rest  it  is  conjugated 
like  verbs  in  ^. 

Pres.  ^^;  ist  praet.  ^r^^iH  ;  2d  praet.  f^  (f^^^,  f^fru^); 
3d  praet.  ^^rf^  (^rf^^Tiff,  ^rf^W,  ^rf^:,  ^P^fif) ;  ist  fut.  ^TiTTj 
2d  fut.  ^T^q^;  iil^p.  ^xnrf;  pot.  ^^;  bened.  ^nftF;  cond. 
HSi^l^ri.     Pass,  ^hut.      Cans.  t^m^Pri.     Desid.  f^[f^.     Freq. 

^  '  to  shine.' 

This  gives  name  to  a  class  of  verbs,  ^rrf^,  of  which  the 
third  praeterite  takes  two  forms ;  one  being  that  of  the  first 
praeterite  of  the  Parasmai-pada,  without  change  of  the  radical 
vowel ;  the  other  being  regular.  There  are  in  all  twenty-two 
verbs  of  this  class. 

'3fm  to  be  able.  ^^  1  x 

«  ^    >■  to  resist. 

■^  to  agitate.  <g7  J 

ws  to  exchange.  ^  to  be. 

7!]M  to  hurt.  Y^  to  grow. 

TO  to  hurt.  5W  to  be  beautiful. 

m  to  shine.  ^m  to  break  wind. 

*^  I  to  fall  down.  ft^  to  be  white. 

>nr  )  V^  to  sweat. 

ft^  to  be  unctuous.  ^ly*^  to  drop. 

^^  to  shine.  W  to  trust  in. 

^  to  resist.  #^  to  fall  down. 

Several  of  these  will  be  found  in  their  places. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  171 

Pres.  ygrtwk ;    ist  praet.  ^reftcnr ;    2d  praet.  f^^ ;    3d  prset. 

'Sj^TflT  or  ^tflfria  ;    ist  fut.   iTirHHI  ;    2d  fut.  ^flfriui'ii  ;    imp. 

^Vcn;    pot.  }stktf;  bened.  tftfw^;    cond.   ^iTlPHMH.      Pass. 

^jcck.     Caus.  ifhnrfw.      Desid.   O^^fdHri  or   H^tflfriM'S.      Freq. 

"^^i^lri,  ^^Tfftfw  or  ^>f%. 

'^  '  to  run.' 

This  is  one  of  the  few  exceptions  to  the  insertion  of  ^  in 
the  second  praeterite  :  rule  188,  s, 

Pres.  "5Tfcr;  ist  praet.  iH^^H^;  2d  praet.  j^fR  (j5^*5  ^T^)  5 
3d  praet.  ^rpr^  ;  ist  fut.  "^fhrr;  2d  fut.  ^ImPd  ;  imp.  "5^; 
pot.  ^5^;  bened.  "^TTTrT ;  cond.  "^T^fNTT.  Pass.  "5^.  Caus. 
^pRxrfir;  3d  praet.  ^I^^T^  or  ^pH^^ri.  Desid.  F^nrfTT*  Freq. 
^r^TUiy  il^^CA  or  ^^^ti. 

So  "5  Ho  be  firm.' 

^  '  to  drink.' 

Before  the  conjugational  tenses  ^  becomes  ^n^;  before  the 
rest  it  is  inflected  Hke  a  verb  in  "m ;  but  it  has  three  forms  in 
the  third  praeterite  :  see  ^  '  to  give,'  ^  *  to  protect/  &c. 

Pres.  vrrfir;  ist  praet.  '^nnTfT;  2d  praet.  ^  (^Vfft,  ^^fv^) ; 
3d  praet.  ^^i<*nf  (^<^virif,  ^T^v^),  or  ^nniT  (^snmrf,  ^i),  or 
'snmftri;  (^mPHgl^  ^nnftr^:) ;  ist  fut.  vtwt;  2d  fut.  >nwf»f ; 
imp.  "^Tff;  pot.  >l^;  bened.  wn^;  cond.  ^wiwd^.  Pass. 
>fN^.  Caus.  vnnrfw  or  ^ ;  3d  praet.  ^sr^hyxn^  or  -TTiT.  Desid. 
fVFfffTT.      Freq.  ^vHt^,  ^IMPd  or  ^TVrffT. 

>ft^  ^  to  be  quick,'  ^  to  gaUop.' 

The  ^  in  every  case  becomes  ^. 

Pres.  >ftT:fw  ;  ist  praet.  whCff;  2d  praet.  ^Vtc;  3d  praet. 
^nf^^Tf ;  ist  fut.  vflPui ;  2d  fut.  \fl PcmPn  ;  imp.  vttj;  pot. 
>ffc^;  bened.  ^ftx^TrT;  cond.  ^TM^Pi^mH.  Pass,  vt^tt^.  Caus. 
Vhrxrfw;  3d  praet.  vSJmI^H.  Desid.  ^vtft^.  Freq.  JVT^, 
^^OPh  or  ^>ftf^. 

un  '  to  blow/  as  fire  or  an  instriunent. 
This  verb  substitutes  vi^  before  the  conjugational  augment. 

z  2 


172  VERBS. 

Pres.  V5Tfw;  ist  praet.  ^mniT;  3d  praet.  ^i^;  3d  prset. 
^urt^Itt;  ist  fut.  wmn ;  2d  fut.  liii^frf  ;  imp.  viht  ;  pot.  xiki(; 
bened.  x^irrff  or  i»nm»|;;  cond.  waTTOTfT.  Pass.  im^.  Caus. 
miM^rri.     Desid.  f^UTTO^.     Freq.  ^nftn^,  ^n^fk  or  ^T»rrfw. 

tp^  '  to  cook.^ 

A  final  palatal,  as  ^  or  5T,  becomes  "s^,  when  not  followed 
by  any  other  letter,  and  before  a  termination  beginning  with  any 
consonant  except  a  semivowel  or  a  nasal,  and  combines  with  it 
according  to  the  rules  of  Sandhi.  The  vowel  is  changed  to  ^ 
in  the  persons  of  the  second  praeterite  not  having  an  indicatory 
T^.  In  the  third  praeterite  the  ^  preceding  ^  &c.  is  rejected, 
and  the  radical  vowel  is  made  long  in  the  Parasmai-pada  only. 
The  verb  takes  both  Padas. 

Pres.  xr^fff  -^;  ist  praet.  '^fHT^,  SHM^ri  ;  2d  pra^t.  TfXfT^, 
^ ;  3d  praet.  wma^lrt;  {w^,  ^^T"^:)^  ^^7^  (^mmTTf,  ^R-sp) ; 
1st  fut.  T^raJT ;  2d  fut.  xr^fiT  -w ;  imp.  "g^^  -rrf ;  pot.  tj^  -it  ; 
bened.  XT^im^,  t|1^  ;  cond.  ^PT^n^  -W.  Pass.  tr^.  Caus. 
•qM^Pri  -w;    3d  praet.   ^^nflTT^l^.      Desid.   fxTTWflT  -^.     Freq. 

iniT^,  xinHtffr  or  Tmrf^. 

iTrr  (tTct)  ^  to  go.' 

The  indicatory  oS  denotes  the  inflexion  of  the  third  praeterite 
with  the  terminations  of  the  first,  and  before  them  xf  is  pre- 
fixed to  the  radical  final.  In  the  desiderative  the  vowel  may 
be  changed  to  ^ ;  and  in  the  frequentative,  rft  is  added  to  the 
reduphcate  syllable. 

Pres.  xnrfiT;  ist  praet.  ^rqin^;  2d  praet.  xnrnr ;  3d  praet. 
^KMVirt^;  ist  fut.  "qfFin;  2d  fut.  TTfrT^qfTT ;  imp.  fTfTj;  pot.  "qwr^;; 
bened.  xnmT^;  cond.  ^nrfcntn^.  Pass.  tn?iw.  Caus.  tmnrfrT. 
Desid,  fqqrdMPd  or  fWfir.    Freq.  Tr»ftxrWW,  MrflMrilfff  or  Mvflqf^. 


This  verb  substitutes  fxf^  before  the  conjugational  '^;   in 
the  other  tenses  it  agrees  with  other  verbs  in  ^. 

Pres.  fT|^f?r;    1st  praet.  ^ftr^;    2d  praet.  xnft;    3d  praet. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  173 

^?xrn^;  1st  fut.  vjjn;  ^d  fut.  m^Pd  ;  imp.  "ftr^;  pot.  "ftj^; 
bened.  ^Wi{;  cond.  ^!<M[^ri.  Pass.  x[twk.  Caus.  mn^fri  -^. 
Desid.  r^Mi^fri.      Freq.  ^tfhm,  ^T^  or  Miqirri. 

TjT,  ^  to  preserve,'  is  a  verb  of  the  second  conjugation,  q.  v. 

(yh)  ^UTift  '  to  grow.' 

In  the  third  person  singular  of  the  third  praeterite  this  verb 
optionally  substitutes  ^  for  ^. 

Pres.  UTRW ;  ist  praet.  ^TOTRIT ;  2d  praet.  fxr^  (frrN^) ; 
3d  praet.  ^nmftr  or  ^^ujiP^^ ;  ist  fut.  "crrfwr;  ^d  fut.  xqrfirsm ; 
imp.  "CTRirf ;    pot.  \n\kd ;    bened.  mPimly ;    cond.  xsmPi^mrf. 

Pass.  mim>.    Caus.  "omniw. 

Tfi^Tt  ^  to  approach.' 

As  this  verb  changes  its  tr  to  tr  in  the  reduplication  of  the 
second  praeterite,  it  should  not  substitute  i^  for  ^  (r.  i88,  ^) ; 
it  does  so  optionally  by  special  rule. 

Pres.  MHllPri  ;  ist  praet.  '^nWr^;  ijd  praet.  MMjim  (mMIj:  or 
T^:,  mhP^m  or  iJiPmvj,  &c.)  ;  3d  praet.  '^rusrfhi;  or  wqjRIlhT ; 
ist  fut.  MiPmril ;  2d  fut.  MiPilimPlT ;  imp.  iPT^ ;  pot.  "Hi^;  bened. 
ihiuiift^;  cond.  ^iftPillu{f|^.  Pass.  TRini^.  Caus.  iwlli^Pd.  Desid. 
PMMiPiyqPri.      Freq.  "qiRTniW,  tfiwulPrt  or  xhuftp. 

155J  '  to  bear  fruit.' 

This  differs  from  the  preceding  only  in  the  change  of  ^  to 
^  in  the  second  praeterite  being  absolute,  and  the  vowel  being 
long  only,  in  the  third  praeterite,  as  the  verb  ends  in  TJ.  In 
the  frequentative  the  radical  vowel  is  changed  to  T. 

Pres.  xjic^fw ;  ist  praet.  'SHRcJl^;  2d  praet.  qihici  (^^:) ; 
3d  praet.  -^^Milc^lri  ;  ist  fut.  ihPc«5ril ;  2d  fut.  ififc^ujPri  ;  imp.  tRc^jw  ; 
pot.  "qr^TT;  bened.  ih^  IH ;  cond.  ^ni!%anT.  Pass.  iF^tnr.  Caus. 
iRTcyqfTf.    Desid.  PmhPc5qPri.    Freq.  xi^^,  ^^c^  or  xf^tc^. 

-^V  *  to  despise  ;'  '  to  bind.' 
This  takes  the  frequentative  form. 


174  VERBS. 

Pres.  -^tm^;  ist  praet.  ^snfhTf^nr;  iid  praet.  -^r^i^^^;  3d 
praet.  ^eNHrfw?;  ist  fut.  ^PrMHl ;  2d  fut.  ^fi^mw ;  imp. 
"^H  rH  ri  f ;  pot.  cfiHrUH  ;  bened.  ojl^rrM^S  ;  cond.  ^^hrfw^EtnT. 
Pass.  ^hrww.      Caus.  ^rH^4rf. 

^V,  or  with  ^,  ^fv^  ^  to  know.^ 
There  is  some  difference  as  to  whether  these  are  distinct 
roots  or  not.  With  ^  there  are  two  forms  in  the  third 
praeterite  (see  p.  J  06) ;  without  it,  only  one.  The  causal  of 
^V  also  is  restricted  to  the  Parasmai-pada.  There  is  another 
verb  ^5  ^  to  know/  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  which  also 
substitutes  ^  for  the  third  person  singular  of  the  third  prae- 
terite in  the  ^tmane-pada.  They  are  both  inflected  hke  other 
verbs  with  a  medial  "g",  except  in  the  desiderative,  which  does 
not  insert  ^,  and  changes  the  radical  consonant  to  VT. 

Pres.  cTIviPh  -W  ;  ist  praet.  ^sN^VT^-  ir ;  2d  praet.  J^,  ^^ ; 
3d  praet.  (of  -^v)  ^Rhfh^,  (of  ^fvx:)  ^TwNtw  or  ^^^,  W^tf^ ; 
ist  fut.  "^Ttfwr;  2d  fut.  -^^fWlT  -W;  imp.  -^t^,  ^VrTT;  pot. 
'^^l^  -IT  ;  bened.  'g^zmr,  ^^fVj^t?  ;  cond.  ^RVftron^  -TT.  Pass, 
-areq^.  Caus.  ■^"hnrfiT  or  (ff^)  W^Rfw  -K.  Desid.  f^jwf^. 
Freq.  ^^ujrf,  -oftg\|l  fri,  ^'^Ife. 

>J5^  *  to  nourish.' 

It  takes  both  Padas.  Before  a  tt,  ^  becomes  ft.  or  iQ".  In 
the  third  praeterite,  i^tmane-pada,  the  ^  of  ^  is  rejected  afler 
a  short  vowel.  In  the  desiderative,  "g*  is  optionally  substituted 
for  the  radical  vowel,  being  preceded  by  a  labial. 

Pres.  Hi:fiT-"ff;  ist  praet.  ^WTIT  -IT;  2d  praet.  "^^tr  ("^TWT:, 
^nrt,  '^^),  -q^;  3d  praet.  '^RT^,  ^OfiT  (^SOf^Trrf)  ;  ist  fut. 
^rtr ;  2d  fut.  ^rftwfw  -^  ;  imp.  httt  -in ;  pot.  Wb^  -w ;  bened. 
fOTTcT,  >J^  ;  cond.  ^wfbqT^  -TT.  Pass.  iWff.  Caus.  vritTrfiT  ; 
3d  praet.  '^N^HTjT .  Desid.  f^^fcMpff  -w  or  ^f^jtfcT  -W.  Freq. 
"^^jftxiW,  "^^^f^,  ^TiH  r^  or  "q^M^. 

Y^^  ^  to  hold,'  and  ^^  '  to  take,*  are  similarly  inflected. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  170 

HT  '  to  wander'  or  '  whirl.' 

This  verb  optionally  takes  the  form  of  the  fourth  con- 
jugation. 

Pres.  Hirfw,  Hi^rfrT;  ist  praet.  ^WRT^,  ^JWr^;  2d  praet.  "wm^ 
(^tTj) ;  3d  praet.  ^wftl^;  ist  fut.  ^jfkwi ;  2d  fut.  ^jfHtMfd  ;  imp. 
>jiTW,  ^sHRT^;  pot.  H^7|^,  HT^;  bened.  >j«iif|^;  cond.  ^wPHUlit^. 
Pass.  >JTir^.  Caus.  H^nrfrT;  3d  praet.  ^rfV>jRl^.  Desid.  f^rHHPri. 
Freq.  -^^jT^rff,  wftfir  or  wf^. 

^7^  '  to  churn.^ 
The  nasal  is  rejected  before  a  ij. 

Pres.  JT^rftr;  ist  praet.  ^nr^;  2d  praet.  »m^  (HHPrViiq) ; 
3d  praet.  ^HRF^;  ist  fut.  irfV^nn;  2d  fut.  ^d^^^rfrT;  imp. 
iT?^;  pot.  »r^;  bened.  Hitqicl^;  cond.  ^mf^^nqi^.  Pass. 
?Tn^.  Caus.  Hr^q^^Pri  -W.  Desid.  pHHP^vmPd.  Freq.  HTR^, 
HIHr^qlPiT  or  m^ff^. 

iracT  ^  to  bind.' 

There  is  nothing  peculiar  in  the  simple  inflexion  of  this 
verb.  Before  a  ij  the  final  is  optionally  rejected ;  and  in  the 
frequentative  form,  which  rejects  xr,  its  conjunct  final  may  be 
rejected  altogether  before  a  termination  beginning  with  a  con- 
sonant not  a  nasal,  and  having  an  indicatory  i^;  whilst  before 
any  other  consonant  ^T  is  rejected,  and  ^  changed  to  "gr,  which 
then  substitutes  the  Vriddhi  element  ^. 

Pres.  w^^fir ;    3d  praet.  '^RT^ftTj;;  ist  fut.  HP^ril ;  bened.  ^Wt{ 
or  iT^nm^.      Pass.  ?T^  or  TT'tq^.      Desid.  HTTf^T^fw. 
Frequentative,  present  tense. 
*<ih^Ph  or  HiHi Ph        hih1«^:         hphj?: 
m^NtfT^  or  HmPH         H\Him        h\h\^ 

HIH^Pri  or  HIHPri  m^in  HIH*<<Pri 

These  modifications  are  rather  curious  than  useful,  as  the 
verb  is  of  unfrequent  occurrence. 

»TT5T  *  to  investigate.' 
This  verb  takes  the  form  of  the  desiderative,  ^fhrf?^. 


176  VERBS. 

Pres.  pfhrrow ;  ist  praet.  shhIhI^H  ;  2d  praet.  ift*iwr^ ; 
3d  prset.  whIhIPh^  ;  1st  fut.  jfhrfiwr;  2d  fut.  Hlnir^^^;  imp. 
iflHJ^ril ;  pot.  »OHli?T;  bened.  ?frRff%f^ ;  cond.  %H*f)Hiftr^Tfr. 
Pass.  *flHl^ri.     Caus.  hIhi^^H. 

^  (%t)  '  to  barter.' 

The  final  diphthong  becomes  ^m  before  vowels,  and  ^ 
before  consonants :  it  is  changed  to  ^  in  the  desiderative. 

Pres.  w^;  ist  praet.  ^TfRTfT;  2d  praet.  ^;  3d  praet.  WTTFT; 
ist  fut.  ittht;  2d  fut.  iTPEEm;  imp.  ^nnrf;  pot.  jikn;  bened. 
HlfOg ;  cond.  ^WTWrT.  Pass.  »ft^.  Caus.  m^^k.  Desid. 
fin^.     Freq.  »l>fl^>,  HH^^frf,  m^  or  Hmifri'. 

^  *  to  remember.' 
This  substitutes  ir^  in  the  conjugational  tenses. 
Pres.  HTfir;    ist  praet.  ^HRl^;    2d  praet.  it^;    3d  praet. 

w^nfh^;  ist  fut.  ^nn;  2d  fut.  mi^Th;  imp.  ittj  ;  pot.  irtt; 

bened.   ^mi^  or  %imT;  cond.  W^T^l^.     Pass,  yi^rf.     Caus. 

tilM^jfri  ;  3d  praet.  ^rfir^m^.     Desid.  f^^i^fri.     Freq.  HltilH^, 

HiyiPrf  or  in^fir. 

H«T  ^  to  worship.' 

^  is  substituted  for  the  semivowel  before  the  terminations  of 
the  second  praeterite,  except  in  the  singular  of  the  Parasmai- 
pada,  where  it  is  the  letter  of  redupHcation.  It  is  substituted 
for  XT  before  t^.  xrsT  is  one  of  those  verbs  which  change  ^  to 
TR  before  w  and  "^,  and  to  oU  before  a  sibilant,  analogously  to 
their  derivatives  when  nouns  (see  Declension,  rules  92,  93). 

Pres.  Tnrfw  -h;  ist  praet.  ^RiTlt,  -if;  2d  praet.  ^iTR  (i^h 
^TlfrR  or  -^Tcw,  ff^),  ^% ;  3d  praet.  ^ni"«^rl,  ^3ni¥  (^HT'S^f) ; 
1st  fut.  irer;  2d  fut.  "q^rfw  -w;  imp.  inrf  -erf;  pot.  ^i^  -w; 
bened.  ^^tTTT^,  '^r^;  cond.  ^snraRT^  -w.  Pass.  ^3?T?r;  ist  praet. 
ia*|H.  Caus.  ^N^fd  -^  ;  3d  praet.  ^snihiWf^.  Desid.  fVnTBffir  -B. 
Freq.  ^i^s^irl^  Tmif?. 

mr  *  to  make  effort.' 

This  is  in  every  respect  regular. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  177 

Pres.  THTW  ;  ist  praet.  ^snnnr  ;  2d  praet.  ^  ;  3d  praet.  ^snrffT^ ; 
ist  fut.  irfinrr;  2d  fut.  MPriui'Il  ;  imp.  xrrnrf;  pot.  xr^;  bened. 
^?T^  ;  cond.  ^.Hi^rrimri.  Pass.  imk.  Caus.  illri^Pri  -^ ;  3d  praet. 
^^nOxiH?^.      Desid.  fil^fdMW.      Freq.  irrqmw^  ^NrilPri  or  T(TTJ[f^. 

"5JII7  ^  to  restrain.' 

This  substitutes  "S^  for  its  final  before  the  terminations  of 
the  conjugational  tenses.  Although  it  does  not  take  ^  in  the 
futures^  it  does  in  the  second  and  third  praeterites. 

Pres.  M^^A  ;  ist  praet.  ^ir^;  2d  praet.  m\\H  (^fk^  or 
woi^) ;  3d  praet.  4(4^1  ft;  (^nriwf) ;  ist  fut.  ttcTT  ;  2d  fut.  Tc^jfH ; 
imp.  "JTSTJ;  pot.  "iriil^;  bened.  ^w^M^;  cond.  "^7?^7r.  Pass, 
"qi^^.     Caus.  mn^fri  or  "q^nrfif.     Desid.  ftphrfir.     Freq.  4^4«j^^ 

"if'jnOf^  or  xNftr. 

'^^  is  conjugated  in  the  i^tmane-pada  when  preceded  by  ^TT 
in  an  intransitive  sense  ;  as,  ^in^ri  IT^  ^  the  tree  spreads  :' 
by  "gTT  in  the  sense  of  marrying ;  tjir:  ^1ril*JMTOcT  '  Rama  mar- 
ried Sita :'  also  by  ^TT  or  "^"^  or  TW,  signifying  to  heap  together 
for  one's  own  use ;   "^t^"?^  ^'ii-crflri  '  he  heaps  up  the  rice.' 

T^  ^  to  colour.' 

This  drops  its  nasal  whenever  ^  is  inserted  before  the 
terminations  and  before  ^.      Before  consonants  W  becomes  oR. 

Pres.  t^rfff  -^ ;  ist  praet.  ^TtSTri;  -W ;  2d  praet.  TXI»T  (ti^ 
or  Ttftnr,  ^^^0'  ^ '  3^  P^^t-  '^n^^fT  (^^),  '^rti?  (m«|irii) ; 
ist  fut.  t^;  2d  fut.  t^rfcT  -^  ;  imp.  t5TW  -Iff;  pot.  i^  -w ; 
bened.  TSSTTl^,  t^F ;  cond.  ^at^n^  -IT.  Pass.  t5^w.  Caus. 
tsRfw  or  TM^fif^     Desid.  fef^RflT  -W.      Freq.  TK55^,  TRsfH^. 

T?T  ^  to  commence.' 
This  verb  is  invariably  conjugated  with  the  preposition  "^. 
The  final  is  changed  before  a  consonant,  agreeably  to  the  laws 
of  Sandhi.  Before  a  vowel,  except  in  the  conjugational  tenses 
and  second  praeterite,  "tT  is  inserted,  which  becomes  Anuswara, 
and  then  again  »^  before  vf,  as  in  the  causal.  In  the  desiderative, 
^  is  substituted  for  the  vowel,  and  the  root  is  not  repeated* 

A  a 


178  VERBS. 

Pres.  ^rCH^;  ist  praet.  ^rrOTTT;  2,d  pragt.  ^TT^  (wft*n^, 
wfn^) ;  3d  praet.  ^^rrcw  (^HK^lldl) ;  ist  fut.  'snt^lT;  2d  fut. 
^rnTs^W ;  imp.  ^rn^^Tin ;  pot.  ^mOT ;  bened.  vsimfly  ;  cond. 
^K»W7T.  Pass.  ^TRWTff.  Caus.  ^KJ^nfri  ;  3d  praet.  '^mjwn^. 
Desid.  ^iTj^mri.     Freq.  '^TTOTw?^,  WTOXMHlf,  ^TTT^cfk. 

With  exception  of  prefixing  "m,  c5H  ^  to  gain'  is  similarly- 
inflected.  Pres.  ■?5¥ra' ;  2d  praet.  '^;  3d  praet.  Wc53r;  2d  fut. 
ciTi^^.      Caus.  crPH^rfir.      Desid.  fH^,  &c. 

T?T  '  to  sport.^ 

It  is  conjugated  analogously  to  other  verbs  ending  with  IT. 

Pres.  T?7^;  1st  praet.  xMlJHd;  2d  praet.  T^  ;  3d  praet.  TOFT; 
ist  fut.  T??rT ;  2d  fut.  t^ ;  imp.  THTTT ;  pot.  T^;  bened.  t^; 
cond.  ^STOTlf.  Pass.  T«?^.  Caus.  T!»nrfiT;  3d  prset.  ^O^JHi^^. 
Desid.  ftr^.      Freq.  tcrirff,  TT^ftfiT  or  tcfnT. 

fror^  '  to  rest/  makes  frorfw ;  but  when  it  means  ^  to  lead 
a  married  life/  f^Tjrfir  or  f^TH^. 

^  ^  to  grow'  or  '  ascend.' 

For  the  changes  to  which  a  final  ^  is  subject,  see  iTT^ 
(p.  162).  In  the  causal  the  verb  optionally  substitutes  x| 
for  If. 

Pres,  CI^Ph  ;  ist  prset.  WTh^;  2d  praet.  "^^  (i>^^g*^ 
^nCIP^vj)  ;  3d  praet.  ^I^^  ('K^Hfcri)  ;  ist  fut.  d^ ;  2d  fut. 
^&^"fiT;  imp.  Cl^H  ;  pot,  Cl^r\, ;  bened.  ^?rnT;  cond.  ^Cl«<<7^. 
Pass.  ^J^;?!^.  Caus.  O^^nt  or  ^flTRfw ;  3d  praet.  »H^^^H^  or 
^r^^T^;.     Desid.  l^-^^fw.     Freq.  O^^ri,  d^'^lfri  or  ttdf^. 

<5fN  ( TJ^)  '  to  see.' 

Pres.  ci\M^  ;    ist  praet,  ^Tcft^iT;   2d  praet.  <^cfl^  ;   ^d  praet. 

^oflP^g  ;    ist  fut.  c5Vf%rn ;    2d  fut.   c^tPM^r^ ;    imp.  cfNirf ; 

pot.  TJ^W;   bened.  rTlP-^tflg  ;    cond.  ^rFftf^THTrT.     Pass.  cjV^. 

Caus.  HHirfw.     Desid.  <j<J1PMHri.    Freq.  cjftojt^,  ?ytc7NtfrT  or 

"^V^,  '  to  see/  is  similarly  inflected. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  179 

"^^  '  to  speak.' 

This  and  the  following  substitute  ^  for  the  semivowel  in  the 
second  praeterite  and  before  xr. 

Pres.  "^^ ;  ist  prset.  ^^^T^^;  ad  praet.  T^  ("3!^:,  "^^f^, 
"35^,  T^  or  -m^,  -Sif^^)  ;  3d  prset.  W^T^ti^ ;  ist  fut.  ^f^; 
2nd  fut.  ^ff^uifri  ;  imp.  "^w ;  pot.  "q^?^ ;  bened.  T?m^;  cond. 
^srqf^xTr^.  Pass.  "3^^.  Cans.  m^Alfri  ;  3d  praet.  ^Rt^i^. 
Desid.  r^Mn^Mfri.     Freq.  'qiWff,  ^T^*^  or  ^T^rf^. 

It  is  sometimes  inflected  in  the  i^tmane-pada,  especially- 
after  certain  prepositions,  and  in  particular  applications ;  as, 
W^^  ^to  repeat/  ^^^^  ;  ^^r^  ^  to  reproach  (oneself)/ 
^>4^<ri  ;  f^  ^  to  dispute,'  U^f(^ ;  weqr^  '  to  repeat  together,' 

^tf  ^  to  weave,' 
Pres.  T«Tfrr-^;  ist  praet.  ^r^tn^-rr;  2d  praet.  -gr^T^  (t^f^ 
or  T^fg^,  "^nrw:),  "gi^;  3d  praet.  ^m»4lr(^,  ^rtt;  ist  fut.  ^m; 
ad  fut.  Tcwfrf  -^ ;  imp.  "^^  -irf ;  pot.  "^^  -w ;  bened.  Tom^, 
^Hfi^  ;  cond.  ^^«^,|^  -ir.  Pass.  T'oi^.  Cans,  cjiq^^rri  -tI".  Desid. 
r^N^rH  -^.      Freq.  m^uj^,  ^TT^xftftr  or  ^T^ff. 

-g^  '  to  dwell.' 

IT  is  substituted  for  the  final  before  a  sibilant  immediately 
following  it,  and  not  conjoined  with  w. 

Pres.   "^HfrT;    ist  praet.  ^sr^l^;    2d  praet.  T^m  ("^^ftni  or 

"^^^,  -gnr^:) ;  3d  praet.  ^^s^rrotT^  (-ii^irCi,  ^ttt^:)  ;  1st  fut.  -^mj; 

2d  fut.  "^j^rffT;    imp.  '^W^;    pot.  '^^;    bened.  "rBTn^;    cond. 

^cjt^H.    Pass.  THTW.    Cans.  <:<(f<4jrri  -^.    Desid.  f^'^wfw.    Freq. 

^T?^^,  mM^lfri,  ^nHw. 

^  ^  to  bear.' 

The  changes  of  ^  before  a  following  consonant  are  those 
already  noticed  (see  ttt^  &c.)  ;  but  whenever  ^  is  changed  to 
^,  this  verb  substitutes  ^  for  its  vowel. 

Pres.  "g^fff-^;  ist  praet.  ^T^^  -W;  2d  praet.  T^T?  ("^i^:, 
T^f^  or  W^ra"),  "^il ;  3d  praet.  ^s^iiHiIri^  {^mt^,  'SRT^:)  ^rrr^ ; 
imp.   -^^  -in ;    pot.   ^^^  -TT ;    bened.   "^^HT^,   ^'^ ;     cond. 

A  a  2 


180  VERBS. 

^STTOTiT  -If.      Pass.  "^^;     ist  praet,   4l^d  ;    3d  praet.  ^Rlf^. 
Caus.  Nl^^Pri  -^.      Desid.  fw^  -^.    Freq.  "^m^,  ^rftfe. 

Preceded  by  Tf  or  trfic.  the  verb  is  conjugated  in  the  Parasmai- 
pada  only  ;  as,  l^^^fri,  xrfa^fri. 

Y«S  ^  to  accept.' 
Pres.  tI^  ;  ist  praet.  "^"^^tt  ;  2d  praet.  "^^ ;  3d  praet. 
^a^f%;  1st  fut.  "^f^jn;  2d  fut.  '^Irarff;  imp.  ^wf;  pot. 
^iFrT ;  bened.  '^Hiifly ;  cond.  ^sr^fwiT.  Pass.  "^'^.  Caus. 
^^rf?T  ;  3d  praet.  ^^r^^^if^  or  w^t^^.  Desid.  f^'^r^Mri.  Freq. 
^0<i4M^,  ^fft^i,  ^d^t  or  ^rtf#,  ^t^mr,  ^ft^fTT  or  ^^[^^^ 
(see  rule  206,  a). 

^  ^  to  be.' 

This  is  peculiar  in  optionally  inflecting  the  second  future 
and  conditional  in  the  Parasmai-pada,  and  rejecting  the  aug- 
ment ^  before  their  terminations  and  those  of  the  desiderative. 
As  one  of  the  class  ^ITtI^,  it  has  two  forms  in  the  third 
praeterite:   see  p.  169. 

Pres.  "tI^;  ist  praet.  ^^'^ri^;  2d  praet.  "^ff  (^r^,  ^fk^) ; 
3d  praet.  "^T^lTTir  or  ^Rf#F ;  ist  fut.  cjP^rti ;  2d  fut.  "^fw^w  or 
"^liSfif  ;  imp.  "^tTrf ;  pot.  "^^ ;  bened.  "^ff^tF ;  cond.  w^ffTinf 
or  -S'JftMri;.  Pass.  -^FHt.  Caus.  -^tiifw.  Desid.  r^'^P^Mri  or 
fq^wfrr.  Freq.  ^(^\f^^,  ^T^cftfir  or  ^toft,  or  ^^^ifHlf,  &c. 
as  in  the  last. 

^  (^ )  '  to  weave.' 

The  final  becomes  ^btt  before  the  consonants  of  the  non- 
conjugational  tenses.  In  the  second  praeterite  there  are  two 
forms ;  in  one  the  reduplicated  root  is  "^  before  the  termina- 
tions rejecting  iT,  and  "gjxr  or  "35^  before  the  rest;  in  the  other 
the  substitute  is  ^r^,  and  ^  being  changed  to  ^rr,  as  in  ^  &c., 
the  tense  is  inflected  accordingly :   see  ^. 

Pres.  ^nrfiT  -W ;  ist  praet.  ^^i(i[^  -Tf ;  2d  praet.  "^^nr  (^«^:, 
Tgr^:,  -^^ftrzT,  ^^m  or  ^^^^  -grf^,  ^if^n)  or  ^  (^^.',  ^:)^ 
"3!^  {-wm,  ^3ifxft) ;  3d  praet.  ^i<^i^1ft^  (^SRrerf),  ^'^IW;  ist  fut. 
^TrTT;   2d  fut.  mf^lPrt  -TT;    imp.  ^iTJ  -ITT;    pot.  ^^  -IT;    bened. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  181 

-gjT^mr,  ^nft¥  ;  cond.  sum^rf^  -it.     Pass.  -mfk.     Caus.  ^m^Pri  -^. 
Desid.  fV^l^fff  -^.     Freq.  "^RTW,  ^Rlfw  or  ^RfiT. 

^  *  to  cover.' 

The  initial  is  not  changed.  The  verb  as  usual  is  inflected 
as  if  ending  in  ^JT  in  the  non-conjugational  tenses,  except  in 
the  singular  of  the  second  praeterite  of  the  Parasmai-pada :  in 
the  redupHcation  "^  becomes  ^.  Before  a  it,  ^  is  changed 
to  ^. 

Pres.  cMi^Pri  -W;  ist  praet.  "^r^-m^  -TT ;  2d  praet.  f^c^m 
(f^^:,  ^^0^  ^^ »  3^  P^^t.  ^sT^mfhi;,  ^snsrrer ;  ist  fut.  -^mn ; 
2d  fut.  "sn^fiT  -^  ;  imp.  ^nrw  -ITT  ;  pot.  ^7^  -w ;  bened.  "^miT, 
^mfi?  ;  cond.  '^a^amttlT^  -TT.  Pass.  ^^TW.  Caus.  ^n^nrflT.  Desid. 
f^^mrfrT  -^.       Freq.  ^^"^irff,  ^TEftfrT,  ^W. 

^  (^^)  '  to  wither'  or  '  decay;'   ^  to  go.' 
This  substitutes  ^fliT  before  the  terminations  of  the  conju- 

gational  tenses,  which  are  those  of  the  j^tmane-pada.     Those 

of  the  other  tenses  are  the  terminations  of  the  Parasmai-pada. 
Pres.  ^n^ri;   ist  praet.  "^r^fhnr ;    2d  praet.  ^|^|^  (t^R(^:)  ;  3d 

praet.  "^T^l^;   ist  fut.  "5r^;   2d  fut.  "^rwfiT;  imp.  "^ihnrf;  pot. 

^n^ri;  bened.  ^^TimT;  cond.  w^T?^.   Pass,  ^fl^ri.    Caus.  ^ilri^fd. 

Desid.  r^l^lf^fff.      Freq.  "^T^raw,  ^n^tflT  or  ^^fw. 

When  the  verb  means  *  to  go/  the  causal  retains  the  final, 

^llf^^Pri  '  he  causes  to  go,'  or  '  drives.' 

^rftr  '  to  desire  ;'  '  to  bless.' 

This  is  never  used  without  ^rr  prefixed. 

Pres.  '^rr^hrw;  ist  praet.  ^TT^hnT;  2d  praet.  ^rr^nw;  3d  praet. 
^l^iP^«  ;  ist  fut.  'sa^lwr ;  2d  fut.  ^IPJHxyw ;  imp.  ^^prfff ; 
pot.  ■^15!*)  H  ;  bened.  "^"rfrftrq^F ;  cond.  "5rr5lf^"Hrrf.  Pass.  ^srr^T^^. 
Caus.  ^sn^hnriTT.  Desid.  'HlP^l^jP^Md.  Freq.  ^T^nwrw,  ^TT^- 
i^i^lPd  or  "eii^ji^lPw. 

The  root  ^hf^  ^to  praise,'  differs  from  this  in  being  inflected 
in  the  Parasmai-pada,  and  as  its  nasal  is  not  derived  from  an 


182  VERBS. 

indicatory  ^,  in  dropping  it  before  ^ ;   as,  pres.  ^^^rfw ;  bened. 
ki^\\;   pass.  "5T^5  &c. 

^f^^  *  to  sprinkle.' 
Pres.  "^ftcir^;  ist  praet.  w^fHprr;  2d  praet.  %5ft^;  3d  prset. 
"'sr^tf^;  ist  fut.  "^^wt;  2d  fut.  ^i fchm h  ;  imp.  "^ft^Rirf;  pot. 
^1^(1 ;  bened.  "^fH^fi^ ;  cond.  ^n^ilfohuiri.  Pass.  "^fN^^.  Cans. 
^flch^fiT  -^ ;  3d  praet.  w^%^  -TT.  Desid.  f^^^Rq^.  Freq. 
^l^n^Mri,  ^l^flchlfw  or  ^Ullfrh. 

^^  '  to  sorrow.' 

Before  the  sign  of  the  desiderative,  a  radical  medial  ^  or  T, 
when  the  final  is  neither  it,  %  nor  %  is  optionally  changed  to 
the  Guna  vowel  when  the  augment  ^  is  inserted. 

Pres.  "SffNf^;  ist  praet.  '^srsfff^;  2d  praet.  "OT^fH  (^U^*)  5 
3d  praet.  ^r^fNhir;  ist  fut.  "^ftf^in  ;  2d  fut.  "^ftfq^Tf  ;  imp. 
XffN^;  pot.  ^ft^r(;  bened.  ajxnirf^;  cond.  'il^flP^mit^.  Pass. 
^^^k.  Caus,  ^[ft^xTTfT  -^.  Desid.  ^^f^^W  or  ^^^"qfcT.  Freq. 
^ftSjxnv^,  ^flsj-cflfTT  or  T[fh[fti%. 

So  ^M  *  to  shine  ;'  except  that,  as  belonging  to  ^dlH^ 
(p.  169),  it  makes  in  the  third  praeterite  wgHl^  or  ^r^fNt?^. 

f^  (f^)  ^  to  serve.' 

This  verb,  as  indicated  by  the  Anubandha  t^,  takes  both 
forms.  Before  a  vowel  termination  not  requiring  the  Guna 
or  Vriddhi  change  of  the  final,  ^  is  substituted  for  it.  In 
the  third  praeterite  of  the  Parasmai-pada  it  takes  the  termi- 
nations of  the  first,  with  reduplication :  and  in  the  frequenta- 
tive form  it  optionally  rejects  the  augment  ^,  which  augment 
it  takes  as  an  exception  to  the  general  rule,  191,  b. 

Pres.  "^nrfff -^ ;  ist  praet.  ^nnn^  -TT;  2d  praet.  %^rPT  (f^fOilAiH:, 
f^l^MPuvj,  %f^5rfxR),  f^f^ ;  3d  praet.  ^rf^riisRTl[  -W;  ist  fut. 
^Pmhi;  2d  fut.  "^rfPTBifw -^;  imp.  "^RW,  ^^RlTf;  pot.  ^5R1T  -W; 
bened.  Tahrn^,  TTftr^;  cond.  ^rjrfwi^ -W.  Pass.  "^sfhr^.  Cans. 
^^rrmrfiT  -^ ;  3d  praet.  ^r^mUft^  -IT.  Desid.  P^mP^ MPri  -^  or 
f^r^fw  -^.      Freq.  "^NHl^,  %^^ffT  or  ^mfff. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  183 

^  *  to  hear.' 

This  changes  the  vowel  to  "^^  and  adds  r[,  the  proper 
termination  of  the  fifth  conjugation,  in  the  conjugational 
tenses,  'g'  before  a  vowel  becomes  ^  by  the  rules  of  Sandhi ; 
or  before  ^  and  ^  it  may  be  ejected.  In  the  second  praeterite, 
even  '^tii  does  not  insert  ^  (rule  188,  s).  In  the  third  praeterite 
of  the  causal,  ^  is  optionally  substituted  in  the  reduplication. 

Pres.  gi^nPrt  (^w:,  9ji|«i  r*t\,  ^^t  or  "sn^:,  "^^t  or  inm:) ; 
ist  praet.  ^^r^nrftit;  (^snjfTf,  W^pF^)  ;  2d  praet.  W^V^  i^^'^i*} 
^^ft^);  3d  praet.  ^pj^^It^  (^^T^FT,  W^g:) ;  ist  fut.  ^"VffT;  2d 
fut.  tflmPri;  imp.  -^nit^  ('^Twm,  W^)'  P^*-  W^»  bened. 
"?J5n^;  cond.  ^^mNlf;.  Cans.  ■^rr^PTfir;  3d  praet.  ^T^^Ri^  or 
'^rf^T^Rfi;.     Desid.  "g^f^W.      Freq.  "^ft^f^ff,  ^fNNtfrf,  ^^W. 

The  verb  is  conjugated  in  the  i^tmane-pada  preceded  by 
^  with  an  intransitive  sense,  wswfk  '  he  hears :'  otherwise, 
as,  m^  #5nnVfw  '  he  hears  the  speech.^  Preceded  by  irfrT  or 
^TTT  it  retains  the  Parasmai-pada  in  the  desiderative  form, 
''^nai^MPri  or  fffriSj^i^Mrri  ^  he  serves  or  attends  upon.' 

fsg  (^rrf^)  '  to  increase.^ 

This  verb  optionally  substitutes  T  for  f^  in  the  second 
praeterite ;  absolutely  before  the  if  of  the  benedictive  and  the 
passive  ;  and  optionally  before  the  Ty  of  the  frequentative.  In 
the  third  praeterite  it  has  three  forms  ;  being  conjugated  with 
its  own  terminations  and  the  augment  ^,  or  with  those  of  the 
first  praeterite  with  or  without  reduplication :  in  the  latter  case 
it  rejects  its  own  final. 

Pres.  "^RffT;  ist  praet.  w^g^;  2d  praet.  f^ngPT  (f^^s^^ 
f^lHJpMVj)  or  -sprr^  (sjsi^g:,  "5^^^,  ^:5T^  or  ^^TT^) ;  3d  praet. 
xsvj^ift^  (^^HJiP^yf),  ^5T%f^g^  (-i^P^iPHi^rii)  or  ^ngrr  (^^rw) ;  ist 
fut.  saP^ril  ;  2d  fut.  -^rfwffT  ;  imp.  -sgirj ;  pot.  '?GR7T  ;  bened. 
3nrn^;  cond.  "^ngfrorr^.  Pass.  "Sjrrff.  Caus.  «yi^inPri;  3d  praet. 
^P^IHjit^  or  W3T^r^.  Desid.  P^I^P^MPri.  Freq.  ^I^I^H  or 
^tsTTTfl",  ^IHj4)Pri  or  %^. 


184  VERBS. 

^^  '  to  embrace/ 

This  root  rejects  its  nasal  before  the  terminations  of  the 
conjugational  tenses. 

Pres.  ^^rfff;  1st  praet.  ^RnfW;  2d  praet.  lET^r^  (^rrf^^  or 
'R^*"^^);  3d  praet.  ^^TOT^rT  (^sratw) ;  ist  fut.  "ifw;  2d  fut.  "^^fiT ; 
imp.  "Jff^rj;  pot.  "^7^;  bened.  ^HnUT;  cond.  '^m^i^.  Pass. 
^^Ts^TT.  Cans.  TNnrfrf.  Desid.  "ftPFT^frf.  Freq.  "^rftnRTff,  ^H^^ 
or  ^rwf^. 

^  ('^)  ^  *o  decay/  ^  to  be  sad,'  ^  to  go.' 

This  substitutes  "^  before  the  terminations  of  the  conjuga- 
tional tenses. 

Pres.  ^ft^;  ist  praet.  "^rrf^;  2d  praet.  w^  (&T5*5  W?^ 
or  ^f^) ;  3d  praet.  ^w^i^^  (-il^^ril) ;  ist  fut.  ^r^;  2d  fut. 
^n^rfir;  imp.  ^"J;  pot.  "^fi^;  bened.  '^raT7(^;  cond.  '^tttmt^. 
Pass.  itTlR.  Cans.  ^T^nfiT ;  3d  praet.  ^#^1^.  Desid.  "ftr'^r^fiT. 
Freq.  ^m^^lT^^  ^rra^tfw  or  ^rr^w. 

With  frf  prefixed,  the  initial  becomes  ^,  as  fHiflt^fd  '  he  sits ;' 
and  this  is  repeated  in  the  reduplication  of  the  desiderative,  as 
frrfq'WWfrT,  and  third  praeterite  causal,  as  "hi^N^;  the  sibilant 
following  in  fact  ^  and  ^;  otherwise  it  is  not  changed,  as, 
2d  praet.  f^M^K  ;  nor  is  it  changed  after  the  ^  of  llfw,  as 
TrfTRf^fifT  *  he  opposes.' 

iPE^r  ^  to  go.' 

This  verb  changes  ^  to  ^T  throughout. 

Pres.  ^rarfw  -^ ;  ist  praet.  -ii^-rrtrt^  -TT;  2d  praet.  F^n5T,  ^TTT^; 
3d  praet.  ^mTiftf^,  -^ii^pTTig  ;  i st  fut.  "^fWrH ;  2d  fut.  ^^irarfff -^ ; 
imp.  ^-ni  j  -Trf;  pot.  "JfT^i^ -IT ;  bened.  ^tj^ij^,  ^rPsN^j  cond. 
>H^Pwimf(^  -7T.  Pass.  ^TrHTfl".  Caus.  ^rapTfw  -^.  Desid.  ftnrf^- 
^  -W.      Freq.  ^TRRtRT^,  fil^-nfifri,  ^TRTf^. 

iq^  ^  to  bear,'  '  to  suffer.' 

This   verb   takes  the  augment  ^,'  but  optionally  rejects   it 

before  the   terminations  of  the  first  future  :    for  the  change 

that  ensues,  see  tw^,  ^,  &c.     In  the  desiderative  the  initial 

sibilant  is  not  changed  after  a  vowel  in  the  reduplicate  syllable. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  185 

because  such  change  does  not  take  place  when  the  %  which 
is  the  sign  of  the  desiderative  itself,  is  changed  to  "^  in  conse- 
quence of  the  augment  ^  preceding  it, 

Pres.  ^T^;  ist  praet.  ^^^ri  ;  2d  praet.  ^;  3d  prael.  ^Rrfi^ 
1st  fut.  fiH^rtl  or  '^J;  2d  fut.  ^H^m^;  imp.  ^r^;  pot.  TT^ 
bened.  ^P^iflg ;  cond.  SH^H^mri.  Pass.  TT^.  Cans.  WW^ 
3d  praet.  ^^M^f(^.     Desid.  fa^H^q^.      Freq.  TTRT^,  ^m^lPri  or 

The  initial  is  changed  to  "R  after  the  ^  of  f^,  xrft,  and  f^,  as 
fff^^;  if  the  temporal  augment  intervene,  the  change  is 
optional,  as  riii^^ri  or  .^m^h  ;  it  does  not  take  place  when  ^ 
has  been  changed  to  ^,  as  fdNP^HI  or  fn^'^dl. 

fq>j  (f^)  *  to  accomphsh.^ 

Pres.  ivfcT;  ist  praet.  ^ravc^;  2d  praet.  "ftr^  (lirf^vj:, 
"ftr^fVnr  or  fti^ir) ;  3d  praet.  ^3ra\fh^  (^?^fwf)  or  '5{^rtftir 
(^i%irf,  vH^ry:) ;  ist  fut.  ^f^nrr  or  ^^ ;  2d  fut.  Jrymfri  or 
^r^rfw ;  imp.  %>f5 ;  pot.  ^ff ;  bened.  teimr^;  cond.  ^raf^mcT 
or  -^irWrt^.  Pass,  "ftrui^.  Caus.  ^^nrfcT;  3d  praet.  'K^IPmmt^. 
Desid.  P^PMPimPd  or  P^PtlrMPrf.    Freq.  ^PtfWJVf,  ^TT^rtfw  or  %^ir- 

There  is  also  a  verb  fro,  ^  to  go/  which  is  without  the 
Anubandha  ^,  and  which  therefore  inserts  the  augment  ^ 
invariably;  as,  ■ftr^fv^,  ^fvflT,  W^vhr,  &c.  The  initial  1J  of 
either  verb  is  not  changed  after  the  ^  of  a  preposition,  except 
fff,  when  meaning  prohibition  ;  as,  f^^vfw  ^  he  forbids.' 

"5  *  to  bear  children.' 
This  takes  ^  optionally  in  the  third  praeterite. 
Pres.  ^nrffT;   ist  praet.  ^nr^;  2d  praet.  ^^r^  (^f^^  ^mP^vi 

or  ^T^) ;  3d  praet.  ^r^^l^  or  ^fiNlr|^;   ist  fiit.  ^fhn;  2d  fut. 

fTl^MPri;    imp.  ^T^;    pot.  ¥%1^;    bened.  ^^m^j    cond.   ^n^luiri^. 

Pass.   ^31^.      Caus.    flN^jPri.     Desid.    i^flMPcT.      Freq.   ^fhl^T^, 

fTlMc/lPd  or  TfV^rfw. 

The   same  root  is   also   inflected   in   the   second  and  fiflh 

classes. 

B  b 


186  VERBS. 

^  '  to  hurt'  or  *  kill.' 

Pres.  ^^ ;  ist  praet.  ^njjlf ;  ^d  praet.  ^^ ;  3d  praet.  wf^ ; 

ist  fut.  *\Jif{\ ;   2d  fut.  ^n^m^  ;  imp.  ^wf;  pot.  ^W;    bened. 

^f^^;    cond.    ^^^xqiT.      Pass.  ^T^.      Caus.  '^^f^f  -^;  3d 

praet.   ^^i^^n^  -w.      Desid.   ^^^.      Freq.    ^^ft^^STW,   ^f^, 

^^  (^)  '  to  serve.' 

The  reduplication  of  ^  is  i^  (rule  188,  i), 

Pres.  %^ ;  ist  praet.  «5if<c|rt  ;  2d  praet.  "fti^ ;  3d  praet. 
wfw;  ist  fut.  ^fNlTT;  2d  fut.  ^T^rff;  imp.  ^[wm;  pot.  ^^; 
bened.  &f^^;  cond.  ^Mflf^mri.  Pass.  ^^.  Caus.  ilmiPri ; 
3d  praet.  ^rfW^^.     Desid.   fa^fcim^.     Freq.  i^^,  i^^tfiT, 

So  similar,  but  less  frequent  roots,  it^,  ^^,  ^"f ,  &c.  meaning 
also  '  to  serve'  or  ^  gratify  by  service.' 

^fW  *  to  stop'  or  *  hinder.' 

The  sibilant  being  changed,  the  following  letter  also  becomes 
a  dental, 

Pres.  ^5r»>T^;  ist  praet.  ^TH^^TfT ;  2d  praet.  ITRP^;  3d  praet. 
"»nwr*HF ;  ist  fut.  w r*H H I ;  2d  fut.  MPuimTi ;  imp.  wuidl  ; 
pot.  w^^ ;  bened.  ^eH^'^  ;  cond.  ?Hwr*H*Mri.  Pass.  ^cfw^. 
Desid.  fwf^RT^.      Freq.  irrerwR^,  TTTCWtfw  or  Trrefftl. 

FT '  to  stand'  or  ^  stay.' 

This  verb  substitutes  "fir^  before  the  terminations  of  the 
conjugational  tenses.  Although  properly  conjugated  in  the 
Parasmai-pada,  yet  in  various  senses,  or  afler  certain  prepo- 
sitions, it  may  take  the  i^tmane-pada  also.  Before  it  the  WT 
becomes  ^  or  ^.  In  the  third  praeterite  the  verb  takes  the 
terminations  of  the  first ;  and  in  the  ^tmane-pada  changes  its 
vowel  to  ^.     In  the  causal  form  it  inserts  t^. 

Pres.  rriafd  -^;  ist  praet.  ^srfinn^  -IT ;  2d  praet.  ir^,  w^;  3d 
praet.  ^^TWH^,  safari  (wftq^nrf) ;  ist  fut.  WTIH;  2d  fut.  ^n^fir  -it; 
imp.  fws^  -wf;    pot.  f(ff^  -TT;    bened.   ^^TTTf^,  ^wnftF;    cond. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  187 

^J<^l4:Mft^  -IT.      Pass,  m\^i{.      Caus.  ff^lM^Pri  -^ ;   3d  praet.  ^arfw- 
f^xn^  -W.    Desid.  rriyi^Pri.     Freq.  ^^hr^,  TTT^IT  or  rii^lfri. 

T{  is  used  in  the  Atmane-pada  to  signify  '  to  appeal  to'  or 
'  rely  on ;'  also  with  the  prepositions  w^,  ^T^,  T(y  and  f% ;  also 
with  ^TT,  meaning  ^  to  affirm  ;'  with  "g"^,  except  it  mean  '  to 
stand  up'  or  ^  rise ;'  and  with  "gir,  if  the  sense  be  intransitive, 
or  it  mean  '  to  praise^  or  *  worship/  or  ^  to  have  a  regard 
for/  &c. 

fir^  *  to  spit/ 

The  vowel  becomes  long  in  the  conjugational  tenses :  the 
initial  sibilant  is  unchanged.  In  the  reduplication  IT  is  substi- 
tuted for  the  cerebral  optionally  in  the  second  praeterite.  The 
desiderative  optionally  commutes  the  final  semivowel  to  ^. 

Pres.  "ffNfrT;  ist  praet.  ^rfl^if^;  2d  praet.  frt^^l  or  fz2^ 
(Ph  Pimij:  or  IrftRj:) ;  3d  praet.  ^^rNh^;  ist  fut.  ¥fwr;  3d  fut. 
&pcjmPri;  imp.  ift^;  pot.  if^;  bened.  "^Nrni;;  cond.  ^^r^f^r^. 
Pass.  i?Nn^.    Caus.  i^xrfir.     Desid.  frftflP^MPri  or  ja^MPd.    Freq. 

f^Nt^,  "^al^lPri. 

"Nt  (P^i')  '  to  smile.' 

Pres.  FTPf^j  ist  praet.  ^kHmi  ;  2d  praet.  "ftrf^^ ;  3d  praet. 
^W8  ;  ist  fut.  win;  2d  fut.  ^^xq^;  imp.  fH^HI  ;  pot.  kHi\ti ; 
bened.  i^xft? ;  cond.  ^HWmH.  Pass,  -^ffrcit.  Caus.  wnTTfrT  -W. 
Desid.  P^wPmM>.     Freq.  St*fl^^,  ^^ifHlT,  ii«*iPri. 

With  f^  prefixed,  and  in  the  causal  form,  it  makes  P^lwm^PH 
*  he  or  it  astonishes  /  that  is,  the  object  itself  astonishes : 
when  the  object  differs,  the  Parasmai-pada  is  used,  either  in 
the  regular  form,  or  with  "q  substituted  for  tt  ;  as,  WT  ^^  if 
f^^RTxnrfir  or  Pclf^HlM^Prl  '  she  astonishes  him  by  her  form.^ 

f^  (f^rfis^)  ^  to  melt/  '  to  perspire.' 

The  verb  belongs  to  the  class  giTTf^;  see  p.  170. 

Pres.  ^^;    ist  praet.   ^d<^H  ;    2d  praet.  "ftrfN^;   3d  praet. 

'^T^f^  or  ^rf^f^;   ist  fut.  QP(^riI;  2d  fut.  ^^f^^;  imp.  "^^; 

pot.  ^^ ;  bened.  yP^^Mlg  ;  cond.  ^T^fV^TrT.    Pass,  fssrn^.   Caus. 

^(^4<Pf(  -w.    Desid.  PjH^P(^m7^.    Freq.  %Ptcj*|H,  SPM<{1^»*  ^^  %^i%. 

B  b  2 


188  VERBS. 

15  ^  to  go.' 

When  it  means  ^  to  go  quickly'  or  ^  to  run/  ^  is  optionally 

substituted  for  the  root  before  the  conjugational  tenses  (i.  e.  a 

different,  but  imperfect  root,  >^  or  VT^  is  also  admissible  in 

these  tenses).      For  other  particulars,  see  the  analogous  roots 

Pres.  ^nfiT,  VT^;  ist  praet.  ^sratr^,  ^mTTTf^;  2d  praet.  "^RTPC 
(^ro^.)  ;  3d  praet.  ^HftitfTf^^  or  ^TRTl^;  ist  fut.  ^jrtr;  ad  fut. 
^Tftsrfrr;  imp.  ^TCJ,  VT^ ;  pot.  TITT^,  VTTrT;  bened.  "fignrn^; 
cond.  'srofbiTf^.  Pass.  "ftRW.  Caus.  ^ntTTfcr  -^.  Desid.  r^^l^Pri. 
Freq.  ^^Nw,  ^O^OPri,  ^O^P^  or  ^^itft. 

W«T  (mj,)  '  to  go,'  ^  to  creep'  or  ^  glide.* 

The  medial  may  be  changed  to  ^  in  the  two  futures  and 
conditional.  It  is  adso  optional  to  double  the  final  after  a 
conjunct  ^;  as,  TV^QPff  &c. 

Pres.  ^fff;  ist  praet.  ^irrti^r;  2>d  praet.  ^ra^;  3d  praet. 
^TTT^  (^5i^Mril) ;  ist  fut.  ^TTH  or  ^;  2d  fut.  ^44jPri  or  ^Tt;^^; 
imp.  ^r^;  pot.  ^I^;  bened.  warnf;  cond.  ^w^^cn^.  Pass, 
^rq^.  Caus.  ^^^Pri  -^.  Desid.  f^'JErfW.  Freq.  ^O^m^j  ^- 
^rftfif  or  flO^PA. 

^1?^  (^rf^)  '  to  go'  or  *  approach.' 

The  nasal  is  rejected  before  it,  and  in  one  form  of  the  third 
praeterite  :  in  the  frequentative,  tf^  is  added  to  the  reduplicated 
syllable. 

Pres.  ^R5^  ;  ist  praet.  ^T^f?^;  2d  praet.  -ci^r^  (^"^rf?^  or 
M5J5*irV() ;  3d  praet.  -n^^t\^  (-^^^^rif),  '^ST^ihftlT  (-H^irJl,  ^HOTf :) ; 
ist  fut.  ^wt;  2d  fut.  Wr^trfw;  imp.  ^r^^j;  pot.  "^K^;  bened. 
'^sm^;  cond.  ^T^rBTc^.  Pass.  ^ra^.  Caus.  4<*irr^i|Prt  -^.  Desid. 
P^uhryPd.     Freq.  "^-jft^^,  ^»/]l^r<{)Prf  or  xj.f|^;hP^. 

5EiT^  ^  to  envy'  or  '  emulate.^ 
Pres.  5^^ ;    ist  praet.  ^M^^^ri  ;   2d  praet.  "q^q^f ;   3d  praet. 
^"Wpgg;     ist   fut.    wffin;     2d   fut.   ^qff^;    imp.   miM ; 
pot.    frMJTH;    bened.   ^P^tOtf ;    cond.   ^sJwP^^qTT.     Pass.   m^^. 


FIRST  CONJUGATION.  189 

Caus.  ^qfrrfw  -w.     Desid.   PM^^riMri.     Freq.  mi^^h,  m^r^JTrf 
or  mi^rj. 

5F«finT  (44^1!  41)  ^  to  increase/ 

In  the  causal  the  final  is  changed  to  ^. 

Pres.  l^lUff;  ist  praet.  ^?^qinnT;  2d  praet.  q^hl*) ;  3d  praet. 
^n^qirlTr?;  ist  fut.  ^iPuril;  2d  fut.  HhlHimri  j  imp.  HhNrif; 
pot.  ^Mi\*\t{ ;  bened.  FRrWtF ;  cond.  ^^rMiiP^md.  Pass,  ^qirnnr. 
Caus.  44»Ni^rri;  3d  praet.  ^iTqwici,^.     Desid.  rMWilfMHrf.      Freq. 

^  ^  to  remember.' 
Pres.  F?T:fTT  -^ ;  ist  praet.  >H^i.r^  -IT;  2d  praet.  ?!^rr,  ^wft; 
3d  praet.  ^TFTT^,  ^HjiJiT;  ist  fut.  ^Rtl;  2d  fut.  wfbrfrT -W ; 
imp.  ^nrj  -irf;  pot.  ^ib^  -W;  bened.  m<^ii^,  ^R^;  cond. 
'^^wH.ujfl^  -IT.  Pass.  ^Hitw.  Caus.  WTCqfw  -^.  Desid.  ^Mj^^rt. 
Freq.  ^rronSw,  ^iwOPd,  ^rr^Rft. 

W^  (^^)  *  *^  o^ze'  or  ^  drop.' 

This  belongs  to  the  class  ^rilH^  (p.  170).  For  the  effect  of 
•g^  see  p.  106.  The  second  future  and  conditional  are  option- 
ally conjugated  in  the  Parasmai-pada,  and  so  is  the  desidera- 
tive  :  see  '^  and  oR^. 

Pres.  w^ ;  ist  praet.  ^TW^ ;  2d  praet.  ^r^^  (^r^qf?^  or 
^T^fw,  ^l^rf^^  or  mM^"^) ;  3d  praet.  ^i^id  (-H^idl),  ^^P^g 
or  '^r^^  ("^^Pr<mril  or  >n^*f^iril);  ist  fut.  ^Pn^rii  or  T^im; 
2d  fut.  ^Pr^^ujPrt  -w,  ^iT?5Tfw  -w;  imp.  W^;  pot.  ^ir^; 
bened.  ^Pr<«t{)a  or  ^^rtflg ;  cond.  '^iwfT^xEn^  -If,  ^TOi^l^  -IT. 
Pass.  WfJ^'  Desid.  P^^Pr^M^  and  P^^'rtlPri  -W.  Freq.  ^n^iTOT, 
^lf:M><{lPri  or  ^rrofw. 

^  (^1)  ^  *o  ^^  down.' 

This  verb  also  belongs  to  the  class  ^HlP<^. 

Pres.  ^irtI"  ;  ist  praet.  ^h^a  ;  2d  praet.  ^r^ ;  3d  praet. 
^nnn^  or  ^%iP^»  ;  ist  fut.  ^ftnrr;  2d  fut.  « Paul's  ;  imp.  #^; 
pot.  ^^ ;  bened.  ^fpHtflg  ;   cond.  -dJ4jPf<«jrt.    Pass.  to^.    Caus. 


190  VERBS. 

jfl^fri  -^.       Desid.   "ftl^Brftrq^.       Freq.    ^»fl|jl^rf,    H^^^^fflPri    or 

sst^  and  OT,  '  to  fall  down/  are  similarly  inflected. 

^  *  to  drop.' 

This  is  one  of  the  exceptions  to  the  insertion  of  ^  in  the 
second  person  singular  of  the  second  praeterite  (p.  121).  The 
root  takes  both  the  augment  and  reduplication  in  the  third 
praeterite. 

Pres.  ^r^ ;  ist  praet.  ^WTrT ;  3d  praet.  ^g^T^  ("S^J^?  ^5f^)  ; 
3d  praet.  vM^^mr^;  ist  fut.  wttH;  3d  fut.  ^Nrfw;  imp.  W^; 
pot.  HTif ;  bened.  ^^TTiT;  cond.  wt^T^.  Pass.  ^JJ^.  Cans. 
^N^Pri  ;  3d  praet.  ^i^fjcir^  or  ^rftra^.      Desid.  ^{^mPh.      Freq. 

1  (V^)  '  to  take.^ 
Pres.  "5T:fif  -^ ;  ist  praet.  ^T^TIT  -W ;  2d  praet.  ^TfR  ('Tift, 
'T^)?  'T^;  3^  praet.  ^^nffrt^,  ^Tf 7T ;  ist  fut.  -^j  2d  fut. 
^ri^mPri  -^  ;  imp.  "^  -TTT ;  pot.  "^  -w ;  bened.  ff^,  ;f^ ; 
cond.  TH^Pj^mri^  -TT.  Pass.  f^.  Caus.  fRxrfw  -w.  Desid. 
ftn^tfff  -w.     Freq.  %f^,  ^^OPri,  IT^-  or  ^P^^OPri,  or  if^-  or 

^J^  '  to  be  or  make  glad.' 

Pres.  ^T^;    ist  praet.  >n^^H  ;    2d  praet.  »r^ ;    3d  praet. 

'sr^Tf^;   ist  fut.  ^iPf^rii;  2d  fut.  ^iP<mw;  imp.  ^^hI;  pot. 

^T^ ;  bened.  ^rf^pfti? ;   cond.  'il^lP<^u|rt.     Pass.  ^m^.     Caus. 

^\i^^t^   -W.      Desid.   f^T^Tf^.       Freq.   ifr^ra^,    ill^KlPrt   or 

^T^  *  to  taste/  and  ^T^  '  to  sound/  are  similarly  inflected. 

t  (^  '  to  caU.' 

When  the  root  is  doubled,  or  before  %  the  semivowel  and 
following  diphthong  are  changed  to  T.  The  third  praeterite 
takes  the  terminations  of  the  first  in  the  Parasmai-pada, 
and  optionally  in  the  ^tmane-pada.  In  the  passive,  the  third 
praeterite,  second  future,  and  conditional,  optionally  insert  ^. 

Pres.  ^vfft  -^;   ist  praet.  '*H4^f{^  -TT ;  2d  praet.  gi^  (^g^lij:. 


SECOND  CONJUGATION.  191 

g^fr^T  or  '^it^),  ^[f^ ;  3d  praet.  '^ib^  (^d^)^  ^^  (-H^Al)  or 
^r^rm  ("^r^wrm);    ist  fut.  2^t;  2d  fut.  dfrwftr  -^;  imp. 

3|TTW  -ITT ;  pot.  5^7^  -W ;  bened.  f^TTT,  3fT^  ;  cond.  -Hd^l^T^  -IT. 
Pass.  1X1^ ;  3d  praet.  ^jj^^iPil^  -^Hd^lPM^,  ^T2^  or  ^^Hsi  ;  2d  fut. 
d^T^W  or  «i^irMmri  ;  cond.  ^■H<j^i^ri  or  wsfTf^^TrT.  Caus.  d^l^nPrf  ; 
3d  praet.  ^nj^^.  Desid.  ^^MPrt  -^.  Freq.  ^fft|^,  ^fl^^lPd, 
afl^iPn. 

Second  Conjugation. 

213.  The  characteristic  peculiarity  of  this  conjugation  is 
the  attachment  of  the  inflectional  terminations  of  the  conjuga- 
tional  tenses  immediately  to  the  termination  of  the  base,  with- 
out the  interposition  of  any  vowel  (rule  170,  a.  2). 

a.  There  is  but  one  general  change  of  the  terminations ;  f^  in 
the  second  persons  of  the  imperative  is  changed  to  fv  after  any 
consonant  except  a  nasal,  semivowel,  or  ^.  It  is  said,  indeed, 
that  the  terminations  of  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the 
first  praeterite,  H  and  ^  left  by  f^xf  and  "ftn^  (p.  114),  are 
rejected  afler  an  inflective  base  ending  in  a  consonant;  but 
this  arises  from  a  general  rule  not  restricted  to  conjugational 
inflexion.  A  conjunct  consonant,  when  final,  loses  the  second 
member  of  the  compound  Jrule  ^^) :  therefore  ^  '  to  kill,^ 
ist  praet.,  making  in  the  first  instance  ^^^,  ^I^^,  must 
become  ^Tf  •T,  rejecting  the  finals  l^  and  ^.  The  same  in 
other  verbs  ending  in  consonants,  of  whatever  conjugation. 

b.  The  changes  of  the  vowels  of  the  base  are  analogous  to 
those  of  the  first  conjugation,  before  the  terminations  having 
an  indicatory  t^.  A  final  ^  or  ^  is  in  general  changed  to  ^; 
^  and  "gr  to  ^  ;  and  "^  "^  to  ^.  An  initial  or  medial  short 
vowel  is  similarly  changed  before  the  same.  A  long  vowel  is 
unaltered.  Other  changes  are  special,  or  follow  the  general 
rules  of  Sandhi. 

c.  Final  consonants  are  combined  with  the  terminations 
agreeably  to  the  laws  of  Sandhi,  or  to  special  rules,  or  to  niles 
affecting   all    similar    combinations   in   whatever   conjugation. 


192  VERBS. 

Some  of  these  have  been  noticed  under  individual  verbs  of 
the  first  conjugation  ;  but  it  may  be  useful  to  collect  them  in 
this  place,  as  they  particularly  apply  to  the  conjugational 
tenses  of  verbs  of  the  second  and  third  conjugations. 

I.  Final  consonants  are  unaltered  before  a  nasal,  a  semi- 
vowel, or  "5,  except  by  special  rule. 

2,*  A  final  palatal  before  other  consonants,  or  when  not 
followed  by  any  letter,  is  changed  to  oR,  which  before  a  soft 
consonant  becomes  t[  (rule  7,  c),  and  makes  with  a  sibilant,  "Ef 
(rule  ^7). 

3.  A  final  ^  or  V  may  be  changed  optionally  to  t  in  the 
second  person  singular  of  the  first  praeterite  ;  and  t:  final 
becomes  Visarga. 

4.  A  final  ^  or  "gf  is  changed  to  "^  before  any  consonant 
except  a  nasal,  &c.,  as  above. 

5.  A  final  "^  is  unchanged  before  w  or  "^r,  but  they  become 
the  cerebrals  z  and  z  in  conjunction  with  it  (rule  12).  "^ 
before  ^  is  converted  into  T^  (rule  27).  Before  f\|  and  ur,  "^  is 
changed  to  Z;  and  after  Z,  V  becomes  ^  (rule  12);  when  ^ 
takes  the  place  of  the  hard  consonant  z  (rule  7,  c), 

6.  A  final  "^  is  changed  to  ^  before  any  soft  consonant 
except  a  nasal,  &c.,  as  above  ;  and  to  ir  before  a  sibilant, 
except  in  the  present  tense  and  imperative  mood.  Before  "ftr 
and  ^  it  is  sometimes  retained,  sometimes  rejected:  it  is 
usually  rejected  before  ^;  it  is  also  sometimes  rejected  before 
fv,  else  it  is  changed  to  ^. 

7.  A  final  "Cf  rejects  cf,  and  leaves  ^  final  before  any  conso- 
nant except  a  nasal,  semivowel,  or  ^. 

8.  A  final  15  before  any  consonant  except  a  nasal,  &c.  is 
changed  to  xr,  if  the  verb  begin  with  ^  followed  by  any  vowel 
except  ^ ;  if  it  begin  with  ^,  or  with  any  other  consonant,  ^ 
final  becomes  z ;  except  in  t^,  when  it  becomes  v :  some  verbs, 
as  g^,  take  both.  After  an  aspirate,  w  and  ^  become  v  (rule 
186),  when  other  modifications  occur,  which,  although  previ- 
ously noticed,  may  be  repeated.      Thus  j(  and  ^  become  ^ 


SECOND   CONJUGATION.  193 

before  a  sibilant,  and  "Sfi  forms  with  it  "?f  (rule  29,  ^2,)  i  "^ 
becomes  n,  and  ^5  "f,  before  any  soft  consonant  (rule  y,  b) : 
V  after  ^  becomes  ^  (rule  lij) ;  and  when  ^  is  repeated  in  a 
conjunct,  one  ^  is  rejected.  The  initial  of  a  root  ending  in 
an  aspirate,  being  it,  T,  ^5  or  "^5  is  changed  to  its  correspond- 
ing aspirate,  tt,  ^,  V,  or  >T,  when  its  final  is  followed  by  ^  or 
sr,  or  by  no  other  letter. 

d.  This  conjugation  includes  a  class  of  five  verbs,  called 
^t^lH^  or  ^  ^  to  weep/  "b^ti  *  to  sleep,'  "sg^  ^  to  breathe,'  ^R  ^  to 
breathe,'  WS^  ^  to  eat,'  which  form  a  partial  exception  to  the 
non-interposition  of  a  vowel  between  the  base  and  inflectional 
termination,  as  they  insert  ^  before  any  consonant  except  tt,  and 
^  or  ^  if  the  termination  consists  of  a  single  consonant,  as  in 
the  second  and  third  persons  singular  of  the  first  praeterite. 

e.  Another  class,  termed  iT^rf^,  is  also  included  in  this 
conjugation,  the  verbs  of  which  are  termed  ^rwiw  or  ^  redupli- 
cated ;'  they  are,  "»TW  ^  to  eat,'  WT^  ^  to  wake,'  ^^fr^T  ^  to  be 
poor,'  "^oFTO  ^  to  shine,'  "^rra  ^  to  govern,'  ^hft  '  to  shine,'  and 
^^  ^  to  obtain.'  These  cause  the  nasal  of  the  terminations 
of  the  third  person  plural  of  the  present  and  imperative  to  be 
rejected,  as  also  of  the  same  person  of  the  first  praeterite, 
Atmane-pada ;  and  T^  to  be  substituted  for  ^^  in  the  same 
person  of  the  Parasmai-pada. 

The  verb  which  is  given  as  a  model  of  this  conjugation,  ^ 
*  to  eat,'  is  inflected  in  its  simple  form  in  the  Parasmai-pada 
only ;  but  in  composition  with  some  prepositions,  as  with  f^ 
and  ^rfff,  it  may  be  conjugated  in  the  Atmane-pada,  as  ^W^ 
'  he  eats  much  reciprocally.'  It  may  therefore  be  exhibited 
in  both  forms,  omitting  the  prefixes  of  the  compound  verb  for 
the  present,  for  the  sake  of  comparison.  The  final  of  'W^ 
becomes  TT  before  a  hard  or  surd  consonant  (rule  "J,  d)i  w  is 
inserted  by  special  rule  before  the  terminations  of  the  second 
and  third  persons  singular  of  the  first  praeterite,  Parasmai- 
pada.  The  nasal  of  the  third  person  plural  in  the  present, 
first  praeterite,  and  imperative  of  the  iitmane-pada  is  rejected. 

c  c 


194 


VERBS. 

"^  '  to  eat/ 

Present  tense,  ^  I  eat/ 

&C. 

Parasmai-pada. 

Atmane-pada 

^?ftr 

^i^:        ^t?t: 

^ 

^^ 

^ra^ 

^ifw 

WR:           ^Tr^ 

^Tw 

^SF^^ 

^^ 

^rfw 

^ 

^Tff 

^r^ 

First  praeterite,  *  I  ate'  or  *  have  eaten/  &c. 

WT^ 

^Tsr        ^rm 

^snf^ 

wnrf^ 

WT^. 

^iT^        'UTir 

^IrVli: 

^i^mi 

^ 

mii[^ 

^TT^ 

^^THT 

Imperative,  *  May  I  eat. 

'&C. 

"^r^ 

^ 

^?^-^^ 

w% 

W           ^si^ 

Wr^ 

^si^rm 

^^ 

^ 

W^          'Sj^ 

^^ 

^r^TTT 

Potential,  ^  I  may  eat,' 

&c. 

^iren*^ 

^nr^m 

w?rr: 

^'€nd      ^srernr 

-*!<{)« 

^r{li.«j^ 

Of  the  remaining  tenses  it  is  only  to  be  remarked,  that  the 
second  praeterite  is  optionally  borrowed  from  tt^  (see  p.  163)  ; 
and  the  third  praeterite  and  desiderative  mode  are  formed  with 
the  same  verb,  w^  does  not  insert  h^  (p.  12^7),  except  in  the 
second  praeterite. 

2d  praet.  W^rm  or  ^TT^  (^snc^^,  ^n^:),  if$  or  wi^ ;  3d  praet. 
^HRH^  -W;  1st  fut.  ^twt;  2d  fut.  ^sn^fff  -W;  bened.  wmff, 
WWftF ;  cond.  wmr\  -Tf.  Pass.  ^fnt.  Cans.  '^T^irfTr  -^  ;  3d 
praet.  SHlH^^fi^  -TT.     Desid.  HHHrtirri. 

For  the  remaining  verbs  of  this  conjugation,  selected  as 
most  useful  or  remarkable,  the  paradigmas,  as  in  the  first 
conjugation,  with  occasional  observations,  will  be  sufficient. 


SECOND   CONJUGATION.  195 

^PT  ^  to  breathe.' 
This  is  one  of  the  class  ^^jf^;  see  rule  213,  d. 
Pres.  -Mf^fff  (^ftnf:,  ^^rOit)  ;  ist  praet.  ^^TTTiT  or  ^^rr^ 
(^TUpHril,  ■STT^^);  2d  praet.  '^IR  (^rPTft,  ^^t)  ;  3d  praet.  ^\^\ 
(^TTfVr^f,  ^^rf^^:)  ;  ist  fut.  '^rfVnrT ;  2d  fut.  »ijrH«rriT ;  imp.  '^^; 
pot.  ^^?TT7^  (^^Tirf) ;  bened.  "^i?mr  (^SRTTWf) ;  cond.  ^iufnui'ff. 
Pass.  ^^.     Caus.  'HM^Prt.     Desid.  wfVffinfw. 

The  »T  of  this  verb  becomes  w  after  a  preposition  giving 
cause  for  it,  even  in  both  syllables  of  a  reduplication  ;  as, 
mPniriT  ^  he  breathes'  or  ^  lives/  HiPiiiPiUHfw  '  he  desires  to  live.* 

^5nr  ^  to  be.' 
This  auxiliary  verb  admits  of  the  four  conjugational  tenses 
only,  except  in  composition,  when  it  has  a  fifth  tense,  the 
second  praeterite  (p.  121).  The  other  tenses  are  suppUed  by 
^  ^o  be'  (p.  132).  Before  those  terminations  which  do  not 
require  a  change  in  the  radical  vowel  of  a  verb,  the  initial  of 
"^^  is  rejected :  the  final  is  rejected  before  a  termination 
beginning  with  ^.  In  the  first  praeterite,  the  second  and 
third  persons  singular  are  borrowed  from  a  defective  third 
praeterite,  prefixing  ^  to  the  terminations.  Th^  second  person 
singular  of  the  imperative  substitutes  ^  for  the  root,  and  f^  is 
changed  to  fVi,  Like  some  other  verbs,  ^HW  takes  the  j^tmane- 
pada,  compounded  wdth  prepositions,  in  a  reciprocal  sense ; 
as,  ojKj^  (^tM^)  ^  to  be  mutually.'  In  this  Pada  ^  is  substi- 
tuted for  the  root  in  the  first  person  singular,  present  tense : 
^  is  changed  to  ^  before  V.  As  this  verb  is  useful,  the  inflex- 
ions may  be  exhibited  in  detail,  omitting  the  prepositions  of 
the  Xtmane-pada. 

Present  tense,  ^  I  am,'  &c. 


Parasmai-pada. 

Atmane-pada. 

"^rfTER            ^: 

FT. 

t 

«^                  W^ 

■^rfti           ^n 

w 

i 

^                 ^ 

^^          ^: 

?rf% 

^ 

Trnr             w?^ 

C  C,2 


196 


VERBS. 

First  praeterite,  '  I  was,' 

&c. 

^rm^ 

^H           ^i\\kH 

-ilM« 

^Mi^r^ 

^rnft: 

^mW           'iJI« 

■^iwi: 

-ifl^mi 

^i5«« 

'SH^fT 

'srrerf       '^rra''^ 

'iiiM 

^TOTWr 

^l^ii 

Imperative,  *  May  I  be, 

'&c. 

^i^lPH 

-imm       -amn 

^ 

-ilfJI^i 

'5^«l»^| 

^ 

w          w 

^ 

? 

^ 

w          ^ 

w 

^TifT 

■^nrr 

Potential,  '  I  may  be,' 

&c. 

^ 

WR       'mm 

^dW^ 

w\: 

min           4^»ri 

^^l^lf 

¥^\\ 

wm      ^. 

^^ftrT 

^"5^ 

The  second  and  third  persons  singular  of  the  benedictive 
are  considered  to  be  ^cTTiT  . 

^rw  *  to  sit.' 
The  final  is  optionally  doubled  before  a  consonantal  termi- 
nation, except  SET,  before  which  it  is  rejected. 

Pres.  ^rr^  or  -^ifQ  (^^rrS  or  ^rr^,  ^sttot^,  ^^) ;  ist  praet, 
^5frrer;  2d  praet.  ^TTOT^;  3d  praet.  ^mPflg ;  ist  fut.  ^rrftnfT; 
ad  fut.  'snftrHT^;  imp.  "mm  ("^(vm,  wrorfH);  pot.  ^iffld  ; 
bened.  ^ifatflg  ;  cond.  ^ipHmri.  Pass.  ^1^^.  Cans,  ^srwrrfw- 
Desid.  ^arftrftr^^. 

^  (^)  '  to  remember.' 

This  is  always  combined  with  the  preposition  ^rfv,  and  with 
no  other :  the  final  indicatory  "^  distinguishes  it  from  ^  (^)j 
as  below.  In  the  second  and  third  praeterites  and  in  the 
derivative  forms  it  substitutes  the  inflexions  of  tht. 

Pres.  ^n^  (^nflir:,  "^rfVnrf^) ;  ist  praet.  ^t^tt;  2,d  praet. 
^BrfvsPTR;  3d  praet.  ^rairrnr;  ist  fut.  ^JP^ITT;  2d  fut.  ^n^xqfiT; 
imp.  "^Wtr ;  pot.  '^r\i\  M I  A;  bened,  '^nfhrnr ;  cond.  ^sr&Hnr .  Pass. 
^R\fhi^.    Cans,  ssiPMJiH^rri.    Desid.  '^srfvftFTf'T^fiT. 


SECOND   CONJUGATION.  197 

^  (^)  *  to  go  ;'  ^T>ft  '  to  study.' 
The  indicatory  "^  restricts  this  to  the  j^tmane-pada  ;  and  it 
is  invariably  combined  with  the  preposition  ^rfV ;  as,  ^nit  '  to 
go  over/  as  a  book,  ^  to  read/  ^  to  study  .^  It  borrows  the 
forms  of  m,  *  to  go/  in  the  second  praeterite  and  frequentative^ 
and  optionally  in  the  third  praeterite  and  conditional,  of  the 
active  voice,  and  the  causal  mode.  Before  a  vowel  termination, 
^  is  substituted  for  the  radical  vowel. 

Pres.  ^v^  (^snfhn^,  ^sPlhrff);  ist  praet.  'grSlT  (^^Wimrf, 
^S^d) ;  3d  praet.  ^^rfv*Ft  (^if^nTTTa",  ^rn^fjll) ;  3d  praet.  ^T^ 
or  ^Tuqift? ;  ist  fut.  ^5|U|HI ;  2d  fut.  4iulm"J)  ;  imp.  ^T>fhrf ;  pot. 
^nfNhr ;  bened.  ^3fu)»=fl«  ;  cond.  ^rm»fh[nr,  ^r^tqir.  Pass.  '^nfh?^. 
Cans.  ^sramrirfiT;    3d  praet.  ^BranrftrPTiT   or  ^unfbrqTT.      Desid. 

^(^J'togo.^ 

The  indicatory  ttt  distinguishes  this  from  the  two  preceding 
-verbs,  as  well  as  from  ^  of  the  first  conjugation  (see  p.  156). 
Before  the  vowel  terminations  of  the  present  and  imperative, 
"XT  is  substituted  for  the  root;  before  other  terminations,  ^. 
The  third  praeterite  is  borrowed  from  iTT  in  both  the  active 
and  passive  voices ;  and  the  causal  and  desiderative  are  derived 
from  TFT. 

Pres.  ^fw  (^,  "irfnT,  ^^,  ^:,  ^,  ^,  X^,  1^:) ;   ist  praet. 

^^  (^,  ^srni^,  ^:,  H  '^n^J ;  2d  praet.  ^imr  (t^,  t?») » 

3d  praet.  ^nmr;  ist  fut.  ^^rTT;  2d  frit.  ^dmPd;  imp.  ^  (^, 
T^  ^,  "Trf^,  ^m^5  ^TR)  ;  pot.  ^[^nT^;  bened.  ^rrnr  (with  a 
prep,  short,  fFrfbrnr,  Wbrren) ;  cond.  ^^.  Pass.  f^T^ ; 
3d  praet.  "^sunf^.     Caus.  JlH^fd.     Desid.  flFTfiT^. 

^  ^  to  praise.' 
After  the  cerebral  of  the  base,  the  K  and  ^  of  a  termination 
are  changed  to  z  and  7;  and  as  they  are  hard,  the  radical 
final  is  then  changed  to  the  hard  consonant  of  its  class,  Z. 
This  and  ^,  as  below,  insert  ^  before  ^  and  li  in  the  present, 
and  ^  and  ^  in  the  imperative. 


198  VERBS. 

Pres.  ^  (^TTW,  $[5^,  t^T^^  f?T%  ff^,  ^,  t.^^^  t^"^)  »  ^^^ 
praet.  ^;  2d  praet.  ^^i^rfi;  3d  praet.  ^f^F;  1st  fut.  ^fkwT; 
2d  fut.  j^Himri;  imp.  Ijf ,  pot.  f;3fhr;  bened.  ^^^;  cond. 
ijff^nr.     Pass.  ^T^.     Caus.  ^^Mfrt.     Desid.  ^frfr^. 

f;C  '  to  go,'  '  to  shake.' 
Pres.  1^;   ist  praet.  ^;   2d  praet.  |tT^'^;  3d  praet.  ^ft]?; 
ist  fut.  ^ftjn;   2d  fut.  ^fbrff;    imp.  f#f;   pot.  ^iS^lT;    bened. 
f;^ ;  cond.  ^ftWiT.    Pass.  |x5^.    Caus.  fi^qfff.    Desid.  ^Ixftqw. 

^  '  to  rule.* 

For  the  changes  of  the  final  ^,  see  rule  214.  ^  is  inserted  in 
the  present  and  imperative  tenses  before  ^  and  ssf ;   see  f;?. 

Pres.  ^  (tf^5  t^^)  ;  ist  praet.  ^ ;  2d  praet.  |^^»Mi ; 
3d  praet.  $f^ ;  ist  fut.  %t^AJ ;  2d  fut.  ff^r^w ;  imp.  ^ ; 
pot.  ^;^ ;  bened.  ff^r^  ;  cond.  j^P^imri.  Pass.  t;^!^^.  Caus. 
^^pqfiT.     Desid.  ^r^iH^i^v). 

■gjOT  ("^n^^)  ^  to  cover .^ 

This  verb  takes  both  Padas.  Before  terminations  reject- 
ing IT,  and  having  more  than  one  letter,  the  Vriddhi  change  of 
the  vowel  is  optional :  before  a  vowel,  T^  is  substituted  for  the 
final ;  but  optionally  before  the  augment  ^,  prefixed  to  which 
the  final  may  also  take  the  Guna  change  or  ^,  which  becomes 
^R.  In  the  reduplication  the  second  syllable  only  is  repeated, 
and  the  proper  radical  consonant  tt  resumes  its  dental  character 
when  detached  from  ^.  The  desiderative  takes  various  forms 
(rule  203,  d). 

Pres.  wifff,  -gptffrT  ("^i^:,  ^^I^Pri),  "5R^;    ist  praet.  'ifinH'*!^ 

^^?Nhf,  ^mucnTT^or  ^TiMrT  {Mi^^^l  &c.),  '^^^^  '^^; 
ist  fut.  ^jar^ril,  ^S^f^WT ;  2d  fut.  -gi^f^wfiT  -w,  "gpml^^^fjf  -^ ; 
imp.  -gBlf%  or  "gp^,  "gj^ ;  pot.  ^^,  ^^ ;  bened.  <*%^Hf^, 
^^^^flgor  <iiinr^MlK  ;  cond.  ^iDr^Sr^m'tf  -W  or  ^^f^mrf  -W.  Pass. 
gi^TT^.  Caus.  -gi^T^Trfrr;  3d  praet.  "^wg^.  Desid.  "^P^^ 
^  -%  <hi|Hrc<Mrri  -%  -gjf gfWlT  -^.  Freq.  ^h^Pf^^lH,  wfW^Hw 
or  ^^rflPH. 


SECOND   CONJUGATION.  199 

(^f^^)  '  to  speak^  or  *  say/ 
For  the  changes  of  "C^,  see  rule  213,  c,  7.    The  verb  has  but 

the  conjugational  tenses,  and  optionally  the  second  praeterite. 

In  all  other  forms  ^qr  or  ■^r^TT  is  substituted  for  the  root.     The 

substitutes  may  be  inflected  in  both  Padas. 

Pres.  '^  (^HjlH,  "^r^^,  ^,  ^r^,  ^^^  ^^t) ;   I  St  praet. 

W^  {w^r^m,  ^-^^ti) ;    2d  praet.  "^^,  ^^  or  ^^^,  ^q^, 

^q^i^fl;    3d  praet.  '^Wf[^y    ^TWiT,   ^^T^^Trer,   -U^^imlff ;    ist   fut. 

WfTwr,  'sfi'^mn;  2d  fut.  ^rrr^fiff  -^,  ^^n^irfw  -k;  imp.  "^^  i"^^, 
^ji) ;   pot.  ^^^ ;  bened.  mv^,  ^nw{,  mrvTif^,  «*5ir«1^, 

^^Tmr,  cfc^lNIH^;  cond.  ^^i^h^  -it,  ^t^^tt^  -W.  Pass,  wwk, 
ct»^imri.  Cans.  ^qTTnTfw,^^rTxr^;  3d  praet.  ^'q^qTTiT^wf^^^lT. 
Desid.  r^jomitfri  ^,  Pcich^ii^fw  -^.     Freq.  ^r^irnrff,  -Mlofe^H^ri. 

MckiVH  *  to  shine.^ 

This  is  one  of  the  class  »ia|ir<,  or  reduplicated  verbs.  ^ 
may  be  rejected  before  the  terminations  of  the  second  and 
third  persons  singular,  first  praeterite,  or  changed  to  f^  when 
they  are  dropped  :  it  is  also  rejected  or  changed  to  ^  before  f^ 
(rule  213,  c,  6). 

Pres.  ^chifw  (-^'♦IW:,  -^chl^rrf) ;  ist  praet.  W^^BTiT,  ^T^^ 
(^i\Mdk\:  or  ^^eM^);  2d  praet.  "^^fiTOT^^^RTT: ;  3d  praet.  w^^finftiT 
(^T^^RTftm ) ;  1st  fut.  ^diir^ril;  2d  fut.  ^rarTftrarfTT;  imp.  ^RFTTJ 
(^^fiTf>T  or  ^ohin^) ;  pot.  "^^RTWnr;  bened.  xIom^i,^^  (-^41^1^1)  ; 
cond.  ^r^TRTftrnrr^.  Pass.  -ejoM^"^.  Cans,  -cjchi^jjrri  ;  3d  praet. 
^T^T^oFT^  or  ^^^TRT5r?T.      Desid.  frq^RTftmf^. 

^TW  ^  to  eat.' 

This  is  the  type  of  the  Abhyasta  or  reiterated  roots  in  its 
inflexions,  although  not  itself  a  redupHcate.  It  also  belongs 
to  the  class  "^^if^  (rule  213,  d), 

Pres.  ^rHlPri  (^Hsjri:,  TiHjPri)  ;  ist  praet.  ^H»lHfiri^  or  ISHT^ 
(^nr^:) ;  2d  praet.  »T3TW ;  3^  praet.  ^r»r^|tlT  (^nrftpr) ;  1st  fiit. 
arf^TTT ;  2d  fut.  iffw^qfifr ;  imp.  »T^ ;  pot.  »r^Tf^;  bened. 
ir^TTfT;  cond.  ^M»ir«|^M"rr^.  Pass.  ^f^r^.  Cans.  iT^^xrfw.  Desid. 
f»T»rftj^fw.     Freq.  ^n^nSfHT^  »TT5f^f^fw  or  ^rnrfi?. 


200  VERBS. 

aTPj  *  to  wake.' 
The  final  becomes  ^  before  a  consonantal  termination 
rejecting  t^;  and  in  the  first  praeterite,  when  the  inflectional 
termination  is  rejected  (rule  213,  c,  3) ;  the  ^  of  ^  becomes 
Visarga.  Before  other  consonants  the  vowel  is  unchanged. 
Before  the  vowels  "^  is  changed  to  ^5  except  in  the  second 
praeterite,  and  before  ^5  when  it  becomes  ^.  The  second 
praeterite  has  two  forms. 

Pres.  inn  ft  (iTPpr:,  ^nrrfff)  ;  ist  prset.  ^nrm:  (^s»*rT^, 
^^nrm^,  ^nrm:,  'sriTPjif,  &c.) ;  zd  praet.  ^tfto^^^rtc  or  ^rmPTR 
(^rrwmtj:) ;  3d  praet.  w^TFrdrT  (^TiTTTTiT^) ;  1st  fut.  "srmftjn; 
2d  fut.  ^rmft^rfff ;  imp.  ttpt^  (^rnjirt  wnrj) ;  pot.  "STPpmr ; 

bened.    itptt§tf.       Pass.    ^THTcqw.       Cans.    ^TPKTftr.       Desid. 

"ftrrsf  ("ftrrf^r)  '  to  cleanse.' 

For  the  changes  of  the  palatal  final  before  consonants,  see 
rule  213,  c,  %, 

Pres.  fVfi;  (fVnnw,  f^if^),  f^  (f^fiTT^,  fVpr^) ;  ist  praet. 
^M^;  ad  praet.  f^PHJ  (f^Tf^Tf^) ;  3d  praet.  ^P^r^jg;  ist  fut. 
PhP^hi  ;  id  fut.  PhP^ mri ;  imp.  f^m  (f^,  fH^54) ;  pot,  fififhT ; 
bened.  PhPh»^«;  cond.  ^^fTf^^Trf.  Pass.  ^A^-  Caus.  "ftm- 
irfw  -W.      Desid.  PHPnPlsJMrf.     Freq.  ^^^^,  %PwW)Pri,  %f^f^. 

So  frrf^T  '  to  paint/  and  P^lPd  ^  to  tinkle.' 

^ftr^T  'to  be  poor.^ 

In  the  conjugational  tenses  ^fTT  is  changed  to  ^  before  a 
termination  beginning  with  a  consonant,  and  not  having  a 
mute  II.  It  is  rejected  in  all  tenses  before  a  vowel  termina- 
tion of  the  same  kind,  or  one  not  having  "q ;  also  before  the 
augment  ^,  and  before  xr  in  the  benedictive.  As  a  reduphcate 
root,  it  rejects  the  nasals  of  the  third  person  plural,  present 
tense,  &c.,  and  substitutes  ^  for  ^n^  in  the  first  praeterite 
(rule  213,  c).  In  the  second  and  third  praeterites  it  has  two 
forms. 

Pres.  t^Pi^^lPrt  (^ftftrtr:,  <^Pi.<[Pri) ;  ist  praet.  ^s<;P<.^^  (^l^frftrTftj 


SECOND  CONJUGATION.  201 

^6?^i:)  ;  2d  proet.  <^ri.^MchK  or  <r^ri.^  (^^fti^Tg^,  ^^f^O  * 
3d  praet.  ^n<^ri,<n>l^  (^^T^ftft^^  '^l^ftftTTO  ^^  '^^Tc^I^'^ff  ('H^fX^I- 
fwsi)  ;  ist  fut.  v^nLf^rii ;  2d  fut.  ^n^P^mfd  ;  imp.  ^ft^  (^ftftnrt, 
^it^,  ^^ft^rrfw,  ^ft^n^,  ^ftl^T^)  ;  pot.  ^ftf^nTTiT ;  bened.  <^r<4|lrl^; 
cond.  ^r^ftf5^.     Pass.  ^jSJ^.     Desid.  f^[^ftf5^  or  f^ft- 

Tr(^)  'to  cut' 

This  retains  its  final  unchanged  in  all  the  tenses  except  the 
second  praeterite. 

Pres.  ^rfcT;  ist  praet.  w^  (^^T^  or  ^^l) ;  2d  praet.  ^ 
(^:,  ^5:) ;  3d  praet.  ^^r^nfti^  (-ii^iMi,  w^:) ;  ist  fut.  ^T?n; 
2d  fut.  i5[TWrw ;  imp.  ^  (^Tf^) ;  pot.  ^Tqii^;  bened.  ^T^; 
cond.  '^l^T^qi^.  Pass.  ^T^.  Caus.  (^milfd.  Desid.  f^^rofiT. 
Freq.  r^l^niri,  ^ifw  or  ^f^. 

In  this  manner  a  number  of  other  verbs  in  WT,  belonging  to 
this  conjugation,  may  be  inflected  ;   as, 
^  to  go  badly,  to  fly.  tjt  to  go. 

in  to  preserve.  ^  I  to  give,  to  take. 

'm  to  eat.  HT  ) 

in  to  fill.  "m  to  blow. 

vrr  to  shine.  "'STT  to  cook  or  mature. 

JTT  to  measure.  WT  to  bathe. 

^PTT  is  conjugated  only  in  the  non-conjugational  tenses:  see 
^^.  TTT  takes  7^  in  the  causal,  xncJ^rfir.  WT  makes  the  vowel 
of  the  causal  optionally  short,  ^m^Prf  or  ^tRfifT. 

^  (^Nh?)  '  to  shine.' 

This  is  one  of  the  class  of  reduplicated  roots,  and  is  usually 
considered  peculiar  to  the  Vedas. 

Pres.  ^hft^;  ist  praet.  ^^RfNhf ;  2d  praet.  ^hm^;  3d  praet. 
^Tfw;  ist  fut.  ({IfMril;  2d  fut.  ^MVbi^  ;  imp.  ^hfhrf;  pot. 
^fhfhr ;  bened.  ^^^ ;  cond.  ^r^tfvxqir.     Pass.  f^>fhm. 

5^  '  to  milk.' 
For  the  changes  of  the  final  and  initial,  see  rule  213,  c,  8. 

D  d 


VERBS. 


Pres.  ^>fhT  (57>n,  5^,  >ft%,  ^:,  wjv,  ^:  52^,  ^i),  ^ 
(pT^,  P^,  v%,  yi^) ;  1st  praet.  wift^  (^'V) ;  2d  praet.  5^^^, 
5^ ;  3d  praet.  ^r^lT  (wj;^,  '^TV^^),  ^^W  (^^|TlTf,  ^^r^^Tjr, 

^Tj^^^:,  ^rg^i^,  ^jvfi^,  ^rvi^f^)  or  '^sjni  (^r?niT:^  ^ry«r) ; 

ist  fut.  ^Vvt;  iid  fut.  V^fTT  -^;  imp.  ^^,  ^Tvf;  pot.  ^^m^;, 
5^;  bened.  g^TTfT,  >ft^f^;  cond.  ^nft^l^ -IT.  Pass.  5^^.  Caus. 
^Tl^^rri  ;  3d  praet.  '^STU^.  Desid.  ^^^flf  -^.  Freq.  ^>5^, 
^flri^lPri  or  ^^^^fh|. 

f^,  *  to  anoint,'  is  analogously  conjugated. 

ft^  '  to  hate.' 

The  verb  is  regularly  inflected.  T^  is  optionally  substituted 
for  ^r^.  The  changes  of  the  final  are  either  those  of  Sandhi, 
or  of  the  declension  of  nouns  in  "^  (see  also  rule  ^^13,  c,  5). 

Pres.  %fw,  f^;  ist  praet.  ^^  (^rfk^,  ^3%^  or  ^fkg:^ 
^^5  ^f%^,  &c.)5  ^i%F  (wff ^Trrf) ;  2d  praet.  f^t^,  f^^ ; 
3d  praet.  ^^P^Hijri^  -w;  ist  fut.  ^¥1;  2d  fut.  Ja^jfrf  -^;  imp. 
^  (^^%?  i'^f^)^  fk^f  (%^^  %^)  j  pot.  fl^miT,  fg'^TlT ;  bened. 
ftr^TTfT?  r^Hp^  ;  cond.  ^H^^tf^  -TT.  Pass,  flrar^.  Caus.  ^^^. 
Desid.  r^r^vsjCri  -^.     Freq.  ^fk^^,  ^fk^Mir  or  ^f^. 

"^  ^  to  speak.' 

This  is  an  imperfect  verb,  admitting  of  the  conjugational 
tenses  only.  It  inserts  ^  before  the  consonantal  terminations 
rejecting  t^;  and  before  it  the  Guna  substitute  ^  becomes  ^r^. 
■^  is  substituted  for  the  final  before  other  vowel  terminations. 
In  the  present  tense  the  inflexions  of  ^srr^  in  the  three  num- 
bers of  the  third  person^  and  singular  and  dual  of  the  second, 
in  the  same  sense,  ^  he  speaks,'  &c.,  but  with  the  terminations 
of  the  second  praeterite,  are  considered  to  be  optionally  sub- 
stitutes for  those  of  ^.  For  the  non-conjugational  tenses, 
see  '^^. 

Pres.  rfcOfrf  (-^.j  "^^rPtT,  wsftf^,  -^t,  ^,  "3^T,  -f^:,  ^:)  or 
^n?  (^n^:,  ^sTTf:,  ^tt^,  ^tt^:),  ww;  ist  praet.  ^rar^,  ^r^; 
imp.  -^^  (iin,  1^,  ^,  -swrftrr),  fwf ;  pot.  f^Tfi;,  f^. 


SECOND   CONJUGATION.  203 

^  ('^)  ^  ^^  clean,'  ^  to  sweep/ 
The  vowel  takes  the  Vriddhi  change  before  the  terminations 
of  the  conjugational  tenses  beginning  with  consonants  having 
a  mute  t|[,  and  optionally  before  those  beginning  with  vowels 
not  having  such  letter.  It  is  so  changed  throughout  in  the 
non- conjugational  tenses.  The  final  »r  is  changed  to  "^  before 
a  termination  beginning  with  any  consonant  except  a  nasal, 
a  semivowel,  or  ^.  The  changes  to  which  such  final  "^  is 
subject  before  other  consonants,  or  to  which  it  subjects  them, 
are  those  of  Sandhi :   see  also  rule  ^213,  c,  5. 

Pres.  inft  (^:,  TT^f'tf  or  ij^lfiij  JTlf^,  HlPrA,  ^ift,  ^[t»t:)  ; 
ist  praet.  4IHI^  or  '^mrl  (^npf,  »il*J=HH  or  ^wr^'?r,  ^^mrf,  ^HI^H, 
^s^) ;  2d  praet.  ttrt^  (HHTf^  or  »WTt) ;  3d  praet.  '^nn^ffr^ 
(^Hif^Klj  ^imTf%:)  or  ^nHiHjTrf  ('HHili,  ^HivS:) ;  I  St  fut.  hiPShi 
pr  ^ntr;  3d  fut.  Hir^uifrf  or  HT^fw;  imp.  ht|  (^,  JpPj  or 
Hl^*^,  ^f^j  HI'S  I  fill) ;  pot.^3?rnT;  bened.  Jp^rnr ;  cond.  ^smrf^anT 
or  ^nm^l^.  Pass.  *jTMri.  Cans.  Hl'S^fri  ;  3d  praet.  ^inn^rT. 
Desid.    Phh ^^S^^ri    or   fipj^^.       Freq.    hOH:H4^,   HOm^fff   or 

Hfbnff. 

g^  to  join.'     ^ 

This  verb  takes  the  Vriddhi  substitute  before  a  consonantal 
termination  having  an  indicatory  t^;  and  "T^  before  one  begin- 
ning with  a  vowel.  It  inserts  the  augment  ^  (rule  191,  b), 
before  which  "g"  is  changed  to  ^,  and  that  becomes  ^r^, 

Pres.  "^fiT  (gw:;,  'pf^,  ^^,  '^tf^,  f^:,  -gn:) ;  ist  praet.  wi^ 
('^rgirf,  ^sr^:,  ^Tf^) ;  3d  praet.  "jTrr^  ("3?^*?  f'rfV^) ;  3d  praet. 
^RT^^;  istfut. -qi^iTT;  2d  fut.  iif^^ifTT  ;  imp.  ^  (^,  g^iT) ; 
pot.  "5^ni^;  bened.  ^U||f(^;  cond.  ^nrfWiT.  Pass.  ^Jnrff.  Caus. 
ill^^Pd.  Desid.  ^^JMPrf  or  ^JirfWcT.  Freq.  xfrj^TW,  ^fN^tf^  or 
*il*ri  Pn. 

So  "^  '  to  sneeze,'  ^  '  to  whet'  or  *  sharpen,'  w  *  to  praise,' 
nj  '  to  distil'  or  ^  drop  ;'  which  all  take  ^.  Other  verbs  in  "g" 
are  conjugated  in  the  same  manner,  except  that  they  do  not 
take  ^ ;  as,  ^  *  to  coo'  or  '  sound ;'  ist  fut.  "sptlTT,  2d  fut.  "SRhqfif, 
3d  praet.  'sr^T^;:   ^  'to  assail;'  rftiH,  ^frarfiT,  ^T^^:  ^  '  to 

D  d  2 


204  VERBS. 

bring  forth,'  ^  to  be  rich ;'   ^EftrTT,  ^FTt^fri,  HHrittflH  .     See  also  ^ 

and  ^. 

7^  ^  to  sound/ 

This  verb  optionally  prefixes  ^  to  any  termination  beginning 
with  a  consonant  in  the  conjugational  tenses.    It  also  takes  ^. 

Pres.  ^ufw  or  t^^  (^:  or  x^:,  ^f^  or  x:^ff^) ;  ist  praet. 
W&r^  or  WT^;  2d  praet.  ^^xrR  (^^^0  ;  3d  praet.  ^STCT^; 
ist  fut.  Tf^;  2d  fut.  Tf^Tirflf ;  imp.  ^oj  or  T^;  pot.  ^^m^ 
or  t^hmi;;  bened.  ■^tttit;  cond.  ^ni^pcimrf^.  Pass.  T^irff.  Cans, 
TT^7if?r.     Desid.  "^^ifWif.     Freq.  d^x(^,  ^dt^tfw,  tldftr. 

^  ('^f^  '  to  weep.' 

This  is  the  leading  root  of  the  class  ^r^iH^  (rule  213,  «?). 

Pres.  Cin^fri  (^1T:,  ^^^) ;  ist  praet.  ^rd^  or  saO<(lf^ 
('^^^f^rrf,  ^rr^^:  or  ^r&^:) ;  2d  praet.  ^d^  (ijClf^'^) ;  3d  praet. 
'^n^  (^^r^:)  or  ^^irt^  (-3Rtr<si) ;  ist  fut.  Or^Hl;  2d  fut. 
trf^wfcT ;  imp.  rrf^  (^ir^^)  5  pot.  ^?m^;  bened.  ^^TTiT;  cond. 
^fldf^^.  Pass.  '?5^.  Caus.  Clt^^fri  ;  3d  praet.  ^5r^^^5[T^. 
Pesid,  iN^r^nfri.     Freq.  0^^^,  d^^  or  dd%. 

f^  ^  to  lick.' 
See  rule  213,  c,  8.     Where  the  final  is  changed  to  ^,  and 
one  ^  has  been  rejected,  the  vowel,  if  not  changed  to  the  GuAa 
letter,  is  made  long. 

Pres.  :^f^  (c^:,  fc^^fHT,  "^f^,  c^:,  ifeftr,  ?^4},  fc5^:),  ^sfti" 

{fc^,  T^)',  ist  praet.  ^r^  (*Hc«5l<3l,  ^^5  '^cT^),  ^Tt:^ 
('HPc^^IhI,  ^rfcTl^) ;  2d  praet.  Pc^^^,  fcjfc^t ;  3d  praet.  ^rf^^J^, 
?s<ro5«jri  or  ^Tc^;  ist  fut.  1^^;  2d  fut.  "^^frT-^;  imp.  "^ 
(<5yH^),  Tto*  (fci5^)  5  pot.  fc^^lrl^,  fc^^lff;  bened.  "fisj^mr, 
fc^;^ ;  cond.  ^^T^  -W.  Pass,  fc^^,  Caus.  ^^i^fri.  Desid. 
rc^rt^Hjfri  -^.      Freq.  c^frt^^,  V^ft^^lPri  or  ^(Jftf. 

^T^  ^  to  speak.' 
The  final  becomes  oR  before  some  terminations  (rule  213,  c,  2). 
In  the  tenses  in  which  this  verb  is  substituted  for  j|^,  it  may 


SECOND  CONJUGATION.  205 

take  the  Xtmane-pada.  The  third  person  plural  of  the  present 
and  imperative  is  wanting.  In  the  third  praeterite,  "g",  con- 
vertible to  ^,  is  substituted  for  the  radical  vowel.  The  tense 
is  formed  with  the  affixes  of  the  first  praeterite,  with  ^  pre- 
fixed (rule  190,  a). 

Pres.  "^fii  (li^,  ^ft^,  ^fEJT,  ^^^,  W^Rl) ;     ist  praet.    ^T^, 

^r^n  (^r^w^  '^r^^'?^,  ^r^,  ^r^)  ;    3d  praet.  <m{M  ("3?^, 

^1^),  "31%;  3d  praet.  >H^t^  (^T^qirf),  ^T^IT  (^nJl^Vji)  ;  ist 
fut.  ^qw ;  2d  fut.  "^^rfw  -^ ;  imp.  "^  (^ffhy)  ;  pot.  ^rnm^; 
bened.  T^qTiT,  MVjflg  ;  cond.  ^Hcjyt^^rf  -W.  Pass.  ^x^jh.  Cans. 
^m^Pri.     Desid.  r^cj«i|rri  -^.     Freq.  "^T^^,  m^f^. 

^  '  to  subdue.' 

The  final  is  changed  to  i^  (rule  21^,  c,  4),  and  "^  to  "^, 
where  the  terminations  have  no  mute  "il,  or  where  ^  is  not 
inserted. 

Pres.  "^  (t^,,  T^rf^,  ^ftl^  ^f^) ;  ist  praet.  "^^  {^^,  W^P^, 
"^f^,  mi,  ^m^) ;  2d  praet.  -gm^F  ("^i^O ;  3d  praet.  ^H^i^flrf 
or  ^R^;  ist  fut.  c^r^irii;  2d  fut.  ^r^imrri  ;  imp.  "^  (^ffv, 
^^^);  pot.  T^'TTl^;  bened.  ^^nirt^;  cond.  ^irf^nm^.  Pass. 
Tfq^.    Caus.  m^l^Pri.     Desid.  f^-^ri^frr.     Freq.  TR^. 

f^  ^  to  know.* 

This  verb  is  anomalous  in  some  respects.  In  the  present 
tense  it  admits  the  terminations  of  the  second  praeterite,  with- 
out the  reduplication,  as  well  as  those  of  the  present.  It 
optionally  forms  the  second  praeterite  with  the  auxiliary  verbs 
(rule  189,  c),  and  the  imperative  with  '^. 

Pres.  Tfw  or  ^  (f^^  or  f^^:,  f^^f^if  or  f^:,  ^fw  or  ^, 
■f^Tr^:  'or  r^lf^^:,  fVr^  or  f^,  Tf^  or  ^,  frsi  or  f^,  f^:  or 
f^;  ist  praet.  Wf^  (^^T^,  ^rf^:,  ^I^  or  ^:) ;  2d  praet. 
f^  (fqrf^^.),  r<4<^NchR,  f^^TTTHT,  r^^iy^;  3d  praet.  ^^{iAj 
ist  fut.  ^P^ril;  2d  fut.  Tf^xqfifT;  imp.  ^  or  f^^Tffd^;  pot. 
f^aifl^;  bened.  f^^iTTT  (fwren) ;  cond.  Wf^mc^.  Pass.  fWfl". 
Caus.  ^k^^.     Desid.  IMVf^^.    Freq.  ^fWff,  ^f^^lPrt,  ^wfw. 


206  VERBS. 

With  ^5W  prefixed^  it  takes  the  ^tmane-pada,  as  ?ff%% ;  in 
the  third  person  plural  of  the  present,  first  praeterite,  and 
imperative,  t  may  be  added  to  the  final,  as  M?^r(k  or  ^T?^,  &c. 

^  '  to  go/  &c. 

According  to  some  authorities,  ^  is  not  substituted  for  the 
radical  before  a  vowel ;  the  change  is  that  of  Sandhi  only, 

Pres.  ^ff  (^hn,  Pm^r-d)  ;  ist  praet.  ^i^  (^^i^  or  wsi^) ; 
2d  praet.  f^^m  {f^^'^^:  or  f^^:) ;  3d  praet.  "^rl^;  ist  fut. 
^TTT;  2d  fut.  ^mfrf;  imp.  ^;  pot.  and  bened.  "^fhrn^;  cond. 
^nn^.     Pass.  "^fhr^.      Cans.  m^ilPri^     Desid.  "MWiT.     Freq. 

^^hiff,  ^^xftfff  or  Wir. 

The  verb  has  many  meanings  ;  as,  '  to  throw,'  *  to  eat,'  *  to 
conceive,'  &c.  In  the  latter,  the  causal,  '  to  impregnate,'  is 
m^^jPri  or  mxnrfff. 

^^,  a  synonymous  verb,  is  similarly  inflected ;  but  in  the 
Atmane-pada :   Pres.  ^^  (^^TT^,  ^^),  &c. 

^rw  {W^)  '  ^o  bless,'  ^  to  teach.' 
The  vowel  is  changed  to  ^  before  terminations  beginning 
with  consonants  which  have  not  a  mute  xr  in  the  Parasmai- 
pada.     For  the  change  of  the  final,  see  rule  213,  c,  6. 

Pres.  -^nf^  (f^:^   ^imPri),  l^TT^  (w^)  ;    ist  praet.  '^T^m^ 

(^^TFT,  ^sT^rng:^  ^tw»  ^^  ^^rr?^)?  '^^hh  ;  2d  praet.  ^rw^?  ^njn^ ; 
3d  praet.  ^rf^T^,  ^H^nPflK  ;  ist  fut.  "^TTftnfT ;  2d  fut.  ^(iP^uiPd  -^ ; 
imp.  ^^  (^^nfv),  ^rrar;  pot.  P^iuiir^,  ^jnftir;  bened.  "ftfr^rn^, 
^irftNb? ;  cond.  ^sr5rrft?'sn^  -W.  Pass.  f^xq^.  Cans.  5ii^4Pri. 
Desid.  P^l^nP^MPri.      Freq.  $P5(U|^,  ^il^ll^Prl  or  ^TT^T%. 

In  the  sense  of  ^  blessing,'  ^t  is  usually  prefixed,  ^rT5rn&  or 
"^rf^;  for,  according  to  some,  the  vowel  is  altered  in  the 
Atmane-pada  also. 

^  (l^ft^)  '  to  sleep.' 

This  verb  changes  the  final  to  the  GuAa  element  1^  in  all 
the  tenses  except  the  second  praeterite.  ^  before  a  vowel 
becomes  ^,  except  in  the  plurals  of  the  present,  first  prae- 


SECOND  CONJUGATION.  207 

terite,  and  imperative,  where  tc  is  inserted  before  the  termina- 
tions from  which  the  nasal  has  been  rejected.  The  verb 
inserts  ^  (rule  191,  I), 

Pres.  %^  (^TW,  ^rS",  %^,  %^,  "51^,  ^N%,  -^tH^) ;  ist  prset. 
W«T  (>H^IU) ;  2d  praet.  1%^  ( f^r^Mlri,  f^lf^) ;  3d  praet. 
^r^rf^;  ist  fut.  "^rftrrrr;  2d  fut.  ^iPmuih  ;  imp.  -^hn  (^nmrf, 
^trirf) ;  pot.  ^fnftw ;  bened.  ^|fMMl«.  Pass.  ^nzrw.  Cans.  ^rrmrfTT. 
Desid.  r^l^lPMK^.     Freq.  ^(I^I^H,  jl^|^4irrt,  W^^- 

i^Rf  ^  to  breathe.' 

This  belongs  to  the  class  ^^Tfc^  (rule  213,  d :  see  also  rule 
213,  c,  6). 

Pres.  -sgiTffffT;  ist  praet.  ^ngifh^  or  ^r^EWi^;  2d  praet.  ^IHII^; 
3d  praet.  "^nERrhr;  ist  fut.  igftrwr ;  2d  fut.  Tgrffimfrf  ;  imp.  ^yf-H^; 
pot.  and  bened.  *y^lfl^;  cond.  ^rsgf^rBr?^.     Pass.  «y^^* 

"fs  (^)  ^  ^^  bring  forth/  as  a  child. 

The  verb  optionally  admits  ^. 

Pres.  ^  (^m^,  ^^,  ^) ;  ist  praet.  ^l^;  2d  praet.  ^f^; 
3d  praet.  ^sraf%F  or  wtF;  ist  fut.  ^irwi,  ^PmhI;  2d  fut.  ^fNr^, 
flP^mri  ;  imp.  ^TTT  (^;^,  i^,  ^T^T^) ;  pot.  "5^ ;  bened.  ^ft^, 
'Rn^tfls  ;  cond.  ^raVsTff,  ^rafTBTrT.  Pass.  ^5^;  3d  praet.  ^wrf^. 
Cans.  ^NAifri ;  3d  praet.  ^raH^.  Desid.  ^^tI".  Freq.  ^^^^H, 
TETN'^ftfw  or  ^ETt^W. 

f  (  J5t)  '  to  praise.' 

This  optionally  admits  ^  before  the  consonants  of  the  con- 
jugational  tenses,  except  xr. 

Pres.  ^^fiT  or  ^^ItfiT,  ^w  or  T^^  ;    ist  praet.  ^i^^  or 

^T^cT^,  WTT  or  ^ifrjcdd  ;  2d  praet.  -g^i^  (^^O'  "51^  5  3d  praet. 

'iiijHNl^,  W^;    ist  fut.  ^FTtcn;    2d  fut.  ^Ww  -w ;    imp.  ^fft^ 

or  w^j,  ^^,  ^^^Idf ;  pot.  ^^irf^,  ^tJmIh  ;  bened.  ^JJ^TTT ,  iidl^Os ; 

cond.  ^Ji^yTimw  -w.    Pass.  i^ir^.    Cans.  ^N^fci.    Desid.  ggnfif  -7^. 

Freq.  Hl^J^rl,  iftFlfrT. 

"E^  ^  to  sleep.' 

A  verb  of  the  class  "^^rf^  (rule  213,  d).     The  vowel  is  sub- 


208  VERBS. 

stituted  for  the  semivowel  in  the  second  praeterite,  in  the 
reduplicate  syllable,  and  before  the  vowel  terminations  in  the 
radical  syllable  also.  Before  the  ^  of  the  benedictive  and 
passive  and  frequentative  the  same  change  occurs,  and  in  the 
third  praeterite  of  the  causal. 

Pres.  ^f^rfw;  ist  praet.  ^K^Mij^  or  ^T^Tfti^;  ad  praet.  ^mim 
(iT^*'  "SfSO  5  3d  praet.  ^^T^T^  (^T^m,  >i<^l«^:);  ist  fut. 
^ttt;  2d  fut.  ^x;^frr;  imp.  ^fxrj;  pot.  ^tuTc^;  bened.  ^jom^; 
cond.  '^T^rt^.  Pass.  ^rq^.  Cans,  ^m^fri;  3d  praet.  SH^gqi^. 
Desid.  ^gmPd.     Freq.  ^^^^  ^I^Mlfff  or  ^if^pH. 

^^tokiU.' 

The  final  is  rejected  before  the  terminations  of  the  conjuga- 
tional  tenses  beginning  with  any  consonant  except  a  nasal  or 
a  semivowel,  and  not  having  an  indicatory  i^.  In  the  same 
tenses  and  second  praeterite  tj"?^  is  substituted  for  the  root, 
which  becomes  ir  before  a  vowel  termination,  not  having  a 
mute  tj.  "3T  is  substituted  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the 
imperative.  In  the  benedictive  and  third  praeterite  ^rv  is  sub- 
stituted ;  Tr«^  is  substituted  in  some  tenses  of  the  passive,  in 
the  desiderative  and  frequentative  modes  ;  and  xm^  is  substi- 
tuted in  the  causal,  ^tt  takes  ^  in  the  second  future  and 
conditional  in  the  active  voice :  "^PT  admits  the  augment  in 
both  futures,  conditional,  and  third  praeterite  of  the  passive. 
"ST^  also  takes  the  augment  i[. 

Pres.  "^friT  (^TH,  irfnT,  ^1^,  "^f^)  ;    ist  praet.  ^r^"^  (^T^, 

^U^)  ^^^^9  -^i^HH) ;  2d  praet.  trtr  (»rjrg:,  ^:,  «nrf^  or 
ififT^) ;  3d  praet.  ^?^>ft7^  (^Rfwf) ;  ist  fut.  "fnTT ;  ad  fut. 
^Ph ttlPri;  imp.  -^  (^WT^,  IT^,  ^,  f^JTrfrf)  ;  pot.  ^^am^;  bened. 
TqTflT?^;  cond.  ^T^irr^.  Pass.  pres.  "^^ ;  3d  praet.  ^?^f>l  or 
vHmPrf  (^sr^fwTirf  or  ^^rnrf  or  ^yiPHmdi) ;   ist  fut.  f^ifT  or 

ViPhKI;  2,d  fut.  ^P^^Uri  or  MlPHmfl  ;  bened.  ^fv^  or  ^iPhmIb. 
Caus.  xmnrfir;  3d  praet.  ^nfhnn^.  Desid.  PiiHi»<HPrt.  Freq. 
'^r^^  or  »nfh|7^,  ^*M»{iPri  or  inrf^  or  iTf^ftfw,  »i^PM  or  W^- 


THIRD  CONJUGATION.  209 

Third  Conjugation, 

214.  The  characteristic  pecuharity  of  this  conjugation  is 
the  redupUcation  of  the  radical  syllable  before  the  terminations 
of  the  conjugational  tenses. 

a.  The  reduplication  takes  place  according  to  general  rules, 
and  whatever  other  change  of  the  base  occurs  is  special, 
except  the  substitution  of  a  Guna  for  a  radical  vowel  before 
those  terminations  which  reject  t^,  and  the  modifications  of  the 
final  which  the  rules  of  Sandhi  require.  A  final  vowel  is 
changed  to  the  GuAa  letter  before  ^  in  the  first  praeterite. 

b.  The  terminations  are  also  unaltered,  except  those  of  the 
third  person  plural,  present  and  imperative,  which  reject  tf; 
and  the  third  person  plural  of  the  first  praeterite,  which  sub- 
stitutes "3^  for  ^n^.  The  compound  form  of  the  second 
praeterite  is  optionally  used  in  four  verbs,  Wt,  "^,  >T,  and  n, 

c.  The  model  of  the  class  is  ^  '  to  sacrifice  ;^  the  only 
pecuharities  in  the  inflexion  of  which  are  the  optional  change 
of  the  vowel  to  the  semivowel  before  the  terminations  of  the 
first  person  dual  and  plural  of  the  present  tense,  and  the  substi- 
tution of  fv  for  f^  in  the  imperative.  It  is  thus  inflected  in 
the  conjugational  tenses  i 

Present,  '  I  sacrifice,'  &c. 
1^^  ^1^:  or  ^.       gfR:  or  ^: 

First  praeterite,  '  I  sacrificed,'  &c. 
^rff#  ^ifp  ^iffH 

^fTf^:  ^STffK  ^T^fW 

^f^^  ^^11^*  ^'■pi: 

Imperative,  ^  May  I  sacrifice,'  &c. 

l^^rf^  %^^\"^  p'^IH 

f^  w^  ^^ 

E  e 


210  VERBS. 

Potential,  ^  I  may  sacrifice,'  &c. 
W^  If^^  W^ 

ffm:  ^g^irt  W^ 

In  the  non-conjugational  tenses  the  reduplication  does  not 
take  place^  except  where  required  by  general  rules. 

2d  praet.  "g^T^  or  ^^^^TT^RTrc;  ist  fut.  "fhrr;  2d  fut.  "j^VBrfrr; 
bened.  f^Tr^;  cond.  ^r^htn^.  Pass.  |T(^.  Caus.  ^T^irfw.  Desid. 
fg^Mfff.     Freq.  idd^^  ^fMHw,  ifl^tfir. 

^  '  to  go.' 

^T^  is  substituted  for  the  root  in  the  reduplication.  The 
verb  rarely  occurs  in  this  form,  except  in  the  Vedas.  In  the 
first  and  second  persons  of  the  first  praeterite,  the  final  of  the 
conjunct  having  been  rejected,  the  ^  of  the  Guiia  substitute 
for  ^  or  wr  becomes  Visarga. 

Pres.  ^irft  i'^:,  '^^)y   ist  praet.  ^tt:  ;   imp.  ^^;  pot. 

For  the  other  forms,  see  "^,  p.  157. 

tR  '  to  produce.' 
Before   terminations   beginning  with  consonants,  not   con- 
taining an  indicatory  x^,  the  vowel  of  this  verb  is  made  long ; 
and  before  such   a  termination  beginning  with  a  vowel,  the 
medial  radical  ^  is  rejected :  see  "iR,  fourth  conjugation. 

Pres.  »nrf%  (^nnw:,  ^r^frr) ;   ist  praet.  ^i^ttw  (^nnrnff, 

^nr?:) ;    2d   praet.    ^HTHT  ('Tfr^:,    »T?:) ;    3d  praet.   ^l*rr?ftTT   or 

^nr^;  ist  fut.  ^rf^Trrr;  2d  fut.  ^rf^rarfiT;  imp.  ^nrf  (^T»TTwf, 

^rg^ )  ;  pot.  ^H**j|rl^ ;  bened.  "sr^Tit;;  cond.  ^n^PHmH^-  Pass, 
irir^.  Caus.  ^iH^PiT.  Desid.  nH^rHMPri.  Freq.  ifiRT^  or 
^Ml^^,  ^'HHlTri  or  ifwfnr  or  HTHHlPri,  ^TTWfnT. 

"ftlirar  (  PiUPd^)  '  to  cleanse.' 
This  takes  both  Padas,  and  in  the  reduplication  changes  ^ 
to  ^ ;  see  "ftjlf^T,  second  conjugation,  p.  200. 


THIRD   CONJUGATION.  211 

Pres.  ^fiJ  (^f^ns:,  ^fn^rd),  ^^;  1st  praet.  ^31%%^,  ^MHfw^; 
2d  proet.  fiT%iT  (f^^^T^.)^  f^f^% ;  3d  praet.  '^T^tlf;  or  SHf^^tt^, 
^5f%F;  ist  fut.  ■^;  2d  fut.  -^^ifTT  -^ ;  imp.  "^^^  hTh^*; 
pot.  ^fiTWTrT,  HpH^iOri  ;  bened.  fnii^irf^,  f^T^;  cond.  ^ST^W  -if. 
Pass.  Ppiiif^.  Caus.  ^irrfir.  Desid.  fHH^ij^H.  Freq.  -^5^^, 
^^nftflT  or  ^^. 

^  (^)  '  to  give. 

This  drops  "^  before  all  the  terminations  of  the  conjuga- 
tional  tenses  not  containing  an  indicatory  tr,  making  conse- 
quently ^.  In  the  second  person  singular  of  the  imperative 
it  substitutes  ^  for  the  reduplicated  verb.  It  takes  both 
Padas.  It  is  unnecessary  to  give  more  than  the  conjugational 
tenses,  as  the  rest  are  the  same  as  those  of  ^,  first  conjuga- 
tion, p.  169. 

Pres.  ^tTtt  (^w:,  ^^),  ^;  ist  praet.  ^T^^  (^r^,  ^sr^:), 
'S?^ ;  imp.  ^^  (^,  ^^,  ^),  ^,  (^m?  ^) ;  pot.  ^mJ{, 

VT  (vit()  '  to  have'  or  '  hold.' 

This  is  inflected  like  the  preceding,  but  the  initial  is 
unchanged  before  a  termination  beginning  with  any  consonant 
except  a  nasal,  a  semivowel,  or  ^,  which  does  not  contain  an 
indicatory  t|  .  The  other  tenses  are  analogous  to  those  of  ^, 
first  conjugation. 

Pres.  ^vrfcT  (VW:,  ^:,  ^t»T:),  vi  (^VTff)  ;    ist  praet.  '^^VTT^, 

^mw;    2d  praet.  ^,  ^^;    3d  praet.  ^nm^,  ^fviT  or  ^ftmw; 

1st  fut.  vnn ;  2d  fut.  xrmf^  -w ;  imp.  ^vt^  (^)>  vwf  (v?^) ; 

pot.  ^TflTrl[,  ^>fhT ;  bened.  ^^TTrT,  vnftF ;  cond.  ^^nnw»^  -W.    Pass. 

vNw.      Caus.  \(iMi|frf.     Desid.  fViT^  -7^.     Freq.  ^^ftr^,  ^t^ 

or  ^Tvrftr. 

iTO  ^  to  shine.' 

Before  a  termination  beginning  with  a  vowel,  not  containing 
a  mute  t^,  this  verb,  like  »nT,  rejects  the  medial  vowel :  >t  being 
then  conjoined  with  '^,  necessarily  becomes  i^  (rule  7,  d :  see 
also,  for  the  changes  of  ^,  rule  213,  c,  6). 

Pres.  ^Hfe  (^>?w:,  W^^) ;   ist  praet.  ^5Rh:  (^RH^,  isc^^,, 

E  e  2 


212  VERBS. 

^rh:)  ;  2d  praet.  ^HTO ;  3d  proet.  "^i^TRftiT;  ist  fut.  HP^Hl  ; 
2d  fut.  >TftrBrfff ;  imp.  ^H^  (^H^,  ^^>  '^^^}  ^>TOTf^)  ;  pot. 
•gH^TTT;  bened.  H^TIT;  cond.  ^rHP^uirt^.  Pass.  H^H.  Caus. 
Hnnrfw.      Desid.  f^HTftlwfiT.      Freq.  ^TH^,  ^m^ftfrT,  ^THf%. 

>ft  '  to  fear.' 

This  may  make  the  vowel  before  a  termination  beginning 
with  a  consonant,  and  not  containing  an  indicatory  T3[,  short. 
It  optionally  takes  the  compound  form  of  the  second  praeterite 
(rule  214,  b), 

Pres.  f%>Tfff  (f^vftw:  or  fM^Tfr:,  fVwrfff) ;  ist  praet.  ^Wi^ 
(^rN^fhrf  or  ^f^i^f,  ^f%wg:);  2d  prset.  fw^  (^^^0  or 
f^Hxn^^R;  3d  praet.  ^SR^W  ("^21,  ^5:)  ;  ist  fut.  ^; 
2d  fut.  >hqfw ;  imp.  f^[>^  (f^^ftlff  or  fWriff)  ;  pot.  f^^fNTiT, 
r^fH^ITT^;  bened.  >fhnr^;  cond.  ^whtcT.  Pass,  vfhrw.  Caus. 
inTnrfw,  vtrw^,  mxR^  or  >f^^ii^.  Desid.  f^Mt^.  Freq.  "^Hhnr, 
"qH^ftftr  or  "^^fiT, 

>T  ( ^*^)  ^  to  nourish'  or  ^  support.' 
Pres.  N^rft  (f%>f?r:,  f%>jf?r) ;    ist  praet.  ^rfw.   (^rf^^firf, 

^srf^iT^.) ;    imp.  f^H# ;   pot.  f%>prr»^. 

The  other  tenses  are  the  same  as  those  of  >J  of  the  first 

conjugation,  p.  174. 

TT  ('TT^)  '  to  measure.' 

This  verb,  ^  *  to  go,'  and  ^  ^  to  abandon/  drop  their  final 
vowel  before  a  termination  beginning  with  a  vowel,  and  not 
containing  an  indicatory  iqr :  before  such  a  termination  begin- 
ning with  a  consonant,  they  change  it  to  ^.  The  vowel  of 
reduplication  is  ^. 

Pres.  f^jffk  (f^mri,  fR^wk) ;  ist  praet.  ^^nfftir  (^srfimTwf,  ^rfH^nr) ; 
2d  praet.  ^k ;  3d  praet.  'STHTO";  ist  fut.  HTfTT;  2d  fut.  i^T^iR ; 
imp.  fJTJfhrf ;  pot.  fR^TT ;  bened.  JTRftF ;  cond.  ^Himw.  Pass. 
iftTck.  Caus.  mxnrfH  -W ;  3d  praet.  ^nfftiT^  -TT.  Desid.  "ftrwfrT  -TT. 
Freq.  ^iftiTff,  HTHlfri  or  HT^. 


THIRD  CONJUGATION.  213 

f^^  (f^PH^)  ^  to  discriminate.' 

The  verb,  like  fJUlif,  changes  ^  to  ;j  in  the  reduplicate 
syllable.  For  the  effect  of  the  Anubandha,  see  p.  io6 ;  and 
for  the  changes  of  the  final,  rule  213,  c,  2,, 

Pres.  ^^^  (%fTi5:,  ^f^irfw,  W^,  %^f^,  $f^^,  ^f^^:) ; 
ist  praet.  ^i^^  (^^fcl^l,  wf%^»,  ^1%^^)  ;  2d  praet.  f^»T ; 
3d  praet.  '^r^^  (^^,  '^tt^.),  ^rf^ini;;  ist  fut.  t^;  2d  fut. 
^^rfir;  imp.  ^^^  (^^frv,  %f^lTTf^);  pot.  ^f^l^TTl^;  bened. 
f«i5^lfl^;  cond.  ^sr^^i^.  Pass,  f^a^rf.  Cans.  ^^nrfrT.  Desid. 
Irf^f^.     Freq.  %f^5^^,  %^f^. 

fT^  ^  to  surround.^ 

Pres.  ^Tf¥^  ^f^;   ist  praet.  xH^^d,  ^f^¥;   2d  praet.  f%^, 

f^f^;  3d  praet.  VH^«|lft^,  ^^;  ist  fut.  w^ ;  2d  fut.  ^^^rfw-^; 

imp.  %^,  %iwf ;  pot.  %fwn^,  %f^^ ;  bened.  f^imiri,  PciHfly  ; 

cond.  "ei^vt^fi;  -w.     Pass.  f^^.    Caus.  ^^nfff.    Desid.  r^r^HjPri. 

Freq.  ^fW^,  ^rfe. 

F  *  to  go.' 

Pres.  1wr#;   ist  praet.  ^srftw:;   2d  praet.  ^nnx;   3d  praet. 

^ii^nfff^  or  ^^TOtTi;;  ist  fut.  ^rtr;  2d  fut.  -^rlrsrlTr;  imp.  "ftmf ; 

pot.  "ftmirn^;    bened.   "ftnrrJ^;    cond.   ^raft^ir.      Pass.  "ftR^. 

Caus.  Wirfw.     Desid.  "ftrettfiT.     Freq.  wNw,  ^itft. 

IT  (^)  '  to  go.' 

Sec  *rr  above. 

Pres.  f»T^^  ;  ist  praet.  ^Jrftr^;  2d  praet.  if^;  3d  praet. 
^^TOT;  ist  fut.  i^TTn;  2d  fut.  -fT^ ;  imp.  liT^hrf ;  pot.  "ftf^; 
bened.  ^ifily  ;  cond.  ^n^l^ri.  Pass.  "^rtiw.  Caus.  ^in^rrf. 
Desid.  fiT^T^.     Freq.  ^HTT^^  ^i^lfrt  or  ^ilfrf. 

^  {^PO  ^  ^o  abandon.' 
The  Anubandha  c^  is  to  distinguish  this  root  from  the 
preceding.  The  redupHcate  is  regular  in  other  respects.  The 
inflexion  is  analogous  to  that  of  in.  In  the  second  person 
singular  of  the  imperative,  iff^  or  ^"ft  is  optionally  substituted 
for  the  root :  ^sn  is  dropped  before  the  tt  of  the  potential. 


214  VERBS. 

Pres.  ^^iPri  (iT^:,  ^T^) ;  ist  praet.  '^TJT^Tff;  2d  praet.  »T^; 
3d  praet.  ^T^TH^;  ist  fut.  "^TTTT;  2d  fut.  "^T^fw;  imp.  »T^ 
(wf^,  ^^in$  or  ^r^rf^) ;  pot.  W^mr;  bened.  ^^TTr^;  cond. 
^r^T^lT .  Pass.  "^w.  Caus.  ^Ttnrfw ;  3d  praet.  ^nfr^trr^.  Desid. 
rH^r^Pri.      Freq.  %^^,  ^fw  or  WTFrfrT. 

"^  '  to  be  ashamed.' 
Pres.  fti^fw  (f^r^:,  f^n^MPd) ;  ist  praet.  ^rftf^Tf ;  2d  praet. 
ifnTO  or  ^hrn^^FR;  3d  pra^t.  'Sil^i^;  ist  fut.  jm;  2d  fut. 
^mPri  ;  imp.  fif^ ;  pot.  PH^l^lr^^;  bened.  ihmr ;  cond.  ^3^1^. 
Pass,  fhrff.  Caus.  ^q^Pri.  Desid.  Pdi^MPri.  Freq.  ^^hnr, 
^^rftfw  or  W^. 

Fourth  Conjugation, 

215.  The  syllable  %  technically  termed  ^'tT'T,  is  interposed 
between  the  inflective  base  and  inflectional  terminations  of  the 
conjugational  tenses. 

a.  The  terminations  of  the  conjugational  tenses  are  the  same 
in  this  as  in  the  first  conjugation  (rules  170,  186,  &c). 

b.  Before  %  as  has  already  been  seen  in  the  preceding  con- 
jugation, a  radical  vowel  is  not  capable  of  a  Guna  substitute, 
and  a  consonant  is  unchanged. 

c.  The  terminations  of  the  first  praeterite  are  substituted 
for  those  of  the  third  in  the  Parasmai-pada,  and  sometimes  in 
the  j^tmane-pada,  after  verbs  belonging  to  the  class  gmP^  or 
g^,  &c. ;  comprehending  nearly  a  third  of  the  whole  con- 
jugation. 

d.  A  final  "^  is  changed  to  ^,  and  a  final  wt  is  rejected, 
before  ^.     "^  is  changed  to  Wl  before  other  terminations. 

e.  The  class  of  roots  called  ^pnrrf^  or  jv^y  Sec. — all  of  which, 
except  »T^  ^  to  be  glad^  or  '  intoxicated,'  end  with  it — make  a 
medial  w  long ;  and  roots  which  end  with  ^  or  ^  usually 
prolong  a  medial  ^,  "3",  ^,  0?. 

/.  Any  other  changes  are  special.  The  verbs  of  this  class 
are  somewhat  numerous:   most  of  them  are  to  be  found  in 


FOURTH   CONJUGATION.  215 

other  conjugations,  sometimes  in  the  same,  sometimes  in  dif- 
ferent acceptations,  when  the  non-conjugational  tenses  often 
adopt  different  modes  of  inflexion. 

g.  The  model  of  the  class  is  f^^  ("f^f )  ^  to  play,'  *  to  shine,^ 
&c.,  which  by  the  clause  e,  above,  becomes  ^"^  in  the  conju- 
gational  tenses. 

Present  tense,  *  I  play,'  &c. 

^Nrf^  ^r^:  ^Nm: 

^Nrftr  ?fNr^:  t{l«Mvi 

^Nifw  ^[Hir:  ^Nd^ 

First  prceterite,  '  I  played/  &c. 
^^^\  ^H<1<^N  ^Ht^lcqm 

^^:  ^r^Nnf  ^"Ntt 

'iJ({]«Mff^  ^({l«Mdi  -^cflcqi^ 

Imperative,  ^  May  I  play,^  &c. 
^^Tftf  ^I^N  ^Ntr 

^Ng  ^h^  ^t^ 

Potential,  ^  I  may  play,'  &c. 
ffi'^M  ?{)«*i'4  ^^T 

^t^  r{)«Mn  <{l«Mfi 

^^  ^t^irf  c(t^: 

There  are  no  peculiarities  in  the  non-conjugational  tenses. 
In  the  desiderative  there  are  three  forms  (rule  203,  /) :  in  the 
frequentative,  rejecting  it,  the  final  is  changed  to  "g*. 

^dpraet.  f^',  3d  praet.  ^^  (^51^^,  ^^f%^:) ;  ist  fut. 
^f^in ;  2d  fut.  ^^^Tf ;  bened.  ^ft^m^;  cond.  ^fTCTiir .  Pass. 
^N^.  Caus.  ^TirflT.  Desid.  f^f^i^-^,  f^^r^MPrf  or  f^^MPri  or 
j^^fw.     Freq.  ^^^(N^,  ^^^Htt  or  ^^ftfir. 

^Pff  (^)  '  to  throw.' 
This  is  a  verb  of  the  class  ymH^  (rule  213,  c),  and  subjoins 
■^  to  the  final  in  the  third  praeterite. 


216  VERBS. 

Pres.  iH^fri;  ist  praet.  ^siT^"?|;;  2d  praet.  ^rm;  3d  praet. 
^TTWi^  (^snWrTf^  ^STT^) ;  ist  fut.  ^fHTH  ;  2d  fut.  ^^^frT ;  imp. 
^T^ ;  pot.  '^TWri;;  bened.  'sr^TT!;;  cond.  -^rrftrqiT^.  Pass.  ^^r^. 
Caus.  ^m^Pri*    Desid.  ^^rftmfw. 

t '  to  go.' 

Pres.  "|tr  ;  ist  praet.  ^iTr^;;  2d  praet.  ^aUN^i;  3d  praet.  ^; 
ist  fut.  inrr;  2d  fut.  vy^;  imp.  ^wf;  pot.  fi^;  bened. 
^^ ;  cond.  ^"enr.     Pass.  ^im. 

For  the  derivative  forms,  see  ^,  second  conjugation. 

^^  ^  to  increase.' 
Pres.  ^uifff ;   ist  praet.  '^TT^T^ ;   2d  praet.  ^r^rt ;  3d  praet. 
^rrtlT;    ist  fut.  ^f^;    2d  fut.  ^srf^^rfiT ;    imp.   -=^14^  ;    pot. 
■^ulff^;    bened.  "^"um^;    cond.  ^^rrf^^TT.     Pass.  "^wid.     Caus. 
^fxrfir.     Desid.  ^rff fwfir  or  ^?#fir. 


'  to  throw'  or  '  send.' 
Pres.  f^tqfw;    ist  praet.  ^T^pan^;   2d  praet.  P^^q;  3d  praet. 
^i^Hfld;  ist  fut.  "^rn;  2d  fut.  %^^qfff;  imp.  fw^;  pot.  f^^; 
bened.   fBjmr^^;    cond.  ^x^.    Pass,  ft^^q^.     Caus.  "^TrfrT. 
Desid.  P^rajt^rri.     Freq.  ^i8^,  ^^fW. 

»nT  (ynf^)  '  to  be  born.' 

This  verb  is  changed  to  »n  before  the  conjugational  tenses. 

Pres.  ^mjt;  ist  praet.  ^nrPTcT;  2d  praet.  tT§;  3d  praet.  ^»iPH»; 
ist  fut.  »fPffriT ;  2d  fut.  ^Pnm^  ;  imp.  wmn ;  pot.  »n^;  bened. 
^rf'T^;  cond.  ^nfffftqir. 

For  the  rest,  see  »R^  third  conjugation. 

m  (ot)  ^  to  grow  old.' 

See  rule  215,  d.  It  optionally  substitutes  ^  for  the  redu- 
plication of  the  second  praeterite ;  takes  the  terminations  of 
the  first  praeterite  for  those  of  the  third ;  and  elongates  the 
augment  ^  in  the  futures  and  conditional. 

Pres.   ^fhtfif;    ist  praet.  ^snft^lT;    2d  praet.  if^TR  ('Hrrg:, 

^Ijjivt,  »nr^,  ^^);  3d  praet.  ^»in!)i^5  ^nro^;   ist  fut.  wftin, 


FOURTH  CONJUGATION.  217 

^T^;  2d  fut.  ^fft^rfw,  ^Ottirri;  imp.  "iftit^;  pot.  ilWw;  bened. 
»fh:§n^;  cond.  ^Hfft^TT,  ^HtQ^.  Pass.  ifh§^.  Cans.  »RTrfif, 
JTK^rri.     Desid.   n»<^n.^rri,    nH^iOMPrij   ftnf^fw.      Freq.   ^^^, 

^  (^)  '  to  fly.' 

It  takes  the  augment  ^  (rule  191,  b). 

Pres.  "^TlW;  ist  praet.  ^il^H  ;  2d  prset.  f^^ ;  3d  praet 
^nfcrer;  ist  fut  irfrnrr;  3d  fut.  Tfir^;  imp.  fhm;  pot.  "^^; 
bened.  Tftr#¥ ;  cond.  -SffMUfri.  Pass.  ^hrff.  Caus.  ttWw. 
Desid.  fs^tm.     Freq.  ^s'hm,  is^lfd,  irfir. 

It  is  also  a  verb  of  the  first  conjugation ;   sf^,  Hffii^cij  Tmri", 

3ncr^  (wsi)  '  to  perish,' 

It  belongs  to  the  class  Y"^Tf^j  and  may  in  the  third  prae- 
tcrite  change  ^  to  ij.  It  inserts  a  nasal  before  any  consonant 
except  a  nasal  or  semivowel,  and  optionally  inserts  3^, 

Pres.  H^Ajfrt  ;   ist  praet.  '^RT'^'T;   ^d  praet.  T?[T^  (^^t,  "^t? 

hP^n,  ^);  3d  jH-aet.  w^r^TT,  ^T^^;   ist  fut.  ttft,  ^f^iTiT ; 

2d  fut.  "Jff^fw,  "Hr^l^Mfri  ;  imp.  «TT^^ ;  pot.  "JT^^;  bened.  "fTT^W ; 
cond.  'sr^fenr  or  "^Rf^^.  Pass.  "^tj^.  Caus.  "JTT^nrfcf.  Desid. 
f^^,  fH^r^RffT.     Freq.  •?TT;t^,  TfrT^fw,  HTHf?- 

^ir^  *  to  bind,' 

The  final  is  changed  to  %  which  undergoes  no  other  change 
than  conversion  to  ^  before  a  soft,  and  if  before  a  hard  conso- 
nant, by  the  rules  of  Sandhi.      It  takes  both  Padas. 

Pres.  rf^frT  -Ti;  ist  praet.  ^r|4(W  -IT;  2d  praet,  HHI^  {^T!^ 
or  %f^,  ^^0'  ^ »  3^  P^^^-  '^'^Ir^'t^  (^ST^T^gf),  W^  (-HHrHlril) ; 

ist  fut.  "5^^;   2d  fut.  '^mrfu  -k;  imp.  ^?T^w-wf;  pot.  "?rdiT, 

^T^ ;  bened.  "JT^TW ,  ^Tl^ ;  cond.  ^SRWiT  -IT.  Pass.  ^Ff^m,  Caus. 
TfT^irfTr.     Desid.  fTTHr^rri  -W.     Freq.  "irrJT^^:,  HH^IPri,  TTT?Ti%. 

"rnr  ^  to  heat,'  '  to  perform  penance,' 
Pres.  inn^ ;    ist  praet.  'UriuicT ;   2d  praet.  w^ ;  3d  praet.  ^rwrr; 
ist  fut.  "rTFTT;    2d  fut.  ITX^^ ;    imp.  Tfxinrf;    pot.  Tn^TT;    bened, 

Ff 


S18  VERBS. 

ir^ ;    cond.    ^drmrMrf.      Pass.    Tfiq^.      Caus.   iTT^nfrf.      Desid. 
rririmri.      Freq.  rildmri,  WTrTfTT. 

"jTi  *  to  satisfy/  *  to  be  satisfied.' 
As  belonging  to  the  class  gmH^^  it  should  take  the  form  of 
the  third  praeterite  which  that  class  requires;  and  as  a  verb 
of  the  fourth  conjugation,  it  should  not  insert  ^.  In  both 
respects,  however,  it  offers  optional  deviations.  It  may  be 
conjugated  also  in  the  fifth,  sixth,  and  tenth  conjugations,  to 
which  the  different  forms  should  perhaps  be  restricted :  they 
are  always,  however,  given  together  in  this  conjugation. 

Pres.  ijuifrt  ;  ist  praet.  WflWi^;  2d  praet.  inr^  ("^ij^'j:,  Tnrfl'^, 
AA\%  t{(A\^);  3d  praet.  ^^I^W,  ^^nnffi^,  WrTT^TfT,  ^(^jmOil^; 
1st  fut.  W^,  W^j  irfSwT ;  2d  fut.  TTX^^,  ^mifri,  wfR'arfrT ;  imp. 
Tnq^;  pot.  "5"^;  bened.  "H'orn^;  cond.  ^hhhSh^,  ^<?f4Mit^,  ^snrfqTanr. 
Pass.  1^.  Caus.  wt^.  Desid.  finntfiT,  frTW^^,  frirlfqMfrf. 
Freq.  Tn^^xtr^,  ITC^^TftfF,  dOHfS. 

^,  ^  to  be  proud,^  is  similarly  conjugated. 

^  '  to  decay/ 
This  root  changes  its  final  to  ^  in  the  non-conjugational 
tenses,  except  in  the  second  praeterite. 

Pres.  ^Ntt;  ist  praet.  ^SRfhnr;  2d  praet.  f^^ ;  3d  praet. 
^H^T^;  1st  fut.  ^TTTT;  2d  fut.  ^^T^;  imp.  c(Nrrf;  pot.  ^^ ; 
bened.  ^nrhr;  cond.  ^^T^Enr.  Caus.  ^TiRfjT.  Desid.  f^^'^Mrf  or 
r<<I^H.      Freq.  ^f{li|ri,  ^^^flfri  or  ^^. 

So  »f!^  '  to  injure,'  and  (?fi^  '  to  embrace ;'  but  the  latter 
takes  two  forms  in  the  non-conjugational  tenses;  as,  w^¥, 
v4c4l<!H  ;  "^TTT,  c6ldl ;  T^^MH,  c5T^T^ ;  "^^^  WHflu  ;  and  4I(^U(h 
or  vTTi^i^rt. 

^  ^  to  shine.' 

This  verb  optionally  inflects  the  third  person  of  the  third 
praeterite  like  the  same  in  the  passive  voice :  see  wnr,  p.  173. 

Pres,  ^hq^;  ist  praet.  ^<flmri  ;  2d  praet.  f^^;  3d  praet. 
^tfxr?  or  "^r^tf^ ;   1st  fut.  ^ftfqin ;  2d  fut.  ^Mxraj^;  imp.  <{lujril; 


FOURTH   CONJUGATION.  219 

pot.  ^-^i    bened.  ^tlW^ ;    cond.  ^ST^ftftrnnr.      Caus.  ^hroi[fi[. 
Desid.  f^tftri^.    Freq.  ^^t^ff,  ^^hitflf  or  ^^. 

"^  ^  to  oppress/  ^  to  injure.' 

This  optionally  substitutes  V  or  ^  for  the  final  (rule  213, 
c,8), 

Pres.  "^T^rfw;  ist  praet.  ^"^^W;  2d  praet.  w^t^;  3d  praet. 
^^[^;  1st  fut.  '^trm,  "5^,  ^If^HI  ;  2d  fut.  "?fHT^lT^  ift^fw; 
imp.  1^ ;  pot.  i^T^;;  bened.  |^TTT ;  cond.  ^^"iP^mff^,  'smt^lt;. 
Pass.  "5^.  Caus.  "^rV^irfrr.  Desid.  g^V^^Mfd,  Jlf^f^.  Freq. 
<0<l^ri,  ^"V^iHtt,  ^>^>fHi  or  ^>^ftf^. 

So  fniT^  ^  to  be  kind,'  and  "om^  *  to  vomit.' 

fpf  '  to  dance.' 

This  verb  optionally  takes  the  augment  ^  before  ^  in  the 
non-conjugational  tenses. 

Pres.  "Jprfff;  ist  praet.  "^f^lTff;  2d  praet.  ^nr^ ;  3d  praet. 
^R^fff;  1st  fut.  Trftcn;  2d  fut.  "?rf§TqfrT  or  HrfSfrt;  imp.  ^fJWW; 
pot.  "^T^;  bened.  "^TiT;  cond.  'SRft^  or  ^R?#7^.  Pass. 
1^.  Caus.  tI^.  Desid.  ffUP^MPri  or  fir^ji^Pri.  Freq. 
H0«JK4ri,  HlO^rtlPri,  ^H^^^. 

tj^  ^  to  go.' 

This  forms  the  third  singular  of  the  third  praeterite  in  ^. 
It  does  not  take  the  augment  ^. 

Pres.  TT?i^ ;  ist  praet.  ^qtTd  ;  2d  praet.  ^ ;  3d  praet.  ^^rqif^ 
(-^Mr^lril,  vMMrWrt)  ;  ist  fut.  "q^ ;  2d  fut.  HWK ;  imp.  "q^nif; 
pot.  xraiT;  bened.  Mr^fly  ;  cond.  ^HTi^nr.  Pass.  "q^.  Caus. 
TT^AjPrf.     Desid.  fwff.     Freq.  mMtl>i,  m^^  or  TTT^fW- 

"jq  '  to  nourish.' 
This  is  the  first  verb  of  a  class  which  in  this  conjugation 
requires  the  terminations  of  the  first  praeterite  to  be  substituted 
for  those  of  the  third,  when  the  radical  vowel  is  unchanged 
(rule  190,  /.  p.  125). 

Pres.   'g^ff;    ist  praet.   iHg«lrt^;    2d  praet.  "gqtq  (^f^:) ; 

F  f  2 


220 


VERBS. 


3d  pr^t.  ^sf^^  ('^rgwiTf,  ^r^^) ;  ist  fut.  ift^ ;  2d  fut.  itMtt  ; 
imp.  TJBjH;  pot.  "5^;  bened.  ^WTW;  cond.  ^nft^nr.  Pass.  'JorS'. 
Caus.  ift^fiT.    Desid.  "g^^fw.    Freq.  Tftj^,  ^>^tfw,  ifm^fF. 
The  class  gmfr^  consists  of  the  following  verbs. 


^sro  to  throw. 
T^  to  assemble. 
^V  to  increase. 
^  to  be  angry. 
^  to  embrace. 
"^  to  become  thin. 
^  to  be  angry, 
fp!^  to  become  moist, 
f^  to  let  loose. 
"^  to  be  hungry. 
"WH  to  be  agitated, 
gtr  to  disturb. 
7TV  to  be  greedy. 
«Rf  to  let  loose. 
f^  to  throw. 
i!jM  to  hurt. 
^ir^T  to  perish. 
im  to  toss. 
IW  to  hurt. 

o 

TT^  to  be  pleased. 

inT  to  satisfy  or  be  satisfied. 

IT^  to  thirst. 
c 

^  to  toss. 

w^  to  become  bad. 


^  to  burn. 
1^1  to  fall. 

inr  to  weigh, 
grr  to  break. 

^  to  be  perplexed  or  foolish. 
XTff  to  take  pains* 
^  to  disturb. 
T>T  to  hurt. 
^  to  disturb. 
^  to  be  angry. 
c57  to  roll  on  the  ground. 
cgxf  to  be  lost. 
cj^  to  covet. 
"^^  to  fix. 
f^  to  convey. 
^  to  cast  off. 
^V  to  be  clean  or  pure. 
3R  to  become  dry. 
f%^  to  embrace, 
fq'^  to  become  perfect, 
ft^r^  to  be  kind  or  bland, 
fe^  to  sweat. 
^"q  to  rejoice. 
^  to  oppress  or  wrong. 

Many  of  these  verbs,  however,  take  other  forms  also  in  the 
third  praeterite,  as  belonging  originally  perhaps  to  different 
conjugations  ;  but  they  are  now  so  blended,  that  they  are 
usually  placed  together  under  this  conjugation,  however  incon- 
sistent vv'ith  their  cletssification  under  the  head  gmH^ ;  see  ^f^. 


FOURTH  CONJUGATION.  221 

ift  '  to  please  or  be  pleased.' 
It  is  a  verb  also  of  the  first  and  ninth  conjugations. 
Pres.  ■rfhrn;    1st  praet.  ^TTlhrfT ;    2d  praet.  fxrj(ft;   3d  praet. 

^?^;    ist  fut.  ^m;    2d  fut.  ^^;    imp.  Tfhnrf ;    pot.  "rfftir; 

bened.   p^ ;    cond.   ^^Ilmri.      Pass.  ifN^.      Caus.   Hiil^jPri   or 

ifNnrfrr.    Desid.  fxnfrqfrr  -^.    Freq.  ^iftiTw,  ^inftiiT,  ^^. 

So  >ft  Uo  uphold/   i;(t  Uo   drink/   ^  ^  to  injure/   i^  'to 

choose/  &c. 

^  ^  to  understand.' 

This  forms  the  third  person  singular  of  the  third  prseterite 
optionally  in  ^  (see  ^).  When  the  final  is  changed  by  the 
rules  of  Sandhi  before  a  sibilant,  '^  becomes  vr. 

Pres.  ^«iw  5  ist  praet.  ^T^WiT ;  2d  praet.  "^^ ;  3d  praet. 
^rq^  or  w|^  (^iff^rnrf,  wwir) ;  ist  fut.  '^tirr;  2d  fut.  ntw^ ; 
imp.  ^|xiT?rf ;   pot.  "^i^ ;  bened.  M^^  ;  cond.  ^OTlWff. 

For  the  other  forms,  see  "^^  first  conjugation,  p.  174. 

This  drops  its  nasal  before  ^,  and  in  the  third  praeterite. 

Pres.  >3^irffT;  ist  praet.  ^w^^TtT;  2d  praet.  '^^;  3d  praet. 
W^JSfnr;  ist  fut.  Hf^;  2d  fut.  Wn^iuifri  ;  imp.  >3r^;  pot. 
>j^^;  bened.  >T^xnTT;  cond.  ^r4%^lT.     Pass.  >j^^. 

For  the  other  forms,  see  ^,  first  conjugation,  p.  189. 

JT^  '  to  be  mad/  '  to  be  dehghted/  ^  to  be  intoxicated.^ 
As  belonging  to  the  class  ^MHlfc^,  the  vowel  is  made  long 

in  the  conjugational  tenses  (rule  215,  e), 

Pres.  Hl^Pri;    ist  praet.  '^nrrair;    2d  praet.  imr^;  3d  praet. 

^RT^^;    Tst  fut.  ?Tf^;    2d  fut.   HPt^mfd  ;    imp.   ttRJW;    pot. 

Hrdw;  bened.  JTmff;  cond.  ^^TRf^WiT .    Pass.  H^.    Caus.  m^^. 

Desid.  fann^MPd.     Freq.  HIHtlri,  ^TT^fw,  »TT*Tfw. 

iT^  '  to  know'  or  ^  to  respect.' 
Pres.  »r^  ;  ist  praet.  -^HHt^d;  2d  praet.  w^ ;  3d  praet.  ^^; 
ist  fut.  ^vX\ ;   2d  fut.  »r^ ;    imp.  H"^ ;    pot.  ^^ ;    bened. 


VERBS. 


ihfh? ;  cond.  wf^W.    Pass,  tt^tw.    Caus.  HiH^Prf.    Desid.  iiVRwk, 
Freq.  HTHvtiH,  HIHfif. 

■ftr^  (f^rf'T^T)  ^  to  be  unctuous/ 

This  verb  takes  the  Guna  substitute  of  the  vowel  in  all  the 
persons  of  the  conjugational  tenses. 

Pres.  ^fiT;  ist  prset.  ^3W?rTT;  2d  praet.  "fi^;  3d  praet. 
^rfiT^rT;  ist  fut.  Mf^m ;  2d  fut.  ^"orfw ;  imp.  ^?nr ;  pot.  ^W; 
bened.  firerTW;  cond.  '^f^'on^.  Pass.  f?ra^.  Caus.  ^^xrfff. 
Desid.  f*T^f^f(fr  or  ^H^^^^^^ri.      Freq.  ^frow,  ^^. 

^  *  to  be  silly/  ^  to  be  bewildered.' 

It  is  conjugated  like  7^,  &c. 

Pres.  ^^tt;  ist  praet.  ^^rpnr;  2d  praet.  grft^  {^^tr^?  yrfe 
or  *^H\rt%  gf%^  or  ^^);  3d  praet.  w§^;  ist  fut.  jf^T, 
jffeT  or  HlP^ril ;  2d  fut.  jft^ftfT  or  ifffV^rfrf ;  imp.  ^prj ;  pot. 
g^;  bened.  g^irf;  cond.  ^ift^nr  or  ^fnrtfigrHnT.  Pass.  g^. 
Caus.  hI^mPh.  Desid.  ggf^qPfi  or  ^HlP^NPrT,  gf^fw  or  gHtHjPri. 
Freq.  H^pr^,  *flg^1  Ph,  *f^>3v  or  iMf^. 

gv  ^  to  fight.' 

Pres.  "501^;  1st  praet.  ^TfXiqTT;  2d  praet.  gg^;  3d  praet. 
^Tfg  (^rgwTiTr) ;  ist  fut.  xptifT;  2d  fut.  -^tmi^;  imp.  "gunrf; 
pot.  ^^ ;  bened.  ttIt^  ;  cond.  ^nftSTW.  Pass.  "iJ«IW.  Caus. 
TflvirfTT.     Desid.  fgw^.     Freq.  xfrg^,  "ifhfrfw. 

^,  '  to  engage  in  devotion/  is  similarly  conjugated :  Pres. 
Tjiir^ ;  3d  praet.  ^rpi;    ist  fut.  ^flw,  &c. 

T!^  '  to  colour.' 
Pres.  T5?rff  ;    ist  praet.  ^ijM A  ;  imp.  T^mtf  ;  pot.  Tl^ir. 
The  rest  as  in  T^,  ^tmane-pada,  of  the  first  conjugation, 

p.  177. 

T.V  *  to  hurt.^ 

This  verb  inserts  *f  in  the  second  praeterite,  but  optionally 
before  the  augment  ^:    it  takes  ^  optionally  in  the  futures 


FOURTH   CONJUGATION. 

and  conditional.       In  the  third   praeterite   it   belongs   to   the 
class  gmH^. 

Pres.  TXiifTT ;  ist  praet.  '3rT:an|;;  2d  praet.  tTT^  (t^^:?  T?f?inr 
or  tt:^,  ixT^^^T^,  ^);  3d  praet.  ^m^IT^  (^iT^nrf) ;  I  St  fut.  xjVrn 
or  T;irT  ;  ad  fut.  TJ^rorftr  or  T:STriT ;  imp.  jjx^  ;  pot.  "T^;  bened. 
irumr;  cond.  ^snrfVsni;,  wrr^T^.  Pass.XiflW.  Caus.Ti>Rfff.  Desid. 
n^l^PuMfrf.     Freq.  TKWff,  &c. 

TIV  (tt^)  tr.  ^  to  propitiate  ;'  intr.  ^  to  be  finished^  or 

'  accomplished.^ 

Pres.  TTWfw;    ist  praet.  ^nT«n^;    2d  praet.  T?nV;   3d  praet. 

"^JtTwtrr;    ist  fiit.  TT^;  2d  fut.  TI^IT;  imp.  TT^;  pot.  TTWrT; 

bened.   TI«m^;    cond.   'ilUfWff.      Pass,  irnzi^.      Cans,  nv^fir. 

Desid.  ftwffT  or  ftnwfrf.      Freq.  I^KIUiri,  &c. 

■qrv  and  WT^  in  the  same  senses  are  similarly  conjugated. 

<W  *  to  covet.' 

It  takes  ^  optionally  in  the  first  future,  absolutely  in  the 
second. 

Pres.  "pywrfw;  ist  praet.  "^sn^wTr^;  2d  praet.  cJcTtH  ;  3d  praet. 
^TH^TTT;  ist  fut.  TiUn,  c5tfW»rr ;  2d  fut.  <5V5TGrfw;  imp.  <5«tw; 
pot.  "<5^^;  bened.  cJ^TTTT;  cond.  "^rcyt"5T5TlT.  Pass.  7^i^Jt,  Cans. 
<5^H^.     Desid.  "^cg-*^.     Freq.  "?fr«5«rff,  Htcytfiff. 

f^  '  to  be/  ^  to  exist.' 

Pres.  f^irw;  ist  praet.  ^rfWrT;  2d  praet.  f^f^;  3d  praet. 
^^;  ist  fut.  ^^;  2d  fut.  ^?9rff;  imp.  fWrTT;  pot.  f^dw; 
bened.  ^T^;  cond.  ^^j^TBTrT.     Pass.  f%?r^. 

For  the  rest,  see  f^  ^  to  know,'  second  conjugation. 

"gr*T  (w^)  '  to  pierce'  or  '  injure.' 
This  changes  the  semivowel   and  following  ^  to  ^  in  the 
conjugational  tenses,  and  also  in  the  benedictive,  and  before  the 
terminations  of  the  second  praeterite  beginning  with  vowels. 

Pres.  r^uifd  ;  ist  praet.  ^^rf^TZTfT;  2d  praet.  f^anv  (f^fr^rff:)  ; 
3d  praet.  ^^r^TTr^;    ist  fut.  ^nn;    2d  fut.  ^TWfw;  imp.  i^v^; 


224  VERBS, 

pot.  fr^;  bened.  f^TTT;  cond.  ^T^i?jn!;.    Pass.  fro^.    Caus. 
^nv^,     Desid.  f^cqrt^rd.      Freq.  ^f^vrk,  ^T^nltflT,  ^TT^fif. 

^nfi  *  to  be  able.' 

This  is  also  a  root  of  the  fifth  conjugation,  q.  v.  According 
to  some,  it  may  take  ^. 

Pres.  5(<wrri  -^ ;  1st  praet.  ^ii^|«Wf^  -tt  ;  2d  praet.  ^nrra,  "^  ; 
3d  praet.  -5(^r<=hff,  ^^T^T^'^,  '^qpr^,  ^r^rfe;  ist  fut.  ^m,  ^iPohrtt; 
2d  fut.  5l«^rd  -w,  ^^Kwfir  -^ ;  imp.  "^r^,  ^(^Mrif;  pot.  -^r^  -IT ; 
bened.  "^T^TTTt;,  ^[T^,  ^f^t^;  cond.  ^H^[^ri^  -IT,  'S^rO*^!^  -IT. 
Pass.  -^r^.    Caus.  "^TFRfw.    Desid.  f^fw  -^.    Freq.  ^|^(4Mri, 

^  (^)  '  to  be  tranquil.' 

This  is  the  first  of  a  class  of  which  the  vowel  is  made  long 
in  the  conjugational  tenses. 

Pres.  ^ii^^fri  ;  ist  praet.  ^sn^nwn^;  2d  praet.  ^t^th  (%^f :) ; 
3d  praet.  '^r^?^  or  sh^ihIcI^;  ist  fut.  ^fHrfr,  "^TRH;  2d  fut.  ^iPHmfri, 
^terfrr ;  imp.  '^U^ ;  pot.  ^1^;  bened.  "^rRTlT ;  cond.  -ii^rfHurr^, 
-ii^iWtt;.  Pass.  ^iwr^.  Caus.  "^n^Trfif.  Desid.  f^fn^flT,  %5mfTr. 
Freq.  ^l^iw^d,  l^T^rfnT. 

The  other  roots  of  this  class  are, 

^R  to  be  sad.  ^J^  to  wander  or  whirl. 

T3^  to  be  patient.  WT  to  be  weary. 

nmr  to  be  distressed.  jt5[  to  be  mad. 
^  to  tame. 

f%^  '  to  embrace/  '  to  adhere  to.' 
In  the  first  sense  this  verb  inserts  ^  before  the  terminations 
of  the  first  praeterite  in  the  third :  in  any  other  it  does  so 
optionally.  It  may  also  take  the  j^tmane-pada  in  the  third 
praeterite,  and  ^  in  the  third  person  singular.  In  the  sense 
of  embracing,  ^t  is  usually  prefixed. 

Pres.  fV^rfir ;  ist  praet.  ^^srf^xqi^;  2d  praet.  f^T^^ ;  3d  praet. 
wHa Hj f\^  ^f%^  or  ^rf%fT?  (^^P^Hjlrif,  'ilO^HITT,  ^f^^Tt,  "^f%f )  ; 
1st  fut.  -^T;  2d  fut.  ^Vi^Pd  ;   imp.  f%Tai^;   pot.  f^^;  bened. 


FOURTH  CONJUGATION.  225 

P^mir^;  cond.  ^r#^n^.     Pass,  fa^rt.     Caus.  ^irqfir.     Desid. 
f^rf%^.     Freq.  %f^^^,  %^. 

/  ■ 
^  "^^  '  to  bear.' 

Pres.  ^'^Pri  ;  ist  praet.  ^ra^;  ad  praet.  ^tot^  ;  3d  praet. 
^3Rn^;  ist  fut.  ^^^M  or  ^>^T ;  2d  fut.  ^rf^^ifif;  imp.  ^H^^; 
pot.  ^!W;  bened.  ^^IH ;  cond.  ^raf^"Bn^. 

For  the  rest,  see  ^,  first  conjugation. 


ft^r  (f^^)  *  to  sew.' 

This  makes  the  vowel  long  in  the  conjugational  tenses,  and 
before  t^, 

Pres.  ^fNfrr;  ist  praet.  wNt^;  2,d  praet.  "ftr^^;  3d  praet. 
^sra^;  1st  fut.  ^Pcjrii;  2d  fut.  ^P^mfri;  imp.  ^'Nf ;  pot. 
^ft^;  bened.  iffNrnT;  cond.  wfrsTr^.  Pass.  ^D«Mrf.  Caus. 
iimiPd.     Desid.  ftrftrfV^W.     Freq.  Jifl«=Hri,  flMlPH. 

f^^,  ^  to  eject  saliva,'  is  similarly  conjugated. 

"^^to  bear,'  as  children. 
Pres.  ^^;    ist  praet.  4jij^ri ;   2d  praet.  ;g^  ('«gPM^) ;   3d 
praet.  wtF,  "sraf^ ;  ist  fut.  ihm,  ^TiTT ;   2d  fut.  ^ft«q^,  ^P^uj^ ; 
imp.  ^^nrf ;    pot.  ^w;   bened.  ih:^ ;   cond.  ^M^lmri,  ^^^P^mri. 
Pass.  ^3?^;   ist  fut.  viP^dl ;  3d  praet.  ^rorfV. 

For  the  other  forms,  see  "5  first  conjugation,  and  "^  second 
conjugation. 

tetV  ^  to  destroy.' 

Verbs  ending  in  ^  lose  it  before  the  it  of  this  conjugation 
(rule  215,  c?) :  in  other  tenses  'STT  is  substituted  for  the  final. 

Pres.  wfir ;  ist  praet.  ^ii^i(^;  2d  praet.  ^a^  (^^0  ;  3^  praet. 
^Rrnr  or  ^gnrrahr;  ist  fut.  min;  2d  fut.  ^m^irfw;  imp.  ^-g; 
pot.  1^71^;  bened.  WTci;;  cond.  ^^rar^li;.  Pass.  -^t^^.  Caus. 
^mnifTT.     Desid.  f^iTRrfw.     Freq.  i^hr^,  wmrfif  or  ^T^frr. 

In  like  manner  are  conjugated  "sft  ^  to  cut,'  ^  ^  to  cut,'  and 
^  '  to  pare.'  ^  has  but  one  form,  ^?^TiT,  in  the  third  prae- 
terite. 


VERBS. 


^  '  to  abandon/ 

For  the  changes  of  the  final,  see  xiif,  first  conj.,  p.  176. 

Pres.  WrfJ^;  ist  praet.  ^rffiqif;  2d  praet.  ^r^  (^^W) ; 
3d  praet.  ^(^  (^iJHjiril) ;  ist  fiit.  ^r?T;  2d  fut.  ^r^K;  imp. 
^•i^  rfi ;  pot.  ^WW ;  bened.  m^ ;  cond.  ^w^ir.  Cans,  ^nt- 
xrfrr  -W.    Desid.  fti^^.     Freq.  fiO-ij^Kjri,  ^^J^^IPri,  ^rfbrfl. 

Fifth  Conjugation, 

216.  In  the  conjugational  tenses  the  verbs  of  this  class 
affix  the  syllable  "g  to  the  base. 

a.  Before  those  terminations  which  reject  t^  the  vowel  is 
changed  to  the  Guna  letter  ^,  which  combines  with  a  follow- 
ing vowel,  agreeably  to  the  rules  of  Sandhi.  Before  the  vowel 
of  any  other  termination  "5r  becomes  "^  when  the  root  ends 
with  a  vowel ;  but  T^  if  it  ends  with  a  consonant,  with  which 
•T  combines.  Before  the  consonant  of  a  termination  not  con- 
taining XT,  the  "g"  of  g  is  unchanged,  but  it  may  be  dropped 
before  ^  or  tr,  if  it  be  not  preceded  by  a  conjunct  consonant. 

b.  The  termination  of  the  second  person  singular  of  the 
imperative  f^  is  dropped  after  g  attached  to  a  final  vowel  in 
the  root :  if  attached  to  a  final  radical  consonant,  f^  is  retained. 

c.  The  type  of  the  class  is  "g'sr  ^  to  extract,^  as  a  juice  or 
spirit:  of  which  the  conjugational  tenses  in  both  forms  are 
the  following : 

Present  tense,  ^  I  extract  (the  Soma)  juice,'  &c. 
Parasmai-pada.  Atmane-pada. 


l^frf^       IT^*         IT^ 
W^        ^^:  wf^f^ 


1^    l^^l^   IT'^T^ 


First  praeterite,  *  I  have  extracted  juice,^  &c. 


^^W^:  ^^TfJTT  ^^ 

^^^^  'Sl^lff  ^!TH^ 


^^^       ^T^T^ 


FIFTH  CONJUGATION.  227 

Imperative,  '  May  I  extract  juice/  &c. 


1^  ?1^  1^=^ 


IT" 


^H'^nI 

«HMIH^ 

«HTV|| 

1^^ 

^•<{lril 

^l^^in 

Potential,  ^  I  may  extract  juice/  &c. 


W":  f^ff         w^^Tff 


The  other  tenses  are  not  dissimilar  from  those  of  1  of  the 
second  conjugation.  It  takes  ^  in  the  third  praeterite  of  the 
Parasmai-pada,  and,  according  to  some,  optionally  in  the 
j^tmane-pada  also. 

2d  praet.  "f(m"c(,  ^^ ;  3d  praet.  ^RrrsftTT,  "^^rt?,  ^^^rf^ ;  ist  fut. 
Htm;  2d  fut.  ^fNfiT  -W ;  bened.  ^^TiT,  ^rWf ;  cond.  WNW  -IT. 
Pass.  ^xr^.  Cans.  ^T^rrfw ;  3d  praet.  w^W?^.  Desid.  ^WMPd  -^. 
Freq.  ^^^5  ^iMtOfrf,  ^^cT. 

There  are  not  many  verbs  in  this  conjugation.  The  fol- 
lowing are  amongst  those  of  most  frequent  occurrence.  A 
few  which  have  been  met  with  in  previous  conjugations,  are 
repeated  here  for  the  sake  of  the  difference  which  their  inflex- 
ions present. 

^r5{^^  to  pervade.' 

For  the  effect  of  the  Anubandha  ^,  see  p.  106. 

Pres.  "^r^  (^nf^5  ^^r^^)  ;  ist  praet.  "^T^;  2d  praet. 
^H^r  (^MM^nri,  ^IhT^iI)  ;  3d  praet.  ^TTT?  (^TTWTWf),  'srrf^I^ 
(^if^miril)  ;  ist  fut.  ^TFT,  ^r%rTT;  2d  fut.  w^w,  '5r%HT^; 
imp,  ^"^ ;  pot.  %Sig^ri  ;  bened.  'Hp^mly,  ^rsft^ ;  cond.  ^STT^nr, 
'i^lf^mH.     Pass.  -^^i4ri.     Cans.  WT^PTfiT.     Desid.  ^rf^rf^T^. 

^q  (^nr^)  Ho  obtain.' 

For  the  effect  of  05,  see  p.  106. 

Pres.  ^nrftfrT  (^STTgir:,  -HJ^^^H^)  ;  ist  praet.  -xiM^rf;  2d  praet. 
^mr  ("srrcr^:,  ^rg:);  3d  praet.  ^smnr;  ist  fut.  -mrn;  2d  fut. 
^r^Eirfir;    imp.   ^rT?ftw  (^T^)  ;    pot.  ^T^^rT;    bened.  ^nTJrni[; 

G  g  2 


VERBS. 

cond.  '«!m:MH.     Pass.  VHim^.     Caus.  (with  T?  prefixed)  yiMnPff. 
Desid.  ^"MPri. 

^V  ('^)  ^  to  increase.* 

Pres.  (^^Vfir  (^fff:,  "^^f^) ;  ist  praet.  ^nft^;  imp.  ^W; 
pot.  ^fTO^. 

For  the  rest,  see  "^^  second  conjugation. 

^  ('^)  ^  to  injure.' 
Pres.   oMin Ph,  f^;   ist  praet.  ^r^"Vfr,  ^T^ir;    imp.  ^^iifhr, 
wirf ;  pot.  "fS'^rnr,  <jih1  h . 

The  rest  Hke  "^  ^  to  do :'  see  eighth  conjugation. 

^ff^  *  to  injure.* 

This  verb  and  fvf^,  ^  to  go/  drop  the  semivowel  before  'g ; 
and  the  influence  of  ^  is  suspended  in  the  conjugational  tenses. 

Pres.  ^li^Pri ;   ist  praet.  ^r^whT;    2d  praet.  "^^RF;   3d  praet. 

^cjljcflri^;    ist  fut.  "<jP<w H I ;    2,d  fut.  "^Ijsnqfw;  imp.  <j.iin  j  ;  pot. 

^xrn^;  bened.  fcrjani^;  cond.  -^r^friTsnT.    Pass,  '^m^,    Caus. 

<*U«<^Pri. 

fq  (f^)  '  to  collect.' 

The  palatal  becomes  optionally  the  guttural  in  the  redu- 
plicate base,  in  the  second  praeterite,  and  desiderative. 

Pres.  f^HiPri,  f%g^;  ist  praet.  ^^rfM^H,  ^rfNr^;  2d  praet. 
fcixjin  or  "N^fiFT,  f^  or  f%^ ;  3d  praet.  ^5T%^,  ^T^  ;  ist  fut. 
wr;  2d  fut.  ^mPd  -^;  imp.  "N^fVw,  f^^wf;  pot.  f^«JMIH^, 
P^rcflri  ;  bened.  "^hrnr,  ^i^ ;  cond.  ^3T%^  -w.  Pass.  ^qh|¥. 
Caus.   ^TiPTfir.      Desid.    P^x/ImPh    or    P^ohl^Prf.      Freq.   "^^N^, 

^  ^  to  deceive.* 

The  nasal  is  rejected  before  "5,  and  before  ti.  In  the  second 
praeterite  it  is  optionally  conjugated  as  if  it  ended  in  a  single 
consonant  (rule  188,  k), 

Pres.  ^\ftf^  (^^0  ;  ist  praet.  ^tftw;  2d  praet.  ^^  (^i^:, 
^>TH ;  ^^fwT,  "^fw^;  ^fVvRj  ^^)  I  3^  praet.  ^<^*41»t;^;  ist  fut. 
^fnrm ;    2d  fut.  ^fwifrT ;    imp.  ^^tw ;    pot.  ^^Tn^^;    bened. 


FIFTH  CONJUGATION.  229 

^wni^;    cond,  ^Mr^r**<U4ri^.      Pass.  ^witI'.      Caus.  ^T>rrfiT.      Desid. 
f^^frvpETfir,  fV^frr  or  >fh^.    Freq.  ^pj^^q?. 


^  (-g*^)  ^  to  shake'  or  *  tumble.' 

Pr^.  "yfVffT,  ^^;  ist  praet.  ^T^^Ti;,  ^r^T^'  ^^  P^^*'  1^^^» 
5^^ ;  3d  praet.  "^qtir,  ^r\ft? ;  ist  fut.  \ft?n;  2d  fut.  vVsifTT  -^  ; 
imp.  'jFftH,  "g^T;  pot.  vg^,  "g^^^;  bened.  v^TT^,  >lt^;  cond. 
^nfN^  -cT.   Pass.  VT?^.    Caus.  >J»Rfrr  or  VN^Pd.    Desid.  ^V^fw. 

Freq.  ^V'nr^,  ^hr^tfrT,  ^WVfw. 

V  (y^)  *  to  shake'  or  ^  tumble.* 
It  inserts  ^  before  the  usual  terminations  optionally,  except 

'^  and  TT  of  the  second  praeterite,  where  it  is  absolute. 

Pres.  "Wtftfir,  ^w;    ist  praet.  ^^^V?!^,  ^'^^;   2d  praet.  HVT^ 

(5>rf^,  ^^,  HVf^),  H^ ;    3d  praet.  ^IVT^TT,  ^ivf^  or  ^r^; 

1st  fut.  vf^rn,  VtWT;   2d  fut.  vf^Hrfw  -^,  >fMw  -w;    imp.  "^Tt^, 

vftTT ;  pot.  Y3^5  H^  5   bened.  VTrnr,  vf^t^g,  >ft^ ;  cond. 

^nrlrcnr  -it,  w^fVsn^  -w. 

The  other  forms  are  the  same  as  in  the  preceding. 

TJ  '  to  delight.' 
Pres.  ij-nnrri  ;    ist  praet.  ^rjrifti^;    2d  praet.  xnnt:;  3d  praet. 
wm^;     ist  fut  -qfr;    2d  fut.   i^oqfrf  ;    imp.  Y^'^    P^*- 
"J^Hillft^;    bened.  finrnf ;    cond.  ^nrfbqTT.      Pass,  fsnrk.     Caus. 
i:iK7Tfir.      Desid.  'J'ltfjr.     Freq.  ^[jft^i^,  ^Tl^fff,  ^t. 

ftr  (fJT^)  ^o  throw.' 

This  substitutes  "m  for  its  final  in  all  the  non-conjugational 
tenses  except  the  second  praeterite  .^tmane-pada,  and  before  if. 

Pres.  fqrftfrf,  f^wk;  ist  praet.  ^rf^T^fh^,  ^fH'^W;  2d  praet. 
TTi^,  frrr^;  3d  praet.  'STJmfti^,  ^RTCT ;  ist  fut.  Tnwi;  2d  fut. 
Hiwfd  -7^;  imp.  fk^,  fk^;  pot.  fir'JiITf^,  PhhIh  ;  bened. 
H\mi{,  HTfw;  cond.  ^^RT^^nr  -w.  Pass.  ifhi^.  Caus.  TtimiPri. 
Desid.  fVrPRfff  -^.     Freq.  ^?ft^,  Wltfff,  ^^. 


230  VERBS. 

TTV  ^  to  accomplish,*  *  to  injure/ 
In  the  second  sense  it  substitutes  ij  for  the  radical  vowel 

before   the  vowel    terminations   and    the   augment   ^  of  the 

second  praeterite. 

Pres.   tmrfrr;     ist   praet.    xSUHliI  ;     2d  praet.   TXR   (tTTVJ:, 

TTTftm,  Tnfv^  or  "brj:,  "tfV%  TfVr^) ;   imp.  TT?ftw ;   pot.  TT^iTT?^. 
For  the  rest,  see  TTV,  fourth  conjugation. 

T  (^)  'to  choose.' 

This  optionally  prolongs  the  augment  ^,  except  before  "^  in 
the  second  praeterite :  before  the  other  consonantal  termina- 
tions of  the  same  it  does  not  take  ^.  It  optionally  inserts  ^ 
in  the  benedictive,  and  may  change  its  vowel  to  "31  in  that 
tense,  the  benedictive,  and  third  praeterite,  i^tmane-pada.  In 
the  latter  it  has  different  forms. 

Pres.  jiinPri,  Y^  >  ^^^  P^^*-  "-H^nrift^,  'ij^inri  ;  3d  praet.  ^^R 
(^^toj  ^rw^:,  Tf :  or  ^^^:,  ^^),  ^Ri:  or  ^  (^f^) ;  3d  praet. 
<g<mOri^,  x^fiLK,  ^^i5i¥,  ^^r^,  '^Tft ;  ist  fut.  -^ftjn,  ^^hn ;  2d 
fut.  -^fxycffTf  -w,  mC^^A  -^ ;  imp.  Y^>  IW^  5  pot.  f^^, 
^Ijcflri  ;  bened.  fwcm^  or  ^3§T1^,  ^It^,  ^^tF,  J^ ;  cond. 
SHc<ri,«4ri^  -TT,  'smTCNrT  -7T.  Pass,  f^wk,  Caus.  ^c^frf  -w.  Desid. 
rc^^n^Mfri    -%    r^^OMfri   -W,    f^fw  -^.      Freq.    %^hl^,    Ml^rf, 

^nn  {W%)  'to  be  able.^ 
Pres.  ^i^Pri  ;    ist  praet.  ^^^ir;  imp.  ^#5;  pot.  ^^^. 
For  the  rest,  see  ^nF,  fourth  conjugation. 

^  (^5^)  '  to  cover.' 

This  inserts  ^  optionally,  except  in  the  second  future  and 
conditional  where  its  insertion  is  absolute,  and  may  prolong  it 
when  inserted. 

Pres.  fjunpH,  ^^;  1st  praet.  ^^JxiftlT,  ^Rf^;  2d  praet. 
fT^cIR,  ITO^;  3d  praet.  ^IrflOrl^  or  ^sren^,  ^wtoj  ^T^rt^F, 
^Wl^  or  "^Tfpf  ;  ist  fut.  ^T,  %if<:H  I,  inOrii;  2d  fut.  wft^rfiT  -^, 
H^Nrfw-^;    imp.  4<|iuig,  ^^uril;   pot.  Tf^^HT^;,  «f<HlH ;  bened. 


SIXTH   CONJUGATION.  231 

^rtn^,  ^Ff^,  4Hfltfl»  ;  cond.  SH^Pcuiri^  -W,  SH<y(Ou(H^  -W.  Pass. 
W^'  Caus.  WRTTfw.  Desid.  fri^ft^Mrri  -W,  friidOMrri  -^. 
Freq.  in^Fn^,  HKyiOfri,  WTCrft. 

Sixth  Conjugation. 

^17.  This  class  is  characterised  by  the  insertion,  before  the 
terminations  of  the  conjugational  tenses,  of  "^j  that  is,  of  the 
short  vowel  %  with  the  effect  of  precluding  the  operation 
of  an  indicatory  "g;  and  the  vowel  of  the  root  therefore  is 
unchanged  either  to  the  GuAa  or  Vriddhi  element. 

a.  The  terminations  of  the  conjugational  tenses  undergo 
the  same  modifications  as  in  the  first  conjugation. 

b.  Verbs  ending  with  vowels  change  1^  ^  to  ^,  '3'  ^  to  "3^, 
^  to  ft^,  and  "^  to  ^,  before  the  ^  of  the  conjugation. 

c.  A  class  of  verbs  called  from  the  first  of  them  JT^nf^ 
insert  a  nasal  before  the  finals  in  the  conjugational  tenses. 

d.  The  class  of  verbs  termed  ^CTf^  extend  the  prohibition 
of  the  Guna  or  Vriddhi  change  to  the  non-conjugational  tenses, 
except  the  first  and  third  persons  singular  of  the  second 
praeterite. 

e.  The  type  of  the  conjugation  is  ^,  ^  to  inflict  pain.*  It 
takes  both  Padas. 

Present,  *  I  inflict  pain/  &c. 


^^ 

rt^N: 

j^tit: 

# 

d<«"^^ 

^•rI 

IS^ 

5^- 

w^ 

5^^ 

.1^ 

^^ 

J^fTT 

5^: 

I^^ 

g^^ 

#^ 

I^ 

First  praeterite,  '  I  ha 

Lve  inflicted 

pain,'  &c. 

^f^*\ 

vinf^iq 

•«<nr;i*i 

"^a^ 

^sij<mn$ 

^m: 

^Hi^A 

'H^<rT 

^^T^^^: 

-5{^^V|| 

^r^s4 

-Hi\ 

^fjt^ril 

^^^ 

^rj^ 

-ifrj^rii 

^^^ 

Imperative,  ^  May 

I  inflict  pain,*  &c. 

^Tf^ 

g^T? 

5^T17 

3t 

g^T^ 

l^n^ 

^ 

^^ 

I^W 

g^ 

1^ 

g^^ 

W^l 

g^ 

^^ 

g^ 

3^ 

g^ 

2S2  VERBS. 


Potential,  ^  I  may  inflict  pain/  &c. 


I^  1^^  ^ 

1^:  -^  ^ 

t^  1^  1^* 


The  other  tenses  are, 

2d  praet.  "gift^,  wj^;  3d  praet.  '^nftRftw,  5srg^  ('^rprm, 
^jrWd);  ist  fut.  iftWT ;  2,d  fut.  ifh^RffT  -^ ;  bened.  "pm^, 
ft^;  cond.  '^nftr^l^  -Tf.  Pass.  -pr^.  Caus.  ift^Trfw.  Desid. 
gjK<rri  -^.      Freq.  iftpT^,  iftrftf^. 

^  ^  to  wish.' 

This  makes  ^^,  ^  to  wish/  in  the  conjugational  tenses.  It 
may  insert  ^  in  the  first  future. 

Pres.  ^^fd  ;  ist  praet.  ^^aeiT ;  2d  praet.  ^^ ;  3d  praet.  ^^; 
ist  fut.  idfMril  or  JTSi;  2d  fut.  ij^rfif;  imp.  '3^^;  pot.  3|^7r; 
bened.  ?[STnT ;   cond.  ^^rm;^.    Pass.  ^[bt^.    Caus.  ^J^irfw. 

^  (^)  *  to  sound/  *  to  coo.* 

According  to  some,  the  vowel  is  unchanged  in  the  non- 
conjugational  tenses. 

Pres.  '^^;  ist  praet.  SH*^d  ;  2d  praet.  ^^;  3d  praet.  ^^; 
1st  fut.  ^f^,  frrr;  2d  fut.  ^Hiuirt,  '^^;  imp.  '^^;  pot. 
^^ ;  bened.  ^|f^tF,  "^^t?  ;  cond.  w^jfTBTrT,  -il^«ld.  Pass.  "sgci^. 
Caus.  chHupH.    Desid.  -jcjiMd.     Freq.  xTicMi'ri  or  chloM^'^. 

■^  ^  to  be  crooked.' 

This  is  the  first  of  a  class  of  verbs  which  retain  the  vowel 
unchanged,  except  before  w^. 

Pres.  "fdw;  ist  praet.  "^T^Tr^;  2d  praet.  ^^^  (ff^^  ;  3d 
praet.  ^^jld^;  ist  fut.  "^frcTT;  2d  fut.  ^duifn  -,  imp.  "5^; 
pot.  "^^;   bened.  ^<wirt^;   cond.  ^T^roTf^.     Pass.  <^^^.     Caus. 

•^^^Pd.     Desid.  ^-^nfMPd.     Freq.  '^1<*W^,  "its^. 

The  class  consists  of  a  number  of  verbs  having,  with  few 
exceptions,  a  medial  "^ :  the  most  useful  of  them  are. 


SIXTH  CONJUGATION. 


'^  to  contract.  ^  to  bind. 

"^  to  be  childish.  fT^  to  throw. 

^  to  be  thick.  "j^  to  make  a  riot. 

ipf  to  sound.  "5?  to  inflict  pain. 

T[S  to  preserve.  ^7  to  cut. 

ij?  to  make  effort.  "j^  to  abandon. 

^  \  ^f^  to  bud,  to  expand. 

"57  t-  to  cut.  ^  to  throb. 

^^  '  to  draw  fiirrows/  '  to  plough.' 

This  takes  different  forms  in  the  third  praeterite. 

Pres.  "^^ -w ;  ist  praet.  ^st^t^-it;  2d  praet.  "^rait,  "^^5 
3d  praet.  ^TsRT^hr,  ^HBTC^  or  ^Wf^,  and  W^  or  ^<*«;jrt  ; 
ist  fut.  "oistT  or  ^iST;  2d  fut.  chaSPri  -W  or  W^ffif  -W ;  imp. 
'^'3?  «^Mril ;  pot.  "^iT  -If ;  bened.  ojiU{ir|^,  <*«|Ty  or  ««{)»  ;  cond. 
^rar^  -W,  'TTfhy^ff;^  -TT.  Pass,  f^,  Caus.  "^t^.  Desid. 
f^^^^.      Freq.  x<0<^mri,  ^^^ft. 

"^ '  to  throw.' 
Pres.  f^RTifH;  ist  praet.  "^rf^njT^;  2d  praet.  "^^FR  (•^^i.tj:, 
x|oh^:)  ;  3d  praet.  'STcFT^TT;  ist  fut.  cjiftifT  or  ofcOril  ;  2d  fut. 
^n^mPri  or  chOmPri;  imp.  f^RTrj ;  pot.  f^Tj^;;  bened.  "^h^Tr^; 
cond.  ^ntftron^,  Wsr6^.  Pass.  chl-i4ri.  Caus.  «*KHPri.  Desid. 
r*l<+Pl.MPri.     Freq.  ^^M^,  ^T^#. 

IT  '  to  swallow.' 

This  verb  optionally  substitutes  c5  for  the  t  which  is  derived 
from  the  radical  final,  except  before  xr. 

Pres.  fxRfff,  fJlt^PH  ;  ist  praet.  ^JTG^,  wf^n^ff;  2d  praet. 
WIT^,  WTTc^;  3d  praet.  xSillOr^,  ^H^JIc^lrl^;  ist  fut.  JlPui,  ipQm, 
Vfc^m,  Jlc^lril ;  2d  fut.  JT PhutPh,  Jr^TSR^T,  J|P<*iU|fw,  Jlc^lujPfr ;  imp. 
fiTCJ,  fncJ^;  pot.  fjfb^,  fJT^;  bened.  jfl^IW;  cond.  -iJ^iPi^mrl^, 
^3rin3mH,  ^mfcTeri!;,  ^Mc^laCrT.  Pass.  ifh^.  Caus.  J| K^Pd, 
mTJUffT.     Desid.  "ftnTtofiT,  fwiPc^MPri.     Freq.  ^n^R,  »rFTf#. 

H  h 


234  VERBS. 

^W  (^)  '  to  hurt/ 

Pres.  ^wfif;    ist  praet.  W^pnT;    2d  praet.  '^^t ;    3d  praet. 

^R-^fi^;    ist  fut.  ^#?TT;   2d  fut.  ^ff^HrfrT  or  '^fw ;  imp.  ^iT^; 

pot.  '^W;  bened.  ^^WTi^;  cond.  ^r^ff^,  ^^r^r^W.    Pass.  '^m^. 

Caus.   xi^^Pri.     Desid.  f^^ft^  or  fq^fw.      Freq.  "N^m?, 

Tj  '  to  praise.^ 

This  root  takes  ^  (rule  igi,  b ;  see  also  ^  &c.  in  the  second 
conjugation). 

Pres.  ^^Ph  ;  ist  praet.  ^TiT;  2d  praet.  tjnm  ;  3d  praet. 
'^^T^fT,  ^g^it;;  istfut. -yrf^Trr/ jP^hi;  2d  fut.  irfrarfff,  "^^^rf^ ; 

imp.  "g^J ;   pot.  g^7i[ ;   bened.  ^XTrrf ;   cond.  wrfw^?  ^"gfTHTif . 
Pass.  ^pcr^.    Caus.  -^mirflf.    Desid,  j.ji(fw.    Freq.  "N^^J^ff,  ^>N^. 
ziT,  '  to  praise/  is  similarly  conjugated;   so  is  f  'to  sound.^ 

wxr  '  to  satisfy.' 
Pres.  "5^;    ist  praet.  -iiijUr^;   3d  praet.  ^nnff?^;  imp.  "^ttj; 
pot.  "5^- 

For  the  rest,  see  WtT,  fourth  conjugation. 

OT  '  to  be  firm.' 
Pres.  ^^fri  ;    ist  praet.   '^Ig'^ri^;    2d  praet.  JifN ;    3d  praet. 
^srphr;  ist  fut.  -gf^T;  2d  fut.  -gfroTfTr;  imp.  "pw;  pot.  ^W; 
bened.  "g^Errir;    cond.   wgfTsrrT.     Pass.  "g^.     Caus.   ^NMPri. 
Desid.  S^l^fif.     Freq.  ^>^^,  ^"^^-^tfir. 

XT  (ij^)  '  to  extend.' 

Pres.  ftnr^  ;  ist  praet.  ^rfrnTrT  ;  2d  praet.  xi^ ;  3d  praet.  wp 
(^»fmrif) ;  ist  fut.  xr#r;  2d  fut.  trft^i^;  imp.  Pm^ihI  ;  pot. 
fv^ ;  bened.  "ij^ ;  cond.  w^ftxTiT.  Pass.  frnrS".  Caus. 
MKuPri.      Desid.  "J^jtffT.     Freq.  Tijfhi^,  xmrff. 

The  verb  is  commonly  used  with  f^  and  ^TT"^  prefixed ; 
«!mPni|^  *  he  conducts  business.' 

Jrt3i  ^  to  ask.' 
This  verb  changes  ^  to  ^  in  the  conjugational  tenses.     The 
final  "S^  becomes  iR  before  a  consonant  (rule  213). 


SIXTH   CONJUGATION. 

Pres.  Y^afiT;  ist  praet,  '^s^^;  2d  praet.  ini^;  3d  praet. 
xsmnflit;;  ist  fut.  jm;  2d  fut.  -g^fTr;  imp.  y^;  pot.  "^i^; 
bened.  ^J^^^T?^;  cond.  ^H«?1T.  Pass.  iJ^^^H.  Caus.  TT^TTfw  -If. 
Desid.  rMMKjPH.     Freq.  m3'Jt^^^,  tmrf^. 

>n5T  '  to  fry.' 
This  verb  also  substitutes  the  vowel  "^  for  the  semivowel  in 
the  conjugational  tenses,  and  optionally  in  the  non-conjuga- 
tional  tenses,  when  it  becomes  the  Guna  ^.  It  also  converts 
the  penultimate  consonant  to  *T  throughout:  see  ^^,  first 
conjugation.  A  final  if  becomes  "^  before  a  consonant.  It 
takes  both  Padas. 

Pres.  ^j-wlPri  'It;  ist  praet.  "^anwi^ -IT ;  2d  praet.  "^Hlt,  ^>r53T, 
^HW:,  ^^31^;  3d  praet.  ^M^fFrT,  ^WT^^,  ^Hjf,  W^TF;  ist  fut. 
hIt,  >JFr;  2d  fut.  HT^ffT  -W,  W^fif  -W;  imp.  ^JWJ,  H'rirrrf; 
pot.  ^J^TT  -IT ;  bened.  >jTTqTrr,  HiB|f?,  >J'^ft^ ;  cond.  ^^w^l^  -IT, 
^sw^nt;  -W.  Pass.  >Jt5?i^.  Caus.  H^xrffT.  Desid.  f%iT^  -w, 
fWB^  -K.      Freq.  ^^pw^,  ^T>jf^. 

c5j^,  '  to  be  ashamed,'  becomes  in  like  manner  <5iiT  ( (^irTfiT, 

iTRT  ^  to  be  immersed  in  water/  '  to  sink/  ^  to  drown.' 

This  also  converts  the  sibilant  to  if.  In  the  non-conjuga- 
tional  tenses  it  inserts  a  nasal  before  the  conjunct  final,  and 
one  tT  is  rejected  (rule  34,  a). 

Pres.  HTrifri  ;  ist  praet.  ^mWiT;  2d  praet.  ?nf^  (^^w^, 
*JhPw(vj);  3d  praet.  '^mf^fh^  (^mfw)  ;  ist  fut.  w^ ;  o^d  fut. 
jR^fff;  imp.  JTWJ;  pot.  H'-^ri;  bened.  Hri^rTlT;  cond.  »HH^1T. 
Pass.  HTi^rf.     Caus.  ^n^Tjfrr.     Desid.  f»Tif^.     Freq.  JRrnr^. 

w^  (g^)  '  to  liberate'  or  '  loose.' 
The  class  of  which  this  verb  is  the  first,  inserts  a  nasal  in 
the  conjugational  tenses  (rule  217,  c). 

Pres.  g^rfiT-  ^;  ist  praet.  ^ig^  -W;  2d  praet.  g^ft^,  gg^; 
3d  praet  ^ig^l^;,  ^srg^;   ist  fut.  »ftl«T;  2d  fut.  ^fft^fw  -ff ;  imp. 

H  h  2 


236  VERBS. 

5^j  5^^;  pot.  ^T|;,  g^w;  bened.  ^^i\\i{,  *fH^;  cond. 
Wl^l^  -IT.  Pass.  g^.  Caus.  irNrrfw.  Desid.  g^gjPiT  -^. 
Freq.  tTIHxHH,  ^rhftfti. 

The  other  verbs  of  this  class  are, 

Y^  (^fir)  to  cut.  t^xr  (<^+*irH  -w)  to  cut. 

f^  (fi^n?^)  to  hurt.  f^  (f^;^  -^)  to  find. 

fq^  (fxf'^rflT)  to  be  organised.     fiT^  (fwfir  -li)  to  sprinkle. 

fc5XT  (fc5J«TfiT  -w)  to  smear. 
Of  these,  the  three  last  have  an  Anubandha  "^y  and  therefore 
make  one  form  only  in  the  third  praeterite,  Parasmai-pada  :  fc5^ 
and  fE^  have  two  forms  in  the  ^tmane-pada,  ^Hp^Mri  or  ^fc5Tr, 
^ftRTT  or  ^rftl^ ;   ^  and  f^  take  ^,  ^rfflTT,  ^^ITT,  &c. 

This  verb  follows  the  Parasmai-pada  in  the  second  praeterite, 
feitures,  and  conditional.  In  the  desiderative,  "g*  is  substituted 
for  ^. 

Pres.  f^r^^;  ist  praet.  ^if^tnT;  2d  praet.  jtrr  ('WJ:,  ^^^^, 
JTpg^)  ;  3d  prast.  ^T^;  ist  fut.  irfr;  3d  fut.  Hfr^rfw;  imp. 
r^^rif ;  pot.  f^gmr ;  bened.  ^^ ;  cond.  ^^mftTSTi^.  Pass.  f^xrS". 
Caus.  HTTTrffT.     Desid.  yjtfif.     Freq.  ^^Nw,  TRff . 


to  deceive.* 

This  substitutes  ^  for  the  semivowel  in  the  conjugational 
tenses,  and  in  the  second  praeterite ;  and  before  it. 

Pres.  fT^;  ist  praet.  ^rf¥^;  zd  praet.  f^T^  (f^^^^*) ; 
3d  praet.  ^ij^xjlr^  or  ^T^n^ftw;  ist  fut.  ^qfqin ;  2d  fut.  ^^P^mfri; 
imp.  fr^ ;  pot.  f^f^;  bened.  fN-^HTrT;  cond.  ^r^rNrarrT .  Pass. 
f^nfk,      Caus.   ^mifri.      Desid.   f^^ifq^.      Freq.   ^f^xnd, 

W^  (^1L)  ^to  cut.' 

This  substitutes  the  vowel  for  the  semivowel  in  the  conju- 
gational tenses,  and  before  ^.  In  the  non-conjugational  tenses 
it  optionally  inserts  ^ ;  and  when  it  does  not,  the  final  ^  is 
rejected. 

Pres.  ^^jffT ;  ist  praet.  'sr^^;  :zd  praet.  TSrs  i4uC^%  ^^?) ; 


SEVENTH  CONJUGATION.  237 

3d  praet.  ^ra^jh^,  ^TWT^ftTT ;  ist  fut.  dOyril,  ^ITT ;  ad  fut.  "^ftjrilfw, 
^Vi^fff ;  imp.  f^'  P^*-  T^'  ^^^^^*  I^TTiT;  cond.  -iiriPyxqw, 
^m^l^.  Pass.  "1^^.  Caus.  W^^iT.  Desid.  fc^dOyMfd  or 
fVarw^'      Freq.  cjij^^ff,  ^iO^^^rri,  ^rd^fV. 

^»T  ^  to  let  go/  '  to  abandon/  '  to  create.^ 
Pres.  ^wfrf;    ist  praet.  ^mm^;    2d  praet.  ^ERT^ ;   3d  praet. 

^^IKfllT;    ist  fut.  WW{;    2d  fut.  H^rfw;  imp.  '^^;  pot.  "^%f!;; 

bened.  ^wnf ;  cond.  ^TH^pr.      Pass.  TOTfl". 
For  the  rest,  see  ^,  fourth  conjugation. 

FT^  ^  to  touch. ^ 

This  optionally  substitutes  the  Guna  syllable  or  the  semi- 
vowel only  in  the  third  praeterite,  futures,  and  conditional. 

Pres.  ^^iPri  ;  1st  praet.  ^n=^7T;  2d  praet.  trw^  (q^^j^lg:); 
3d  praet.  'SR^JTT^,  ^^IWTS^  or  -Kf^Jii^Iri^;  ist  fut.  ^qfr,  WSJ; 
2d  fut.  ^q^ftf,  ^JT^rlir ;  imp.  ^pft"^  ;  pot.  ^^IT;  bened.  4Hj^^rri; 
cond.  '^T^q^iT  or  ^TOT^ni;.  Pass.  ^-qw.  Caus.  ^q^rrfff.  Desid. 
PMHIl^frT  or  rmri4Hirri.     Freq.  qO^^^ri,  trO^f^. 

Seventh  Conjugation, 

218.  The  characteristic  peculiarity  of  this  conjugation  is 
the  insertion  before  the  radical  final  of  tT,  before  the  termina- 
tions which  contain  an  indicatory  Xf,  and  rf  before  the  rest. 

a.  All  the  verbs  of  this  class,  which  are  not  many,  end  in 
consonants  ;  and  the  union  of  them  with  the  initial  conso- 
nants of  the  terminations  takes  place  according  to  the  rules 
of  Sandhi.  fVy  is  substituted  for  ff  in  the  imperative.  The 
single  consonants  of  the  first  praeterite  are  rejected  after  a 
consonant  (rule  213). 

b.  A  verb  containing  a  penultimate  nasal  compounded  with 
its  final,  rejects  it  in  favour  of  the  conjugational  sign  before  the 
conjugational  tenses. 

c.  The  type  of  the  conjugation  is  ^  ^to  hinder'  or  ^  obstruct :' 
it  takes  both  Padas. 


S38 


VERBS. 


d.  After  an  aspirated  consonant  the  cT  and  "^  of  an  inflexional 
termination  become  V  (rule  i86) :  "if  preceded  by  t.  is  changed 
to  w  (rule  i8). 

Present,  '  I  obstruct/  &c. 


First  praeterite,  ^  I  obstructed/  &c. 


Imperative,  ^  May  I  obstruct/  &c. 


Potential,  ^  I  may  obstruct/  &c. 


^rurr  (N»*Mr4      ^rarnr 

^rtxn:         ^vuiiH       ^^wnr 

The  rest  are, 

2d  praet.   ^^,  ^^^ 


3d  praet.  ^T^tt?^  or  ^srrhf^ftT^,  ^n^^ 
(>n^i^lril,  ^sr^WW) ;  1st  fut.  d^ ;  2d  fut.  Clr^Pri  -W ;  bened. 
^HITTI^,  ^wt? ;  cond.  ^r&r^cn^  -it.  Pass.  ^xq^.  Caus.  ^t>r»3rfff. 
Desid.  ^^i^Pri  -W.      Freq.  ^"^um,  Cl'0%. 

^^  ( ^'9' )  '  to  become  manifest.' 
Notwithstanding    the   Anubandha    "35,    the    augment    ^   is 

inserted  in  the  third  praeterite.      This  and  the  two  following 

reject  the  nasal  penultimate  (rule  218,  h), 

Pres.  ^nfrh  ('^T^:,  ^iiyPfi) ;   ist  praet.  ^3{H«*;   2d  praet.  'STM^; 

3d  praet.  ^rrsfh^;   ist  fut.  w^,  ^rf^TTT ;   2d  fut.  ^f^fir,  ^f^^rfff; 

imp.  ^H?fi  (^r^jIV,  ^R5rnf»T)  ;  pot.  ^wnr;  bened.  ^i^JlW;  cond. 

^Brferw,  SHiPyufH.    Pass.  vhhj^.  Caus.  ^gi^f^fri.  Desid.  ^jr^nHMfrt. 


SEVENTH   CONJUGATION.  239 

^  (j^)  '  to  shine/ 
Pres.  ^:^  (^)  ;    ist  praet.  ^  ;    2d  praet.  ^-Mr^3«;  3d  praet. 
^fV^r^;   ist  fut.  ^r^idl ;  2,d  fut.  ^f^^jtq^;  imp.  ^;  pot.  ^tfr; 
bened.  3^f^^^g;    cond.  ^f^f^xtriT.      Pass.  ?[ifl^.     Caus.  ^^^i^fcf. 

Desid.  l[1^=^f>r^. 

Tfi^  (T5^)  '  to  wet.^ 

Pres.  g'Trf^  ("^nT:^  ^r^Pfl) ;  ist  praet.  4tHf^;  2d  praet.  Tf^T^^fiTT:; 
3d  praet.  '^Tgfhr;  ist  fut.  Tff^in;  2d  fut.  ^rr^mPH;  imp.  T^  ; 
pot.  <fti^;  bened.  <iil\t^;  cond.  "»ii1r<*Mr^.  Pass.  W^.  Caus. 
■^r^xrfrT.    Desid.  TfVi^^. 

"^  ("f^?)  '  to  play/  '  to  shine.^ 
The  augment  ^  is  optionally  inserted  before  ^  in  any  of  the 

non-conjugational  tenses. 

Pres.  "^fk,  ^^ ;  ist  praet.  ^M^iUit;,  ^r^ ;  2d  praet.  ^rs[t5  "^f^ 

(^^^  or  '^^);    3d  praet.  "^C^^,  ^^TSF^Ti;,    '^Tf^Tf,  ^5rsr% ; 

ist  fut.  "gfffTrr ;    2d  fut.  "srfftqfjr  -^  or  "Sn^fw  -W ;   imp.  "^TJT^, 

"^^iTf ;  pot.  '^:'f?nTT ,  t|^ri  ;  bened.  "^pTR^j  "S^ff^^  <|rt/la  ;   cond. 

^ii^nimrl^  -^5  ^n|W7^  -TT.     Pass.  "^W.     Caus.    ^^^ifri.      Desid. 

rx^;^r^^  Pri  -%  f^^wflT  -K.     Freq.  ^^1?r^,  xi^OPri,  ^^ft. 

W^  '  to  injure.^ 

This  verb  inserts  ^  before  the  conjugational  sign  before  the 
terminations  beginning  with  consonants  which  reject  xi.  For 
the  changes  off,  see  rule  213,  c,  8. 

Pres.  i}ii)Pd  ( iji) r\i^,  l^f^,  ir^t,  ^^Pnf,  ^53^) ;  ist  praet.  ^T^^ 

(^HJIHJ) ;    2d  praet.   wsf;    3d  praet.  WrT^;    ist  fut.  "ffffwT; 

2d  fut.  irff "ojfw ;   imp.  "^^  ("5^?  T^) '  pot*   i^^^ 5    bened. 

•^^m^;    cond.   ^nrff"ai"?^.      Pass.   l^Jt.      Caus.    H^^Pri.      Desid. 

iTTTft^fw.    Freq.  hO^^itI',  irtfl. 

fW^    fnf^^)  '  to  break/  ^  to  divide.' 
Pres.  firTi%,  f>T%;   ist  praet.  ^Phhv^,  ^^rW^;    2d  praet.  fw^^ 
f%fW^;    3d   praet.  ^rfW^W    or  ^r^w'h^,   ^rfk^;    ist   fut.   Hwr ; 
2d   fut.   >^wrffT  -K ;    imp.   fH^r^^   fwwf ;    pot.   fW^mr,   fWr^ ; 


240  VERBS. 

bened.  fjRrT?!;,  fWr^ ;  cond.  ^n^SffT^  -TT.  Pass.  f^mk.  Caus. 
d^ufw.    Desid.  f%f>TWfTfr  -W.     Freq.  ^^jjrk,  "^iWw. 

There  are  several  other  verbs  in  this  conjugation  similarly 
inflected ;  as, 

"^  ('^^)  ^  to  send :'  TOrf%,  "^^^  "^tWl,  ^^\  or  ^sn^wft{, 

f^  (f^^)  '  to  cut :'  fw^%  fi^,  "twT,  ^^rfSRTfT  or  '^r^wt?!;, 
^  (l^)  '  to  join/  ^  to  unite :'  IJ^rf^,  5^,  ^«ftw,  "^^^i^  or 
ft^  (ftf^)  '  to  purge :'  tof^,  ftii,  "tw,  ^rft?^l^  or  ^ft^W, 
f^  (f¥^)   '  to  separate  :'    f^^fi;,   f^,  ^,  ^3if^"i|;  or 

>T^  ^  to  break.' 

See  rule  218,  b. 

Pres.  H^rf^;  ist  praet.  ^WT5R;  2d  praet.  "^^T^;  3d  praet. 
^awfsf^;  1st  fut.  HW;  2d  fut.  >t^fjT;  imp.  ^J^;  pot.  Hi^rni^; 
bened.  H5??Tf^;  cond.  'W^T^.  Pass.  Hiif^.  Caus.  >T^^. 
Desid.  "fwejfTT.      Freq.  -stHWk,  -#4%. 

»T»T  ^  to  eat/  '  to  enjoy/  ^  to  cherish.^ 
Pres.  >prf^,  >J^;  ist  praet.  W>pr^,  ^n|li ;  2d  praet.  "5*Tt»r, 
^>|% ;  3d  praet.  ^sw^^fhi;,  w^ ;  ist  fut.  >rtw ;  2d  fut.  H^^rfir  -w ; 
imp.  >pT^,  ^W;  pot.  ^Tt{^,  ^J^^j  bened.  ^JWTri;,  >JW^ ; 
cond.  "Wt^ni;  -TT.  Pass,  ijiir^.  Caus.  Hl^^fri.  Desid.  f  H^  -^. 
Freq.  ^^>J5iT^,  ^^tHt% 

f^  (^i^f%^)  '  to  fear/  '  to  tremble.' 
This   verb  does  not   change  its  radical  vowel  when   ^  is 

inserted. 

Pres.  f^TTf^j    ist  praet.  -^HpcJHoh;   2d  praet.  f%^  (f^^^nr) ; 

3d  praet.  ^arf^raf^;  ist  fut.  f^fs^ril;  2d  fut.  -f^ftfBifiT;  imp.  f%^ ; 

pot.   r^Tqiri;;    bened.  f%wn^;    cond.  ^^ftr^Tr^.      Pass.  f^w. 

Caus.  ^iTufiT.     Desid.  f^f^pTii^rrf.     Freq.  ^^mi,  %^. 


EIGHTH   CONJUGATION.  24)1 

%'R  ("f^"^)  *  to  distinguish/ 

Pres.  %^  ;    ist  praet.  -^f^H^ ;    2d  praet.  f^^  (f^T^fT^)  ; 

3d  praet.  -3jr^rMrf;    ist  fut.  ^;    2d  fut.  "^fw ;    imp.  fi^PTf 

(%fj(I5  or  f^n!?f^,  f^'^fmrn) ;  pot.  fgfNnr ;  bened.  f^nqri^;  cond. 

•^qr^.     Pass.  %«l^.    Caus.  "^rWw.    Desid.  f^r^nsfpH.     Freq. 

ftf^  ( ftr^),  ^  to  grind,'  is  similarly  conjugated. 

ff^  (f^f^)  '  to  injure^  or  '  kill.' 
The  nasal  which  the  verb  derives  from  the  Anubandha  is 

replaced  by  the  conjugational  sign  in  the  conjugational  tenses. 
Pres.  f^^Tl%;    ist  praet.  ^^IT  (^^*WIH,  ^^rf^t  or  ^nP^Hri^, 

'STf^HflH) ;   2d  praet.  ftrf^;  3d  praet.  "^rf^^fh^;   ist  fut.  f^fwr; 

2d  fut.   f^T^tufri  ;    imp.   f^H^;    pot.  f^FTTr^;   bened.  f^^T!^; 

cond.  ^rf^f-Hmfl^.    Pass,  f^^ri.    Caus.  f^^nrfir.    Desid.  fa n^T^MPff. 

Freq.  ^f^^W,  ^fw- 

Eighth  Conjugation. 

219.  In  this  conjugation  'g'  is  subjoined  to  the  root,  which 
before  a  termination  containing  an  indicatory  tr  becomes  ^. 

a.  Before  a  termination  beginning  with  "sr  or  H  the  augment 
"3"  may  be  rejected  (see  rule  216,  a), 

b.  f^  in  the  imperative  is  rejected. 

c.  In  the  third  praeterite  of  the  i^tmane-pada  the  sibilant  of 
^j  Wr^5  may  be  rejected,  when  a  radical  final  consonant  is 
dropped. 

d.  There  are  but  few  verbs  in  this  conjugation,  and  with 
one  exception,  that  of  ^,  they  all  end  in  nasals  ;  being 
therefore  exactly  analogous  to  verbs  of  the  fifth  conjugation, 
which  insert  "^. 

e.  Such  verbs  as  have  a  penultimate  short  vowel,  other 
than  ^,  change  it  optionally  to  its  Guna  equivalent  in  the 
conjugational  tenses. 

The  type  of  the  conjugation  is  THT  ^  to  stretch,*  which  takes 
both  Padas. 

I  i 


24£ 


VERBS. 


infrfir         ir^: 


if^    wg^  ^T^    'f'yT^  ^n»T% 


Present,  *  I  stretch/  &c. 
First  praeterite,  ^  I  stretched/  &c. 


WrPT 


SHHVmrtf 


Imperative,  '  May  I  stretch,'  &c. 

J   .,_,           ,      ♦ 

, ,  ,t               1.11-  ■. ... 

ri^M           fiHI'ill 

ritjril               rtH*^ 

rtjiti           n»<nfli* 

Potential,  ^  I  may  stretch,^  &c. 


The  other  tenses  are, 

2d  praet.  mrR,  ^;  3d  praet.  ^nP^?^  or  ^TrTpftTir,  Wrnr  or 
^riPHg  ;  ist  fut.  drHHI ;  3d  fut.  irf^THrfrr  -^;  bened.  Tnmi^, 
irf^^ ;  cond.  SHrtPHUIrf  -If.  Pass,  in^  or  imk.  Cans.  in^iTfiT. 
Desid.  frnrfrT^  -w,  fdril^frt  -^,  fcTirRfiff -^  Freq.  iPir^,  WnnftfiT, 
ri»dr»H. 

The  remaining  verbs  of  this  class,  which,  except  "^5  end  in 
a  nasal,  are  the  following :  they  all  may  take  both  Padas. 
^Tir '  to  go :'  ^rtfVftr,  ^w  or  ^rjiVfif,  ^^,  wftSin,  ^rntsffi^, 

'5rr#  or  ^rrPS^. 
•?^  '  to  kill  or  hurt :'  it  does  not  elongate  the  vowel  in  the 
third  praeterite :  ^spprfff,  W^,  '^^fwin,  ^ST^pr^W,  ^(^  or 
^HlfniK. 
f^  ^to  kill  or  hurt:'    ftprfrfiT  or  ^Trfrfir,  f^^  or  ^w, 

"^ftnTT,  ^T^TifhT,  wf^lT  or  ^r^fw. 
-^  ^  to  shine :'    ilSlfri,  XT^  or   ^ilfifH,  ^^y  'jHnidl,   ^ii^ril, 

^Miii!jfr«,  ^wirt  or  ^nrfity. 


NINTH   CONJUGATION.  S4S 

-jm  '  to  eat  grass :'    ^Tfftfw  or  w^tfff,   ip^  or  ir§ff,    rrfiSnT, 

•»nHiilTrf ,  ^Hriri  or  ^snrft§¥. 
irq^  ^  to  understand  :*  'T^^?  TpTfTT,  ^!r*nT  or  ^nrPfiT. 
W^T  *  to  ask :'  ^^W,  ^^^,  ^f^ffH,  ^T^W  or  -HmnlF,  ^T^rT  or 

^W,  '  to  give/  optionally  rejects  the  final,  and  makes  the 
vowel  long  before  xr;  it  does  the  same  before  the  IT 
and  "^rnr  of  the  third  praeterite  :  '^hIPh,  ^"^W,  ^fHHI, 
^nmw  or  ^miTf,  "snnfhr  or  ^rar^fhr,  ^mw  or  ^fRrfVr^ 
(^nrRrr:  or  ^mfTrer:). 

^  ' to  do/ 
In  the  conjugational  tenses  the  radical  vowel  substitutes,  as 
usual,  the  GuAa  letter  before  the  conjugational  sign  in  the 
inflexions  which  have  an  indicatory  x^^;  but  before  the  rest  it 
substitutes  TJl.  It  rejects  the  conjugational  sign  before  ^5  it, 
and  XT.     It  takes  both  Padas. 

Pres.  -gidfir  (^^:,  fff^,  ft:  f^O^  1^  (ifrw,  ffw) ; 
ist  praet.  ^?T^7^  (-if^ijril,  -il<+<^H),  -H*^H  (-5i*|lril,  ^*Sri)  ;  2d 
praet.  "^^fiTT  (^^J?  '^^y  ^^^,  ^<*K  or  '^^t,  ^^),  ^  (^^)  5 
3d  praet.  Wohltffi^  (^T^filtt,  ww|:),  ^"^  (*ii<*mril,  'H^Mri,  ■et<*'qi:, 
-^M<jiMmi,  "^Tfi,  w^) ;  ist  fut.  "Sfiti;  2d  fut.  <*ri,uird  -^;  imp. 
^^  (f^,  ci«i:^iriii,  <*mn),  "5^  (^tTfTT,  ^tirf) ;  pot.  fwri^, 
4^ri;  bened.  f^nrn^,  g;^;  cond.  ^<*fl,iirff  -W.  Pass.  f^HTW; 
3d  praet.  '^Er^iTfi:.  Caus.  ctiKuPri  -W ;  3d  praet.  »H^«*l,f^  -TT. 
Desid.  fq^'^^fw  -^.  Freq.  Q^a{>^,  ^^»cHtt,  ^fbfi^Hw  or  xiOohOPd, 
^ff ,  '^PlLchP^  or  xiOohP^. 

Ninth  Conjugation. 

220.  The  verbs  of  this  class  subjoin  "5TT  to  the  root  before 
terminations  beginning  with  consonants  which  reject  x^;  tft 
before  the  other  terminations  beginning  with  a  consonant ; 
and  tT  before  those  which  begin  with  a  vowel. 

a.  The  terminations  undergo  no  change. 

b.  Verbs  ending  in  consonants  substitute  ^TT«T  for  the  con- 
jugational sign  and  the  termination  f^,  in  the  imperative. 

I  i  2 


2U 


VERBS. 


c.  A  class  of  verbs  called  i^rf^  from  ^ '  to  purify/  ending 
in  vowelS;,  make  them  short  in  the  conjugational  tenses. 
Some  others  make  the  vowel  short  only  before  the  termina- 
tions of  the  second  praeterite  not  requiring  Guna. 

The  model  of  the  class  is  "^  ^  to  buy,'  which  takes  both 
Padas.  The  «T  of  the  conjugational  augment  becomes  ^  (rule 
i8). 


Present,  '  I  buy/  &c. 


■^Nhr: 


First  praeterite,  '  I  bought/  &c. 


Imperative,  *  May  I  buy/  &c. 


sa-^hliiilri      '^nRNIhf      ^sr^Tohri:  ^^-^ilmi^f    w^M?^ 
sH-^lnilrif     w^^tw^      w^Mif    -H-^mtii    ^r^Nnr 

May  I  buy/  &c. 

kc. 
^^iW"^:    ^liin^iivji     ^^^hifh^ 


Potential,  ^  I  may  buy/  &c 


The  other  tenses  are, 

2,d  praet.  "Nott  ("Nf^inrj:,  "N^iftm  or  fq^),  Nf^^;  3d  praet. 
^T^^,  ^3^!?;  ist  fut.  9fiTT;  2d  fut.  -awfw  -^;  bened.  -^trmi, 
^!^ ;  cond.  ^^r35^  -7f.  Pass.  ^^Twk,  Caus.  "ginnrfff.  Desid. 
r^^lMfri  -^.     Freq.  ^^5hr^,  ^W^,  ^^. 

So  ifh^  *  to  desire,^  and  ift^  '  to  injure'  or  '  kill :'  the  latter 
in  the  non- conjugational  tenses  substitutes  ^TT  for  the  final: 
see  fir,  fifth  conjugation. 

^T^T  ^  to  eat.^ 

Pres.  wwrfw;    ist  praet.  WWrT;    2d  praet.  Wl^;   3d  praet. 


NINTH   CONJUGATION.  245 

^^tt^tt;    1st  fut.  ^^nn;    2d  fut.  wf^mfw;   imp.  SH^lff;    pot. 
^rahmr ;    bened.  "^xm^;    cond.  -iilP^iuifi^. 
For  the  rest,  se^  ^^r^T,  fifth  conjugation. 

"% '  to  go.' 

As  belonging  to  the  class  i^lf?^  the  vowel  is  short  in  the 
conjugational  tenses. 

Pres.  ^rrnfrr ;  ist  praet.  '^n^W;  3d  praet.  ^SJTT^^^;  3d  praet. 
^TT^;  ist  fut.  wfbrr,  w^in;  2d  fut.  ^^rftrarfir,  ^^rfir;  imp. 
'•^mi^ ;  pot.  •^Tijtxrnr ;  bened.  ^^tt^;;  cond.  -mtoiK. 

See  ^  of  the  first  conjugation. 

ffi^  ( f^i^ )  ^  to  be  distressed.' 
Pres.  r^Sjifri  ;  ist  praet.  ^f^iairl^;  2d  praet.  f%#^ ;  3d  praet. 
^^^fh^  or  ^fir^;  1st  fut.  "i^fTT,  ^^T;  2d  fut.  "jj%«rfiT> 
trs^;  imp.  fw^l  pot.  fli^t^;  bened.  ffrr^Tl^;  cond. 
^f^WW,  ^^r^^nr.  Pass,  f^^ijri.  Caus.  "J^TErflT.  Desid. 
fqi^nrfw,  Nfll%^,  fqfire^.      Freq.  ^r^^i\%  ^^. 

'm^  '  to  be  agitated.' 
Pres.  "^wfTT;    ist  praet.  "^mVTrr;   2d  praet.  "^^^5  3d  praet. 
^T^WtlT;   1st  fut.  "C^Hin ;  2d  fut.  TB^rfW^sifw ;  imp.  -^^fT^  ("^^TTW) ; ' 
pot.  ■^^fhniT;  bened.  "^^mt;;  cond.  ^5n^Y5rHnT .   Pass.  -^wr^.  Caus. 
"E^tiT^.     Desid.  ^ftr^fiT.     Freq.  ^^t^Wff,  ^'llsfirJtT. 

JEF^  ^  to  arrange  in  order.' 

This  rejects  the  radical  nasal  in  favour  of  the  conjugational 
sign  ;  also  before  xf,  and  optionally  before  the  terminations  of 
the  second  praeterite^  when  before  those  which  do  not  require 
the  change  of  a  radical  vowel,  ij  may  be  substituted  for  ^. 

Pres.  ^T'^^^W  ;  ist  praet.  '5r?l'5(^r^;  2d  praet.  ^U^^i,  ^RTT^ 
(»ii|*-^i:^  ^r^O  5  3^  praet.  "^IF^^^;  ist  fut.  ?ifV^nn;  2d  fut. 
fffV^rarfw;  imp.  JjT^HTJ  ;  pot.  ?I'5^^?fhrnT;  bened.  ?TWnT;  cond. 
^ij^v^mrT.  Pass.  KWTi-  Caus.  ^-viMfri.  Desid.  rdj^nrvmrri. 
Freq.  ^ilijJa^H,  ^ii^'-v/lpH,  i^ffe. 

Other  verbs  are  similarly  inflected  ;  as,  "^^  '  to  suffer  pain  :' 


246  VERBS. 

f'^^^Trfw,   ffVwT,   "^^  or   ^^,    f^mi^.  —  -q^  ^  to   churn:' 

*  to  loosen :'  ^^^nfiT,  ^1^:^nn,  ^T^F^  or  ^v^vn  (^fr5P?5r^:,  ^^^zr^:), 

arf^  ^  to  take.' 

This  substitutes  ^  for  the  semivowel  in  the  conjugational 
tenses.  It  makes  the  augment  ^  long  in  every  tense  except 
the  second  praeterite. 

Pres.  Jj^lPd,  'f^ ;  ist  praet.  >^Jj^lri^,  ^nj^Jhr ;  2d  praet. 
^RTT^  {Wl^:,  ^ur^%  Wjf^)  ;  3d  praet.  v^jjj^lri^,  -iii|^1»;  ist 
fut.  JJ^tTfT;  2d  fut.  Jj^ird  -^;  imp.  ij^^  (^^T^),  'J^fhlf ; 
pot.  'T^fhni^,  Jj^lri;  bened.  'pnii;,  ij^1tfl«;  cond.  ^sr^l^fBn^ -W. 
Pass.  ^j^.   Caus.  aii^^fd  -TT.  Desid.  r^^^Pd  -¥.    Freq.  ^f^fn^, 

iiii^^Pd,  ^mrf^. 

^  '  to  know.' 

This  becomes  ^TT  before  the  conjugational  terminations. 

Pres.  ^iHifd,  «n^t^;  ist  praet.  ^jifRTTt^,  ^sHTRtw;  2d  praet. 
^T^,  t1%;  3d  praet.  '^T^TRftl^,  ^?^T^ ;  ist  fut.  ^mn  ;  2d  fut. 
^TT^fTT-^;  imp.  ^TRTf,  ^Rtirf ;  pot.  ITF^xm^,  ^pOit;  bened. 
§Trn^,  FRTTT,  ^rr^l?;  cond.  ^t^t^w  -it.  Pass.  ^iT^.  Caus. 
sjimAlPd.     Desid.  f^r^rrofw  -W.     Freq.  "sn^TT^,  ^fl^Pd  or  ^T^IT. 

tETT  '  to  become  old.' 

The  semivowel  is  changed  to  ^  in  the  conjugational  tenses, 
and  to  ^  before  if. 

Pres.  PfTHlPd  ;  ist  praet.  ^rftrTTW;  2d  praet.  ftn^n;  3d  praet. 
^3^(^1ft^;  ist  fut.  -RHWr;  2d  fut.  i^^l^Pd  ;  imp.  PkhiJ;  pot. 
f»rfNm^;  bened.  "sfhrn^;  cond.  Wa^TTW?^*  Pass.  WRW,  "sfhnr. 
Caus.  3inW^.      Freq.  ^^1i|d,  ^^IxMlPd. 

¥(^)''^(H!T)^'to*i'e«^ble.' 
As  the  verb  with  the  long  final  vowel  shortens  this  in  the 
conjugational  tenses,  there  is  no  difference  in  the  inflexions: 
in  the  other  tenses  the  difference  is  that  of  the  insertion  or 
omission  of  ^5  except  in  the  third  praeterite  Parasmai-pada, 
where  it  is  inserted  in  both  verbs. 


NINTH  CONJUGATION.  247 

Pres.  vhiPh,  vrft^  ;  ist  praet.  ^srVTfnr,  '^Tg^ftlT  ;  ad  praet.  ^VR, 
jg^ ;  3d  praet.  ^mT^,  ^rvf^T?  or  ^nf^ ;  ist  fut.  ^ttH,  vf^in ;  2d 
fut.  viluffd  -w^  vf^TqfiT  -^ ;  imp.  V^,  V^fhrf ;  pot.  vrfhnTT ,  ^^^  5 
bened.  Y^trrrT,  >rt^,  vf^TR^ ;  cond.  ^snihir?^  -W,  "^nrfTHTlT  -TT. 

For  the  rest,  see  v  and  ^,  fifth  conjugation. 

Y^  ^  to  nourish.^ 

In  this  conjugation  it  takes  ^. 

Pres.  yuiiifri  ;  ist  praet.  ^rgwn^;  2d  praet.  '^^;  3d  praet. 
wN^r^;  ist  fut.  tftfqin;  2d  fut.  xflfq^rftf;  imp.  ijmiij;  pot. 
ytun^lrt^;    bened.  "J^mt;;    cond.  ^KiflPMUif^. 

The  rest  as  ^,  fourth  conjugation. 

'^ '  to  purify.^ 

This  is  the  first  verb  of  a  class  ending  in  long  vowels,  of 
which  the  final  is  made  short  before  the  conjugational  sign. 

Pres.  JHiCa,  ^^ ;  ist  praet.  ^gHTff,  '^r^'^ftlT;  2d  praet. 
T'^^  Yi^»  3^  P^^*-  ^^n^»  'ii^r^V;  ist  fut.  TTf^WT;  2d  fut. 
irf^^rffT  -w;  imp.  ^gpTTj,  gnldf ;  pot.  'J'ffhrnr,  '^^;  bened. 
""gPtrn^,  ^^^ ;  cond.  w^fran^  -if.  Pass.  ijir^.  Caus.  qmnPri. 
Desid.  yijKfH  -w  or  fWWlT  -^.     Freq.  M\^'a,  TT>ftfif. 

The  following  verbs  belong  to  the  class  x^rf^ : 

^  ^  to  go  f  as  above. 

^  '  to  injure  :'    fmfiff  f^,  -^flkm,  ^in^,  ^MchiOfi,  ^Rift:?, 

-^  *  to  sound :'  ijmfif,  ifbTT,  tt^ITT,  ^STttt^,  'fhtTrT. 
»J  ^  to  decay  :'  ^mCti,  wPm I,  "*iOfil,  ^3nTKbr,  ifNtri^. 
^ '  to  tear :'  ^iin fd,  ^fbrr,  ^^drTT,  ^a^iOrt;,  ^htlr^. 
v^' to  shake;'  as  above. 

^  ^  to  fill :'  Ynfff?  ^^^^5  ^TT^^  ^nrrdTT,  !*«!;. 

^  '  to  threaten  :'  ^jrinffT,  ntar,  vn^,  ^^SMT^,  ^^TtT. 

>^  '  to  support :'  fwrf^,  ^,  ^R§^. 

55^  ^  to  injure  :'  ^ifrT,  "dbTT,  ^R^dm,  ^UHlOrt^,  »ft%11(^. 

^  '  to  roar :'  ft^urfw,  "bfT,  ^sr:^. 

<?ft  ^  to  cling  to  :'   fc5^TTfw,  ^TH,  ^^. 


S48  VERBS. 

<^^  to  cut :'    rJHlfri,  75^,  Hf^rTT,  ^T^T^lt;?  ^TFjf^F. 

"^  ^  to  choose  :'  see  ^  below. 

lj\  ^  to  choose  :'  f^^rjifiT,  WT^  ^t^. 

^  ^  to  support :'  f^TTTfrT^  ^,  ^^. 

3[  '  to  injure  :'  see  below. 

m  '  to  spread  :'  see  below. 

"jft  (ift^)  *  to  please/  ^  to  desire.' 
This  and  several  other  verbs  of  the  class  ending  in  long 
vowels  do  not  make  them  short,  as  not  belonging  to  the  class 

Pres.  if) III  I  Pd,  Tjt^;  ist  praet.  ^nflwiTi;,  '^nfNfhr;  2d  praet. 
fxTTTPT,  fxrflR;  3d  praet.  ^sit^,  ^TW;  ist  fut.  THH ;  2d  fut. 
i^rfw  -^;  imp.  ifhUTf,  ifhjfhrf;  pot.  Ilkft^,  Tft^tw;  bened. 
ifhmT,  i^ ;  cond.  w^  -Tf.  Pass.  ifhm.  Cans,  ifliii^rif. 
Desid.  finf^TT  -^.     Freq.  ^^,  MH^lPri,  ^^. 

So  gi  ^  to  sound/  ch^llfri,  ^rfff,  &c. ;  and  "^  ^  to  cook/ 
Tftiirrfw,  'ifl^fly^.  ^  *  to  cook/  and  ^  '  to  choose/  are  option- 
ally long  or  short ;   ^/l^Iirrf,  fHWlfw ;   "^hOTfif,  Priori Pri. 

^^  ^  to  bind.' 

This  drops  its  nasal  in  the  conjugational  tenses,  and  before  tt. 

Pres.  ■qmfrr;  ist  praet.  ■^T^Trrrr;  3d  praet.  WW^  («i«j prefer  or 
-^RT^) ;  3d  praet.  ^Wlrtflrt^  (^n4^f,  '^mfiW:)  ;  ist  fut.  'srST ; 
2d  fut.  >fii5rffT;  imp.  "qnT^;  pot.  w^hrnr;  bened.  '^Tzrn^;  cond. 
^THp^ni;^.  Pass.  -srar^.  Caus.  ^^^.  Desid.  f^Hr^rfir.  Freq. 
WT^Tflir,  cTHHOPri,  «iiqP^. 

jft  ^  to  kill'  or  '  injure.' 

This  verb,  like  fiT  in  the  fifth  conjugation,  is  inflected  as  if 
it  ended  in  ^TT  in  the  non-conjugational  tenses,  except  before 
the  terminations  of  the  second  praeterite  beginning  with  vowels, 
and  before  xr. 

Pres.  tflHlPri,  *fl«^ri ;  ist  praet.  ^^nfhm^,  ^nfliftiT;  2d  praet. 
»nft  or  WTH^  (Ph«|^:,  hPhv^  or  httt)  ;  3d  praet.  ^wnftT^,  Sm*h«  ; 


NINTH  CONJUGATION.  249 

ist  fut.  min;    2d  fut.   Hl^fri  -^;    imp.  Tf^TTJ,  jfbftTff;    pot. 
♦flffliilrt,  Jfhfhr;  bened.  jftim^;  cond.  wiTT^T^  -IT. 
For  the  rest,  see  f^,  fifth  conjugation. 

"5  ^  to  join.' 

Pres.  -g^Tfw,  ^^;  ist  praet.  ^STfmt;,  '^STJ^;  imp.  ^Tf, 
^pflirf ;  pot.  "g^fhm^,  grfliT. 

For  the  rest,  see  ^,  second  conjugation. 

?  ("^)  ^  to  choose.' 
Pres.  '|Hlirri,  ^#w;    ist  praet.  ^ar^Tjm^,  ^T^tlT;   imp.  ^^, 

^Tifhrf ;  pot.  "i^rfhrn^,  <j^nH. 

For  the  rest,  see  "^  of  the  fifth  conjugation.  '^  ("^)  and  ^ 
('^*^)j  verbs  having  the  same  meaning,  are  similarly  conju- 
gated :  the  first  is  of  course  restricted  to  the  j^tmane-pada. 

'SI  '  to  hurt.' 

It  is  one  of  the  class  mfr^. 

Pres.  ^prfw;  ist  praet.  ^ranoTi^;  2d  praet.  "^r^TTT:  (^i^Kg:  or 
T^mw:);  3d  praet.  ^^qiTi^^;  ist  fut.  ^(Pui,  ^T^WT ;  2d  fut. 
^ftlQTfiT,  I5r6"arfw;  imp.  "SJTHTTf ;  pot.  -gntihrnT;  bened.  "^ftx^TTT; 
cond.  w^rirailT,  ^^^lOmTT.  Pass.  ^^fh^^.  Caus.  ^TTirfTr.  Desid. 
f^mft^fif,  n^l^lOMPri,  fw^^fifT.     Freq.  ^^fi^Sri,  ^lUlPS. 

f^  (f^)  '  to  bind.' 
Pres.  fH^fifd,  ftnft^;  ist  praet.  "^iPTTiT,  wftr^;  2d  praet. 
Oh  mil,  ftm;  3d  praet.  'ii^Mlrt^,  ^F;  ist  fut.  d?rr;  2d  fut. 
^Tirfifr  -^ ;  imp.  fHHij,  ffulrif ;  pot.  -ftn^hrnT,  ftnfhr ;  bened. 
^E(hm^,  ^^ ;  cond.  ^i^it;  -"ff-  Pass.  ^fN^.  Caus.  f^i^^Pri. 
Desid.  ■ftraNfrT  -^.     Freq.  ^^,  witfw,  %^fw. 

^  ( ^*T )  '  to  leap,'  '  to  cover.' 
Pres.  i^HlPri^  ^"^ ;    ist  praet.  "^^,  'W^nld  ;   2d  praet. 
^^\%  1^ ;  3^  pr^et.  ^sr^tftTi;,  vii^^g  ;   ist  fut.  ^^RtiH ;  2d  fut. 
^^MPri  -ff ;  imp.  ^?TT^  ^nlrif ;  pot.  ^ifrmr^j  *5*<»fld  ;  bened. 

Kk 


VERBS. 


^^^\,  ^^ ;    cond.  ^n^-HTf^  --rr.    Pass.  ^W.    Caus.  ^N^jfif. 
Desid.  ^^^fiT  -W.     Freq.  W^^^Ti,  ^^tfw. 
It  is  also  a  verb  of  the  fifth  conjugation. 

^^n^  C"^^)  ^  to  stop.* 

This  rejects  its  nasal  before  the  conjugational  sign,  and 
before  xr. 

Pres.  ^a'^jrffT;  ist  praet.  xMiH44lft^;  ^^  praet.  H^cTFiT;  3d  prset. 
^ST^cMiT  or  ^ST^cWhfi^^ ;  ist  fut.  wf^fTT;  3d  fut.  ^HNuifd  ;  imp. 
^cHITf;  pot.  ^Vhmr;  bened.  ^cr«m^;  cond.  SHMPwran^.  Pass. 
^cP^.      Caus.    W^Hilfrf.       Desid.    fiT^fwr^fir.       Freq.    ril«*^ri, 

diiH*Htfir^  rrreffW. 

It  is  also  a  verb  of  the  fifth  conjugation,  HVtfff,  &c.  In 
the  same  manner  are  inflected  ^*>J,  ^T^,  and  '^i»>t,  having 
the  same  meaning. 

^  (^™)  ^  to  cover.^ 

Pres.  ^lilirri,  ^Hft ri  ;  ist  praet.  ^r^TW,  '^T^intiT;  2d  praet. 
ITWR,  ITRft;  3d  praet.  ^S4HlOlT,  ^srwfts',  -H{fiO^  or  '^rsftt ;  ist  fut. 
wfbrr,  «i!)rii ;  2d  fut.  ^crftsrfrr  -%  w^'orfw  -w ;  imp.  ^wtw, 
^^#(Tf ;  pot.  ^iifli^IrT,  ^^Tiftw ;  bened.  ^cfhtlrf;,  ^cTft^tF  or  aS^^; 
cond.  •^r^cTftiBriT  -w.  Pass.  ^fft^^.  Caus.  WKAtPff.  Desid. 
frtMtofri  -^3  PriwOTEird  -^,  flT^tfif  -W.     Freq.  W^cfhtw,  lOWft. 

Tenth  Conjugation, 

221.  Verbs  of  this  conjugation  take  for  their  conjugational 
sign  ^5  technically  termed  ■ftr^ ;  and  they  extend  the  insertion 
to  all  the  tenses  except  the  benedictive,  Parasmai-pada.  ^  is 
converted  to  ^5  and  Tj  becomes  ^r^,  before  a  vowel.  The  indi- 
catory in  of  the  sign  requires  the  substitution  of  ^sn  for  a 
radical  medial  ^,  and  of  the  Guna  equivalent  for  any  other 
short  medial  vowel. 

a.  Before  the  terminations  of  the  conjugational  tenses  all 
verbs  of  this  class  insert  ^pT,  that  is,  ^ ;  whilst  as  they  all 
take  the  augment  ^  in  the  two  futures  and  conditional,  there 
is  in  all  these  tenses  a  vowel,  before  which  the  conjugational 
sign  ^  becomes  ^,  and  then  wi^. 


TENTH   CONJUGATION.  251 

b.  In  these  modifications  of  the  base,  verbs  of  the  tenth 
class  are  analogous  to  the  causal  mode  of  verbs  ;  and  this 
analogy  extends  to  other  particulars,  such  as  the  insertion  of 
certain  augments,  as  tr,  ^,  "5T,  &c.,  before  the  conjugational  sign. 

c.  The  analogy  to  the  causal  mode  is  still  more  evident  in 
the  identity  of  the  construction  of  the  third  praeterite.  It  is 
formed  with  the  terminations  of  the  first  praeterite,  preceded 
by  ^  (rule  190,  e.  p.  123),  and  with  a  reduplication  of  the 
root,  agreeably  to  the  rules  already  given  for  the  causal  (rule 
202,  e  to  /.  p.  136,  &c.). 

d.  Although  not  peculiar  to  the  causal,  an  analogy  is  also 
presented  to  it  in  common  v>dth  derivative  forms  in  the  second 
praeterite,  which  in  this  class  is  formed  with  the  auxiliary 
verbs  (rule  189.  p.  121). 

€.  Verbs  having  a  medial  ^  do  not  make  it  long  when  they 
are  said  to  belong  to  the  class  fin^,  that  is,  have  an  indicatory 
IT ;  and  ^  or  any  other  radical  short  vowel  is  unchanged  in 
the  class  oir^rrf^,  the  verbs  of  which  are  said  to  have  an  indi- 
catory final  ^. 

f.  Verbs  of  this  conjugation,  with  the  conjugational  sign 
attached,  are  considered  to  be  polysyllabic,  and  therefore  do 
not  take  the  frequentative  mode ;  nor  can  they  be  considered 
as  having  a  causal  mode,  since  it  is  the  same  with  their  own, 
and  it  is  only  necessary  to  substitute  a  causal  for  an  active 
signification  to  the  same  inflexions. 

g.  All  verbs  signifying  '  to  speak'  or  *  to  kill'  may  be  con- 
jugated in  the  tenth,  as  well  as  in  the  class  to  which  they 
belong,  as  may  a  variety  of  other  verbs  ;  and  most  of  the 
verbs  which  belong  to  this  conjugation  may  be  inflected  also 
in  the  first.  The  number  of  verbs  is  therefore  somewhat 
indefinite  ;  but  from  the  uniformity  which  prevails  amongst 
them,  not  only  in  the  employment  of  the  conjugational  sign, 
but  in  the  formation  of  the  second  and  third  praeterites,  and 
the  insertion  of  the  augment  ^  in  the  other  tenses,  they  may 

K  k  2 


252 


VERBS. 


be  regarded  as  offering  fewer  difficulties  than  the  verbs  of  any- 
other  conjugation. 

The  verb  which  is  given  as  the  type  of  the  conjugation  is 
^  ^  to  steal,'  which  admits  of  both  Padas. 


Present,  ^  I  steal/  &c. 


^I^^iPh       ^^tTTTT^:       ^terro: 
^turftr        Mimm        mIim^ 
^tafiT        ^k^nn        ^^hr^rf^ir 


First  praeterite,  ^  I  stole,'  &c. 


■^n-Jl^^H^      >ij-Jii.^m      ^r^txTTR 

W^'kiK  ->^^1l.^ri         -^-^X^ri 

^^-cTli^iift;      w^kmrf      ^sr^k^ 


Second  praeterite  (in  both  Padas),  *  I  have  stolen,^ 
''^k^rnrnr  ^kTrnrrfti^        '"Tli^iiiHiP^H 

or  ^qk^TT^Jf^,  ^U^I^<*K  or  -^"il^^l^rfi,  &c. 


w^kTT^ 

&c. 


Third  praeterite,  '  I  had  stolen,'  &c. 


^^^ 


First  future,  '  I  shall  steal,'  &c. 


^'TkfwrftR  ^'^kfwr^:  -^^kftrrrrw: 
^^fkftnrrftr  ^fkftnrT^:  ^fkftnrT^ 
^kftnn       -'Tli.rMriiQ     ^^kfiwR: 


^sfkfEnrr^  '^kf^Tirr^^ 


"^krftnnTj 


Second  future,  '  I  will  or  shall  steal,'  &c. 


•Mli.rM«4irH   'qkfron^:   ^UPumiH: 
^'Tkftrarftr    -cTicr^mvi:    ^l<:rt|HT'^ 
^IcrMmPrt    ^^kftrsTrr:     ^^^kftroif^ 


"^kfiTGw  ^kftr^     ^firars^ 
'^kftrai^  ^i:fEr^      ^"kfw^ 


TENTH   CONJUGATION. 


253 


Imperative,  '  Let  me  steal,'  &c. 


Potential,  ^  I  may  steal,'  &c. 


^k^nmrf 


Benedictive,  ^  I  pray  I  may  steal,^  &c. 


^kf^nrts4 


Conditional,  ^  I  will  steal,  if,^  &c. 


^r^fjrarR;  w^firan^  ^HkftrorR 
^p^kfqx[T:  "i<-^"li.r^mri  ^^kftrarff 
^^HkfqTnnr  w^f^rsnri  ^^r^kfjm'?^ 


^NkftrsT^:  ^r^kf^rnnrf  ^^r^kftrstscr 
^NkPErnrrr  ^sn^kfcr^wf   ^sr^kf^m'if 


The  remaining  forms  are. 

Pass.  ^^;   3d  praet.  ^r^ftft:.     Cans.  ''^kqfiT.    Desid.  ^^- 
TfxrqfrT. 


^  '  to  disrespect.^ 

This  substitutes  ^  for  the  radical  vowel  in  the  reduplication 
of  the  third  praeterite. 

Pres.  ^Hg^Pri  ;  ist  praet.  ^npnr;  ^d  praet.  ^^^i*{m  ;  3d  praet. 
^rrf^TTiT;  ist  fut.  ^r^fcnrT;  3d  fut.  ^^uimfd;  imp.  ^rprtf;  pot. 
^H^iifT^;  bened.  ^TgmT;   cond.  ^siTgfxn'Tf^.     Pass.  ^a^Ati.     Desid. 

^  '  to  hurt,'  *  to  pain.' 
Pres.  ^\i\C({ ;    ist  praet.  "^nf^;    2d  praet.  ^sifxrr^^TT: ;    3d 
^  praet.  ^rrff^l^;   ist  fut.  "'H|P^ril ;   2d  fut.  ^H^Pi|iqPff ;  imp.  ^if^; 
pot.   ^ar^^;     bened.   ^TTT^;    cond.  ^arfftrsTr^.      Pass.   vr|Tff. 
Desid.  -^ff c^fq^fw. 


254  VERBS. 

?c5  ^  to  send/ 
Pres.  ijc^trfw;  ist  praet.  TO"^7T;  3d  proet.  ^H^nHHT ;  3d  praet. 
^<9(51|;;    ist  fut.  iTTyfEnn;    2,d  fut.  iJHftraiflT;    imp.   ijc5J^; 
pot.   irc5^lT;     bened.   ^"^mf^;    cond.   TOftTHT?^.      Pass.    ^;^w. 
Desid.  ^f^f^f^flT. 

WH  *  to  wink/  ^  to  close. ^ 

This  and  most  other  verbs  make  the  medial  ^  long  through- 
out (rule  221).  They  have  the  vowel  optionally  short  in  the 
third  proeterite ;  when  the  redupHcated  vowel  is  ^,  changeable 
to  ^  (rule  202,  j.  p.  137). 

Pres.  chiiLiiiPri  ;  ist  praet.  ^^rsiTRpn^;  2d  praet.  chiitnimnr;  3d 
praet.  w^oRTOTT  or  ^Nt^Trrw ;  ist  fut.  ofirrnftnTT ;  2d  fut.  cfrrofqxqfiT ; 
imp.  ^RTO-irff;  pot.  ohiiii^H^;  bened.  ■SFHRTTT^;  cond.  ^nRTftn-qn;. 
Pass.  cRXnnf.     Desid.  "NroRT^irf'T^rfiT. 

^jr^r  ^  to  speak.' 
This  is  the   first  of  a   class  rejecting   a  final  ^,  and  the 
radical  vowel  therefore  is  unchanged :  it  is  optionally  changed 
to  ^  in  the  reduplication  of  the  third  praeterite. 

Pres.   cK^nrnr;    ist  praet.  ^oji^nJT^;    2d  praet.  "SK^XTRUT;    3d 
praet.  "^T^^jTziTf^  or  '^r^^;   ist  fut.  "SR^rfxnn;  2d  fut.  "SR^rftiwfiT ; 
imp.  "^Rxrj ;  pot.  "Sfi^lT ;  bened.  "^EWnr ;  cond.  ^^fi^rfq^qiT .   Pass. 
oRJEq^.    Desid.  ■N^fi^rftzr^fw. 
Other  verbs  of  this  class  are, 
'    cRc^  ^  to  count :'   'Wc^T^,  W^^ic^JT^. 
"^  ^  to  contract :'  ^T^fiff,  ^r^f^» 
^^  *  to  astonish  :'  "^^Tfir,  ^^^TJ^- 
7^  '  to  count :'  Triij-qfrf.      But  this  optionally  inserts  ^  in 

the  third  praeterite  :  ^nTJTCrf^  or  ^nftiFrn^. 
71^  '  to  speak  :'  7T^"fir,  "^iiT^'rr. 
TjTir '  to  advise  :'  ^^,  -H^jyuirt^. 
1T5  ^  to  take  :'   ^Vt^j  ^nrjflT. 
%SC^  ^  to  sound  :'   SctH^Pri,  ^SSRf^. 
VZ  '  to  tie  :'   TT^xrf^fr,  ^snTTTrT. 
11^  '  to  go  -:  TT^Tlfir,  ^STTR^TT . 


TENTH   CONJUGATION.  255 

xr5T  '  to  tie  :'  V^m^ti,  -HMM^Irt^. 

^  '  to  contract :'   ije^fri,  wg^Tl^. 

^  ^  to  seek  :'   ijJ|i|H,  "»KH*J'lrt. 

T?^  *  to  make  :'  t^^rflT^  ^snj?^. 

T^  '  to  leave  :'  T^rrfw,  ^nx^.      It  also  makes  ^r^T^. 

^Z  '  to  surround  :'   cjd^Pri^  ^T^'^TiT . 

«R  ^  to  choose  :'  IJTfftf,  "^(^^Tj^. 

-^  '  to  speak  ill :'  -^tZ^fftf,  ^fr^T^TTir . 

^R  '  to  be  weak  :'  "^r^nrfff,  w^fm^. 

^cPT  '  to  sound  :'   WH^fri,  ^nreTTiT . 

^  ^  to  envy :'  ^^xrfiT^  ^rq^W . 

^t '  to  sound :'   ^C^fri,  W^T^ni;. 

^»TR  ^  to  play,'  as  a  child. 
Pres.  •^HRirfTT;    ist  praet.  W^HTTTTif;    ^d  praet.    *HKiimifi  ; 
3d  praet.  '^^TTTTT;    ist  fut.  ^KHMril  ;  ^d  fut.  "^iTKfwfff  ;  imp. 
^JTPCxrj;  pot.  ^KiifT;  bened.  <*Hl4n!;;  cond.  ^T^TTf^rarrT. 

"^  *  to  be  feeble.' 
Pres.  '<*q^rri  ;    ist  praet.  w^xnriT ;    2d  praet.   <*Mqitl^;    3^1 
praet.  '^rsft'^mT;  ist  fut.  "^itrftnrr ;  2d  fut.  -^irf^rarfiT;  imp.  <*Mi|H  ; 
pot.   "^q^l^ ;    bened.   "^rcnw ;    cond.   ^cjqfquirf.       Pass.   "^rinr. 
Desid.  fg-f MrMMPri. 

c 

"^  ^  to  be  able. 

This  substitutes  ofi^  in  its  inflexions :  see  the  same  root  in 
the  first  conjugation,  p.  158. 

Pres.  "SF^rqfw;  ist  praet.  ^ra^T^;  2d  prast.  oh«d4^IHI« ; 
3d  praet.  IStP^cR^tj^  ;  ist  fut.  cfi^qfinrr;  2d  fut.  oh<d4 Hm mfw  ;  imp. 
cfi^nrj ;   pot.  'SF^q^;  bened.  "Sfi^am^;   cond.  "^nF^rftr"^. 

^  *  to  sound'  or  '  utter/  *  to  celebrate.' 
This  substitutes  ^^  for  the  radical  penultimate  in  all  the 

tenses  except  the  third  praeterite,  where  it  is  optional. 

Pres.   ^^qfri  ;    ist   praet.    -Hofl^qii;;     2d   praet.   "sM^TPfTRT ; 

3d  praet.  vS'cf]<*ri"r|^  or  'UpMcJ^tf^;     ist   fut.   "afi^^tf^TlT  ;    2d   fut 


256  VERBS. 

^tfwfir;  imp.  ^"^fxrj;  pot.   ^it^;    bened.  "s^TTT;   cond. 
^T^^tf^T^.     Pass.  ^^^.     Desid.  f^tfir^fiT. 

TT^  '  to  proclaim.^ 
Pres.   ^iM^fri  ;    ist  praet.   '^ciflMMW;    2d  praet.  xflM^N^TT; 
3d  praet.  ^si^;^^;    ist  fut.  xft^ftnTT;    2d  fut.  "^fW^'orfw;  imp. 
xft^^;  pot.  i^^W;   bened.  xfVanii;;    cond.   -i^ylMPn^TT.      Pass. 
-guTff.     Desid.  ^^l^^^^^ri. 

fq  (f^)  'to  collect/ 

This  verb  optionally  substitutes  ^TT  for  its  vowel,  when  it 
also  substitutes  tf  for  xf.  As  belonging  to  the  class  finr,  it 
makes  the  vowel  short,  so  that  W[  becomes  w. 

Pres.  ''^^Tifif  -%  ^'^rnrfrT  -W ;  ist  prast.  ^fT^xpTrf  -IT,  ^T^rnriT  -TT ; 
2d  praet.  ^qTnT^^5Tt,  ^MMl^Ji ;  3d  prait.  'inl^Mff  -IT,  W^l^^  -IT; 
ist  fut.  -^tjfxrrn,  ^rrftnTT;  2d  fut.  -^qf^uirri  -%  xj^r^mPii  -^; 
imp.  ^q^tj  -irf,  ^r^W^  -in ;  pot.  ^^^ri;  -TT,  ^^7^  -7T ;  bened. 
-^mti^  or  ^wnr,  -^jqriml^,  ^^rfMt^ ;  cond.  -mqPnuirf  -TT,  ^^ST^^- 
•ftl"HTlT  -IT. 

See  f%,  fifth  conjugation. 

f%ff  (fqflT)  '  to  think.' 
Pres.   fsRT^cT;     ist  praet.  ^rfNr^iTirr^ ;    2d  praet.    P«i'Hi||Hm  ; 
3d  praet.  ^rfqfqfnTfT;    ist  fut.  f^nrfWT;    2d  fut.  "N^iTftrarfiT; 
imp.  pM>ri^f ;   pot.  fq^^;  bened.  P^tMIH^;   cond.  ^nP^tdrmMrt;. 
Pass,  fxini^ri.      Desid.  "Nf^Tirf^^^fiT. 

"^  '  to  know/  '  to  make  known.' 
This  verb  is  one  of  those  said  to  have  an  indicatory  jt. 
Pres.   s^MMPd;    ist  praet.  '^TfR^;    2d  praet.  ^M^l^°hli:;    3d 
praet.  ^H^sjMft^  or  -ii^s^MT^;    ist  fut.  "^mftrfTr;    2d  fut.  ^f^TorffT; 
imp.  '^^v:^ ;  pot.  ^M^ft^;  bened.  ^nmi^;  cond.  ^r^xrfir«rr^.    Pass. 
^nUT.     Desid.  f^TfRftrffir. 

The  other  verbs  of  the  class  fiTTT  in  this  conjugation  are, 
^^  '  to  pound  :'    xjimfri,  wq"'^!^,  ^ST^NrtJT^. 
^^  '  to  pound :'  ^^fiT,  ^I^^^  or  ^'q^'H^lT . 
f%;  as  above. 


TENTH   CONJUGATION.  257 

Tm  ^  to  fted :'  Trnnfrf,  w^^^mf^,  'snftxpfnT . 

•^75  '  to  live  :'  ^c^^ffT,  ^^R^Tc^lT,  ^T^cyrT . 

ijt?  *  to  give  pain/ 

This  makes  the  radical  vowel  optionally  short  in  the  third 
praeterite^  when  the  vowel  of  the  reduplication  is  made  long. 

Pres.  xjt^TifTr ;  ist  praet.  ^i^^^rn^;  2d  praet.  xfti^NohK;  3d 
praet.  ^fTjftftm^  or  ^rfxpflTfT. 

The  same  applies  to  the  following  verbs : 

»f^  ^  to  live  :'  l(\^^^t^,  -^C^^^t[^  or  wiftftr^. 

^"hr  '  to  shine :'  ^txRfrT,  wf^trTW  or  ^r^H^W. 

KR  '  to  speak  :'  >Tm^rf,  'srf^HT^  or  wwl^i^. 

HTO  '  to  shine :'  HT^nrfk,  ^f^Hnn^  or  ^i^HWiT. 

HTO  ^  to  shine  :'  Hm^,  ^^rf^^JmiT  or  w^hnn^. 

iftrJ  '  to  close  :'  Hh5^,  ^fifmh^T^  or  ^^nftfrTc^, 

Tpi '  to  throw.' 

A  penultimate  ^  may  remain  unchanged  in  the  third 
praeterite. 

Pres.  XTT^t^rfw;  ist  praet.  ^qn^^H^;  2d  praet.  MlQ^iH'l^  ;  3d 
praet.  ^^n^Y^  or  ^nrrtl^;    ist  fut.  Mi'^Pilril;  &c. 

^  '  to  fill/ 
Pres.  TlKufri  ;   ist  praet.  ^snnTTn^;  2d  praet.  MK^mnc;  3d  praet. 
^nftTTOT;  1st  fut.  TmrftnTT;  2d  fut.  xiKP^mfri;  imp.  tttttt^;  pot. 

ITTOIT;   bened.  XTR^;  cond.  W^kHmuit^. 

So  TX,  third  conjugation,  xnt,  ^  to  cross  over/  is  given  in 
similar  forms,  except  in  the  third  praeterite,  which  is  ^^MMIM* 


This  and   some    other  verbs   do   not  substitute  3^  for  the 
radical  vowel  in  the  reduplicate  syllable  of  the  third  praeterite. 

Pres.  TTT^Rfw ;   ist  praet.  "^nrRnn^;   2d  praet.  in^nn^^JK ;  3d 
praet.  ^rqiT^;    ist  fut.  nmP^lriT;   imp.  TTT^nrj;   &c. 

l1 


258  VERBS. 

The  other  verbs  that  come  under  this  example  are, 
^  '  to  tear :'  ^TTirflT,  ^I^^l^. 
1^  ^  to  hasten :'  Frrnrfw,  ^nTFRTT . 
^  *  to  trample  :'  ^r^rrfrr,  ^SH*dr^7(;. 
^F>R^  ^  to  touch  :'  WT^PTflf,  W^^q^li;. 
Vf  '  to  remember :'   ^K^Pri,  ^nr^^jf . 
•   ^  ^  to  spread :'  ^cTTTTrfff,  ^nTOT?^. 
^"?  ^  to  make   effort,'  and  T?  '  to  surround/  have  two 
forms  :  ^r^^^i^  or  'Hp^^gri^,  ^T^^^  or  ^^T^. 

jh  '  to  please/ 

This  verb  optionally  prefixes  tt  to  the  sign  of  the  conjugation. 

Pres.  xfNrqfiT -W,  HN^frt  -W ;  ist  praet.  ^UHlniilri^  -K,  ^nrnnnt^  -IT; 
2d  praet.  iO^HIIHTTr,  UI^^IHI^  ;  3d  praet.  ^nqlPMillit;  -K,  ^iiqlvi^rf^  -TT ; 
Ist  fut.  iflmrMdl,  iH^Hlril  ;  2d  fut.  nllilP^mriT  -%  TTRftniTfTT  -^ ; 
imp.  ifhijTrj  -■cTT,  imniw  -irf ;  pot.  ifN^i^  -w,  wm\  -W ;  bened. 
UNIrt;,  TfhafMtl?,  m^PMMl«  ;    cond.  ^4if)l»lP^mri^  -IT,  ^^umPqmri^  -IT. 

For  the  rest,  see  ift  of  the  ninth  conjugation.  So  also  Y,, 
^  to  shake,'  makes  wrrrfiT  or  \iNi4Pri,  &c. 

iT^  (t%)  '  to  advise.' 

Pres.  TT^i^r^fw  -^;  ist  praet.  '^jrn^RTT  -IT;  2d  praet.  H«t5(ijlHI«; 
3d  praet.  wf^^TSjTr^  -TT ;  ist  fut.  H«^P^ril  ;  2d  fut.  H«^PMU<Pri  -^ ; 
imp.  iT^^nrg  -irf ;  pot.  H«^^ft^  -IT ;  bened.  H^^q Iff,  H^^T^ ;  cond. 
^^Ht^Pumrt^  -7T.     Pass.  W^.     Desid.  f^TH^^f^mf^  -ff. 

So  ^f^  ^  to  speak  falsely,'  irfgr  ^  to  support,'  as  a  family, 

and  irf^  ^  to  contract.' 

7^  '  to  melt.' 

^  This  optionally  takes  the  augment  xj  before  the  conjuga- 
tional  sign. 

Pres.  c^m^Pri  or  c^Hl^Pri  ;  ist  praet.  ^Hc^lMMft^,  WFJIxnTri;; 
2d  praet.  WIM^IHIfi,  HnnrnTT^ ;  3d  praet.  -UriHc^Mil^,  ^Mc*ilc^^»t;; 
1st  fut.  WIMPmhi,  <?I^P^ril;  2d  fut.  <;5mPMU|pH,  HnrfVorfjT ;  imp. 
cTRXt^,  Tyr^W;  pot.  cTR^lt^j  HTTRI^;  bened.  HRI^;  cond. 
^<^IMpMmrf^,  ^TTST^rfWri;. 

c^  is  also  a  verb  of  the  ninth  conjugation. 


CHANGE   OF  PADAS   OR  VOICES.  259 

^V  ^  to  laugh  at.' 
Pres.  ^i^^Pri  ;    ist  preet.  W^rt^;    2d  praet.   ^iji^rnnr;    3d 
praet.  ^st^^tIt^  or  ^^T^fhpr^;    ist  fut.  ^l^P^dl;  2d  fut.  ^ftrarfTT; 
imp.  T[rt^  ;     pot.   "^rf^ ;    bened.  "^TT^ ;    cond.  ^sr^f^TSTir . 
Pass.  9|U|rf.     Desid.  f^l^l^fxT^. 

WJ{  '  to  tranquillize.' 
Pres.    ftiH^Pri  ;    ist  praet.  ^WTTqiT;    2d  praet.   «iHiU^<+.K; 
3d  praet.  ■^H^TRTT  or  w^^iTlT;    ist  fut.   H m Pm ht  ;   2d  fut.  m^- 
fwfif;  imp.  ^TTT'q^;   pot.  ^"R^;   bened.  fiiRiirt^;  cond.  ^WR- 
firoiir.    Pass.  mr^^.    Desid.  fg^inP^MPff. 

On  the  conjugation  of  Verbs  in  different  voices,  ^c. 

222.  The  forms  of  the  roots  which  have  been  given  in  the 
preceding  pages  are  those  which  are  usually  assigned  to  them 
by  native  grammarians.  The  student  must  not  be  surprised, 
however,  if  he  finds  occasional  departures  from  the  models 
here  specified,  or  a  verb  inflected  in  a  different  conjugation, 
or  in  a  different  Pada,  from  that  in  which  he  will  have  found 
it  here  represented.  As  to  variations  of  meaning,  they  will  be 
frequent ;  for  in  the  examples  cited,  the  principal  signification 
only  of  each  verb  has  been  purposely  stated,  in  order  not  to 
occasion  doubt  or  perplexity  in  an  early  period  of  study.  The 
other  senses  will  become  famiUar  by  practice.  Of  the  varia- 
tions of  inflexion,  the  greater  number  are  ascribed  by  gram- 
marians to  poetical  license,  or  even  to  error  (jth!<)  ;  but  it 
may  be  doubted  if  they  do  not,  sometimes  at  least,  arise  from 
circumstances  which  have  been  yet  imperfectly  investigated  in 
the  history  of  the  grammar  of  the  Sanskrit  language.  The 
variations  of  import  are  no  doubt  often  imputable  to  the  hber- 
ties  taken  by  Sanskrit  writers,  relying  upon  the  purport  in 
which  they  employ  any  particular  verb  being  rendered  intel- 
ligible by  the  context  of  the  passage  in  which  it  occurs.  Some 
part  of  the  uncertainty,  however,  proceeds  from  an  incomplete 

L  1  2 


260  VERBS. 

analysis,  and  the  want  of  examples  to  illustrate  the  abstract 
term  which  is  used  to  express  the  meaning  of  the  root. 
Authors  consequently  disagree  as  to  the  interpretation.  How- 
ever, these  difficulties  need  not  embarrass  the  student :  he 
must  be  contented  to  take  the  verb  as  he  finds  it,  and  must 
not  look  upon  its  regular  grammatical  type  as  absolutely 
unalterable. 

223.  There  is  one  class  of  modifications,  and  that  the  most 
frequent,  which  is  recognised  by  grammarians.  A  simple  verb 
may  be  inflected  in  one  Pada,  and  when  compounded  with  a 
preposition  may  be  inflected  in  the  other,  either  in  its  primi- 
tive, or  in  a  modified  sense.  A  few  of  these  compound  verbs 
have  been  already  noticed,  but  it  may  be  useful  to  extend  the 
number  of  instances,  arranging  them  in  alphabetical  order, 
^sra  '  to  throw,'  preceded  by  any  preposition,  may  take  either 
Pada  ;  as,  with  fVf^  ^  to  throw  off:'  T^  f^fTtl^fir  orfni.^^ 

*  he  casts  off  the  bond.' 

"3if  '  to  reason,'  preceded  by  any  preposition,  may  take  either 
Pada ;   as,  with  "^nr  '  to  throw  off'  or  ^  repel,'  ^nft^TT  VT^ 

*  let  him  remove  sin ;'  h^^mI^Ph  '  he  removes  that :'  also 
with  WR^,  as  ^aH^frf  -^. 

'^,  which  in  its  simple  state  admits  of  either  Pada,  is  restricted 
to  one  or  other  according  to  the  prepositions  with  which 
it  is  compounded,  and  the  meanings  thence  derived : 
Wg<*CirH  '  he  imitates  ;'    ^^^M  '  he  overcomes  ;'    ^rj^^ 

*  he  informs  against ;'    "^T|i;^  '  he  reviles ;'   "grr^W  ^t 

*  he  worships  Hari ;'  "g'q^^^  ^  he  changes'  (as  a  property) ; 
^JM^ClPri  '  he  pohshes  ;'  XRT^frT  *  he  does  well ;'  TT^^  '  he 
offers  violence  to,'  as  a  female  ;  ^frrTF^  U^ixri  TTW^t '  Ravana 
carries  off  Sita :'  also  '  to  recite ;'  as,  ttt^:  H^M  ^  he  recites 
hymns.'  ^  is  used  with  f%  to  imply  change  or  produc- 
tion of  some  kind  or  other;  and  when  the  verb  is  used 
intransitively,  or  the  production  is  confined  to  sounds,  the 
Atmane-pada  only  is  employed ;  otherwise,  the  Parasmai- 
pada  ;    as,  "STT^  f^^t^  ^  the  scholars  change,'  i.  e.  they 


CHANGE   OF   PADAS   OR  VOICES.  261 

learn  ;'  ^tT"^  fcj ^|n rf  Jii^ch:  *  the  singer  varies  his  notes  \' 
but  "N^  r^ohCirri  oFR:  '  passion  transforms  the  heart.* 

^  '  to  scatter,'  when  the  act  of  an  animal  or  bird,  takes  the 
^tmane-pada  after  '^^,  and  inserts  a  sibilant :  ^nTf^^jTff 
"^W:  '  the  cock  throws  up  (the  earth,  either  for  pleasure, 
or  to  make  a  hole  to  lie  down  in)  ;'  but  o'WJrRTtTf^tTfrr  ^ 
^  the  woman  scatters  flowers.' 

■gw,  ^  to  go/  without  a  preposition  takes  the  j^tmane-pada, 
signifying  ^  being  engaged  in'  or  '  assiduous/  or  ^  becom- 
ing manifest'  or  ^  developed  in ;'  as,  ^^  "gnrw  ^if:  '  the 
understanding  is  engaged  in  (the  study  of)  the  Rig-veda ;' 
^TtinnTRT  "^5*7^  ^he  is  assiduous  for  study;'  ^^ifr^sf^TiT 
^T^rftn  '  the  S'astras  are  manifested  (or  fully  understood) 
in  him.'  So  with  "^xi  and  "qn  in  the  same  meanings : 
'  ^M'+Hri,  MU-*H^;  but  not  with  ^?^,  as  ^^imflT.  So  with 
'^rr  prefixed,  meaning  *  to  ascend,'  as  a  heavenly  body,  not 
as  any  thing  else :  ^T^WW  ^^t:  ^  the  sun  ascends  /  but 
^r^rmffT  wr:  ^  the  smoke  rises.'  Also  with  fV,  meaning 
^  motion  of  the  feet :'  ^rrg  fr^iTlf  ^Tsft  ^  the  horse  trots 
well ;'  but  fw^iTTfir  ^rf^:  ^  the  joint  splits.'  So  with  "^xr  or 
IT,  implying  ^  power'  or  ^  valour :'  ^M"*Hrf,  H-*Hrf  *  he  is 
mighty'  or  '  valiant  ;'  but  "grrwrfw  ^  he  comes'  or  '  ap- 
proaches ;'  M^iHfri  '  he  goes'  or  ^  departs.' 

^,  ^  to  buy,'  is  restricted  to  the  i^tmane-pada,  when  preceded 
by  ^R",  xif^,  or  f^.  The  two  first  have  the  same  meaning 
as  the  simple  verb,  '  to  buy  ;'  the  latter  means  ^  to  sell :' 
^T^^hD^,  Mn.-:hUnri,  '  he  buys  ;'  fr^tw  '  he  sells.' 

sRt^,  ^  to  play,'  takes  the  i^tmane-pada  after  ^  ^"^j  iilx:,  and 
-^m ;  as,  ^rratr^  '  he  plays  much ;'  »ii«j5ftlirf  *  he  plays  like ;' 
^  Pi^Mi)  ^ H  ^  he  plays  again  ;'  ^*$h1^rl  '  he  plays  well'  or  ^  com- 
pletely :'  but  not  if  ^"^  influences  the  government  of  the 
case  ;  as,  HRN<*H  jAl^fd  ^  he  plays  with  the  boy ;'  nor 
if,  with  W{^i  it  denotes  '  making  a  noise  ;'  as,  ^■aJt^fff  ^"^ 
'  the  wheel  creaks.' 

ft^  '  to  throw,'  preceded  by  ^rfir,  ^>T,  or  nf^,  is  confined  to 


262  VERBS. 

the  Parasmai-pada :  ^rfwf^xrfiT  ^  he  throws  much'  or 
'  beyond  ;'  ^f^ft^rrfw  ^  he  throws  on  ;'  TTfflfH|qf7r  ^  he 
throw^s  or  sends  back.' 

^  wdth  ^  takes  the  i^tmane-pada :  ^^W  "^T^  ^  he  sharpens 
the  weapon  ;'  "^l^i^R  ^^W  '  it  aggravates  (his)  grief.' 

im  ^  to  go/  has  a  variety  of  prefixes,  and  consequent  modifica- 
tions of  form  and  sense.  With  WT  prefixed,  and  used  in 
the  causal  form  to  signify  '  to  have  patience/  it  takes  the 
i^tmane-pada :  ^TTJIHMy  ITT^IT  '  wait  or  delay  a  little.^ 
With  ^  it  takes  the  i^tmane-pada  in  an  intransitive 
sense:  TT^  ^"^^  ^ the  sentence  is  plain'  (or  is  cohe- 
rent) ;  ^If fW:  ^iT5a[^  ^  he  goes  with  his  friends  :'  but 
?JT'T  ^n^sarfir  '  he  goes  to  the  village.' 

7T  '  to  swallow,^  preceded  by  ifm,  takes  the  meaning  of  '  pro- 
mising' or  '  uttering/  and  is  conjugated  in  the  i^Ltmane- 
pada :  ■^TTT  ^fhr^  '  he  promises  a  hundred  (rupees)  /  ^  i  Th  rfV 
TnTjrnT  ^f/iT.7t  *  he  proclaims  the  qualities  of  the  prince :' 
otherwise  ^ilTfrf  TClH  ^  he  swallows  a  mouthful.'  It  takes 
the  i^tmane-pada  after  m^ ;  ^T^mfff  "^fHw  fq'^rr^:  *  the 
goblin  swallows  blood.' 

'^  '  to  go,'  with  "grr*"  in  the  sense  of  ^  going  astray'  or  '  departing 
from/  takes  the  i^tmane-pada ;  as,  >IT#g^T^  ^  he  deviates 
from  virtue  :'  not  if  it  is  intransitive  ;  THq^^i^frt  '  the  tear 
overflow's :  but  it  is  so  used  with  ^,  or  with  ^»^,  '^'fT,  and 
^rr,  connected  with  a  noun  in  the  instrumental  case ;  t;^ 
^^^^  (or  ^ijf^i-Moi)  mn '  the  king  rides  with  (in)  a  chariot.' 

fflTj  '  to  conquer/  is  limited  to  the  i^tmane-pada  after  xftT  and 
f% ;  as,  TTU^TW,  f%»T^5  ^  he  conquers.' 

^  *  to  know,'  w  ithout  a  preposition,  if  used  in  certain  senses 
intransitively,  is  conjugated  in  the  i^tmane-pada ;  ifff^"^ 
^TT^Ttt  '  he  engages  (in  sacrifice  by  means  of)  Ghee :'  also 
after  ^nr,  in  the  sense  of  '  denying  /  ^iHHM^iMl^  '  he  denies 
the  (debt  of  a)  hundred  rupees :'  after  vfif,  in  the  sense  of 
^  acknowledging  ;'  ^*  xrfrnrRft  '  he  acknowledges  the  hun- 
dred :'  and  after  ^H,  in  that  of  *  demanding'  or  *  expecting  / 


CHANGE   OF  PADAS   OR  VOICES. 

^  ^%jh1^.  It  is  used  in  the  j^tmane-pada  without  a 
preposition,  and  transitively  when  the  result  of  the  action 
reverts  to  the  agent ;  as,  ^rf  ^iHlri  '  he  obtains  a  cow :'  not 
else  ;  as,  ^mt  ^TTTrfiT  '  he  knows  (the  dwelling  of)  his 
mother :'  nor  if  the  verb  be  preceded  in  such  a  sense  by 
a  preposition ;  as,  yi1<4loh  r[  mrnrrfiT  ^:  ^  the  fool  does 
not  recognise  (or  obtain)  heaven.' 

lift,  '  to  guide,^  in  certain  senses  takes  the  Xtmane-pada :  as, 
'  to  excel  in  ;'  ^^  •T"'^  ^  he  excels  in  the  S'astra :' — ^  to 
determine ;'  "?n#  "^T^  '  he  ascertains  the  principle.^  Also 
after  "g^,  meaning  ^  to  lift  up  ;'  ^HiH-^i-HH  *  he  lifts  up  a 
stafF.^  After  T^,  implying  '  to  invest  with  the  sacred  cord  f 
<«llo6HM?T'q?  ^  he  invests  the  boy  with  the  string  : ' — '  to 
hire  ;'  cf;«^ohUHMH<M^  ^  he  hires  servants.'  After  f^,  signi- 
fying *  to  pay  ;'  ^  f^^nrw  '  he  pays  the  tax :' — ^  to  grant' 
or  ^  endow  ;'  ^7T  f^T^T^  '  he  grants  a  hundred'  (for  some 
religious  purpose)  : — '  to  restrain,'  when  the  object  is  in 
the  person  ;  "^N  f^'^^  *  he  restrains  wrath :'  but  not  if 
the  object  be  in  another ;  ^:  "^N  i^rnrfir  WW*  *  the 
pupil  assuages  the  wTath  of  the  teacher :'  nor  if  the  object 
be  corporeal ;  t^j?  OfH^ftr  '  he  turns  away  his  cheek.' 

w,  '  to  praise,'  is  conjugated  in  the  Atmane-pada  after  ^TT ; 
^T"g^  ^  he  praises.' 

THT,  used  intransitively  after  "31^  and  f^,  takes  the  Atmane- 
pada ;  T^tt^,  fTiHTW  ^n§:  '  the  sun  shines  ;'  also  if  it  mean 
^  to  warm  or  heat  a  part  of  one's  own  body ;'  "a^TTff,  friT^ 
xrrftif  '  he  warms  his  hand :'  not  if  a  part  of  another ;  "%^ 
^^^  "TrftlTIJ r^MPH  *  Chaitra  warms  or  burns  the  hand  of 
Maitra :'  nor  when  it  means  ^  to  burn  or  melt  substances  f 
as,  ^^gwrfw  yiUojiic  '  the  goldsmith  melts  the  gold.' 
When  it  means  ^  to  practise  devotion,'  it  is  used  in  the 
fourth  conjugation  in  the  Atmane-pada ;  rtujd  riM^IM^: 
'  the  ascetic  practises  penance.'  According  to  some,  it  is 
confined  to  the  Atmane-pada  after  ^r^,  in  the  sense  of 
'  penitence  ;'  as,  ^T^THTW  '  he  repents.' 


264  VERBS. 

^  (^T>t)  ^  to  give/  when  preceded  by  "m,  in  any  other  sense 
than  that  of  ^  setting  open/  as  the  mouth,  &c.,  takes  the 
Atmane-pada ;  as,  VrpTT^  ^  he  receives  wealth  ;'  f^tllHlt^^ 
'  he  acquires  knowledge :'  but  ^  ^T^^lfw  '  he  opens  his 
mouth/  ^  he  yawns :'  not,  it  is  said,  if  it  be  another's 
mouth  ;  as,  ^TT^^  fxTTftfc??^:  Mri^-^  ^  '  the  ants  open 
the  mouth  of  the  grasshopper/  The  Parasmai-pada  is 
also  used  after  ^rr  in  other  senses  ;  as,  f^Rrf^ofif  ^^T^^rffT 
%?rt  ^  the  physician  lays  open  the  boil  /  Tf^t  Wci  ^mr^t^lfrf 
'  the  river  lays  open  (undermines)  the  bank/ 

^  {^W),  '  to  give/  is  used  in  the  i^tmane-pada  after  ^, 
either  singly  or  with  another  preposition,  with  a  noun  in 
the  third  case,  having  the  sense  of  the  fourth  :  ^T^T  ^nr^rff 
or  iR**jiiiodL^  '  he  gives  to  the  female  slave/  If  the  sense  of 
the  third  case  is  preserved,  the  Parasmai-pada  is  retained : 
^TBTT  Vrf  ^T^x[^a[1if  f^riTR  '  he  gives  wealth  by  the  slave  girl 
to  the  Brahman/ 

g^  '  to  see,'  with  "SRH,  and  used  intransitively,  takes  the  Xtmane- 
pada ;  ^i«T^ff  ^  he  considers  well  /  so  does  rfrq'  '  to  ask,' 
as  a  boon  ;  as,  ^^1^  THIW  ^  he  asks  for  Ghee  :'  and  TT^ 
^  to  ask,'  with  W[;  as,  ^Jn^TsdW  ^  he  takes  leave  of/  and 
with  ^T^,  used  intransitively ;  as,  ^T'^^T^  ^  he  inquires/ 

W^,  '  to  eat,'  takes  the  i^tmane-pada  ;  ^^*f  Wii  ^  he  eats  boiled 
rice  /  also  '  to  possess  ;'  -^^  "^fz^fhrTc?:  '^^'h^  '  the  king 
possessed  the  earth  /  also  '  to  suffer  /  ^^  ^K'^^lrilPrT  ^^ 
'  the  old  man  suffers  hundreds  of  pains  /  not  if  it  mean  '  to 
protect  /  as,  'T^>pTf^  tT^  '  the  king  protects  the  earth/ 

^  '  to  bear,'  with  trf^  prefixed,  is  conjugated  in  the  Parasmai- 
pada  :  xrlxij^rH  ^  he  endures'  or  '  forgives/ 

TJm,  '  to  restrain,'  varies  the  Pada  according  to  different  mean- 
ings and  prefixes.  With  ^rr  used  intransitively  it  takes  the 
Atmane-pada ;  WRn33L^  TT^  ^  the  tree  spreads  /  but  '^TR'^a^fiT 
"sniT^lf  ^he  draws  the  rope  from  the  well/  unless  part 
of  one's  own  body  be  intended ;  as,  ^mrai^  "Tiftlf  '  he 
stretches  out  his  hand/     Also  with  ■^ir,  meaning  *  to  take 


CHANGE  OF  PADAS   OR  VOICES. 

as  a  wife  j^   ^ii^-qd.ri  olOT  ^  he  takes  the  maiden  to  wife/ 
In   this  form  the   third   praeterite   optionally  rejects   the 
nasal ;  Tr:  ^fftTrr^^FTcr  or  "^ttTW  '  Rama  wedded  Sita.'     If 
it  implies  taking  the  wife  of  another,  it  is  xn^  ^i<5i*jm- 
T[^fi{ :  if  it  signifies  acceptance  in  general,  it  is  restricted 
to  the  i^tmane-pada  ;    ^^T^TyTXRa^  ^  he  accepts  the  dona- 
tion.'    It  also  takes  the  same  voice  after  W{,  "3^,  and  w^, 
not  signifying  any  thing  relating  to  books  ;   as,  N^HIil-edi,^ 
'  he  puts  on  the  clothes ;    HKH^'^^  '  he  takes  up  the  load  ;' 
'^t^'^  M*\^siji  ^  he  stacks  the  com :'  but  "^^Rafff  ^^T«^  ^  he 
studies  diligently  the  Veda.' 
w^  takes  the  Atmane-pada  after  "^5  and  prepositions  ending 
with  vowels  ;   as,  "^^  ^  he  makes  effort ;'  '^"'J^  '  he  sets 
after'  or  ^  according  to  ;'   f«T^  '  he  appoints  ;'  irg^J  ^  he 
arranges :'   unless  it  refer  to  sacrificial  vessels  ;  iT^nrrWlftlT 
R^JriPrK  ^  he  sets  in  order  the  vessels  of  sacrifice.' 
T?T  '  to  sport,'  preceded  by  ^TT,  V[ft,  or  fV,  is  restricted  to  the 
Parasmai-pada ;    WTT^ffrT   ^  he    rests;'     xrfxwffT  'he   goes 
about ;'  fTOlfw  '  he  takes  rest.'      Preceded  by  "3TT,  in  the 
sense  of  '  dweUing  with  as  a  wife,'  it  takes  either  voice  ; 
as,  '3'miTrTT  or  TqiTT^  vrrcqf  *  he  takes  a  ^fife.' 
'^,  '  to  speak,'  is  conjugated  in  the  i^tmane-pada,  when  signi- 
fying '  to  excel  in'  or  ^  to  be  acquainted  with  ;'  as,  ^T^ 
"^W  *  he  is  learned  in  the  S'astra :' — '  to  labour  ;'  "^^  "^^ 
*  he  labours  in  the  field.'     Also  after  ^^STJ,  used  intransi- 
tively, and  in  the  sense  of  '  articulate  speech  ;'  as,  'STtJ^jr^rt 
«R7:   «Jk55T^^  '  Kat'ha  speaks  after  or  like  Kalapa :'  other- 
wise,  <J#iHH^?^rri   '  he  repeats  the   speech  ;'    and  ^t^q^^fif 
qfhrrr '  the  lute  sounds.'     Also  after  "^tt,  used  transitively 
to  mean  '  pacifying ;'  as,  ^JTTT^'^W  '  he  pacifies  the  ser- 
vants :' —  'advising;'     as,    %Eryrsr^^    'he    advises    the 
scholar :' — or  '  communicating  -with  privately ;'    y^KI^M- 
"^^  '  he  intrigues  with  another's  wife.'     Also  after  f%,  and 
U  optionally,  implying  difference  of  opinion  expressed  arti- 
culately,  '  dispute ;'    as,   f^TT^^  or   friT^f^  %irr:  '  the 

M  m 


^66  VERBS. 

doctors  dispute.'  Also  after  ^  and  %  to  signify  articu- 
late speech  uttered  simultaneously ;  as,  ^Hl"c(t^^  WRTOt: 
'  the  Brahmans  speak  or  chaunt  together :'  but  HHIcj(ir>ff 
i^rn:  ^  the  birds  sing  together.'  Also  after  ^HT,  when  the 
result  of  the  action  reverts  to  the  agent ;  ^HT^^  V*ToRT- 
jftsTiTR  ^  the  man  desirous  of  wealth  reviles  improperly:' 
otherwise,  ^Mcj^^fri  '  he  speaks  against'  or  ^  prohibits.' 

^  ^  to  bear,'  preceded  by  TI,  takes  the  Parasmai-pada,  used 
intransitively ;  17^  TT^T^f^  ^  the  river  flows.' 

f^,  '  to  know,'  takes  the  i^tmane-pada  after  ^J^,  and  option- 
ally affixes  ^  to  the  final  in  the  third  person  plural ;  4?^^ 
or  Tfrfr^^  *they  know  well.' 

f%^,  ^  to  enter,'  takes  the  i^tmane-pada  after  fiT ;  Prin^^l^  *  he 
enters  in.' 

:^  ^  to  swear,'  when  the  eiFect  of  the  oath  reverts  to  the 
speaker,  is  conjugated  in  the  i^tmane-pada ;  "^retrmT  ^PT^ 
iffqt  ^  the  nymph  swears  by  Krishna.' 

"^  ^  to  hear,'  after  tc^,  used  intransitively,  makes  ^Sliij^  '  he 
hears  well :'  otherwise,  "^r^  ^^wrfw  '  he  hears  the  sound.' 

FT, '  to  stay'  or  '  stand,'  takes  a  variety  of  prepositions,  and  is 
conjugated  in  the  iitmane-pada  after,  ^SR,  TT,  f^,  W{^,  used 
intransitively  ;  "^^^firlW  '  he  waits  patiently  ;'  MPriaw  ^  he 
stands  or  sets  forth  ;'  f^fwF^  ^  he  stands  apart'  or  *  still ;' 
^rfw^  ^  he  stops  or  stays  with'  or  ^  proceeds.'  Also  after  wr, 
used  transitively ;  as,  ^"s^  f^i^lHlfdad  '  he  assents  to  the 
eternal  word.'  It  occurs  with  ^  also  in  the  Parasmai- 
pada  ;  fVPiTRniwrfT  '  he  observes  the  rite.'  Also  after  •^,  not 
implying  to  stand  up  or  rise,  or  to  exact  or  demand ;  as, 
^chl^PrlS^  ^  he  aspires  to  salvation :'  but  xftTTFlwfw  *  he 
rises  from  the  stool ;'  ?|TTrsrfTT(wf(r  ^  he  levies  a  hundred 
(rupees)  from  the  village.'  After  TT,  in  the  sense  of  per- 
forming religious  rites,  of  worshipping,  of  doing  homage 
to,  of  uniting  with,  of  shewing  affection  to,  or  of  tend- 
ing towards,  as  a  road,  FT  takes  the  i^itmane-pada ;  as, 
'31 1 H «l T'  ^liyif fl^W   ^  the    Brahman   preserves    the    sacred 


CHANGE   OF   PADAS   OR  VOICES.  267 

fire  ;'  ^^nf^m^firw  '  he  worships  the  sun  ;'  ^MiJMfriSd  '  he 
attends  on,  or  does  homage  to,  the  king  ;'  tt^  ^Tg^TT^^rfww 
^  the  Ganges  unites  with  the  Jumna ;'  ^I^^MTdyd  '  he 
befriends  the  pious  ;'  tp^  ajTH^rqfir?^  ^  the  road  leads  to 
the  village.'  It  is  also  used  intransitively  in  the  i^tmane- 
pada  after  Tcr ;  as,  H)9iH«ltlc4  ^ M fri y H  '  he  waits  or  stands 
by  at  the  time  of  eating :'  and  transitively  in  either  Pada, 
w-hen  expeetation,  or  service  not  religious,  is  implied ; 
fH^Tofi:  TPT^xriwfjT  or  ^  q  ffi  a  H  '  the  mendicant  waits  upon 
the  master^  (for  alms)  ;  H^Ttg^rftrFfif  or  TtriWff  rfT^  '  a 
w^oman  w^aits  upon,  or  ministers  to,  her  husband.'  FT  is 
also  used  in  the  Xtmane-pada,  without  a  preposition,  to 
signify  '  to  manifest  dependence  upon  ;'  as,  iftrft  "^WR 
■fire^  ^  the  nymph  places  her  trust  in  Krishna :'  or  ^  to 
adhere  to,'  as  a  leader  ;  cfi3§Tf^"j  frr^  ^  he  adheres  to,  or 
foUow^s,  Karna  and  the  rest.' 

^,  ^  to  sound,  takes  the  Atmane-pada  after  ^t  ;  ^Ml^iS"  ^  he 
sounds.' 

"^,  ^  to  strike'  or  '  kill,'  takes  the  Atmane-pada  after  ^  if 
used  intransitively ;  or  when  the  object  is  part  of  one's 
self,  transitively  ;  as,  ^TT^  ^  he  strikes  ;'  or  ^rr^  l^i:: '  he 
strikes  his  head  :'  but  ttt:^  f^  ^STT^fnT  ^  he  strikes  the 
head  of  another.' 

^  ^to  take,'  preceded  by  ^g,  implying  '  to  take  after,'  or  ^act 
like,'  takes  the  Atmane-pada ;'  MjchHH-ll  ^"^^^  '  horses 
take  the  nature  of  the  father :'  but  not  if  actual  presence  is 
implied ;  as,  f^'JfH^T.frr  '  he  takes  after  his  father.' 

^,  ^  to  call,'  used  intransitively,  takes  the  i^tmane-pada  after 
'^%  f^,  f^,  and  ^;  as,  4Md^iiri,  fH<j^Mri,  f^3p^;,  ^*<j^^ri  '  he 
calls  out,'  ^  exclaims,'  &c. :  also  after  WT,  used  transitively  in 
the  sense  of  '  defiance  ;'  "^^JTRf^  ^  he  defies  or  chal- 
lenges the  enemy  :'  but  ydHld^^fw  '  he  calls  his  son.' 
Causal  verbs  ordinarily  take  the  Parasmai-pada,  and  seldom 

appear  in   any  other  ;    but,  as  observed   already,  they   may 

assume  the  Atmane-pada  when  the  effect  of  the  action  reverts 

M  m  ij 


268  VERBS. 

to  the  individual ;  as,  WT"^  HllS^fff  '  he  causes  the  place  to  be 
cleaned;^  WTTTR  HTrt^  '  he  causes  himself  to  be  cleansed'  or 
'  purified.'  There  are  certain  causal  verbs,  however,  which 
are  limited  to  one  or  other  Pada,  according  to  their  meanings, 
ipi  ^  to  be  greedy/  in  the  sense  of  ^  deceiving/  takes  the 
i^tmane-pada ;  "^TTcy  'I^Imk  ^  he  deceives  the  child :'  otherwise, 
"'Sr'R  Jl^^fri  *  he  excites  the  dog  to  be  greedy,'  So  ^^,  '  to 
deceive,'  makes  cjniirf  ^^n^  ^  he  deceives  the  girl :'  but  ^rf^ 
^^girfir  ^  he  drives  away  the  snake.'  So  ^,  combined  with  a 
word  signifying  '  falsely'  or  ^  erroneously,'  takes  the  ^tmane- 
pada ;  as,  f^^J  chKiiw  iTimiif  '  he  causes  a  false  alarm  or 
proclamation  to  be  made :'  but  ws  ohKuPH  "^  ^  he  causes  the 
word  to  be  accurately  repeated.' 

According  to  some  authorities,  the  following  verbs  do  not 
admit  the  Parasmai-pada  in  the  causal  mode,  xn  '  to  drink,' 
^  ^  to  tame,'  itr  '  to  restrain,'  and  im  ^  to  make  effort/  pre- 
ceded by  ^rr ;  »t^  '  to  be  perplexed/  preceded  by  "qix ;  ^^  '  to 
shine,'  «T1T  ^  to  dance,'  ^  '  to  speak,'  ^RT  ^  to  dwell  /  as,  xrT"^^, 

^Tqw,  -iiNiH^H,  '^rrimni^,  irfi^ft^^,  d^^,  "JT^irff,  ^n^xrw,  m^^rq^. 

So  also  ^  '  to  give  suck  ;'  vm^i).  This  limitation  is  however 
qualified  as  above  ;  and  when  the  object  of  the  action  is  dif- 
ferent from  the  agent,  these  verbs  take  the  Parasmai-pada ;  as, 
'^rMM  m^^Mfd  W^X  ^  he  causes  the  calves  to  drink  the  milk,'  &c. 
It  is  unnecessary  to  prosecute  this  subject  farther,  as  it 
would  be  impossible  in  this  place  to  collect  all  the  variations 
that  occur  in  books,  and  they  will  be  readily  recognised  when 

they  are  met  with. 

^ 

CHAPTER   VI. 

DERIVATION. 

SECTION  I. 

Verbal  Derivatives. 
224.  The  derivatives  of  the  Sanskrit  language  are  arranged 
under  two  principal  classes  ;   the  first  comprises  those  nouns 


VERBAL  DERIVATIVES INFINITIVE.  269 

which  are  formed  from  the  verb  ;  the  second,  those  which  are 
formed  from  other  nouns.  To  the  first  is  assigned  the  name 
Kridanta,  or  nouns  formed  with  terminations  attached  to  verbal 
roots :  to  the  second,  the  denomination  Taddhita,  or  nouns 
which  import  relation  to  other  nouns.  We  may  be  permitted 
to  distinguish  them  as  verbal  and  nominal  derivatives,  and 
proceed  to  treat  of  the  former. 

225.  One  principal  class  of  verbal  derivatives  consists  of 
what  we  are  accustomed  to  consider  as  parts  of  the  verb  itself, 
or  the  infinitive  and  the  participles. 

Infinitive, 

2i2!6.  The  infinitive  of  the  Sanskrit  verb  is  regarded  by 
native  grammarians  as  an  indeclinable  noun,  formed  from  the 
root  by  affixing  to  it  the  syllables  '^\,  leaving  "gn. 

«.  Whatever  modifications  the  root  undergoes  in  the  first 
future  before  the  affix  TTT  (rule  193),  it  equally  undergoes  in 
the  infinitive  before  '^,  inserting  or  not  inserting  ^,  and 
combining  with  the  augment,  or  with  the  first  letter  of  the 
termination,  conformably  to  the  plan  pursued  in  the  first 
future  tense  ;  as  a  few  examples  will  suffice  to  prove. 


Verb. 

First  future. 

Infinitive. 

^togo 

^TTT 

"m. 

^to  go 

^I#T 

^t\ 

^V  to  grow 

^dvwT 

»rfVi3H 

^  to  do 

^^ 

^f^ 

IPT  to  go 

'tnti 

^  to  steal 

-^Tli.rHfiT 

^  to  sing 

TTiTT 

'H\ 

»rT  to  bear 

^rf^'cTT 

'ff^jn. 

f»r  to  conquer 

^TfT 

^ 

^  to  burn 

^^niT 

^^?l 

^  to  give 

^TrTT 

v^ 

^  to  cut 

5[TfrT 

<Ws. 

^  to  see 

^T^ 

^1 

270  DERIVATION. 

XT^  to  cook  xf^  xr^ 

H^to  be  Hf^ffT  HP^IgH^ 

1?T  to  sport  TTiTT  TlrJ^ 

xr^  to  bear  A     ^  ^ 

^T  to  stay  ^nWT  ^TiJ'^ 

^Txr  to  creep  < 

f^H  to  hurt  f^ftnn  ^^^^^\ 

^  to  take  ^  ^^^ 

b.  The  Sanskrit  infinitive  presents  a  general  analogy  to  the 
Latin  supine  in  '  um,'  and  in  many  instances  the  words  are 
the  same  ;  as,  WT^  '  statum  ;'  ^T^  '  datum  ;'  m  j*^  '  potum ;' 
ift^  ^  junctum  ; '  ^TTTftlwiT  ^  sopitum.'  In  others,  we  have 
the  same  principles  of  formation  displayed ;  as  tj^  makes  XT^WT, 
so  '  facio'  makes  '  factum  ;'  as  ^T^  makes  ^jItKH  ,  so  ^  unguo' 
makes  ^  unctum ;'  as  ^cT^  may  make  ^FT^JJ^,  so  ^  rumpo^  makes 
*  ruptum/  The  augment  ^  also  is  observable  in  such  supines, 
as  '  monitum,'  '  domitum,'  &c. ;  and  in  some  cases  we  have  it 
optionally  inserted  or  omitted,  as  in  ^  altum'  or  *  alitum,'  and 

the  like. 

Participles, 

2217.  The  participles  are  of  two  kinds,  declinable  and  inde- 
clinable :  to  the  latter  the  denomination  of  Gerunds  has  been 
given  by  Professor  Bopp. 

228.  The  declinable  participles  are  of  the  present,  past, 
and  future  times,  diversified  according  to  the  Pada,  or  the 
voice,  to  which  they  are  considered  to  belong. 

a.  The  indeclinable  participles,  or  Gerunds,  are  indeter- 
minately past. 

Present  Participles, 

229.  The  present  participle  may  be  active  or  passive ;  and 
the  active  is  distinguished  as  belonging  to  the  Parasmai  or 
j^tmane-pada. 

230.  The  present  participle,  Parasmai-pada,  is  formed  by 


VERBAL  DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES.  271 

adding  the  syllable  WiT,  technically  called  ^,  to  the  root: 
the  initial  "^r  indicates  that  the  base  undergoes,  before  the  parti- 
cipial affix  ^,  modifications  which  it  derives  from  its  conju- 
gational  peculiarities,  especially  before  the  termination  of  the 
third  person  plural  of  the  present  tense  :  thus  >|^  makes  H^ 
^  being  ;'  ^,  WWi{  '  conquering  -,'  xr^,  W^\  '  cooking ;'  tv\,  T53[7r 
'  going  ;'  -qr,  f^T^  '  drinking  ,'  m,  ffl^TW  '  staying ;'  ^,  ^r^^ 
'  eating  ;'  ^,  Wff  '  kilUng  ;'  ^,  g5r«!;  '  sacrificing  ;'  f^,  ^^ 
'  playing  ;'  ^,  "^^  '  producing  ;'  ^,  "|^W  *  tormenting  ;'  ^, 
"^T^  '  obstructing  \'  ^,  "^^T^  '  doing  ;'  "=#,  -^luirt^  '  buying ;'  "^^, 
■crti,HTT  '  stealing  ;'  and  the  like. 

a.  The  present  participle  ending  in  ^  is  decKnable  in  the 
three  genders,  according  to  rules  already  given  :  see  p.  55, 
rule  104,  &c. 

b.  In  the  case  of  f^,  ^  to  know,'  "^  is  optionally  affixed  in 
place  of  ^!TfT,  making  f^^  ^  knowing,'  '  wise'  (see  p.  70) ;  as 
well  as  f^TT. 

231.  The  present  participle  of  the  i^tmane-pada  is  formed 
by  adding  ^T^T^,  that  is,  ^TT^,  to  the  inflective  base  of  the 
verb,  as  modified  for  conjugation  in  the  present  tense.  When, 
as  in  the  first,  fourth,  sixth,  and  tenth  conjugations,  the  inflec- 
tive base  ends  with  ^,  then  17  is  prefixed  to  the  termination  ; 
as,  ;^,  TJVJTR  '  increasing  ;^  iqr^,  M-MHM  ^  cooking :'  in  the  other 
conjugations  the  termination  is  added  at  once  to  the  verb  ;  as, 
^,  ^THTT^  '  sleeping  ;'  VT,  ^VFT  '  having  ;^  ^,  ^fro  ^  making  ;' 
&c.  These  participles  are  declined  in  the  three  genders  like 
nouns  in  ^ ;    xritr:,  xp^TRT,  M-«*H|rf.     See  p.  30. 

a.  There  are  some  participial  nouns  formed  with  termina- 
tions of  an  analogous  character,  and  having  the  same  letters  ;  as, 
^,  ^jm?T;  '  enjoying;'  ij,  fwru:  'wearing;'  ^,  ffTTTFT:  'slay- 
ing,' &c.,  formed  with  xdrj^^ :  also  ^T,  M'«I*IH:  '  purifying,'  '  a 
purifier,'  '  the  air ;'  and  X(1T  '  to  sacrifice,'  ^M^iHiH:  *  sacrificing,' 
'  a  sacrificer,'  &c.,  formed  with  ^[TR'^f^. 

b,  ^rm,  '  to  sit,'  makes  ^TB^rf:,  -•TT,  -•?>  '  sitting,'  '  seated.' 

232.  The  present  participle  of  the  passive  voice  is  formed 


272  DERIVATION. 

with  ^J^  attached  to  the  inflective  base  of  the  present  tense  ; 
as,  ^  ^  to  do/  f^ ;  f^iXRTW:  -WT  -xjf '  being  to  be  made  :'  ^T  '  to 
give,'  ^^ ;  ^"hRT^:  -^  -^  '  being  to  be  given  :'  ^iir^ ;  Tf^, 
H^HM:  -«TT  -"ff  '  being  to  be  destroyed :'  tr  *  to  go  ;'  J|W|HM 
^  being  to  be  traversed  ;'  n^HlA  ^  riHI-^r^'Iri  -^IHdl  ^  '  That 
which  was  to  be  gone  over  before  (by  the  sun),  was  not  untra- 
versed  by  him  (Hanuman) :'  fimMl  '^^MHIilji  >fhT: '  Bhima  being 
overwhelmed  with  arrows/ 

Past  Participles, 

233.  There  are  two  participles  which  follow  the  analogy  of 
the  second  or  reduplicate  praeterite,  one  for  the  Parasmai,  the 
other  for  the  ^tmane-pada  ;  which  latter  serves  also  for  the 
passive  voice. 

Participles  of  the  second  prceterite, 

234.  The  participle  past  of  the  second  praeterite,  Parasmai- 
pada,  is  formed  by  adding  "^^  technically  termed  "^,  to  the 
inflective  base,  as  it  occurs  before  the  terminations  of  the  dual 
and  plural  numbers  of  the  reduplicate  praeterite  (see  p.  ii8, 
rule  I 88). 

a.  The  augment  ^  is  prefixed  to  ^w  when  the  inflective 
base  consists  of  a  single  vowel  followed  by  a  consonant ;  also 
after  certain  other  verbs.  When  the  verb  is  reduplicated,  so 
that  the  inflective  base  contains  more  than  one  vowel,  ^  is 
ordinarily  not  inserted ;  as  in  the  following  examples. 

b.  Participles  in  ^  are  declined  in  the  three  genders  ;  as 
in  p.  70,  rule  128. 

^  to  go  ;  ^1t?^  did  go  -,  tf^RT"^,  ^^y  ^f^T^. 

^  to  go  ;   ^mto^  did  go  ;  ^^uft^T^,  ^5TF§^t,  ^ift^. 

^  to  make  ;  ^'f\\  did  make  ;  ^^^^,  '^^»d,  '^^^• 

TiH  to  go  ;    ^TfxJT^  or  ^PT^^  did  go  ;    iffrR^^,   ^TT^^, 

^rng^,  w^,  irf^HTiT,  im^. 

inf  to  eat ;   ^rf^^^  did  eat ;  irf^a^r^,  'T^"^,  »TfTl^Trr . 

»rPJ  to  be  awake  ;   inTFlt^,  »I»rr^^^  did  wake  ;    *\»TFTtT'^, 

W'TT'jm^,  »nnn^t,  »r5rrg^,  T^inntTT,  trt'J^. 


VERBAL   DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES.  273 

^T^  to  give  ;  ^^  did  give  ;  ^[■ngT^,  ^T^,  ^TOIT. 

f^  to  see  ;  <^r^|c|«  or  ^^^^  did  see  ;  ^^f^^,  ^l^SfT'^T, 

^^^,  ^^^»  ^?f^,  ^^\' 
"q^  to  cook  ;   ^IV^IT  did  cook  ;  ^fq^»T,  ^^J^s  ^f^"^. 
fn^  to  urine  ;  *fe^  did  urine  ;   ?flyr?r,  'it^^j  ^'^fl^* 
■^  to  weep  ;   ^^IT^^  did  weep  ;   ^^T^,  ^^i^,  ^^^¥"ff  • 
f^  to  know  ;    fVfVf ^  or  f^fW^^  did    know  ;    "Rf^^TT^, 

fV^  to  enter ;  fMV^RT  or  fM^^fTT^  did  enter^  &c. ;  as  in  f^. 

"^  to  bear  ;   ^T3^  did  bear  ;   ^l^|r|^,  fll^M%  ^TR^- 

"^  to  kill ;    ^Qh^^^  or  ^MH^^  did  kill ;  irr?rTr"!T,  ^T^^T"^,  &c. 

236.  The  past  participle  of  the  reduplicate  praeterite  in  the 
^tmane-pada  is  formed  by  adding  W[^  to  the  inflective  base, 
as  it  occurs  before  the  termination  of  the  third  person  sin- 
gular :  thus  tr^5  '  to  cook/  makes  ^''^rR ;  ^^  ^  to  do/  -^^m  ; 
■q%  ^to  speak/  2d  praet.  IR^,  part.  vh^H;  '^,  ^  to  hear/  2d 
praet.  ip^y  part.  9i^gc|Kir ;  &c.  These  participles  are  decHned 
in  the  three  genders  like  nouns  in  ^. 

Indefinite  past  Participle. 
237-  The  indefinite  past  participles  are  two ;    one  having 
an  active,  the  other  a  passive  signification.      Neither  can  be 
said  to  appertain  to  any  particular  tense,  as  they  do  not,  like 
the  preceding,  follow  any  analogy  of  construction. 

238.  The  indefinite  past  participle  active  is  formed  by 
adding  "^l^  to  the  root  or  crude  verb,  leaving  KWfr;  the  effect 
of  the  oR  in  this  or  any  technical  termination  being  to  preclude 
the  Guna  or  Vriddhi  change  of  the  radical  vowel,  and  to  occasion 
the  rejection  of  a  radical  nasal  penultimate  :  "^^  ^  to  do/  there- 
fore makes  "^^5  '  was  making'  or  '  made  ;'  ^^  '  to  see/  ^^^ 
'  was  seeing  or  '  saw  /  ^  ^  to  bite/  ^r^  ^  was  biting.'  It 
is  commonly  used  with  an  auxiliary  verb  ;  as,  ^  "^rR^^^ 
'  I  was  doing*  or  *  I  did.*  The  declension  of  the  participles 
so  formed  has  already  been  described  (p.  55,  r.  104). 

239.  The   indefinite   past  participle  passive  is  formed   by 

N  n 


274  DERIVATION. 

adding  to  the  root  or  crude  verb  the  affix  li,  that  is,  w ;  the 
object  of  the  "^  being,  as  just  mentioned,  to  bar  the  substitu- 
tion of  the  Guna  or  Vriddhi  equivalent  of  the  radical  vowel, 
and  eject  a  penultimate  nasal :  thus  "ftr,  ^  to  conquer,^  makes 
f%rr,  ^  conquered  ;'  "^  ^  to  hear,^  ^w  '  heard  ;'  >T  '  to  be,'  HW 
^  been ;'  ^  ^  to  take,'  f  7T  '  taken  ;'  fqw '  to  think,'  fq^  ^  thought  ;^ 
^  ^  to  bite,'  ^  ^  bitten  ;'  and  the  like. 

a.  When  following  a  verb  ending  in  an  aspirated  consonant 
or  ^,  the  termination  if  is  changed  to  V,  and  combined  with 
the  final,  analogously  to  the  combinations  of  the  same  verb 
before  the  K  and  "?j  of  the  tenses  (rule  :2i3,  c,  8)  ;  as,  ^  ^  to 
bum,^  ^Sfny  *  burnt ;'  "R^  '  to  bear,'  ^ft^  '  borne.' 

b.  In  verbs  ending  in  consonants  the  augment  ^  is  occa- 
sionally prefixed  to  the  termination  w,  when  a  medial  ^  or  T 
may  be  optionally  changed  to  the  Guna  equivalent ;  as,  ^^^ 
^  to  weep,'  ^^f^  or  rtf^  ^  wept ;'  f^  *  to  know,'  f^f^  or  ^f^ 
'  known.'  jy^,  '  to  take,^  makes  the  ^  long,  and  optionally 
substitutes  the  vowel  for  the  semivowel ;  as,  i\{\^  or  Jj^rf 
'  taken. ^  "^^  ^  to  dwell,'  and  T^  and  "^  '  to  speak,'  substitute 
the  vowel  for  the  initial ;  as,  yfNiT  '  dwelt,'  "5^  and  vJO^iT  ^  said.' 

c.  Verbs  ending  with  tt  commonly  reject  the  nasal ;  so  tth, 
^  to  go,'  makes  Tnr,  'gone;'  7^  'to  refrain,'  xnr;  TH  '  to  be 
engaged  in,'  TIT :   but  ojnr,  '  to  desire,^  makes  cRTnT,  &c. 

d.  The  termination  of  this  participle  is  sometimes  changed 
to  ^ ;  as,  '^,  '  to  cook,'  makes  '^w,  '  cooked ;'  V  '  to  shake,^ 
VTT  '  shaken :'  also  after  verbs  ending  in  ^  or  t,  not  inserting 
^;  as,  fH^  '  to  break,'  f>T^  '  broken  ;'  "^  '  to  fill,'  ij^  '  filled.' 
Verbs  taking  this  form  are  denoted  in  the  lists  of  roots  by  an 
indicatory  ^  (see  p.  io6). 

e.  Although  not  changeable  to  a  Guna  or  Vriddhi  letter,  a 
radical  final  vowel  sometimes  substitutes  a  different  vowel. 
Thus,  of  verbs  ending  in  ^rr,  FT  *  to  stay'  makes  fWcT ;  HT  '  to 
mete,'  fi^iT '  meted ;'  tn  *  to  drink,'  xftlT  '  drank ;'  ^  ^  to  abandon/ 
^Ht  *  abandoned :'  or  a  final  ^sn  may  be  dropped ;  as,  ^,  '  to  give,' 
makes  ^ :   and  in  this  root  the  initial  may  be  rejected,  when 


VERBAL  DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES.  275 

a  preposition  ending  in  a  vowel  precedes  ;  as,  T(W  or  IT^ 
*  given  aw  ay/  If  the  vowel  of  the  preposition  be  ^  or  "^^  it 
must  be  made  long,  when  the  initial  of  ^  is  rejected ;  as,  xrO^ 
or  xrft:^  ^  completely  given  ;'  ^  or  ^g^  *^  vv  ell  given.'  ^fc^T, 
'  to  be  poor/  makes  ^ftf?rw  '  poor/  '  impoverished.' 

/.  Verbs  ending  in  "^  substitute  ^  for  the  final,  and  »T  for 
If ;  as,  "^  '  to  scatter,^  ojS^  ^  scattered  /  "SJ  '  to  be  old,'  ^fl# 
^  old.'  "q  ^  to  fill,'  and  H  ^  to  kill,'  substitute  "3!^ ;  as,  ^^ 
'  filled,'  Ht  '  killed.' 

g.  Verbs  ending  in  i^  are  anomalous  in  their  participles 
past:  ^,  ^  to  cherish,'  makes  ^;  v  *  to  suck,'  \fhT;  ^  'to 
barter,'  »fhT ;  ^  '  to  weave,'  TW  ;  ^  '  to  cover/  ^ ;  ^  '  to 
invoke,'  "|TT. 

h.  Verbs  ending  in  ^  usually  change  it  to  ^TT ;  as,  i^,  '  to 
meditate,'  makes  WHf,  *  meditated  ;'  %  '  to  be  dirty,'  HT?r ;  but 
^,  *  to  sing/  makes  jftif,  *  sung  /  %  '  to  waste,'  ^ftlT.  "5^,  '  to 
shrink/  makes,  when  it  signifies  '  being  cold/  "^fhf ;  when  it 
means  '  congealed/  ^ftrf ;  when  it  denotes  '  shrunk,'  ^^M.  % 
'  to  decay,'  makes  '^T^ ;  and  w  '  to  surround,'  ^cfHr  or  ^cfhr. 

i.  Verbs  ending  in  ^  optionally  substitute^;  as,  "Sft'to 
cut/  ^g[Trr  or  f^ ;  ^  '  to  cut,'  ^fTiT  or  f^ ;  ^  '  to  pare/  ^nw 
or  f^, 

J.  Whether  ending  in  W  or  rf,  the  past  indefinite  participle 
is  dechned  like  nouns  in  m  ;  ^:,  "^^  "flf  ;  fM^,  f%f^, 
f^f^if ;  f>T^:,  fn^,  ^tw  ;  &c. 

A:.  The  participles  formed  with  ^  from  verbs  signifying 
motion,  i^s^  '  to  embrace,'  ^  '  to  sleep,'  m  '  to  stay,'  ^rw  ^  to 
sit,'  ^^  '  to  dwell,'  iT»T  '  to  be  born,'  ^  '  to  mount,'  »T  *  to 
grow  old,'  may  be  used  in  an  active  sense  ;  as,  tj^  ttct:  *  he 
went  to  the  Ganges ;'  WvyHI^<5:  '  he  mounted  the  horse ;' 
gc^HlP^s:  '  he  embraced  his  son.'  They  are  also  sometimes 
used  absolutely,  in  place  of  the  past  tense  ;  as,  ^  f^qir:  *  he 
stood  ;'  F  Tir:  *  he  went.' 

I.  The  past  participle  in  the  neuter  gender  is  often  used  as 
an  abstract  noun  ;   as,  HlPMrt  '  speech,'  '  that  which  is  spoken ;' 

N  n  2 


S76 


DERIVATION. 


^rftnt  '  sleep,'  *  repose  ;'    ^^Trf  '  prattle  ;'    ^ftnf  '  laughter ;' 
f^  '  good.' 

The  following  alphabetical  list  contains  many  of  the  verbs 
ending  in  vowels  which  form  the  participle  past  with  i\,  or  are 
in  other  ways  anomalous,  and  most  of  those  ending  in  con- 
sonants which  do  not  insert  the  augment  ^. 


^srs^  to  pervade,  w?. 

^!^  to   move,   ^sr^ ;    but   '  to 

w^orship,'  ^frNnr. 
^r^  to  anoint,  ^T^j. 
^  to   eat,   ^r^  or    ^s^,   and 

sometimes  irv.    "^  food  ; 

what  is  eaten. 
^r^  to  spread,  ^tf  ;    but  '  to 

eat/  ^^TiT. 
^rnr  to  obtain,  ^TTTT. 
^;5^  to  kindle,  Jif. 
"T?;^  to  be  wet,  ^^  or  "gr^, 
•^"t  to  injure,  '^. 
■giJ^  to  cover,  "gj^w. 
^gPT  to  weave,  •gnr. 
^  to  go,  ^TT  gone ;   also,  true  : 


^  to  cry,  ■^. 

^jH  to  be  weary,  ^iPiT. 

fff^  to  be  distressed,  ffiF  or 

ffr%Tf. 
^;T  to  dig,  i^TiT. 
"^  to  be  patient,  "sprfl". 
f^  to  waste,  "ftp"  or  T^fhO". 
f^  to  be  moist,  f^. 
f^  to  throw,  f^pr. 
f^'^  to  be  drunk,  ft^. 
'Wf(  to  agitate,  "^^f. 
Vi^i^  to  shake,  "s^ihf. 
f^  to  be  distressed,  f^^. 
im  to  go,  xriT. 
TiT^  to  be  thick,  irre", 
IT  to  void  excrement,  '^, 


but  when  meaning  a  debt,     ipT  to  preserve,  ijff. 

ip:  to  take  pains,  ip&. 
ij^  to  hide,  T^. 
IT  to  swallow,  ifNt. 
it  to  be  sad,  iTR". 

to  -'      oo 

^  to  proclaim,  "^  or  "jf^. 
UT  to  smell,  inw  or  ITT^. 
f^TT  to  be  sensible,  f%w. 

?}--{?. 

^  to  cover,  "S^w  or  'g^f^ir. 
f^  to  cut,  f^. 
"^TT  to  touch,  "^TT. 


due,  owed. 
^5^  to  go,  ^F. 
cii^T  to  shine,  cR^. 
"SFT  to  desire,  ^rt'W  or  ^ifiTiT. 
^  to  extract,  oR^. 
"^  to  cut,  '3v^. 
"^  to  grow  thin,  '^. 
Y^  to  draw  lines,  to  plough,  '^. 
"^  to  scatter,  ofij^. 
^  to  stink,  ^7T. 

nn  to  go,  "gn^. 

-5^1  to  be  angry^  ^. 


VERBAL  DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES. 


277 


»nT  to  be  born,  'STTW. 

ini  to  pray  silently,  Wff  or  arfVrT' 

iri  to  kill,  ir&. 

g^  to  be  pleased,  ■^. 

aft.  to  decay,  ^3§. 

5T>T  to  yawn,  ipf. 

»T  to  grow  old,  "sft^. 

'^  to  know,  ^TT  or  ^rfxnr. 

rfU  to  decay,  if^T. 

aifV  to  instruct,  ^ftn". 

3jft  to  grow  old,  '^^. 

'^  to  fly,  ^  or  fh^. 

W^  to  bow,  tfiT. 

Tn^  to  perish,  rT^. 

in^  to  tie,  '!^. 

■ftjjTT  to  clean,  f^. 

w^  to  send,  "^  or  "^. 

TTS^  to  pare,  TT^. 

mr  to  stretch,  utt. 

ini  to  be  hot,  irff. 

^  to  torment,  "J^. 

^  to  kill,  H^. 

"J^  to  be  satisfied,  ^. 

"JTT  to  be  satisfied,  TjTr. 

■ff  to  cross  over,  Tft^. 

"jq^T  to  abandon,  W^. 

^TT  to  be  ashamed,  W^. 

^^  to  be  afraid,  ^m. 

^  to  preserv  e,  ^TrT  or  gw. 

1^^  to  pare,  ?^. 

1^  to  hasten,  "^  or  hTm. 

fi^if  to  shine,  ft^2. 

^  to  bite,  ^. 

^  to  tame,  ^TnT  or  ^finr. 

:^  to  burn,  ^ny. 


f^  to  play,  ^  ;  to  game,  ^. 

f^  to  show,  f^F. 

f^  to  smear,  f^nj. 

^  to  waste,  ^  or  ^hr. 

^hr  to  shine,  ?fhT. 

J  to  suffer  pain,  rnr  or  ^irT. 

it  to  kill,  5^. 

^  to  be  made  bad,  ^^. 

5^  to  milk,  F7V. 

^  to  fear,  to  arrange,  if3^. 

^  to  see,  jw. 

^  to  be  firm,  ^. 

F  to  tear,  ^t#. 

ft^  to  despise,  igTR. 

•^Tf  to  awake,  ^[T^. 

%  to  sleep,  '^^m. 

f^  to  hate,  fsr^. 

VT  to  have,  f^. 

vt:  to  injure,"  "u^. 

Tjt  to  injure,  v#. 

>i  to  shake,  v^. 

vt^  to  injure,  V3§. 

Y^  to  be  proud,  VF. 

1^  to  satisfy,  inw. 

IT^  to  cook,  xrii. 

Tl^  to  go,  1T^. 

fqm  to  grind,  fxfF. 

"g^  to  cherish,  "j?. 

"^  to  stink,  '^. 

"HTC  to  fill,  "0^  or  "^iTfT. 

■^  to  mix,  Y^. 

^  to  fill,  T|5&. 

urnr  to  grow  fat,  "qhr  or  TihT. 
Tra[  to  ask,  "^F. 
in  to  fiU,  Tjt. 


S78 


DERIVATION. 


'^  to  blow,  as  a  flower,  xk^ 

with  IT  prefixed,  TTgfWff. 
q^  to  bind,  "q^. 
^  to  know,  ^ir» 
)nf  to  worship,  Hi;. 
\f^  to  break,  H^. 
fk^  to  break  or  divide,  fW^. 
>pT  to  eat,  ^ ;  to  be  crooked, 

\J^  to  wander,  >JT«iT. 
>r^  to  fry,  m. 
^  to  serve,  \i^, 
T{^  to  be  mad,  »T^. 
1T«T  to  mind,  PTfT. 
IT'FST  to  be  immersed,  Jpfif. 
ik^  to  be  unctuous,  Irr^. 
Itt^  to  urine,  ?0t. 
^  to  liberate,  ^. 
^"j  to  fasten,  ^^. 
^  to  be  foolish,  ^  or  ^nj. 
W^  to  faint,  H#  or  Hf^SlT. 
TO  to  clean,  ^. 
*pt  to  consult,  ^. 
H  to  kill,  i|^. 

^^  to  speak  barbarously,  f^. 
%  to  be  dull  or  dirty,  ^gR. 
inr  to  worship,  ^. 
^TfT  to  strive,  xf^. 
"^urr  to  restrain,  inr. 
^  to  join,  -pR. 
gv  to  fight,  ^. 
t^  to  colour,  Tlv 
:^iT  to  be  engaged  in,  tiM ;   so 
with  ^j  prefixed,  to  begin. 


t?T  to  sport,  to  be  intent  on,  TjT. 

1t^  to  be  separate,  fr^. 

"ftr^r  to  injure,  ftF. 

tST  to  kill,  ^. 

^*T  to  break,  ^T^f. 

^  to  obstruct,  "i^ii^. 

^^  to  injure,  ^. 

^  to  be  angry,  ^  or  ^^tlT. 

^  to  ascend,  ^^^. 

^  to  sound,  fv^, 

cTJT  to  be  in  contact,  HTf. 

<W  to  gain,  75^. 

c5^  to  be  ashamed,  "c^r^  or 
"c5fWrr. 

f^^  to  smear,  foyff. 

fc^  to  be  small,  f^^. 

frJ^  to  lick,  c^. 

c^  to  embrace,  <^fhT. 

Tf^  to  lop,  tjrr. 

e!W  to  covet,  <^. 

<r5^  to  covet,  <^. 

<^to  cut,  "^. 

^^  to  speak,  "3^. 

T^  to  weave,  to  sow  seed,  ttt. 

^H  to  vomit,  ^PiT  or  wfNlf. 

"^  to  bear,  gjs". 

m  to  blow,  TTiT  or  ^TT^  ;  f^"tTT!I 
blown  out,  extinguished. 

"^T^  to  shine,  "^"ra". 

f^^  to  divide,  f^. 

f^iT  to  divide,  f^rai ;  to  be  agi- 
tated, f^rq-. 

f^  to  gain,  to  find,  f%^  or  fr^. 

f^^  to  enter,  fqfF. 

f^W  to  surround,  f^. 


VERBAL   DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES. 


S79 


^31  to  leave,  Y?. 

jff  to  be,  ^. 

Y^  to  be  great,  Y^. 

"^^  to  break,  Tgj. 

'^  to  choose,  '^'hrr. 

t  to  go,  ^^. 

:5nB  to  be  able,  ^nu. 

:^  to  fall,  ^r^. 

'^R  to  curse,  "^. 

^TT  to  be  quiet,  ^"TfT ;  tr.  ^rfHcT. 

^nr  to  praise,  -^rer,  TT^rer. 

f^  to  have,  "%? ;  to  distin- 
guish, ikf^. 

'^  to  sleep,  ^iPMri. 

"SJV  to  be  pure,  ^Ti". 

^  to  dry,  15TE^ 

^TCto  injure,  ^u§. 

"5T  to  injure,  T^ft^. 

"^HT  to  be  weary,  ^i^H. 

"^  to  cook,  'zn^. 

^  to  cook,  ''^TRir. 

f%^  to  embrace,  f%F. 

xg^  to  breathe  ;  with  fV, 
fcimw  trusted  in  :  but  mP^ri 
breathed. 


f^  to  increase,  "3T»T  or  ^rfVrf. 

"^^  to  adhere  to,  ^^. 

"^  to  faint,  ^r^. 

fipl  to  become  perfect,  fws. 

"|T  to  be  brave,  ^^. 

fw^  to  be  bland,  fwv. 

"B^^  to  embrace,  ^^. 

■E^rf  to  sound,  ^nRT  or  ^Prld ; 

to  adorn,  with  ^n  prefixed, 

^1^^  or  ^myfriri. 
"E^  to  sleep,  ^. 
f^^  to  sweat,  1%W. 
^Fif  to  let  go,  to  create,  irw. 
wq  to  creep,  ^. 
^j;^  to  go,  ^gs^. 
W  to  cover,  ^ciWr. 
T^  to  touch,  ^iTF. 
^^qiPT  to  swell,  ?q5trr  or  ^TW. 
Ti|i^  to  thunder,  ^^§. 
■^  to  void  ordure,  ^. 
■^  to  strike  or  kill,  ^. 
^  to  be  glad,  ^. 
"^    to    be    ashamed,    "^hn    or 

IT^  to  rejoice,  ^. 


Future  Participles  active. 
240.  The  active  future  participles  are  two,  one  in  each  Pada, 
and  bear  the  same  relation  to  the  present  participles  as  the  inde- 
finite future  does  to  the  present  tense ;  the  terminations  being 
the  same,  with  ^  prefixed.  Thus  the  terminations  of  the 
participles  are  ^^  or  ^cT  and  ^HH  ;  and  the  insertion  or 
omission  of  the  augment  ^,  or  any  other  modification  of  the 
base,  follows  the  analogy  of  the  indefinite  future  tense  ;  as, 
H  *  to   be,^   ^TfroiTr    '  what   will   be  ;'    im   ^  to    go,'    irf^Ton^; 


280  DERIVATION. 

f»f  ^  to  conquer/  W^Tr^  '  what  will  conquer ; '  "^  Ho  hear,' 
irfimc^^  ^what  will  hear/  This  participle  is  declined  like  the 
present  participle  in  ^;  as,  m.  nf^"^,  f.  nf^iarrft,  n.  HP^aift^. 
So  ^v,  ^  to  increase/  makes  ^\|«rHli>I  ^  what  will  increase  / 
^  ^  to  torture,'  rDji^HIH  ^  what  will  torment  /  5^  Ho  liberate/ 
JTt^WRSr  ^  what  will  liberate  /  ^  Ho  do/  ohr^mHIHI  '  what  will 
do,'  &c.     These  are  declinable  like  nouns  in  ^. 

Future  Participles  passive  or  neuter. 

241.  A  class  of  future  participles,  most  extensively  employed, 
is  formed  by  adding  to  verbs  the  affixes  "fl^Tr,  ^Trfhj^,  xpf ,  "^"^5 
or  inrr[.  Of  these,  the  two  first  reject  the  final,  leaving  trt 
and  ^Rttr ;  whilst  the  three  last  leave  only  xr.  The  participles 
thus  formed  express  not  only  the  sense  of  futurity,  but  the 
conditions  of  fitness,  probability,  or  necessity  ;  or  that  which 
is  to  be,  which  ought  to  be,  which  may  be,  or  which  must  be : 
^f^rT^,  H^^'hr,  H^,  and  the  hke. 

a.  The  participles  thus  formed  are  declinable  in  the  three 
genders  like  nouns  in  ^ ;  and  in  one  or  other  gender,  but 
especially  the  feminine  and  neuter,  they  assume  very  com- 
monly the  office  of  nouns :  thus  "^  ^  to  be  made  or  done,' 
from  "^  '  to  do/  becomes  "^FTT  f.  '  a  magical  rite,'  and  "^  n. 
'  motive'  or  '  cause.'      Further  instances  will  be  specified. 

242.  rT^rrT  is  attached  to  the  base  analogously  to  the  mode 
in  which  the  ITT  of  the  first  future  is  connected  with  it.  If  the 
verb  prefixes  ^,  so  does  the  participle;  as, ^  '  to  be/  nf^nniT 
*  what  is  or  ought  to  be  /  T?>I  '  to  increase/  irfVrf^  *  to  be 
•increased :'  otherwise,  as,  f»T  '  to  conquer/  Wrf^  '  to  be  con- 
quered /  "f  Ho  make/  "^if^  ^  to  be  made  /  ^^  '  to  oppose/ 
^&^^  '  to  be  opposed  /   '^^  Ho  bear,'  wf^^  '  to  be  borne  /  &c. 

243.  WtT^iT:,  is  attached  to  the  final  consonants  of  verbs 
without  change,  and  to  final  vowels  agreeably  to  the  rules  of 
Sandhi.  Short  medial  vowels  are  changed  to  their  Guna 
substitutes :  thus,  of  the  verbs  above  cited,  ^  makes  H^ritiT ; 


VERBAL   DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES.  281 

&c. ;  ^  to  be,'  '  to  be  increased,'  '  to  be  conquered,'  &c.  This 
and  the  preceding  termination,  irsEr,  is  annexed  to  all  verbs 
indiscriminately. 

244.  The  participles  formed  with  tt  are  not  so  indiscriminately 
applied,  but  are  restricted,  with  exceptions,  to  certain  verbs  or 
classes  of  verbs.  They  affect  the  base  also  differently,  accord- 
ing to  the  letters  with  which  the  tt  is  combined. 

245.  ijlT  is  added  to  verbs  ending  in  vowels,  when  it  requires 
a  final  ^rr  or  a  diphthong,  to  become  ij,  and  other  vowels  to  be 
changed  to  their  Guiia  equivalents  ;  as,  ^,  ^tj  '  to  be  given  ;' 
^,  iITT  *  to  be  sung  ;'  "^,  %ii  ^  to  be  cut ;'  faT,  ^'^  '  to  be 
conquered ;'  Tn%  %7r  *  to  be  guided.'  In  some  cases  the  final 
vowel  being  changed  to  the  Guna  letter,  combines  with  iT,  as 
if  it  were  a  vowel :  thus  fsT,  ^  to  be  conquered,'  may  be  ^iil 
(see  rule  5,  a,  p.  13). 

a.  Tiir  is  added  to  verbs  ending  with  a  labial  consonant,  tf, 
Tfi,  -q,  v{^  T{y  if  preceded  by  ^ ;  as,  "^HT,  "^p^  '  to  be  sworn  ;'  c5H, 
c5«I  '  to  be  acquired ;'  T?T,  T?5T  ^  to  be  agreeable  :'  but  HH, 
preceded  by  ^T,  requires  the  insertion  of  H  before  '^ ;  as, 
^rT75T«T  '  to  be  killed  :'  also  when  preceded  by  "grtr  in  the  sense 
of  ^  commending  ;'  Ttn^T«f:  ifrr^:  ^  the  virtuous  man  is  to  be 
praised  :'  but  not  in  its  primitive  sense  ;  as,  'g'trH^  Vrf  *  wealth 
is  to  be  acquired.'  ^TT  *  to  pray  silently,'  and  «Th  ^to  bow/  preceded 
by  ^T,  take  T^nr,  as  well  as  "^w,  making  ^iiui  or  "STT,  ^iHlwjj  or 
-nHHH*  The  following  verbs  also,  although  ending  in  labials, 
form  their  participles  with  WfT :  ''5R  ^  to  eat,'  with  WT  prefixed, 
-tHMi^  ^  to  be  sipped'  or  '  tasted  ;'  ^tt,  ^Tct  ^  to  be  ashamed  ;' 
^,  ^pRy  'to  be  tamed;'  r<T,  TJ^  ^  to  be  spoken;'  75^1,  T^V^ 
'  to  be  spoken  ;'  ^^T,  TTO  '  to  be  sown.' 

b,  T[K  is  affixed  to  the  following  verbs  :  ^TT  '  to  seek,'  ^qm ; 
IHR  ^  to  laugh,'  TI^T  ;  HW  ^  to  worship,'  v^m  ;  inr  '  to  worship,' 
^T^" ;'  ^^  ^  to  be  able,'  ^"^  ;  ^T^  '  to  slay/  "^j^ ;  tr^  ^  to 
endure,'  ^r^  ;  and  ^rv  substituted  for  ^  ^  to  kill/  ^XR.  Of 
these,  HIT,  ^T5T,  and  ^,  may  also  take  ^if^,  making  hthi  '.  to 
be  divided'  or  'portioned/  ^iq"  '  to  be  worshipped/  ■^n??/ to 

o  o 


282  DERIVATION. 

be  slain/  ^nr  is  also  affixed  to  the  following :  7p5[  ^  to  speak/ 
'^T:  ^  to  go/  TT^  '^  to  be  wild/  "JR  '  to  restrain/  if  not  preceded 
by  a  preposition  ;  iT?r  ^  to  be  spoken/  ^t§  ^  to  be  gone'  or  '  prac- 
tised,' iTSr  ^  to  be  made  frantic  or  drunk/  "qr??  ^  to  be  restrained  :' 
but  ^rr  may  be  prefixed  to  '^^  if  not  meaning  a  spiritual 
teacher ;  as,  wt^^'V  ^^:  '  a  country  to  be  gone  to  /  otherwise, 
^n^"pnr:  '  an  i^Lcharya'  or  '  religious  instructor/ 

c.  The  following  words  are  considered  as  irregularly  formed 
with  ^1^,  and  are  used  as  nouns,  as  well  as  participles : 

^nrctt  mfn.  ^imperishable;'  but  restricted  to  companionship 
or  friendship  /  as,  W^fM  H^lf  ^  uninterrupted  association  / 
from  *r  '  to  decay.' 

^nt:  *  a  master,'  ^  a  Vaisya  /  from  ^  '  to  go  :'  otherwise,  wn§: 

*  a  respectable  man.' 

^cffi:  -^  -if  ^  improper/  '  bad,'  '  what  is  not  fit  to  be  said/ 

*  reprehensible,'  '  blamable  ; '  from  "^  '  to  speak,'  w  hich 
more  regularly  takes  "^r^,  making  W«|ir  mfn.  ^not  to  be 
uttered.' 

"giT^x^T  ^  A  female  fit  for  impregnation  /  "^xj^ntl  ^:  '  a  cow  fit 
for  the  bull  /  from  ^  with  "g"!! :  otherwise,  "^TTTEfT^  mfn.  ^to 
be  gone  to'  or  '  approached.' 

xnm:  -Wr  -TPT  *  To  be  bought'  or  ^  marketed/  ^  to  be  pledged  / 
from  TT'O  '  to  praise  :'  otherwise,  ttRFI  mfn.  *  to  be  praised.' 

-^  -zt:  -z^T  -^  *  Fit  to  be  chosen'  or  '  solicited  /  ^T  f.  '  a 
maiden  to  be  sought  /  from  "^  '  to  choose  as  a  bride'  (a 
maiden) :  otherwise,  wm  '  to  be  chosen,'  wdth  ^17  ;  or  ^7^ 
mfn.  '  to  be  appointed  or  selected  generally,'  with  Wi^. 

■^  '  a  conveyance,'  '  a  vehicle,'  ^  that  by  which  any  thing  is 
borne  /  from  ^  :  but  with  Tnn^  it  makes  WT^l  mfn.  ^  to 
be  carried.' 

246.  The  termination  "apTX^  intimates  by  its  initial  oR,  that  in 
affixing  Tf,  the  radical  vowel  is  not  to  be  changed  to  its  Gufia 
or  Vriddhi  equivalent,  although  it  may  be  liable  to  such  other 
changes  as  its  conjugational  inflexion  prescribes  ;  it  also  shews 


VERBAL  DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES.  28^ 

that  a  radical  nasal  penultimate  is  to  be  dropped :  whilst  xf 
requires  the  insertion  of  w  in  some  cases  before  tt.  This 
termination  forms  participles  with  verbs  ending  in  consonants 
having  a  penultimate  ^ ;  as,  Y?T  ^  to  choose,'  ^|7T  ^  to  be 
chosen  ;'  ^  '  to  increase/  ^^  ^  to  be  increased :'  except  ^gr^ 
*  to  praise/  "^Tf  ^  to  injure/  and  "^  *  to  make/  which  take  xnr, 
making  ^ix§  '  to  be  praised/  ^^  '  to  be  injured/  "sf^ot  ^  to  be 
made/  So  titT,  with  the  preposition  ^r^  or  ^,  or  iiifiry  ^  the 
hand/  prefixed,  takes  Wr^;  as,  W^^tt^  or  ^^i^  ^  to  be  let  go,' 
Mlfiyyj^-  '  to  be  let  go  by  the  hand.' 

a,  ^TT  is  added  to  the  following  verbs  ending  in  vowels : 
^,  ^  *  to  be  gone  ;'  5",  with  ^rr  prefixed,  ^TTgTT  *  to  be 
respected  /  f  ( "^^T ),  ^  ^  to  be  chosen  /  ^,  ^^  ^  to  be 
praised.'  Also  to  these  ending  in  consonants  :  ofirT,  o|^t5  ^  to 
be  celebrated  :'  ^,  "g^  ^  to  be  pleased ;  ^nrr,  f^fr^T  '  to  be 
governed.'  When  annexed  to  W^  '  to  dig,'  Tj  is  substituted 
for  ^TfT ;  as,  ^  '  to  be  dug.'  ^nT  is  optionally  affixed  to  form 
the  following  words : 

'Si  '  to  make,'  '^ ;   or  with  innr ,  cfiT^  '  to  be  made.' 

JV^   '  to  hide,'  ^^ ;    or  with   in^,  ttY^  '  to   be   hid'  or  •  kept 

secret.' 
g^  '  to  take/  with  ^rftr  or  irfrT  prefixed,  ^rftpj^,  ijPdJjm  *  to  be 

received  /  or  with  iniTf ,  ^^fiTTjT^,  llPriilRI. 
F^  ^  to  milk,'  ^^ ;   or  with  "mr,  ^'^. 

^  ^  to  nourish,'  ^jw ;   or  with  inn^,  vrpc^  '  to  be  nourished.' 
H»T  '  to  cleanse,'  literally  or  metaphorically,  ^sq";   or  with  WrT, 

iTF^  '  to  be  cleansed,'  ^  to  be  purified.' 
■^  ^  to  speak,'  "gj^r ;  or  with  "m^,  "^^ :  with  any  term  signifying 

'  falsely'  prefixed,  it  is  only  ^i?r ;   as,  ^rTl^,  ^^nr,  &c. : 

with  a  preposition  it  takes  inT7(;  TT^ST  '  to  be  declared.' 
ji^  '  to  rain,'  Y^;  or  with  ^n^,  T^  ^  to  be  rained.' 
^^  *  to  praise,'  ^TCT ;   or  with  ^,  "^f^. 

h»  A  number  of  words  are  considered  to  be  irregularly 
formed  with  this  affix ;  as  the  following : 

002 


^4-  DERIVATION. 

^Rpa?:  -wr  -^  '  Suffering  no  pain'  or  ^  fatigue  ;'  from  ^HT  '  to 

pain.' 
SHlTtf  *  Clarified  butter  ;'  from  w^  '  to  anoint.* 
•g^:  The  name  of  a  river  ;  from  g")iH. '  to  leave  (its  bed).' 
'^  Any  valuable  metal  except  gold  or  silver ;   from  tttt  *  to 

hide.' 
'<*SM^^:  -'^m  -^  '  Ripening  or  flowering  in  cultivated  ground :' 

so  *H"*«q«l  '  growing  wild/  &c.  ;   from  xr^  '  to  ripen.* 
ipn  -^  -^  '  Dependent/  '  servile/  ^  confined  /  n^:  ^pitT:  '  the 

encaged  parrots  :'  attached  to  as  a  partisan,  ^^tt^t:  <  a  friend 

of  the  gods :'   with  it  prefixed,  T(n^  a  term  in  grammar, 

an  exception.    Fem.  only,  and  combined  with  other  words, 

*  without  ;*    as,    'H'T^^T  ^^  ^  the   army   outside   of  the 

village  /  from  ^  '  to  take.' 
r<IKIl  '  A  funeral  fire  ;'  ^rfr^ff^mr  '  maintaining  a  sacred  fire  ;' 

from  f%  '  to  gather.' 
frTTTt  *  A  plough  ;'  from  f»f  '  to  conquer.' 
finm  One  of  the  lunar  constellations  ;  from  "^  '  to  please.* 
"g^:  One  of  the  lunar  constellations  ;   from  xrq  *  to  nourish.* 
>TT^T  A  proper  name.      When  meaning  '  a  wife/  it  is  formed 

with  IRTrf ,  from  ^  ^  to  nourish.' 
fk^:  The  name  of  a  river  ;  from  fn^  '  to  break  (its  banks).' 
^nn  ^^T^\  -ttJ   To   be   used   as  a  conveyance   or  carriage  ;    a 

horse,  an  ox,  a  car,  &c.  ;  from  ^  '  to  join,*  '  to  yoke.* 
■;5^:  -x^T  -xTf  *  Agreeable/  '  liked  ;'  from  ^^  '  to  please.' 
fsR^xi:  '  Refuse/  *  sediment  /    from  Tot  with  f%  prefixed,  ^  to 

take  away.* 
fcpjxf:  '  Munja  grass  ;'  from  "^with  f^  prefixed,  '  to  purify.* 
■ftngr:  A  lunar  mansion  ;   from  fqv  '  to  accomplish.' 

c.  ^  with  ^PT^  forms  >|tt,  to  denote,  in  combination  with 
other  words,  '  state'  or  '  condition  /  as,  ^^^  *  divinity,'  *  the 
being  a  god  :*  and  ^  with  '^m  forms  ^iqr  '  killing,'  which  is 
also  used  in  composition  ;  as,  fi^ij^ii^i  '  slaughter  of  an  enemy,' 
'A^^f^l  '  murder  of  a  Brahman,*  »Tl^mT  '  homicide.* 

d.  The  following  participial  nouns  are  considered  as  being 


VERBAL   DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES.  285 

formed  with  this  affix,  which  in  the  feminine  gender  become 
denominations : 

^5??T  worship,  from  ^nr  to  worship. 

^[iin'  a  Utter  —  ^  to  go. 

f^nrmr  muddy  earth  —  "qif  to  go. 

frrmrr  an  assembly  —  "q^  to  sit. 

wmJ  hvehhood  —  *T>r  to  nourish. 

?rarr  the  jugular  vein  —  ?nT  to  know. 

"fwr  knowledge  —  f^  to  know. 

Tnm  wandering  about  as  a  mendicant  —  "giT  to  go. 

^i^l  a  court,  from  "^  to  sleep. 

TFnn^rr  an  assembly  —  ^^  to  go. 

Jnm  ablution,  bathing  —  "et  to  bathe. 
247.  The  last  of  these  terminations,  Wr^,  indicates  by  its 
initial  that  the  radical  vowel  is  to  be  changed  to  its  Guna  or 
Vriddhi  equivalent.  It  may  be  affixed — to  verbs  ending  in  "g^ 
or  "3!,  when  '  necessity'  is  implied  ;  as,  >t,  ht^  '  what  is  to  be, 
necessarily  ;'  otherwise  H^  : — to  "J,  itrt  *  to  be  mixed  ;'  and 
"q,  with  W[  prefixed,  ^rrer^  '  to  be  stirred  up  :'  to  verbs  ending 
in  "^  or  ^;  as,  '^,  oFF§  Ho  be  made  ;'  tt,  ^f§  ^to  be  torn  :' — 
also  to  verbs  ending  in  consonants  not  labials;  as,  "Sf^,  ^rr?r 
*  to  be  borne.'  As  noticed  above,  it  is  also  annexed  to  some 
verbs  ending  in  labials. 

a.  When  Wrf  is  added  to  verbs  ending  in  palatals,  they  are 
usually  changed  to  gutturals,  or  "^  to  cfi ,  and  «T  to  it  ;  as,  xr^, 
xrnsT  *  to  be  cooked  ;'  ^IT,  ^^nj  '  to  be  made  sick :'  but  there 
are  many  exceptions.  It  does  not  effect  this  change  if  the 
verb  takes  the  augment  ^  before  the  TT  of  the  passive  past 
participle  ;  nor  when  *  necessity'  is  implied  ;  as,  VJ^  '  what 
must  be  cooked ;'  wn^T  *  what  must  be  abandoned  ;'  "qnq  *  what 
must  be  worshipped  ;'  TRT^  '  what  must  be  said.'  Some 
verbs  optionally  admit  the  change  in  different  acceptations  ; 
as,  >|1T  '  to  enjoy'  makes  H^  '  what  is  to  be  enjoyed ;'  but 
>pT  '  to  eat'  makes  ^^^ :  "JST,  with  frr  prefixed,  '  to  appoint,' 
makes  fVnftTTT  '  what  or  who  is  fit  to  be  employed  ;'    frTiftiir 


286  DERIVATION. 

*  what  or  who  may  be  employed :'   so  ^^,  ^  to  speak/  makes 
'^Tx^  ^  what  may  be  said ;'  but  ^T^  '  a  sentence/ 

b.  The  following  are  considered  as  irregularly  formed  with 

'^nn^Wr  or  sh^i^i^i  ^  Day  of  conjunction  of  the  sun  and  moon  / 

from  "^Jnrr  '  together,'  and  ^tb"  ^  to  dwell.' 
SHMltM:  '  To  be  brought  from  a  particular  fire/  the  Dakshin- 

agni ;    applicable  only  to  a  form  of  sacrificial  fire  ;    from 

Wt,  '  to  take,'  with  ^rr  prefixed  :   otherwise,  ^atn^. 
■^xr^nr:  A  kind  of  sacrificial  fire  ;    from  fq"  '  to  collect/  with 

TT  prefixed. 
^4!im^:  A  kind  of  sacrifice  ;   from  "^^  '  an  altar/  and  tn  *  to 

drink  /  in  which  the  Soma  juice  is  drunk. 
Vnxrr  '  A  sacred  text  /  from  VT  '  to  have'  or  *  hold.' 
frTofiTZEr:  *  A  dwelling  /  from  f^  '  to  collect/  with  f^. 
Trft^pir:  ^  To  be  brought  as  fire  for  a  sacrifice  /  from  trft  and 

fq  '  to  collect.' 
XTRI  A  sort  of  liquid  measure  ;  from  in  ^  to  measure  /  H  being 

changed  to  tf.* 
Kiill^:   -xqi  -^    '  Adverse/    *  disliked/    ^  disagreeable/   ^  not 

approved  of  or  '  agreed  with/  from  55ft  *  to  guide.' 
T^mi  '  A  sacred  text  /  from  ^'ST  '  to  sacrifice.' 
x:Ti^'^44    *  A  royal  sacrifice/  held  by  a  paramount   sovereign  ; 

from  tT'^n  and  tet  *  to  bring  forth.' 
m^l  '  To  be  carried  as  sacrificial  fire  /  from  ^^nr  and  ^  ^  to 

bear.' 
^x||i4:  A  sort  of  sacrifice. 
^I^iai  *  Clarified  butter  /  from  TH^  and  ;[rJt  *  to  take.' 

248.  An  affix  of  similar  import,  though  not  much  employed, 
is  ^rc»5H^,  which  leaves  ^fc^W,  attached  to  verbs  ending  in  con- 
sonants without  change  of  the  radical  vowel :  thus  xf^  makes 
q^Po^H  -m  -HT  -H  '  what  is  to  be  cooked'  or  '  ripened  /  fvr^, 
fk^fcJH  -m  -FT  -'f   ^what   is   to   be,  or  may   be,  broken'  or 

*  divided.' 


VERBAL   DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES.  287 

,  Indeclinable  Participles. 

249-  There  are  two  participles  of  the  past  tense,  which  are  very 
extensively  used^  and  which  admit  of  neither  gender,  number, 
nor  case.  They  are  formed  by  adding  to  the  verbal  base  the 
terminations  WT  leaving  rcTT,  or  "^t^  leaving  tj.  The  latter  is 
affixed  in  the  place  of  FTT  only  when  the  verb  is  a  compound, 
or  is  preceded  by  a  preposition.  In  either  case  the  accom- 
panying letters  are  indicatory,  and  denote  that  the  radical 
vowel  is  not  changeable  to  the  corresponding  Guna  or  Vriddhi 
letter,  and  that  a  penultimate  nasal  is  to  be  rejected.  When 
however  the  augment  ^  is  inserted  before  ^,  the  Guna  substi- 
tute should  take  the  place  of  the  radical  vowel. 

a.  Although  implying  past  time,  or  something  that  has 
been,  the  participles  thus  formed  with  r^  and  "^  have  not  an 
absolutely  past  signification :  they  rather  suspend  the  mean- 
ing, importing  that  although  something  has  been,  yet  that 
something  else  is  immediately  to  follow  ;  as,  '^  ijliT  Tftr^  ci^^Pd 
'having  eaten  and  drunk,  he  goes  ;^  ^Tm^J^  f^T^efit  3"jNtT^ 
*  having  heard  this,  Hiranyaka  said.'  The  designation  of 
indeterminate  past  participles  would  therefore  perhaps  better 
express  their  character  than  that  of  Gerund,  by  which,  as 
ordinarily  employed,  something  remaining  to  be  done  is  alone 
intended. 

b.  As  a  general  rule,  whatever  form  the  base  assumes  before 
^,  the  sign  of  the  indefinite  past,  it  also  takes  before  WT,  that 
of  the  indeterminate  past ;  as,  '^ ;  "^t,  "^r^,  ^  having  done  :' 
"^ ;  "^nr:,  ^hi,  '  having  heard :'  ttt  ;  xftwt,  xfh^,  '  having  drank  :^ 
^ ;  ^^,  ^^T,  '  having  given  :^  VT ;  f^TTt,  f^r^,  ^  having  held  i' 
ITT ;  fWff:,  fWr^?,  '  having  stood :'  ^^ ;  T^,  "T^,  '  having 
said  :'  ^tT ;  Tfq^:,  "^ftTi^,  *  having  dwelt :'  -^V  ;  "^iVrrt,  vaPMril, 
'  having  hungered  :'  ^  ;  *FV:,  WS5T,  '  having  eaten  :'  im  ; 
TTT:,  711^,  '  having  gone  .'  iTT ;  ^Tff:,  "^Tr^T,  *  having  bowed  to  :' 
^^ ;  ^nr:,  ^^TT^,  '  having  dug :'  ^ ;  ^fqrr:,  ^fTOT,  '  having 
slept:'     Hf^;   gf^:   or  iTtfeir:,   ^H^HI  or  jflH^HI,   'having  been 


288  DERIVATION. 

pleased :'    fq^ ;    ^^TT:,   ^H^Hr?   *  having  served  :'    tj^  ;    rv^% 
TT-^lr^,  '  having  taken  :'  and  the  Uke. 

c.  The  deviation  from  general  rules  affects  chiefly  the  influ- 
ence of  the  indicatory  cB  upon  a  penultimate  nasal  and  the 
augment  ^. 

d.  Thus,  although  a  penultimate  nasal  should  be  rejected, 
the  following  are  instances  of  its  being  retained :  ^S^,  '  to  go/ 
makes  t^^t  ;  and  w»^  ^  to  go/  ^eHtt,  or  with  ^,  ^fi^T  ^  having 
gone.'  A  verb  ending  with  ti  or  tb,  preceded  by  a  nasal,  and 
which  inserts  ^,  optionally  rejects  the  nasal ;  as,  sppir,  ^  to 
arrange,*  makes  i^PvjHi  or  ^jfr^n^ ;  "^^  '  to  loosen,'  "^rfqi^rT  or 
•^fV^n^T ;  and  ^^qi '  to  tie  together,'  yPwir^l  or  ^PiihHU  The  same 
with  ^^  '  to  deceive,'  which  makes  either  ^P^irMI  or  "^^rTT ; 
and  7^  '  to  cut,'  ^jP^IHI  or  c^P^HI.  Verbs  ending  with 
"3T?  preceded  by  a  nasal,  optionally  reject  it ;  as,  >T^  *  to  break/ 
HW  or  HW ;  T^  '  to  colour,'  "C^  or  XMl ;  ^%  '  to  anoint'  or 
*  to  worship,'  makes  ^^niT,  #^,  or  ^rf^r^ ;  lU^,  '  to  perish,'  may 
retain  the  nasal  which  it  inserts  in  conjugation;  aSj  Tf^T  or 
^T,  or  with  ^,  ^r^IHI. 

e.  With  regard  to  the  change  of  the  radical  vow^el  when  ^ 
is  inserted,  all  verbs  beginning  and  ending  with  a  consonant, 
excepting  a  final  xf  or  %  and  having  a  penultimate  ^  or  "5, 
optionally  take  the  Guna  vowel ;  as,  fc?"'^,  '  to  write,'  makes 
fc^fe^  or  ^fji^rWT  ;  ^TT '  to  shine,'  ^fWr^TT  or  ^>fTTT^  ;  "^^  '  to  be 
hungry,'  "HrfvpafT  or  "^Vv?^.  A  vowel  initial  has  but  one  form ; 
^  '  to  go,'  irf^r^;  and  so  has  a  final  ^;  as,  f«R  '  to  serve,' 
^f^FTT.  f^  '  to  know/  and  ^  '  to  weep/  are  exceptions  to 
this  rule  having  but  one  form ;  fcjH^HI,  ^5!T^.  The  fol- 
lowing are  additional  instances  to  those  already  specified, 
of  the  vowel  being  unchanged  when  the  augment  ^  is 
inserted  :  ^if  '  to  embrace,'  "^tn^ ;  ^V  '  to  ply/  ^rfkim ;  g^ 
'  to   steal,'  gftTF^ ;    ^  '  to  be  glad,'  JdlTFrr ;    ^  '  to  trample,' 

/.  In  the  following,  the  vowel  is  optionally  changed  before 
^ :  ^  '  to  go/  ^frfr^  or  ^Brftr^ ;  ^^  *  to  be  thin,'  ^f^T  or 


VERBAL  DERIVATIVES PARTICIPLES.  289 

chf^lHT ;  ^  '  to  draw/  'af^i^  or  ^fiftrTT ;  ^  '  to  thirst/  ijCmHI 
or  irflT^ ;  ^  '  to  endure/  ^m^  or  )Rfll^. 

ff.  Verbs  having  an  indicatory  "3"  optionally  insert  i[  (p.  io6) ; 
as,  ^,  '  to  be  tranquil/  makes  ^iPhhi  or  ^IWM\  ;  a  final  it 
requires  the  radical  vowel  to  be  made  long,  when  ^  is  not 
inserted :  but  ^sm,  '  to  go/  has  different  forms  ;  -^fHWI,  "^i^ 
or  ^irWI ;  f^^,  '  to  play/  makes  itt^  or  ^fcfwrr ;  "^»  '  to  purify/ 
"^r^  or  Trf^rMI  ;  ^n^  '  to  go/  makes  "^rwr,  but  when  it  means  *  to 
worship/  ^^TF^ ;  <5>T,  '  to  beguile/  forms  c^frfWr^,  but  '  to  be 
covetous/  cg'^ssfT ;   fir^  '  to  be  distressed/  f^P^Mi  or  ffifT ;  &c. 

250.  The  termination  BT'^T  is  used  when  the  verb  is  a 
compound,  particularly  when  it  is  preceded  by  a  preposition. 
The  radical  vowel  is  unchanged. 

a.  When  affixed  to  a  base  ending  in  a  short  vowel,  7T  is 
commonly  prefixed  to  tt  ;  as,  "ss  ^  to  make/  ^rgofW  '  having 
made  like'  or  ^  after;'  f^  *  to  conquer/  MuHnKJ  'having 
^  defeated  /  ^  '  to  praise/  nw^  '  having  celebrated  :'  and  this 
prevails  though  the  radical  vowel  become  long  by  combina- 
tion ;  as,  i[  ^  to  go/  with  '^rfv  prefixed,  ^nfhq"  ^  having  studied  / 
or  with  n,  Tm  '  having  deceased.'  When  ^  is  attached  to  a 
base  ending  in  a  long  vowel,  no  change  takes  place  :  FT  ^  to 
stay/  TTWnr  ^  having  gone  forth  /  ^'^  '  to  fly,'  "g-lfhr  '  having 
flown  up  /  ^^  to  be,'  ^T^^  '  having  perceived.'  "^  is  com- 
monly changed  to  fr:;  as,  tj  ^  to  cross,'  ^^hI'L^  ^  having  come 
down.'  sTPJ^  '  to  wake,'  changes  its  vowel,  TWPT^  ^  having 
woke  up.'  Diphthongs,  as  in  other  instances,  are  usually 
changed  to  ^;  as,  V  ^  to  suck/  TTVPT;    ^  ''to  sing/  TrrmT;   "sft 

*  to  cut,'  IT^[R. 

b.  Some  verbs  ending  in  vowels  or  diphthongs  modify 
their  finals  in  a  special  manner  before  Tf.  Thus  fg^,  '  to 
decay,'  makes  Ws^W  or  fr^'hr  ;  ^"t  ^  to  waste,'  WJ^ ;  <?r^  ^  to 
dissolve,'  3Tc5hr  or  inTR ;  ^  ^  to  barter,'  ^^*T?T  or  ^SRTR.      ^ 

*  to  weave,'  and  ^  ^  to  cover,'  make  T(^T^  and  M«MI^  ;  but  afler 
■qft  or  ^,  ^  may  make  either  xyfc^'hT,  ifNhr,  or  qfti^liT,  i(^JT(, 

c.  Verbs  ending  in  nasals  occasionally  change  them  to  W, 

p  p 


290  DERIVATION. 

or  admit  some  other  modification  of  the  base.  Thus  W^J,  '  to 
dig,'  makes  either  TIW^  or  jp^mi ;  ^m  ^  to  go,'  ^STPT^j  or  ^TFTrT 
'  having  come  ;'  »nT  '  to  produce/  4^^  or  H^im  ;  ^hjtr  ^  to  bow,' 
TTO?^  or  mrm ;    TR  '  to  stretch,  f^WTqr ;   ?rH  '  to  mind,'  ^g^TW 

*  having  assented  ;'  ^HT  *  to  refrain,'  frnTR  or  "hfinq" ;  ttt  *  to 
sport'  or  '  rest ;'  fTOT  or  f%T7T ;  ^  '  to  kill,'  ^TT^?T  '  having 
beaten'  or  '  slain.'  WJ,  '  to  desire,'  makes  its  vowel  long, 
Uahi»f  '  having   desired   much  :'    so   does  '^  *  to  go,'   fcjxii^ 

*  having  considered.'  ^STR,  '  to  obtain,'  may  substitute  m^ ; 
as,  irrar  or  nmui  '  having  obtained.' 

d.  Causal  verbs,  and  those  of  the  tenth  conjugation  which 
do  not  make  the  radical  vow  el  long  by  virtue  of  a  grammatical 
rule,  or  in  which  it  is  not  long  naturally  or  by  position,  prefix 
^PT  to  ^ ;  as,  f4Jimu|  *  having  caused  to  compute  ;'  "nriim^ 
'  having  made  to  stoop,'   '  having  bent'  or  '  bowed ;'    Mch<^m 

*  having  declared'  (from  ^R^,  tenth  conj.) :  but  Y  '  to  hold 
cause,'  VK^fifr,  makes  ^cH^TRt  *  having  caused  to  hold ;'  and  >|^ 
'  to  adorn,'  tenth  conj.,  iJ^^rfiT,  makes  ^"^^jor  '  having  similarly 
adorned.' 

Participles  of  repetition,  or  Adverbial  Participles. 

251.  In  one  form  the  indeclinable  participle  of  repetition 
is  nothing  more  than  the  indeterminate  participle  past  repeated 
— Ti^  "Tr^n  '  having  gone  repeatedly,'  "^ir^  "^j^  *  having  done 
repeatedly^ — and  is  rather  a  case  of  grammatical  construction, 
than  part  of  conjugation.  There  is  another  form,  no  doubt  of 
an  analogous  character,  although  specially  provided  for  by 
adding  the  termination  TJT^c^  to  the  verbal  base :  this  leaves 
^11^,  whilst  the  initial  w  indicates  the  change  of  a  final  vowel 
to  the  Vriddhi  equivalent,  to  be  again  changed  before  the 
vowel  of  ^w  agreeably  to  the  rules  of  Sandhi :  thus  f^,  '  to 
gather,'  becomes  %  which  makes  ^TR  ^^R  '  having  collected 
repeatedly  ;'  "^^  *  to  hear,'  becomes  w,  and  >|^  *  to  be,^  Ht, 
thus   making   "^#  "^tR   *  having   heard   repeatedly,'   >TR  HR 

*  having  been  repeatedly :'  ^,  Ho  remember,^  makes  WR  Wit 


VERBAL  DERIVATIVES NOUNS.  291 

*  having  remembered  repeatedly.'  A  final  ^TT  inserts  Tf  before 
the  termination ;  as,  ^  ^  to  give/  ^  ^"R  ^  having  given 
repeatedly.^  When  the  verb  ends  in  a  consonant,  a  radical  ^, 
if  not  preceding  a  compound  consonant,  is  changed  to  ^rr,  and 
any  other  short  vowel  to  its  Gun  a  equivalent :  vowels  long  by 
nature  or  position  are  unchanged  :   thus  xj^  makes  xtt^  xn^ 

*  having  cooked  repeatedly  ;*  '^(rm,  ^^pf  ^TO  '  governing  repeat- 
edly ;'  f^,  ^  ^  *  knowing  or  having  known  repeatedly ;' 
^,  HV»f  ^Tt»f  *  eating  or  having  eaten  repeatedly  ;'  &c. 

a.  The  reiterated  form  of  this  participle  is  however  by  no 
means  the  mode  in  which  it  most  frequently  occurs,  and  it  is 
much  more  often  found  singly  in  particular  senses  or  combina- 
tions in  which  it  offers  an  analogy  to  an  adverb.  Thus  it 
occurs  with  words  signifying  '  first,'  as  "o^  vftif  or  w^  H^  or 
IRH  >Tt»f — 'mffif  '  having  first  eaten,  he  goes.'  "SF,  '  to  do,' 
employs  this  form  when  used  transitively,  and  with  a  verb 
signifying  '  to  call ;'  ^t  "SfiTTFT^t^lf  '  he  calls  out,  having 
made,  or  imputed,  theft ;'  i.  e.  he  calls  out,  '  Stop  thief.'  The 
same  verb  also  uses  it  connected  with  cjnzn^  '  how,^  or  ^7^ 
'  thus  ;'  <*v^^'K  or  ^T^fR  >J%  ^  having  done,  thus  or  how  he 
eats  :'  or  with  ^TJ  '  sweet ;'  ^ijchiC  H^  '  having  sweetened  it, 
he  eats.'  ifl^,  '  to  live,'  takes  this  form  in  conjunction  with 
"Tl"^;  ^N-jraO^HMlri  '  having  lived  so  long,  he  studies  ;'  i.  e. 
he  studies  during  life.'  "^,  'to  fiU,'  takes  it  with  ^»;^  or  "^T^ ; 
•«l*^yc  '  having  filled  the  skin  ; '  ^t^o^  *  having  filled  his 
belly.'  ^  also  takes  it ;  as,  ^4|c4mri  jfR^  '  killing  all  entirely, 
or  to  the  very  root,  he  slays ;'  or  xrr^Trnf  ^f%  *  he  strikes, 
kicking  with  his  foot.'  Instances  might  be  infinitely  multi- 
plied of  the  use  of  the  indeclinable  or  adverbial  participle 
employed  without  repetition  to  signify  an  action  indetermi- 
nately past. 

SECTION    II. 

Verbal  Nouns, 

252.  The  nouns  that  are  derived  immediately  from  verbs 

p  p  ^ 


292  DERIVATION. 

comprehend  a  great  variety  of  terms,  for  which  an  unexcep- 
tionable classification  can  scarcely  perhaps  be  proposed.  There 
are  two  principal  classes  into  which  they  might  be  divided,  as 
adjectives  or  attributives,  and  substantives  or  names;  but  the 
same  word  is  very  frequently  used  in  either  form,  the  quality 
or  attributive  constituting  the  appellation  of  the  individual : 
thus  ci!^  or  ofiTT:  in  their  generic  acceptation  signify  ^  any  thing 
or  person  that  does  an  action,  or  makes  any  thing ;'  whilst  in 
combination,-  fcfi^jt;  means  *  a  servant,'  oF»t«BR:  *  a  potter  ;'  and 
singly  oR^:  has  for  one  of  its  meanings  '  toll'  or  '  tax,'  and  ojrrt; 
*  a  letter  of  the  alphabet.'  To  distinguish  derivative  words 
therefore  according  to  their  import,  would  lead  at  least  to 
much  inconvenient  repetition. 

253.  These  different  nouns  are  formed,  agreeably  to  the 
usual  scheme  of  Sanskrit  grammar,  by  affixing  certain  termi- 
nations to  the  crude  verb,  which  is  modified  in  a  greater  or 
lesser  degree,  and  then  forms  the  inflective  base.  These 
terminations  are  very  numerous ;  but  the  greater  number  have 
a  very  limited,  in  some  instances  almost  an  individual,  appU- 
cation  ;  others  comprehend  a  large  class  of  words.  It  would 
be  inconsistent  with  the  object  of  the  present  grammar  to 
furnish  very  numerous  examples  of  these  derivatives ;  nor  is 
such  detail  necessary,  as  they  will  be  found,  where  they  seem 
to  be  most  appropriately  placed,  in  the  Dictionary.  It  will 
be  sufficient  therefore  to  give  here  a  selection  of  such  words 
as  may  appear  to  be  most  useful,  or  as  may  best  exemplify 
the  principles  upon  which  they  are  constructed  ;  classing 
them  under  the  terminations  by  which  they  are  formed,  and 
arranging  them  in  alphabetical  order,  as  has  been  done  by 
Professor  Bopp.  He  has,  however,  taken  only  the  essential 
letters  of  the  affixes ;  but  I  prefer  exhibiting  them  as  they 
occur  in  original  grammars,  as  from  the  letter  or  letters  by 
which  the  essential  element  is  accompanied,  a  clue  is  usually 
obtained  to  the  modification  to  which  the  inflective  base,  or 
some  word  compounded  with  it,  is  subjected. 


VERBAL   DERIVATIVES NOUNS.  293 

^  is  added  to  derivative  verbs  to  form  abstract  nouns, 
declinable  only  in  the  feminine  gender,  and  -svhich  therefore 
add  the  feminine  termination  (tr)  ^^;  as,  "Nofit^  *  to  wish  to 
do,'  "N^iSMt  '  the  desire  to  do ;'  Mc4«hl^  '  to  desire  a  son,' 
;jd°<il*^l  '  desire  of  a  son.'  It  is  also  added  to  verbs  ending 
with  consonants  preceded  by  a  vowel  long  either  by  nature  or 
position,  to  form  similar  substantives :  ^  *  to  endeavour/  |^ 
'  effort'  or  *  wish  ;'  "gs^  '  to  reason,'  "gr^  '  reasoning.' 

^T,  leaving  ^  to  be  added  to  the  verb,  forms  feminine 
abstract  nouns  from  verbs  which  have  an  indicatory  t^,  and 
fir^  '  to  break,'  and  others,  forming  the  class  "ftr^rf^.  The 
nasal  prevents  the  change  of  the  radical  vowel ;  as,  f»7^T 
'  rupture  ; '  "NnTT  ^  reflection,'  from  "Nfff  '  to  think  ; '  tJtTT 
*  worship,'  from  t^st  '  to  worship  ;'  ip(j  '  cleaning,'  from  ^  ^  to 
cleanse :'  except  in  the  case  of  a  final  ^ ;  as,  »T,  '  to  decay,' 
makes  ilTT  ^  decay.'  ^tt  (^^)5  ^  to  be  ashamed,'  makes  ^th 
'  modesty.'  '^fiq,  '  to  have  compassion,'  changes  its  t  to  ^ ; 
as,  "^rn  ^  clemency.'  ^r^  is  also  added  to  verbs  in  ^rr  when 
preceded  by  a  preposition  or  analogous  term ;  as,  ^  ^  to  give,' 
TC^  '  a  gifl ;'  HT  '  to  shine,'  irm  '  light ;'  and  "^rST  ^  faith,'  and 
^Rrtr  '  disappearance,'  from  VT  '  to  have'  or  ^  hold,'  preceded 
by  ^1^  or  WnT^. 

W^,  leaving  ^,  is  one  of  the  most  widely  applicable  affixes. 
I.  It  is  added  to  the  class  of  verbs  called  ^T^rf^,  or,  according  to 
most  authorities,  to  all  verbs  whatever,  to  signify  the  agent ; 
forming  attributives  which  may  take  the  three  genders,  but  which 
are  commonly  used  in  some  one  gender  as  appellatives.  A  final 
vowel  is  changed  before  ^,  according  to  the  rules  of  Sandhi ; 
as,  xr^  ^  to  cook,'  TT^  ^  who  or  what  cooks'  or  ^  ripens ;'  ^ 
(^to)  ^  to  go,'  '^ '  who  or  what  goes ;'  ^"5"^:  ^  a  male  fol- 
lower,' ^^^^  '  a  female  attendant ;'  '^t:  {^^  '  to  steal,'  ^^: 
^  a  thief;'  >|^^  to  be,'  H^  ^  what  is,'  >T^:  ^  the  world,'  or  a  name 
of  S'iva  ;  Tf^  ("T^^)  '  to  sound,'  "«T^  '  what  sounds  ;'  Tf^  ^  a  male 
river,'  iT^  ^  a  female  river.'      (Obs.  Those  verbs  of  the  class 


294  DERIVATION. 

M-MlH^  which  have  an  Anubandha  t  require  the  feminine  to  be 
formed  with  ^,  not  ^rr;  as,  ^^,  ^ft^,  '^,  &c.) 

2.  w^  is  also  added  to  certain  verbs  compounded  with 
their  objects  in  restricted  acceptations :  as  to  ^  *  to  take/ 
bodily  exertion  being  omitted  ;  as,  w^r^:  *  an  heir/  ^  one  who 
takes  his  portion  /  but  HK^Ii.:  ^  a  porter/  ^  one  who  takes  a 
load :'  also  with  ^TT  prefixed  ;  "j^qr^  '  having  flowers/  '  blos- 
soming.' It  is  also  added  to  ?7f ,  ^  to  take/  in  a  similar 
manner ;  as  in  ^f^hii^:  '  a  spearman/  ^  one  who  holds  a  pike  :' 
— to  ^  '  to  be  worthy  /  ^ifi^T  ^  a  female  Brahman/  ^  one 
worthy  of  reverence  :^ — to  *nT  '  to  whisper,'  and  t<r  ^  to  sport,' 
compounded  with  "^^  '  the  ear/  and  ^^rif '  a  bush,^  put  in  the 
locative  case  ;  as,  chiiM  q :  ^  an  informer  /  W^TH:  ^  an  elephant :' 
— to  verbs  compounded  with  ^^n^  to  form  proper  names ; 
^n^'^':  S'ambhava : — to  "^  ^  to  sleep/  compounded  with  various 
terms  /  as,  M\m\  '  who  sleeps  in  the  air,^  ^  a  divinity  /  ^-cA^: 
^  who  sleeps  in  the  heart,'  *  Cupid ;'  ^rTM^r^:  '  one  who  sleeps 
supine.' 

3.  Verbs  ending  in  ^  take  ^^  to  form  abstract  masculine 
and  neuter  nouns  ;  as,  f»T  ^  to  conquer,'  iht:  ^  victory  /  f^  ^  to 
gather,'  ^ir:  *  collection  /  ifl"  ^  to  fear,'  irt  *  fear,'  *  peril.'  It 
is  also  added  to  a  few  other  verbs,  with  a  similar  effect ;  as, 
^R  ^  to  rain,'  "^t  '  rain,'  or  '  the  rainy  season.' 

^snrr ,  leaving  ^,  with  the  change  of  a  short  radical  vowel  to 
Vriddhi,  is  added  to  verbs  to  express  the  agent  when  com- 
pounded with  the  object ;  as,  "SR  '  to  make,'  ^»?^rR:  '  a  potter,' 
^  one  who  makes  pots  /  ^  ^  to  take,'  HTTIfR:  ^  a  porter,'  ^  one 
who  takes  a  load.'  When  added  to  ^  ^  to  strike'  or  '  kill/  z 
is  substituted  for  the  final  in  certain  combinations  ;  as,  ^tSt- 
xnr:  '  who  strikes  the  tree,'  '  a  woodpecker.'  When  ^w  is 
prefixed,  the  final  may  be  1^ ;  as,  «|i&^i|ie:  or  ^#ff^Tff:  *  a 
collection  of  letters,'  '  an  alphabet.' 

^r^T^,  leaving  w^,  is  added  to  a  few  verbs,  distinguished  by 
an  Anubandha  ^,  to  form  masculine  abstract  nouns :  tt  (5^) 


VERBAL  DERIVATIVES NOUNS.  295 

*  to  tremble/  W^"^*  *  a  trembling ;'  f^  (jf^)  '  to  increase/ 
"SEPtrg:  ^  intumescence  ;'  g  (jg)  ^  to  be  distressed,'  ^"^^: '  anxiety,' 
^  pain.' 

^rpFT  is  added  to  verbs  to  form  masculine  nouns  implying 
imprecation  ;  as,  from  "^fN  ^  to  live,'  '^nf^Tf^^  *IF^  '  ^^J  ^^^^ 
of  thy  life  be  ;'   ^mayest  thou  perish.' 

^"TX^,  leaving  ^,  forms  masculine  appellative  and  abstract 
nouns  from  verbs  ending  in  "^j  "gi,  "^,  "^ ;  as,  F  '  to  praise,' 
^^:  Upraise;'  "g  *  to  join,'  nw:  ^barley;'  ""g^  '  to  purify,'  t^W* 
^  winnowing  corn  ;'  "^  ^  to  make,^  «r?c;  '  the  hand  ;'  ^  *  to  swal- 
low,^ ir:  '  poison  ;^  ^  ^  to  spread,^  preceded  by  f^,  makes  f^^cR: 
'  prolixity,'  ^  diffiiseness  ;'  but  f^yu  ^  a  bed,'  ^  a  tree.'  It  may 
also  be  added  to  aj^  ^  to  take  ;'  as,  Jjf :  ^  a  planet : — to  f%  '  to 
collect,'  preceded  by  "pFfiC ;  fn^y^:  '  certainty  :' — to  ipT  ^  to  go  ;' 
ttt:  ^  going :' — also  to  xirr ,  substituted  for  ^  ^  to  eat,'  pre- 
ceded by  a  preposition ;  as,  Phm^:,  THHt:,  f^xpfr:,  '  food '  or 
'  eating :' — to  »rT  ^  to  meditate,'  and  ^qv  ^  to  pierce,'  not  com- 
pounded with  a  preposition ;  irq:  ^  silent  prayer,'  ^w:  *  wound- 
ing:'— to  ^TT  ^to  sound;'  ^it:  ^  sound:' — -^  ^  to  laugh;' 
^:  ^  laughter :' — to  im  *  to  refrain,'  either  singly  or  preceded 
by  "3TT,  fH,  fV,  and  'H'T ;  as,  itr:  ^  restraint,'  TtnnT:  ^  marriage,' 
Prl^H:  '  fixed  rule,'  f^ilH:  ^  cessation,'  lErqrr:  ^  restraint :' — to  t[^ 
^  to  speak,'  »t^  '  to  sound,'  "q?  '  to  read,'  ^Tf  ^  to  sound,'  pre- 
ceded by  f?r ;  as,  Itttt^:  '  speaking,'  &c. : — also  liiTj  *  to  sound,' 
either  singly  or  with  fff  when  it  means  ^  to  sound  as  a  lute  ;' 
WUft  Ph^i:  ^  the  sound  of  the  Vina.  There  are  other  com- 
binations with  this  affix,  of  which  it  may  be  observed,  that  its 
use  very  commonly  alternates  with  that  of  Tr>^,  which  latter 
makes  the  vowel  long.  Thus  optionally  with  the  preceding 
words  we  may  have,  fwTT:,  ttth:,  ^T^:,  ^PT:,  ^th:,  W^*,  which 
are  formed  with  in^. 

^n^  is  added  to  15T  ^to  injure,'  and  ^r^ '  to  praise  ;'  as,  ^ru^ 

*  mischievous,'  T?^T^  '  praising,'  cirf^i^jt  '  a  bard.' 

■^Icg-cf^  is  added  to  a  few  verbs  to  form  attributives  implying 


296  DERIVATION. 

possession  of  *the  quality  signified  by  the  verb :  thus  ?|^  '  to 
take,'  tenth  conj.,  "J^^iilc^  ^greedy,'  Sn satiable  f  ^  '  to  be 
compassionate,'  ^m<^  '  kind,'  '  pitiful ;'  f^  '  to  sleep,'  frf'^Tc? 
'  sleepy,^  '  slothful ;'   ^^  '  to  envy,'  ^'J^'mig  '  envious/ 

^  is  added  to  a  class  of  verbs  called  <*mR^  to  form  masculine 
or  feminine  abstract  or  appellative  nouns  ;  as,  oRit  '  to  plough,^ 
cRfq:  '  ploughing'  or  '  agriculture  ;'  'T  '  to  swallow,^  Wb  '  a 
mountain :'  and  the  same  affix,  or  ^,  as  derived  from  the 
technical  affixes  1[5t  and  ^^,  forms  similar  nouns  with  the 
classes  "^rnf^  and  ^Tsnf^  ;  as,  ^m  '  a  pond,'  from  '^^  *  to  sow ;' 
and  ^nftr:  '  war,'  from  ^»f  '  to  go.' 

^  is  added  to  a  few  verbs  to  form  neuter  nouns  chiefly 
signifying  an  instrument ;'  as,  ^f?rw  '  a  spade,'  from  ^^R  *  to 
'  dig  ;'  c5f^  '  a  sickle,'  from  7^  *  to  cut :'  but  ^^  '  to  go,' 
viPj:^*,  means  '  instituted  observance,'  also  '  a  history'  or  '  nar- 
rative ;'  and  "^  '  to  purify,'  xrf^  '  the  sacrificial  thread,'  '  a 
prayer  of  the  Vedas,'  or  *  sacrificial  fire.' 

^f^,  leaving  ^r^,  is  added  to  various  verbs,  either  single  or 
compounded,  to  form  attributives  ;  as,  "ftr,  '^ifMH  '  conquering,' 
*  victorious ;'  H^with  T^fic  prefixed,  irfbrfV^  '  who  is  disgraced ;' 
^  *  to  be  quick,'  TT^rf^'^  '  who  is  quick.'  These,  when  inflected, 
form  ifqt,  "SfftRt,  »Tf^  (see  p.  60,).  To  form  mascuhne 
appellatives  ^[fiT  is  added  to  f%^  '  to  sell,'  preceded  by  the 
article  sold,  as  W^f^^nft  ^  a  vender  of  oil ''  and  sometimes  in  a 
depreciatory  sense,  as  ¥i\H r«l '*41  '  a  low  Brahman,^  '  a  vender 
of  the  Soma  juice,'  which  is  used  at  sacrifices. 

^UM-M,  leaving  ^x^,  forms  attributives,  declinable  in  three 
genders,  from  various  simple  and  compound  verbs  ;  as,  from 
^^,  -cin.tii}  *  going,'  '  what  goes  ; '  from  "q^,  ^f^^  *  what 
endures  ;'  from  "^  with  ^r?^,  as  "^TcJ^It^  '  what  adorns,'  or 
with  f^  and  ^rr,  as  Phi.!  <*Q.u.u  '  what  annihilates'  or  *  makes 
nothing  of,'  &c. 

"3"  forms  attributives  with  desiderative  verbs  ;  as,  f^ofit^  '  to 
wish  to  do,'  "NoiJ^f  ^  desirous  of  doing :'  also  with  a  few  others ; 


VERBAL  DERIVATIVES NOUNS.  297 

as,  ^  ^  to  wish/  ^  ^  wishful  ;*  f^  *  to  know/  f^  '  know- 
ing ;'  ^Hl^iftr  ^  to  wish,*  ^rr^^  '  desirous  /  and  fvr^  '  to  beg,* 
"5?^  '  begging,'  fW^:  '  a  mendicant/ 

■g"^!?^  forms  attributives  after  various  verbs  ;  the  final  indi- 
cates the  lengthening  of  the  radical  vowel ;  as,  from  7^^  '  to 
desire,'  HTWor  '  wanton  ;'  cR  *  to  desire,'  cjrr^  '  desirous  ;'  >|^Ho 
be,'  HTfsfi  ^  existing  ;'  ttcT  '  to  fall,'  -qjw^  '  falling  ;'  "^if  '  to  kill,' 
yi^oh  *  destroying,'  '  destructive.' 

im,  leaving  "T,  forms  a  number  of  appellative  nouns  of 
various  genders  and  pui'ports :  the  radical  vowel  is  made  long 
by  virtue  of  the  final  ttt.  Thus  with  ^  *  to  make,'  w^:  '  an 
artisan  ;'  "ftr  '  to  overcome  (disease),'  wnj:  *  a  drug ;'  TT  *  to 
blow,'  TT^:  *  the  wind ;'  ^r^T  '  to  pervade,'  "WTS^  ind.  '  quickly,' 
or  ^rm:  m.  *  a  sort  of  rice  ;'  "iHT  *  to  be  born,'  ^rrg  n.  '  the 
knee.'  The  chief  importance  of  "^rrr  is,  however,  its  standing  at 
the  head  of  a  very  numerous  class  of  terminations,  thence 
called  Uiiadi,  or  Uii  and  others  ;  the  effect  of  which,  as  will 
be  observed  even  in  the  few  examples  above  given,  is  confined 
to  no  particular  signification,  and  which  form  derivatives  not 
always  bearing  an  obvious  relation  to  the  verbs  whence  they 
are  derived.  The  principle  of  the  Uiiadi  derivatives  is  in  fact 
merely  their  resolution  into  conjectural  etymological  elements, 
without  much  regard  to  the  sense  either  of  the  primitive  or 
derivative.  The  terms  are  too  numerous  to  be  further  parti- 
cularized in  this  place,  and  they  will  all  be  found  in  the 
Dictionary,  which  contains  the  whole  of  those  specified  in  the 
five  Unadi  chapters  of  the  Siddhanta  Kaumudi. 

"55,  leaving  ^,  forms  attributives  after  verbs  having  any 
penultimate  vowel  except  ^  or  "^ ;  the  change  of  which  is 
barred  by  the  initial  oR  ;  as,  from  fcT^  '  to  wTite,'  fc5'^  '  who 
or  what  writes  ;' — from  ^V  ^  to  know,'  "^  *  who  or  what 
knows.'  It  is  also  added  to  ift  ^  to  please,'  ftnT  '  what  pleases,' 
*  dear,'  '  loved,'  '  liked  ;' — to  "SK  ^  to  scatter,'  f^S^  ^  who  or  what 
throws.'  It  is  also  added  to  verbs  ending  in  ^  either  as  a 
radical  letter,  or  as  a  substitute  for  a  diphthong,  and  with  or 

Qq 


298  DERIVATION. 

without  a  preposition,  when  the  final  ^  is  cut  off;  as^  from 
^  '  to  know/  ^  or  1?^  ^  who  or  what  knows/  ^  '  to  call/  ^Tid^ 
'  who  or  what  calls/  It  forms  appellatives  or  attributives 
with  verbs  in  ^rr,  preceded  by  a  subordinate  term  ;  as,  ^  '  to 
give/  ift^  '  who  gives  a  cow  /  ^  ^  to  preserve/  xrrfttSw  '  the 
rear  of  an  army  /  and  from  trr  ^  to  drink/  f^TT:  '  an  elephant/ 
who  drinks  with  two  things,  his  mouth  and  his  trunk.  It  is 
added  to  WT  '  to  stay  or  be/  in  various  forms  and  senses  ;  as, 
MH^  '  who  or  what  is  leveP  or  *  at  ease,'  f^MHfr^  *  who  or 
what  is  uneven'  or  '  in  difficulty  /  TTF  '  what  goes  first,'  or 
U^n  '  a  measure  /  the  sibilant  being  unchanged  in  this  as  in 
some  other  derivatives  of  the  same  class.  ?y^,  *  to  take/ 
changes  its  Ti  to  "^  before  cF,  forming  appellatives ;  as,  tt^  *  a 
house,'  TT^:  (always  m.  pi.)  '  a  wife.' 

cfi5^,  leaving  %  is  added  to  ^,  when  compounded  with 
pronominal  nouns,  to  denote  *  likeness  /  as,  TR  and  Hff  make 
^T^^t ;  whilst  oRT,  leaving  ^,  is  added  to  the  same  verb,  simi- 
larly compounded,  when  the  two  sibilants  form  T^ ;  as,  ^ilf^: 
&c. :   so  irr^,  ril^Hj,  &c. :  see  p.  83. 

foR,  leaving  ^,  which  is  substituted  for  the  radical  final 
vowel,  is  added  to  verbs  in  ^rr,  or  those  which  substitute  ^31? 
for  a  diphthong,  when  preceded  by  a  preposition,  to  form 
appellatives ;  as,  from  \n  ^  to  have,'  frrfV:  '  a  treasure  /  ^rf^ 

*  a  joint,'  &c. :  also  when  preceded  by  a  subordinate  term  ; 
as,  ^TJ^fv:  '  what  holds  water,'  i.  e.  the  ocean. 

<Fr^,  leaving  "^j  forms  attributives  from  "5?^  *to  break,'  f^ 
'  to  know,'  f^  '  to  cut  /  as,  f^Fi: '  who  or  what  breaks  :'  f^?^ 

*  who  or  what  knows,'  fs^Ht^  *  who  or  what  cuts.' 

fin^,  leaving  frT,  is  added  to  verbs  to  form  feminine  abstract 
or  appellative  nouns.  There  is  a  general  analogy  between  the 
mode  of  attaching  the  final  to  the  base,  with  the  formation  of 
past  participles  with  ^ :  thus  "^  forms  "^ffrr;  '  act,'  '  action  /  ^, 
H^fiT:  '  praise  /  '^,  ^fri:  '  hearing'  or  ^  the  Veda  /  tRf  ^  to  go,' 
with  ^  or  f^  prefixed,  ^T«Tf%:  '  prosperity,'  f^tr(%:  *  calamity.' 
HIT,  ^  to  sacrifice,'  makes  ^[%:  '  sacrifice  ;'  FT  *  to  stay,'  f^frt: 


VERBAL  DERIVATIVES NOUNS.  299 

^  staying,' '  station  ;'  ^  Ho  sing/  iftfin  '  singing  ;'  tn  Ho  drink/ 
jfffrr.  '^drinking/  >r^  *  to  cook/  "qf^  'cooking/  *^  maturity  / 
im  ^  to  go/  TifiT:  *  going/  '  motion  /  TiR  '  to  sport/  xfifr:  '  plea- 
sure/ Verbs  ending  with  -gi  or  "^  change  the  "iT  to  ^;  as, 
V  Ho  be  anxious/  "ufH:  '  anxiety  /  "^  Ho  scatter/  "aftfS:  '  scat- 
tering/ -q^,  '  to  destroy/  makes  T^rrfw:  '  destroying  /  ^  Ho 
kill/  %fw:  *  a  weapon  /  and  ^  '  to  celebrate/  ^itft:  '  fame/ 
'  reputation/ 

■f^H  forms  adjectives  from  verbs  which  have  an  Anubandha 
I ;   as  tr^  (TtJr^)  '  to  ripen/  '^f'^  '  what  ripens'  or  '  is  ripe/ 

"m,  leaving  "J,  forms  attributives  from  f^,  ^,  W^,  and  '^^ ; 
as,  f^  ^  who  or  what  throws  /  ?T^  '  greedy  -,'  W^  *  fearful  / 
>IxnT  '  arrogant/  >ft,  '  to  fear,'  takes  '^,  f^^  or  ^»^5  in  all 
which  the  "^  is  indicatory,  to  form  adjectives  /  as,  H^,  >ft^^, 
or  ^c§^,  ^  timid,'  '  fearful/ 

xMKM  forms  adjectives  with  ^  or  its  substitute  xiTf  *  to  eat  / 
as,  ^RR,  Tp^FTt,  '  voracious  /    and  ^  'to  go,'  W^  '  movable/ 

*  mo\dng/ 

^PhM;  leaving  TT,  forms  adjectives  with  a  few  words  in 
particular  combinations  ;  as  ^^  Ho  see/  with  the  object  pre- 
fixed/ "tnTT'9f'?T  ^  who  has  seen  across  /  also  "^V  *  to  fight/  and 
^  *  to  make  /  as^  tHf^sr^  '  who  has  fought  the  king  /  I.M*H'H 

*  who  has  made  a  king  /  ^r^^"^  '  who  has  fought  with  / 
^^<*H'T  '  who  has  done  any  thing  along  with  (another)/ 
These  words  are  declined  like  nouns  in  ^»T,  p.  59. 

fiiTT  forms  adjectives  with  ^  '  to  go/  f»T  '  to  conquer,' 
W^  '  to  perish,'  and  ^  Ho  go  /    as,  ^7^  '  what  goes/   HiiHi. 

*  victorious,'  T^SR  ^  perishing/  Wr^rc  '  moving,'  '  going  /  also 
with  iT^,  which  changes  its  final  to  it  ;  as,  in^  ^  what  goes/ 
These  adjectives  form  the  feminine  with  ^;  as,  ^hO,  HiircjO, 
jihO,  &c. 

fiirT,  leaving  a  blank,  or,  in  other  words,  annexing  no  addi- 
tional letter  to  the  final  of  the  verb  to  form  its  derivative,  is 
subjoined  to  ^cf^,  '  to  touch,'  to  denote  the  agent  combined 
with  the  object  or  instrument,  when  the  former  is  not  water : 

Q  q  2 


300  DERIVATION. 

a  final  ^  before  this  affix  is  changed  in  inflexion  to  ^  (see 
r.  119,  p.  65):  ^ri^3(^  ("^'J^)  *  who  touches  Ghee;'  HtrH^ST 
^  who  touches  (fire,  &c.)  by  prayer:'  but  "g^ojiW^:  ^  who 
touches  water ;'  the  affix  being  Tr>T .  The  following  nouns 
are  irregularly  formed  with  this  affix :  ^fi^  '  a  priest/  from 
^nr  ^  to  sacrifice  ;'  ^v^  ^  arrogant/  from  v^  ^  to  be  proud  ;^ 
B5|r  ^  a  garland/  from  ^  *  to  quit  /  f^"5^  '  a  quarter,'  from 
f^  ^  to  shew ;'  Tfw^  ^  a  kind  of  metre/  from  f^ri^  ^  to  be 
bland :'  these  form  their  nominatives  in  oF.  The  derivatives 
of  ^s^  ^  to  go/  as  ITT^  '  east/  Sec,  and  the  words  "giT  '  who 
joins/  and  ^i^  *  a  curlew/  are  also  formed  wdth  this  affix  (see 
nouns  in  ^  &c.,  p.  48). 

ffjT^  is  an  affix  of  very  extensive  application  ;  its  effect  is 
precisely  the  same  as  that  of  the  preceding,  which  is  separated 
from  it  only  to  mark  the  peculiarities  of  inflexion  to  which 
nouns  formed  with  f^"^  are  subject,  ffixr  adds  nothing  to  the 
verb.  The  derivative  ends  with  the  same  final  as  the  primitive, 
modified  occasionally,  but  never  by  the  addition  of  a  vowel. 
The  nouns  it  forms  are  both  attributives  and  appellatives  ;  as, 
p^  ^  a  mother/  from  "g  ^  to  bring  forth  /  ^^  m.  ^  one  who 
goes  in  the  sky/  '  a  deity,^  from  "q^  ^  to  go  /  irfl"^  (11%^)  '  an 
enemy/  from  f^^  '  to  hate  /  ^ng^»^  ("J^)  ^  a  lunar  mansion/ 
from  ^^  ^  a  horse/  and  ^  '  to  join  ;'  ^^iifl":  '  a  general/  from 
%^  ^  an  army,^  and  Trft  ^  to  lead  /  f^TJiT  (u^)  ^  Brahma,'  from 
tnr  ^to  shine.'  Verbs  ending  in  short  vowels  add  ij^^  before 
f^il,  as  the  t^  indicates :  thus  f'^,  *  to  collect,^  makes  wfrTrfxTf^ 

*  who  collects  the  fire/  ^  a  householder ; '  f»f,  ^  to  conquer,^ 
fWff .  as  ^f»ni[  *  the  conqueror  of  Indra/  a  proper  name ; 
^  ^  to  praise/  ^7^,  as  ^^^^  '  who  praises  the  gods  /  ^  ^  to 
sprinkle/  as  WtT^  '  who  sprinkles  the  Soma  juice  /  ^  ^  to 
make,'  as  "^i^^oJiTr  ^  who  does  the  work,^  ^  an  artificer  /  >n«T«*it^ 

*  who  makes  the  gloss/  '  a  scholiast.'  ^  ^  to  see,'  ^ij^  ^  to 
touch,'  W5T  *  to  leave,'  take  f^  to  express  the  agent  when 
combined  with  the  object,  as  «Sg5(^  (-ir^^)  '  all-seeing  /  t^^rpfj^ 
('^^)  '  sharp/  '  corrosive  /   fTO^W  (-f^)  ^  all-creating,'  ^  the 


VERBAL  DERIVATIVES NOUNS.  301 

Creator :'  so  does  ^  ^  to  eat/  as  -sh^i?^  '  who  eats  flesh/  '  a 
goblin  /  and  ^^  '  to  kill/  as  ri^^*^  (^)  ^  who  kills  a  Brah- 
man/ The  following  are  modifications  to  which  the  base  is 
in  some  instances  liable :  w^-,  *  to  cover/  makes  its  vowel 
short ;  as,  fT"^^  ^  what  covers  the  body/  *  a  garment  /  verbs 
ending  in  a  nasal,  on  the  contrary,  lengthen  the  vowel ;  as, 
^R  Ho  be  tranquil,'  Tf^TT'T  (tt^T"?^)  ^  who  is  tranquil  /  "fR  'to 
stretch,^  TnTfrT  '  who  extends.'  THT,  "^,  Tpr,  and  tr,  however, 
may  change  their  finals  to  l^,  and  then  the  vowel  remains 
short;  as,  ^ScTTnf  'who  goes  along  the  road/  tfi^Trrf  ^  every 
way  extended  /  ^nn^  ^  humble,'  ^  lowly  /  wm[^ '  self-restrained.' 
■^rnr,  '  to  instruct,'  substitutes  ^  for  its  penultimate :  fflf^f^"^ 
(^:)  *  who  instructs  a  friend  :'  also  with  WT  prefixed ;  as, 
^nlV^,  nom.  ^T^l":,  '  a  blessing.'  tj,  '  to  swallow,'  makes  frfx. 
*  speech.'  H^,  w^,  ScRT,  '  to  fall/  &c.,  drop  their  nasals,  and 
substitute  1^  for  the  final ;  as,  "^T^iJl^  '  falling  from  a  car  / 
"g^TFf^  '  falling  from  the  pot  /  "q^xgw  *  falling  from  the  leaf.' 
■^  in  various  combinations  as  a  radical  letter  is  changed  to  "i" 
or  "3!,  when  f^  follows  a  verb  :  thus  f^^,  '  to  play,'  makes 
^7^,  as  ^"^TT  '  who  plays  with  dice,'  '  a  gambler :'  ^r^  '  to 
preserve,'  makes  "31:  ^  a  preserver  /  which  with  a  preceding  ^ 
substitutes  the  Vriddhi  letter,  as  »rt:  '  who  preserves  man- 
kind /  ^,  ^  to  weave,'  becomes  "3!: '  a  weaver :'  ^jr:  and  i^  make 
^  '  one  who  is  ill  /  "flj  ^  one  who  is  quick.'  "5^  and  ^  final, 
preceded  by  ^  are  rejected  ;  as,  H^, '  to  faint,'  makes  sm  '  who 
faints  /  and  ^  '  to  injure,'  "^j  nom.  v:,  ^  who  injures  /  as, 
'sr^v:  '  a  load,'  '  what  injures  the  axle  of  a  cart.'  Some  verbs 
form  nouns  as  it  is  considered  irregularly  with  this  affix;  as, 
•^^  '  to  speak,'  TT^  '  speech  /  TC^  '  to  ask,'  ITR^,  nom.  TTT^, 
^  who  inquires  /  IT  '^  to  move,'  '^Tfl  '  a  worm  /  f^  Ho  serve/ 
"^t:  '  prosperity  /  W5T  '  to  go,'  wfcdr^f  '  who  wanders  about,' 
'  an  ascetic  /  f^^  '  to  shine,'  f^^  '  lightning  /  tjjj  '  to  go,' 
tPTI^  '  the  world  /  i^  Ho  meditate,'  ^:  '  understanding  /  and 
many  others,  for  which  the  Dictionary  must  be  referred  to. 


302  DERIVATION. 

^  is  added  to  t^  *  to  colour/  T^T^t  '  a  washerman,*  i^HdcM 
'  a  washerwoman  ;'  but  if  the  derivative  be  formed  with  ^^, 
or  the  feminine  noun  signify  ^  a  wife^'  the  form  is  t»nK^. 

^^  and  its  analogous  affix  ^3T,  each  leaving  ^,  form  a 
number  of  attributive  and  appellative  nouns,  compounded  with 
the  object  or  instrument  of  the  action,  which  the  letter  ^ 
indicates  is  to  retain  the  terminations  of  the  accusative  case. 
The  ^  of  the  one  indicates  that  the  form  of  the  derivative  is 
analogous  to  that  of  the  conjugation :  the  "^  of  the  other,  that 
the  radical  vowel  must  be  always  short.  Words  formed  with 
^^^  are,  from  ^  '  to  speak/  flTxn^:  *  who  speaks  kindly  / 
<«^IH<:  '  who  speaks  authoritatively  :'   from  tjtj  '  to  go,'  P^^^-h: 

*  who  goes  in  the  sky :'  from  "31  *  to  make/  Hi[||fT:  ^  fearful,' 
'alarming  /  ^Hxr|jT:  *  what  removes  fear  /  ^j^ij^  ^  what  brings 
good:'  from  ^  'to  nourish/  fV^psH^  ^  what  nourishes  all/ 
f^T^TTJ  *  the  earth : '  from  mr  ^  to  scorch/  v:i:r(ti\  ^  who 
scorches  or  subdues  an  enemy,'  '  a  hero  : '  from  iR  ^  to 
restrain^'  TT^^IT:  *  an  ascetic,'  '  one  who  restrains  his  speech' 
or  '  observes  a  vow  of  silence :'  from  ?  '  to  tear,'  "gx?^:  (not 
'JTLr;^)  'who  tears  or  destroys  a  town/  a  name  of  Indra. 
^  *  to  be,'  with  WT^cT  '  fed,'  makes  ^T%»n>^^:  *  food'  or 
'  satiety.'  Of  words  formed  with  73^  the  following  are  exam- 
ples :  from  ^»fxr  '  to  cause  to  tremble,'  ^pT^^nrt  '  who  awes 
mankind/  the  name  of  a  prince :   from  ^HT  '  to  go/  "mrfH^Tt 

*  who  goes  with  the  wind,'  '  a  deer :'  from  V  (^)  *  to  suck/ 
^H'Vin,  fem.  "5?t,  '  who  sucks  the  breast,'  *  an  infant :'  from 
i*n  *  to  blow/  tfrfr^^rR:  'a  piper:'  from  W^  ^  to  torment/ 
fcj'j'ijf^:  '  who  tortures  the  moon,'  '  the  planet  Rahu  /  ^T^'JJ^: 
'  what  afflicts  the  marrow,'  '  what  is  very  painful :'  from  xf^ 
'  to  cook,'  fi?7f«T^:  ^  who  cooks  by  measure,'  ^  a  niggard :' 
from  IHT  *  to  scorch  ;'   («Sc»^ldfiM:  ^  what  scorches  the  forehead/ 

*  the  sun  :'  from  »T^  '  to  be  or  make  mad/  ^t'SR^t  *  what  mad- 
dens or  shines  upon  the  water,'  'lightning.'  From  ^FTfT  ^  to 
mind'  or  ^  think/  implying  conceit  or  imagination,  come  such 


VERBAL  DERIVATIVES NOUNS.  30S 

compounds  as  "qf^Hrlwrai:  '  one  who  thinks  himself  a  PaA5.it ;' 
TfRn^:  ^  who  fancies  himself  a  cow.'  It  is  unnecessary  to 
multiply  examples  further. 

^S7^,  leaving  w,  is  added  to  verbs  preceded  by  ^^7^,  H^,  or 
V,  to  form  adjectives  implying  the  mode  of  the  action  ;  as, 
^^lich^  '  that  which  is  made  by  a  little  at  a  time  ;'  HUhn  '  what 
is  made  with  difficulty  ;'  ^oB^  '  what  is  made  with  ease.'  This 
affix  is  sometimes  used  indiscriminately  with  xi>^:   see  below. 

f^^TPT^  and  i^<+H^  are  attached  to  H^Ho  be,'  and  ^r^  to  "^ 
^to  do,'  compounded  with  certain  words,  which,  as  in  the  case 
of  1^^  and  ^^,  the  ^  indicates  must  terminate  in  a  nasal : 
thus  'srreRff^w:  and  ^rreRfT^:  '  a  man  who  becomes  wealthy,' 
^not  having  been  so  before,'  are  formed  with  the  two  first 
affixes  ;  and  ^Hl^H<+l.ili  '  the  means  of  becoming  wealthy,'  with 
the  last :  so  ^^^r^rf^TEm:,  W^^rwTTJsfi:, '  becoming  blind ;'  ^JFM>TofiT?!f 
^  means  of  blinding  ;'  &c. 

XT,  leaving  ^,  forms  nouns,  for  the  most  part  masculine, 
implying  place,  or  instrument,  or  appellation  ;  as,  from  cF, 
•^lohc  '  a  mine,'  ^  where  men  work  ;'  "S^^  '  to  cover,'  ^^a^: 
^  the  lip,'  *  that  by  which  the  teeth  are  covered  ;'  WT  ^  to  dig,' 
'llHsfH:  ^a  spade;'  "qriT  ^  to  deal,'  ^t^to:  ^a  market;'  oR^  ^  to 
touch,'  f»T«R^  ^  a  touchstone  ;'  ^T^ '  to  go,'  ifNTJ  ^  pasture-land ;' 
^  ^  to  bear,'  "^:  ^  a  conveyance  ;'  &c. 

Tr>r  is  one  of  those  affixes  of  which  the  application  is  most 
extensive,  and  it  forms  a  number  of  very  useful  masculine 
nouns,  signifying  the  act,  the  agency,  the  instrument,  the 
thing,  or  the  abstract  property.  The  essential  element  is  ^; 
but  the  "q  indicates  that  a  final  palatal  is  to  be  changed  to  a 
guttural;  and  the  5^,  that  a  radical  medial  ^  is  to  be  made 
long,  and  a  final  vowel  to  take  its  Vriddhi  element,  whilst  any 
medial  vowel  but  "^  is  changed  to  the  Guna  equivalent :  a 
penultimate  nasal  is,  with  a  few  exceptions,  rejected.  Thus 
xr^,  '  to  cook,'  makes  Tnofi:  ^  cooking'  or  '  maturity ;'  tt^  Ho  go,' 
VT^l  '  a  foot ;'  "^J?  *  to  desire,'  cRTT:  '  desire,'  '  love  ;'  "^R  '  to  be 
weary,'  f^^TPfT:  ^ rest ;'  ^ '  to  go,'  ^nt; '  strength,' '  essence,'  ^m)^k: 


304  DERIVATION. 

*  diarrhoea  ;'  ^  Ho  take,'  ^tt:  ^  a  necklace,'  ^T^Tt: '  food ;'  ^  *  to 
cry,'  with  ^,  ikR:  ^  roaring  ;'  '^J  to  be,'  irr^:  ^  nature,'  '  con- 
dition ;'  f^  '  to  enter/  ^:  ^  an  abode  ;'  ^if  '  to  be  sick,'  rti: 
'  disease  ;'  '^^  ^  to  touch/  Fi^  ^  touch  ;'  ^;?^  *  to  kindle,'  v?six 
'  fuel ;'  ^'7^  '  to  loosen^'  m^vj:  ^  flaccidity,'  the  vowel  remaining 
short ;  T^  Ho  colour/  tFT:  '  passion/  but  t^  *  a  theatre :' 
^J9I^,  ^  to  go/  makes  either  ^^:  ^  speed/  or  ^itt^:  ^  dropping :' 
^g^  and  ^^Fif ,  ^  to  throb^'  make  ^qiR:  and  ^ecrTc?:  ^  throbbing :' 
f^,  ^  to  collect,'  changes  its  initial  to  oR  ;  as,  oRHT:  ^  the  body/ 
fffcirnn  '  a  habitation.'  Many  words  formed  with  Tr>T  admit  of 
^nr  also,  as  observed  above  ;  taking  one  or  other  in  different 
senses  or  combinations  ;  as^,  ^%  ^  to  guide,'  makes  tTR:  ^  lead- 
ing /  but  TTO^  '  affection,'  Trftrii-nT  '  throwing  round/  "qfbSTiK 
^  marriage  :'  ?j^  *  to  take/  w  ith  ^r^  and  iiT  prefixed,  to  form 
terms  of  imprecation,  makes  ^T^JJT^: '  dishonour/  f^TilT^:  ^  death,* 
as  ^"flJT^^  ^f?^'  ^^^  ^H"^i|^*V  >rT^  ^  acceptance  or  seizure  of 
the  wealth,'  ^hx:^  f^ZT^t  '  confinement  of  the  thief.'  Some  of 
the  distinctions  are  very  fanciful :  thus  f^  compounded  with 
"JHT,  ^  a  flower/  takes  xr>^  when  it  means  ^  gathering  by  hand,* 
as  yuixj-ni: ;  but  ^TT  when  it  means  gathering  in  any  other 
way,  as  ^"4^14:  '  gathering  flowers  (with  a  stick)/ 

frr^w  forms  attributives  in  ^^T,  requiring  the  change  of  ^ 
to  ^,  and  of  any  other  short  vow  el  to  its  Guna  substitute : 
iqiT  *  to  leave,'  mrf'T'T  '  who  leaves  ;'  ^  '  to  join,'  iflPnti  *  who 
joins,'  Tftift  '  a  religious  man  /  f^i?  '  to  hate,'  wf^rT  '  who  or 
what  hates  /  "^T  '  to  play,'  "g^?"^  '  who  plays  /  "^  *  to 
touch,'  ^HTf^rT  '  what  touches'  or  '  is  close  to  /  "^  '  to  speak,' 
TTCmH^H  '  who  contradicts.'  The  class  of  verbs  ^nnf^  (see 
p.  i524.)  do  not  change  the  vowel ;  "^rf'T'^T  ^  who  is  calm  / 
except  J?^,  with  "3T|^  or  u  prefixed,   d  •*!  I  ft;  H  or  Tnrrf^*T  'mad,' 

*  intoxicated.' 

11^,  leaving  Tt,  is  added  to  fi?^  '  to  be  unctuous/  HTO  '  to 
shine/  H^  *  to  break  /  as,  ^^  *  unctuous/  HT^  '  splendid,' 
>T^  *  fragile.' 

7,  leaving  ^,  is  added  to  "^  *  to  do,'  ^  '  to  go,'  and  ^^  '  to 


VERBAL   DERIVATIVES NOUNS.  S05 

go/  to  form  attributives  and  appellatives  in  composition  with 
other  words,  z  indicates  the  formation  of  the  feminine  in  ^; 
as,  f^Flf^:  ^  a  servant/  f%^  '  a  female  servant.'  When  the 
feminine  is  f^tljTT,  the  derivative  "SR  has  been  formed  with  ^T^: 
so  "f^oT^^  '  who  makes  the  sky/  ^  the  sun  /  HT^r:  '  who  makes 
light/  '  the  sun :'  T\^[hkilX  -^ -t '  what  makes  fame/  *  honourable/ 
'  glorious  :'  so  also  ^T^in::  *  one  who  goes  before/  '  a  leader  / 
fW^T^tJ  '  one  who  goes  for  alms/  '  a  mendicant  /  &c. 

Z"^,  leaving  ^,  is  added  to  ^  in  certain  compounds,  when 
?r  is  substituted  for  the  root,  to  signify  the  agent ;   as,  "STnTTTT: 

*  a  man  who  kills  his  wife  /  qPri^  *  a  woman  who  kills  her 
husband  /  ^rtttt^:  '  one  who  destroys  or  breaks  open  a  door/ 

*  a  thief  /  f^W  '  what  destroys  bile/  '  clarified  butter.'  Com- 
pounded with  TTTO  and  TTTT,  in  the  sense  of  *  manufacture'  or 

*  art/  "^  is  substituted  for  the  root ;  as,  TTlf^Tn  or  Tff^^:  *  a 
mechanic/  ^  an  artisan.'  It  is  also  added  to  n  *  to  sing/  and 
■qr  '  to  drink/  in  certain  combinations ;  ^?T7T:,  '^wnt,  '  a  male 
or  female  chaunter  of  the  Sama /  Hum  -^  '  a  winebibber :' 
but  17T,  '  to  preserv^e/  takes  ^  ;  as,  ^httt  1^T?r#  ^  a  female 
Brahman,  who  keeps  the  milk.' 

^,  leaving  ^,  is  added  to  tr  '  to  go,'  and  ^  ^  to  kill,'  to 
form  attributives  and  appellatives  :  the  T  indicates  the  elision 
of  the  radical  final :  T^'t^^T  '  who  or  what  goes  every  where  / 
f^^ii:  '  who  goes  in  the  air,'  '  a  bird  /  "grn:  ^  what  goes  on  its 
belly,'  '  a  snake  /    ^[d^  '  a  destroyer  of  an  enemy  /    HH^M^: 

*  what  drives  away  darkness,'  '  the  sun.' 

J  forms  nouns  with  >j^^  to  be,'  preceded  by  fN",  IT,  and  H ; 
as,  f^l  '  who  is  every  where,'  ^  a  deity  /  Tr>j:  ^  a  master  / 
;rt>t:  '  a  progenitor :'  also  with  "5  '  to  flow,'  preceded  by  its 
object ;  fJlTT^:  '  what  runs  in  a  measured  course/  '  the  ocean  / 
^Iri^:  '  what  runs  in  a  hundred  (streams),'  '  a  river.'  l^F^:,  a 
name  of  S^iva,  is  considered  to  be  formed  also  with  this  affix, 
from  ^  '  auspicious,'  and  >?  '  to  be.' 

I!T,  leaving  ^,  is  added  to  verbs  ending  in  ^n  to  form  nouns 
of  various  kinds  /   as,  ^  '  to  give,'  ^rm  '  a  portion  /   vr  '  to 

R  r 


306  DERIVATION. 

hold/  \Tn?:  '  a  possessor/  *  one  who  has'  or  ^  holds  /  "^  '  to 
go/  ^^Tf-p?:  ^  frost :'  also  to  ^  '  to  go/  ^  '  to  ooze/  "q*^  '  to 
destroy/  ^  ^  to  take/  preceded  by  prepositions  ;  as,  ^stttr: 
^  going  away/  ^  end/  '  destruction  /  ^TTFR': '  trickling  /  ^H'WR: 
'  end/  '  conclusion/  or  ^  who  or  what  ends  /  ^h^^k:  '  a  shark/ 
also  ^  who  or  what  takes  away :'  also  to  TD*t  '  to  guide/  TfR: 
^  a  means  /  fc51  '  to  hck/  ^:  ^  licking  /  f^  '  to  embrace/ 
^:  ^  embracing  /  IJ^  ^  to  take/  a[jT^:  '  an  alligator ;  ^a^l  *  to 
pierce/  ^"<i:  ^  a  hunter/  It  is  also  added  to  IT^  '  to  be  born/ 
preceded  by  nouns  or  particles  in  various  senses ;  as,  ^HT 
^  unborn  /  fg»r '  twice  born  /  f^aT:  '  a  Brahman  /  ^r»T5T  ^  born 
after  /  ^5r^:  ^  a  younger  brother  /  ^Ti'ftjw  '  a  lotus/  ^  born  in 
a  pool ;'  ilrjT»Tt  '  a  monkey/  *  one  born  in  a  stable  /  ^sr^aT 
'  born  from  accident/  or  '  what  has  not  been  foreseen/  From 
■^rf,  '  to  dig/  it  forms  tt1t.^T  '  a  ditch.'  It  is  also  added  to  ^ 
'  to  eat/  preceded  by  f^ ;  as,  "sr^:  '  food  :'  and  to  ^^j  *  to  be 
possessed  of/  oR  ^  to  desire/  H^  *  to  eat/  preceded  by  their 
objects  /  as,  irNr^fh^  '  having  flesh/  '  stout  /  5Fl'N?ofi'm  '  desirous 
of  flesh  /  ^rhwsj  ^  eating  flesh :'  also  to  ^  '  to  see/  and  ^'^ 
^  to  go/  preceded  by  ^ ;  as,  ^WJrrfhf  '  expecting  happiness  / 
<*<5millHK  '  one  of  good  habits.'  These  make  their  feminines 
in  WT;  as,  nf^l^ftc^T  &c. 

fiilfn  is  an  affix  of  extensive  use  to  form  attributives  from 
verbs.  The  essential  termination  is  ^tt  ;  the  initial  ^  pro- 
longing in  most  cases  a  radical  short  vowel.  Nouns  thus 
formed  are  mostly  declinable  in  three  genders  as  nouns  in  ^ 
(p.  6'^,),  It  is  affixed  to  a  class  of  words  called  ?7^Tf^;  as, 
?ITf^"^  ^  who  or  what  takes  /  ^iPMrl  '  who  or  what  stays'  or 
'  is  stationary  ;'  fTRft^r^  '  preserving/  '  protecting  ;'  ^S^TUfV^ 
'  who  or  what  offends ;'  "qfbTTf^  ^  what  disgraces.'  It  is 
also  added  to  ^^,  preceded  by  "JJTR  or  -^fM ;  as,  ^KMlPri'i^ 
'  who  strikes  the  boy  /  ^q^rrfK^  ^  who  strikes  the  head :' 
— to  verbs  preceded  by  nouns ;  as,  "?"Q5PTtf»nT  '  who  eats  his 
meal  hot ;'  TEnVoSift:^  '  who  does  what  is  right  /  "^^Rlf^^ 
'  who  declares  Brahma'  (the  Vedas  or  the  true  god).      It  is 


VERBAL  DERIVATIVES NOUNS.  307 

also  added  to  them  to  form  attributives  implying  '  similarity/ 
as  Tg^Rtf^"?^  '  who  cries  like  a  camel ;'  or  to  denote  a  religious 
obligation,  as  Frftl5c5^Tf^riT  *  who  sleeps  on  the  ground/  in 
consequence  of  a  vow. 

inT7  is  affixed  to  a  few  verba  to  form  appellatives  or  attri- 
butives :  IJT  prolongs  the  radical  vowel ;  z  indicates  the  femi- 
nine termination  to  be  ^;  and  ^,  wherever  it  occurs,  indicates 
the  final  of  the  derivative  to  be  ^SPT :  thus,  from  ^  '  to  sing/ 
TFR:,  '11^*1^,  *  a  male'  or  *  female  singer  ;'  from  ^  '  to  aban- 
don/ '^lin:  *  a  year/  or  *  a  kind  of  rice.^ 

f^  is  added  to  Wt{  '  to  take/  with  the  effect  of  fii^,  except 
that  it  prolongs  the  vowel ;  as,  ^f^RfST  (nom.  htsr)  ^  one  to 
take  his  share/  *  an  heir/ 

?!T<?f^  is  an  affix  to  verbs  in  general  to  form  nouns  attributive 
of  agency :  ^,  as  usual,  lengthens  the  vowel ;  whilst  ^  indi- 
cates the  termination  of  the  derivative  to  be  ^ni :  thus  "sp,  '  to 
do,^  makes  chKoh  ^  who  or  what  makes  /  xni  '  to  cook/  MMoh 
'  who  or  what  cooks'  or  '  ripens  /  "^  *  to  kill,'  iiid«h  '  who  or 
what  destroys  /  ^  '  to  give/  ^nrsB  '  a  giver/  Some  verbs  do 
not  make  the  vowel  long  /  as ,  ^,  ^HoR  '  who  tames  /  wv, 
^njofi  ^  who  kills  /  "ipf,  »nT«R:  ^  who  begets/  ^  a  parent/  Femi- 
nine nouns  usually  substitute  ^  for  the  penultimate  vowel ;  as, 
oRlftcfiT,  trrf%-^,  &c. :  so  do  some  feminine  nouns,  names  of 
diseases,  formed  with  this  affix  ;  as,  iT^ff'cfiT  *  vomiting/  UTT- 
"fi^oRT  ^  diarrhoea  :'  they  are  considered  irregular :  so  are  ^rftrcfiT 
^  sitting,'  and  ^nf^T  ^  lying  down.' 

"^^  is  an  affix  of  extensive  use  to  form  appellatives  of 
agency;  it  leaves  i^,  and  nouns  formed  with  this  affix  are 
declined  like  nouns  in  "^  in  the  three  genders  (see  p.  42) : 
thus  "^  '  to  make/  '^^  ^  a  maker,'  '  a  doer  /  xpT,  "T^^  «  a  goer  / 
tr^,  xr^  '  a  cooker,'  ^  a  ripener.'  It  follows  the  analogy  of  the 
original  verb  in  inserting  or  omitting  ^  before  w ;  as,  ^"Vs"  or 
^f^W  ^  who  bears  /  '^^  or  ^  ^  who  wishes  /  "^Fir,  "^iPIJ,  or 
•^PHfj,  ^  who  goes  /   &c.     After  some  verbs,  l^  is  said  to  be 

R  r  2 


308  DERIVATION. 

used  instead  of  ^;  as,  from  ^  *  to  sacrifice,'  ^Vg^  '  the  minis- 
tering priest.' 

ff^,  leaving  it,  forms  substantives  from  ifiT  '  to  worship,' 
TPr^  '  to  ask,'  '  inr  *  to  strive,'  f%^  '  to  shine,'  TT^  '  to  ask  ;' 
as,  x[^:  *  sacrifice,'  ^r^»rr  ^  soUcitation,'  -q^:  ^  effort/  "m^  ^  shin- 
ing,' and  Tl^:  *  a  question.  ^^Tf:,  ^  sleep'  or  '  a  dream,'  is 
formed  from  "b^  ^  to  sleep,'  with  "SftT  affixed. 

•ff^T^  forms  adjectives  from  '^[^  '  to  sleep,'  "^^  ^  to  thirst,' 
"^  'to  be  proud ;'  as  ^MtI  '  sleepy,'  '^'Gtn'f  '  thirsty,'  Y^"^ 
'  arrogant :'  they  are  declined  in  three  genders  like  nouns  in 

s^  (p.  48). 

qft^H  forms  attributives  and  appellatives  from  verbs  ending 
in  vowels ;  as,  from  ^  *  to  give,'  ^^^  a  proper  name  ;'  ^ 
'  to  injure,'  ^(WT  a  title  proper  for  a  Brahman. 

xr^,  which,  as  remarked  under  the  head  of  iigr^,  leaves,  for 
the  termination  of  the  derivative,  'SR,  forms  attributives  of 
agency    and    appellatives   after  verbs  that   signify   '  motion,' 

*  sound,'  *  ornament,'  or  '  anger ;'  as,  "^"FH  ^  who  or  what  is 
going ;'  4iU(f^  '  who  or  what  is  shaking  ;'  t^w  *  who  or  what 
is  sounding  ;'  >TTO'  '  who  or  what  is  adorning  ;'  "^^HT  *  who  or 
what  is  in  a  passion :'  also  after  verbs  beginning  with  a  con- 
sonant, and  having  the  indicatory  vowel  gravely  accented ;  as, 
^  *  to  be,'  ^^^^  *  who  or  what  is  abiding ;'  ^v  ^  to  increase,' 
^:t^  '  who  or  what  is  increasing :'  also  after  various  other 
verbs ;  as,  ^  '  to  be  quick,'  if^R  '  fleet ;'  3fc5  '  to  burn,'  "^<5«T 
'  burning,'  ^  shining  ;'  &c.  The  feminine  termination  of  nouns 
formed  with  ^^  is  rn^;  as,  -^e^^HT,  ^RWITT,  &c. :  it  also  forms 
feminine  nouns  signifying  the  act,  after  verbs  of  the  tenth 
conjugation   or   causal  s ;     as,   'dsixm  ^causing   to   do;'    "^TJ^UT 

*  causing  to  take :'  also  after  a  few  other  verbs ;  as,  ^ra, 
^HRT  '  sitting ;'  ^T^^,  ^^F^zpTT  loosing  ;'  "q^,  q^HI  ^  effort,'  '  ex- 
ertion ;'  Tf^,  ^r^HT  '  praising  ;'  f^,  ^*TT  ^  perception.' 

T^  forms  attributives  with  'w{^  *  to  bow,'  cR^t  *  to  tremble,'  f^T 

*  to  smile,'  w\  '  to  desire,'  f^f^  '  to  injure,'  ^  '  to  shine  ;'  as. 


VERBAL   DERIVATIVES NOUNS.  309 

7{^  *  bent,'  ^.1^  *  tremulous/  w^  *  smiling/  "^ig  '  desirous/  fi^ 
'  mischievous/  '  cruel/  ^'hr  *  radiant/  It  also  forms  the  inde- 
clinable noun  ^a^H  '  continual/  from  »nT  *  to  let  loose,'  with 
the  negative  prefixed. 

^  forms  attributives  with  certain  verbs  ;  as_,  ^T  *  to  give/ 
^  *  to  cut/  f^  '  to  bind/  ^  ^  to  decay/  ii^  '  to  go  ;'  ^t^  '  who 
or  Mhat  gives/  or  '  who  or  what  cuts  /  ^^  ^  who  or  what 
binds  /  ^"5  ^  decaying  /  ^15  *  what  goes/ 

^oR  forms  appellatives  with  "STPT,  *  to  wake,'  and  verbs  in 
the  frequentative  mode ;  as,  ITT'TC^R  '  vigilant,'  and  ^r-M^<*  ^  who 
worships  frequently,'  ^"<f^^  '  who  bites  keenly,'  ^f^"3|*:  '  a 
snake  /  from  Tj»r  '  to  worship,'  ^  '  to  bite  /  &c. 

"^  forms  nouns  of  agency  from  a  class  of  verbs  called  rpf^rrf^, 
and  from  a  variety  of  others :  for  the  effect  of  ^,  see  iig^  and 
xr^  above  :  tTT^  ^  to  delight/  Hn^H  '  who  or  what  is  delighted  / 
^^  '  to  madden,^  t^^  '  who  or  what  maddens  /  w^  *  to  accom- 
pHsh/  'mv[^  '  who  or  what  effects  /  tr^  '  to  bear,'  TT^  ^  who 
or  what  bears.'  These  nouns  are  very  commonly  used  in  the 
masculine  gender  as  appellatives  ;  as,  H«<Ht  '  a  son,'  ^"q": 
^  Love,'  »rg^^:  '  the  destroyer  of  Madhu/  a  name  of  Vishnu ; 
and  the  like. 

•5177  is  an  analogous  termination  to  the  preceding,  and  also 
forms  derivatives  ending  in  vTJT ;  but  they  are  not  nouns 
signifying  an  agent;  they  denote  the  object,  the  act,  the 
instrument,  the  site,  or  the  abstract  condition  ;  and  although 
sometimes  masculine  or  feminine,  are  more  usually  neuter 
nouns  :  vrrrRT:  '  an  article  of  food,'  )^hnt  ^  food  in  general'  or 
'  feeding,'  from  H«T  ^  to  eat  /  »j<d4H  '  chattering,'  from  "Sf^  '  to 
talk  /  ^ff  ^  laughing,'  ^  laughter,'  from  ^  ^  to  laugh  /  ■^mi^ 
^  accomplishing,^  or  ^  means,'  ^  instrument,'  from  "^rv  *  to  effect ;' 
VJ^  ^  drinking'  or  ^  drink,'  from  trr  '  to  drink  ;'  IT^^^r:  *  an 
implement  of  cutting,^  *  an  axe,'  from  TT^  '  to  cut  /  ift^^^t 
'  an  implement  of  milking,'  *  a  milk  pail,'  from  5^  *  to  milk.' 
The  z  of  the  affix  denotes  the  feminine  formation  in  ^. 

^^  forms  attributives,  which  in  one  or  other  gender  become 


310  DERIVATION. 

appellatives,  from  different  verbs  ;  as,  "fT  ^  to  stay,'  WT*^  ^  who 
or  what  is  stationary,'  WRC  '  an  inanimate  product  of  nature  ;' 
f:5T  '  to  be  powerful,'  figt^  *  who  is  powerful,'  f^^gt.:  ^  God  ;'  HnT 

*  to  shine,'  HUSrt  '  radiant,'  &c.  It  is  also  added  to  t^,  '  to 
go,'  in  the  frequentative  mode ;  -MltlNi:  '  who  or  what  goes 
repeatedly.' 

■^  is  added  to  f^«a[,  '  to  abuse/  and  other  verbs,  to  form 
attributives  signifying  the  agent ;'  as,  f^"3R  '  who  or  what 
reviles ;'  f^Wofi  '  who  or  what  injures :'  also  to  f^  '  to  play,' 
and  '3»'S[T  '  to  cry,'  preceded  by  ^T ;  as,  ^rr^"^oB  '  who  sports'  or 
plays ;'  ^r^t^R!  *  who  calls  out'  or  '  cries.' 

^iT>  like  the  preceding,  leaving  w^,  forms  attributives  with 
W  '  to  go,^  TS  '  to  go,'  and  75^*  to  cut ;'  as,  TnoB  '  who  or  what 
goes  ;'  ^iTofi  '  who  or  w^hat  moves ;'  cSM^h  '  who  or  what  cuts.' 
It  also  forms  benedictory  nouns  ;  as,  »flc|<*,  '  living,'  is  used 
as  wishing  long  life  to  ;  »fl^ofc^*  ^rm:  *  Mayest  thou  be  a 
liver,'  i.  e.  live  long. 

^,  leaving  ^,  is  added  to  different  verbs  to  form  attri- 
butives and  appellatives.  The  "^r  indicates  that  the  derivative 
follows  the  conjugational  form  of  the  verb  ;  as,  in,  "ftr^fif  '  to 
drink,'  fq^  '  who  or  what  drinks,'  i^,   if^^Pri  '  to  see,'  ty^iT 

*  who  or  what  sees  ;'  ^,  >nTfw  '  to  suck,'  \R  '  who  sucks,'  vrm 
'  a  boy,'  \rm  '  a  girl.'  So  ^  *  to  give,'  and  VT  *  to  hold,'  third 
conj.  ;  ^  '  who  or  what  gives ;'  ^v  '  who  or  what  holds.'  So 
fcycr  '  to  smear,'  and  f^  '  to  know,'  of  the  sixth  conjugation, 
make  fc5'T  and  f^r^  ;  as  in  fnTc^J-m:  '  the  unsoiled,'  ^  the 
gods  ;'  iftf^:  '  who  tends  the  cattle,'  a  name  of  Vishnu.  So 
derivatives  from  verbs  of  the  tenth  conjugation  and  causals 
retain  the  sign ;  as,  f^  *  to  think,'  ^THT  '  who  or  w^hat 
'  reflects ;'    tj,  ihtTT  '  who  or  what  fills ;'    ^^  and  ^»T,  "^^^HT 

*  what  causes  to  tremble.'  ^  is  also  added  to  various  verbs 
to  form  feminine  abstract  nouns  ;  as,  f^fm  '  act,'  *  action,'  ^^sgrr 
'  wish,'  T^ft^rSr  '  worship,'  irft^T  '  wandering,'  wnm  '  hunting,' 
wei«WI  '  roaming,'  inn^  ^  waking,'  '  vigilance.' 

irr^r^,  leaving  ^rr*,  forms  attributives  from  a  few  verbs ;  as, 


NOMINAL   DERIVATIVES.  311 

iT^rra  '  prattling,'  '  a  babbler/  from  IT^  '  to  talk  idly  ;'  fW^T^ 
'  begging,'  from  f^  '  to  seek  alms  ;'  &c.  The  feminine  is 
formed  with  f^ — ir^TT^,  f>TWT^%  &c. — by  virtue  of  the  indi- 
catory initial  "R. 

"E|fT,  like  Wc^  Sac,  as  above^  leaves  ^nfi,  and  forms  attri- 
butives denoting  the  practiser  of  any  art  or  business  :  the 
feminine,  in  consequence  of  "sr,  ends  in  ^ :  thus  "fjw,  ^  to  dance/ 
makes  ^#^:,  ^^^^3st,  *  a  male  or  female  dancer ;'  ^rr  '  to  dig/ 
^^^T^:,  ^H<*1,  '  a  male  or  female  ditcher.' 

"grT,  leaving  ^,  forms  neuter  and  feminine  nouns  from 
various  verbs,  signifying  the  instrument  or  means  by  which 
any  end  is  effected  ;  as,  ^  ^  to  cut,'  ^TW  '  a  sickle  /  f^  ^  to 
'  sprinkle,'  %^*  ^  a  bucket  f  '^  and  ^  '  to  join/  Tft#  or  "ifl^* 
'  fastening  of  a  yoke  /  ^m  ^  to  injure/  ^i^  *  a  weapon  ;'  7^ 
'  to  guide/  ^  '  the  eye  /  ^  '  to  bite,'  ^  ^  a  tooth  /  ^iro  ^  to 
govern,'  ^rn^  '  a  scripture.'  ^,  '  to  purify/  makes  tft#  ^  the 
snout  of  a  hog/  or  ^  the  shaft  of  a  plough.'  ^,  ^  to  suck/ 
makes  VT^  '  a  nurse  /  and  VT  '  to  have  (health  by  it),'  VTqf^  a 
particular  shrub. 

^chH  is  added  to  the  verb  ^,  ^  to  sing/  to  form  JI|V|«*:  *  a 
singer.' 

SECTION  III. 

Nominal  Derivatives. 

254.  Having  formed  primitive  nouns  from  verbs,  other 
nouns  may  again  be  derived  from  the  primitive  nouns,  to 
imply  every  possible  relation  to  the  things,  actions,  or  notions, 
which  the  primitives  express.  These  derivative  nouns,  called, 
as  already  mentioned,  Tad-dhita  (^  relating  or  belonging  to  that' 
which  is  primitive),  are  formed  in  the  usual  mode  by  attaching 
certain  affixes  to  the  base,  and  modifying  the  latter  agreeably 
to  special  rule,  or  to  the  indications  afforded  by  the  letter  or 
letters  accompanying  the  essential  elements  of  the  termination. 

255.  The  difficulty  of  an  unexceptionable  classification  of 
the  Taddhita  derivatives  is  still  greater  than  even  that  of  the 


312  DERIVATION. 

classification  of  Kridanta  words,  inasmuch  as  the  former  are 
still  more  diversified  in  form  and  purport,  and  as  many  of  the 
affixes  are  applicable  in  a  greater  variety  of  acceptations.  We 
must  therefore  have  recourse  again  to  the  alphabetical  arrange- 
ment of  the  terminations,  distinguished  under  a  few  different 
heads,  and  occasionally  associating  a  few  of  an  analogous  and 
limited  application. 

0,56,  Some  of  the  most  extensively  useful  of  the  Taddhita 
affixes  are  connected  by  an  analogous  diversity  and  extent  of 
apphcation.  They  are  mostly  employed  in  forming  words 
which  are  one  or  other,  or  sometimes  all,  of  the  following : 
I.  Patronymics  and  terms  denoting  lineal  descent,  or  com- 
munity of  origin  ;  2.  Attributives  of  a  variety  of  qualities  and 
circumstances  ;  3.  Appellatives,  or  names  of  persons  and 
things  ;  4.  Nouns  of  aggregation  ;  and  5.  Abstract  nouns. 
These  may  therefore  be  classed  under  one  head,  as  Miscellaneous 
nouns.  Another  considerable  class  of  terminations  is  employed 
to  denote  possession  of  a  thing  or  property  by  an  individual 
object ;  and  they  may  constitute  another  class,  as  Possessives. 
The  terminations  forming  the  superlative  and  comparative 
degrees  are  included  amongst  the  Taddhita  affixes  ;  and  so 
are  those  which  form  various  pronominal  derivatives,  and 
terms  connected  with  number,  as  ordinals,  &c.  :  these  may 
be  grouped  together.  Finally,  there  are  various  indeclinable 
and  adverbial  terms.  Thus  making  four  classes  of  nominal 
derivatives ;  in  each  of  which  the  terminations  may  be  alpha- 
betically arranged.  With  exception  of  the  last  of  the  above 
classes,  Taddhita  derivatives  are  declinable  in  either  one  or  all 
of  the  genders. 

257.  The  letter  or  syllable  which  forms  the  essential 
adjunct  to  the  base,  is  sometimes  merely  added  to  it  agree- 
ably to  the  laws  of  combination ;  but  it  more  tisually  takes 
the  place  of  the  last  vowel  of  the  primitive,  and  if  that  be 
followed  by  t^^,  of  the  consonant  also.  Thus  from  f^  comes 
|r^;   from  f%^,  %^ift&;  from  f^^TlTT,  %^TWTT.      A  final  '3'  or  ^ 


NOMINAL  DERIVATIVES MISCELLANEOUS.  313 

may  be  changed  to  its  Guna  equivalent,  and  thus  combined 
with  the  vowel  of  the  affix^  as  "oR^,  "^t^ ;  but  it  may  be  some- 
times cut  off,  as  ^Wf ,  ^^Tcfi.  ^r^*T,  '  a  stone/  makes  "^i^H 
'  stony  /  "^^tT  '  the  Vedas'  or  ^  Brahma/  "^t^  '  relating  to 
Brahma'  or  ^  the  Vedas ;'  but  as  a  generic  term  of  descent,  it 
makes  t^i^iii:  '  a  Brahman.'  So  nouns  ending  in  ^  usually 
preserve  the  final ;  as,  ^^^  ^  a  car,'  xj  i  pThiij  '  belonging  to  a 
car.'  There  are  many  varieties,  however,  in  the  annexation 
of  the  affix  to  the  base,  for  which  the  Dictionary  must  be 
consulted. 

258.  It  is  also  a  general  rule,  that  all  those  terminations 
which  contain  an  indicatory  ttt,  ^,  or  oB,  require  that  the  first 
vowel  of  the  base,  whether  it  be  a  simple  or  compound  term, 
substitute  the  Vriddhi  equivalent ;  as,  ^"S^  '  the  eye,'  ^'CT^ 
*  relating  to  the  eye.'  In  some  polysyllabic  words  the  Vriddhi 
letter  is  repeated  ;  as,  Tr^  '  a  friend,'  ^t^ff  '  friendship  ;'  and 
from  ^rfrq"  and  T^T^  combined,  comes  'HiDhhiInH  '  sacred  to 
Agni  and  Marut'  (fire  and  wind).  If  the  primitive  begins  with 
a  compound  letter,  of  which  the  second  member  is  tt  or  %  the 
Vriddhi  diphthong  ^  or  ^  is  commonly  prefixed  to  the  semi- 
vowel ;  as,  from  "arnr,  *  logic,'  comes  H^lHl^:  '  a  logician  ;'  from 
^mr  '  a  tiger,'  T^mr  '  covered  with  a  tiger's  skin  /  from  ^^^W 
to-morrow,  ^"^fw^  '  of,  or  relating  to,  to-morrow\' 

259*  In  some  instances,  nominal  derivatives  retain  the  form 
of  the  primitives  unaltered  ;  as,  "T^n^  '  a  native  of  Panchala,' 
otherwise  xrn^Tc^: ;  "^^^  *  belonging  or  relating  to  the  Yavanas,' 
otherwise  xnT^f.  In  these  cases,  it  is  affirmed,  that  the  usual 
affix  had  been  attached  to  the  primitive,  but  again  rejected, 
together  with  its  effects :  this  is  called  Taddhita-luk. 

260.  Attributives  formed  with  affixes  containing  an  indi- 
catory W,  >T,  Z,  ^,  "R,  and  taking  the  three  genders,  form,  with 
a  few  exceptions,  the  feminine  with  ^ ;  as,  tti^Ic^I,  %^Hf,  "^^^j 
HIt^mI,  &c. 

Class  I.    Miscellaneous  affixes. 

^T^r,  leaving  ^,  forms,  i.  Patronymics;  as,  ^w:  'a  son'  or 

s  s 


814  DERIVATION. 

*  male  descendant,'  of  tt^B'  :  also  generic  terms  of  descent ;  as, 
"l*^  '  any  divine  being/  from  ^^  *  a  deity :'  2.  Attributives  in 
certain  senses  ;  as,  ^tr '  covered  with  an  elephant's  hide,^  from 
ffT?  *  an  elephant;'  "^t:^'  'dyed  with  turmeric,'  from  "^It^T; 
^Nfj^cj  ^  made  of  the  wood  of  the  Devadaru  pine  :'  3.  Appella- 
tives ;  as,  "g"  ^  a  man,'  tn^  ^  a  woman ;'  "^ftfcft  *  the  earth/ 
xnf^^:  *  a  prince :'  4.  Nouns  of  aggregation  ;  as,  W^ftlf  *  a 
flock  of  pigeons/  from  ofixfhf  :  and  5.  Abstract  nouns  in  certain 
senses ;  as,  ^srNi  *  the  nature  of  a  horse.'  In  general,  w*?  may 
be  considered  as  forming  similar  derivatives  with  the  analogous 
termination  '^m,  and  to  be  applicable  to  the  same  primitives, 
although  theoretically  it  is  limited  to  words  of  which  the  first 
vowel  is  gravely  accented,  which  terminate  in  "3",  or  which 
belong  to  certain  specified  classes ;  as,  i^^fechift^  or  ^f?i2^,  and 
others. 

^srj^  forms  from  cf.^#;ff ,  '  act/  the  attributive  cfi?^  ^  active,' 

*  energetic' 

^rtrr ,  leaving  ^,  is  an  affix  of  very  universal  application.  It 
forms,  I.  Patronymics  ;  as,  ^tyrj^:  *  a  son  or  descendant  of 
T^TT  ;^  TPR^^:  '  the  son  of  Vasudeva'  ^tr^:,  that  is,  Krishna : 
also  terms  of  descent  in  general ;  as,  WRTOt '  a  Brahman/  from 
jsl^ri .  A  final  ^  is  changed  to  "^  before  the  ^  of  ^^  in  this 
sense  ;   as,  Ittt^:  '  the  son  of  two  mothers,'  from  fg;  and  mi^ 

*  a  mother.'  3.  Attributives  ;  as,  ?Tf»f?T  '  Madder,'  Jrffwsr  '  of 
the  colour  of,  or  dyed  with.  Madder  ;^  ^^  '  cloth,^  c||^  ^  made 
of,  or  covered  with,  cloth/  &c. ;  ^^  ^  relating  or  belonging  to, 
or  a  worshipper  of,  S'iva  /  TOl"^  ^  relating  or  belonging  to,  or 
a  worshipper  of,  Vishnu  /  %iq>i  ^  belonging  to,  or  produced  in 
the  country  of,  Nishadha.'  ^<ng,  ^  a  horse,'  makes  "^t^  *  belong- 
ing or  relating  to  a  horse,'  ^  drawn  by  horses  /  ^T^TT  '  sugar/ 
^rr^t '  sugary,'  '  made  of  sugar,'  or  ^  as  sweet  /  ^^  '  woollen,' 

*  made  of  wool,'  from  "^r^t  '  wool  /  0^??,  f^TnT,  fTJT,  *  produced 
in  the  hot  or  cold  weather,'  ^  summer,'  ^  winter  ;'  ^n^  ^  diurnal/ 
from  ^si^"?^  '  a  day  /  ^ '  nocturnal,'  from  f^T  ^  night  /   UNr^l. 

*  annual,'  from  B^Wt:  ^  a  year  /  ^"rtk  ^  bodily,' '  corporeal,'  from. 


NOMINAL  DERIVATIVES MISCELLANEOUS.  315 

^nShc  ^  the  body.'     It  also  forms  possessive  attributes  ;  as,  TT^ 

*  wisdom/  m^  *  having  wisdom/  '  wise.'  3.  Many  of  the  attribu- 
tives ah-eady  given  are  also  appellatives :  thus  :^"^:  and  %^"^: 
mean  severally  '  a  follower  of  S'iva  or  Vishnu ; '  %qv:  is  a 
proper  name,  ^  king  of  Nishadha  ;'  WT^:  '  a  carriage  drawn  by 
horses.'  "qt^,  relating  to  the  asterism  tjhj^  is  in  the  masculine 
Ttrm,  the  name  of  a  month,  when  the  moon  is  in  that  asterism ; 
and  in  the  feminine,  "^^  '  day  of  full  moon  in  the  month  of 
Paush.'  4.  Aggregates  ;  as,  "Tra  ^  a  flight  of  cranes,'  from  T^l 
'  a  crane ;'  H^  '  a  troop  of  beggars,'  from  fW^t  ^  a  beggar.^  5.  Ab- 
stract nouns  ;  as,  "^1%:  '  who  is  pure,'  ^f^  ^  purification  ;*  nf^: 

*  a  silent  sage  /  m^  ^  silence  ;'  ^^  '  young,'  41«<«i  ^  youth  ;' 
1J^:  *  a  man,'  ttt^  *  manliness,'  '  manhood,'  *  manly  stature,' 
&c. ;  ^  '  large,'  xrr#^  '  bulk,'  ^  bigness.'  ^mr  is  also  some- 
times used  pleonastically  ;  as,  "^^I  or  TFM^:  '  a  kinsman ;' 
^ft^v:  or  ^mv  ^  a  drug  /  ^^frTT  or  f WTT:  ^  a  divinity.' 

^,  leaving  ^,  forms  patronymics  only  ;  as,  ^rfiB^  '  a 
descendant  of  Daksha ;'  f^rnrfofi:  ^  a  descendant  of  Vyasa'  (oR 
being  inserted). 

^[rf^  and  analogous  terminations,  gR  and  f^z^,  are  added  to 
"N^  and  f%,  substituted  for  f^,  to  form  f^oRTf,  f^  and  fqfir^ 
signify  ^  flat,  as  the  nose,'  "Nf«RT  "JTTftroRT ;  or  '  flat-nosed,' 
r^fMd:  "5^:,  &c. 

^rf  is  added  to  a  class  of  words  to  form  nouns  of  multitude ; 
as,  wfc5*0  ^  a  number  of  mills  :'  also  to  cfi?#r^  and  <^\[  \  %  seve- 
rally authors  of  rules  for  an  order  of  mendicants,  and  for 
acting ;  to  imply  their  disciples  ;  ^?#fi^"^  *  a  mendicant,' 
cK^rrf^*T  ^  an  actor.'  ^f^  is  of  more  extensive  application  as  a 
possessive  affix. 

SfqfHx^,  leaving  ^»^,  forms  abstract  masculine  nouns  from 
attributes  of  sensible  properties  ;  as,  ^  '  white,'  igffin';? 
^  whiteness  ;'    YS  ^  large,'   irftm^   '  bulk  ;'    ^^  *  soft,'  ^f^ra 

*  softness  ;'  H^if  '  great,'  nf^^  '  greatness  ;'  3j^  *  heavy,' 
iTft]R»T  ^  heaviness  /  &c.  These  form  their  nominatives  in  ^T ; 
as,  ^W,  &c.  (see  p.  59). 

s  s  2 


316  DERIVATION. 

^finr  is  added  to  H\'^\  ^  the  rainy  season,'  forming  ITT^^IW 
'  what  grows  or  is  produced  in  the  rains.' 

^53^  is  added  to  appellatives  to  signify  ^  multitude  ;'  ^rf%ofi^: 

*  a  flock  of  sheep :'  also  to  various  prepositions  to  form  attri- 
butives conveying  their  general  purport ;  Tf^sz  '  manifest ; ' 
f^^t^  *  large,'  ^  extended  ;'  ^iNrt  ^  contracted  ;'  "^rSR^  '  much  ;' 
fiT^Z  '  near.' 

■<*?i|^  added  to  t^  forms  Ti^nKJ^n  '  a  multitude  of  carriages.' 

•griT,  that  is,  "gp,  forms  a  variety  of  derivative  words,  mostly 

attributives  ;    as,  it5^  '  produced  or  born  in  the  country  of 

Madra,'  ^HcR  '  stout,'  i^hnfi  '  dyed  yellow,'  Hrfi  '  belonging  to 

me,'  r^Ffi  '  belonging  to  thee,'  ^fr  *  sad,'  tt^oR  ^  bought  with  five,'. 

*  bearing  or  receiving  five,'  as  tax  or  interest.  It  forms  also  attri- 
butives implying  ^  skill ;'  as,  ^^T^B  ^  one  skilled  in  dressing  hair :' 
or  ^  limitation  ;'  as,  f^g^  ^  cut,'  f^^^ofi  '  a  little  cut :'  also  *  like- 
ness ;'  as,  ^0  ri  oh  '  cold,  as  it  were,'  i.  e.  dull,  slow  ;  TBC[l«fi  '  hot, 
as  it  were,'  i.  e.  quick,  smart.  It  is  added  to  prepositions  ;  as, 
to  ^rfv  *  over,'  ^rfVofi  '  more  than ;'  and  to  ^TfT  '  after,'  and  ^frfvT 
^near ;'  ^^,  ^"firsR  or  ^whli  ^  lustful.'  It  forms  also  appellatives ; 
as,  ^^[cfit  ^  an  heir,'  '  one  who  takes  his  portion,'  from  ^r^:  ^  a 
part ;'  particularly  when  pity  or  contempt  is  intended ;  as, 
g^fofi:  ^  a  stumpy  tree ;'  "ST^ToR:  '  an  inferior  Sudra  ;'  ^^otii  ^  the 
poor  child;'  ^<4c( ■?(<*:  ^  the  unhappy  Devadatta  ;'  W^^\  ^a  vile 
horse.'  It  sometimes  implies  ^  doubt ;'  as,  »5|syoh:  *  the  horse  (of 
whom  is  this).'     It  is  frequently  pleonastic  ;   as,  wfN":  or  ^PHoR: 

*  a  sheep  ;'  irftii:  or  T{fw^\  ^  a  jewel ;'   &c. 

oR^  and  the  analogous  terminations  ^^  and  ^^Trj^  are 
affixed  to  nouns  to  form  appellatives  implying  '  inferiority ;' 
P^^r»gM:,  f%¥^:,  f^¥^^:,  '  an  inferior  scholar.'  They  are 
also  attached  in  an  adverbial  form  to  verbal  inflexions ;  as, 
tT-'jn^qhgM  &c.  ^  he  cooks  incompletely,'  '  he  does  not  finish 
cooking.' 

TR  and  ^5T  are  analogous  terminations,  of  which  the  essen- 
tial adjunct  is  ^ ;  the  second  requires  the  Vriddhi  vowel : 
they  form,  i .  Words  implying  '  descent ;'  as,  from  ^c5  '  a  race,' 


NOMINAL  DERIVATIVES MISCELLANEOUS.  317 

eh(^1^  or  o^rjhr  '  sprung  from  a  good  family :'  2.  Attributives ; 
as,  ^T^'^T,  '  a  day,'  makes  ^T^T^f  ^  to  be  done  in  a  given  number 
of  days  ;'  'ii^iKMR:  ^  either  bank  of  a  river,'  ^T^nrrrtNT  ^  who  or 
what  goes  or  extends  to  both  banks  -^  Jjm:  ^  a  village,'  TnrfNr 
'  rustic'  ^village  :'  ^TTW^"  makes  ^TTiTri^  '  what  is  fit  or  good  for 
oneself ;'  f^m^lH  '  all  mankind,'  fWrpft^  '  what  is  fit  or  good 
for  all :'  3.  Appellatives  ;  fiTFJ,  *  Sesamum,'  makes  ^c^M  '  a 
field  of  Sesamum ;'   ^hm^  '  seven  steps/  ^nmrcf^rf  '  friendship,' 

*  intimacy  /  fq^c{lr(  ^  fresh  butter/  from  ^^  '  to-day/  and  m 

*  a  cow.' 

XT,  leaving  ^ir,  forms,  i .  words  of  descent ;  as,  from  "c^t  '  a 
man  of  the  military  caste,'  Hjfd^:  the  same,  as  sprung  from 
him  :  3.  Attributives  ;  as,  TTg:  '  a  country,'  Tjft^  '  relating  or 
belonging  to  it.^ 

■?[  and  'S[OT  are  analogous  affixes^  both  leaving  ^  :  the  one 
requires  Vriddhi ;  the  other  not :  they  form,  i .  words  of 
descent  in  general ;  as^  ^^'t^:  '  a  sister's  son,'  ^■^^^I'xr:  '  the 
son  of  a  father's  sister ;'  2.  Attributives  ;  J?^*^^  or  HT^t^ 
^relating  to  Mahendra  /  ^wtxr  *  suited  to,  or  fit  for,  a  calf/ 
UToRT^^  *  fit  for  a  wall :'  ofi  is  inserted  before  the  affix  after 
some  words  ;  as,  W^^  '  own^^  n'5T^^  '  royal  :^  3.  Appella- 
tives ;   as,  xj-frfhr:  '  a  mountaineer.' 

■sgrrfTi  and  '^  are  two  affixes  to  nouns  to  form  attributives 
implying  '  being  known  by  /  as,  f%?rr^^  or  f^lTT^^  ^  known 
by,  or  on  account  of,  learning.^ 

^,  leaving  ^,  forms  feminine  nouns  of  descent ;   as,  xrrPtrr 

*  a  female  descendant  of  "^fzr^  /  and  nouns  of  action,  com- 
pounded with  tfTTf  *  falling  /  as,  ^l^imriT  '  falling  of  an  hour,' 
'  a  lunar  day.'  After  ^^^rf  '  a  hawk,^  and  frTFJ  *  Sesamum,^  a 
nasal  is  inserted  ;  as,  ^HUflril  '  hawking  /  tc^J^nfT  '  an  obla- 
tion' (in  which  Sesamum  is  scattered). 

f^  alternates  with  3^5?  after  a  few  words,  and  like  it  leaves 
^^  for  the  termination  ;  but  it  differs  in  forming  the  feminine 
with  ^rr;  as,  "SfirfV  *a  city'  (Benares),  "^iT%^  'belonging  to 
Kasi  /  fem.  -sfirf^T  ;    with  z^  it  would  be  ^if^f^^. 


318  DERIVATION. 

^,  leaving  Tt,  forms  a  few  appellative  and  abstract  nouns ; 
^H^  *  the  lapis  lazuli,'  from  f%^  a  mountain  so  named ; 
TTT^t^  *  depth/  from  T\mtn  '  deep  ;'  WT^T^  *  infinity,'  from 
^rPrT  '  endless  ;'  '^nfw^  *  hospitality/  from  ^rfrrf^  ^  a  guest  f 
and  others. 

ZtZ^^  with  the  analogous  terminations  rfT^^  and  >JZ^  are 
added   to   the   preposition  ^"^  to  form  attributives  implying 

*  flat,'  as  the  nose ;  ^R^trr,  W^T3T,  or  ^T^HTT,  TrrftrsfiT,  '  a  flat 
nose ;'  -a^lill,  "^(wmzi,  W^>JT:~"5^:  *  a  flat-nosed  man.' 

^  or  ?^,  is  an  affix,  leaving  w?r,  to  form  attributives  from 
adverbs  importing  '  time  :'  W  is  inserted :  as  ^rnt  '  evening,' 
KRnfTf  *  what  is  of  the  evening ;'  "m^  ^  to-day,'  "WSW^  '  what 
is  of  to-day ;'  ui^  '  in  the  forenoon,'  mi^HH  *  what  is  of  the 
forenoon  ;'  fqt '  long/  "NT7fr«T  ^  lasting'  or  '  delayed  long  /  &c. 

7^  is  an  affix  forming  a  number  of  words,  substituting  ^ 
for  the  finals  of  nouns  ending  in  ^  or  ^t,  or  in  w^,  and 
adding  oR  to  others  :  it  forms,  i.  a  few  patronymics  from 
feminine  nouns  in  ^,  the  final  of  which  is  also  cut  off*;  as, 
T.^fffofi  '  a  descendant  of  T:T?ft :'  but  it  also  implies  inferiority 
in  this  form ;  as,  Trrfr:^  ^  an  inferior,'  '  a  young  or  silly 
descendant  of  irnff/      2.  Attributives  ;   as,  c5T^T  makes  c^lfspR 

*  dyed  with  Lac  /  ^fv,  ^Tfv=fi  '  made  with,  or  fed  with,  curds  / 
V^,  Vrf'^ofi  *  virtuous,'  but  ^rnrft^cfi  *  wicked  /  iTPET,  T?Tftrofi  ^  given 
or  lasting  for  a  month ;'  ^,  "qifMcR  *  annual,'  '  lasting  for  a 
year  /  ifTTT^  SPHcR  '  belonging  to  an  army/  3.  Appellatives  ; 
^frrfiB^:  '  a  gambler,'  from  wig^  *  dice  ;'  ^mPuc},:  *  a  logician,' 
from  Tin^  ^  logic  ;'  WlfWoK  '  a  believer,'  TfrfwcR:  '  an  atheist,' 
from  ^Jrf^  ^  what  is  :'  ^^, '  a  sword,'  makes  ^STTftra;:  '  a  swords- 
man /  \nT^  *  a  bow,'  VTJ^:  '  a  bowman.'  4.  Aggregates  of 
inanimate  objects  ;  as,  ^T^  ^  a  heap  of  parched  grain :'  but 
also  of  elephants,  "^TfenR ;  and  of  kine,  VrfcF. 

7^  forms  similar  derivations  as  the  preceding,  but  is  mostly 
limited  to  attributives,  which  sometimes  become  appellatives ; 
as  tf?[^  *  relating  to  the  Vedas/  ff^^:  ^  a  Brahman  who 
studies  or  teaches  them ;'  Trfurfi^  *  relating  to  war  or  battle/ 


NOMINAL  DERIVATIVES MISCELLANEOUS.  319 

^lilirHofi:  ^  a  soldier.'  It  is  extensively  used  to  form  adjectives 
relating  to  measures  of  value,  quantity^  number,  or  time : 
%f^oRoR  ^  bought  with,  or  of  the  value  of,  a  Nishka  ;'  'ill^filloB 
or  ^rrt'^tftnofi  *  containing,  or  relating  to,  half  a  drona'  (a 
measure  of  grain) ;  %*5i  Pri  oh  '  bought  with,  or  of  the  value  of, 
twenty  ;'  'STtI^  *  daily'  or  '  lasting  for  a  day  ;'  TrrftrcB  ^  monthly' 
or  *  lasting  for  a  month  ;'  ttrfw^  '  lasting  for  two  nights  ;' 
oRTfcJofi  '  continuing  for  a  time.^  Some  terms  of  philosophy 
are  also  formed  with  it ;  as,  ^nf^fTSfi,  ^rrfv^ftfrloB,  ^rwirfw^, 
relating  to  that  which  is  celestial,  elemental,  or  spiritual.  It 
also  forms  nouns  of  aggregation  ;  as,  %^:  ^  a  field,'  "3t<lW  '  a 
number  of  fields.' 

^tT,  like  the  two  preceding,  supplies  ^ofi  for  the  termination 
of  similar  nouns,  but  it  does  not  require  the  Vriddhi  change 
of  the  vowel ;  as,  tt^  ^  a  jar,'  tHtcF  ^  what  is  placed  in  a  jar  ;' 
fft  *  a  boat,'  HtP^cR  '  who  or  w^hat  goes  in  a  boat,  relating  or 
belonging  to  it ;'  '^fSv^  '  who  sells,'  fr^rf^rsR  '  who  buys,'  "gnrf^"- 
^n^«+:   '  a    dealer,'   ^  a   tradesman  ; '    "^nr   ^  a    hundred,'   ^frrai 

*  worth,  or  bought  wdth,  a  hundred.'  It  is  affixed  to  ^  and 
ifR  to  signify  *  rate  of  interest ;'  ^#3r  or  Hlf^  "^Tff  ^  half  per 
cent.'      It  is  also  a  possessive  affix ;    as,  ^555  *  a  staff,'  ^fi!2oR 

*  one  who  bears  a  staff;'  ^  ^  hair,'  ^if^  ^  one  who  has  much 
hair ; '  ift  and  ^  '  a  hundred,'  af^^rfrrofi  '  one  w  ho  has  a 
hundred  cows.' 

THT^  is  considered  as  an  affix  forming  the  words  fxjTTT- 
H^:  -H^,  HTlTFr^:  -»T^  ^  paternal  and  maternal  grandfather  and 
grandmother,'  from  fxr^  and  irr^.  "|H^  added  to  1TT5  ^"^^'"^^ 
wq^X  '  a  maternal  uncle ;'  ^  to  fir^,  fxr^:  ^  a  paternal 
uncle  ;'  and  ^  to  m^,  >n^:  *  a  brother's  son.' 

^  is  a  useful  affix  :  it  leaves  ^nr,  and  forms,  i .  Patronymics 
and  terms  of  descent ;  as,  WF^:  '  the  son  of  Agni ;'  %«TWxr: 
name  of  Garucla,  ^  the  son  of  Vinata  ;'  H^ic  *  son  of  Mitrayu ;' 
the  final  of  the  primitive  being  cut  off:  sometimes  ^rf^  is 
prefixed  to  the  termination  ;  as,  0^75^:  or  chio^P^H^:  ^  the  son 
of  a  respectable  woman,'  '^cjdl ;  when  ^htt  means  ^  a  harlot/ 


320  DERIVATION. 

the  derivative  implying  *  her  son'  is  "^T^zn,  being  formed  with 
the  analogous  affix  ^.  So  either  of  these,  forms  words  imply- 
ing '  descent'  from  a  disfigured  or  a  base  person  ;  as,  cRTOin  or 
«fiTOt:  '  the  son  of  a  one-eyed  man  ;'  ^^xft  or  ^t%t::  ^  the  son 
of  a  slave.'  T^Tf,  '  a  sister,'  in  combination  rejects  its  final 
before  ^"^  ;  as,  ftr^yi^C  '  the  son  of  a  father's  sister/  HM^^^: 
'  the  son  of  a  mother's  sister.'  2.  ^  also  forms  attributives 
signifying  '  produced  in/  or  '  derived  from  ;'  *n^"q  '  aquatic,' 
from  rR(t  *  a  river ;'  JTT%"T  '  earthen,'  from  rr^  *  the  earth  :'  and 
3 .  a  few  appellatives  ;   as,  from  "a^:  '  rice/  ^%^  '  a  rice-field.' 

^cjf>T  is  analogous  to  the  preceding,  adding  oB  to  the  termi- 
nation ;  as,  cWc^-M*  '  belonging  to,  or  derived  from,  a  family '/ 
otherwise  ^fc5^.  It  is  also  added  to  a  few  words  in  a  con- 
temptuous sense  ;  as,  ifm,  '  a  village,'  makes  in^TRi:  ^  a  clown ;' 
•TTR  '  a  city,'  "ttrTTT^:  '  a  libertine,'  ^  a  profligate.' 

^3T  is  another  termination  alHed  to  the  preceding  ;  differing 
from  ^ofi  only  in  being  restricted  to  certain  words  ;  as,  "g^, 
'  a  man,'  in  particular  acceptations ;  as,  'i^'qift  W^l  '  a  killing 
of  men  ;'  t^^^th  ^h^:  *  an  assemblage  of  men  /  ift^ift  f^^fiTt: 
^  mortal  or  human  change  /  tfi^^i^:  -xfl"  -t^  '  done  by  a  man'  or 
'  human  being.' 

?Tr,  leaving  "%  forms  a  few  feminine  nouns  that  signify 
^  striking  in  sport  /  as,  f^i<KT  *  quarter-staff/  and  ^FT  '  boxing,' 
from  ^?J5  *  a  staff,'  ?|f?  '  the  fist :'  also  some  attributives  ;  as, 
ifft  '  all,'  ^  '  fit  or  good  for  all.' 

TRT,  leaving  ij,  forms  words  implying  ^  descent ;'  as,  %iin  '  a 
demon,'  '  a  son  of  Diti ;'  "^JTif^:  '  an  j^ditya,'  *  son  of  Aditi  / 
cJli^cq:  '  a  descendant  of  Kuru.'  It  is  added  to  trfw,  when 
preceded  by  a  noun  ;  as,  TrnrTTTm:  *  son  or  descendant  of 
Tnrnrfir ;'  and  to  words  signifying  ^  an  artisan  ;'  as,  irgTR,  '  a 
weaver,'  makes  TrngTRj:  ^  a  weaver's  progeny :'  it  also  forms 
appellatives ;  as,  "qft^  makes  mfl^M^:  '  an  assistant  at  an 
assembly.' 

H7^  forms  feminine  nouns  signifying,  i .  Aggregation  ;  ^mai 
*  a  number  of  villages  /  WTin  *  a  number  of  men  /    JMrfi  '  a 


NOMINAL  DERIVATIVES MISCELLANEOUS.  321 

herd  of  elephants  :'  2.  Abstract  property  ;  ^WT  ^  womanhood/ 
TftiTT  '  cowhood/  tr^TTT  *  childhood.'  It  is  also  added  pleonas- 
tically  to  ^^  ;   as,  ^^ril  *  a  divinity.' 

^  is  added  to  some  words  to  denote  '  time ;'  as,  ty^^  '  of 
last  year ;'  MuHj^  '  of  the  year  before  last ;'  f^TT^  *  of  a  long 
time  ago  : '  also  to  "^  substituted  for  "^"^^  t^  *  new :'  the 
latter    takes  TirR   in    the   same    sense,  "?nr?r,    and,   as   above, 

7T^  is  added  to  terms  of  place  to  form  attributives  ;  ^^T^WTTT 
'  produced  in  the  south/  '  a  native  of  the  south/  &c. :  so 
"qT^JTRT,  ifil^ftii,  '  produced  in  the  west,  east,'  &c. 

W^iT  forms  feminine  appellatives  after  the  prepositions  ^rfv 
and  TT ;  as,  ''J^f^RjoM  '  an  acclivity  ;'  TtnT^FT  '  land,  the  foot  of 
a  mountain.' 

WJ  is  affixed  to  indeclinables  to  form  attributives  implying 
*  production  /  as,  '^^  '  produced  where  ;'  W^m  '  born  or  pro- 
duced there  /  ^m  *  born  or  produced  here  :'  with  w^n,  '  toge- 
ther,* it  forms  ^nn?i:  *  a  minister.' 

^  is  added  to  jft,  '  a  cow/  to  denote  *  multitude  /  jft^  '  a 
herd  of  cattle.^ 

Tq"  forms  neuter  abstract  nouns  from  any  other  nouns ; 
ril^<llr4  '  Brahmanhood/  ^Tro?^  *  childhood,'  }^mt^  '  hohness.' 

^"^  and  ITT^"^  are  added  to  nouns  to  denote  '  measure  of 
height  /  "^"^^fj  yi^'^^*^  '  as  high  as  the  thigh.' 

^  is  added  to  ^?f%  in  the  sense  of  '  milk  /  sjff^dJH  '  ewe's 
milk.'  *!^Nr  and  ^f^,  equally  anomalous  affixes,  and  probably 
obsolete  words,  meaning  '  milk,'  are  similarly  employed ;  as, 
wf^^T^  and  wf%^^. 

li^j  and  the  analogous  affix  ^>r  are  added  severally  to  ;^ 
and  "5^  to  form  appellatives  ;  ^ijir  '  produced  from,  or  by,  a 
woman  ;'  t^%  '  produced  of,  or  by,  a  man.'  In  the  neuter 
gender  they  may  be  abstract  nouns ;  ^§^  '  womanhood,'  iqf# 
'  manhood.' 

"gr^TT^  forms  attributives  from  nouns  in  the  sense  of  '  infe- 
riority /  as,  fW^^^T^:  ^  an  indifferent  physician  :'  compounded 

T  t 


DERIVATION. 

with  ^  it  signifies  '  quantity ;'  ^^mi^i:  '  abundant  hair :' 
^^IM^f:  has  a  similar  purport. 

ftr^  and  ^  are  added  to  "firH  to  denote  '  barrenness  ;'  fro- 
1xr^:  or  fiTc^^'T:  ^  barren  Sesamum/  '  not  bearing  seed.' 

T?!^  and  f^f^  are  affixes  forming  principally  patronymics  or 
terms  implying  ^  descent :'  the  former  furnishes  the  termina- 
ton  wnnr,  the  latter  wnrfrf ;  as  ITF^FIW:  or  J||ji1  Infill:  '  a 
descendant  of  the  sage  T^riiJ'  Analogous  to  them  is  "oifioF, 
forming  attributives  of  which  the  feminine  takes  ^,  as  denoted 
by  the  sibilant :  thus  from  aFftr^,  *  a  country,'  comes  ohifl^rNH 

*  produced  in  it ;'  as,  ctilfM^nHH  JT^  '  honey  of  Kapisa ;'  "Sfirftr- 
^rnnfl"  '^JW  '  a  grape  of  the  same.' 

iTXT^  is  added  to  nouns  to  import  ^  made  or  consisting  of ;' 
as,  W^JT'nT  '  made  or  consisting  of  stone,'  ^  stony,'  ^  marble  ;' 
ofiTOTR"^  ^  wooden,^  ^  made  of  wood  ;'  ^tt?t^  '  earthen,'  *  made  of 
earth  or  clay  i'  it  also  implies  *  containing^  or  '  abounding 
with  ;^  as,  WWTT  ^  containing  food'  (a  dish,  &c.)  ;  irt^^R-JT 
^  containing  sweetmeats'  (a  shop  or  the  like) ;  XTrPPniV  "T?:  ^  a 
sacrifice  abounding  with  clarified  butter/  i.  e.  one  in  which 
many  oblations  are  offered.  It  also  forms  with  jft,  '  an  ox/ 
the  term  jflH^:,  which  may  mean  either  '  cow-dung,'  or  *  the 
nature  or  property  of  a  cow.' 

*rr^^  is  added  to  words  to  denote  '  measure,'  either  of 
height,  capacity,  or  number ;  "STT^T^  ^  as  high  as  the  knee  ;' 
U^HI'^  *  as  much  as  a  Prastha  ;'  ^^H  V^  ^  five  in  tale ;'  TTTT^TTW 

*  so  much.' 

TT  is  added  to  a  few  words  to  form,  i .  Attributives  ;  as, 
^jm  *  a   village,'   i||U|   ^  rural,'   *  rustic ;'    g^  ^  the  face,'   H^ 

*  principal ;'  ^^  ^  punishment,'  ^1(5^  *  deserving  punishment ;' 
^a^  *  respect,'  ^jr^  *  deserving  respect  /  ^m  '  killing,'  ^Xfl  *  de- 
serving death  :'  2.  Abstracts  ;  as,  ^^  ^  a  friend,'  ^i^  ^  friend- 
ship ;'  FW  *  a  messenger,'  ^  '  mission  :'  ^ftjTiT,  ^  a  merchant,' 
makes  ^fiHTm  '  trade  :'  ^  '  a  thief,'  makes  ^ '  theft,' '  thiev- 
ing.' TT  is  more  frequently  combined  with  other  letters,  as  in 
55^5  ^,  ^^,  "q^,  and  in^. 


NOMINAL  DERIVATIVES MISCELLANEOUS. 

ifoB  forms  a  few  abstract  nouns  :  TTinT,  ^a  king,*  makes  TTrif 

*  kingdom  ;'  ifTfmfrr  ^  a  general,'  S*iii|?f  *  command ;'  ^^ftf^  *  a 
family  priest,'  qlCir^f4  *  priesthood.' 

^,  leaving  %  forms,  i.  Patronymics  or  terms  of  descent ; 
as,  ^>Tf^  '  a  proper  name,'  ^rrfH^rm:  '  the  son  of  Abhijit ;' 
"1^  '  sprung  from  a  god ;'  ^t^  '  a  native  of  the  outer  (^f^^) 
country :'  2.  Attributives ;  as,  ^XR  ^  is  produced  in  or  on  an 
island/  #it:  3.  Aggregates;  as,  ^R  'a  field/  %T^  'a 
number  of  fields  ;'  %Z[r;  ^  hair,'  %^Tf  '  a  quantity  of  hair  ;'  "RT^: 

*  a  noose,'  xrr^rn  ^  a  number  of  snares  ;'   &c. 

TTrT,  leaving  %  and  requiring  no  change  of  the  radical  vowel, 
is  of  much  more  extensive  application  than  either  of  the  pre- 
ceding :  it  forms  a  few  terms  of  descent  ;  as,  TTSRT:  ^  a  man  of 
the  military  tribe,  sprung  from  a  Raja  /  "^'^  ^  of  a  good 
family :'  but  its  chief  application  is  to  form  attributives  imply- 
ing derivation,  relation,  or  fitness,  becoming  frequently  appel- 
latives ;  as,  ^SJI  *  what  is  fit  for  a  carriage  ;'  T^nr:  '  a  horse  fit 
for  harness  ;'  liisq  '  a  carriage-wheel :'  ^  relating  to  the  root, 
or  to  original  price  ;  h;^:  '  price,'  H^  '  profit ;'  ^il^  '  suited  in 
age,'  TEnr,  whence  ^rj^:  *  a  friend.'  Of  other  attributives 
formed   with   this   affix   are   ^^   '  like,'  '!^'^^  '  suitable,'   xfTX^ 

*  appropriate,'  ^^  *  agreeable,'  \^^  '  wealthy,'  ^T^JT  '  chief,' 
VT^  '  virtuous,'  "5n^  '  relating  to  the  people,'  '  popular,'  ^  cur- 
rent,' T^pX  '  fame,'  ^T^TRT  ^  famous,'  ^O^i^T  ^  deserving  decapi- 
tation,' from  ^t  for  f^t^  and  %^  *  cutting.'  Nouns  ending 
in  "3"  and  the  word  jft  take  Guiia  before  "xnr ;  as,  ^r|j  ^  a  stake,' 
5[^!3|  '  fit  for  a  stake'  (wood )  ;  tt^  ^  relating  to  a  cow'  or 
^  derived  from  one,'  t\^  '  cow's  milk :'  '^"^,  '  a  dog,'  changes 
the  semivowel ;  as,  ^PiT  or  ^n?  ^  canine  :'  TrrfW,  *  the  nave  of  a 
wheel,'  makes  «T«T  *  fit  for  the  nave  ;'  and  tTT^  '  the  nose,'  •T^ 
'  fit  for  the  nose,'  »TO  ^  a  nozzle  :'  xf^HT,  '  fame,'  makes  ^\\^ 
'  famous  ;'  HFT  ^  a  part,'  Hf4  '  half  (at  interest),'  m^  ^ 
'  half  per  cent.'  Of  the  appellatives,  besides  those  specified, 
are,  "irm  '  a  bridemaid,'  from  iTift  '  a  wife  ;'  V^^TT  '  a  milch 
cow,'  from  v^,  the  same,  with  tt  inserted ;'  t^t:  '  an  actor,' 

T  t  2 


324  DERIVATION. 

from  ^  ^  dress ;'   <*4^ii4  ^  vigour/  from  ^i#7r  *  act ;'   and  ^^ 

*  thing,'  ^  wealth,'  from  '5'  ^  a  tree.' 

t  is  added  to  nouns  to  form  diminutives ;  "Sfi^t  ^  a  house,' 
^^  '  a  small  house  ;^  1^  '  the  Sami  tree,'  "^nfti:;  '  a  small 
S'ami  tree.' 

"C^  is  added  to  words  to  imply  '  cause'  or  *  origin,'  if  the 
latter  be  man ;  as,  ^HHisvUf  '  what  proceeds  from  the  same 
cause  ;'  ^'^^^"Ccqr  '  what  originates  with  Devadatta.' 

<^  is  added  to  f^<!^,  'J?^,   and   fxTH,    substituted  for   f^ 

*  moist,'  making  fq^,  "^^,  and  ftrw?  to  signify  '  blear-eyed.^ 

f%T^  and  f%^hr^  are  added  to  the  preposition  f^f  to  form 
attributives  ;  as,  fVrf^,  liffV^hr,  '  thick,^  ^  coarse  ;'  also  '  flat 
or  crooked  nosed.' 

^  is  a  useful  affix :  ^  always,  as  in  the  Kridanta  deriva- 
tives, denotes  the  addition  of  ^^.  It  forms  attributives  sig- 
nifying chiefly  ^  produced  in'  or  '  from  ;'  as,  jft^  *  the  hot 
season,'  @"^Tcfi  '  growing  or  produced  in  summer ;'  "3^  ^  a 
camel,'  "^t^oR  ^  produced  from  a  camel ;'  "^^To5^  '  made  by  a 
potter,'  <^fA\A  ;  SHKIk^oH  ^  produced  in  a  wood,'  ^  wild.'  It  is 
also  added  to  names  of  countries  to  signify  either  the  place 
or  people ;  TTTTl^rjW^:  is  synonymous  with  t^^fc5■gwt  '  Pali- 
bothra  ;'  ^TI^t:  means  ^  the  people  of  Anga :'  also  any  thing 
peculiar  to  the  country  ;  as,  from  "^^,  '  Cutch,'  comes  chi-osichV 
^^:  '  a  man  of  Cutch ;'  "^rr^^  ^f^lf  ^  a  Cutch  laugh.'  It 
also  forms  nouns  of  aggregation ;'  as,  ^^cR,  from  T8f'?(^  ^  an 
ox,'  '  a  herd  of  oxen ;'  wtR^  *  a  number  of  the  descendants 
of  Upagu,'  or  ^  his  family  or  tribe  collectively.' 

^*T,  like  the  preceding,  adds  ^r«R,  but  does  not  change  the 
vowel  of  the  primitive.  It  forms  such  attributives  as  Wi**, 
from  "^m  '  order,'  '  one  who  knows  the  order ;'  MrV^oh  *  produced 
in  or  on  the  road ;'  ic^ch  '  one  who  knows  the  road  ;'  M^l^oh 
'  produced  in  the  forenoon :'  also  a  few  feminine  nouns  in 
particular  acceptations  ;  as,  from  tj^  for  "qi^,  '  a  quarter,'  comes 
Trf^oBT  '  quarter,'  when  succession  is  implied  ;   as,  flr^i^W  ^Tfjf 

*  he  gives   two   and  two  quarters ;'    fl^frniif  f^^rfir  '  he  gives 


NOMINAL  DERIVATIVES MISCELLANEOUS.  325 

two  and  two  hundreds  :'  or  when  succession  is  not  implied, 
but  legal  proceedings  are ;  as,  fw^fw^  ^"fein  '  fined  two 
hundred.' 

"^   also  forms  feminine  nouns  from  compounds  implying 

*  enmity  between  the  objects;'  as^  ch|chtc^r<*<*T  ^  the  natural 
hostility  of  the  crow  and  the  owl.^ 

^T?5^  forms  an  attributive  noun  with  the  preposition  "f^; 
f^r^TTc^  '  large/  '  extensive.' 

^rrsfi^  and  ^TfsR  are  added  to  names  of  vegetable  substances 
to  denote  *  a  field  ;'  as,  ^^^T^  or  s^w^nf^  ^  a  field  of  sugar- 
cane.' 

^T^  is  added  to  nouns  to  form  appellatives  with  the  sense 
of  *  diminutiveness'  or  ^  inferiority  :'  ifkft  '  a  sack,'  iflilOriO  '  a 
small  sack;'  ^Klrii.:  'a  young  calf;'  w^jOX  'a  foal,'  also  ^a 
mule  ;'  "^"^iTTTt:  *  an  ox  unfit  for  the  yoke.' 

^rT  forms  attributive  nouns  analogous  to  those  formed  with 
TrT,  as  above,  but  in  particular  senses ;  and  the  feminine 
termination  is  ^.  The  words  imply,  i .  '  Who  or  what  goes 
by  means  of ;'  as,  ^fig^  '  one  who  goes  on  a  horse  ;'  "qfcq^:  --cSt 

*  a  cripple,'  '  one  who  goes  by  means  of  a  wheel-chair,'  X|i§: ; 
<|p^qfe:  -ofii'  ^  a  traveller,^  '  one  who  goes  along  the  road ;'  or,  as 
applied  to  inanimate  things,  ^rfbrf^HB  'what  comes,  or  is 
brought,  by  water :'  2.  'Who  or  what  takes  by  means  of;'  as, 
vr^  '  an  inflated  skin,'  Hfi^^^  ^  a  ferryman,'  '  one  who  takes 
passengers  or  goods  across  a  river  on  a  skin ;'  f^^v:  or  ^"^v: 
'  a  yoke  for  carrying  burdens  by  a  rope  at  each  end,'  f^fv^: 
or  ^wfVcn:  ^  a  porter  carrying  loads  by  a  yoke :'  and  3.  Con- 
taining a  given  measure  ;  as,  iTirf^^  '  containing  two  ^rhakas 
of  grain,'  '  a  field,'  &c. 

^gc5  is  similarly  applied  to  a  few  words  ;  as,  '^T^'^:  -"^  -'^ 
'  who  or  what  goes  by  being  dragged.' 

iBf5>T  is  added  to  ^j^,  '  the  S'ami  tree,'  to  signify  '  made  of 
its  wood,^  ^iPHrii:  -"e^  -l4' 

xqsr  forms  abstract  neuter  nouns  from  a  variety  of  words ; 
as,  ^  '  white,'  ^IT1''4  '  whiteness  ;^  l^  '  firm,'  ^tI4  '  firmness ;' 


326  DERIVATION. 

itVT:  *  sweet/  »rr^  *  sweetness  ;'  jj#:  '  a  blockhead,'  ;^#f  ^  folly ;' 
^:  *  a  thief/  ^qm  '  stealing  /  ^:  '  a  thief/  #^  '  steahng  / 
fxT"^:  '  a  knave,'  ^^  '  dishonesty ;'  TH^m:  *  a  Brahman/ 
"j^i^TW  '  the  nature  or  office  of  a  Brahman  ;'  xjrigij:  *  the  four 
castes/  x^i  j|$i[  ^  the  duties  or  institution  of  the  four  castes  / 
XRwra  '  successively/  miui^*  ^  succession/  '  tradition/  If 
taking  the  feminine  gender,  these  nouns  reject  tt  before  ^;  as,_ 
•?f^  '  right/  '  fit/  makes  Wlf^  or  ^'^  '  fitness/ 

^n  and  W(  are  added  pleonastically  to  w^  *  earth  /  so  is 
f^cfiiT,  making  ^f^"^,  ipm  or  ^t,  *  earth/ 

Class  II.    Possessives, 

^fr^5  leaving  ^,  is  substituted  for  the  terminations  of  a  few 
words  ending  in  vowels,  and  added  to  others  ending  in  con- 
sonants,  to  form  possessive  adjectives ;  as,  iRT  makes  iTT 
'  who  has  braided  hair  /  -gx^^  '  the  breast/  "57::^  *  breasted  / 
^irr  '  sin/  w^  '  sinful  /  w^^  *  who  has  haemorrhoids/  from 
'SI^^;  &c. 

W^"^  and  ^rTc5'^  are  added  to  nouns  to  signify  possession 
or  use  of  the  object  they  denote,  but  in  a  depreciatory  sense  ; 
as,  TT^,  '  speech/  makes  'qr^T^  or  "^T^Tc?  *  one  who  speaks 
much  and  nonsensically.' 

'mfTR^  added  to  ^,  *  property,'  makes  ^^rfir^  -^  -f^T^t  '  a 
master'  or  '  mistress/  '  an  owner  of  property.' 

'^fnTofirT  is  added  to  :5T^  ^  a  horn,'  and  "^r^  '  a  heap/  to  form 
attributives  ;  as,  ^"^=TT«R  ^  horned,'  «jr^Kofi  '  preeminent.' 

^n<5^  forms  attributives  of  possession,  with  the  sense  of 
*  non-endurance  /  with  "^ftw  *  cold/  "g"!!?!  *  warm,'  and  "^IT  '  oiled 
butter  /  as,  "^ftTTToy  '  suffering  from  cold,'  '  freezing  /  TWTcJ 
^  suffering  from  heat  /  prn^  '  having,  but  not  liking,  oiled 
butter.'     ^^,  '  the  heart,'  forms  ^^"THg  '  kind-hearted.' 

^ir^  forms  possessive  attributives  from  the  class  of  words 
called  KTToRTf^ ;  as,  wrcsfiT  '  a  star,'  riKf^hH  '  starred,'  '  starry  ;' 
^^  '  a  flower,'  "gf^ir  '  flowered,'  *  flowery  /  ^^  *  a  flower/ 
J«r*<ri  '  having  flowers  /   t^R[?  '  a  part,'  ^f^TT  '  parted,'  *  di- 


NOMINAL   DERIVATIVES POSSESSIVES.  327 

vided/  *  having  parts  ;'  fqinfii  '  thirst,'  fwrfiETa"  *  thirsty  ;'  5:^ 
'pain/  |:f7^  *  afflicted/  'pained/  ^  'pleasure/  ^Hnh 
'  happy/  '  at  ease  /  &c. 

^[rf^  forms  tRfoT^T  '  fruitful/  from  t^  '  fruit  /  and  "c^f^iu 
'  peacock-tailed/  or  ^ff^  '  a  peacock/  from  "^  '  the  tail  of 
that  bird.'      f^,  '  dirt/  makes  »?fc5^,  or  with  ^?ra^,  J^cTNtt 

*  dirty/  '  foul/  '  wicked/ 

^fir  is  affixed  to  nouns  ending  in  ^  to  denote  possession 
actual  or  figurative ;  ^^  '  a  staff/  ^f?l?^  '  one  who  carries  a 
staff/  iR  ^wealth/  \lf^  'wealthy/  ^^f  'happiness/  ^f^ 
'  happy  /  f:;^  '  pain/  5:"%^  '  sorrowful :'  also  to  t^  in  parti- 
cular meanings  ;  '^^•T  '  one  who  has  priority/  i.  e.  one  w^ho 
has  done  (eaten  or  drank)  any  thing  on  a  former  occasion  ; 
"^inj^  oB^  '  he  formerly  made  the  mat.'      ^TTif  makes   'iiif^TT 

*  one  who  has  partaken  of  a  S'raddha'  or  '  funeral  feast  / 
and  '^X^  '  visible/  ^nlV^  '  one  w  ho  has  seen  any  occurrence/ 
'  a  w  itness/  It  is  also  added  to  certain  words  in  ^rr  or  ^ ;  as, 
r^K^I  '  a  crest/  f^f^^  '  crested/  f^^  '  a  peacock  /  WTc^  '  a 
garland/  Jrrf^"?^  '  having  a  garland/  'm^  '  a  gardener  /  ^tf^ 
'  rice/  cfH^^  '  having  rice :'  also  to  numerals  connected  with 
age ;  as,  M^  Ph  rf  '  having  the  fifth  (month  or  year)  /  "q^jfl'  "^rr^: 
'  a  boy  in  his  fifth  year.'  Occasionally  "^  is  prefixed  to  B^iiT ; 
as,  Tnrfcfi"?^  '  one  who  suffers  from  disordered  wind.'  It  forms 
various  feminine  nouns  of  locality  ;  as,  ^isfsfJCTfft  ^  a  pool  having 
the  lotus  :'  so  Trf^^ft,  "^fr^t,  &c.  It  forms  various  appellatives, 
as  above,  and  as  '^f%rr  ^  an  elephant/  from  ^t^T  ^  his  trunk.' 

^<AM  is  affixed  to  a  class  of  words  termed  ftj'^jf^  to  form 
possessives  ;  as,  fq"53LT  ^  mud/  fiTfe?5  ^  muddy  /  "grt^  '  the 
chest/  "^Tf^H  *  broad-chested  /  IT^  '  knowledge,'  ir%c5  '  wise  :' 
also  to  ^  '  froth/  ^tTc5  '  frothy  :'  to  "ftnRTTT  '  sand/  and  ^tT 
'  gravel,'  as  epithets  of  place  ;  fRcfifwc55T  or  '5i^ft:c5T  H^t:  '  sandy 
or  gravelly  soil :'  also  to  "^r^  and  other  w^ords  ;  dfr^c^  ^  corpu- 
lent/ -^fb^  '  big-beUied,'  &c. 

"^T?^  is  added  to  ;^^,  '  a  tooth/  to  form  ^tj^  '  having  large 
or  prominent  teeth/ 


3S8  DERIVATIOX. 

^ic5  is  added  to  ^H  ^  force,'  and  ^TW  *  wind/  to  signify 
^  impatience  ;'  '^c\<A  *  not  enduring  force  -/  THTc^  *  not  bearing 
wind :'  the  latter  is  also  an  appellative ;  '^nmi  ^  a  gale,'  ^  a 
whirlwind.' 

fnrfrT  forms  ^TfTTT"^  ^  eloquent,'  ^  well  spoken/  from  TT^ 
'  speech.' 

1^5^  is  added  to  Tf^  and  ^T^ ;  as^  Tf^TJ  ^  abounding  with 
reeds  ;'  "^rTfH  *  abounding  with  young  grass'  (a  field,  a 
country,  &c.) 

TT,  as  a  possessive  affix,  is  added  to  a  class  of  words  termed 
TTRTf^,  and  which  imply  *  diseased  ;'  as,  xrrJT"7T  '  itch/  xr"R«T 
^  itchy  ;'  c?^«T  ^  a  worm/  "^fir*?  '  affected  with  worms.'  It  also 
forms  irregularly  rsftr^T  '  moonlight,'  from  teW^"^  '  light.' 

H  is  added  to  the  words  "gf^,  ^^,  and  ^c5 ;  as,  Trf?^  *  hav- 
ing corpulence/  ^  corpulent ;'  ^H  ^  lousy  ;'  ^c5H  '  wrinkled.' 

TTfR  is  in  an  especial  degree  the  affix  implying  possession : 
the  essential  element  is  iTW  or  ^5  inflected  as  HFT,  Trfl",  ITIT, 
or  c(T^,  "^t,  "^  (see  p.  ^5).  The  ?T  is  changed  to  ^  afler  a 
final  or  penultimate  ^  or  wt,  and  after  any  consonant  except  a 
nasal  or  a  sibilant :  it  is  so  changed  after  a  final  or  penultimate 
IT;  it  is  unchanged  after  any  other  vowel  than  ^  or  wt,  and 
after  a  nasal  or  a  sibilant :  but  there  are  special  exceptions  to 
these  changes :  thus  f^i?^  makes  f3N"IT  '  having  something ;' 
i|^^  ^  fame,'  "JTSfT^T^  ^  famous  ;'  ^^t  '  prosperity/  €5^*^^ 
*  prosperous.'  A  great  variety  of  attributives  and  appellatives 
are  formed  with  this  affix ;  as,  V»T^  '  wealthy/  T."^r^  '  fla- 
voured/ WRW  ^  intelligent/  TftiTrT  ^  having  cows,'  ^jf^nT?^  *  hav- 
ing land.'  trsT^  retains  its  final,  if  meaning  '  well  governed,' 
TlNHff)  ^:  '  a  well  governed  country  /  but  t:t'3T^  '  having  a 
king.'  ^  of),  '  water,'  substitutes  "gr^  «T  before  ir^ ;  as,  "^^^ 
'  having  water/  g^^T"5T  '  the  ocean.'  The  following  are  irre- 
gularly formed  with  this  affix :  ^^^qfT^  ^  the  knee'  (having  a 
bone) ;  ^'T^'^T^T  the  name  of  a  king  (having  a  country) ; 
<i^Hi!=iM  the  name  of  a  mountain  (having  salt)  ;  ^^IjTift  '  the 
river  Chambal'    (having  a   skin    or  hide).      In   their  literal 


NOMINAL  DERIVATIVES POSSESSIVES.  329 

acceptation  these  are  regular ;  as,  ^rf^er^,  ^'^i^,  &c.  In 
place  of  wjT^,  the  affix  in  certain  senses  is  termed  TRIHT,  the 
initial  ^  causing  the  elision  of  the  final  vowel  of  the  primitive  ; 
as,  ^r^  '  a  lotus,'  ^^j^ril  '  a  place  abounding  in  lotuses  ;'  hP^^ 
'  a  buffalo/  HH^^rfl"  the  name  of  a  city. 

Wl  is  added  to  a  few  words  to  form  attributives  ;  as,  f^rq 
*  snowy;'  jn^  ^excellent,'  'having  merit;'  ^rif  'having  a 
handsome  form :'  also  ^nn  '  a  coin,'  i.  e.  having  an  impression. 

^  is  added  to  ^Ptr  '  wool,'  "gi^T'J  *  woolly  :'  also  to  ^^  '  I,' 
^r^^  '  arrogant ;'  and  ^H?^  '  good,'  Wlk^  '  lucky :'  also  to  cB 
and  "^f ;  as,  oRW,  "^fxg  '  happy,^  '  prosperous.' 

t.  forms  attributives  and  appellatives  after  certain  words ; 
xn^  '  paleness,'  Ml^^.  '  pale  ; '  J^v  '  honey ,^  jt^  '  sweet,' 
'  honied  ;'  ^n  '  a  hole,'  ^f^  '  perforated ;'  "gj^  '  saline  soil,' 
■grR^  '  having  or  abounding  with  such  soil.'  ^ttt,  '  a  mountain,' 
makes  '^^jxt  '  a  city'  (having  houses  as  lofty  as  mountains) ; 
and  fnnT  '  darkness,'  TrfT^^  or  wf^WT  the  same  ;  the  penultimate 
being  changed  to  ^. 

<^  forms  attributives  with  various  words  ;  ^^  '  the 
shoulder,'  ^fNrc5  *  strong ;'  ^w  '  a  child/  AxH(A  *  affectionate  ;' 
^TT  '  a  crest,'  ^Tr?5  *  crested  ;'  ^  ^  froth,'  \aa  '  frothy.' 

'^  is  added  to  ^^  ^  hair,'  ^^  ^  having  fine  or  abundant 
hair;'  in  which  sense  it  may  be  also  "^fifT"^,  %%cfi,  or  4S^Nci; 
as  a  name  of  Krishna,  it  is  %^:  alone.  It  is  added  to  a  few 
other  words  ;  as,  to  ^rf^  *  a  jewel,'  and  f^Tn?  '  gold,'  to  form 
'rfiu'^:  '  a  particular  Naga  ;'  f^T^riR:  '  one  of  the  treasures  (per- 
sonified) of  the  god  of  wealth :'  also  to  ^n&^  '  water,'  which 
rejects  its  final,  ^?^^:  '  the  ocean.' 

^c6^  forms  attributives,  used  'chiefly  as  appellatives,  after 
certain  words  ;  f^WT^c5  '  crested,'  f^r^T^lcJ:  '  a  peacock.'  A 
final  short  vowel  becomes  long  before  it ;  as,  ^  '  a  tooth,' 
<*dNc^:  '  an  elephant ;'  oRJ^  '  culture,'  "SRift^c?:  '  a  husbandman;' 
^I^Pri  '  spirit,'  HHI^riT^c^:  '  a  distiller  ;'  xrft:q^  '  a  court,'  Trfr^i^: 
'  a  Raja ;'  Tifff  *  menstrual  excretion,'  M^oiT  *  a  woman  at 
that  period.'     "gr^S^,  '  strength,'  makes  "gi^^ci  '  strong,' 

u  u 


330  DERIVATION. 

W»T  is  added  to  words  ending  with  ^m ;  as,  TnT^  '  penance,' 
lfTTf^'?r  '  who  practises  penance/  ^  an  anchorite  ;'  xr^T^  ^  fame/ 
^"^rf^"??  *  famous  :'  also  to  iTRT  ^  ilhision/  ^rnrrfr?^  ^  deceptive/ 
^>n  ^  apprehension/  wrfV^  '  intelligent  /  ^  '  a  garland/ 
^^  ^  having  a  garland  /  and  'w:fp^  '  sickness/  with  the 
final  made  long,  ^HHMlf^H  '  sick/  ^  ill.' 

^  forms  attributives  from  a  class  of  words  termed  rflH  1 0^ ; 
as,  e^y^TrT  and  ^tiT^T  '  hair  of  the  body/  cJW^,  ^N^,  '  hairy  / 
ofifq  '  an  ape,'  ohfii^i  '  tawny  /  &c. 


Class  III.  Degrees  of  Comparison :  Pronominals:  Numerals. 

261.  The  affixes  which  form  the  comparative  and  superla- 
tive degrees  have  already  been  specified,  as  iTt^  or  im'^,  and 
^TT^  or  fw?T,  and  ^  or  ^F^;  they  are  noticed  here  only  as 
belonging  to  the  class  of  Taddhita  affixes  (see  p.  74). 

262.  Pronouns  take  some  of  the  preceding  affixes,  with  the 
same  effect  and  signification  as  those  already  specified :  thus 
^rrrr  is  added  to  the  possessive  cases  plural  of  ^r^ff?^  and  g^T^, 
making  ^^T5R,  '^T'^ToR,  *  what  belongs  or  relates  to  us'  or  '  to 
you :'  also  to  the  same  cases  singular,  w^ith  cR  inserted ;  as^ 
"cTRoF,  TTJIoR,  '  what  relates  or  belongs  to  thee'  or  '  me.'  "?[  is 
also  added  to  ^rw^ ;  as,  "»uWf{hT  ^  relating  or  belonging  to  me  / 
and  to  H^  ^  you'  (respectfully) ;  vr^^hr  ^  yours'  or  '  your 
honour's.'  Besides  these,  they  have  some  peculiar  to  them- 
selves. 

^Tofi^  is  sometimes  substituted  for  the  proper  terminations 
of  foRT,  "ipr,  and  TT^ ;   as,  oRoR  *  which,'  ttoB  ^  who,'  ^ToR  ^  that.' 

Trnc^  and  "STHT^  are  added  to  the  same  pronouns,  also  to 
Tjofi,  to  form  comparisons  between  two  or  many ;  as,  oRjTt,  "mTT, 
'  which  of  two  /  cRTm,  "mnr,  *  which  of  many  /  TTiTC,  "rnTT,  ^  that 
of  two'  or  '  of  many  /   ii<+HI.,  ^^^RTHT,  *  one  of  two'  or  '  of  many.^ 

TfiT  is  added  to  fcRir ,  forming  ofifw  *  how  many.' 

■q^  is  added  to  several  of  the  pronouns  to  imply  *  quan- 
tity :'  it  leaves  ^7^,  as  already  noticed  (p.  83).     To  these  may 


NOMINAL   DERIVATIVES^— PRONOMINALS,  &C.  331 

be   added   fifT^,    forming    attributives    from   them ;     ^Nrriv^ 

*  having  or  being  how  many  ;^  HNPd'ii  *  having  or  being  so 
many/ 

263.  Nouns  of  number  take  Taddhita  affixes  to  denote 
ordinals  and  other  modifications:  some  of  them  have  been 
already  noticed  (p.  89). 

"5  is  added  to  ^iT  and  its  compounds,  to  fr^rfw  and  the 
decimals  ending  in  ^,  to  form  numerals  in  addition  to  others 
with  which  they  are  inflected.  ^,  leaving  ^,  causes  the  elision 
of  the  final  letter  ;  TjoRjc^'^f  ^if  ^  one  hundred  and  eleven  ;'  f^ 
^  '  a  hundred  and  twenty.' 

^Z  forms  ordinals  from  cardinals  for  all  above  ten  ;   ii*lr^^l 

*  eleventh/  f^  '  twentieth,'  &c.  ;  or  those  from  twenty 
upwards  prefix  im^  to  "5^,  making  fr^rfwim,  &c.  (p.  90). 

f^'^  added  to  ^Tf^,  '  first/  forms  the  ordinal  ^if^H  '  first :' 
it  also  forms  terms  signifying  ^  relative  order/  either  in  place, 
degree,  or  time,  with  ^ttj  *  before/  ^i^  '  end,'  and  nvyirt^  *  after  / 
as,  wfTjH  ^  first/  '  prior  /  ^^f^ilH  '  subsequent  /  xrft?^  '  posterior.' 

inr>7   added  to  numerals  implies  '  division  ;'   as,   ^^1\^  ^T^ 

*  wood  in  five  pieces/  or  ^  five  pieces  of  wood.'  It  forms 
similar  derivatives  with  ff"  and  f^  in  alternation  with  "xr^;  as, 
fkinr  or   i"^,   f^TR    or   ^if,   Hwo'   or   'twofold/   'three'   or 

*  threefold.' 

ifhr  is  added  to  f^  and  f^,  the  latter  of  which  changes  ft 
to  ■^,  to  form  ordinals  ;  as,  fflfhT  *  second,'  "jTft^  ^  third :' 
to  these,  ^^,  that  is,  ^,  taking  the  place  of  the  primitive  ^, 
is  added,  to  imply  '  division  ;'  as,  -feirhft  wrm:  '  a  second  part,' 
'a  half/  -jirhft  HT^:  'a  third:'  so  '^wt  tr^H  'a  fourth,  a 
fifth,'  &c. ;  ordinals  being  in  fact  the  same  as  fractionals.  "TO 
and  ^rerr  take  optionally  tj,  making  either  "TO  or  ^1?  '  a  sixth/ 
"^STT  or  ^TFfT  *  an  eighth.' 

^^  is  added  to  %,  f^,  and  ^^^,  making  f^,  f^,  ^TO^j 

*  in  value  twdce,'  *  thrice/  '  four  times.'  ^  becomes  Visarga, 
and  that  again  ^  before  a  sonant ;  as,  fi'H^  '  he  eats  twice.' 

^m  is  added  to  "^TW  and  ^r^  to  signify  '  bought  with'  or 

u  u  2 


332  DERIVATION. 

worth :'  ^tTiT  ^  bought  with  a  hundred  ;^  ^T^  '  bought  with  a 
thousand :'  also  to  signify  general  relation  to  those  numbers. 

ofi*^  may  be  added  to  numerals  not  ending  with  ^n^  or  fir 
to  signify  '  bought  with ;'  M^ch  '  bought  with  five :'  the 
exceptions  take  Z^  ;  T^f^cfi  ^  bought  with  twenty ;'  -«ilHinC^rFh 
'  bought  with  forty.'  It  may  be  added  to  them  to  form  deno- 
minatives ;  as,  f^^rffT«Rt  '  a  book  containing  twenty  (chapters).' 
It  is  also  added  to  terms  of  quantity,  formed  with  T^;  as, 
ri  l'<N  t^,  or  with  ^7  inserted,  ITT^fircfi  ^  bought  with  so  much.' 
eft";^  is  added  to  numerals  forming  attributives  to  imply  a  sum 
given,  either  as  interest,  tax,  profit,  or  bribe  ;  as,  xp^oRt  TTSTT 
'  the  king,  who  has  received  a  tax  of  five  ;'  ^^W^  ^^^: 
'  Devadatta  has  taken  five  (per  cent,  interest)  ;'  &c.  Deriva- 
tives with  other  affixes  are  similarly  employed  ;  as,  ^fw^:  l^: 
'  one  to  whom  a  hundred  has  been  given,'  &c. 

;^  may  be  added  to  f^^frfir  when  preceded  by  a  numeral  or 
by  ^r»rt  ^plus  a  half:'  to  signify  ^  value;'  oR  is  inserted;  as, 
flf^frr#«T  ^  worth  twenty-two  ;'  ^T«rtf^^Tfw#^  '  worth  twenty 
plus  a  half,'  i.  e.  worth  thirty. 

77^  or  TTr^  may  be  added  to  "^jw  to  signify  '  being  worth'  or 

*  bought  with  ;'  "^rfffofi  or  ^rw  '  what  is  worth  a  hundred ;'  also, 
as  above,  *  he  to  whom  a  hundred  is  given.' 

■JtT  is  added  to  numerals  ending  in  frT  or  ^n^  to   signify 

*  value ;'  r45|«*i,  f^'^T^?  '^Tr^t^I^j,  '  bought  with,  or  worth, 
twenty,'  &c. 

jnnr,  added  to  numerals,  implies  '  equal  or  equivalent  to  in 
value  ;  as,  f^T^g^f^cf  tj^tRT  ^  the  butter-milk  is  worth  two  (it 
is  twice  the  value)  of  the  barley.' 

Class  IV.    Indeclinables, 

264.  A  variety  of  indeclinable  words,  chiefly  significant  of 
time  or  place,  are  formed  with  affixes  considered  as  belonging 
to  the  class  of  Taddhita  terminations. 

^  is  affixed  to  f^m^  *  what,'  which  is  changed  to  ^  in  the 
sense  of  *  place  ;'  as,  igi  *  where.' 


NOMINAL.  DERIVATIVES INDECLINABLES.  333 

^  _^  forms  with  "gr^t  ^  north/  and  ^tb^W  '  south,'  or  '  on 
the  right/  the  indecUnables  ^-^jm:  '  in  or  from  the  north,' 
^^WfT:  ^  in  or  from  the  south,'  or  *  on  the  right  hand/ 

^srftr  and  ^^cTrfw  form  adverbs  of  place  or  time  with  "J^,  ^rvr, 
and  "^j  considered  as  substitutes  for  "^,  ^nn:,  and  '^mr:;  as, 
^,  "gT^smr  '  before,'  *  prior,'  '  in  front,^  '  in  or  on  the  east ;' 
■^ny:,  ^rvrerrrr  ^  down,'  '  below,'  *  inferior  /  ^n":,  ^T^^n^  ^  behind,' 

*  after,^  '  in  the  west  :^  the  latter  is  also  optionally  ^sr^TMTTT . 
TR  optionally  takes  -Hri^-cr  or  ^i\h\\x[\  as,  ttot:,  "qrien^  ^  after,^ 
^  subsequent/ 

^STVrTT  is  considered  as  irregularly  substituted  for  ^;^,  Hhis,' 
'  in  this  time,'  ^  now/ 

^ri%?5  is  added  to  different  pronouns  to  signify  ^  time  ;' 
^IT^  '  this,^  as  ^TfTft '  in  this  time,' '  now  ;'  cfiff  and  xrft '  when ;' 
Trff  *  then,^  '  at  that  time/ 

^fT^  is  added  to  "gr^i:  and  ^iBpiir  to  signify  *  in'  or  '  from  ;' 
TWU  or  ^f^HjT  "^^rfiT  ^  he  dwells  in  the  north'  or  '  in  the  south ;' 
TWTT  or  ^f^prr  y^lCI'Iri:  ^returned  from  the  south/  They 
take  ^rrf^  in  the  same  sense  ;   TWnf^,  ^f^^lf^. 

7r»T"«^  is  added  to  the  same  words ;  <d  rl^ill,  ^ftj^iT,  '  in  or  on 
the  north'  or  '  the  south/ 

oR?^^^  is  added  to  numerals  and  to  "^  to  signify  '  times,' 
M^hen  alluding  to  the  reiteration  of  an  act  essential  to  life  ; 
fw^t^  >J#i  '  he  eats  twice :'  so  i^^*,cJH,  "^ITT^r^,  ■«5fg^r^*^,  and 
the  like. 

fs^  converts  into  indeclinables,  nouns  compounded  with  any 
of  the  derivatives  or  inflexions  of  '^^  or  H^'  to  be,'  or  "^  '  to 
make,'  to  imply  that  the  object  is,  or  is  made,  what  it  was  not 
before.  A  final  ^  or  ^rr,  except  when  the  word  is  already  an 
indeclinable  terminating  with  the  latter,  is  changed  to  ^;  ^ 
and  "T  are  made  long ;  and  ^  is  changed  to  ^ ;    as,  ^Lufl^ri 

*  made   black,'    ^  blackened  ;'     Sj^lohOPrt   '  he  makes  white'  or 

*  whitens  ;'  fflMl*|riH^:  ^the  day  has  become  evening  ;'  ^tvRfif 
'he   becomes   pure;'    ^^^^^   'becoming   eloquent;'    *n5f^>Jrrr 


334  DERIVATION. 

*  become  a  mother.'  'ST^^,  ^^^ ,  and  ^^^  drop  their  finals  ; 
W^E^I?C?!f  '  making  sore  ;'  TJiTJftwnr  ^  he  will  become  mad ;' 
T^TllfhClPd  '  he  looks  upwards.' 

"^T^^  is  an  affix  similar  to  the  preceding,  attaching  ^  to  the 
end  of  a  word  joined  to  the  derivatives  or  inflections  of  the 
verb  ofi  *  to  make  -/  as,  F:^T«IR&frf  ^  he  pains'  or  *  distresses  ;' 
^^^TSR^dfw  '  he  makes  happy  ;'  ftnrradfw  *  he  pleases :'  also 
after  reiterated  words  expressing  inarticulate  sound ;  TfZ^ZT- 
<4iCirri  '  he  makes  the  sound  pa^  pat' :'  also  after  particular 
words  used  in  the  sense  of  '  ploughing ;'  ffTrhrr  or  riril^lchOfrt 

*  he  ploughs  (a  field)  twice  or  thrice ;'  ^^lohClPri  ^  he  ploughs 
(a  field)  back  again  ;'  ^hTTspfrffT  '  he  ploughs  (a  field)  with  the 
seed,'  '  he  drill- sows  it.' 

fTftr  is  substituted  for  the  terminations  of  the  instrumental 
and  ablative  cases  ;  the  former  implying  *  cause  :'  ^It^tt:  ^  by, 
or  on  account  of,  behaviour ;'  "fWiT:  ^  by  or  on  account  of,  its 
rotundity ;'  a3"nnf:  '  from  the  village  ;'  wrf^t  '  from  the  first ;' 
*TWrTt  '  from  the  middle  :'  also  as  implying  '  descent ;'  "sfWcT: 
'^^W*  '  Pradyumna  was  descended  from  Krishna.'  It  is  added 
to  the  names  of  diseases,  to  imply  their  removal ;'  if  Tr^rf^cRTrT: 
"oK^  '  make  him  (free)  from  flux.'  It  is  considered  to  represent 
the  genitive  case  in  such  sentences  as  ^^T  ^^HiflsHT^T  ^  the 
gods  were  (on  the  side)  of  Arjuna.' 

Trf^cJ,  which,  like  the  former,  leaves  im,  is  added  to  pro- 
nouns and  pronominals  in  the  sense  of  the  ablative  and  loca- 
tive cases  :  Wrf"^  or  ^cT^  *  hence'  or  *  here  ;'  HK^^  '  thence,' 
'  therefrom,'  also  '  therefore'  or  '  there  ;'  Trtf^  '  whence,' 
'  wherefrom,'  ^  wherefore,'  '  where  ;'  ^"rfWrt^  *  here  and  there/ 
'  every  where.'  f^.^^  before  an  affix  beginning  with  IT  or  "^ 
becomes  "^  ;  "^Tnr  '  whence,'  *  wherefrom/  or  '  wherefore/ 
'  when  ;'  ^"tw^,  fV^THT ,  '  every  where  ; '  "^H^Tinr  '  on  both 
sides  :'  so  ^HW^  '  on  both  sides  /  ^qfriT^  ^  all  around  ;'  ^fTHr 
'  in  many  places'  or  '  ways.' 

^c^  is  affixed  to  pronouns  and  pronominals  in  the  sense  of 


NOMINAL  DERIVATIVES INDECLINABLES.  335 

*  locality ;'  as,  "JW  '  where,'  tc^  '  where,'  K^  '  there/  ^"t^ 
'  every  where/  ^  is  substituted  for  TTfnr ;  as,  ^l^  '  in  this 
place,'  ^  here.' 

^  is  added  to  certain  words  wdth  the  sense  of  the  accusa- 
tive or  locative  case :  \^^\  '^^  ^  I  salute  the  gods  ;'  jt^WWT  ^ 
^  I  delight  in  the  "men  ;'   ^jJ^i  ^  in  many  ways.' 

^qicjy  is  affixed  to  pronouns  and  pronominals  to  denote 
'  manner,'  '  kind  ;'  as,  ^r^  ^  as,'  ^  in  what  manner  ;'  w^  ^  so,' 

*  thus/  '  in  this  manner  ;'   cR^T  ^  how.' 

^  is  added  to  ^H  and  fcfi^,  substituting  severally  ^  and 
ofi  in  the  same  acceptation  :  ![r^H  *  thus/  "SR^  ^  how.' 

^T  is  added  to  pronouns  and  pronominals  to  imply  ^  time ;' 
as,  "ir^  '  at  what  time,'  '  when  ;'  K^  ^  at  that  time/  '  then  ;' 
cB^  '  when ;'  ^^oR^t  *  once  ;'  ^^^\  '  at  another  time  ;'  ^%^ 
'  always  :'  also  ^  being  substituted  for  Tl"t»  ^l^. 
•  ^T?ftH  is  added  to  ^?^  and  w^  to  signify  ^  time :'  the  initials 
of  the  primitives  only  are  retained ;  ^;^T^'hT  ^  now/  ^  at  this 
time  ;'  lT^T?ft»T  '  then/  '  at  that  time.' 

VT  is  affixed  to  numerals  to  imply  '  numeration  /  as,  ^oPH 
^  once,'  *  one/  ^  singly  ;'  "%VT  or  ^VT  ^  twice/  ^  twofold  /  f^\|T 
or  ^T  '  thrice,'  ^  threefold  /  XT^VT  '  five  times'  or  ^  fivefold'  or 

*  five  parts  /  as,  jr^  trf^  "T^VT  "^  '  make  one  heap  into  five.' 
The  analogous  affix  vg^r  is  added  to  %  and  f^,  making  ^V»^, 
SvT,  '  twofold,'  '  threefold.'  ^5^  niay  be  added  to  ^oR, 
making  ^cjjiqj^. 

rfT  is  added  to  the  preposition  f^,  making  fV?TT  *  without/ 
'except/  and  ^n^  to  the  negative  rji^,  ";iT"nTr ' manifold/  'various/ 

fTH  and  ftFrffTc^  are  added  to  Tq,  substituted  for  "^H; 
as,  T^tIt  or  TqftFTfT  '  up,'  '  above.' 

cnr  affixed  to  words  forms  indeclinables  implying  *  resem- 
blance in  act  /  as,  'gri'41  ^NH^  ^like  a  Brahman  /  "^f^^rif  '  like 
a  Kshetriya :'  also  denoting  '  fitness/  '  suitableness  /  TTiTTfr 
'  fit  for,  or  worthy  of,  a  king  :'  also  if  the  preceding  word 
have  the  sense  of  the  genitive  or  locative  case ;  H^O"^  *  as  in 
Mathura  /  ^^W^IT  '  like  ( the  figure  of)  Devadatta.' 


SS6  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

^n*'  is  added  to  ^T^tT  and  ^  to  imply  '  degree  ;'  "^WW  '  ^ 
little  ;'  "W^:  '  much;,'  '  abundantly,^  ^  for  the  most  part :'  also 
to  numerals  and  terms  of  measure^  to  denote  ^  successive 
order ;'  f^:  ^  two  and  two  ;'  t{XW^\  '  Masha  by  Masha.' 

^fiff  is  added  to  words  like  fx^  to  signify  a  thing's  becoming 
what  it  was  not  before,  in  combination  with  the  same  verbs  ; 
also  with  verbs  signifying  ^  production  ;'  as,  H^TOTrT  "Sfi^rfw  '  he 
reduces  to  ashes  ;^  "^r^^rfnT^Tf^  ^n^RJW  '  the  weapon  is  produced 
as  fire,*  or  ^  is  in  a  blaze ;'  also  wfTrHTT^rfw  ^  is  fire.'  It  also 
means  ^  dependence  ;'  as,  TIiT^Tgwfw  rrk  '  the  country  becomes 
dependent  wholly  on  the  king :'  or  '  appropriation  ;'  as,  ^T«f 
f^inrnr  ohCiPri  '  he  makes  the  gift  wholly  the  property  of  the 
Brahmans. 


CHAPTER    VII. 

COMPOUND  WORDS. 

^Q5.  The  composition  of  words  prevails  in  Sanskrit  to  an 
extent  that  much  exceeds  its  occurrence  in  any  other  language. 
It  is  termed  in  original  grammars,  Samasa  ^EHTRr:. 

^QQ.  When  a  greater  or  lesser  number  of  words  are  com- 
bined, so  as  to  form  one  new  term,  the  characteristic  signs  of 
case  and  number  are,  with  occasional  exceptions,  rejected  by 
all  the  members  of  the  compound  except  the  last. 

267.*  Compound  words  are  arranged,  agreeably  to  the 
nature  of  this  construction,  under  four  classes. 

1.  The  first  class  consists  of  substantive  nouns  simply 
aggregated  under  one  head,  which,  if  not  compounded,  would 
be  Held  together  by  the  intervention  of  a  copulative ;  as, 
*  Rama  and  Lakshmana,'  TX^^  "FJ^gFWn"^,  make,  when  united, 
UHc^i^^.  This  is  termed  Dwandwa,  *  doubling'  or  ^  aggre- 
gation.' 

2.  The  second  class,  termed  Tatpurusha,  is  not  confined  to 
substantives,  but  combines  nominal  and  verbal  derivatives  in 


COMPOUND  WORDS.  337 

different  relations ;  such  as  that  of  the  object  and  the  act,  as 
■^WT^'T:  ^  dependence  upon  Krishna ;'  that  of  the  object  and 
the  agent,  as  jyTTTTTTT  ^  arrived  at  the  village  ;^  or  that  of  the 
attribute  and  the  object,  as  rfic^flr^c^  '  a  blue  lotus/  It  also 
comprises  adjectives,  participles,  and  particles  aggregated,  so 
as  to  form  compound  attributives  or  appellatives  ;  as,  otiuioi^ 
^  black  and  white  ;'  cFrTTo^  '  done  and  not  done ;'  ^rfwu^ 
*  surpassing  the  king.'  The  two  last  are,  however,  considered 
as  forming  either  a  subdivision  of  this  class,  or  a  separate 
class  termed  Karmma-dharaya,  gH^Amk^:  ;  and  so  is  the  com- 
bination of  a  numeral  with  a  noun  ;  which  subdivision  is 
termed  fl'n: .  Of  these  terms,  Tatpurusha,  ^  the  man  of  him,' 
refers  to  a  word  that  commonly  exemplifies  this  kind  of  com- 
pound, or  o^fligiCM:  *  the  king's  man.'  Karmma-dharaya  implies 
^  that  which  comprehends  (dharayati)  the  object  (karmma).' 
Dwigu  is  a  technical  word  derived  from  Dwi  *  two.' 

3.  The  third  class  of  compounds,  called  ^f^f^,  is  the 
association  of  any  given  number  of  terms,  simple  or  com- 
pound, to  form  an  epithet  to  a  noun,  of  which  the  word  Bahu- 
vrihi  furnishes  an  example :  as  separated,  it  means  '  much 
rice ;'  as  compounded,  ^  that  which  has  much  rice,'  a  field 
or  the  hke.  In  compounds  of  this  class,  the  last  member, 
whatever  its  original  gender,  takes  that  of  the  noun  with 
which  it  is  connected ;  as,  t^^nlxWT^:  '  (a  man)  who  has 
a  beautiful  wife.'  These  epithets  are  sometimes  used  abso- 
lutely as  appellatives  ;  as,  y<(jO«hlH|:  '  having  eyes  like  the 
lotus  ;'  a  name  of  Vishnu.  As  an  instance  of  the  multipli- 
cation of  terms  in  a  Bahuvrihi  compound,  we  may  take  «T^r«B- 
riH^I^M|j^^1c(ah:  '  (a  place)  of  which  the  waters  were  sanctified 
by  the  bathing  of  the  daughter  of  Janaka.' 

4.  The  last  class  is  termed  Avyayi-bhava,  ^oq^lni^^:,  being  the 
construction  of  indeclinable  or  adverbial  compounds  (A\yaya), 
consisting  for  the  most  part  of  a  preposition  and  the  noun 
governed  by  it  in  the  objective  case  neuter,  as  "^goj^if,  and 
requiring  a  verb  or  verbal  derivative,  expressed  or  understood, 

X  x 


838  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

to  complete  the  sense ;    as,  "^xT'^'Btif  fw^fcT  *  he  stays  near  to 
Krishna ;'   •grr'^WT^'T:  *  Arjuna  (is)  near  to  Krishna.' 

268.  In  forming  these  several  kinds  of  compounds,  various 
peculiarities  occur,  the  most  important  of  which  we  shall 
specify  under  their  respective  heads. 


SECTION  I. 

Dwandwa  Compounds, 

269.  When  words  are  combined  in  this  form  of  compound, 
the  final  usually  takes  the  sign  of  the  dual  number  where 
there  are  two  objects^,  as  ^Hl^Q  '  Vishnu  and  Siva ;'  and  that 
of  the  plural  if  there  are  more  than  two,  as  ^JTTOTtjft^: 
*  desire,  virtue,  wealth,  liberation'  (the  four  objects  of  human 
existence). 

270.  The  following  words,  when  compounded,  terminate 
in  the  neuter  singular  :  terms  for  parts  of  the  body,  as  xnirrnTRf 
'  the  hand  and  foot :'  players  on  musical  instruments,  iri^r^-ohm- 
mf^cft  '  players  on  different  kinds  of  drums :'  component  parts 
of  an  army,  Tf^oRT'^rft^  '  the  chariots  and  horse :'  members  of 
different  trades,  t*T«Fff^'^  '  a  washerman  and  weaver  :^  specific 
terms  not  signifying  living  things,  \irHi^|tsRrc*^  ^  fried  grain  and 
barley  water :'  names  of  small  insects,  "^oRTfc?^  '  flies  and 
lice :'  names  of  animals,  natural  enemies,  ^f^H^H  '  the  snake 
and  ichneumon :'  a  class  of  words  beginning  with  tt^t^  *  the 
cow  and  horse :'  names  of  rivers  and  countries,  if  in  different 
genders,  <*^'^^^<4  ^  Kuru  and  Kurukshetra ;'  but  if  the  gen- 
ders are  the  same,  then  they  vary  the  number,  as  T^M^^^ 
'  the  Ganges  and  Yamuna.^  Some  words  take  either  form, 
when  more  than  one  is  meant,  as  JT^'J'T'ftV  or  5r^'^'T?ftVt 
^  Plaksha  and  Nyagrodha  trees  ;'  but  it  is  confined  to  the 
dual  to  signify  a  Plaksha  and  a  Nyagrodha  tree;  "'jtr^t  or 
^§HR  '  first  and  last ;  ^STVTlr^  or  ^Pjdwt  ^  upper  and  lower,' 
'  many  or  one  of  each.'     Qualities,  if  contrariety  be  meant. 


DWANDWA   COMPOUNDS.  339 

take  either  form,  ^firilm)  or  "5[fhftW  '  cold  and  hot/  A  com- 
pounded word  preceded  by  a  definite  number  takes  only  the 
first  form,  as  ^^T^nfVffT: '  ten  teeth  and  lips  i'  but  if  the  number 
is  indefinite,  and  the  numeral  is  converted  into  an  attributive 
which  is  not  part  of  the  compound,  the  form  is  optional,  "^i^^* 
^^'ifV^  or  TT^^  ^nftFT:  '  about  ten  teeth  and  lips.' 

271.  Various  rules  are  given  for  the  order  in  which  the 
words  are  to  be  arranged  in  Dwandwa  compounds  ;  but  they 
are  liable  to  many  exceptions.  Thus  in  general  the  shortest 
term  should  come  first,  as  ^^i^^i^  '  S'iva  and  Vishnu :'  so 
should  words  ending  in  ^  or  "g",  as  ^iTf  $,  or  ij^P^iun  ^  teacher 
and  pupil.^  Names  of  seasons  and  asterisms,  if  of  equal 
length,  follow  the  natural  order,  as  ^JT^fi^lf^K^^fii:  '  winter, 
^  dewy  season,  spring ;'  but  i/)'+m^»d^  ^  summer  and  spring,^ 
the  first  being  the  shorter.  When  names  of  castes  or  persons 
come  together,  the  precedence  is  to  be  given  to  the  most 
worthy  or  the  senior  ;  l^i^iii Bj Q^ M P^ ^ ^jj*  i:  ^  the  Brahman, 
Kshatriya,  Vaisya,  and  S'lidra  ;^  ^fvfTOlf^  ^  Yudhishthira 
and  Arjuna.  "m  is  sometimes  interposed,  as  f^TWHi^^fl  *  Mitra 
and  Varuiia. 

272!.  In  some  compounds  different  terms  are  occasionally 
substituted  for  the  first  member ;  as,  "STH  or  ^  for  TTFTr^  '  a 
wife,'  in  ^T«nft  or  ^rqift  ^  wife  and  husband ;  VJ^  for  f^^  in 
iirm^fv^cm  ^  heaven  and  earth  :'  so  ^TRPTJft,  ^KIHf^,  &c.  ^m^l 
is  substituted  for  T^^  in  <jm^|^*  '  the  dawn  and  the  sun ;' 
and  w^  repeated  makes  ^rsnr ,  as  ^n^ft^l  ^  one  and  another,' 
^  one  another  ;^  and  xit,  MUM^  '  mutually'  or  '  in  succession.' 

273.  Single  words  have  sometimes  the  force  of  Dwandwa 
compounds :  thus  TT'f)  means  ^  the  two  Ramas ;'  Tjmx  '  the 
three  Ramas,'  who  were  Parasurama,  Ramachandra,  and  Bala- 
rama.  A  masculine  noun  in  the  dual  comprises  the  feminine : 
thus  "^^  is  put  for  ^  and  ^^,  or  *  the  gander  and  the  goose  :' 
so  miT^  means  *  sister  and  brother ;'  "j^  '  daughter  and  son ;' 
fcTiT^,  ^  parents,'  may  be  used  for  HTrilPMHO  '  mother  and 
father  ;^  and  "s^^l^,  '  parehts-in-law,'  for  "sg^'g^a. 

X  X  a 


340  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

SECTION  II. 

Tatpurusha  Compounds, 

274.  This  class  includes,  as  above  remarked,  three  sub- 
divisions ;  to  the  first  of  which  the  term  Tatpurusha  may  be 
for  the  present  restricted.  In  compounds  of  this  order,  the 
words  stand  in  a  relation  to  each  other  which  would  require, 
if  they  were  separated,  the  use  of  different  cases ;  the  one 
exercising  a  syntactical  government  over  the  other,  and  not 
being  connected,  as  in  the  preceding  class,  by  copulatives 
understood,  nor,  as  in  the  subdivision  Karmmadharaya,  by 
simple  concordance.  The  words  thus  formed  are  mostly 
attributives  and  appellatives. 

275.  The  following  are  arranged  in  the  order  of  the  cases. 

a.  Words  in  the  sense  of  the  objective  case  are  mostly 
compounded  with  the  past  participle  as  the  governing  member ; 
as,  ^IHUIH  ^  one  who  has  reached  the  village  -^  g:ismfhf  ^  one 
who  has  overcome  pain ;'  if^T^^:  ^  a  fool,'  *  one  who  lies  in 
his  bed :  in  the  literal  sense  it  is  not  compounded ;  ^^|HI^<J: 
'  mounted  or  lying  on  the  couch.'  They  may  also  be  com- 
pounded with  verbal  derivative  nouns  denoting  the  agent ;  as, 
<**HchK:  ^  a  potter  ;'  Tng^TRt  '  a  weaver.' 

b.  With  the  instrumental  case  nouns  as  well  as  partici- 
ples are  combined ;  as,  ^^cTH^  ^  a  piece  cut  by  the  nip- 
pers ; '  vi*^lQ:  '  wealth  acquired  by  grain  ; '  fi^fj^^^i:  '  ( a 
son)  like  his  father ;'  »TWP[#  ^  prior  by  a  month ;'  ^TT^FS^: 
*  dispute  by  or  with  words  ;'  ^^£ft^:  ^  rice  sprinkled  by 
curds,'  '  dressed  with  them ;'  JJiHl»4  *  rice  mixed  with  sugar :' 
also  ^sfV^  '  killed  by  a  snake ;'  ^rdH^^  ^  cut  by  a  sickle ;' 
cMchMXT  ^  to  be  drunk  by  a  crow,'  as  chiohM^l  "JT^  '  a  river  with 
muddy  water,  fit  only  for  a  crow's  beverage.'  In  some  com- 
binations the  third  case  is  retained ;  as,  wtinrr^  ^  done  by 
force  ;'  g«r^»f:  *  younger  by  a  male'  (having  an  elder  brother) ; 
iT5!FT^^  '  a  goddess  mentally,'  a  proper  name ;   ifnfWwiM**:  '  a 


TATPURUSHA   COMPOUNDS.  341 

penitent,  by  his  braided  locks/  Where  these  and  similar 
combinations  with  the  third  or  any  other  case  retaining  its 
inflexion  are  used  as  appellatives,  they  may  be  admitted  to  be 
compound  terms  ;  but  where  the  latter  member  is  a  participle 
or  adjective,  w^hich  qualified  by  the  preceding  term  forms  an 
attributive  declinable  in  the  three  genders,  it  must  be  regarded 
as  constituting  an  exception  to  composition  ;  ^ffinrr  «JnT,  for 
instance,  cannot  be  considered  as  properly  a  compound  term. 

c.  Compounds  are  formed  with  words  in  the  sense  of  the 
dative  case,  as  expressed  not  so  much  by  the  sign  '  to,^  as  by 
that  of  ^  for'  or  '  on  account  of ;'  as,  ^5^T^  *  timber  for  a 
stake  :'  this  sense  is  also  conveyed  by  ^r§,  with  which  words  in 
the  dative  case  form  attributives  ;  as,  %1TT^:  W^Tt,  fw^lHI  ^^MC, 
fi'^TlW  '^:^\  ^  broth,  gruel,  or  milk,  for,  or  on  account  of,  the 
Brahman.'  The  grammatical  terms  m.^i|r{  and  ^STTW^xj^  are 
compounds  of  this  class  retaining  the  sign  of  the  case. 

d.  Attributives  are  formed  with  participles  preceded  by 
nouns  having  the  sense  of  the  ablative  case  ;  as,  ^r^TWff 
^  removed  from  happiness,'  ^  unhappy  ;'  ^^^^TTftrrf  *  fallen  from 
heaven.'  Composition  does  not  take  place  after  words  signi- 
fying ^  near,^  '  far,'  ^  a  little,'  or  ^^  in  the  ablative  case ;  as, 
^rf^tT^lT^fr  '  brought  from  near ;'  FTT^FTTT  '  come  from  afar ;' 
ixTlofiirij^  '  loosed  from  a  little  ;^  ^^^TrRTW  '  obtained  from 
penance  ;'  &c. 

e.  There  are  many  compound  terms,  in  which  the  first 
word  has  the  sense  of  the  genitive  case  ;  as,  TT^nr^:  ^  the 
king's  man ;'  ^rra^  '  a  grove  of  Mango  trees  ;'  ^UT^^aR:  ^  a 
cutter  of  wood,^  i.  e.  a  hatchet ;  ^f^HI^*  '  dulness  of  intellect.^ 
Verbal  derivatives  terminating  in  w  or  ^r^,  and  denoting  the 
agent,  do  not  form  compounds  with  words  in  the  sense  of  the' 
sixth  case,  with  the  exception  of  words  belonging  to  the  class 
^rnnfiTf^ ;  as,  ^^^rrsnK  '  a  worshipper  of  the  gods  ;'  WT^ninT'sni: 
*  a  reverencer  of  the  Brahmans  ;'  wtr  '  a  lord  of  the  earth.'  If 
the  agent  is  not  meant,  composition  may  take  place ;  as, 
^^nf^pRT  '  eating  of  the  sugar-cane  :'  also  if  play  or  profession 


342  COMPOUXD  WORDS. 

be  intended  ;  as,  xrEtwf^cRT  '  who  breaks  the  flowers  (in  sport) ;' 
(jflc^^ch:  *  a  cleaner  of  teeth,'  '  a  dentist.*  The  sign  of  the 
sixth  case  is  retained  in  these  compounds  ;  f^'^^fff:  ^  lord  of 
heaven/  '  Indra ;'  ^t^wTit:  *  lord  of  speech,'  a  name  of  Vri- 
haspati,'  the  preceptor  of  the  gods  ;'  f^^^^Pfft  *  the  servant  of 
heaven,'  a  proper  name. 

/*.  Compounds  in  which  the  first  member  has  the  sense  of 
the  locative  case  are  formed  with  "^ft^iJ  and  other  words ;  as, 
^sr^i^n^:  '  a  gambler,'  *  one  skilled  in  dice  ;'  ^II^MHli^ri:  ^  one 
learned  in  the  S'astras  ;'  cRWoirsfn^  '  one  skilled  in  work,'  '  an 
artisan ;'  ^HIU^^J  '  one  dependent  on,  or  trusting  in,  God ;' 
•^HlriMaiMi  ^  what  is  dried  in  the  sun  ;'  ^ic«5lM^  '  what  is  boiled 
in  a  pot ;'  HI4^«(I(1  '  born  or  produced  in  a  month  ;'  W^^ 
^  done  there,'  '  in  that  place  ;'  Tjtl^^fT  *  done  in  the  forenoon.' 
Terms  of  ridicule  are  formed  in  this  manner ;  as,  rilQ  <*!<*:  '  a 
crow  at  a  holy  pool,'  i.  e.  a  man  out  of  his  place ;  <*MH^^:  ^  a 
frog  in  a  well,'  i.  e.  a  man  ignorant  of  the  world.  In  this 
sense  it  is  also  usual  to  form  compounds  retaining  the  sign  of 
the  case ;  JJ^sip  *  a  hero  in  his  house,' '  a  cot-quean ;'  m^ch^ic^: 
'one  dexterous  in  his  dish,'  'a  gourmand.'  Various  nouns 
ending  with  ^  or  a  consonant,  and  forming  appellatives  or 
proper  names,  retain  the  sign  of  the  seventh  case ;  as,  w%t?T: 
'  who  sports  in  a  clump  of  grass,'  '  an  elephant ;'  ^^^x:  '  who 
goes  in  the  sky,'  '  a  deity ;'  <+iiMi|:  '  who  whispers  in  the  ear,' 
'  a  spy,'  '  an  informer ;'  ^i^^fii:  '  who  sleeps  in  water,'  '  a 
fish  ;'  ^fvf^:  '  the  firm  in  battle,'  '  the  elder  of  the  PanAus :' 
so  7ft,  '  a  cow,'  makes  nf^llR:  '  firm  in  cattle,'  a  proper  name . 
Some  words  take  both  forms,  hPm^IU:  or  HTohfiR:  '  what  has 
strength  in  its  skin,'  *  a  kind  of  deer ;'  TRTf^W  or  ^Cl»{  '  born 
in  a  lake,'  *  a  lotus  ;'  ^^  or  f^f%^^  *  who  resides  in  heaven,' 
*  a  deity.' 

g.  Certain  words  which  imply  the  part  of  any  thing,  when 
compounded  with  the  word  signifying  that  whole  of  which 
it  is  a  part,  are  prefixed  to  it ;  as,  ^^RHT:  *  the  front  of  the 
body ;'   ^SMi:<*m:  '  the  back  of  the  body.'      If  it  is  a  part  of  a 


KARMMADHARAYA  COMPOUNDS.  343 

part  only,  composition  does  not  take  place ;  as,  tr|f  TfiH:  ctm?^ 
'  the  front  of  the  navel  of  a  body/  ^?|f  in  the  neuter  gender, 
but  dropping  the  sign,  is  also  prefixed  ;  as,  -^njpMmr^^  ^  a  half 
of  the  pepper :'  but  not  if  used  in  the  masculine  ;  as,  JETTHTt: 
'  half  a  village.'  Fractional  numbers  may  be  placed  first  or  last ; 
as,  fk^lffril^  or  fi'ril^fHHir  '  half  of  the  alms  ;'  JTHf  and  ^T^ 
governing  the  objective  case,  may  take  either  form  ;  as,  irrff- 
M\ n^ <*:  or  ^ir^chiuiw:  ^  a  man  who  has  obtained  a  livelihood :' 
so  ^^TRWrfHTafi:  or  »iir«ichin^:. 

Karmmadhdraya  Tatpurusha  Compounds. 

276.  Compounds  of  the  Karmmadharaya  division  of  Tat- 
purusha do  not  require  that  the  members  of  which  they 
consist  should  exercise  any  government  the  one  over  the  other ; 
they  are  connected  together  by  implied,  though  not  expressed 
concordance,  or  by  copulatives  understood. 

a.  The  most  numerous  series  of  Karmmadharaya  com- 
pounds is  that  in  which  the  attribute  is  combined  with  the 
object ;  as,  ^ftc5H"TO  '  a  blue  lotus  ;'  ^iW^:  '  a  black  snake  \' 
v^^TUW*  '  a  great  king  ;'  frpRFtr  ^  a  dear  wife  ;'  t^t^;:^: 
*  the  northern  Kurus'  (a  country) ;  ^\{^i\\  '  the  seven  Rishis,^ 
'  the  constellation  of  the  Great  Bear.^ 

b.  Compounds  of  this  class  may  consist  of  attributives 
only ;  as,  ■<+.Bi!l3J^  '  black  and  white  ;'  ^nTRfcTW  '  anointed 
after  being  bathed  ;'  '^^TOTT  *  equally  white  ;'  ^ftTiflUjl  ^  warm 
enough  to  be  eaten  ;^  ^^^T^  '  a  httle  red :'  or  of  substantives 
and  attributives  forming  attributives  to  a  third  term ;  as, 
yn^AIIH  '  black  as  a  cloud ;'  uf^l^H  '  made  as  a  heap  ;'  MPjl^riHri 
'  considered  as  a  Pan&it ;'  PhvitIjih  '  gone  to  death,'  '  de- 
ceased;' &c. 

c.  When  the  sense  of  the  term  is  complete  in  itself,  com- 
bining the  object  and  the  attribute,  the  latter  usually  precedes 
the  former,  as  in  the  instances  "fftcTtrXTFJ,  &c.  When  it  forms 
an  attribute  to  a  third  term,  the  adjective  or  participle  is 
usually  placed  last,  as  in  TTf^T^rif  and   the  hke :   but  there  are 


344  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

many  varieties  in  this  respect.  Words  denoting  '  excellence,' 
or  used  metaphorically  for  that  purpose,  are  placed  after  the 
object ;  as,  '!JxrY?^TTofi:  '  an  excellent  king ;'  TftTrT^ofiT  '  a 
capital  cow ;'  "J^^'^^mr:  or  "g^^ftr^t  ^  a  man-tiger,'  '  a  man- 
lion,'  i.  e.  a  superior  man.  "Q'§  and  other  terms  implying 
'relative  position'  or  'merit'  precede  the  object;  ^§M^m:  *a 
preceding  or  superior  man ;'  WtTT^T^:  '  a  subsequent  or  infe- 
rior man  ;'  Jfawg^:  ^  a  middle  man,^  '  an  impartial  one,'  or 
'  a  middling  man,'  '  one  of  indifferent  character :'  so  '^tt,  '  a 
hero,'  forms  "^hrg^:  ^  a  heroic  man.'  "ijt,  forming  an  attri- 
butive of  time,  is  placed  after  a  participle ;  ^xi't  '  formerly 
seen  ;'  ^JTPjS  '  formerly  been.'  Terms  of  depreciation  require 
the  object  to  be  placed  first ;  as,  ^^l<*i.ilK<^4f^:  '  a  very  bad 
grammarian :'  except  when  compounded  with  VJ^  or  WITcli ; 
as,  XTRTTTf^TT:  '  a  vile  barber ;'  ^^4i|qh^,c^ic5:  '  a  bad  potter.^ 
fsTT,  also  used  in  a  depreciatory  sense,  precedes  the  object; 
as,  foRUiTT  ^  what  sort  of  a  king  is  this,'  ift  rf  iy^?A  THTTt  '  who 
does  not  protect  his  subjects.'  cKTR  ^  young,'  or  '  a  boy/ 
precedes  certain  terms ;  as,  "^hhjjh:  '  a  gentle  boy ;'  fTRjiJ^ 
'  a  tender  girl :'  so  it  does  when  substituted  for  ohHiO  '  a  girl ;' 
as,  "JJTTC^nft  '  a  slave  girl ;'  **<K<sj»M<*l  '  a  young  harlot.'  '^ 
is  placed  before  ^rnr ,  trf^W,  and  ^fcTcT,  to  form  ^^»rt»r  '  an 
aged  or  infirm  youth  ;'  ^cmPc^ri:  '  a  grey-haired  youth  ;'  "g^^- 
f<^:  '  a  wrinkled  young  man.'  On  the  other  hand^  V'J  and 
others  are  always  last ;  as,  Tftv"^:  '  a  milch  cow ;'  l^Hgrfir:  '  a 
young  elephant ;'  ^pHlcfhR:  ^  a  little  fire  ;'  &c. 

d.  In  Tatpurusha  compounds,  of  whatever  class,  certain 
words,  forming  the  second  member  of  the  compound,  undergo 
changes  of  termination ;  T^ ,  that  is,  a  final  %  being  substi- 
tuted for  ^  or  for  '5r'«T,  or  added  to  a  final  ^:  thus  ^f^,  ^a 
friend,'  forms  fVgv^T^:  '  a  friend  of  the  gods ;'  Tlf^:  '  night ;' 
g^W^Ic^:  '  a  holy  night ;'  ^HKfzT,  *  the  thigh/  when  similitude  is 
implied,  ^tto"^  '  a  thigh  like  that  of  a  deer ;'  Uip^,  as  iTt;RU»r: 
'  a  supreme  king ;'  ^"^  '  a  day,'  ^f^^TT^:  '  a  fine  day ;'  or 
^  is  sometimes   substituted,  as   ^"tl^:  '  the  whole  day/  or 


KARMMADHABAYA   COMPOUNDS.  345 

**  lasting  for  the  whole  day :'  -"H^HH  makes  9I^|^h:  '  a  white 
stone  :'  "^^  becomes  "^^  in  such  terms  as  jh^pI^:  '  a  Brahman 
of  Gaur.'  After  "g  and  h^t^,  implying  ^  baseness/  the  change 
is  optional ;  ^?f:  or  ^^m,  fl'^T^^:  or  H^T^^T,  ^  a  low  Brah- 
man ;'  JT^  being  used  ironically.  Tg»T  '  a  dog,'  preceded  by 
an  indecHnable,  takes  z^ ;  as,  ^rfW^  ^TT^:  ^  a  boar  sw  ifter 
than  a  dog ;'  "^ffw^  ^^  ^  service  worse  than  that  of  a  dog :' 
but  not  if  similitude  to  living  beings  is  implied ;  as,  H^uimi 
^a   dog-like   man/  ^a   cynic;'    ^sni^,  'iron/   makes    oSic*>i<4ti 

*  black  iron  /  ^SR^  '  food  /  »?^H^:  '  a  kitchen.^  7^  is  added 
to  ift,  as  xnrm^:  '  an  excellent  ox  /  and  to  ift  compounded 
with  ^,  as  ^r[T^  '  half  a  boat ;'  or  with  numerals,  fw^ 

*  two  boats  collectively/  when  even  combined  with  a  Taddhita 
affix,  as  flT'ir^^m:  *  what  comes  from  two  boats.'  When  ^  or 
^cf  or  a  negative,  however,  are  prefixed  to  these  words,  form- 
ing appellatives,  the  finals  are  unchanged ;  as,  ^wf%:  '  a  good 
friend  /  ^ff^fif :  '  an  excellent  friend  /  'sraf^:  '  not  a  friend,' 
'  an  unfriend  /  or  ^^OT  &c. :  so  ^TT^HT ,  ^rfTOW*^,  -«i<i»t>t^5  &c. 
^^9  being  the  first  member  of  a  Tatpurusha  compound, 
becomes  w^ ;  as,  i^^^  'the  great  deity  S^iva  /  JT^Rm:  'a 
great  king/  &c. 

e.  The  following  are  considered  by  some  as  irregular  com- 
pounds of  the  Karmmadharaya  class  :  "^^TR^  '  high  and  low  / 
fn^H-^  '  picked  out  and  heaped  up  /  ynr<*^H  '  having  nothing,' 
'  poor  /  ^sr^rfV^Txr  '  fearless  /  fg^wrr^  '  the  mind  alone  /  ^ST^hr- 
f^TfTT  ^  drinking  after  eating.'  Derivatives  of  "^  '  to  do,'  com- 
bined with  '^  '  I  /  as,  '^^r:,  ^^ff:,  '  self-sufficiency,' 
'  egotism  /  also  SH^'Mflohl,  W^J^^^T,  '  contending  to  be  first^ 
or  *  foremost.'  Compounds  with  ^rf^  ^  come  /  as,  ijf^^Tlin 
'  come  and  w  elcome  /  ^f^^Tf%f»T^  ^  come  and  trade  /  ^^ff- 
^Tftfrfw^fiT  *  go  and  leave  trade :'  also  with  ^rff ,  *  abandon,'  in 
particular  acceptations ;  as,  wf^^W*  ^  ^^^  ^^^  cries.  Leave 
the  clump  of  grass.'  These  and  others  of  a  like  anomalous 
character  very  rarely  occur. 


Yy 


346  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

Dvngu  Tatpurusha  Compounds  with  Numerals. 

277.  Compounds  are  formed  with  numerals  to  signify 
attributes  of  weight,  measure,  or  number ;  as,  M^ohMic4  ^  mea- 
sured by  five  cups  ; ^  M^ctiqio^:  ^Cl^l^i:  '  butter  offered  at 
sacrifice  to  the  extent  of  five  cups ;'  ^ST^n  ^^^  ^  gold  of  the 
value  of  eight  oxen  ;'  STW*'  ^  of  the  measure  of  two  inches.' 

a.  Aggregates  of  any  given  number  of  things  are  formed  in 
the  same  manner,  when  the  final  takes  either  the  neuter 
gender  or  the  feminine,  with  the  termination  ^;  as,  fw^^ 
^  three  worlds ;'  f^ciift^  the  same  ;  M"5^t|  ^  the  four  ages  ;' 
M=diw|i4)  '  a  work  in  five  chapters ;'  f^3^  or  fw^*^  ^  a  col- 
lection of  three  bedsteads.' 

b.  The  changes  to  which  finals  are  subjected,  as  enumerated 
above,  are  of  course  applicable  here ;  as,  f^THT  '  three  kings 
collectively ;'  v^wvi  '  five  cows  ;'  f^f;wm  ^  three  friends  ;'  XT^^TT^ 
*  a  term  of  three  nights  ;'  ^■jbij'^  ^  a  meeting  of  four  roads  ;^ 
'^gHR  ^  an  assemblage  of  eight  boats.' 

c.  These  same  compounds  may  be  used  as  possessive  attri- 
butives ;  as,  "fe^TR  ^  who  or  what  has  three  boats  ;'  xf^rj^  ^  who 
or  what  has  three  cows  ''  flTT^  ^  what  lasts  for  two  nights.' 

d.  The  combinations  of  cardinal  numbers  to  form  multiples 
are  considered  to  be  compound  Tatpurusha  terms  ;  as,  ^cfiT^^r, 
TT^Rf^fff,  &c. 

Tatpurusha  Compounds  with  Particles  and  Prepositions. 

278.  Besides  the  two  subdivisions  usually  specified,  the 
class  of  Tatpurusha  compounds  comprises  a  number  of  words 
formed  with  nominal  or  verbal  derivatives,  preceded  by  parti- 
cles and  prepositions,  which  may  be  conveniently  separated 
from  those  compounds  which  are  formed  with  nouns  alone. 

a.  Compound  attributives  and  appellatives  are  formed  with 
negatives  prefixed  to  nouns ;  as,  ^r^'RTTir:  or  HSUtMHi:  '  a  man 
not  a  Brahman  ;'  "^^^^^x  ^  an  animal  not  a  horse :'  ^sr^W  '  who 
or  what  is  not ;'  ^smw  *  untrue,'  Hl^f4l  '  who  are  not  untrue,' 


TATPURUSHA   COMPOUNDS  WITH   PARTICLES,  &C.        347 

'  the  Aswini  Kumaras :'  rp^:  ^  what  has  not  space/  '  a  finger 
nail  :*  ^m:  or  "JTT:  *  what  does  not  go/  *  a  mountain  or  '  tree ;' 
tT-^STsfi  ^  what  does  not  depart/  tTToR:  *  sky  :*  ^T^ '  what  does  not 
decay  /  'sn^  ^  a  letter  of  the  alphabet  /  HHjcJ  ^  a  constella- 
tion :'  TTj^ofi  '  not  male/  '  neuter :'  and  in  short,  most  words 
to  which  a  negative  is  prefixed,  retaining  either  their  literal, 
or  assuming  some  conventional,  meaning. 

b.  The  combination  of  the  indeclinable  words  comprehended 
under  the  term  Gati  with  the  verbal  derivatives  of  the  verbs 
^ra  or  H  '  to  be,^  or  ^  ^  to  do,'  is  considered  to  form  a  class  of 
Tatpurusha  compounds ;  as,  ^0«hl.iLi  '  promising,'  ^i3*W  *  hav- 
ing promised,^  "gx^^TrT  ^  promised/  &c. ;  of  which  examples  have 
already  been  given  (see  p.  loo).  To  which  may  be  added  the 
following  :  W^^TT  *  having  set  /  ^rx3[iTm  '  having  met  /  ^I^giVsr 
^  having  spoken  to  /  yi:i^K^  '  having  placed  before  /  flTJ^^nr 
'  having  disappeared  /  ^iHjiT^TT  *  having  made  present'  or 
^  visible/  Analogous  compounds  are  formed  with  the  deriva- 
tives of  oR  and  H,  with  nouns  retaining  the  inflections  of  case; 
as,  c5^^i<*KI  *  having  made  salt ;'  irrftr^  or  "^ii^rT  ^  having 
made  up  the  mind/  '  having  determined  /  Tcf^T^  or  "^r^ 
^  having  placed  on  the  breast ;'  ^W^  or  trTisft<*W  '  having 
placed  in  the  hand,^  i.  e.  having  married  or  promised  to  marry. 

c.  The  following  are  Tatpurusha  compounds  with  preposi- 
tions :  wfTRT^T  *  surpassing  the  king  ;'  ^sn??^  '  more  than  a 
day  ;*  -^PhhIo^  ^  exceeding  the  necklace  (in  beauty)  /  WT5fiVfe5 
'  overcome  by  the  cry  of  the  Koil  /  f5T^:5CT^rr%  ^  gone  from 
Kausambi  /  "qzqxqrrrr  '  weary  of  study  /  UMi<iA  '  over  whom 
the  teacher  has  authority.'  These  are  attributives  ;  as,  SHPrtUift 
T^  *  the  minister  more  powerful  than  the  king  /  ^T^^IFtf^ficJ 
inrt  ^  the  mind  overpowered  by  the  KoiTs  song  ','  &c. 

279.  Tatpurusha  compounds,  when  attributives,  take  the 
gender  of  the  substantives  with  which  they  agree  ;  but  when 
they  form  appellatives,  adopt  for  the  most  part  the  gender  of 
the  concluding  member  of  the  compound,  in  which  respect 
Dwandwa  compounds  agree  with  them.    There  are,  however,  a 

Y  y  2 


348  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

few  exceptions  :  thus,  in  the  latter  class,  ^STBJ  *  a  horse/  and  «r2^T 
*a  mare/  form  SNHJI«li^;  and  'sn^  *a  day/  and  zjf^^  night/ 
^sr^kr^t.  uf^  with  numerals  in  the  sense  of  '  aggregation' 
becomes  neuter,  as  ffUcf  '  a  term  of  two  nights  /  and  ^STf  •=(^ 
masculine,  as  gr^:  ^  a  period  of  two  days  i'  so  ^^,  substituted 
for  SH^H  is  masculine,  as  HXflT^:  '  midday  /  when  joined  with 
an  adjective,  it  may  be  neuter,  as  "JWT^  '  a  lucky  day.' 

a.  Nouns  of  aggregation  are  formed  with  numerals  ;  the 
gender  is  either  neuter  or  feminine,  as  already  noticed.  xrfTZfrT, 
preceded  by  a  preposition  to  form  an  appellative,  is  neuter ; 
as,  fw^  *  a  cross-road,'  '  a  by-way.' 

b.  TRT,  preceded  by  a  word  meaning  '  king,'  except  TJ^TT , 
and  one  not  meaning  '  man/  implying  ^  an  assembly,'  is 
neuter;  as,  ^t^W  'an  assemblage  of  princes;'  ^f^f^^  ^a 
company  of  women :'  but  TT^nwr,  T'g'ontWT.  When  it  signi- 
fies the  place  of  assembly,  it  remains  feminine  ;  as,  ^"s^HT 
'  the  hall  of  Indra  ;'  V#^>n  '  a  hall  of  justice.' 

c.  ^TfT  '  an  army,'  ^nc5T  *  a  hall,'  "S^rm  '  shade/  ^  *  wine/ 
frf^  '  night,'  when  members  of  a  Tatpurusha  compound, 
retain  the  feminine,  or  adopt  the  neuter  gender  ;  as,  ^lljvfl  -tf 
'  an  army  of  heroes  ;'  Tft^fTT^JT  -75  '  a  cow-house  ;'  ^^^^  -'^ 

*  the  shade  of  a  tree  /  ^^^trtt  -t  ^  barley  wine/  i.  e.  beer. 

SECTION  III. 

Bahuvrihi  Compounds, 

280.  Two  or  more  words,  or  two  or  more  compound  terms, 
may  be  put  together  to  form  the  attribute  or  epithet  of  an 
object.  There  is  no  limit  to  the  component  members  of  such 
a  compound,  and  the  final  may  be  a  noun  of  any  gender ;  but 
it  loses  its  own  distinctive  mark,  as  it  takes,  hke  all  attribu- 
tives, the  gender  of  the  word  to  which  it  is  related  :   thus  "3^, 

*  water,'  makes  TTirftcRt  »TTO:  '  a  village  at  which  the  water  has 
come ;'  WTsrl^T  ^RcJ^  '  a  pitcher  which  has  been  filled ;' 
MI*ri<"5R  ^Rt^  *  a  pool  with  water  in  it.'     ^TT'siT,  *  a  wife/  may 


BAHUVRIHI   COMPOUNDS.  349 

become  masculine  ;  as,  "C^^r^Tnft  H ^m:  '  a  man  who  has  a 
handsome  wife :'  Tpt  '  a  cow,'  masculine  or  neuter ;  as,  f^^pr: 
"5^:  a  man  '  who  has  a  brindled  cow  ;'  f^efW^  i^  a  field  *  in 
which  such  a  cow  is  feeding/  Compounds  of  this  class  may 
be  formed  with  particles  ;  as,  ^T^:  'srjWT  '  a  childless  (man  or 
woman)  ;'  TTxrtfV  Y^:  a  tree  ^  of  which  the  leaves  are  fallen  ;' 
^rf^cT^U  ^:  a  cow  '  in  whom  there  is  milk :'  also  with  nume- 
rals ;  as,  "^xrf^  '  near  to  twenty,'  &c.  Nouns  implying 
'  intermediate  space'  are  also  compounds  of  this  class,  the 
substantive  f^'5^,  '  quarter,'  being  either  expressed  or  under- 
stood ;  as,  ^fw^ijr^  ^  the  south-east,'  Mpja^TlriU  *  the  north-west.' 

«.  In  general  the  order  of  the  words  of  which  a  Bahuvrihi 
compound  consists  places  the  term  indicating  the  principal 
subject  of  attribution,  and  which  will  be  the  substantive,  last ; 
as  in  the  preceding  instances.  When  the  principal  term 
retains  the  sign  of  the  case,  it  may  be  put  first ;  as,  4<!^chlc^: 
^  who  is  black  in  the  throat,'  S'iva  :  otherwise,  cKr?5oR!^:.  Pro- 
nominals  and  numerals  are  usually  put  first ;  as,  ^§"%(T  ^  who 
is  white  all  over ;'  f^W^  *  what  is  white  in  two  places :'  when 
they  are  combined,  the  numeral  precedes  ;  as,  spi  '  having 
other  two.'  Participles  are  usually  put  first ;  as,  ^MfT^Tjg  '  one 
by  whom  what  was  to  be  done  has  been  done ;'  oRJoR^  ^  one 
who  has  made  the  mat ;'  trhft^  '  by  whom  water  has  been 
drunk :'  but  not  always,  when  connected  with  words  implying 
*  species'  or  '  time,'  or  the  term  "^^ ;  as,  ^TT^^^rny  ^  by  whom 
venison  has  been  eaten  ;'  iTRnrrrT  *  produced  in  a  month ;' 
?r^»rr?T  *  produced  easily.'  In  the  compound  signifying  ^  one 
(a  Brahman)  by  whom  a  domestic  fire  is  maintained,'  the  par- 
ticiple takes  either  place  ;  as,  ^iH^hiOh:  or  ^spi^rrff  Tt:.  Forms 
implying  ^  using  a  weapon'  place  the  participle  last ;  as, 
sh^^h:  '(a  soldier)  lifting  up  a  sword  (to  strike):'  but 
fM'Jrilftrt  '  one  who  has  his  sword  sheathed.' 

b.  As  an  epithet  is  commonly  formed  by  a  feminine  sub- 
stantive, preceded  by  its  adjective,  and  the  former  being 
changed  according  to  the  gender  of  the  new  term  to  which 


350  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

it  is  attached,  it  becomes  a  question  what  is  to  be  done  with 
the  latter :  thus,  for  instance,  f%wr  'ft:  being  converted  to  an 
epithet,  in  becomes  tj,  and  may  be  mascuHne,  it:,  as  the 
epithet  of  a  man  having  cattle.  In  'that  case  is  f^Wl  to 
remain  feminine  ?  So  ^xj"^7ft  HfSt  becoming  an  attribute  of  a 
man  '  having'  a  handsome  wife,  and  HT^  accordingly  becom- 
ing vrR§:,  what  is  to  be  done  with  "^qTcft?  In  general,  adjec- 
tives so  circumstanced  are  reduced  to  their  crude  forms,  and 
in  the  examples  given  the  compounds  are  f%^:,  "5^^^^^T^:. 
There  are,  however,  exceptions  to  this  rule. 

I.  When  a  compound  epithet,  of  which  the  final  was 
originally  feminine,  is  preceded  by  more  than  one  adjective, 
all  except  that  preceding  the  final  retain  the  feminine  termi- 
nation ;  as,  r<ic4Mig:  or  ^TOftf^^nj:  '  one  who  has  an  old 
brindled  cow.'  According  to  some  authorities,  both  should  be 
feminine,  as  fg^WTcft^: ;   but  this  appears  questionable. 

3.  When  the  preceding  term  is  necessarily  feminine,  it 
retains  its  termination ;  as,  JI^MHI^:  *  he  who  has  the  river- 
goddess  Ganga  to  wife :'  also  if  it  ends  in  "gj  feminine  ;  as, 
TrV^HI^:  '  one  who  has  a  wife  of  elegant  shape^  (handsome 
thighed) :  also  if  the  first  term  have  no  necessary  relation  to 
the  second ;  as,  cg-^cn^l'JniT'f  *  having  for  its  head  an  illustrious 
woman^  (a  family) ;  ^luiHIHi:  *  having  a  woman  for  witness  or 
authority'  (a  suit,  &c.)  Feminine  nouns  having  a  penultimate 
cR  preserve  their  final ;  as,  xrrfTSfiPTR^:  '  one  who  has  a  wife 
that  can  cook.^  ^,  used  either  as  an  attribute  or  as  a  name, 
retains  a  feminine  termination ;  as,  ^^WR§:  '  one  who  has  a 
wife  given,'  or  '  whose  name  is  Datta.^  Ordinal  numbers  do 
the  same ;  as,  xr^HHTT^:  ^  he  who  has  a  fifth  wife :'  so  do 
nouns  ending  in  ^  implying  part  of  the  body ;  as,  ^^i^fWr^: 
'  who  has  a  wufe  with  fine  hair  :*  so  do  nouns  implying  caste ; 
as,  ^T^THnt:  WRTOtHF^:  '  one  who  has  a  wife  of  the  S'udra  or 
the  Brahman  caste.' 

c.  The  final  members  of  Bahuvrihi  compounds  occasionally 
undergo  some  modification. 


BAHUVRIHI  COMPOUNDS.  351 

1.  The  most  common  is  the  substitution  of  ^  for  the  final 
vowel,  or  in  some  cases  for  the  penultimate  vowel  and  final 
consonant  of  the  last  member  of  a  compound  epithet ;  as, 
W^ff^  '  a  thigh,'  ^"M^"^"^  ^  long-thighed ;'  (but  not  if  used  figu- 
ratively, as  ^^"5fifTZ|  ^T^  ^  a  cart  with  long  axle  ;')  '^^  '  the 
eye/  M^iOoRT^  '  lotus-eyed ;'  ^sr^fc55  *  a  finger,'  when  applied 
to  any  thing  of  wood,  iT^i^-"?5  ^T^  *  a  rake  ;'  but  TT^T^fc^fw: 
^  the  hand.'  rrrfW  *  the  navel,'  and  other  words,  optionally 
change  ^  to  w ;  as,  "^Tfj^T  or  ^^SrilP*?  *  having  a  woolly  or 
hairy  navel ;'  so  ^fc5  '  a  furrow,'  ^"^"ftr  '  the  thigh,^  or,  accord- 
ing to  some,  "^rf^  '  utility,'  optionally  change  the  final  after  a 
negative,  ^  '  bad,'  or  ^  '  good  ;'  as,  ^r^"?5  or  ^r^fn  '  unfur- 
rowed,'  5'tc5  or  nffc?,  &c.  Numerals  preceded  by  particles 
or  by  other  numerals,  to  signify  ^  approximation,'  take  ^  for 
their  finals  ;  yiir^^R:  those  which  are  '  near  ten,'  i.  e.  nine  or 
eleven  ;  %^:  ^  two  or  three  ;'  ^^^\\  *  five  or  six  ;'  f^fr^Tt 
'  twice  twenty.'  It  is  added  to  "^^j  preceded  by  certain  parti- 
cles ;  ^:n=rgT.  ^  what  is  not  four  ;'  T^r^^  *  what  is  about  four.'  %"ff, 
^  a  leader,^  takes  ^  when  preceded  by  the  name  of  a  constel- 
lation ;  as,  ^RJiiH^T  *  what  has  Mriga  for  a  leader.'  After  a 
numeral,  Jj^rf  substitutes  ^  for  its  final  syllable ;   fi'^J,  fd^? 

*  two-headed,  three-headed :'  so  does  c5^Jr?r  after  w?jT^  and 
^f^ ;  as,  ^Tfl^Vr  '  hairy  internally ;'  ^%^rtH  '  hairy  exter- 
nally.' The  following  are  considered  as  irregularly  taking  "^ ; 
Ulr!^  '  morning,'  ^TTTIT  '  having  a  good  morning  ;'  f^^TT  ^  a  day ;' 
^^^  '  having  a  good  day ;'  ig^  '  morrow,'  w^  '  having  a  good 
morrow  ;'  '^^  '  the  belly,^  "^ft^  'green-bellied,'  as  ^1t^^:  ^Tcr: 

*  the  green-bellied  parrot ;'  ^f^ '  an  angle,'  ^"jt^  ^quadrangular.' 

2.  In  a  few  instances  a  final  »!r  is  changed  to  another  vowel, 
or  substitutes  ^"^r  or  ^HT;  thus  t^^,  ^  smell,'  makes  with  TrT, 
TjfiT,  ^,  and  ^W,  <Jrfr«4|  '  emitting  smell,'  ^nf^  and  ^Tif^Jlf^ 
^  fragrant,'  ^frfTif^  '  fetid :'  also  in  compounds  implying  *  a 
little  ;'  as,  ^ri^r"^  *  smelling  slightly  of  Ghee :'  and  intending 
simihtude  ;  as,  xjirnf^  '  fragrant  as  a  lotus :'  but  not  if  the 
odour  is  separated  from  the  object ;  as,  wpc^  ^T^f^URt:  '  a  shop 


COMPOUND  WORDS. 


of  fragrant  things,'  ^  a  perfumer's.'  ^^^^  *  a  wound/  in  one 
combination  takes  ^!rr[^;  as^  <^f^|^^T  ^l  '  a  deer  wounded  by 
a  hunter :'  so  does  W^,  *  a  tooth'  or  '  food/  after  ^,  ^trT,  TIW, 
or  ^ ;  as,  ^§W»T^  ^  having  good  teeth  /  ^TITtRT'JT  '  having 
green  teeth  /  ij'iir»i+vr"?T  ^  eating  grass  ;'  ^fh=nT^^  ^  eating  the 
Soma  plant :'  but  not  after  any  other  term ;  as,  MPriri^**? 
'  toothless.'     v^  takes  w^  in  composition  ;    as,   ohV-miim^rr 

*  who  performs  his  duty  well.'  THTT  '  offspring/  and  ^VT 
'  understanding/  take  ^^  when  compounded  with  a  negative 
or  with  5^  or  ^;  as,  WIR^  ^without  progeny  /  ^m*rr:  5^: 
'  a  childless  man/  'snnnt  ^  '  a  childless  woman :'  so  gm^^ 
^THHT  ^  having  bad  or  good  children  /  ^mvnr  *  stupid/  ^^viTf 

*  dull/  ^V^  ^  intelligent.' 

3.  In  various  instances  the  final  term  of  a  Bahuvrihi  com- 
pound substitutes  a  different  form,  and  especially  when  the 
word  signifies  a  part  of  the  body :  thus  fTH  is  put  for  ^rftrcRT ; 
as,  "^^^  '  high-nosed/  inim  ^  prominent-nosed.'  With  ^r:  and 
'  ^t  the  substitute  may  also  be  ff^ ;  as,  ^n?IRr:  or  ^^fCilii:,  ^T?IjRi: 
or  ^t?iit:  "J^t  '  an  ass-nosed  or  hoof-nosed  man.'  After  ^^ 
the  primitive  is  unchanged ;  as,  ^c5^Tftr^  '  large -nosed.'  After 
f^  the  syllables  ^  jj,  and  ^  may  be  substituted ;  as,  f^w, 
f%Tr>  "f^ ;  also  P^fHfl  *  noseless.'  Xfj^  is  substituted  for  ttt^ 
when  '  resemblance'  is  implied  ;  as,  ^^THTT^  *  having  a  foot  like 
a  tiger  :'  but  not  after  the  class  f^lf^  ;  as,  ^f^cRT^  '  elephant- 
footed.'  After  numerals  and  ^  the  substitute  is  used  ;  as, 
fW^^,  f^T^j  '  biped,  triped/  &c. ;  ^T^  *  well-footed.'  -q^  is 
used  in  the  feminine  after  'srnj  '  a  jar,'  jr^  *  one/  firfT^  *  with- 
out,' and  other  words;  as,  ^^f^TT^,  ^cjTcr^,  fq^a^,  *  (a  woman) 
having  a  foot  like  a  water-jar,^  &c.  If  masculine,  the  form  is 
as  in  ^JiH^IT^,  'jar-footed'  (a  man).  ^,  making  in  inflection 
;^,  is  substituted  for  i^  *  a  tooth,'  preceded  by  iff;  as,  ig^r^ 
^  having  good  teeth :'  by  a  numeral  when  age  is  imphed  ;  as, 
f^r^  '  having  two  teeth  /  f^^  ^TH:  '  a  child  old  enough  to 
have  two  teeth :'  but  %^7jft  ^^  '  an  elephant  with  two  teeth.^ 
The  feminine  is  formed  with  ^ ;  as,  fi^rft  WTHT  '  a  two-toothed 


BAHUVRIHI  COMPOUNDS.  553 

female  infant.'  In  feminine  appellatives  the  same  form  is 
used ;  as,  ^HT^  a  proper  name :  but  ^Ht^'ril  ^  '  a  woman 
with  even  teeth.'  ^  is  substituted  after  certain  other  words, 
as,  ^,  "^nj?  and  t(^,  and  others  ;  as,  ^>J^  '  white-toothed  ;' 
^cti^Hijt^ri  '  having  teeth  as  sharp  as  the  tip  of  Kusa  grass  ;' 
j]^*{(^f|^  *  ass- toothed,'  &c. :  also  optionally  after  ^ttr  and  4iCl<* ; 
as,  ^RT^rl[^  or  ^ttr^  'black-toothed  ;'  ^id^fi^  or  ^d^B^  ' hav- 
ing discoloured  teeth.'  ^  is  substituted  for  »rrj,  ^  the  knee/ 
after  it,  ^m ,  and  optionally  after  ^ ;  as,  IT^  '  prominent- 
kneed,'  #?  '  compact-kneed,'  if|^  or  "^ff^TT^  ^  high-kneed.' 

4.  In  words  not  signifying  parts  of  the  body  we  have  TilPH  put 
optionally  for  WPn '  a  wife ;'  as,  ^^TfiPn:  or  ^^frnrnn  '  a  man  who 
has  a  young  wife  :'  "35^  for  ^fi>|TT  '  an  udder ;'  as,  "qftWt '  (a  cow) 
having  a  large  udder :'  \n^  for  vg-^  '  a  bow ;'  as,  ^TT#>F^ 
'  having  a  bow  of  horn :'  optionally  if  the  compound  is  a 
proper  name ;  as,  i^friMHI  or  "^TfTV^:  the  name  of  a  prince,  '  he 
who  has  a  hundred  bows.'  ofi^,  ^  a  hump'  or  *  a  peak,'  drops 
its  final  when  denoting  age ;  as,  ^nfnr=fi^  '  a  young  ox,'  '  one 
whose  hump  has  not  grown  :'  or  when  signifying  a  mountain  ; 
%**^<  ^  ^  three-peaked  mountain.'  ^RT^,  ^  the  palate,'  drops 
its  final  after  gi^  or  f^,  and  optionally  after  "^ ;  as,  TFliT^  or 
f^-oRT^  ^  without  the  hard  palate  '/  i4i5«*l*<  or  "Mi5chij«^ '  having 
a  complete  palate.'  ^  is  substituted  for  ^^,  '  the  heart,' 
after  ^  and  ^ ;  as,  ;ff^  ^  kind-hearted,'  i.  e.  a  friend ;  Ff  ^ 
'  bad-hearted,'  i.  e.  a  foe :  in  a  literal  sense  the  compounds 
would  be  ^f^,  5t^- 

5.  cR,  technically  termed  cRT^,  is  added  to  many  Bahuvnhi 
compounds  ;  as,  to  "37:^  *  the  breast,'  cUfTlC^  ^  broad-chested  f 
to  ^^rPl^  '  ghee,'  finnrf^^  '  fond  of  ghee :'  to  ^r^,  '  object,' 
after  a  negative,  ^TT^  '  useless,'  and  optionally  after  a  prepo- 
sition, ^nrrt  or  ^umi'^**;  to  ^r^,  ^fame,'  optionally,  as  H^N^f^ 
or  *<^l^^(l<<»  '  very  famous.'  It  is  substituted  for  the  finals  in 
^iT  to  form  feminine  attributives ;  as,  from  t^fen  *  an  ascetic 
bearing  a  stafi^,'  *  a  Dandi,'  come  clg^^Qijohl  "^UV^  *  a  city  haWng 
many  Dan^s  5'   ^gmpH*!  ^HT  ^  an  assembly  of  many  eloquent 

z  z 


354  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

persons.'  If  masculine,  "SR  may  be  optionally  substituted  for 
the  final  nasal ;  as,  «|g(^4|i1  or  «|gr^fe<*i  Tjjm  '  a  village  with 
many  DaA&is.'  When  added  to  feminine  nouns  in  ^rr,  the 
final  is  optionally  short ;  as,  JTT'?5T  *  a  garland,'  <4gHMIc(i  or 
^§Hlc4«h  '  having  many  garlands.'  •Ttfl'  and  "rP^  do  not  take 
eR  when  used  anatomically ;  as,  ^^r^TTfet  "SFRt  *  the  many- 
vesselled  body ;'  oi^rin^t  l(hn  '  the  many-fibred  neck :'  but 
they  may  add  it  in  other  senses ;'  as,  "cijSHI^flh:  H'h:  '  a  clump 
with  many  pipes'  or  '  reeds ;'  WglTf^t  ^hjrr  *  a  many-stringed 
lute.'  cR  is  added  to  >rrff  in  a  depreciatory  sense ;  as,  ^^tHT^: 
'  one  who  has  a  foolish  brother :'  otherwise  Il^nRWT^  '  having 
an  excellent  brother.' 

d.  TR^  *  with,'  forming  the  first  member  of  a  compound,  is 
commonly  changed  to  ^ ;  as,  ^rgW '  having  a  son,' '  being  with 
a  son  ;'  ^ch4^o|i '  having  an  office  or  object,  occupied,'  '  transi- 
tive j'  ^c5)Hch  '  being  with  hair,'  *  hairy.'  When  the  compound 
is  connected  with  a  term  of  benediction,  ^  is  retained ;  as, 
^rftcT  t1%  W5PT^  '  health  to  the  king,  along  with  his  son  :'  but 
not  before  the  words  ift  '  a  cow,'  ^75  ^  a  plough,'  or  ^i^  ^  a  calf;' 
as,  ^TT%  ^^c4N,  ^cirHI^.  i7^  usually  substitutes  iT^  in  a 
similar  situation  in  this  as  well  as  in  other  kinds  of  compounds ; 
as,  ?TfT7JT«T  *  great- souled,'  '  magnanimous  ;'  w^ToFR  '  great- 
bodied  ;'  H^Hc»5  *  very  strong :'  but  »T^  is  unchanged  before 
words  signifying  '  become  grown'  or  '  made  ;'  as,  h^^h  *  become 
large'  or  '  great.' 

€,  Words  implying  *  mutual  striking,'  when  repeated,  pro- 
long the  final  of  the  first  member,  and  substitute  ^  for  that  of 
the  last;  as,  ^^n^Q^f  'pulling  hair,'  ^Hilr^flli  *  cudgelling,' 
H^^Pg  *  boxing.'  Although  these  words  are  used  adverbially, 
without  a  substantive,  they  are  Bahuvrihi  compounds,  and 
regarded  as  epithets  of  ^,  *  fighting,'  understood. 

SECTION  IV. 

Avyayi-bhdvO'-^Indeclinable  Compounds, 
281.  Indeclinable  words  are  formed  by  combining  a  noun 


INDECLINABLE  COMPOUNDS.  355 

with  a  preposition  or  particle,  when  the  former  is  put  in 
the  accusative  case  neuter.  These  compounds  being  in  fact 
compound  adverbs,  and  Hke  all  adverbial  terms,  when  not 
otherwise  inflected,  taking  the  sign  of  the  invariable  neuter 
accusative. 

«.  The  following  are  examples  of  indeclinable  compounds 
formed  with  prepositions  and  particles,  which,  it  will  be 
observed,  retain  their  own  sense,  and  exercise  the  same  effect 
upon  the  purport  of  the  noun  which  they  would  do  if  uncom- 
pounded.  The  sense  of  each  term  is  complete  in  itself,  but, 
agreeably  to  its  adverbial  character,  requires  a  verb,  either 
present  or  understood,  to  connect  it  with  a  substantive. 

I.  Prepositions. 

^fw  *  beyond  :'  ^^friJIg* '  beyond  the  Ganges,*  ■^PriJiff  Ijrm  *  the 
village  (that  is)  beyond  the  Ganges ;'  ^srfirf^if  *  afler  the 
cold  weather,'  ^rffrf^iTRPT^[ffT  ^RFcT;  '  spring  comes  afler  the 
cold  weather;'  ^HfrirHJ  'after  sleep,'  ^rriPH^gnNarri  ^^: 
'  the  man  gets  up  after  sleep.'  These  examples  will  suffi- 
ciently explain  the  relation  in  which  this  sort  of  adverbial 
compound  stands  to  the  other  members  of  a  sentence. 

^rfv  '  upon,'  *  near  to :'  wfv^fic  '  upon  Hari  or  Vishnu  ;'  VHUifj*! 
'  near  to  or  upon  the  fire.' 

^  '  afler,'  ^  according  to,'  '  near  to :'  ^^le^P^ttii  *  afler  VishAu' 
(following  or  worshipping) ;  ^H«J-*H  '  according  to  order  ;' 
'il»j54(a  ^  according  to  seniority ;'  ^T^^  '  near  to  the  wood  ;' 
'ilfjil^'  ^  near  to  or  upon  the  Ganges.' 

^nr  '  off,'  ^  from ;'  as,  ^rqf^  '  in  the  off-point,'  i.  e.  in  the 
intermediate  point ;  ^qP^Ujj  '  from  VishAu,'  '  withdrawn 
from,'  *  hostile  to.' 

ysn,  limitative  ;  as,  ^ngf^  *  until  final  liberation  ;'  SHI^H^*  *  unto 
the  sea  ;'  ^TTTTc?  '  to  the  boys,'  as,  SHHIe4*  '^PcNP^hA^rfw  ^ faith 
in  Hari  extends  even  to  the  children.'  The  termination  of 
the  fiflh  case  may  be  also  used  with  this  preposition ;  as, 

2  Z  2 


356  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

TXI  '  near  to  :*  yM<JBin  ^  near  to  KrishAa ;'  ^Mi|i4  *  near  to  the 

village/ 
f»T^  *  out  of/  *  exempt  from :'  fpf^  *  lonely,'  *  void  of  men  ;^ 

fVf^ft|cR  '  free  from  flies/ 
xtIt  '  about'  or  '  against :'  Trftrfrog  *  about  or  against  VishAu/ 

It  follows  numerals  and  the  words  ^r^  '  dice/  ^^TcyToRT  ^  a 

man  (at   draughts,  &c.)/    or  a  numeral,  when    signifying 

*  loss  at  play  ;'  as,  ^J^uqft:  ^  losing  one  /  ^reRfc  '  having  the 
dice  against  one  ;'  ^c^JTofiFTft: '  losing  a  man/ 

nfrT  '  to^  or  ^  towards  :'  UKJ  0  H  "^ToS^t  ^TTrfnT  '  the  grasshoppers 
go  towards  the  fire/  It  also  implies  *  severalty^  or  *  suc- 
cession /  as,  irm^  '  according  to  each  several  object  or 
signification  -'  TrffHTT  '  birth  after  birth/ 

^  is  usually  substituted  for  ^,  signifying  ^  similarity^  or 
'  sameness/  as  ^ft:  ^  like  Hari  ;^  also  '  association/  imply- 
ing ^  finality/  as  ^JumPw  '  he  eats  with  the  grass/  i.  e.  even 
to  the  grass  ;    also  *  possession/  as  a  property,   as   ^^^4 

*  having,  or  rich  in,  fields/ 

2.  Particles. 

?[fw,  implying  *  so,'  '  such,'  and  the  like ;  as,  ^fir^ft  ^  such  is 
(the  word)  Hari.' 

5^  *  bad,'  and  ^  ^  good  ;'  as,  ^^^A  '  bad  with  the  Yavanas  ;* 
^jiT^  *  well  or  prosperous  with  the  Madras/ 

ipirr,  '  according  to  ;'  as,  ^l^i^rpFK  '  according  to  power  or  abi- 
lity /  but  not  when  it  signifies  '  analogy  ;'  as,  inn  ^iT^^nTT"^ 
^  such  as  Hari  is,  such  is  Hara.' 

m^  ^  as  many  as ;'  as,  trr^  g<l^iiir>^  ^(H*^^^  '  as  far  as 
there  may  be  food  (for  them),  invite  the  Brahmans.' 

f^^  and  ^nnrr  ^  near  ;'  as,  f^T^RTTTTJ^  '  near  to  Lanka ;'  ^frnrrgt 

*  near  the  city.' 

b.  The  derivatives  of  ^n?r  *  to  go,'  implying  ^  direction,' 
optionally  form  indeclinables  ;  as,  mij>4H  or  iUHHIrt^  *  east  from 
the  wood  /  so  does  ^f^  *  out  of,'  '  without  /  as,  ^rf^TH  or 
^f^TTTf^  '  out  of  the  village,' 


INDECLINABLE  COMPOUNDS.  357 

c.  Indeclinable  compounds  may  be  formed  with  numerals, 
except  ijofi  '  one^'  referring  to  families  or  classes ;  as,  rg'^jPn 
Pc^C^Ph  *  bom  in  or  belonging  to  a  family  in  which  there  have 
been  two  or  three  Munis  :'  so  f^^rf  cq  i  oh4^ii.i  ^  the  grammar  of 
which  the  three  Munis  (Panini,  Patanjali,  Katyayana)  are 
the  authors.'  Names  of  rivers  are  also  combined  with  nume- 
rals to  indicate  the  place  of  junction  ;  as,  f^TT^  ^  at  the  meeting 
of  the  two  Ganges  \*  f^^TJ^f  '  at  that  of  the  three  Yamunas.' 
They  are  also  combined  with  other  words  in  a  like  accepta- 
tion ;  as,  4»^rlJ|^'  '  at  the  place  where  the  Ganges  is  furious  ;' 
cfrf^WTT^  ^  where  the  Ganges  is  red;'  as,  ^flMJI^-  m^lill^fl 
*  Benares  (stands)  where  the  Ganges  is  rapid.' 

d.  Inr  this,  as  in  preceding  forms  of  composition,  the  finals 
of  the  last  member  of  the  compound  are  sometimes  changed. 
When  the  final  is  a  long  vowel  or  a  diphthong  terminating 
a  feminine  noun,  its  change  to  a  corresponding  short  vowel  is 
nothing  more  than  the  alteration  required  by  the  substitution 
of  the  neuter  gender  (p.  41);  as,  J^,  *a  female/  makes 
-^pHf^  ^  surpassing  the  woman  ;'  ift  '  a  boat,'  ^rfk'^  '  beyond 
the  boat.'  But  the  more  special  alteration  is  analogous  to 
that  which  occurs  so  frequently  in  Bahuvrihi  compounds,  the 
substitution  of  ^  for  a  final  vowel,  or  a  final  ^r«T ;  or  its  addi- 
tion to  words  ending  in  consonants  ;  as,  ^qDiC  or  ^MP'lft 
^  near  the  mountain  /  >jmr(  or  TtRf^  ^  near  the  river ;'  TiJTTW 
^  under  the  king  ;'  ^RflTW  '  over  or  in  the  spirit.'  If  the  noun 
ending  in  ^n^  be  already  neuter,  it  may  retain  its  own  termina- 
tion ;  as,  'iim*4^  or  ^Txr^^  '  off  the  skin.'  ^n^  '  the  autumn,* 
and  other  words,  add  ^ ;  as,  T^rsflT]^  *  near  the  autumn :'  or 
sometimes  words  with  final  consonants,  not  nasals,  semivowels, 
or  sibilants,  add  ^  optionally  ;  as,  "5X1^^  or  TTl^  '  near  to 
the  stone.'  ^rftlf,  ^  the  eye,'  substitutes  ^  when  compounded 
with  the  prepositions  ^,  tr,  xrfrT,  or  ^H ;  as,  ^hhhi  '  accord- 
ing to  the  eye,'  '  visibly,'  '  perceptibly.'  tR  substitutes  ^  for 
its  own  final,  whether  in  a  Tatpurusha  or  Avyaya  compound ; 
as,   iKhaf  '  away   from  the   eye,'  ^  absent,'  *  invisible ;'    im^ 


358  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

'  before  the  eye,'  ^  present ;'  and  wr?^  also  ^  before  the  eye,' 

*  visible'  or  *  present.' 

€.  ^1$  '  in  front,'  w^  *  in  the  midst,'  "qiT  *  on  the  further 
side/  may  be  compounded  with  nouns  in  this  form  ;  as,  ^ijuH 

*  in  the  presence  of  Rama ;'  in&JT^  '  in  the  midst  of  the 
Ganges ;'  Mfifl*J^*  *  beyond  the  ocean :'  or  the  terms  may  be 
optionally  used  with  the  signs  of  the  case,  either  their  own  or 
the  noun  which  they  govern ;  as,  qil-Hg^irt^  or  ^*}^m  qiUr^ 
'  from  beyond  the  ocean.' 

/.  The  following  words  are  considered  as  forming  inde- 
clinable compounds  of  an  anomalous  description :  ^(^  '  a 
day,'  as  TTT^  '  in  the  forenoon ;'  ift  '  a  cow  or  ox,'  friS^  '  at 
cow-standing  (time),'  i.  e.  when  they  stand  to  be  milked,  "^^ 

*  at  ox-bearing,'  i.  e.  ploughing  (time),  ^^mifiJN*  *  at  cattle- 
coming,'  i.  e.  at  the  time  of  their  coming  home ;  ^^^  ^  the 
right  hand,'  li^ftpf  ^  walking  round  a  person  or  thing,  keeping 
it  on  the  right ;'  ty^rfrT  ^  a  foot-soldier,'  fiH^^lPri  '  at  drill- 
time,'  or  when  the  soldiers  are  in  line ;  ijftr  '  earth,'  ^fmwfH 
'  (at  a  place)  where  it  is  level ;'  ^  '  a  deer,'  TRn  ^  at  deer- 
coming,'  f^^  '  at  deer-going ;'  Tm  '  barley,'  I<<^n4  *  when 
barley  is  on  the  threshingfloor'  (the  season),  c^^m^  ^  at  barley- 
cutting  ;'  and  other  compounds :  so  ^  *  chaff,'  iNc^^q  '  at 
chaff  on  the  floor'  (time),  &c. ;  t^  ^  a  car,'  w^  ^  at  chariot- 
going  ;'   wn  '  a  year,'  "qi'^TER  ^  during  a  wicked  year,'  m^<m^h 

*  during  a  virtuous  year ;'  ^HT  '  equal,'  ^r^  '  level'  or  *  even,' 
fwf  '  uneven.'     ^TR  is  compounded  with  Trfir,  as  Wf^fH  *  now,' 

*  at  present,' 

SECTION    V. 

General  Rules, 

S82.  There  are  some  changes  which  are  common  to  all  or 
most  of  the  classes  of  compounds.  Some,  as  the  substitution 
or  addition  of  a  final  ^,  have  been  noticed :  the  most  useful 
of  the  others  are  the  following,  affecting  either  the  final 
member  of  the  compound  or  the  initial : 


GENERAL  RULES.  359 

«.  I.  ^  *  water/  is  changed  to  ^^TT;  as,  fclHc^lM  ^having 
pure  water/  f^Hc^lM  ^It;  '  a  clear  lake/  After  ■%,  ^RTt,  or  a 
preposition  ending  in  any  vowel  except  '^y  the  initial  ^  is 
changed  to  ^ ;  as^  ifhf  '  an  island/  ^  having  water  on  both 
sides  /  also  'il^dOM  ^  an  island/  *  in  the  midst  of  water  /  mfhr, 
^  reverse.'  ^n?  with  ^R  makes  fl«/)M  ^  near  /  but  in  a  Uteral 
sense  ^nm  '  having  water  equally.'  After  ^rg  the  vowel  becomes 
"31,  if  applied  to  a  country ;  as,  ^"^T^ft  ^:  ^  marshy  land ;'  but 
^r?^hf  *  upon  or  along  the  w^ater.'  After  a  preposition  ending 
with  %  the  change  to  ^  is  optional ;  as,  XR  and  T(  make  either 
iltnr  or  "qxTT  '  where  the  water  has  retired  /  irni  or  pxr  *  where 
it  has  gone  forth.' 

ij.  qPaw,  '  a  path/  is  changed  commonly  to  xnr ;  as,  H^mvj: 
'  2l  great  road;'  xiHU|vj  ^a  place  where  four  roads  meet/ 
TT^cpTzft  ^:  '  a  place  having  a  pleasant  road  /  4MMv|  '  near  to 
the  road.' 

b,  I.  oB,  a  particle  implying  'inferiority/  ^vileness/  or  some- 
times *  a  httle/  is  variously  modified  before  different  words. 
In  a  Tatpurusha  compound,  and  preceding  a  w^ord  beginning 
with  a  vowel,  it  is  changed  to  csir  ;  as,  cR^^  '  a  bad  horse,'  '  a 
hack  /  ^1^: '  a  bad  camel  /  but  "^  Tl»n  '  a  prince  who  has  a 
bad  camel :'  also  before  t:^  and  "^  ;  as,  cF^^  '  a  bad  chariot  / 
"Sfig^:  '  one  who  speaks  ill  :^  before  ij^,  signifying  '  a  species/ 
ch^nf  '  a  kind  of  grass  /  but  ^TO  ^  bad  grass  in  general.'  "g  is 
changed  to  "SfiT  before  xrftiiT,  as  cMmvj;  *  a  bad  road  /  ^if^  '  the 
eye,'  as  cRT^:  '  a  tear  /  and  optionally  before  "J^t?  as  <+im^m: 
or  ^MixM:  '  a  mean  despicable  man,'  ^  a  coward.'  cRT  is  also  a 
diminutive  ;  as,  ^smvi:  '  a  little  sweet  /  "SfiT^  '  a  Uttle  sour :' 
before  ^m,  *  hot,'  either  ^,  ^i^,  or  ^  may  be  used ;  as,  ^i^, 
chvfluil,  ^FtWj  '  a  httle  hot,'  ^  tepid.' 

3.  The  infinitive  mood  is  used  as  the  first  member  of  a 
compound  with  ^im  and  H^,  when  it  optionally  rejects  the 
nasal ;  as,  ^ijchiH  or  ^TT^TH  *  desirous  to  know  /  ^r|»T^  or 
cR^WR^  *  incHned  to  do.' 

3.  ^R^Ti,  *  certainly,'  optionally  rejects  its  nasal  when  com- 


360  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

pounded  with  a  future  participle ;  as,  ^rf^ir9Fn§  or  ^H'^^^qhl-t^ 
'  what  is  necessarily  to  be  done.'  m^,  '  flesh,'  compounded 
with  XTRi  or  tf^^  '  cooking/  optionally  rejects  its  final  vowel ; 
as,  irhnrT^:  or  JTRITT^:,  *rNnr^  or  iT"Nq^  ^  cooking  meat/ 

4.  w^  becomes  w??Tr^  before  various  words,  if  not  in  the 
sense  of  the  instrumental  or  genitive  cases ;  as,  ^RT^T^  ^  hope 
in  something  else  ;'  W^T^t  ^  benediction  in  or  on  another ;' 
^nqrfiKSR:  '  one  who  does  something  different/ 

5.  The  substitution  of  ^  for  ^  has  already  been  noticed ; 
but  it  is  also  substituted  for  ^hIH  '  same,^  '  like ;'  as,'  ^MVSJ 
'  being  of  the  same  party  -/  w^fr^  '  observing  the  same  duties  :' 
whence  ^TTV^  '  community  of  the  duties  of  caste,  profession,^ 
&c. ;  TT^^prr^  *  a  fellow-student,^  *  one  studying  under  the 
same  teacher :'  so  ^rOQ:  also  '  a  fellow-student,'  '  having  the 
same  holy  object'  or  '  preceptor.'  ^  is  substituted  for  ?nrnT 
before  ?^  ^  to  see  ;'  as,  ^J^:  '  like,'  '  similar,' '  of  like  appear- 
ance :'  so  fi^oh  and  ^^Hj: .  It  is  also  substituted  before  the 
following  words  in  the  sense  of  either  class  of  compounds : 
jJlPri^  ^  light,'  ^nnr^  *  country,'  TTf^  ^  night,'  Trrfn  'navel,' 
^T^ '  a  relative,'  ir^  '  smell,'  fxn!?  '  a  lump  of  rice,'  &c. ;  "?ytfipr 
^  blood,'  "^ft^  '  side,'  ^t  '  braided  hair,'  tj^  '  a  wife ;'  as, 
^tMIPh:  *  equal  in  lustre ;'  fi^lHMt^  '  of  the  same  country ;' 
^hPm^^  ^  of  the  same  cake ;'  fifqi!^:  ^  a  relative  connected  by 
offerings  to  the  same  ancestors  ;'  &c. 

The  following  take  either  ^  or  ^HR ;  ^ij '  form,'  ^TTT  ^  name,' 
iftw  ^  family,'  ^  *  caste,'  T^  '  age,'  ^^^T  '  speech,'  V?^  '  duty,' 
^Irf)^  '  specific,'  "g^x^  '  uterine ;'  as,  ^T^tT  or  l^HM^M  ^  of  the 
same  form ;'  ^jfld  or  flHIH^fld  *  of  the  same  race ;'  ^r^x^  or 
^RPft^  '  related  in  the  female  line,'  as  ^FTt^^  HTin  '  a  brother 
by  the  same  mother ;'  &c. 


SYNTAX.  361 


CHAPTER    VIII. 


SYNTAX. 


283.  The  great  body  of  Sanskrit  composition  is  in  metre, 
and  the  construction  of  sentences  has  consequently  been  sub- 
ordinate to  the  necessities  of  rhythm.  Examples  therefore  of 
syntactical  arrangement  are  not  so  diversified  as  might  be 
expected  ;  and  it  is  not  always  certain^  whether  any  unusual 
combination  may  not  be  a  license  of  the  poet,  rather  than  a 
law  of  the  language.  The  use  of  protracted  compounds  also 
in  a  very  great  degree  supersedes  the  occasion  of  individual 
inflexion ;  as  a  sentence  or  a  stanza,  embracing  a  great  variety 
of  circumstances,  may  be  made  up  of  a  nominative  and  accusa- 
tive, with  a  single  copulative,  the  rest  of  the  words,  however 
numerous,  being  compound  epithets  of  one  or  other  of  the 
nouns.  There  also  prevails  very  commonly  an  elliptical  style 
of  construction,  in  which  the  verb  is  altogether  omitted,  or  its 
tenses  are  supplied  by  participles  and  analogous  words. 

In  the  following  line  from  the  Mahabharata  we  have  two 
sentences  without  a  verb  or  any  other  copulative,  and  only  a 
nominative  case  :  fxnn  n^  ^T^^  ^^fwm^:  TTH:  *  A  father  (or) 
a  spiritual  preceptor  (is)  the  lord,  the  giver  (of)  knowledge,  of 
the  Vedas :  (there  is)  no  doubt  (of  this).'  Instances  of  the 
absence  of  a  verb  are  numerous  in  the  didactic  verses  of  the 
Hitopadesa.  ^Ets-^.  ^^  W^r  7ft  tt  f^^T^  ^  vrf^^.  l  ^FTO^  ^"^ 
"Ntt  ^"^t  "*fl[t^  %T?5  II  ^  What  (is)  the  use  of  a  son  (being) 
bom,  who  (is)  neither  learned  nor  pious?  What  (benefit  is 
there)  from  a  sightless  eye  ?  (such)  an  eye  (is)  even  only 
pain.^  In  the  following  stanza  from  the  Kumara  Sambhava 
there  is  only  one  verb,  and  one  change  of  inflexion  from  the 
nominative  to  the  instrumental,  which,  if  the  metre  had  not 
needed  a  long  syllable,  would  probably  have  been  dispensed 
with  :  f^T&fv^nTtfT*!55njt?TWt  «  '?pR>ftFinnTp'?rKTfwf^  II  H^ldHT^T- 
7iTT^»J?rRH  I  mft^    W^    ^>|5  mw^  II    'And    that   grove    of 

3  A 


362  SYNTAX. 

penitents  was  pure  ;  (for  in  it)  animals  of  hostile  natures  (had) 
abandoned  their  former  animosity ;  guests  (were)  reverenced 
by  its  trees  with  desired  fruits  ;  and  within  its  new-reared 
cottages  the  (holy)  fires  (were)  enshrined.'  There  is  a  little 
more  variety  of  inflexion  in  the  following  verse  from  the  Raghu 
Vansa ;  but  it  is  sufficiently  rare  to  show  how  much  syntac- 
tical construction  has  been  set  aside  for  rhythmical  disposition, 
even  in  the  works  of  authors  who  have  not  indulged  in  that 
abuse  of  elaboration  which  characterises  later  and  inferior 
writers.      W^  ^  f^^nr^n^^TWT  ^T^nf^fv    ^55^  I  ,^f(fnfi^  ^f^ 

fH?3T^Tf5T^  f^  "5c5'i3'ff  II  '  He  then,  whose  mind  was  liberated 
from  objects  of  sense,  having  delivered  to  his  young  son  the 
symbol  of  royalty,  the  shelter  of  the  white  umbrella,  with  the 
usual  solemn  rites,  repaired  together  with  his  queen  to  the 
shade  of  the  trees  of  the  grove  of  hermits :  for  such  is  the 
observance  of  the  princes  of  the  race  of  Ikshwaku,  when  in 
the  decline  of  life.'  In  this  long  stanza  we  have  but  one 
verbal  inflexion,  f^rPJI^,  besides  the  indeclinable  participle  ^1^. 
Although  however  in  this  manner  dispensed  with  in  com- 
position to  a  great  extent,  yet  the  relations  of  words  in  sentences 
are  expressed  in  modes  analogous  to  those  adopted  in  other 
cultivated  languages  ;  as  the  following  rules  will  exemplify. 

SECTION  I. 

Nouns, 

284.  The  noun  substantive  expresses  as  usual  the  subject 
or  object  of  a  proposition  by  the  different  modifications  of 
number,  gender,  and  case.  Its  relations  to  other  parts  of  a 
sentence  depend  especially  upon  the  latter,  and  will  therefore 
be  better  explained,  as  in  native  grammars  in  the  chapter 
to  which  the  title  of  "sfrcr:  is  attached,  in  the  order  of  the 
cases.  When,  as  not  unfrequently  happens,  more  than  one 
case  may  be  employed  to  convey  a  similar  relation,  the  alter- 


NOUNS.  363 

natives  will  be  found,  with  some  exceptions,  under  that  case 
which  is  subsequent  in  order,  according  to  the  scheme  given 
under  the  head  of  declension  (rule  46). 

285.  Nominative  case  (cfrtl  or  Tn^rrr).  The  nominative 
case  declares  the  simple  sense  of  a  word ;  as,  »r"?nR:  ^  a  man,* 
^  *  a  woman,'  ^FT  '  knowledge.^  Its  employment  in  a  defi- 
nite or  indefinite  manner  is  usually  indicated  by  the  context, 
as  there  is  no  article.  The  numeral  ^o|;,  or  a  pronoun,  however, 
sometimes  performs  the  same  office  ;  as,  tjcK  "J^:  ^  a  man,^  i! 
-g^:  '  the  or  that  man,^  ^liftj^q:  '  a  certain  king,^  ^  ^J^cqin: 
^  an  old  tiger.' 

a.  Two  substantives  may  be  connected  absolutely  in  the 
nominative  case  ;  as,  "5^  wtf^:  ^  rice  a  drona  (in  measure) ;' 
■'*l^ft  fTTix:  *  the  mountain  a  kos  (in  extent)  ;^  JnTTT  ^^:  ^  a 
mother  an  enemy ;'  ftnrr  %^  '  a  father  an  enemy ;'  f^  ^WT 
^ftr^^  '  Society  (is)  poison  to  the  poor  i'  but  in  these  cases 
the  copulative  ^  is'  must  be  understood,  as  in  similar  phrases 
it  is  expressed  ;  H'^T^vSt  V#:  '  iniquity  becomes  virtue.'  The 
nouns  in  apposition  may  be  in  different  genders  and  numbers : 
^n^ohlPH  "^.^n?!^  ^T't:  "iP^:  ^  The  acts  of  the  Vedas  (are)  his 
path  to  heaven ;'  ^  ^  rT  ^:  trfbrTT^^  f^T^hc^  K**T^^:  '  Who 
engaged  in  unprofitable  undertakings  do  not  become  a  subject 
of  disgrace  ?' 

b.  The  nominative  case  is  connected  with  the  active  verb, 
or  governs  it,  when  it  expresses  the  agent,  and  with  the 
passive  when  it  signifies  the  object :  ^"^^:  ^  chOfri  ^  Deva- 
datta  makes  the  mat  ;^  ^^t^^H  fw^  ciur:  '  The  mat  is  made  by 
Devadatta.'  It  is  also  put  absolutely  sometimes  in  a  sentence, 
as  the  object  of  an  action,  but  where  the  accusative  that 
should  express  that  object  is  omitted:  fr^^sfq  #q^  ^n| 
^ifH^IHirt  ^  Even  a  poison-tree,  having  reared  (it),  one  should 
not  of  oneself  cut  (it)  down.^  In  this  the  complete  construction 
should  be,  ^^  ^R^  w  "S^WPFgif  ^sfq  fciM^aj:  WH^^  '  Having 
reared  a  tree,  it  is  not  proper  to  cut  it  down,  even  though  it 
be  a  poison-tree.' 

3  A2 


364j  syntax. 

c.  When  various  nouns^  separated  by  a  disjunctive  particle 
expressed  or  implied,  occur  in  a  sentence  with  a  common 
verb,  that  which  is  nearest  to  the  verb  may  become  its  nomi- 
native :  ^  TPfr  m  TT^  c5^#  ^  Hri:mrri  '  I  or  Rama,  the 
king,  or  Lakshmana,  will  die :'  •?  ^HH^r<*^  ^'^^^*1  ^  ^^T- 
T^:  I  grr  xrw^f  TT  tfj  ^s-q^  j^uu  ll  ^  Neither  was  the  sun 
able,  nor  I,  by  motives  of  affection,  to  conciliate  him,  or 
(induce  him)  to  enter  into  amity  with  thee :'  •?  inrr  ^i^iijiifH: 
^  IT^TTT  ^  ^fiW?5:  I  ^Ori'mriir^H  7^  TT^  IT^  ^^T^l  11  '  Fire 
gratifies  not,  neither  do  clothes  nor  q  blanket,  the  region  that 
is  afflicted  with  cold  breezes,  so  much  as  thy  rays  (O  sun).' 

d.  When  two  or  more  nouns  are  joined  together  by  a 
copulative  conjunction,  they  usually  govern  a  verb  in  the 
plural  number :  ittt:  ^t  ^  TT»n  ^  vfNr^  ^  T'^gfW:  I  ^;  "Zfvi 
iT^  xrnifh  i^VT^TTTR  ?r^  U  *  Then  afterwards  Kunti  and  the  king 
and  Bhishma,  with  the  kinsmen,  gave  to  Pan^u  the  obsequial 
offerings,  with  libations  to  the  manes.*  This  is  not  invariably  the 
case,  however,  and  the  verb  may  have  for  its  nominative  only 
the  nearest  of  the  nouns  combined  by  copulative  conjunctions  : 
m  ^  ^nq^rft  ^^  "^^TBTT  ^  ^I^Tf^t  I  U'^^Kt  vft^  ^11*^1^  "^jf^ 
rH54t  H  '  And  the  queen  Satyavati  and  the  illustrious  Kau- 
salya,  and  also  Gandhari,  attended  by  the  wives  of  the  king, 
went  forth :'  '^nf^W^^f^T^^c'ftsiTH^  ^Hfroift  f ^  '^^^  I  '^Tf^ 
rrf^  W  ^  ^I^  V^sf^T  iTT^nffT  ^TT:^  ^  H  '  The  sun  and 
moon,  wind  and  fire,  the  sky,  earth,  waters,  the  heart  and 
Yama,  and  day  and  night,  and  both  dawn  and  evening,  and 
also  Dharma,  knows  the  conduct  of  a  man.' 

286.  Accusative  case  (^3#  or  f^TrfHn).  The  accusative 
expresses,  after  a  transitive  verb,  the  object  of  the  action : 
■^TH  chClPH  ^^TaRTt:  *  The  potter  fabricates  the  vessel ;'  ^ir:  H»rfw 
H^K  '  The  votary  worships  Hari.' 

a.  The  accusative  follows  a  neuter  or  intransitive  verb,  when 
it  denotes  place  or  time :  "^^  ^f^fiT  *  He  sleeps  in  the 
country  of  the  Kurus  ;'  "#^  TrfiT?^  '  He  proceeds  for  a  Kos;' 
f^fiW  ofci<^HM«^  trtw  TTT^rrr^  '  They  dwelt  for  some  time  on 


NOUNS.  S65 

the  mountain  Gandhamadana ;'  Tnm  JJj^'JJ^  fWiT:  ^  He  stayed 
two  months  in  the  house  of  his  preceptor/ 

b.  Verbs  signifying  '  motion  to,'  literally  or  figuratively, 
govern  the  accusative  case :  Km  ii-cdfrt  '  He  goes  to  the  vil- 
lage ;'  T(t{W(  fnmfif  '  He  goes  mentally  to  Krishna/  he  wor- 
ships him ;  f^wri  ^Tt?f  ipn  *  He  went  to  (or  felt)  great 
astonishment.'  The  accusative  is  also  employed  when  Agoing 
along  a  road '  is  intended ;  xjt^tR  "'Tlfw  ^i^:  *  The  traveller 
goes  along  the  road:'  but  not  if  Agoing  to  a  road'  is  meant ; 
TrW^T  ''7^  Tj-^fTf  ^  He  goes  by  a  byeway  to  the  road.'  The 
dative  case  may  also  be  used  optionally,  when  actual  '  motion 
to'  is  signified  ;   'il\^\^  JI-oaPh. 

c.  The  accusative  case  follows  verbs  of  giving,  to  signify 
the  thing  given ;  7JJ^  ril^iij«ft  t^^lPH  ^  I  give  the  village  to  the 
Brahmans :'  also  verbs  of  hearing,  to  denote  the  thing  heard ; 

-  ^^»^C  ^  3p5  ^  Hear  from  me  the  i^sura  (creation).' 

d.  A  double  accusative  follows  a  number  of  verbs,  when 
the  thing  done,  and  the  thing  or  person  that  is  the  object  of 
the  action,  are  both  designated.  These  are  mostly  verbs  that 
signify,  i.  speaking,  2.  asking,  3.  instructing,  4.  knowing, 
5.  conquering,  6.  leading,  7.  dragging,  8.  taking,  9.  collecting, 
10.  stealing,  11.  fining,  12.  cooking,  13.  milking,  14.  churning, 
and  15.  obstructing ;  whether  they  have  these  meanings  lite- 
rally or  metaphorically,  i.  xn^M*  ^'  ^  "^R:  ^  The  spy  tells 
the  whole  to  the  king ;'  TfH'a'^tiT  "^t  ^T^rrrr^^  *  Kunti  said 
to  him  words  full  of  meaning  :'  2.  ^si^-e^^H+jiij  ^^ftflf  ^  He  asked 
Lakshmana  (after)  Sita  :'  3.  r5l  ^  1"^  V^  ^T^  ^rrftcT  ^  The  Guru 
teaches  the  disciples  virtue :'  4.  ^^  M^  ^^|^»  '  The  wise 
know  punishment  (to  be)  virtue :'  5.  Phhi  Tj5?f  «T?J  •T'T  '  Hav- 
ing conquered  his  kingdom  (from)  Nala  the  king :'  6.  i^lHH^R 
H^Pri  jriMio^:  ^  The  shepherd  leads  the  goats  to  the  village :' 
7.  "^  chKNIK  ^fitfff  tilliMIc^:  *  The  officer  of  justice  drags  the 
thief  to  prison:'  8.  ^  ^T^TTTTXnnTTvftTd:  *  He  took  the  i^bhira 
women  to  the  forest :'  9.  •jHjH'^P^HlPri  ihc6 1 Ph  ^TH:  ^  The  boy 
gathers  the  fruit  (from)  the  tree  :'   10.  ^^^  V^f  gwrfff  v#: 


366  SYNTAX. 

'The  rogue  robs  Devadatta  (of)  his  wealth:'  ii.  ^nmfiS^  ^"ff 
^^SJnrflT  TT5n  '  The  king  fines  the  debtor  a  hundred  (rupees)  :^ 
12.  fRJ|c5IHl<H  M-MPri  ^jMohlC  *  The  cook  dresses  the  grain  (and) 
the  boiled  rice :'  13.  irf  ^VfHr  t^r:  '  He  milks  the  cow  (for) 
milk ;^  ITRUT'T  H^PN'MlrHM  '  Milking  (abandoning)  life  (from) 
himself :'  14.  "^vf  T^fkf»Tfv  JTR^Y*  ^^^^*  '  '^^^  g^^^  ^^^  Asuras 
churned  the  milky  ocean  (for)  ambrosia :'  15.  if|P^it{l  ^»1H<^iN- 
^"fe  it:  *  Govinda  shuts  up  the  cows  (at)  the  cow-pens ;' 
^fVoR  fxi^HMr^vnr  '  He  confined  his  grief  (in)  his  heart.'  ^, '  to 
bear,'  is  sometimes  similarly  used  ;  '^"^*  Jj^H'^^rf'  or  'J^^l^MN^rf 
'  He  bore  the  damsel  to  the  house.'  In  common  with  other 
transitive  verbs,  these  verbs  may  govern  a  single  accusative, 
when  only  one  object  is  designated ;  ^TTTR^TT^  "^h::  '  The  hero 
said  to  his  mother.'  Several  of  them  may  govern  the  object 
in  other  cases  also,  as  will  be  subsequently  noticed. 

e.  The  causal  modes  of  verbs  signifying,  i.  motion,  2.  speak- 
ing or  articulate  sound,  3.  or  eating;  4.  the  causals  of  intran- 
sitive verbs,  and  5.  of  ?j^  *  to  take/  1^  '  to  see,'  and  "^  '  to 
hear,'  govern  a  double  accusative,  when  the  object  and  the 
subject  of  the  act  are  both  expressed,  i.  ^^rfTTH'^f^  ^^*  '  He 
caused  the  enemies  to  go  to  heaven  :'  2.  ^r^Hi^m^ld  fg^  '  He 
caused  the  Brahman  to  read  aloud  the  Vedas :'  3.  ^JTT^nr^'PJrf 
^"^TR  *  He  caused  the  gods  to  eat  nectar :'  4.  SHm^^r^  ^fc5c5 
Y^*  "^t  ^  ^  'iO^Mrfi:  *  That  Hari  is  my  refuge,  who  placed 
(caused  to  sit)  the  earth  upon  the  waters ;'  ifhfts"^  >Tt»ffirHrrf»T 
H^T  >J^  ^  '  If  I  am  pleased,  I  will  cause  thee,  lady,  to 
enjoy  the  three  worlds :'  5.  eJIc^H^l^^r^Kf  '  He  made  the  boy 
take  learning ;'  r^^^Mpshl.  TJ^  ifftrrf  '  They  shewed  (caused  to 
see)  Sita  to  Rama ;'  ^W^  'mfr^T^  f^^«B  '  Recite  (cause  to 
hear)  the  drama  to  the  company.^ 

y*.  There  are  some  exceptions  to  the  preceding  rule.  The 
causals  of  ^  and  ^T^,  '  to  eat,'  require  the  instrumental  case 
for  the  subject  of  the  action  ;  ^n^Trfff  or  ^STT^XTWW  ^crii  n^ 
*  The  Guru  causes  the  rice  to  be  eaten  by  the  pupil.'  So  H^, 
when  it  means  '  eating ;'  7ftm>T«j^r<^>Tg|  ^  He  caused  the  food 


NOUNS.  367 

they  liked  to  be  eaten  by  the  cowherds :'  but  if  it  means 
destroying  by  the  act  of  eating,  it  may  be  followed  by  a 
double  accusative  ;  vr^^TrflT  TOt^fr^  ^T^  '  He  makes  the  oxen 
eat  up  the  com/  "^r^,  *  to  sound,'  in  the  causal  mode  requires 
the  subject  to  be  put  in  the  instrumental  case  ;  ^r«45^nrd  '^l'^^ 
^N<-^H  '  He  causes  the  sound  to  be  uttered  by  Devadatta.' 
W^  and  some  other  verbs,  signifying  *  articulate  sound,'  are 
similarly  combined.  The  causal  of  ^  '  to  bear/  when  it 
implies  ^  driving,'  governs  a  double  accusative  ;  Nl^^fri  T^TT- 
3^"5T  ^nr:  ^  The  charioteer  makes  the  horses  draw  the  car  :' 
otherwise  the  subject  is  put  in  the  instrumental  case  ;  ^\h{ 
tjl^^Pri  mt  ijw^  *  The  master  makes  the  load  be  borne  by  the 
hireling.' 

g.  The  causal  modes  of  "a;  '  to  make,'  ^  *  to  take,^  ^  ^  to 
speak'  with  ^rf^T  prefixed,  and  of  ^  ^  to  see^  in  the  i^tmane- 
pada,  may  take  either  a  second  accusative  or  the  instrumental 
case  for  the  agent  or  subject  of  the  action  :  cRTr.^fif  cR^  f^rf5T«t 
or  %f^T«n  '  He  causes  the  workman  to  make  the  mat,'  or  ^  he 
causes  it  to  be  made  by  the  workman :'  so  ^TT?Tfw  ^?J  Fff  or 
^^  '  He  causes  the  messenger  to  take  the  message,'  &c. ; 
^rftr^T^W  ^  iT#  or  >T%^  '  He  makes  the  devotee  salute  the 
deity,'  &c. ;  ^tiw  <jU!iH^H  or  ^IT^HH  '  He  makes  Arjuna  see 
Krishna,'  &c.  The  fact  being,  that  when  the  causal  is  used 
in  a  passive  sense,  the  subject  or  subordinate  agent  is  speci- 
fied in  the  instrumental ;  when  it  is  used  in  an  active  sense, 
it  is  specified  in  the  accusative  case. 

h,  A  second  accusative  may  sometimes  follow  a  verb,  as  a 
qualification  of  the  first,  being  put  absolutely  or  in  apposition  : 
i^n^vfl'  ^T^T^iT^  ^f^  ^  f^^iTW^  *  Give  me,  O  lord  of  the  Danavas, 
earth,  three  paces.' 

L  The  accusative  case  may  follow  various  prepositions  and 
indeclinable  words  or  particles.  Of  the  former  class  are 
^rfw,  ^rfv  when  reiterated,  ^rfW,  ^,  "^tt,  "qft,  and  irfiT.  ^rfw 
^TFT  ^fb  ^  Hari  is  beyond  the  gods ;'  ^rffTOT  '  Superior  to 
Rama'  (^,  *  I  am,'  understood);  ^^nqfVcJft^  ^t^  fTOT:  *VishAu 


368  SYNTAX. 

abides  over  and  above  the  worlds  ;'  HrJlH^^fHrfT  ^T  ^  The  army 
will  halt  at  or  along  the  river ;'  ^nPRTJ  TrRt f^  ^  It  rained  after 
the  prayer ;'  ^^fxnn?^  n^W  ^:  '  The  son  goes  after,  or 
imitates,  the  father.'  ^r^  and  "gtr,  indicating  *  inferiority,'  also 
govern  the  accusative :  Tf  VRT'rjtT't  "^7^  *  If  you  are  not  infe- 
rior to  Rama ;'  ^MSjiL  «T  ^  fW  '  If  thy  conduct  is  not  beneath 
a  hero.'  ^rg,  Xfft,  and  irflT  govern  accusatives  designating  any 
particular  object ;  as,  fhfbTg  (^rft  or  Trfir)  f^tDriri  f^^  ^  The 
lightning  flashes  at  or  toward  the  mountain ; '  f^^'iTFrT^ 
riHil'^  ^H^t{^  ^  ^irf  Trfir  *  He  considered  that  grave  matter 
concerning  his  daughter :' — a  part  of  any  thing  or  person  ; 
cJ'a^'ttftTT'g  (^  trft:  or  irfrT)  '  Lakshmi  is  part  of  Hari :' — and 
several  and  successive  order ;  ^"^"^  (^t  or  TTPrf)  ftr^lT  HT?jt 
'  The  gardener  waters  tree  by  tree  ;*  trfi^  ^*  (^r^  or  irfff  ^* ) 
^mnnT^:  '  In  love  with  every  (successive)  woman.'  The 
indeclinable  words  governing  accusatives  are  ^gnftsv:,  Tcp^xrft, 
ts»du,  ^Ffft?!T,  ^r^Tir:,  xrirrr:,  "^Hxrrr:,  "^rfif:,  ^nrin,  fiohMi,  fv^,  ?rT ; 

as,  ^snftsv:  ^^  "TTITTTJ:  *  Patala  is  below  the  earth ;'  "^xnltrft: 
TjOq^T  ^:  '  The  sky  is  above  the  earth  ;'  HiHtlTT  ^fOirfH^fw 
'  Krishna  tarries  away  from  thee  ;'  ^^  ^*}^U|  TT^^t  ^Jcf^lT^: 
^^^hr^fTrr '  Ravana,  of  dreadful  form,  having  raised  up  his  sword 
(to  cut)  Vaidehi  in  two ;'  fTPTTTrftrir  •?  ^  '  There  is  no  happi- 
ness without  a  mistress  ;'  ^HTTt  (or  trfbft)  UHH^^*t,  ^T^^* 
'  The  Rakshasas  ran  upon  or  around  Rama  ;'  "g^Txrif:  "SRHH  Tfttn: 
'  The  cow-herds  (were)  on  both  sides  of  Krishna ;'  ^Frflf:  srr^l< 
Wnrfff  ^IIJVTfiOT:  ^  All  around  the  palace  watch  the  staff- 
bearers  ;^  ^nrm  JP^  fnclim  "gt  Vr^ftf  '  He  goes  near  to  the 
village,'  '  near  to  the  city ;'  fv^  «RTjnH>T^  ^  Fie  on  one  not 
devoted  to  Krishfia  ;^  ^  ^'^^TP'  *  Alas !  (for)  the  enemy  of 
the  gods.'  Several  of  these  may  be  combined  with  other 
cases ;  as,  Tq^tfix  ^^TTrf^W  1^^  ^tT^  '  Above  and  over  all, 
like  the  sun  in  splendour ; '  "^"'np^  ^  *  or  inferior  to 
heroes.' 

j.  The  neuter  verbs  :5ft  *  to  sleep,'  wi  *  to  stay'  or  '  be,'  and 
^rnr  *  to  sit,'  when  compounded  with  wfv,  govern  the  noun 


NOUNS.  369 

expressing  the  site  of  the  action  in  the  accusative :  ^fuji^i 
T'T'^  *HlO  ^  The  maiden  sleeps  upon  the  couch ;'  ^^^M^ria^<^l^*^K 
"i^: '  Kesava  presides  in  (or  over)  the  soul  ;^  ^TWTTW  %^?!5  ^ft: 
^  Hari  abides  in  Vaikun^ha.* 

^.  f^,  '  to  enter  into/  as  a  transitive  verb,  governs  an 
accusative ;  xf^  Mf^^lfff  ^  He  enters  the  house.'  When  pre- 
ceded by  wfW  and  fff,  it  may  govern  either  the  accusative  or 
locative  ;  as,  ^Hprir^^ifrT  ^n»nW  '  He  enters  upon  a  good  path ;' 
wfHf^f^frT  trr^  '  He  enters  upon  (or  falls  into)  wickedness.' 
When  preceded  by  Tq",  and  implying  ^to  sit/  it  is  followed  by 
the  locative  only  ;   ^TO%  s-ftq^ m  fcj  ^|  h  *  Sit  down  on  this  seat.^ 

h  ^^  'to  dwell/  preceded  by  ^fv,  ^g,  ^T,  or  "^tt,  may 
govern  an  accusative  case;  wfVm^rffT  (^fTJ^^fw^  &c.)  ^  t^x 
^  Rama  inhabits  the  wood  /  aMj^jrcjcj^^H  '  He  inhabited  a 
lonely  wood  /  ^d*T"iftmT^^T^^  '  He  dwelt  at  the  city  Ayo- 
dhya  /  ^TTHym^frT  '  He  inhabits  the  village :'  but  when  ^^^^^ 
means  ^  to  fast/  the  site  is  expressed  in  the  locative  only ; 
>jiim^rri  «r%  ^^t:  '  Rama  fasts  in  the  forest.' 

287.  Instrumental  case  (cJOT  or  frfhn).  This  case  expresses 
the  agent,  the  implement,  or  the  means  by  which  any  thing 
is  done,  or  any  end  is  accomplished,  whether  active  effort  is 
implied  or  not :  ^r^TRin  '?"m  HTiTT  "TrfrrcT;  '  By  me,  unknowing, 
my  brother  has  been  slain  /  TTOT  ^TT^'^T  ^t  '  Killed  by  Rama 
with  an  arrow  ;'  "gi^^  ^Tt  ^fb  '  Hari  is  seen  by  (or  through) 
virtue  /  ^r«IT"'T%*T  ^^  '  He  subsists  by  teaching  /  lT^?rr  '^T^: 
^  Beautiful  by  nature.'  It  also  expresses  the  manner  or  degree 
in  which  any  object  is  effected :  ^i^H  '^fl^rrT  '  He  lives  with 
ease'  (happily)  ;  g:^^  ^mfw  '  He  goes  with  difficulty  /  in^w 
iTT%cfi:  ^  For  the  most  part  (usually)  a  sacrificer.'  It  also 
denotes  any  mark  or^  circumstance  by  which  an  object  is 
characterised :  ^TnfW^cTR^:  '  He  is  an  ascetic,  by  his  clotted 
hair  /  iTTTTT  "STinir:  ^  a  Brahman  by  caste  ;'  ift"^^  m^X  ^  a 
descendant  of  Garga  by  family.' 

a.  The  instrumental  case  may  be  employed  with  words 
signifying  '  object'   or   ^  result :'    "g"?!^   ofits'^:  *  What  is   the 

3B 


370  SYNTAX. 

object  of  effort?'  mPi^^^^h  f^  tRc^  *  What  is  the  fruit  of 
lamenting  ?' 

h.  Words  implying  *  bodily  deformity'  require  the  instru- 
mental case  for  the  organ  or  member  in  which  the  defect 
occurs :  ^^T^^  WRU:  *  blind  by  an  eye ;'  trf^TT  13^:  *  lame  by 
a  foot/ 

c.  Prepositions  signifying  '  with,'  ^  along  with/  are  con- 
nected in  sentences  with  the  instrumental  case  :  WT^^  ^FTTSfi  »nn 

*  Stay  along  with  me ;'  ^hr^  f^  ^fri^lri  ^:  ^  ^RFmTlf  '  The 
mind  is  depraved,  O  sire^  from  association  with  the  base.' 
Verbs  signifying  '  association'  also  govern  the  object  in  the 
same  case  :  r^^n  ^nvt  '-HHNl«<  *'  Having  met,  O  pious  man, 
with  thee.' 

d.  The  particle  ^TcT'^,  implying  '  enough  of/  governs  the 
instrumental  case  :  WFJ^rfrff^^a^  '  Enough  of  prolixity.' 

e.  The  instrumental  case  may  be  used  optionally  with  the 
accusative  in  various  instances  ;  as  after  the  verb  f^^  *  to  play,' 
^Bp^  or  ^sr^^farfif  ^irsfin::  '  The  gambler  plays  dice,'  or  ^  with 
dice :'  also  after  ^  ^  to  know/  preceded  by  ^;  as,  IT"^  fViTt 
(or  fxr^r)  ^Hrn=ft^  '  Recognise  thy  father.'     When  it  signifies 

*  calling  to  mind'  or  'thinking  upon,'  it  governs  the  accusative 
only  :  ^STl'flN  f^m  '  Meditate  on  Vishnu.'  When  '  space'  or 
'  time'  are  spoken  of,  in  connexion  with  an  act  or  event  com- 
pleted, the  instrumental  case  is  employed :  ^^  or  -^l^n  jti^ 
i^^*^M^'qAri  ^  Having  gone  for  a  day,  or  for  a  Kos,  he  arrived  at 
home.'  But  if  the  act  or  event  is  incomplete,  the  accusative  : 
ilT^  irfWjft  ^  i^l^l'ri:  ^  He  has  been  travelling  (for)  a  month, 
but  is  not  arrived.' 

/.  Words  signifying  '  weight,' '  measure/  or  '  number,'  when 
succession  or  repetition  is  also  implied,  are  put  after  verbs 
either  in  the  instrumental  or  accusative  case :  ^i^  ^rf  (or 
^  ^)  ^x^\\  m^^Pri  tnr:  ^  He  gives  milk  to  the  calves  to 
drink,  by  a  hundred  at  a  time  ;'  i%<fli)H  or  "fe^f^  "^tarfw  VT^ 

*  He  buys  corn  by  two  DroAa  (measures)  at  once.' 

288.  Dative  case  (^rf9^T«t  or  ^rw^).     This  case  expresses 


NOUNS.  371 

the  object  or  recipient  of  a  gift,  either  literal  or  figurative : 
wrsrSr«ft  frluhiTT  ^  *  He  gave  Nishkas  (gold  coins)  to  the 
Brahmans  ;'  t?^'  f^HN  ^^Tfrr  ^  He  offers  an  animal  to  S'iva ;' 
•T  'sr^iVJ  Tfif  ^^^rnr  ^  Let  him  not  give  understanding  to  a 
S'udra:'  and  it  may  be  used  after  verbs  which  imply  *  pre- 
senting' or  *  offering,'  although  not  bearing  such  import  ori- 
ginally ;  as,  T7TR  "^  ^  H'^T^jCh:  '  The  great  sage  made  (or 
offered)  worship  to  Rama.' 

«.  Although,  however,  the  fourth  or  dative  case  most  appro- 
priately follows  verbs  that  imply  *  giving,'  of  some  kind  or 
other,  yet  the  genitive  case  is  frequently  used  with  a  similar 
purport,  and  sometimes  also  the  locative :  TTE  f^T^W  ^  % 
^^rf^  TR  ^^^  '  Spirit  of  air,  I  may  give  thee  the  prosperous 
kingdom  of  the  S'ivis  ;'  i^F^sfTTfir«ft  ^«i:  f^T^.  4^^H^  ^ 
^  Having  given  (food)  to  guests,  gods,  ancestors,  and  his  own 
household  ;'  t(^  TJ^  "^fzT^*  ^T5ffl"^H  '  Thou  who  wishest  to 
give  the  earth  to  Rama.'  When  the  genitive  case  is  thus 
used,  however,  an  elHpse  is  implied,  to  be  filled  up  by  a  noun 
understood  in  the  dative  case :  i\'^  ^^^^:  '  to  the  hands  of 
thee  ;'   y=*ir|W  ^rf^SW:  '  to  the  persons  of  his  own  family.^ 

b.  Nouns  expressing  ^  cause'  or  '  purpose,'  that  for  or  on 
account  of  which  a  thing  is  done,  or  that  for  which  a  thing  is 
fit  or  suitable,  follow  verbs  in  the  dative  case :  ^^  ^Ix  HTffiT 
^rrv:  '  The  pious  man  worships  Hari  for  the  sake  of  liberation ;' 
Mf^^MI^  <*«d4rt  *  Devotion  is  practised  for  the  sake  of  holy 
knowledge  ;'  ^TiTR  ohfMcJI  f^\  '  The  pale  hghtning  is  on 
account  of  (it  is  a  sign  of)  a  gale  ;'  TW^ig?Tofii#TOT:  '^Sf^U^  *rnft 
sfs^TTK  '  The  unfriendly  performers  of  cruel  acts  are  born  for 
the  destruction  of  the  world ;'  TUWfJT^  f^  V#:  *  Virtue  is  fit 
for  a  Brahman.' 

c.  Connected  with  this  appUcation  of  the  dative  case,  is  its 
optional  substitution  for  the  infinitive  after  a  verb :  ifi^wit 
Jlxdcfri  *  He  goes  for  fruit,'  for  TfiHT^m^*  Jl-od^frt  '  He  goes  to 
bring  fruit ;'  "m^rnrr^nTRfir  '  He  gives  orders  for  a  sacrifice,' 
for  ^SHI^m^fd  '  He  gives  orders  to  sacrifice.' 

3  B  ^ 


372  SYNTAX. 

d.  Intransitive  verbs  signifying  *  to  be  agreeable'  or  ^  accept- 
able' govern  the  dative  ease :  i^^  ^N^  >Tf^:  '  Devotion  is 
acceptable  to  Hari ;'  WT?5"R  ^^  T*^^  ^  The  sweetmeat  is 
pleasant  to  the  boy.' 

e.  The  verbs  "^ni  '  to  praise,'  w  *  to  conceal,  W[  *  to  stay,' 
igfPT  '  to  curse,'  may  be  connected  with  the  object  of  the  act  in 
the  dative  case,  when  some  particular  feeling  is  implied  by  it : 
nhft  ^RTTl^  ^WR  ^IMri  ^W  fww^  ^xr^  *  The  Gopi  praises,  hides 
from,  stays  with,  vows  by  Krishna,  through  love.'  When  no 
such  feeling  is  implied,  such  of  them  as  are  transitive  govern 
the  accusative :  lT3rnt  "^ni^  ^T^t  *  The  minister  flatters  the 
king.' 

f.  With  a  similar  kind  of  relation,  verbs  signifying  ^  desire,' 
*  anger,'  ^  wrong,'  ^jealousy,'  or  '  detraction,'  govern  the  object 
in  the  dative  case :  IT^  ^PJ^xpTTTts;^  ^  He  being  filled  with 
desire  for  her ;'  ^ftcTR  Tr^"W4^immiri  ^  He  was  not  angry  with 
Sita,  nor  did  he  revile  her ;'  ^i^nr  f^R^m^T^  TT^  ^  He  vowed 
to  her,  dissembling  with  her.  When  the  feeling  is  not  excited 
by  the  object,  they  govern  the  accusative :  H|<LMiH)(Mrff  tffrr: 
^  The  husband  is  jealous  as  to  his  wife,'  that  is,  he  cannot 
endure  that  others  should  look  at  her ;  fT^^^i^  ch(j|x|r|  *  Let 
(the  pupil)  never  offend  him.'  W3(  and  '^  preceded  by  pre- 
positions govern  the  accusative  :  fofi  nf  ^rajwftr  *  Why  art  thou 
angry  with  me  ?'  m  tf^^'TfW'^f^T^n:  '  Commit  not  violence  against 
another's  property.' 

g,  Y>  '  ^^  hold,'  in  the  causal  mode,  having  the  sense  of 
'  owing,'  literally  or  figuratively,  governs  the  person  to  whom 
the  debt  or  obligation  is  due  in  the  dative  case :  ^^^WR  ^7T 
>nT?Tfff  *  He  owes  a  hundred  to  Devadatta ;'  HW^  "fN"  VTdfiT 
^fb  ^  Hari  owes  liberation  to  his  worshippers.' 

h.  "^  preceded  by  '^t  or  llfw,  signifying  '  to  promise,'  governs 
the  person  or  thing  to  which  the  promise  is  addressed  in  the 
dative :  fVJTPT  ^MHIT^iuirri  or  ufff^TTiT^fTT  i:T»n  ^  The  Raja  promises 
a  cow  to  the  Brahman  ;'  spjsrsi:  ufw  ^p^f^  mfl^n:  *  Common 
persons  promise  assent  to  those  who  counsel  them.' 


NOUNS.  37S 

i.  n,  *  to  sound/  preceded  by  ^g  or  irflT,  implying  *  to 
conform  to'  or  ^  comply  with,'  governs  the  dative  case :  ^t^ 
TrfrT^prrfTT  or  ^"gjjui  I  «<^£cri|:  *  The  Adhwaryu  (or  reciter  of  the 
prayers  of  the  Yajur-veda)  acts  in  conformity  to  the  Hotri  (or 
Brahman  of  the  Rig-veda) ;'  'pry'gft  s-g:ijT?i ipr^  rf  ^fg\tn  '  Others, 
such  as  I  am,  do  not  conform  to  those  who  flatter  us.' 

j.  TTV  ^  to  accompHsh,'  and  ^  ^  to  see,^  when  signifying 
'  to  think  or  consider  about,'  govern  the  object  in  the  dative : 
^tmNl.n^lT  or  <*U!INV4|^  ^:  ^  Garga  considers  concerning  or 
about  Krishna.' 

k.  Forms  of  reverential  address  or  religious  invocation,  such 
as  tTTW,  ^fe,  ^T^5  ^\rr,  &c.  are  followed  by  nouns  in  the 
dative  case  :    «TTt:  f5I"^nT  *  Salutation  to  Siva ;'  iT^TtTWPT  ^f% 

*  Health  to  the  king  ;'  ^TfT  ^«t:  ^  Salutation  to  the  gods  ;' 
^rVT  f^^«f:  ^  Salutation  to  the  manes.'  TpT^  compounded  with 
"^  governs  either  the  accusative  or  dative :  iTH'^^t*^  ^^:  or 
"?nT^i^tf(T  ^THT  ^  We  make,  or  he  makes,  salutation  to  the 
gods.' 

/.  ^T^H,  when  signifying  ^  to  be  sufficient  for'  or  '  equal  to/ 
governs  the  dative  :  ^TTcy  ^^OT^l  ^5^>  ^fTTc5  ^Wm  ^T^^t  ^  Friends 
are  not  (alone)  sufficient  for  happiness,  nor  enemies  for  misery ;' 
W<5J  Wt  ^W^  '  One  wrestler  is  a  match  for  the  other  ;'  ^-^vq^sH 
fVwr:  ^  Vishnu  is  equal  to,  or  a  match  for,  the  Daityas.'  Com- 
pounded with  a  transitive  verb,  it  governs  the  accusative :  VJ^ 
HI<^<*W  ^HT^sf^  *  He  is  not  able  to  be  a  match  for,  or  over- 
come, sin.' 

m.  The  prohibitive  jtt  may  be  used  with  the  dative  case, 
wdth  the  verb  understood :  iTT  '^Ttr^'R  '  Be  not  for  unsteadi- 
ness,' i.  e.  do  not  act  unsteadily. 

n.  Verbs  of  motion,  as  noticed  above  (rule  286,  b),  are  most 
usually  followed  by  the  noun  in  the  accusative  case  ;  but  they 
may  also  be  associated  with  the  dative :  ^TRTR  ST^afif  *  He  goes 
to  the  village.' 

*  0.  WT, '  to  mind'  or  ^  think,'  when  of  the  fourth  conjugation, 
and   implying  ^  disrespect,'  governs  a  subsidiary  noun,  signi- 


374  SYNTAX. 

fying  '  degree'  or  '  comparison,'  in  either  the  dative  or  accusa- 
tive case :  »T  }^  W^  "JWR  or  "^TJ  '  I  value  thee  not  a  straw.' 
iTrf  of  the  eighth  conjugation  is  followed  by  the  accusative 
only :  "q"  T^  ir?^  "JW.  If  the  comparison  be  intimated  by  the 
terms  tn:  ^  a  boat/  oRTSR:  ^  a  crow,'  ^  '  food,'  'spst  '  a  parrot,' 
or  3i/Me4:  '  a  jackal,'  the  accusative  only  is  employed :  tT  rTT 
•TT#  H^  ^  I  hold  thee  not  of  the  value  of  a  boat,^  &c.  If  '  dis- 
respect' be  not  intended,  the  accusative  only  follows  the  verb : 
^R^  oRrff^cJnSTc?  '  I  suppose  the  mortar  to  be  wood.' 

p.  When  a  term  of  number  or  quantity  is  used  to  signify 
*  rate  of  wages'  or  '  hire,^  it  takes  either  the  dative  or  instru- 
mental case  :  ^HTR  or  '5J'ff»T  ^fTTH^  "qfc^^nfd  '  He  hires  servants 
by  or  for  a  hundred.' 

g.  ^nrrr,  *  to  give/  preceded  by  trit,  and  implying  ^cohabita- 
tion,' governs  the  dative  when  the  act  is  legal ;  the  instru- 
mental when  criminal :  m^  OT^^  ^TWT  ^^T^  xifw:  '  The 
husband  cohabits  with  his  wife,'  ^with  his  bondswoman.' 

289.  Ablative  case  (w^n^'R  or  xr^rft).  This  case  denotes 
'  a  taking  away,'  '  a  separating  of  or  from,'  *  removal'  or 
'  departure'  of  any  kind ;  as,  ^TRT^mrffT  '  He  comes  from  the 
village ;'  "g^TTR  T^Tm:  ^rf^TJT^T^i^f^^^  ^  He  returned  from 
the  water  of  the  Ganges  afflicted ;'  VTW^s^gri^  inrfw  *  He  falls 
from  a  galloping  horse.'  It  also  implies  metaphorical  dis- 
jimction  ;  as,  mmr^UHPri  *  He  refrains  from  sin  /  Vi#TrJmT?rffT 
'  He  strays  from  virtue.' 

«.  The  ablative  case  has  also  an  inceptive  signification, 
implying  the  cause  or  motive  of  any  act  or  feeling,  or  the 
origin  from  which  any  thing  proceeds,  literally  or  figuratively: 
■^Efklfk*^  ^  'The  woman  is  afraid  of  (or  from)  the  thief;' 
^ftm^lHH  THifT  ^  The  king  protects  from  thieves ;'  iflifV  TiSt 
^^rim^in^Pri  m  ^W^  »R:  '  People  will  think  of  me  thus,  he  is 
afraid  of  Arjuna  in  battle ;'  l^^nu:  inTTt  UHl^'rf  *  Progeny  are  born 
from  Brahma ;'  ^3r^:  f^niT  ^K  \k<^^  ^tH«r  ^^FRT:  *  ReU- 
gious  acts  proceed  from  wealth,  like  rivers  from  mountains.'  , 

b.  Verbs  signifying,  i.  hinderance,  %.  disappearance  or  con- 


NOUNS.  375 

cealment,  3.  being  ashamed  of,  4.  acquiring  knowledge  from, 
5.  being  averse  to,  govern  nouns  in  the  ablative  case.  i.  "inwft 
TR^  ^TTTrflT  ^fbTTc?:  '  The  cowherd  keeps  off  the  cows  from  the 
barley :'  2.  HT^f^^jh?^  '3^\  *  Krishna  hides  from  his  mother : 
3.  HJISKir^^fd  ^  He  is  ashamed  of  his  father-in-law  i'  4.  "^XTT- 
"HnTTT^vtw  flSfTsr:  '  The  pupil  (reads  with  or)  acquires  learning 
from  the  teacher:'  5.  ^nxHRTl!;^  ^ITT'ST^  f^TO:  ^  The  pupil  is 
averse  from  (or  tired  of)  reading  ;'  'm  ^I.N^*^M^  ^^TFRTTT  *  She 
(Sita)  averse  to  (or  abhorring  of)  Ravana.'  When  f»T  with 
TJTT  prefixed  is  used  transitively,  it  of  course  requires  the  accu- 
sative :  ^^♦^(^  MCr^jilH  ^hc:  ^  The  hero  overcomes  the  enemies.' 

c.  The  ablative  is  used  to  express  the  site  from  which  any 
act  is  performed :  i||^^|f{)Hjri  '  He  looks  from  the  palace  ;' 
^TRnrrj^^fFffT^  *  He  rose  from  his  seat.'  Also  a  place  or  period 
from  which  distance  or  time  is  computed  :  miri  "g^  "iftinf 
*  From  the  wood  the  city  is  a  Yojana  distant ;'  chir^^iji  ^Jf^- 
Hii.nHT&  *  From  Kartik  into  the  month  Agrahayaiia.' 

d.  The  ablative  is  also  sometimes  used  to  express  the 
means  by  which  any  end  is  accomplished :  "SfiTT  VJ^  oR^TORT 
^^  I  f^R^^rr  dlQimHI^rfT^fri^fMH  "^  II  *  Committed  sin  is 
destroyed  by  good  acts,  by  refraining  from  it,  by  (from) 
visiting  holy  places,  and  by  repeating  texts  of  the  Vedas  and 
the  institutes :'  ^?f^^T^tt^TTrrfVr  f^  ^MiPh  ^rf^:  '  Their  places 
in  heaven  have  been  obtained  by  the  gods  through  violence.' 

e.  The  words  w^,  5[rrt,  ^rpCTlT,  "^^j  TT^jfifr,  ^f^^  terms 
significant  of  relative  place  or  time,  and  compounds  ending  in 
words  derived  from  ^n^  '  to  go,'  are  connected  with  nouns  in 
the  ablative  case :  ^nift  ^Ti:  '  other  than  Hari ;'  ^TTTt  ^u»lii|^ 
'  different  from  Krishna ;'  -^ilKi^Hif^  ^  near  to  the  wood ;'  "^ 
■g^irnf  '  without  the  man ;'  WTT:  HcfT  or  TfWnf  IT^frf  ^  thenceforth,' 
'  thereafter  ;'  ^tr?^  n^jfir  ^  from  after  a  year ;'  WJIU^P^:  ^  out 
from  the  city ;'  iTPRTfT  Tjft  Y^:  ^  a  tree  east  from  the  village  ;' 
^^n^  "^:  ifiT^MH:  *  The  month  Phalguna  is  before  Chaitra ;' 
■gt  MM^HIft^  '  a  city  east  of  the  wood  ;'  ^nmi^  Hiilf^fo  ^  a 
mountain  west  from  the  village.'     When  ij^  and  similar  terms 


376  SYNTAX.  * 

denote  '  a  part'  of  any  thing,  they  require  the  genitive  case : 
Tjf:  ofirq^  ^  the  fore  part  of  the  body ;'  ^^:  MOjanV  mn:  '  the 
latter  part  of  the  day/ 

f.  The  preposition  ^TT  requires  the  ablative  case  in  the 
sense  of  '  hmitation/  either  of  place^  time,  events,  or  things : 
^Ifl^^lfT  ^  as  far  as  to  the  ocean  ;'  ^T^JUftTTT  '  to  the  end  of 
the  age ; '  WT^ii:  ^^r:  '  Repeated  birth  occurs  until  final 
liberation ;'  ^rnrcfic5Tf^  WST  '  Brahma  extends  unto  (or  compre- 
hends) all  things ;'  H^^r^iTBn??:  "^n^Tl^Tf^'ThpTTTr  '  We  will 
practise  mendicity  even  until  liberation  from  the  body.' 

g.  ^nr  and  Trft:  implying  ^  separations^  and  irfw  signifying 
^  substitution'  or  ^  equivalent,'  require  the  ablative  case :  wxr 
c!ft%«ft  "FJUmf  ^^fw:  '  Dwelling  in  Lanka,  away  or  apart  from 
the  world ;'  trfrfwrW^ft  "^  ^^:  *  The  god  (Indra)  sent  rain 
away  from  Trigartta ;'  IT^^t  ^^roiTTi^  Trfff  ^  Pradyumna  is  the 
substitute  or  representative  of  Krishna ;'  fTT^vq:  irfifT  ^Ef^rfiT 
iTRT"?T  ^  He  gives  Masha  (pulse)  in  place  of,  or  return  for, 
sesamum.' 

A.  Words  implying  *  bound  on  account  of  a  debt'  may  be 
connected  with  the  ablative,  when  the  reason,  not  the  debt,  is 
intended :  ^TTT¥^  "5^  ^  Property  pledged  on  account  of  a 
hundred  ;'  ^^lyi^^  ^  *  Like  one  bound  on  account  of  debt  / 
but  ^T^T^^irt  ^  Bound  by  a  debt,  held  in  bond,  or  indebted,  by  a 
hundred.'  Either  the  instrumental  or  ablative  case  may  be 
used,  when  the  state  or  circumstance  of  the  person  is  the 
result  of  some  property,  not  expressed  by  a  feminine  noun : 
irnq^  or  wn^mn:  ^  Bound  by  or  from  stupidity ;'  ^  m^Ti^ 
UPria^  ^  Thou  goest  to  the  wood  through  folly.' 

i.  The  words  W^,  ^T^j  "^"^5  cfifjnnT,  may  be  used  after  a 
verb,  either  in  the  instrumental  or  ablative  case,  to  imply 
^  degree'  or  *  manner  ;'  as,  ^i^f  or  ^<*i"fg^  '  left  or  liberated 
a  little  ;'  <**^ill  or  "sin^Tr^  ^:  ^  made  with  difficulty;'  <jx^ii|^ 
^H  r<H  ra  '  having  come  with  difficulty  ;'  cjrfirq^  or  ojrfiftrijTrJTITi: 
*  obtained  in  some  degree.'  When  used  with  a  substantive, 
they  agree  with  it  in  case  ;  as,  w^^  f^^  ^:  '  killed  by  a 


NOUNS.  377 

little  poison.'     When  employed  adverbially,  and  not  signifying 

*  instrumentality,'  they  are  put  in  the  accusative  neuter ;  as, 
Wt4  'T^rffr  ^^  ofidfff  '  he  goes  or  does  a  httle/  *  a  short  way,' 
or  *  for  a  short  time/  or  *  a  small  quantity.' 

j.  The  particles  Y^'  -rRTj  and  f^m,  govern  either  the 
accusative,  instrumental,  or  ablative  case :  ^viijiH  T^^W  or 
tTTTr^  *  separate  from,  or  without,  Rama ;'  f^rrr  or  •fRT  ^  ^^ 

or  ^^  '  without  a  deity ;'  f^^  ^^  -^  ^fnT  timmi  irninrnrf 

*  Penitents  do  not  practise  emission  of  breath  without  destruc- 
tion of  life  ;'  ^^  5:^ff«n  »T  ^«nr  '  Pleasure  is  not  obtained 
without  pain  ;'  xr^oR  vi^c^^l  ^  'done  without  deceit ;'  '^^T^J'^TH^Tr: 

*  except  the  wind.' 

290.  Genitive  case  ("^N:  or  ^r^p^:  or  "^).  This  case  is 
employed  when  one  noun  follows  another,  expressed  or  under- 
stood, having  a  different  meaning,  and  to  which  the  latter 
intimates  soine  relation ;  as,  TT^:  tr^:  *  the  man  of  the  king  ;' 
-^^m  wnn  '  the  mother  of  the  boy ;'  ^f^^  >nf  *  the  wealth  of 
the  rich  man ;'  "^^^nf^  Jjm:  '  the  quality  of  the  thing.'  The 
prior  noun  may  be  understood:  'SRi}  ^r4^!)lf^:  I  HWf^  fl«4<f 
^^ftHpH^dlri^  w  '  Fearlessness,  purity  of  nature,  &c.,  are  of  a  man 
born  to  a  heavenly  condition:'  they  are  the  qualities,  tttut: 
imderstood. 

a.  Verbal  derivatives  signifying  *  the  agent'  are  followed  by 
the  object  in  the  genitive  case  ;  as,  »TTrf:  FTT  '  the  creator  of 
the  world ;'  md  M\c6<*:  '  the  protector  of  the  good ;'  Hl.«+^ 
n»|yji:  '  the  victor  of  (over)  hell.'  Those  formed  with  "3"  from 
desiderative  verbs  govern  the  accusative ;  TTiH  r^  f^^J  ^  The 
king  is  desirous  of  seeing  thee.'  So  do  those  with  "5^ ;  as, 
"IwriT  ijlf1«h)  ift:  '  Hari  is  the  destroyer  of  the  demons :'  but 
not  when  the  root  is  WJ ;  ^nFcTRT:  chiHod:  '  the  lover  of  the 
beloved.' 

b.  Similar  derivatives,  implying  *  the  act,'  may  be  followed 
by  the  agent  or  the  object  of  the  act  in  the  genitive :  i^^M^ 
fwn  "  the  act  of  a  man  ;'  ciitMillMf  V'^:  *  the  duty  of  Brah- 
mans  ;'   Jppsi  ^TFT  '  the  drinking  of  milk  ;'  W  ^:  '  the  milk- 

3  c 


378  SYNTAX. 

ing  of  kine/  The  subject  also  may  follow  the  property  in  the 
genitive ;  as,  ^T^PBT  ^t:  '  the  speed  of  a  horse  ;'  »t>r:  ^T?r  '  the 
sweetness  of  honey/  When  the  act  is  followed  by  both  the 
agent  and  the  object,  each  may  be  put  in  the  genitive  case; 
sfnif:  ^fFt^rw:  '  the  creation  of  the  world  of  (by)  Brahma  :'  or 
the  agent  or  instrument  may  take  the  instrumental  case ;  WlKl 
^fFi^TOT.  A  term  expressing  *  aggregation'  is  followed  by  the 
objects  collected  in  the  genitive :  tl^  ^MT- '  an  assemblage  of 
princes  ;'  xrmrrf  ^RT^TT.  '  a  flock  of  cattle  ;'  VJ^HRftfrT:  JHTc^c^SHiNiil 
^P^MTTT:  ^  a  collection  of  wind,  water,  light,  and  smoke.' 

c.  Verbs  of  '  speaking  to/  *  communicating  or  representing 
to,'  '  conveying  to,  as  speech  and  the  like,*  are  commonly 
followed  by  the  person  spoken  to  in  the  genitive  case :  TTi^^ 
*  Tell  me  that ;'  c^^d|^^ml^*^  W  '  I  will  tell  thee ;'  SHI^a^  ^  H^NI^'^ 
^1^^  ^rftr  ^  inr:  '  Tell  me,  mighty  armed,  for  thou  art  thought 
of  me  to  be  all-wise;'  rH^<i|IHI«  P^d^HI^  ^  '^^(^M^  ^^5^ 
'  He  represented  to  Chitrasena,  and  he  to  (of)  Indra ;'  ftnrRT: 
^"^^  ^  ^  *  Bear  news  of  me  to  my  beloved.'  Instances  of 
their  occurrence  with  similar  terms  in  the  accusative  and 
dative  cases  have  already  been  given.  Trnr,  *  to  ask'  for  any 
thing,  governs  the  object  in  the  genitive :  ^TFH  Hl^^  *  Ask  for 
firmness ;'  V«T^  «TT^  '  He  asks  for  wealth.'  But  when  the 
person  is  designated,  it  governs  an  accusative :  rfivjp'ri  ^  •TTT  "JT 
oiflchHI^*  *  Who  do  not  implore  the  lord  of  the  world  ?'  Trai, 
'  to  ask,'  may  govern  the  person  in  the  genitive,  the  thing  in 
the  accusative :  ^r^^ac^  oR^tN^»TT^*  '  not  asking  the  way  from 
any  one.'  It  also  governs  a  double  accusative,  the  person 
being  one :   <^^[<i  ""J^aifiT  mi '  He  asks  thee  after  thy  health.' 

d.  The  verb  ^,  '  to  hear,'  governs  the  genitive  case  of  the 
person  speaking ;  as,  ijTdLHPM  ^  ^  '  Asking,  hear  of  me  ;' 
inW  riNxad^M  ohvjiirt:  (^)  ^  Hear  from  me,  describing  it,  the  road :' 
but  this  is  considered  as  an  eUiptical  form  of  expression,  the 
word  c(x|*i,  or  some  synonyme  of  words  or  speech,  being 
understood.  The  verb  governs  also  the  ablative :  ^"Vorwwni^^ 
Mm^figfn  *  She  will  hear  very  attentive  from  me.' 


NOUNS.  879 

c.  >T,  *  to  be,*  preceded  by  ir,  signifying  '  to  have  power  or 
authority  over,'  may  govern  the  object  in  the  genitive  case : 
iwr^  f^T»f^  ch>^|9iH4:M  H^KM:  '  The  prince  has  power  over 
his  own  daughter  ;*  THTRT  TWrfif  TI»TT  '  The  king  is  lord  over 
the  people.'  Verbs  expressing  *  to  be  stronger  than,'  or  '  to 
prevail  over,^  govern  the  genitive :  Hllfl'^ll^f*!  oh^H  *  No  one 
prevailed  over  him.'  Verbs  signifying  *  to  be  angry  with,' 
'  to  do  violence  or  injury  to,'  or  '  to  desire,'  may  govern  the 
genitive :  it  "^  TT^  V#^  "«?  i^  ^5^  'TT  *  I  am  not  angry  with 
thee  ;  thou  hast  done  no  wrong  to  me :'  ^Ts^  ^hhmI  «T 
<5^rH  ^  cj,|d.K|rH  I  <*«HitlT  T^nrr  TT^  ^^  ^«4€l^  rT^  II  ^  When  a 
man  neither  does  wrong  to,  nor  wishes  for,  all  beings,  either  in 
act,  thought,  or  speech,  he  obtains  Brahma'  (final  fehcity). 
These  latter  verbs  may  also  govern  other  cases  (rule  288,/.) 

f.  ^  *  to  know,'  when  signifying  something  else  than  true 
knowledge,  and  w^hen  knowledge  is  not  a  property  of  the 
thing  known,  governs  the  genitive  case :  «fiAi(t  "«T(vfld  ^  He 
knows  ghee.'  "^  '  to  have  pity  on,'  f;^?  '  to  be  lord  of,'  and 
"^  '  to  make,'  implying  some  particular  effort,  and  verbs  signi- 
fying ^  to  remember,'  also  govern  the  genitive :    f{lHMI  ^'T^ 

*  Have  pity  on  the  wretched ;'  VTRT^ft^  tc^w  *  The  Yaksha% 
rule  over  riches ;'  ^vt^cB^qtT^^  ^  He  prepares  the  fuel  and 
water  for  an  oblation  ;'  ^m^mHIH  U«i«tlNIJ|Hf4i^  ^  The  two 
princes  have  made  preparations  for  coming  hither ;'  HTj:  ^RRfir 

*  He  remembers  his  mother ;'  ^lif^^:^  '^'^hth:  tAHm  W^rH-adLfH 

*  Who,  being  in  pain,  wishes  to  remember  pleasure  ?'  ^rwfrT  TT^ 
cTS^nrr:  ^  LakshmaAa  thinks  of  thee.'  In  these  cases,  however, 
an  ellipse  is  supposed,  a  prior  substantive  in  the  accusative 
case  being  understood :  ^rW^  ^pn"?^  »TT»ftw  *  He  understands 
(the  properties  of)  ghee  ;'  fflHMIH^^Jilf  ?pT5^  '  Pity  the  condition 
of  the  wretched,'  &c.  Otherwise  these  verbs  govern  the  accu- 
sative :'  ^rfT^^*  *iih1^,  ^bn^  ^t?w,  c*I<+h1^,  'fnwt  wtf^. 

9'  S^>  '  to  see,'  in  the  causal  may  govern  the  person  in  the 
genitive  instead  of  the  accusative  (r.  286,  ^) :  ^  >j|ri^^^lHlfl 
■^  «F§  '  He  shewed  of  (to)  his  brother  those  two  hands.' 

3  c  2 


380  SYNTAX. 

h.  Verbs  implying  *  sickness/  except  from  fever,  govern  the 
person  in  the  genitive :  M^^W  ^^TTiTlwiT:  *  Dysentery  affects 
the  man :'  but  7f  ^W^rfTT^i::  ^  Fever  affects  him.' 

i,  ifnT  ^  to  hurt,'  Uterally  or  figuratively,  "^  *  to  kill,*  pre- 
ceded by  f^  or  IT,  or  both,  WZ  and  "^r^T  ^  to  hurt,*  and  fxTW  *  to 
pound,'  when  it  implies  *  hurting,'  govern  the  object  in  the 
genitive  case :  ^^^tD^ftWRnrflf  tl»n  *  The  king  punishes  the 
thief  ;*  «^>^1<vTf(lf(^lr^H:  *  Remove  or  destroy  thy  sorrow ;'  tT^- 
^fTRT  uPiir^rH^^rH  (H^rcw^frf  or  PH^fH ^MPrt)  tTR:  *  Rama  will  destroy 
the  Rakshasas  ;*  Y^c5^£flTf7^Tfff  or  "^ivi^ifd  ^  He  destroys  the 
outcaste ;'  ^I'^f^^.^  fcRftr  tht:  '  The  elephant  grinds  the  felon/ 
If  injury  is  not  meant,  fxp^  governs  the  accusative  :  VT«TT:  iTT"!Tf^ 
'  He  grinds  the  corn.'  Other  verbs  signifying  ^  to  injure' 
usually  govern  the  object  in  the  accusative :  TrfVcfi  f^Hftcr  ^trm: 

*  The  tiger  destroys  the  traveller.' 

j.  The  compound  verb  ^n^  *  to  transact  business,'  and 
xniT  '  to  deal,'  or  *  engage  in  any  office,'  govern  the  word  signi- 
fying the  terms  of  the  transaction  in  the  genitive  :  ^|ri^ 
'^'=1^1.01  or  tTO^  *  He  sells  or  buys  or  deals  for,  or  stakes,  a 
hundred  ;'  MUlllHmMrillgnfl  i:r^^lMirH^M^«^  ^  Ravana,  bringing 
^hee  hither,  has  trafficked  for  (or  staked)  his  life.'  So  f^  '  to 
play,'  meaning  ^  to  deal,'  or  '  pledge :'  'ei^^^'g^irRf  *  He  has 
played  for  his  kindred  and  enjoyments.'  But  when  f^^  is 
preceded  by  a  preposition,  it  may  govern  either  the  accusative 
or  the  genitive ;  Tn^^^^TW^R'^'^  or  W^^X  *  He  haa  staked,  or 
has  trafficked  for,  his  own  fortune.' 

k.  Participles,  whether  past  or  future,  having  a  present 
application,  govern  the  object  in  the  genitive  case :  TT?":  ^'Tift 
or  "^1^  f^:  '  The  Brahman  is  esteemed  or  reverenced  of  the 
king ;'  ^  >n#:  ^  ^RWf  ^nn  '  that  which  is  thought  virtue  of 
(by)  the  good ;'  ^rftr^rFT  ^  TTR^  JH^HH  *  He  gave  the  signet, 
recognised  or  cherished  of  Rama ;'  TT^  cJ^^fiTJ^^  fWi^  ^  Both 
worlds    are    conquered  of   or  by  him ;'    ^^:    "|p?f   Tl^nrfrnr^ 

*  (marked)  by   the  feet  of  the   chief  of  Rama's  race,  praised 
of  (by)  men.'      Participles  of  the   neuter   gender,  signifying 


NOUNS.  381 

*  site*  or  *  circumstance/  have  a  similar  government :    TTH^ 

'  Sita  having  repeatedly  inquired  after  the  sleeping,  eating, 
talking,  laughing,  staying,  going  of  Rama,  dismissed  Hanuman.' 
(The  participles  are  in  fact  used  as  nouns,  and  are  consequently 
followed  by  the  noun  to  which  they  relate  in  the  genitive.) 

/.  The  word  ^,  *  cause,*  *  motive,'  or  ^  object,*  follows  a 
verb  in  the  genitive  case :  ^sr^^  ^fftt^rr^fTf  «  He  follows  for 
the  sake  of  food ;'  ^ri1?lUl:U  SPq^tim;  HiiHNl^lHflcfcVjf  '  He 
repeated  the  praise  of  Rama,  for  the  purpose  of  apprising 
Maithili.'  It  is  also  used  interrogatively  and  responsively  in 
this  and  in  other  cases,  with  a  pronoun ;  as,  "SivJEiT  %ift:,  i^  t^^U 
'  For  what  reason?'  'why?'  Svherefore?'  in^  %fft:,  ^  ^ij*iT» 
"nwr^lft:,  *  For  this  or  that  reason,'  *  thus,'  '  therefore.'  Its 
synonymes  may  be  similarly  used  ;  as,  ^J5^  frifit^^,  "Sfi^  inft- 
9ir|^,  &c. :  but  they  are  more  usually  employed  adverbially  in 
the  accusative  neuter ;  as,  f^  PriPH^,  f^  Tnftinf,  and  the  like. 

m.  Indeclinable  words  formed  with  the  affix  "s^j^tft  govern 
the  genitive  case :  ^|ri*HW^<*^i:  W^K^j^l  T:f?R:  '  The  best  of 
the  race  of  Raghu  thinks  of  thee  alone  a  hundred  times  of  a 
day,'  Numerals  in  a  similar  sense  of  repetition  have  a  similar 
government :  "fex^s^ft^  ^  He  reads  twice  a  day.' 

n.  Indeclinable  words,  or  words  so  used,  being  terms  of 
relative  site,  may  govern  the  genitive  (as  well  as  the  ablative) 
case :  Tf^  Pbf^HI  ^i^snTf7  "Ji:^:  '  Having  stood  in  some  manner 
before  (it)  the  cloud ;'  t^^f^  "JCT  ^  '  Thou  art  before  or  in  front 
of  me ;'  ^^^fhff  ^TSrn^  '  before  your  friends  ;'  umi^  ^jT:  *  in 
front,  or  on  the  east,  of  the  village ;'    ^^l^ifhTft:  or  4^0,1;  iff 

*  above  the  tree.'  When  such  words  are  formed  with  ^rj, 
they  may  govern  the  accusative :  ^TH  or  jjjw^  ^ft^^«T  '  south 
of  the  village.' 

0.  Words  implying  '  propinquity'  or  *  distance'  may  govern 
a  genitive  case :  HWTWt  HIM^lHIjiMW  ^  near  to  the  Madhavi 
bower ;'  "Wt  JUn  ITW  ^nn^  '  she  having  gone  near  him  ;* 
f^^TTCT   '  They   alighted    near    to   Damayanti  ;* 


SYNTAX. 


HUiAM  ^  TcT:  *  He  went  far  from  the  city.*  They  also  govern 
the  accusative :  cj^ir^^lH^'«ll.^l'ilHHr»H«hrf^  ^  Once  Rama  ram- 
bling about  from  the  neighbourhood  of  the  hermitage/ 

p.  Words  implying  *  likeness'  or  ^  equality'  may  govern 
either  the  genitive  or  instrumental  case :  ip^  Tfifw  ^Enrt  ^t^ 
ijrvfaiiHrM  cR'^SR  ^  The  equal  of  whom  in  valour  is  no  one  upon 
earth ;'  oKts"^sf^  ft^^H  'TR  ^  Who  else  is  like  me  ?'  or  if  r^rrr 
^F5T:  ohHyrT  f^  "?ft^  PNilH  '  The  like  to  thee  is  not  known  in 
the  three  worlds ;'  vwfw  ^hfT  TT-srftr:  ^hmi:  '  Devoid  of  virtue, 
(men)  are  like  beasts.'  The  substantives  "jcJT  '  equality,'  <JMHI 
'  resemblance,'  are  followed  by  the  genitive  only :  ^  ejiUii^ 
"jcsjf  or  4i|Hf  *T  irr>T:  *  He  has  not  the  equality  or  similitude  of 
KrishAa.' 

q.  Neuter  or  indeclinable  nouns  importing  '  benediction' 
are  followed  by  the  object  in  either  the  dative  or  genitive 
case  :  ^srrj'*^  ^^^^^  or  ^^^^r«I  '  Long  life  (be)  of  or  to 
Devadatta.' 

r.  The  genitive  case  is  used  absolutely  with  a  participle : 
JI-odLHU^  *  as  he  was  going  ;'  ikmn  m  '  as  we  were  looking 
on  ;'  %^^:  I|H|HMI^U  '  whilst  Vaidharbhi  was  beholding.'  It 
is  also  used  with  the  auxiliary  verb  ^^  in  the  sense  of '  pos- 
session :'  ^srftcT  ^  '  there  is  of  me,'  i.  e.  I  have  ;  ^R^  «nT^ 
r«*n«5l<r«  W^  *  There  is  of  this  person  some  power,'  i.  e.  I 
have  some  power. 

s.  The  term  "^  governs  a  genitive  case :  ^^ohic«^^  4^1  tM^ 
^  *  for  the  sake  of  a  brief  dominion.' 

291.  Locative  case  (^rfVr«5T3^).  This  case  expresses  the 
site  or  receptacle  of  any  object,  whether  substantial  or  ideal, 
that,  in  or  upon  or  over  which,  any  other  thing  is  situated, 
any  act  performed,  any  property  exhibited,  or  any  notion 
comprehended,  &c.  H^  frTFfw  •Tt:  *  The  man  stands  on  the 
ground ;'  ^  MiTa  fw^:  '  The  lion  roams  in  the  forest ;'  oR^ 
^TT^  ssil^iU:  '  The  Brahman  sits  on  a  mat ;'  WT^n'?^  M^frt  *  He 
boils  the  rice  in  a  pot ;'  or%^  "SF^nrfiT  '  He  speaks  or  whispers 
in  the  ear  ;'  ^flift  Xj^  '  timid  in  war ;'  f^f^  ^  '  fortitude  in 


NOUNS. 

adversity ;'  ^  :)l ^H i  *  whiteness  in  the  swan  ;'  SHIf*<»^lf4^iH  ^ff 
M^^fri  '  He  beholds  spirit  in  himself.' 

a.  This  case  is  sometimes  used  to  express  the  thing  or 
purpose  for  which  any  act  is  performed,  when  it  is  essentially 
connected  with  some  other  thing,  the  object  of  the  act :  ^?#ft!T 
ifHxpf  if^  ^^inft  "tf'iT  ^r^jdH  I  ^i^  ^^inSI'*  ^f^r  ^ftf^  yMic4<*l  ^w:  ii 
^  He  kills  the  tiger  for  its  skin  ;  the  elephant  for  its  two  tusks. 
He  kills  the  Yak  for  the  long  hair:  the  musk-deer  is  slain 
for  its  musk.'  If  the  connexion  is  not  intimate,  that  for  or 
on  account  of  which  the  act  is  done  requires  the  dative  case 
(288,  h).  The  locative  is  also  used  when  the  object  is  of  a  more 
general  nature  :  xnrnjFtsf^  Vim  ^fi^  TTl^  '  As  thou  art  made 
by  the  Creator  for  acts,  perform  them.' 

h»  The  locative  case  is  usually  required  in  connexion  with 
prepositions  signifying  '  being  over'  or  *  upon'  in  any  manner : 
Tqxrnif  ^\yiUi:  '  The  virtues  of  Hari  are  above  infinite  number ;' 
^rfv  Hf%  tm:  '  Rama  is  over  the  world :'  but  both  these  may 
signify  ^  inferiority'  also  ;  as,  "5R  in::^  '  inferior  to  heroes  ;* 
wfv  TTH  ^:  '  The  earth  is  under  Rama.^  When  ^rfv  is  com- 
pounded with  ^,  and  the  verb  implies  '  subjection,'  it  governs 
the  accusative  case  :  ^  HTJrfv^fifbiTfw  ^fi«^  f^PH  ^'^'cij^ri  '  If  he 
will  acknowledge  me  superior  (lit.  If  he  will  make  me  over 
him),  he  shall  be  appointed  to  the  work.'  In  the  sense  of 
'  superiority'  the  ablative  case  may  be  also  used  :  Tft^  or 
cytcfiT^fvsRt  ^ft:  ^  Vishnu  is  greater  than  the  world.' 

c.  The  words  FTg  and  f^T^  are  followed  by  the  object  in 
the  locative  case,  unless  the  prepositions  ^rg,  Trfr,  or  irfif 
intervene  :  HIhHl  WTV:  *  pious  to  his  mother ;'  fwftl  Ph Mill: 
'  dutiftd  to  his  father :'  but  imrt  irfrf  ^nv:  Pmhi^h^  Phmiii:. 

d.  The  locative  case  is  sometimes  used  to  signify  that  from 
which  any  result  may  be  expected,  in  the  Hke  manner  as  the 
ablative ;  as,  fV^  (or  fV^TT^m^)  VHUgRll  f^  TO  cW^  *  In  (or 
from)  the  destruction  of  the  sons  of  Dhritarash^ra  what  advan- 
tage is  obtained?' 

e.  A  frequent  use  of  the  locative  case  is  its  employment  as 


384  SYNTAX. 

the  ablative  case  absolute,  in  connexion  with  a  participle  in 
the  same  case  :  ^f^  nk  '  I  being  gone  ;'  Trf^fTJ^rffT  '  that  being 
so ;'  ITWIH^  «T>Tf^  '  The  month  S'ravaAa  being  at  hand  ;'  cRt^ 
^  in^  '  A  lucky  time  being  arrived.'  More  than  one  sub- 
stantive may  be  thus  connected  with  the  participle,  when  the 
latter  will  agree  in  number  and  person  with  the  substantive 
nearest  to  it :  ^s1>TR^  ^W  "WT^  ^M€IIW*i^^  *  The  boy  Abhi- 
manyu  being  slain,  and  the  sons  of  Draupadi:'  (^""^  being 
understood).  As  mentioned  above,  the  genitive  is  similarly 
employed  ;'  as,  ^5^:  "J^^  or  ^fw  "5^  ITT^TIT^  *  (Though)  his 
son  was  weeping,  he  went  forth  (to  lead  a  life  of  mendicity).^ 

y.  Words  signifying  '  proximity'  or  *  distance'  may  be  used 
adverbially  in  the  locative  case :  TT^ctt:  ^hIm  Hr^T  '  having  gone 
near  her'  (in  her  vicinity) ;  ^  ?T"R^  '  at  a  distance  from  the 
village.'  These  and  similar  words  may  be  used  in  like  manner 
in  other  cases;  as,  ijiH^  nt  ^F  &c.  iror  takes  only  the 
locative  case :  H^pft  ^nsfhrx^  TT5TW  19?  ^  Bhaimi  was  resplendent 
amongst  (in  the  midst  of)  her  companions.' 

£f.  The  names  of  asterisms,  employed  to  signify  the  period 
of  their  being  above  the  horizon,  may  follow  a  verb  either  in 
the  locative  or  instrumental  case :  ^  (or  JJ^^)  ^TT^T^^^^* 
tjf^  (or  'il^iiJfT)  fw^t^  *  Let  a  man  invoke  Devi  at  the  time 
(or  rising)  of  the  lunar  constellation  Mula,  and  dismiss  her  at 
that  of  S'ravaAa.'  If  the  asterism  itself  is  intended  as  the  site 
or  receptacle  of  a  planet,  the  locative  alone,  of  course,  is  used : 
"5^  "^^  '  The  moon  is  in  Pushya.' 

h.  The  locative  case  is  used  to  designate  any  given  period : 
wftR''^  ^BT^  '  at  that  time  ;'  ^^  ^^TE^T  f^TM^  ^  upon  the  close 
of  this  speech  ;'  ^s^  Wc5^OTfc5^  ^  TTprf  ^  ^  '  Hke  the 
Sthala-padma  flower  on  a  cloudy  day,  neither  awake  nor 
asleep.'  It  is  also  optionally  used  with  the  ablative  to  denote 
any  intervening  term,  either  of  time  or  space :  ^frer  ^Wl^'^  ST^ 
(or  ar^)  >Tt^  '  Having  eaten  to-day,  he  will  eat  in  or  after 
two  days ;'  ^^wts^f  ^^  (or  IKt^mi^)  «5^  f^iq^  '  Standing  here, 
he  pierces  the  mark  at  (or  from)  a  Kos.' 


ADJECTIVES.  385 

i.  The  words  iiPHri  and  Tr^"5fi  govern  either  the  instrumental 
or  locative  case :  irftllft  ^fWT  or  ^  '  attached  to  Hari ;'  "qmx 
irf^eiTR  or  xiT^  MP^ri  xfH^jigcRT  ^  The  wife  is  anxious  for  her 
absent  husband.' 

j.  The  words  ^[^Hi  and  "^^m  govern  either  the  genitive  or 
the  locative  case,  when  not  used  literaUy :  ^TTJ^  "^ftTnT^T^  or 
"^R^  *  intent  upon  worshipping  Hari :'  so  ^^Tcvj:  tJiTH  or  tjjtT^ 
'  happy  in  w  orshipping.^  If  literally  employed^  they  govern 
the  locative  only :  WT^^  f^*  ^^  '  ^^^  bullock  harnessed  to 
the  cart ;'   cRwf^  cF^r?j:  '  skilful  in  work.* 

k,  A  noun  following  either  of  the  words  T^jft,  ^['SR:,  ^rfV^fiT:, 
^"RT^:,  Wl"^,  lTffT>|:,  or  TT^:,  is  put  in  either  the  genitive  or 
locative  case :  tT^  or  xfVj  ^irft  '  the  owner  of  kine ;'  ijOa^m: 
or  trp2T^rni1"^gi::  '  lord  in  or  of  the  world  ;'  T(T^'^  or  a^iHIilUHfv- 
xrfiT:  ^  chief  in  or  over  the  villages  ;'  ftr^^j^^q  or  ftr'^T^  ^TTT^: 
*  heir  of  the  paternal  portion ;'  oq^j^iX  or  <«<^n.^  WT^ '  witness 
in  or  of  a  suit ;'  ^^?T^  or  ^^  ^^^^^  ^  a  surety  in  or  of  (for) 
appearance  ;'  t^^  or  xj-qf  TfW^  ifhr: '  the  cowherd  born  amongst 
or  for  cattle,'  i.  e.  to  tend  them. 

292.  Vocative  case  (^f^hnr).  This  is  considered  in  native 
grammars  to  be  not  a  distinct  case,  but  the  nominative 
employed  in  addressing  or  calling,  with  a  slight  modification 
of  the  singular  number  only.  Its  use  is  the  same  as  in  other 
languages  :  ^^  ijf^  ^  O  Indra^  come ;  ^V^^^-^^  m^jft '  Gan- 
dhari,  rise  up.^ 

a.  The  vocative  case  is  commonly  used  without  any  inter* 
jection  ;  but  it  is  also  frequently  employed  with  one,  when, 
as  above  stated  (r.  162,,  a),  different  particles  are  employed 
to  signify  respectful  or  disrespectful  address  :  >ft  Ht:  MfljidU  '  O 
Pandits ;'  "^  xn^  *  Ho,  traveller.' 

SECTION  IL 

Adjectives, 

293.  The  adjective  agrees  with  a  corresponding  substantive 
noun  or  pronoun,  expressed  or  understood,  in  gender,  number, 

3  o 


SYNTAX. 


and  case  :  «lc*c|R  ^^: '  a  strong  man  ;'  i^M^rit  ^  *  a  beautiful 
woman  ;'  w  "^  '  a  white  umbrella ;'  ftTfTf^R  «Ic5)p*<^  *  like 
two  mighty  Hons ;'  ^rwm^  ^^TRt^  ^^R%^  ^Tl^f^  ^^JTH^  '  He 
approached  the  steeds,  spare,  vigorous,  and  able  for  the  road/ 

a.  When  a  common  adjective  occurs  in  a  sentence  with 
more  than  one  noun  or  pronoun,  it  may  take  the  plural 
number  and  the  prevailing  gender,  and  agree  with  them 
collectively:  ^^  ^T^'hrr^  ^|f  WTT^:  ^I  and  mine  are  all 
dependent  upon  thee ;'  ^^  ^  Hlrilfqrid  ^uft  HTt^T  wn:  f^m 
^»*iohi«H  "^Hf  ^rsrr  HW^T  ^^rJ^^TT  *  Manu  has  said,  that  both 
parents  when  aged,  a  virtuous  wife,  and  an  infant  son,  are  to 
be  nourished,  even  if  they  do  a  hundred  improper  acts.'  If 
the  words  admit  of  the  disjunctive  copulative,  expressed  or 
understood,  the  adjective  will  be  put  in  the  singular  number, 
and  agree  in  gender  with  the  word  nearest  to  it :  "^im  <^c^^: 
"SR^:  JyiHlHI  ''^  ^W  *  Sorrow,  strife,  or  itching,  being  yielded 
to,  augments/ 

b.  Many  words  properly  attributives  are  used  as  substan- 
tives :  TT^T  'HHt5t:  ^*^WT  "^  f^^t^sf^  cR^aTf  '  Mortals  are 
become  immortals  (or  immortal) ;  there  is  no  difference  what- 
ever/ Most  attributives  of  agency,  derived  from  verbs,  admit 
of  this  apphcation ;  »lJ|r*#r  *  the  maker  of  the  world,'  *  a  deity ;' 
S H IH f  %7rr  *  the  leader  of  armies,'  '  a  general,'  &c. ;  as  has 
already  been  intimated  in  considering  the  cases  of  the  nouns. 

c.  Adjectives,  when  expressing  degrees  of  comparison,  influ- 
ence the  inflexions  of  the  nouns  with  which  they  are  con- 
nected. When  they  express  the  comparative  degree,  the  noun 
is  put  in  the  ablative  case :  "?T  i^Tpftsf^  >rTTiT  *  There  is  nothing 
better  than  wealth ;'  ^H^HI^firf?^  i^'im^  *  Yudhisht'hira  is 
older  than  Arjima/  When  the  superlative,  the  noun  takes 
either  the  genitive  or  the  locative  case :  VT#TT^  or  vrtTTSTOT 
5■^f*^fT:  mfyy:  '  Duryodhana  was  the  wickedest  of  the  sons  of 
Dhritarasht'ra.'  The  comparative  may  also  be  used  with  the 
instrumental  case :  ^  "g  WfTTT^  ^"m  '  Who  has  a  more  happy 
ending  than  I  ?'  ^  %i»WR  ^^T  ^wAgril^M^r  ^rr^rnim:^  HT 


ADJECTIVES.  387 

Mc^inHHUfv^i:  '  If  he  has  died  who  was  four  times  more  pros- 
perous than  thou,  and  more  virtuous  than  thy  son,  grieve  not 
for  thy  son.'  The  termination  of  degree  may  convert  a  sub- 
stantive into  an  adjective  :  ^ra^w:  ^^iHT:  '  Contentment  is  most 
heavenly.' 

d.  The  adjective  is  sometimes  employed  in  a  comparative 
signification,  whilst  retaining  its  positive  form  ;  as,  mMKuTH^ 
<*r<JH  ^^  '  a  heart  hard  (or  harder)  than  stone  ;'  "^Ml^if  or 
^Qm  %^\  ttt:  *  Maitra  is  clever  (the  cleverest)  of,  or  amongst, 
the  scholars.' 

e.  "^,  either  singly  or  compounded,  expresses  the  super- 
lative degree,  and  governs  either  the  genitive  or  locative  case : 
-ciriuir^f  7n:  TT^TT  75^^ Ml*  chi^H  ^  '  The  cow  is  the  best  of 
quadrupeds  ;  gold  the  best  of  metals,'  This  word,  may  be 
similarly  used  in  the  neuter  gender  and  singular  number  in 
apposition  with  nouns  in  any  gender  or  number,  and  in  con- 
nexion w ith  a  negative  :  ^nTT7TH7T^#RT}f  ^l^HI^Ji  ^  -^^ifniH:  *  Of 
^sons)  unborn,  dead,  or  silly,  the  two  first  are  the  best,  not 
the  last;'  ^7^^  n^  -q^  ^  ^  H^^^l^l^fq  ^  One  son  of  good 
qualities  is  better  than  a  hundred  blockheads.' 

f.  Terms  implying  '  less'  or  *  more,^  either  in  quantity  or 
•degree,  and  used  in  a  comparative  relation,  govern  the  ablative 
case :  ^jrildH  '  less  than  a  hundred  ;'  ^irr^fy^  '  more  than  a 
hundred  ;'  ^TRTt^:  ^^-Hlr^  f^Ff%H»t  '  Intelligence  from  a  lover 
is  something  less  than  a  meeting.'  ^f^ofi  may  also  be  con- 
nected with  the  noun  in  the  genitive  and  locative  case :  ^^ 
sfvofi:  TCm\  '  A  Prastha  is  more  than  a  Kudava ;'  rlmfmAl<>lil 
Trai:  "^i^  '  five  months  more  than  those  (years).' 

^.  The  government  of  numerals  has  already  been  adverted 
to  (p.  88) ;  to  which  it  may  be  added,  that  their  Taddhita 
derivatives  may  be  used  analogously  to  "^rffj  wdth  the  invariable 
neuter  termination,  with  nouns  of  any  gender  and  in  any 
case:  inf^  M^l^lH  ^Im^t:  ^1^"^  ^rfWll'^  'After  that,  he  had 
fifty  maiden  daughters;'  t(^t^  J^ft:  ^dl^H^^MS^^  f^ 
'  Fifty  other  sons  of  the  Manu  were  upon  the  earth.' 

3  D  2 


S88  SYNTAX. 

SECTION    HI. 

Pronouns, 

294.  Personal  pronouns  of  the  first  or  second  person  have 
but  one  gender :  those  of  the  third,  and  pronouns  of  the  other 
classes,  vary  their  gender  according  to  the  noun  to  which  they 
relate,  expressed  or  understood  :  "iR^  "J^t  '  that  man  ;'   ir^  "JTrQ" 

*  this  woman  -,'  ^  f^rfeRT  ^  '  made  by  that  artist.' 

a.  The  optional  inflexions  of  the  two  first  personal  pronouns, 
TT,  ^,  tft,  m,  r«rr,  ^,  ^P^,  ^:,  are  not  used  indiscriminately,  but 
with  certain  limitations.  They  are  not  to  be  used  at  the 
beginning  of  a  metrical  foot  or  period,  nor  in  construction 
with  the  conjunctions  ^,  ^T^,  ^,  or  the  expletives  ^  and  ^?^, 
nor  with  a  word  meaning  ^  seeing,^  used  metaphorically :  TH" 
^m^  tnr^  «m  WSurrH^iy^:  ^Thy  enemies,  O  king,  they  are 
still  more  mine,'  not  w  ^^^:  at  the  head  of  the  line,  even  if 
the  metre  allowed  it ;  ^^Tfl"|Tifl^,  not  "sft  and  ^*  with  ^,  *  of 
us  two,  and  of  you  two ;'  ^Mr^  t:^  '  May  Hari  even  pre- 
serve me,'  not  in ;  ^rw*^  TT  "5^*4  ^hnrf  ^  Let  it  be  given  to  us 
or  to  you,'  not  "^ft  ^  "q^  ^ ;  ^Rwrf^^Fn'  f  ^^  '  '^^^  wealth  is  in 
vain,'  not  ^  ^.  In  these  prohibitions  euphony  is  consulted, 
and  also  distinctness.  When  '  seeing'  is  intended  in  any  other 
than  a  literal  sense,  the  substitutes  are  not  employed :  '^^T 
HI^Hj?  '  He  sees  thee  by  his  mind.'  When  the  '  seeing'  is 
literal,  either  form  may  be  allowed,  ?n  or  ^rf,  i^  or  i^  "^^TrfrT 
^  He  beholds  me,'  &c. ;  xr^xrj  Hlf^o^ftlrt  '  Let  him  see  thee 
without  delay.' 

b.  These  substitutes  may  not  be  used  after  a  noun  in  the 
vocative  case,  being  the  first  in  a  sentence,  unless  an  epithet 
intervene :  ^^  im  t|H4t^«4  '  O  my  Guru !  salutation  to  thee ;' 
but  ^"t  <*mrt1  ^:  Tqrf^  '  O  merciful  Hari !   protect  us.' 

c.  The  relative  pronoun  agrees  with  its  antecedent  in  num- 
ber and  gender :  the  case  is  determined  by  its  connexion  with 
other  parts  of  the  sentence  :  x|^  ^  ^stjK  75^  ^^^^^  ^  ^ift'l^'iT 

*  Let  a  wise  man  associate  that  with  that,  with  which  any  thing 


PRONOUNS.  389 

in  the  world  corresponds  ;'  "J^:  ^  ttt.  ^T^  ^^rMini^^lPH  ^irrfVr 
^■5T  ^|rH({  "fTff  ^  He  is  the  supreme  male,  O  Partha,  in  whose 
interior  all  beings  abide,  by  whom  the  universe  is  pervaded/ 

d.  The  masculine  and  feminine  inflexions  of  the  third  per- 
sonal pronoun  are  not  unfrequently  used  in  combination  with 
the  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  person,  or  as  substitutes 
for  them,  Hke  '  ipse,'  ^  ipsa,'  in  Latin :  ^s^^rrf  Tifif  imr:  '  I 
(ego  ipse)  have  come  to  this  condition  ;'  ^s^  ^^iMi^i  c5^ 
^l^llf  '  1  (ego  ipsa)  am  the  vilest  of  women  in  the  world ;'  ^ 
ik  HnrfTPTFT  irfw  Hr^^i**!  *  Do  thou  (tu  ipse)  console  these 
thy  brothers  ;'  ^  ^if  t^H^n<<W  '^TCR:  TjHqVirHHf  '  We  (nos  ipsi) 
traverse  this  earth  in  search  of  Damayanti.'  It  is  used  some- 
times without  the  proper  personal  pronoun :  "m  fa^UHlfritf  tjiJ 
Tiq"  TT  ^  Do  thou  (ipsa)  quickly  mount  either  an  elephant  or 
chariot ;'  ^  iTrarT  WT^  ^  A^^^  "q^T  fVfv  I  ^^f^  I  '  Do  thou 
(ipse),  having  gone  quickly  to  the  Bahuda  river,  offer  fit  liba- 
tions to  the  gods/  The  third  personal  pronoun  may  be  also 
used  in  a  similar  manner  with  a  demonstrative  pronoun :  '^s^ 
r^^c^HUiiH  Tf^s^fk  '  That  very  man  approaches  to  an  extended 
road.' 

e.  A  relative  pronoun  may  be  sometimes  used  in  like 
manner  with  a  personal  pronoun,  when  the  sentence  is  inter- 
rogative :  inrr  r<H  I  <*ri  I  ^if^s^pHTsiirH  iftf^  '  Thus  bereft  of 
my  children,  who  (am)  I,  (that  I  should)  wish  to  live  ?' 

y.  The  relative  and  interrogative  pronoun,  the  latter  in 
combination  with  the  particles  f^  or  ^^t,  are  sometimes  used 
together  to  form  an  indefinite  distributive  pronoun :  <**^ni|  ^ 
^rff^  ^  by  some  act  or  other ;'  ^n:  cJilOaWl^ril  T^I^TT:  ^"f^T^- 
■qf^T:  ^  Whatever  acts  of  enjoyment  may  be  done  by  a  living 
man.' 

SECTION    IV. 

Indeclinables. 

295.  Adverbs.  The  greater  number  of  these,  as  already 
observed,  are  merely  nouns  in  an  invariable  neuter  inflexion ; 


390  SYNTAX. 

most  commonly  that  of  the  accusative  neuter,  although  other 
cases  are  sometimes  admitted ;  as,  f^  or  frou  "WTTr^  '  Having 
meditated  for  a  long  time  ;^  HP^ril^  ^\»^ill  f^rf^W  ^l!i<i 
^  The  two  earrings  were  begged  by  the  king  of  the  gods,  for 
the  good  of  thee  ;'  tRR:  chvui^f  ^rgTrPTOi^  ^  The  kings  came 
for  the  maiden  ;'  ^nqr^  ^^c(^HM)^^iri^  '  He  kneaded  others, 
kneadingly  with  his  hands  ;*  ir^#  "^TEff  "q^^:  ^  Indra  was  rain- 
ing, according  to  the  season  ;^  ^ST^IT^W  TT^iW  *  He  dwelt  there 
privately.' 

a,  A  number  of  adverbs  are  formed  of  nouns  in  the  inva- 
riable neuter,  compounded  with  xrt  ;  as,  1T»T^  xr^nf^fv  '  Offer 
sacrifice  according  to  rule ;'  "^[^Tf  •M'^MN  «»5f^  *  Having  made 
worship  as  was  fitting  ;'  w^  iisiii^^  chVjiiiHIfi  '  He  told  him  as 
it  had  happened  ;'  TnrrSfTf^  *i4lr(^  ^  Let  him  do  according  to 
his  ability.^  "f^fv  '  sort,'  *  kind,'  becoming  in  composition  fc[V, 
is  also  used  adverbially  with  ^?,  "TRT  and  the  like  ;  as,  TRT- 
f^  '■  in  various  ways  ;'  and  so  is  ^,  *  before,'  combined  with 
a  noun,  to  express  something  prior  to  an  act  done  ;  as,  ^cj^j^i 
'^gr«(*l  ^ire|M||*  '  Being  thus  addressed  in  many  ways,  preceded 
by  acts  of  conciliation ;'  ^r|f^'«^*  HT^  H  ^^\m  "^TTT  ^HTT  '  Through 
(previous)  ignorance,  thy  cow,  O  sage,  was  killed  by  me ;'  l^* 
^ft^f^ron'ftffT  ^nr^njlf  W^  ^«^IH  *  Having  been  promised  by  him, 
I  will  liberate  thee,  preceded  by  an  oath.^ 

h.  Many  adverbs  are  also  formed  from  pronouns,  or  are  the 
pronouns  themselves,  in  the  invariable  neuter  accusative,  or  in 
some  other  case;  as,  inr,  ^,  ^IWHT,  'wherefore,'  'whence;* 
T\^  l^y  ITWn^,  *  therefore,'  '  thence.'  They  are  frequently 
put  correlatively,  as  in  a  familiar  verse  in  the  Hitopadesa, 
which  exhibits  most  of  them :  xrwra^  ^  ^HTT  ^  ^T  ^  '^^  \ 
-MN^  "TW  "^  ^HnjHHTrRofi'^  I  riWI^  W«T  ^  inn  ^  TT^  ^  (TW  t 
ITR^  ira'  ^  r^Ml^^l^llrf'^'fif  I  *  Whence,  and  wherefore,  and  as, 
and  when,  and  what,  and  how  much,  and  where,  one's  own  acts 
are  good  or  evil ;  thence,  and  therefore,  and  so,  and  then,  and 
that,  and  so  much,  and  there,  (the  condition  of  a  man)  pro- 
ceeds from  subjection  to  destiny.' 


INDECLINABLES.  891 

c.  The  adverb  ^  *  thus/  *  so/  *  ita/  is  of  constant  use,  not 
only  in  its  own  sense,  as  ^l^W  '  having  so  said/  ^i*||<+ll^  '  hav- 
ing thus  heard/  but  to  mark  a  quotation  or  a  parenthesis,  or 
separate  one  part  of  a  sentence  from  another :  *T  1^1^  M<JHirrt 
chKiif  *  He  reads  the  S'astras :  this  is  not  the  cause :'  j;^  f^ 
rnrr  ^TRT  ir^rnr  ^  "T:  W  *  Indra  is  the  chief  king  of  the 
gods :  so  it  has  been  heard  by  us  :'  ^STTWjrrfi^nwN^  '  Be 
seated :  thus  they  said :'  ^w  ^^T^'tT  IT^:  '  In  this  manner 
sang  the  quiristers  of  the  gods :'  ^s^H^^Pnfw  '^^mr  ^*^J||^- 
^T^fk  *  Who  waits  (so)  ?  I  am  here  ;  (thus)  let  him  say ;  and, 
Give  your  commands'  (thus  let  him  speak) :  ^nfts"^  "gofHk 
cti^»iil^  TT  "^ft^N  ^iTrf^  '  Therefore  I  say,  By  desire  of  a  bracelet,' 
and  so  forth,  ^fff  in  combination  with  thtT  forms  an  adverb 
of  assent,  ^  so  be  it,'  the  verb  being  understood  :  "N^W  H^i^^l 

*  Vidura  having  said  to  him,  So  be  it/ 

The  influence  of  adverbs  on  the  cases  of  nouns  has  already 
been  indicated.  The  manner  in  which  they  are  connected 
with  verbs  will  be  presently  adverted  to. 

296.  Prepositions.  It  is  unnecessary  to  make  any  further 
remarks  upon  their  government,  as,  whether  singly  or  in 
connexion  with  verbs,  sufficient  instances  have  already  been 
given  (p.  97). 

297.  Conjunctions.  The  employment  of  copulatives  of 
this  description  requires  no  particular  observation,  as  they 
fulfil  their  usual  offices,  and  being  sometimes  omitted,  or 
sometimes  multiplied,  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  or  perspicuity. 

a.  The  copulative  conjunction  in  most  frequent  use  is  ^ 
'  and ;'  which,  when  it  connects  words  in  the  same  sentence, 
connects  nouns  either  in  the  same  cases  or  in  those  having  a 
similar  government,  and  verbs  in  the  same  tenses  or  in  different 
ones  of  like  purport.    -Ulim  JTTWt  ^TU^  ^W^  W  ^nSi:  ^  tiriPm 

*  Having  taken  the  wives  and  sons  of  PanS^u,  and  those  two 
(dead)  bodies,  they  set  out :'  v^pr^XRr^^  THmr  f^>j^H^  '  From 
his  proficiency  in  the  science  of  arms,  and  by  his  intense 
devotion :'  ffpft  ^  ^nftnrr  TfNt  ^  fVr:  shtPmi  ^^^Q^^va  "gr^iw: 


392  SYNTAX. 

*And  the  harlot  was  punished,  and  the  cowherd's  wife  was 
banished,  and  Kandarpaketu  was  honoured :'  ^|rH^IHI^i.«Mi4l 
^^  %^Tr^"^  '  Tranquil  they  consoled  her,  and  said  these 
words.'  When  the  sentences  are  different,  they  have  their 
several   construction,  although  connected   by  the  copulative : 

-rfftrm  ^Tt^  ^nf^:  ^ijHn^n:  i  w  ^iit^r^ft  ^nrn:  xm^^^ 

xqrnf:  I  *  The  son  of  Kuru  was  left  in  that  wood,  and  the 
Nagas  disappeared  even  as  the  Pandava  was  looking.'  The 
conjunction  is  sometimes  repeated,  either  for  emphasis  or  to 
imply  immediate  connexion:  ^  '^  Hlg^^'^'H*  ^^  ^Tf^^J^J 
'  And  they  reached  the  ocean,  and  VishAu  woke  ;'  i.  e.  *  as 
soon  as.'  '^  is  frequently  combined  with  other  copulatives, 
either  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  or  for  the  convenience  of  the 
rhythm  :  ^  TTTT^  ^T^l^gf  f^^T".*!^! fill'  ^^  I  ^^F^  W^  ^^mk  ^tfw 
^11^  IT^  ^  I  '  He  having  heard  of  the  science  of  arms,  and 
also  the  heavenly  weapons  of  Rama,  fixed  his  mind  upon 
them,  and  also  upon  the  science  of  polity.' 

b.  Disjunctive  copulatives  may  likewise  combine  words  in 
similar  inflexions :  ^^iftir  ^  "^I^  '^T  "^TT  '  Choose  the  arms 
or  my  person  ;'  ^TWT  "J^:  Tff^T  Hl^T  ^i^  Hf^  f^  ^  A  man's 
self,  a  son,  a  wife,  or  in  difficulty  (in  their  absence)  even  a 
daughter ;'  "grTT^  ^ril*^ri'^  tr^  ^^^  mfhnT  I  "^T  ^  Jl^fn^  ^^ 
TT^TO  «MMin^^  I  *  That  which  thou  sayest,  O  rich  in  devotion, 
is  the  progeny  of  the  benevolent ;  but  this  grief  is  not  to  be 
removed  by  a  human  being.^ 

c.  The  connexion  of  certain  of  the  conjunctions  with  parti- 
cular tenses  of  the  verbs  will  be  subsequently  explained. 

298.  Interjections.  These  are  used  sometimes  with  nouns 
in  the  vocative  case,  or  sometimes  in  the  accusative  or  dative,  as 
already  intimated.  They  also  occur  singly  as  exclamations. 
The  following  verse  from  Bhatti  collects  some  of  either  kind : 
^rr:  ^  "^w  ^  f%^  ^  Hid<^=iriir»{  fVr^  i  ^  ftnr:  urftr  i^  ^  ^rsi^ 
f^HcTR  ^:  ^  Ah  sad  !  O  !  alas  !  strange  !  O  mother  !  Shame  on 
the  gods  !  O  father  !  Where  art  thou,  O  lovely-browed  ?  Thus 
he  frequently  exclaimed.^     Various  nouns  and  phrases  are  also 


VERBS. 

employed  as  interjections  :  WT^  '  well  done  !'  *  bravo  !'  ^  or 
'^^{c6    '  good    luck  ! '     ^nif   '  welcome  ! '     lyftjf   '  hail  1 '    f^WT 

*  lucky,'  '  prosperous,'  and  the  like :  and  also  others  which 
are  specially  employed  in  offering  libations  to  the  gods  or 
manes,  as  noticed  above. 

SECTION    V. 

Verbs. 

298.  The  different  voices  in  which  the  active  verb  may  be 
conjugated  have  been  already  described  (p.  ii3)>  as  well  as 
the  changes  to  which  either  may  be  subjected  when  a  verb  is 
compounded  with  an  inseparable  preposition  (p.  259).  Besides 
those  distinctions,  and  their  derivative  forms  or  modes,  the 
verb  occurs  also  in  construction  in  the  passive  voice,  and  as 
transitive,  intransitive,  or  neuter,  impersonal  or  reflective ;  as, 
TfT^TPf  ^[^:  ^^^TS'^Tj^  ^  Suparna  quickly  seized  the  large 
serpent ;'  niohmn  H^lflc^:  *  The  vast  mountain  shook ;'  MiiNlHI 
Fh^H:  "^^  *  The  sound  of  drums  is  heard ;'  ^Sifn  >|Trrf«T 
JJ^^SQl^"^  ^  All  beings  are  supported  by  householders ;'  »nn 
r*i|ff  ^  It  is  done  by  me ;'  *  I  do  or  have  done :'   lanu  n«T^ 

*  It  is  gone  by  thee  ;'  '  Thou  goest  or  art  gone :'  d^r^Hl'^A(d  '  It 
was  risen  by  the  moon  ;'  *  The  moon  rose :'  •rrarn^'if^  (*m^ 
3lli(ri  "^  '  It  is  not  (by  any  one)  deceased  or  born  out  of  season  :' 
fWff  ofiT?  *  The  wood  breaks  ;'  it  breaks  of  itself :  ini|H  M^^^ 
'  The  rice  boils  ;'  it  boils  of  itself.  When  a  verb  is  not 
impersonal  it  agrees  with  a  nominative,  expressed  or  implied, 
in  number  and  person,  as  exemplified  under  the  nominative 
case  of  nouns.  When  impersonal,  it  may  be  considered  that 
a  nominative,  the  name  of  the  thing  or  action  intended  by  the 
verb,  is  understood.  Thus  r^^  P+HH,  ^  It  is  done  by  thee,'  is 
nothing  more  than  the  ellipse  of  the  perfect  sentence,  l^m 
f^fi^  oF§  *  The  act  is  done  by  thee  ;'   cR^#  being  understood. 

The  powers  of  the  different  tenses  have  also  been  already 

3  E 


394  SYNTAX. 

described  (p.  iii);  but  their  application  in  construction  is 
subject  to  some  modifications,  which  it  is  necessary  to  notice. 
299.  Present  tense  ('^I^HI*^  TJ^).  This  tense  indicates 
present  time,  actual  or  continuous,  that  which  is  now,  or 
which  is  occasionally  or  always :  wf^*T  "S^  ^II^^HVl^  *  At 
this  moment  he  reads  the  S'astra :'  trjH  ^^n^fff  '  He  eats  flesh  ;' 
he  does  so  habitually :  ?[^  oWKT:  "^trf^  '  Here  the  boys  play ;' 
either  now  or  occasionally :  WT  i<<^^chlc^MJ|^^W  '  The  world 
lasts  until  the  time  of  dissolution.' 

a.  The  present  tense  may  also  express  other  modifications 
of  time,  or  the  absence  of  any  distinction  ;  as  when  used  with 
^rftr  or  »TT'3  to  intimate  '  censure'  or  *  condemnation  :'  IJ^tsfrj 
?Tnrf  FI»TfiT  '  A  man  even  abandons  a  wife ;'  he  either  does  so 
now,  or  has  done  or  will  do  it :'  WTW  TT^H^"?^  l^'^'T^  ilM^fri 
^  Your  reverence  ever  conducts  sacrifices  for  S'lidras.' 

b.  The  present  tense  may  be  used  in  reply  to  a  question 
referring  to  either  past  or  future  time,  when  not  remote : 
'SR^TTTftsftr '  When  hast  thou  come  ?^  ^s^HFT^Tf^T  or  ^pm»^ 
'  I  come,  or  I  have  come,  now ;'  oR^  ilPH'uifjH  '  When  wilt 
thou  go  ?'  Wts^  ii^iPh  or  JirHmiPH  '  I  go,  or  I  shall  go,  now/ 
It  may  also  be  used  in  reply  to  a  question  referring  to  time 
past,  when  it  is  preceded  by  »T"g;  as,  foPTSRT^:  *What  hast 
thou  done }'  rfg  ofcClfH  «I3#  '  Verily  I  perform  an  action  ;* 
instead  of  ^roFT%*  '  I  did.'     It  may  be  used  in  the  same  way,  it 

'  is  said,  when  preceded  by  tT  or  by  g  ;  oh<!Ho»»|i(T:  f^  '  What  hast 
thou  made  the  mat  ?'  Tf  4iC\Ch  '  I  do  not  make  (for,  I  have  not 
made)  it ;'  g  ohO  Ph  *  Verily  I  make  (for,  have  made)  it.'  The 
present  tense  may  be  used  with  a  past  signification  when 
connected  with  "jrr ;  as,  ^THift^  "JU  NI^^IT:  '  Brahmans  formerly 
dwell  (for,  dwelt)  here.' 

c.  The  present  tense  may  be  used  for  the  future  in  con- 
nexion with  the  particles  iTRT^,  ^,  ^SR^,  or  ^fiff ;  as,  in^  >j9i 
WT^  ^f^  ^  Give  him  as  long  as  he  will  eat ;'  tT  1^1  (h  "JCT 
c^^MHig^N^  ^VTHT^  *  I  go  not  (I  will  not  go)  again  to  Lanka 


VERBS.  895 

as  long  as  I  have  (shall  have)  life  ;'  cR^  or  cRf^  y^mfH  'fVfV'^ 
'  When  do  I  (shall  I)  see  Govinda  ?'  It  may  also  be  used  for 
the  future  when  in  connexion  with  a  word  expressing  a  short 
time  to  come  :  "3?^*  f^  ij^^if^  '  I  die  (shall  die)  after  an  hour.' 

d.  When  deliberation  or  election  is  intended^  the  present 
tense  may  be  used  for  the  future :  f^  ^RrrfH  *  What  do  I  ?'  for 
f^  chri^miPH  '  What  shall  I  do  ?'  ^Tnfh  ^Ffft  or  ijw^  afiinf  ^>f^ 
or  TfT:Brftr  *  Which  of  these  two,  or  of  these,  wilt  thou  choose  P 
^  ^  "j^ltH  7:^T#r  'Whom  sorrowful  do  I  (for  shall  I)  ask?' 
It  may  also  be  used  for  the  future,  when  conditional  conse- 
quence is  imphed :  "^^s^  ^^rfrT  H  ^T^*  xprfrT  '  Who  bestows  food 
goes  (for,  wiU  go)  to  heaven.'  And  it  may  be  employed  in  a 
future  sense  with  the  usual  signs  of  the  conditional  mood,  xrf^ 
and  ^iT;  as,  ^^s^^^Pd  VT^  TTR:  ^  If  the  heaven  rains,  we 
sow  (for,  shall  sow)  the  com.'  In  such  a  sort  of  phrase  the 
future  or  the  past  may  also  be  employed.-  The  present  may 
alternate  with  the  future  also,  in  a  similarly  constructed  sen- 
tence, with  irf^  or  ^IT,  when  the  consequence  is  expressed  by 
the  imperative  :  ^^i||U||^  WRT^fw  (or  ^MiPHUirri)  1^  ^^"^^ 
^  If  the  teacher  comes  (or  will  come),  do  thou  read  the  Veda/ 

€.  A  more  remarkable  modification  of  the  present,  and  one 
of  frequent  occurrence,  is  effected  by  the  addition  of  the 
particle  m,  which  gives  it  a  past  signification.  This  particle 
appears  to  be  derived  from  the  first  person  plural  of  the 
present  tense  of  the  auxiliary  verb,  ^(K  '  sumus,'  '  we  are,' 
rejecting  the  Visarga.  It  is  used,  however,  indifferently  in  all 
the  persons  and  numbers  of  the  verb  to  which  it  is  attached. 
^nrfcT  ^  ^;f>TfTC  '  Yudhish^hira  sacrificed ;'  ^rfmiNPfl  W  ^ftlT: 
'  The  citizens  ran  quickly ;'  ^  ^lud  W  '  by  whom  it  was 
stood.'  It  may  precede  the  verb,  either  immediately  or  in  a 
different  part  of  the  sentence  i  R  W  ^r^  T^TOST  "TTT  FTT^  "T 
f%*fNw:  '  Thou  didst  not  acknowledge,  O  great  king,  what 
Vibhishana  said  -/  n^  W  Pi^riHM^  '  He  said  in  council  what 
was  good.' 

300.  First  praeterite  or  imperfect  (^H^H^  c5^).    As  already 

3  E  2 


396  SYNTAX. 

remarked  (p.  iii),  this  tense  indicates  action  that  has  taken 
place  at  any  time  prior  to  the  current  day  ;  and  although  it  is 
very  commonly  used  in  a  vague  manner,  yet  the  past  is  in 
general  not  absolute  or  perfect,  but  implies  continuity  or  con- 
nexion with  some  other  action :  ilN'od^l^l^  '  He  gave  com- 
mand (to  do  something) :'  XTT^^^  fH"^TR^Tfl[^  '  He  gave  alms 
as  long  as  he  lived  -^  the  giving  was  continuous :  ^  MliSHIW- 
fd^l^FHlH^H  ^HHNg  *  This  full  moon  being  passed,  he  read 
the  Agni  prayers,  and  sacrificed  with  the  Soma  juice ;'  these 
acts  were  dependent  upon  a  period  not  remotely  past:    mft 

'After  that  Indrajit  was  seen  ascended  into  the  air,  striking 
the  illusory  Sita  with  his  sword,  the  son  of  the  wind  spake 
to  him.' 

a.  The  imperfect  may  be  used  in  connexion  with  the  pre- 
sent tense  of  verbs  implying  ^  recollection,'  if  preceded  by  xn^; 
^rftnrRTftr  ^"^^  ^  cM^Hfl^K^^Rrm  '  Thou  knowest,  Devadatta, 
how  we  did  dwell  in  Kasmira  i'  or  "ir^  may  be  dispensed  with, 
if  a  connected  action  is  also  described ;  as,  wrftf  cjrrgpR'ftE^- 
AH\H  W^^^^^TTgW'f^  '  Thou  rememberest  we  did  dwell  in 
Kashmir,  and  did  eat  rice  there.' 

b.  Either  the  imperfect  or  the  perfect  may  be  used  with 
the  expletive  ^ ;  jff(  ^  'HoJiCli^  or  '^^Bn:  ^  Thus  he  did :'  also 
after  ^fPSTiT  *  continually  ;'  ^(mt^ohClif^  ^(HI^<*K  *  He  did  continu- 
ally.' They  may  also  be  optionally  used  in  question  and 
answer,  if  the  time  be  not  long  past ;  as,  ^TTSaif^  f^  ^  Did  he 
go  ?'  ^iiJ|<cd(t^  *  He  did  go :'  ^i\\H  "N  ^  Has  he  gone  ?'  ipTR 
*  He  went.'  But  if  the  time  of  the  act  be  remote,  the  perfect 
only  is  used :  "^Wt:  «WT  HMM  f^  *  What  ?  slew  Krishna,  Kansa ?' 
a  '^HIH  ^:  ^  He  slew  him.' 

c.  The  negative  m,  derived  from  ?rr^,  may  be  conjoined 
with  Wy  and  attached  to  the  imperfect,  to  which  it  gives  the 
sense  of  the  prohibitive-imperative.  When  jto  is  used  in  this 
manner,  the  temporal  augment  ^  is  rejected :  HT^RH^:  *  Be 
thou  not ;'  mw  «Krti^  *  Let  him  not  do ;'  itrr  JT^f^ff  "g^*  *  Do 


VERBS.  897 

not  you  two  weep ;'  inFf  fwTT '  Do  not  ye  tarry/  The  nega- 
tive is  also  used  without  the  particle  W;  but  not  in  the 
imperative  sense,  although  it  causes  the  loss  of  the  augment : 
W^tT!^  m  ^Tfl^:  '  Thou  hast  not  known  my  disposition/ 

301.  Praeterite  (xrct^  f<^).  This  tense  denotes  something 
absolutely  past :  ^^FR  '  he  made  ;'  MMM  ^  he  cooked  ;'  Wift 
f^rtnr  ^JK^  Tnnft  ^^'^^t:  '  Krishna  having  gone  forth  from 
the  city  departed ;'  rildoMIgm*  PH^tMM  Tjm  '  Rama  killed  the 
female  demon  called  Ta^aka;^  ^^^f^*  ^^PTTTRr  fr^Nrrfrnrf^fW: 
*  The  Rishi  did  him  honour  with  particular  attentions/  The 
tense  may  also  be  used  when  mental  absence  or  unconscious- 
ness is  implied:  ^rfts^  f%f5  f^T^cynr  'Whilst  I  slept  he  still 
talked.^  It  is  employed  in  construction,  however,  without 
much  attention  to  any  particular  specification  of  past  time, 
and  alternates,  at  the  convenience  of  the  writer,  with  both  the 
imperfect  and  the  indefinite  past. 

302.  Indefinite  past  (^IHI-^  cgr).  This  is  properly  used 
in  a  general  and  indefinite  manner  for  time  past,  whether 
proximate  or  remote,  ^sw  ^<ir^<^IM*<»  PMriHrimfTri^  ^H^M 
^■^  I  ^T^  ^T^:^TOcT  ^ift  ^*J<4yiri  >*j^ifl<0''«  I  '  He  studied 
the  Vedas,  he  sacrificed  to  the  gods  ;  he  made  Ubations  to  the 
manes,  he  respected  his  kinsmen ;  he  subdued  the  class  of 
six  (evil  feelings),  he  dehghted  in  regal  polity,  and  utterly 
destroyed  his  foes  /  ^nprf^TSr  *  Rain  was,  or  it  rained,  to-day  :' 
?rf  ^  ^^^  'Having  seen  her,  he  was  happy:'  ^ryfyif 
«<iiHMlHMlKj1^lVij^|tj^  '  He  asked  the  Rakshasas,  Why  have  ye 
awakened  me  ?' 

a.  This  form  of  the  praeterite,  or  either  of  the  others,  may 
be  used  as  well  as  the  present  (see  r.  299,  b)  when  preceded 
by  "gxT ;  as,  ^^TTTiwIt^  tjh  f?r»rr:  *  Brahmans  formerly  dwelt 
here  v*  also  ^r^ro^  or  "grg:  as  well  as  ^?rf^,  as  above.  It 
may  be  used  also  optionally  with  the  future  or  present,  when 
the  conditional  consequence  of  a  past  action  is  expressed: 
^T^^"^^  \IMH^mf7:  *  If  it  had  rained,  we  had  sown  the  grain.* 

b,  m,  derived  from  iTT^,  is  frequently  used  with  the  indefi- 


398  SYNTAX. 

nite  past,  when  it  gives  it  the"  force  of  the  imperative,  and 
causes  the  rejection  of  the  temporal  augment :  m  h^:  *  Do 
not  fear ;'  in  ST^:  '  Do  not  grieve  ;^  TT  >pr  ^  Let  it  not  be  ;' 
^i  ^»T^:  ■J't:  lif^  *  Never  do  so  again ;'  W[  ^TW  T^:  f^l 
'  Do  not  give  your  mind  to  wickedness.'  It  may  also  be 
employed  with  w,  as,  in  ^  "^WTt  '  Do  not  go.'  It  is  also  used 
in  the  same  manner  with  another  negative,  in  an  affirmative 
sense :  m  f|r^  rf  ^>ft^  '  Do  not  not-kill  (i.  e.  kill)  my  foes.^ 
There  are  examples,  however,  especially  in  the  older  writers, 
of  the  use  of  this  negative  with  the  indefinite  past,  in  which 
the  augment  is  retained ;  as,  iTT  PHMIr^  ilfriyi  r^^iTt  ^  Do  not 
thou  ever  obtain  reputation,  O  barbarian?^  Ramayana:  and 
when  the  verb  is  compounded  with  a  preposition,  the  augment 
of  the  imperfect  and  the  indefinite  past  may  be  retained  ;  as, 
^r§rr  '^  Wt  itt  ^mn^  ^  Let  not  faith  depart  from  us  ;'  Manu  :  in 
ing^^nr^^Trr:  '  Do  not  be  subject  to  wrath ;'  Mahabharata. 
On  the  other  hand,  it  is  rejected  in  compounds  also  ;  as, 
TRiTWr  ^innrnf  '  Do  no  disrespect  to  thy  own  soul.'  The 
difference  is  explained  by  affirming  that  a  different  negative, 
m  not  irr^,  is  employed ;  the  former  not  requiring  the  elision 
of  the  augment.  It,  and  not  iTT^,  is  also  said  to  be  used  with 
other  tenses ;  as  with  the  imperative,  wi  H^,  or  the  future, 
ITT  Hfcimrri  '  Let  it  not  be.' 

303.  Definite  future  (^HHilriH  ^).  This  tense  indicates 
future  time,  defined  either  expressly,  as  in  the  example  above 
given  (p.  112),  or  by  some  circumstance  or  event  not  immedi- 
ately proximate,  or,  as  it  is  expressed,  not  of  day ;  as  in  the 
following  example  from  Bhatti :  ^UMprt^riKMl  Wfl  V^irm^l 
f^  I  nnrr*  ^  Sf^rarwt¥T  ^  HTTT.  ^  1  ^  Our  mothers  having 
seen  thee  shall  be  delighted,  and  shall  ask  after  the  welfare 
of  us  both,  along  with  Maithili ;  and  Bharata  will  rejoice 
exceedingly.' 

a.  This  form  of  the  future  is  used  optionally  with  the  inde- 
finite future  or  the  present  in  certain  phrases  or  combinations ; 
as  with  cR^T  or  cuff ;    o»s^  >ftWT  or  >ft^,  ^  wnn  or  ^I^Prt, 


VERBS.  399 

^  When  will  he  eat  ?  Where  .will  he  remain  ?*  also  with  the 
interrogative  implying  '  preference  ;^  f^  oF»Tt  or  ojnm  ^^OrilPH  or 
^O^mP^  '  What  or  which  wilt  thou  choose  ?'  also  when  it 
denotes  the  consequence  of  a  conditional  act ;  xft  fW^  ^TITT  or 
^TWfw  ^  ^^*  "Tnrr  or  xrrwfrT  '  He  who  shall  give  alms  will  go 
to  heaven.' 

304.  Indefinite  future  {'^  %^).  The  time  expressed  by 
this  tense  may  be  either  immediately  or  remotely  future :  •rr^ 
^t^f^^s^  '  I  shall  not  be  seen  to-day ;'  H  Pl.^  I  Ph  fw^  ^ 
^irr%^rnTT  TT  ^  Since  my  sons  are  slain,  I  will  die  or  conquer.* 

«.  When  connected  with  verbs  implying  '  recollection,'  this 
tense  may  be  used  with  a  past  signification ;  as,  ^Rxftr  cRW 
iftofii^  ^T^TR:  '  Rememberest  thou  Krishna ;  we  shall  dwell 
(for,  we  were  dwelling)  at  Gokula:'  also  optionally,  when  one 
action  is  dependent  upon  another ;  as,  miS^  ^^^  cET^Tt^ 
^^WT'TOT^^  ^"IviMIH^  '  Rememberest  thou  Devadatta ;  we  dwell 
in  Kashmir,  and  dressed  (shall  dress)  rice  there :'  otherwise 
the  imperfect  may  be  used,  as  above. 

b.  It  alternates,  as  above  remarked,  with  the  definite  future 
after  oR^  and  cfif^ ;  also  when  *  choice'  or  '  consequence'  is 
signified,  or  when  an  act  contingent  upon  some  event  is 
predicated :  ^T^lft'orfif  vt^  ^^i^mih:  '  If  it  shall  rain  we  will 
sow  the  corn.' 

c.  The  indefinite  future  is  to  be  used  where  dispatch  is 
signified;  as,  rff:  "^W  jiP^ismPh  *The  messenger  will  go  swiftly:' 
also  when  continuous  action  is  implied  ;  i4nW)«4H^*  ^Twfw  '  As 
long  as  life  lasts  he  will  give  food :'  also  when  an  act  is 
followed  for  a  certain  time  without  interruption  ;  ^^MHHNI^I- 
illP^^rf)  ril^mHMlHUitM^  ^"^HH  ^  ^«*lri  '  When  this  future  day  of 
new  moon  (is),  on  that  (day)  he  will  read  the  prayers  to  Agni, 
and  sacrifice  with  the  Soma  juice.'  It  is  used  in  like  manner 
when  ^RT,  *  after,'  is  employed  to  denote  immediately  subse- 
quent place  or  time :  iftsTm««TT  i\*ii^  ^IMIdPcigc^lH^  IRinT^^ 
«£i^lNl4rigfl<H  >d^TR%  '  This  is  the  road  to  Pa^aliputra,  (and 
ha\dng  gone)  subsequently  by  that  of  Kausambi,  we  will  there 


400  SYNTAX. 

eat  food :'  ifts^  ^HrH^  VHMiml  cT^  ^^'M^HIij^l^H^IM^  pit  ^- 
tqTH%  *  When  the  future  (next)  year  (is  arrived),  then  imme- 
diately, on  the  full  moon  of  the  month  ^grahayaiia,  we, 
entering  upon  devotion,  will  study  (the  Vedas).'  If  xjttt  be 
used  instead  of  ^r^  the  definite  future  may  be  used  ;  Ml^jllj- 
^l^llMl^d  ^TiflTfW?^  or  ^rWHTR^ ;  and  the  latter  only  is  to  be 
employed  if  days  or  nights  be  specified ;  as,  ^si}  JTRT  SHN(l«ft 
H^NU  M^<^:^|l.M^g<luirilH^  *  When  the  future  (next)  month 
(is  arrived),  and  fifteen  days  after  it  (have  passed),  then  we 
will  study.' 

d.  When  disbelief,  doubt,  or  intolerance  is  signified,  and 
especially  if  put  interrogatively,  the  indefinite  future  may  be 
used  optionally  with  the  potential:  tT  ^mTT^^lf*!,  or  ^T  H^ 
HTr«T  "^ix  PH'^i^  or  rnrt^mftr  *  I  cannot  believe,  or  I  cannot 
endure,  that  you  revile  Vishnu,'  i.  e.  either  should  or  shall 
revile  or  have  reviled :  ^  ^Krrd  or  ^fttr^  ^  f^T^  or  rHPrf^mrrf 
'  Who  or  which  may  or  will  revile  Hari  ?'  cR  ^^  >T^T^  ^n»I^ 
or  xrnTftrorfrr  '  For  what  S'lidra  may  or  will  your  reverence 
perform  sacrifices?'  If  preceded  by  the  compound  particle 
rchr«hc6  or  by  ^rftcT  or  its  synonymes  in  these  senses,  the  future 
only,  not  the  potential,  is  employed :  ^  Hi^\^i\\{H  ^TSTR  f^f^ 
OTf5  xrrSTftroiffr  '  I  cannot  think  it  possible  your  reverence  will 
sacrifice  for  a  S'lidra:'  also  ^f%,  H^fiT  or  f^raw,  K^T^  "^TO 
HT^Tftr^rfir  *  Is  it  (possible,  can  it  be)  your  reverence  will  sacri- 
fice for  a  S'lidra?'  The  same  tense  may  be  used  optionally 
with  the  potential  when  possibility  is  admitted  or  expected: 
fl^HmPH  ^a*l^  (or  ^J^hr)  ^^"^  '  I  think  it  possible  your 
excellency  will  eat ;'  ^  ■^iHlf^'f  ITTW  ^»TomS^  Xjyrm  \  TJ^  <*iiSrd 
J I  leaf  I  fill  *r*^  I  fill  ^  r^HiiSfw  I  ^  By  whom  is  it  supposed,  that  in 
battle  Raghava  will  cut  to  pieces  the  limbs,  or  scatter  the 
members,  of  KumbhakarAa.' 

e.  The    indefinite    future    is    used    with    exclamations    of, 
astonishment,  if  any  conditional  particle,  as  ira  or  xrf^,  be  not 
inserted :    ^msR^^T?^  ^  ^^fif  '  Wonderful !   the  blind  man 
will  see  (can  see)  KrishAa.'     It  may  also  be  used  with  the 


VERBS.  401 

particles  TiT  and  ^rftr  when  implying  ^  doubt ;'  Trf  ^5[|?V  MPrimfri 
'  Will  the  staff  fall  (or  not)  ?'  ^tr\nFTflT  ITR  'Will  he  shut  the 
door  ?'  and  must  be  used  with  '^H'T  when  it  signifies  '  cer- 
tainty' or  '  capability ;'  ^c5  fu^  "^f^cHT  ^fH^flT  '  Certainly 
Krishna  will  kill  (that  is,  is  able  to  kill)  the  elephant.' 

305.  Imperative  (f%f>l<5t^).  The  uses  of  the  imperative 
tense  require  no  particular  illustration.  It  has,  however,  a 
first  as  well  as  a  third  person  ;  to  which,  ^  command^  or 
*  injunction'  is  not  appHcable  :  but  as  the  powers  of  this  mood 
correspond  with  those  of  the  potential,  and  consequently  com- 
prehend ^  permission'  and  *  capability,'  as  signified  by  '  may/ 
'  let,'  '  can,'  there  is  no  difficulty  in  understanding  their  appli- 
cability to  any  person  indifferently,  trf^  l|U|e{>r  "Jift^  <*I^'^H1*IW 
W  nfw:  '  Let  this  be  thy  determination,  I  may  not  cause  the 
dreadful  destruction  of  the  servants :'  ijfv  ohl^^l^M  ^  Tr^ 
in^  TTER  '  Be  thou  my  messenger ;  and  having  gone,  say 
(thus)  to  Raghava.^ 

a.  The  imperative  is  very  frequently  used  in  the  third  per- 
son singular  of  the  passive,  either  with  a  nominative  expressed, 
or  with  the  agent  in  the  instrumental  case  expressed  or  under- 
stood; in  which  latter  case  it  is  used  indefinitely:  ^I'HT^rif 
^  ^  Let  the  queen  be  brought ;'  >ft  ^:  ^Wini  ^imf  '  Ho 
Panclits,  be  it  heard,^  i.  e.  "^i^TrfW:  '  by  you  ;'  ^^hnrf  '  Let  it  be 
done ;'  ^TTJ|»^ril'  *  Let  it  be  come,'  i.  e.  "i^rf^  '  by  some  one '/ 
1^  TXT^inWif:  '  Sita,  let  it  be  gone  hence,^  i.  e.  by  thee,  or  '  Go 
thou  away ;'  T?er:  ^efNnrf  '  Let  the  carriage  be  stopped,'  or  t^ 
^^efhiwt  '  Let  it  be  stopped  by  the  carriage ;'  g^^PflTRT^TT:  '  Let 
all  hopes  be  dismissed,^  t:  '  by  them.' 

b.  When  any  act  enjoined  is  to  be  done  afler  a  short  time, 
the  imperative  may  be  used  in  relation  to  the  future,  the 
present  or  the  potential :  "^TTfl^^^^TTtnxqnr^^Tnftrorfrr  (^TFT- 
^acfir  or  'STnr^if )  rk  ^^HmTh  '  If  the  teacher  shall  (does  or 
may)  come  afler  an  hour,  do  thou  (then)  read  the  Veda.^  Or 
it  may  be  used  where  time  shortly  past  is  implied,  without 
any  condition,  when  ;??  may  be  combined  with  it:  "giW  H^iff 

3  F 


402  SYNTAX. 

^iPH^fl  ^  >T^  ftp:  '  After  an  hour  be  mistress  of  the 
earth/ 

c.  The  imperative  may  be  used  optionally  with  the  poten- 
tial to  express  ^  wish :'  ^[^aLTfiT  >T^rT^  ^J^hr  or  ^  *  I  wish  your 
worship  may,  or  would,  eat.'     So  with  -srtr^,  itt^,  '  I  desire,' 

*  I  beg,'  or  other  synonymous  verbs. 

d.  When  desire  to  have  any  thing  done  that  should  be 
performed  is  expressed,  FT  is  used  with  the  imperative :  j^ 
^l<4HUimn  FT  *  Do  thou  cause  the  boy  to  read  ;  do  thou  teach 
him/ 

e.  The  third  person  singular  of  the  imperative  of  the  sub- 
stantive verb  is  often  used  with  the  particle  ir#  '  so,'  *  thus,' 
absolutely,  to  signify  ^  assent  f  as,  ;^  «^,  ;^^JT^,  ^  So  be  it ;' 
^^'RftrErfw  if  "^tItT  tng^T^  ^vfro  *  And  Yudhisht'hira  also  thus 
replied  to  him,  So  be  it.' 

/.  The  negative  ?n  is  prefixed  to  the  imperative  sometimes, 
with  a  sense  equivalent  to  that  of  the  present  tense :  m  >T^ 
'  there*  is  not ;'  m  "^  W  fVnnr:  ^^  'T^f^  Vjf^  '  There  is  not 
(or  may  not  be)  any  crime  in  thee,  O  prince,  killing  thy  foes.' 

g.  Trnr  is  substituted  for  the  terminations  of  the  second  and 
third  persons  singular  of  the  imperative,  when  used  in  a  bene- 
dictory sense  :  H«<HI<r«(^^  r^W  "^i^*  ^45^f?T  '  Mayest  thou  be 
undivided  from  thy  husband  henceforth  in  thine  own  dwelling.' 

306.  Potential  mood  (f^  rHH>^ii|IH>^lilli|lg^*i|i{JMI'^H^  fc5^). 
The  senses  of  the  potential  mood,  as  detailed  in  the  citation 
from  Panini,  have  been  explained  above  (p.  112).  It  is  suffi- 
cient here  to  add  a  few  examples  of  its  application.  ^^^^T^- 
lOTOTt  >TtiT^^  ^T^:  ^T^t  ^  Let  a  man  pleased  make  the  Brahmans 
happy,  and  feed  them  deliberately:'  riWl^^J  ^^  ^"^  ^[ft^»^ 
'  Therefore  let  a  man  of  fortitude  neither  rejoice  nor  grieve :'   •? 

*  Let  not  a  wise  man  disturb  a  cow  drinking,  nor  tell  of  it  to 
another ;  nor,  having  seen  a  rainbow  in  the  sky,  let  him  point 
it  out  to  another.' 

a.  The  potential  mood  is  very  commonly  employed  as  the 


VERBS.  403 

conditional  or  subjunctive  mood  in  combination  with  particles 
indicating  *  condition,'  '  contingency/  *  alternative^'  ^  uncer- 
tainty/ *  doubt/  ^  astonishment/  and  the  like ;    as,  xrf^,  ^, 

*  if  /  ^  ^  as/  '  since  /  XRT  *  as  /  tt^  ^  as/  *  so/  *  that  /  xrW 
^  where/  ^  how  /    tt^  ^  when  /    »rr'g  '  ever  /    ^tj  ^  although/ 

*  since  /  ^  or  TrT  or  TfTTftr  *  whether  /  f^  ^  what  /  ^ff^  ^  how  / 
f^^  '  wonderful  /  &c.  »mr#  ^  H^I^O^^T^  ^^>  ^  Tn75^  '  If 
punishment  does  not  protect,  people  may  not  recognise  pro- 
perty :'  ^^!3^  HT#^  r^H^^^ri.HI  13RT:  '  If  there  were  not 
punishment  in  the  world,  the  people  would  perish :'  ^r^  h:^ 
—  lirjiHI  WT^  'SR'twwr:  n^^HrlHf  ^  O  grief!  that,  having  done 
manly  deeds,  thou  (shouldest)  abandon  glorious  fortune :'  trt 
)g^  ^^t:  tT  "^I^  *  I  did  not  beheve  that  thou  couldest  act 
thus  :'  »nfrTt^  •*)  tcj  Ht  tT^  «T  H%4  "^TnT^  I  -T  ^Tt^  "JT  ^  m»Ol|gq 
vrt^  chVj^H  I  ^  So  that  I  may  not  be  also  in  other  races  a 
destroyer  of  my  kin,  I  will  not  eat,  nor  partake  in  any  way  of 
drink :'  XT^  tt^  I^  ^  ^  ^  I  m^^r^mOri*  ^  7T^  i^l^jiH^j 
vfif  I  '  When  he  may  judge  his  own  army  in  good  condition, 
and  that  of  his  adversary  in  the  reverse,  let  him  march  against 
the  enemy :'  xn^:^  xft  5:^  rf  ^  ^  ^^  vr^  *  He  who  is 
distressed  by  the  grief  of  others  can  never  be  happy :'  ^^i^^ii: 
"sraiT  PH'^OT  ^snr^J^*  *  That  such  persons  should  revile  Krishna, 
astonishing !'  or  vf^  may  be  used  with  similar  exclamations  ; 
"N^  irf^  ^svhfhr  '  Surprising  !  if  he  read/  TjT  and  ^fxT  may 
be  used  to  imply  ^  doubt  of  will,^  or  '  capability :'  TH  or  'srftr 
■^r^jl^'q  ^ft:  '  Will  Hari  destroy  sin  ?'  '  Will  he  be  pleased  to 
do  so  ?^  ^rfxf  fjift  fsflJ^  f^riiii^  '  Can  he  indeed  break  a  moun- 
tain with  his  head  ?'  fofiJTg^ft^  *  Why  should  I  grieve  ?'  ojr^, 
when  used  reproachfully,  may  be  connected  with  the  present 
or  the  potential :'  oirq  1^  \plf  tetw:  or  W»ff^  '  How  canst  thou,  or 
dost  thou,  abandon  virtue  ?' 

These  particles  may  be  also  understood,  or  dropped  alto- 
gether, when  the  condition  can  be  expressed  by  the  use  of 
correlative  terms,  or  by  a  preceding  phrase :  ^"Fpft  ^^  ^"tfTT 
^Rnf  WTHPT^^l^:  ^  (Since)  Ravana  carries  (may  carry)  off  Sita, 

^v  2, 


404  *  SYNTAX. 

(so)  the  binding  of  the  great  sea  may  occur  i'  ftnnTT^  it  ftnrft: 
^ifqi^l^  PH^Mft^  '  But  if  the  father  be  Hving,  let  him  offer  hba- 
tions  to  those  prior  to  him.' 

b.  The  potential  mood  is  also  used  to  intimate  *  fitness/ 
^  propriety,'  or  '  capability :'  r#  «fi^  "^:  '  Thou  shouldest  or 
oughtest  to  marry  the  damsel  /  ^  vrn^TT^TT^  *  He  may  or  can 
carry  the  load  ;'  cfRST^TT^rifts^*  i^WrfiT  ^m^  ^  Aided  by  Karna 
and  Arjuna,  I  could  conquer  even  Indra.' 

c.  Verbs  signifying  '  to  wish'  or  *  desire'  may  use  the 
potential  optionally  with  the  present :  n^f*?^^  or  ?[^1T  *  He 
wishes  to  go ;'  ITTmfcSSl^ftrg  "SfiTTRTT  or  ^FTHXiff  ^  He  desires  to 
embrace  her.'  The  object  of  the  wish  may  also  be  expressed 
in  the  potential,  instead  of  the  infinitive  ;  as,  riHIM:^*^rf^  chlHMH 
'  He  wishes  he  may  or  might  embrace  her.' 

d.  The  potential  often  takes  the  place  of  the  imperative, 
with  a  similar  signification ;  TThRT^'R  T^:  ^  Having  taken 
water^  thou  mayest  go,'  i.  e.  go  thou:  especially  when  pre- 
ceded by  mi[¥i  '  to  order'  or  ^  enjoin  ;'  <M4>^f'.M^I<^ft  i^Tnjhihn: 
'  If  the  teacher  come,  I  desire  that  thou  read.' 

e.  The  potential  may  be  used  with  a  present  or  future  sense 
when  time  not  remote  is  specified :  irrTr:afiTc5^  IT'ti:  ^^:  *  The 
time  is  come  that  thou  perform  thy  penance  ;'  ^fWTW^*  WrT 

*  Let  him  sacrifice  after  an  hour.' 

f.  In  didactic  and  injunctionary  sentences  the  potential  is 
constantly  employed  without  a  nominative  expressed,  referring 
either  to  a  noun  previously  enunciated,  or  to  such  words  as 
'  some  one,'  '  any  one,'   '  a  man,'   or   the    like,   understood : 

*  Let  a  man  preserve  his  wealth  against  misfortune ;  but  his 
wife  even  by  his  wealth :  let  him  even  preserve  himself  by  a  wife 
even,  or  also,  by  wealth:'  trt^^  f^»rer^^T^HWr.  ^  Let 
(one)  not  a  niggard  give  to  the  Brahmans  that  which  may  be 
agreeable  to  them.' 

g.  The  potential  is  used  in  a  future  sense  to  signify  the 
conditional  result   of  an   act  which  a  person  may  perform : 


VERBS.  •  405 

^fiCrf  I  ^  ^^^'^  ^i^j||U4  ^r^Hlcft+^HI^ilM^  I  '  Whatever  Brahman 
may  read  attentive  this  Birth  of  Skanda,  or  may  cause  it  to 
be  heard  by  Brahmans,  or  may  hear  it  repeated  by  a  Brah- 
man, he,  having  obtained  abundance  and  happiness,  may 
obtain  the  heaven  of  that  divinity/ 

307.  Benedictive  mood  (fci^MP^lf^).  The  term  by  which 
the  power  of  this  mood  is  defined  imports  *  blessing  ;*  but  as 
there  is  also  connected  with  it  the  notion  of  '  wish,*  and  as 
this  wish  or  desire  may  concern  oneself  as  well  as  another,  the 
term  '  optative'  would  better  indicate  its  character ;  as,  w^ 
^^  fwiT^xR  U^ilN^4  I  ^wvaf^^l^iw  ^Hjk  ^  ^"^tJT^  I  '  May 
the  gods  direct  us,  so  that  we  may  either  conquer  such  enemies 
as  Ravana,  or  die.'  It  is  used  sometimes  optionally  with,  the 
imperative  in  a  benedictory  sense :  f^t  ^ft^TTr^  or  fqt  'ft^ 
vr^TT  '  May  your  excellency  live  long.' 

308.  Conditional  mood  (fc?'^  f^fH^  ''^)«  This  mood  is 
considered  as  the  equivalent  of  the  potential  when  cause  is 
indicated  as  well  as  consequence,  or  when  one  act  or  condition 
is  contingent  upon  another  act  or  condition,  and  whether  the 
cause  and  consequence  be  future  or  past.  Like  the  poten- 
tial, it  is  commonly  used  with  the  same  conditional  particles, 
irf^,  ^-n ,  &c.,  as  specified  above ;  as,  ^^fF%^Hfw?r  w^  ^^T^- 
TWP^mfi  '  If  there  shall  be  abundant  rain,  then  there  will  be 
plenty  ;'  irf^  ^  JHTT  ^^Vsi^fTHn^  TfrfVsifr^nf  '  If  he  had  been 
seen  by  me,  he  should  have  been  devoured  (by  me).' 

a.  Although  the  same  notion  of  contingency  prevails,  yet 
this  mood  is  also  used  analogously  to  the  potential,  to  signify 
*  uncertain  consequence,'  '  doubt,'  '  suspicion,'  '  possibihty,'  '  in- 
quiry,' and  the  like ;  as  in  this  exemplification  of  its  application 
from  Bhatti:    ^^  Km  ftj:  ^tirf  m^^fmMri  g'^fk  I  ^  mi^- 

^MIH^H^m^M^  TTH  ^IhiPH'^'^  il  '  O  Rama,  unjustly  thou 
wouldest  entertain  suspicion  of  Sita  ;  for  although  the  vile 
enemy  warmly  solicited  her,  and  sometimes  menaced  and  some- 


406  '  SYNTAX. 

times  vaunted  his  own  magnificence,  yet  she,  pure  of  mind, 
would  never  bestow  a  thought  upon  him/ 

b.  The  conditional  mood,  like  the  potential,  is  employed  with 
exclamations  of  surprise,  but  they  require  the  addition  of  xra" 
or  TJ^ ;  as,  ^mynf  xf^  or  ^TW^  ^R^s^,i3f44d  TT^  '  Strange  that  a 
woman  should  in  any  way  abide  in  thy  evil  opinion.'  When 
used  interrogatively,  it  requires  an  interrogative  adverb ;  as, 
f^  HIU^^IH 1 1*^151  HIHliiijd  VTTRit  ^  What !  do  you  know  your- 
self to  be  the  unborn  Narayaiia?'  <^i^|(^^f  P^hsni  f^fi  f^- 
c6M:M^i:  X|i<^  *  She  being  dead  through  fright,  what  then  ?  what 
benefit  wouldest  thou  obtain  ?'  In  the  following  example  many 
of  the  particles  with  which  this  mood  or  the  potential  may  be 
connected,  are  illustrated :  ^?T^  'T^TTUT  "TW  ^(jflMPdm'ili:  I 
^HiPh  ^  W^TfiT  f^  HI^«MM*Dn^H  I  *  Mighty  king,  as  whatever 
and  however  thou  mayest  have  (or  hast)  accomplished  in  the 
destruction  of  the  demons,  what !  wouldest  thou  not  ever  thus 
also  bring  (or  have  brought)  thy  desired  purposes  to  fulfilment.' 

309.  Infinitive  mood.  This,  as  shewn  above  (p.  369),  is 
considered  to  be  a  verbal  derivative  noun,  and  is  attached  in 
the  invariable  accusative  apparently  to  a  verb  ;  as,  ''siVgfN'^rrfH 
'  I  wish  to  hear ;'  chvirgriHtf^  ^  Thou  art  able  to  tell  -,'  iftwf^ 
«T  "sftfTJ  ^  I  will  not  endure  to  live.' 

a.  Like  other  verbal  derivatives,  the  infinitive  may  exercise  a 
similar  government  as  one  of  the  moods  or  tenses  of  the  verb 
from  which  it  is  formed:  ^^  ^tf^TIT  n^  "qr^T^rr:  y^*^<. 
'  They  resolved  to  go  together  to  Draupadi's  marriage  elec- 
tion.' It  cannot  as  a  noun,  however,  admit  the  difference  of 
active  and  passive  voices,  and  the  effect  of  the  latter  is  given  to 
it  by  its  association  with  participles,  and  especially  with  the 
future  participle  of  the  verb  1^  '  to  be  able,'  in  connexion 
with  the  object;  the  agent,  when  expressed,  being  in  the 
instrumental  case  :  ^br  ^s^  ^  51  ««^  ^iTfir  '  Now  that 
blockhead  is  to  be  conquered ;'  iT  i^^H^H  f%HtTO«T  ^l<WI  ^ 
^mrUff  FRTS^  '  We  are  not  to  be  intimidated  to-day  by  thee 
with  this  terror ;'  wk  frg:  "^f  ^ns?:  ^  How  is'  the  enemy  to  be 


VERBS.  407 

seen  ;*  %^  ^^ftftnn^^Tms^  ^H*<IM^»  >T^  *  Nor  can  these  gods, 
sages,  and  progenitors^  be  thus  now  nourished  by  thee.' 

b.  The  infinitive  is  also  used  after  nouns  and  participles ;  as, 
^o5T  vrt^  ^  time  to  eat  -^  crW  ^nrt:  '  able  to  do  ;^  ^  irin  '  gone 
to  see :'  but  these  are  evidently  elliptical  phrases,  in  which 
the  verbal  copulative  is  understood  ;  oR\c^sf^  ipj  '  It  is  time 
to  go.'  The  same  may  be  said  of  the  like  combination  of  the 
infinitive  with  adverbs  or  adverbial  nouns ;  as,  *T  "J^TR  Pri^n 
^^  ^nft  ^7|  huPmiii:  *  (It  is)  not  right,  O  princes,  to  slay  again 
a  slain  enemy ;'  mfllr^lff^f  "gTjftrg'Tc^  ^  Palaces  (are)  fit  to  be 
compared  to  thee ;'  nwrefti:  H>n%?:  ^  ^  j:^  "JRtfvw  *  There- 
fore Yoga  is  the  desired  object  of  the  eminent ;  but  it  (is)  to 
be  made  known  with  difiiculty.' 

SECTION    VI. 

Derivative  Verbs, 

310.  The  derivative  forms  of  the  verb  are  not  of  common 
occurrence,  with  exception  of  the  causal,  which  is  of  very  fre- 
quent use.  As  this  must  from  its  nature  be  a  transitive  verb, 
it  will  govern  an  accusative  case,  either  singly  or  doubly,  as 
exemplified  above  (r.  :z86,^).  The  following  are  a  few  additional 
illustrations  of  its  use :  l^twn  ^frf  M  ^^TTin:  HW  ^IM^IH^  *  We 
are  called  severe  ;  this  we  apprise  you'  (cause  you  to  know) ; 
r^sjIM^fiT  ^  '  The  queen  represents ;'  ^TP^T^rrWw  '  Nay,  she 
commands  ;^  ^  r^  f^ftrarf^  f  t^rTRJ  ^T^t '  Those  evil  dis- 
posed ones  will  alienate  thee  from  me'  (will  cause  to  separate 
from) ;  m  ^BSrfH:  l^^^l^mi  *  Let  the  king  cause  her  to  be 
devoured  by  dogs  ;'  i^T^  ^  tnifftrsifTT  fr^iHT  ^m  '  The  enemy, 
being  valiant,  shall  strike  off  thy  head'  (cause  it  to  fall) ; 
^KIH^MIHI^  ^rtrft^T  f^^T.  *  He  caused  the  women,  with  their 
attendants,  to  be  brought ;'  TTTOT.'iT'T^'fJ^  '  He  did  not  cause 
him  to  be  disunited  from  his  life'  (he  did  not  put  him  to  death). 

a.  The  desiderative  form  is  also  from  its  nature  transitive, 
and  has  the  government  of  transitive  verbs :  mf^l^pr  ^  ^^ 


408  SYNTAX.  « 

HI^IVjMri  JINHI^  \  TTR  VkMjiHm^^^ ^fifxT ftT3^j:%?f  I  ' The  monkey 
(Hanuman)  did  not  wish  (or  would  not)  look  at  the  dance,  nor 
hear  the  singers,  desirous  of  remembering  Rama,  suffering  the 
pain  of  absence/  This  form  of  the  verb  implies  '  volition'  as 
well  as  ^  wish  -/  as,  in^i^HH  ^'^T  ^  fq-sHH^  tT  f^r^rftr  '  Thou 
wilt  not  give  my  father's  share,  being  asked  for  by  me.'  The 
desiderative  form  of  "^,  '  to  hear,'  implies  not  only  ^  to  wish  to 
hear,'  but  '  wait  upon  or  '  obey ;'  that  is,  to  wish  to  please  by 
service  :  -illfJHIH:  ^^6tW  "^^  '^'^liri  tj^  I  ¥  T^W^TfT  Jf^m:  WH 
^1  im ri  I  *  He  who  until  the  end  of  his  life  waits  upon  his  Guru, 
goes  assuredly  to  the  eternal  mansion  of  Brahma.' 

b.  The  frequentative  mode  expresses  either  repetition  or 
intensity — the  doing  of  an  act  repeatedly  or  energetically — but 
it  is  of  very  unfrequent  use  in  either :  ^chohi  ^  TKT^BRT«TT- 
fWFf^  '  They  stand,  like  Chatakas,  crying  aloud  repeatedly  ;^ 
ijxrea'  ^Ph^nSi  'Wll  *  Again  the  bird  eagerly  assailed  him ;' 
xr^  <9V<^5T^  Mrin^lii:  '  He  cut  the  wings  of  the  bird  to 
pieces.'  With  verbs  of  motion  this  form  may  also  imply 
'  going  crookedly'  or  '  badly ;'  as,  mpl^^iri  ^^^:  '  The  lame  man 
goes  awry.'  With  certain  verbs  it  also  intimates  '  defect' 
or  *  impropriety ;'  as,  W?5rc?^  "^T^RITt  '  The  Brahman  prays 
hypocritically.' 

c.  From  a  desiderative  verb  others  may  be  formed ;  as, 
f^r^TRf^T^fw  yuiUlfH  '  He  wishes  to  cause  the  people  to  hear 
the  Puranas ;'  f^  ^TRV:  TTTilfwftT  '  Why  dost  thou  wish  to  cause 
me  to  go  downwards?'  A  desiderative  may  not  be  formed 
from  a  desiderative,  unless  some  other  mode  intervene  ;  as, 
^irH«1  Thjftr^ftnrfrT  1#:  '  The  blockhead  wishes  to  cause  the 
desire  of  frequent  existence  in  the  sage.'  And  in  this  manner 
the  forms  might  be  compiled  without  end ;  but  the  practice  is 
not  adopted. 

d.  The  conversion  of  substantives  into  verbs  is  not  unfre- 
quent, and  depends  apparently  upon  the  pleasure  of  the  writer. 
A  few  examples  of  the  use  of  such  verbs  in  construction  will 
be   sufficient   to   illustrate   their    application.      f^Tt^cRT^  ^"5^ 


PARTICIPLES.  409 

^t?^sftr  "^TR^  *  In  a  spot  destitute  of  trees  the  castor  oil 
plant  becomes  a  tree  ;'  ^wt  ^[^^  ^TlTt:  "^ftwt  <*U!II^^  "^  *  A 
burning  coal  burns  the  hand ;  when  cold  it  blackens  it :'  "gTTf- 
Sj-^IHiriVsTnur:  ^  TI»n^  TcT:  *A  minister  who  is  made  the 
companion  of  (a  king's)  private  amusements,  if  active,  kings  it 
himself:'  HPrit^c^l^^  ^  ^ITT^  wtf^Ht  '  The  mind  of  the 
virtuous  oscillates  (or  swings)  by  the  speech  of  the  wicked :' 
g;i^in'il  ^fiTT:  TfT  Tjtcfi:  ^^pq^  ^AU  men  are  in  sorrow;  he 
alone  is  happy :'  Hl^^^ii^tfM^mriM^*  r^fTB^^TfT  %rT^  ^Rt:  *  If  the  god 
of  love  should  see  thee,  he  would  not  grieve  much  (for  his 
absent  bride) :'  ^  cqiiim"^  ^THT  ^§wr:  <*1«^*1M^  <*ei«il'a  ^ITTT& 
»n=ft  ^  ^Puil^^  ^  This  maiden  is  the  hunter ;  her  eyebrow  is 
her  bow,  her  glances  are  arrows,  and  my  heart  is  the  deer/ 

SECTION    VII. 

Participles. 

311.  Those  participles  which  are  declinable  are,  like  adjec- 
tives, inflected  in  the  gender,  number,  and  case  of  the  noun 
with  which  they  are  connected  in  construction.  Both  the 
declinable  and  indeclinable  may  exercise  the  same  government 
as  the  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived. 

312.  The  present  participles  active  of  transitive  verbs  ordi- 
narily govern  the  noun  in  the  accusative  case :  ^•T  or  ^Si^t 
Tffi  "^iffT  '  Brahma  is  making  (or  makes)  creation ;'  ^^T^TVhrf- 
Tf^m:  '  The  pupil  is  reading  the  Vedas  ;'  -nlr*<IH  HH^MHMI  ^ 
'The  woman  (is)  decorating  herself;'  ^Hrl^>ril  ^T^  'They 
two  (were)  crossing  rivers  ;'  ^  W'sn^TTremT^  '  They  search- 
ing that  hermitage ;'  ^  ^75  ^H^HW  f-^fiUM:  ^T^^TW  *  He, 
considering  the  strength  of  Bhimasena,  was  consumed  (with 
envy).'  The  participle  present  of  ff^,  ^  to  hate,'  optionally 
governs  the  genitive  case :  ^  or  ^gr:^  %^  ^fb  *  Hari  (is) 
hating  (of)  Mura.'  The  participles  of  verbs  of  remembering 
may  also  govern  the  genitive ;  as,  jtt  or  ?th  ^FTJCnft  '  remembering 
(or  thinking  of)  me.'     The  present  participle  may  be  used 

3G 


410  SYNTAX. 

with  particles  in  the  sense  of  the  potential  mood ;  as,  9Hin^c( 
T^^  '5'tw  V*^H*<M«<ii  *  Listen,  that  so  acting  (for,  that  you  may 
so  act  that)  you  will  not  fall  from  duty/ 

a.  The  present  participle  of  the  passive  voice  involves  no 
notion  of  past  time,  but  implies  the  continuance  of  the  state 
or  thing  suffered.  Thus  ^  ^^xhtr^  ^PHilll  irm  '  He  also 
being  thus  bitten  by  the  reptile,'  signifies  that  the  biting 
has  not  ceased,  but  is  going  on :  so  ii^  r^^inwnf  H^jot 
*  When  he  perceived  himself  being  devoured  ;*  ^^^jj^i^iSHiiifT 
^^Tf^^:  ^  Being  pursued  by  numerous  guards.' 

313.  The  participles  of  the  perfect  tense  are  not  of  very 
frequent  occurrence :  they  follow  the  general  rules  relating  to 
concord  and  government,  and  are  not  unusually  employed 
without  a  verb  in  the  sense  of  the  perfect  tense :  ^  fTOJTTxr- 
^5^  PHMH^rMg:  *  They  desired  the  death  of  the  animals  that 
were  near  (them)  ;'  r^^'ftl'^rT'Tftr  '  Thou  art  arrived  ;'  tret  f^^- 
f^TPT  ofi^oR'^:  ^  fro^  ^  He  (was)  seated  (or  sat  down)  on  a 
couch  in  the  presence  of  the  destroyer  of  Kansa.' 

313.  The  indefinite  past  participles  are  of  much  more 
universal  use  than  the  preceding,  and  bear  an  important  part 
in  the  formation  of  sentences :  they  take  the  variations  of 
inflexion  according  to  the  noun  or  pronoun  with  which  they 
are  connected,  expressed  or  understood. 

a.  The  active  indefinite  past  participle  governs  the  same 
cases  as  its  verb,  and  may  be  used  absolutely,  with  the 
auxiliary  verb  implied :  "frfrt  nT»}^<=ll«f  ^T^t  '  Then  S'ankara 
said  to  Rama ;'  "^TTR  "^rt^lM  "^wr:  '  Krishna  slew  the  demons.^ 

b.  The  passive  indefinite  past  participle  is  ordinarily  con- 
nected with  the  agent  in  the  instrumental  case ;  TT^rf  ^TTT 
^ftUT  f?r|jf  "fhTT  *  Sita,  seized  by  RavaAa,  (was)  conveyed  to 
Lanka:'  but  in  some  cases  it  may  be  optionally  connected 
with  the  agent  in  the  genitive ;  as,  n^:  or  TT^  »nft  f^:  '  The 
Brahman  is  respected  by  or  of  the  king ;'  "fl^  or  "jHT  T^H  "ftfTTT 
This  earth  is  conquered  of  or  by  him.'  It  also  governs  the 
agent  in  either  case,  when  signifying  the  site  or  subject  of  the 


PARTICIPLES.  411 

action  ;  as,  ^^wwf  or  i^.  ^rf^Trf  ^  This  was  (the)  slept  of  or  by 
them  ;'  i.  e.  the  place  where,  or  the  time  when,  they  slept : 
^t^Hri^  or  ^T5T  TW  ^  This  was  (the)  gone  of  or  by  him  ;^  i.  e. 
the  time  or  manner  of  his  departure. 

c.  When  derived  from  neuter  or  intransitive  verbs,  this 
participle  may  be  used  with  a  noun  in  the  place  of  the  past 
tense  of  the  verb :  TT^f^lft  TTWT  tTsprf '  The  king  of  the  Rakshasas 
wept  ;*  wr  ^^  Tffts^  *  Ah  !  he  has  died  (or  is  dead)  of  himself.' 

d.  The  indefinite  past  participle  of  verbs  of  motion,  and  of 
others  already  specified  (p.  :Z75),  takes  an  active  sense,  and  is 
used  in  place  of  the  past  tense,  governing  a  noun  in  the  same 
manner  as  a  transitive  verb :  H^ui^ohl  f^^  Hpciyl  m^lfi:  ^^FT 
iTW:  *  Hiraiiyaka  entered  his  hole ;  the  crow  went  to  his  own 
nest :'  ^  ^xij:  ^  hi^^ImI  ^  f^TVf  ^TTH  '  That  hero  is  not  to  be 
mourned  (who  is)  departed  to  death.'  Other  verbs  than  those 
above  enumerated,  which  bear  analogous  imports,  may  also  be 
used  in  this  manner :  ^n^t^iT^f^wf  TTTTT:  *  Alas  !  I  have  incurred 
impurity  ;'  ^  K^rii  tts^^r^  '  She  bore  an  excellent  offspring.^ 
The  time  expressed  may  also  be  indefinite ;  as,  TT»rT«f^  ^^rrrr- 
»<lP^rii:  '  Kings  (affecting)  dwelling  in  the  south.  The  past 
indefinite  participle  of  intransitive  verbs  may  also  be  used  to 
denote  time  indefinitely  present  or  continuous ;  as,  rif^HI't) 
^rft  "^^  '  At  the  end  of  his  day  Brahma  sleeps.' 

e.  The  past  participles  of  verbs  signifying  ^  to  speak,*  *  to 
ask,'  and  the  like,  when  used  with  a  masculine  or  feminine 
noun,  imply  *  spoken  to,'  ^  inquired  of,'  referring  the  object  to 
the  noun  with  which  they  agree,  and  being  followed  by  the 
agent  or  speaker,  when  specified,  in  the  instrumental  case :  ^ 
<d^*^':hM  nf^:  '  That  sage  thus  spoken  to  ;'  ^  ^TTf^fTT  ^  '  She 
addressed  by  him  ;'  ^  t:  "^f:  '  He  inquired  of  by  them.'  The 
participle  may  also  govern  the  matter  of  the  speech,  like  an 
active  verb,  in  the  accusative :  *^M  "^T^T^^sf^  ^  Thou  art 
spoken  to,  a  speech  by  Krishna ;'  ^Hj-*!  "ftn^TIinT  "^TT^  ^^- 
dhu|«{  '  Thus  spoken  to  by  the  king  of  Sindhu,  a  heart- 
agitating  speech.' 

3  G  a 


413  SYNTAX. 

/.  The  indefinite  participle  past  is  often  used  for  a  noun, 
the  noun  or  pronoun  being  understood :  ^?^  ^^  ^ijiP^ 
*  Punishment  watches  over  those  who  sleep  ;'  ^T^"^,  *  people/ 
understood :  XT^TT^'^r  "^#TT  ^  subsisting  by  ripe  and  unripe  ;* 
TROT,  *  fruit,'  understood.  In  the  neuter  gender  it  is  used, 
not  only  as  an  abstract  noun  (p.  275),  but  absolutely  or 
adverbially :  ^rzft^  '  as  it  is  said  ;'  rivjicKd  *  so  it  is  done  ;' 
^<Mlgri>  '  as  it  is  proper,'  ^  fitly/  ^  rightly.' 

g.  Both  the  past  participles  indefinite  are  commonly  used 
with  the  different  tenses  of  the  auxiliary  verbs  ^rt  and  >T, 
forming  in  fact  compound  tenses,  which  might  be  comprised 
within  the  scheme  of  conjugation  with  as  much,  or  rather 
perhaps  with  as  little,  propriety  in  Sanskrit  as  in  other  lan- 
guages ;  as,  Tuftsfe  or  iTrT^  R  fw  ^  I  am  or  have  gone  /  iTTT 
^srnr  TnftsH^,  ttH^RT^,  ninn^H^,  ^  I  was  or  had  gone ;'  JTift 
Hf^TTTftR  or  nf^xiTTf^,  or  inrm^  >Tf^nnfi5R  '  1  shall  be  or  have 
gone  ;'  ^nft  or  tttt^*^  >t^  *  I  may  be  or  have  gone,'  &c. ; 
'«JirimH^Hjohl^ir^l  '  I  have  done  improper  acts ;'  inft  ^  "jrft 
Hf^rffT  TTT:  '  Rama  will  be  gone  to-morrow  to  the  forest  / 
^TFgTff:  chi  r^HTTTSf  >TfTorftr  ^  Thou  shalt  have  obtained  unequalled 
fame.'  When  used  alone,  either  absolutely  or  transitively,  it 
may  be  inferred  that  the  form  is  elUptical,  and  that  the  verb 
is  understood ;  as,  f^T^RHRt  fV^  Trf^r^s>Jc^  '  HiraAyaka  was  or 
had  entered  his  hole.' 

314.  The  indefinite  past  participles  indeclinable  are  also  of 
very  extensive  and  important  application.  They  are  especially 
used  to  suspend  the  close  of  a  sentence,  acting  at  the  same 
time  as  copulatives,  and  connecting  something  which  precedes 
with  something  which  is  to  follow ;'  as,  ^W  ^  ^nn  '  Having 
so  spoken,  he  went  away ;'  f^THTrJ^  ^v:\  "^  ^  (I)  having 
long  considered,  it  was  done  by  me.'  They  may  be  repeated, 
to  imply  a  succession  of  actions  preparatory  to  some  final  one  : 
^fiT  TR^twrfir^  ^Hirc^'^-*!  "^'^f^in  ^  Having  thus  discoursed  (to 
them),  treated  (them)  with  hospitality,  and  embraced  them,  he 
Bent  (them)  away.' 


PARTICIPLES.  413 

a.  As  ordinarily  employed,  these  participles  undergo  and 
exercise  the  same  government  as  the  tenses  of  the  verb ;  that 
is,  they  are  connected  with  the  subject  in  the  nominative,  and 
the  object  in  the  accusative  or  some  other  case :  "rniTOt^ft  tHTT 
^PHfiuf  ^r^  ^  The  king  having  presented  gifts  to  the  Brahmans ;' 
r^C<W<*l  f^^  ^r^  PH-Mflfrf  '  Hiranyaka,  having  made  a  hole, 
dwelt ;'   cfivj^^  wi  WW  '  Speak,  having  dismissed  fear.' 

h.  It  often  occurs,  however,  that  these  participles  are  used 
elhptically  or  parenthetically,  and  in  appearance  absolutely 
or  without  government ;  whence  it  has  been  inferred  *,  that 
they  are  rather  gerunds  than  participles.  It  is  doubtful, 
however,  if  in  any  case  the  deficient  nouns  may  not  be  readily 
supphed :  thus,  W^T  ^n^  7Tll^f4«H«Mi;  f^^W  WH^  fw^tf  *  By 
that  fowler,  (he)  having  scattered  the  grains  of  rice,  a  net  w^as 
spread :'  3[fir  ^:  "TftjftrP^ftjW  'pft  ^IMlf^:  '  The  vulture  was 
killed  by  all  the  birds,  (they)  having  thus  concluded :'  ^!R%- 
tinrr  ^T^W  ^*^>W  MClM«*i.^n<*ri:  ^  By  the  unwise,  the  self  or 
person,  (they)  having  diligently  adorned  (it),  is  made  the  tool 
of  another.'  This  sort  of  construction  is,  no  doubt,  often 
complicated,  but  it  may  perhaps  be  always  unravelled  in  this 
manner :  ^^Tirn?rNT  ^  ftft^T  IX^  ^TTi^  ^owShihI  P^jdltj^  Hmi^l- 
^  ^RTT  IRl^T^T^  ^^R^"t  Y^t  ^  The  cat  named  Dadhikarna 
was  placed  by  that  lion  in  his  cave ;  (he)  having  thus  reflected, 
and  having  gone  to  the  village,  and  having  given  (the  cat) 
flesh  and  other  kinds  of  food,  and  brought  (him)  thence  with 
much  trouble.^ 

315.  The  participles  of  the  future  tense  are  said  to  have 
these  significations  in  common  with  the  imperative  mood, 
^  directing,^  ^  commanding,'  and  indication  of  season  or  oppor- 
tunity :  ofi^:  <*^cn:  oRTjirfhr:  "SfiPt:  '  The  mat  is  to  be  made ;  it 
must  be  made  ;  it  is  time  for  it  to  be  made.'  They  also 
intimate  *  fitness'  or  ^  propriety ;'  ^jnm  ^^^T  ^  The  girl  is  to 

*  This  was  first  proposed  in  a  very  elaborate  and  interesting  investigation 
of  these  and  some  other  verbal  forms,  by  the  late  Baron  W.  Humboldt, 
pubhshed  in  the  Indische  Bibliothek. 


414  SYNTAX. 

be  married ;'  she  is  marriageable :  V#s'»j^iiijni|:  *  Duty  is  to 
be  observed :'  and  they  denote  '  ability'  or  '  competency  ;'  r^m 
md  ^^^fN:  ^  The  load  is  to  be  borne  by  thee  ;'  ^nST^  '^thm<1 
^^■oi:  ^  If  I  am  fit  to  be  killed,  I  am  to  be  killed.'  In  these 
and  the  like  phrases  they  agree  with  the  object,  and  are  used 
without  a  verb,  although  it  is  evident  that  the  verb  is  under- 
stood ;  ^ft:  "Sfif^:  being  properly  ^agz:  ^^sf^ ;  so  ??if^:  is 
properly  ■^•d«*fls'ftR. 

a.  Future  participles  are  used  absolutely  in  the  neuter 
gender,  either  in  place  of  a  noun,  or  with  the  noun  implied : 
-^m  ^n^ri^M  TT^^  ^  As  it  is  to  be,  so  be  it ;'  TT?^  <jt!^riMI^<  Wm^- 
mi^l^-^fi^  *  He  caused  to  be  said  what  was  to  be  said  to  him 
asking  what  was  (fit)  to  be  asked.' 

b.  These  participles,  when  capable  of  a  transitive  effect, 
govern  the  object  in  the  same  case  as  the  verb  to  which  they 
belong '/  as,  ^  7^J^  "rui^^  ^  It  is  to  be  gone  by  him  to  the 
village  ;'  ^ri«m  TRt  '^il'T  "^W«T  '  The  cows  are  to  be  taken  to 
pasture  by  Krishna ;'  t^^^R:  ^f^^^trr^TT^jf  *  He  is  to  be  fined 
an  eighth  part  of  his  property ;'  J|t(*^riri^H^I  ^m  '  That  is  to  be 
said  by  thee  of  (to)  me.'  The  agent,  agreeably  to  their  passive 
signification,  is  usually  in  the  instrumental  case  ;  but  it  may 
be  also  sometimes  in  the  genitive  ;  wm  or  J{^  ^^  ^f^:. 

316.  Some  verbal  derivatives  of  a  participial  character 
exercise  the  like  government  upon  nouns  as  already  noticed 
(r.  290,  a).  To  the  examples  there  adduced  the  following 
may  be  added.  The  derivative  from  oR  with  "Hc^H  prefixed, 
and  ^  affixed,  governs  an  accusative :  ti(^Hc4^»r4^u.uA^i  '  The 
husband  adorns,  or  is  the  adorner  of,  his  wife.'  Derivatives 
from  "^  with  the  affix  ^1^  may  require  the  instrumental  case ; 
^^lr:hi.:  i^MVt  ^fwr  '  The  material  w^orld  is  easily  made  by 
Vishnu :'    or   the   genitive ;    "Sf  %   rT^ljHwl^   f^fifNl^xin^TiTRf 

*  Nothing  here  is  difficult  to  the  persevering.'  Derivatives  with 
"ji?  are  followed  by  nouns  in  the  accusative  ;  f^w:  ofi#T  c^^«^ 

*  VishAu  is  the  maker  of  the  worlds :'  but  considered  as  substan- 
tives, such  derivatives  may  be  followed  by  other  substantives 


'    PROSODY.  415 

in  the  genitive  case,  and  •sr^t  TfNTJff  is  equally  allowable. 
Words  formed  with  ^,  when  *  futurity'  is  implied,  govern 
the  object  in  the  accusative :  W»Tl=T»ft  '  Who  is  going  (will  go) 
to  the  pasture  ?'  ^Hr^iifl  *  Who  is  giving  (will  give)  a  hun- 
dred?' A  noun  formed  with  ^^  from  the  indefinite  past 
participle  may  be  connected  with  another  in  the  locative  case : 
^1(1  ffl  cqiohuur  '  well  read  in  grammar.' 


CHAPTER    IX. 

PROSODY. 

SECTION    I. 

General  Rules. 

317.  It  would  be  inconsistent  with  the  plan  and  limits  of 
the  present  work  to  attempt  any  lengthened  detail  of  the 
infinite  varieties  of  the  metrical  system  of  the  Hindus  ;  but 
a  brief  description  of  the  principles  by  which  it  is  regulated, 
and  their  illustration  by  a  few  examples  of  the  most  frequently 
occurring  kinds  of  metre,  will  not  be  out  of  place,  and  may 
be  of  use. 

318.  The  essential  element  of  Sanskrit  prosody  is  Quantity. 
As  the  long  and  short  vowels  have  distinct  symbols,  their 
value  is  at  once  determined.  A  short  vowel,  however,  is 
considered  to  be  prosodially  long  when  it  precedes  a  conjunct 
consonant,  also  when  it  precedes  Anuswara  or  Visarga.  At 
the  end  of  a  line  or  stanza,  also,  the  last  vowel  is  regarded  as 
long  or  short  according  to  the  exigence  of  the  metre. 

319.  Syllables  of  various  quantities  are  arranged  in  certain 
definite  groupes  to  form  prosodial  feet.  This  is  effected 
according  to  two  different  methods. 

a.  The  first  method  is  that  which  is  employed  in  the 
greatest  number  of  popular  metres,  and  is  the  formation  of  tri- 
syllabic feet.     Of  these,  eight  varieties  are  enumerated.    Each 


416  PROSODY. 

has  its  equivalent  denomination  in  Greek  prosody;  but  by- 
native  writers  each  is  designated  by  a  distinct  syllable,  having 
the  term  Tm,  '  class'  or  *  number,'  attached  to  it,  as  in  the 
following  Ust : 

1.  Na-gaAa  rprro:  www  Tribrach. 

2.  Ma-gaiia  JU\W.  — Molossus. 

3.  Ja-gana  ^FHTn  w  — w  Amphibrach. 

4.  Ra-gaiia  TTTWt    —^—  Cretic. 

5.  Bha-gaAa  WTOt   —  w  w  Dactyl. 

6.  Sa-gana  f|J|iii:  ww—  Anapaest. 

7.  Ya-gaAa  tptWJ  ^ Bacchic. 

8.  Ta-gaiia  wmx ^  Antibacchic. 

With  given  numbers  of  these  feet  a  monosyllable  or  dissyl- 
lable may  be  further  necessary  to  complete  a  line,  but  they 
are  regarded  as  supplementary  syllables,  not  feet,  and  are 
specified  accordingly  as  one  or  two  long  or  short  syllables,  or 
one  long  and  one  short,  as  the  case  may  be. 

b.  In  the  second  method  of  forming  prosodial  feet,  which 
characterises  a  peculiar  class  of  metres,  the  element  is  a  syl- 
labic instant,  or  short  syllable :  of  these,  four  constitute  a 
foot ;  that  is,  a  foot  consists  of  either  four  short  syllables  or 
their  equivalents,  viz.  two  long  or  one  long  and  two  short 
syllables. 

c.  There  is  another  mode  of  measuring  verse,  which  dis- 
penses with,  or  only  partially  permits,  the  use  of  regular  feet. 
In  this  a  definite  number  of  short  syllables,  or  their  equiva- 
lents, without  further  subdivision,  constitutes  a  verse  ;  certain 
portions  of  which,  however,  commonly  consist  of  feet  of  the 
first  class. 

320.  A  varying  number  and  disposition  of  these  several 
feet,  or  syllabic  instants,  form  a  verse,  which  differs  as  to 
length  and  proportions.  This  verse  is  a  stanza  or  Sloka, 
which,  with  some  exceptions,  consists  of  two  Unes  or  hemi- 
stichs :  each  of  these  is  again  subdivided  into  two  parts :  so 


GENERAL   RULES.  417 

that  the  entire  stanza  is  for  the  most  part  a  tetrastich,  com- 
posed of  four  Padas  or  Charanas,  Hterally  '  feet,'  or,  in  our 
understanding  of  the  term,hnes  or  semi-hemistichs :  the  intervals 
between  the  first  and  second,  and  third  and  fourth  of  which 
are  not  always  so  distinctly  marked,  as  that  between  the 
second  and  third. 

a.  When  the  metre  consists  of  feet  of  the  first  order,  and 
is  single,  the  Padas  are  of  equal  length,  and  of  corresponding 
quantities.  Sometimes,  however,  two  or  more  kinds  of  metre 
may  be  mixed  in  one  stanza,  and  then  the  hemistichs  or 
Padas  may  vary  in  length  and  in  quantity.  When  feet  of 
the  second  kind  are  used,  the  Padas  are  of  different,  though 
definite  lengths. 

b.  Rhyme  is  not  employed  in  any  of  the  older,  or  in  the 
higher  order  of,  writings.  It  is  met  with  in  poems  of  a  lyrical 
character,  and  of  later  date ;  and  in  them  also  great  inequality 
of  metre  is  introduced.  In  the  best  and  oldest  compositions 
great  regularity  prevails,  although  the  metre  is  occasionally 
varied  even  in  the  same  work. 

SECTION    II. 

Varna-vritta. 

321.  Of  the  two  classes  of  measures  which  depend  upon 
feet,  the  larger  and  more  popular  is  also  regulated  by  another 
principle,  viz.  the  number  of  syllables  contained  in  the  stanza. 
The  class  is  thence  denominated  Variia-vritta  or  Akshara- 
Chhandas,  ^  Literal  or  syllabic  metre.' 

a.  The  number  of  syllables  in  a  verse  of  this  class  may 
vary  from  four  to  nearly  four  thousand ;  but  of  the  prevailing 
orders  of  this  class  few  contain  less  than  twenty-four  syllables, 
or  six  syllables  in  a  line ;  or  more  than  one  hundred  and  four 
in  a  verse,  or  twenty- six  in  a  line.  Within  these  limits 
twenty-one  orders  are  specified,  each  of  which,  by  the  varying 
disposition  of  the  feet,  and  of  the  pause  or  caesura,  comprises 

3H 


4<18  PROSODY. 

different  species.  The  number  of  species  ordinarily  enume- 
rated is  above  two  hundred ;  but  of  these,  many  are  of  rare 
use,  although  the  whole  number  is  infinitely  less  than  the 
possible  combinations  of  this  class  of  metre,  which,  as  a  matter 
of  arithmetical  computation,  is  reckoned  at  many  millions  of 
milHons.  The  forms  in  popular  use  do  not  perhaps  exceed 
twenty  or  thirty,  and  range  from  thirty-two  syllables  to  fifty- 
six  in  the  verse.  When  they  exceed  the  latter  number,  the 
verse  is  very  rarely  employed  in  continuous  passages  of  any 
length,  but  is  inserted  occasionally,  or  occurs  at  the  close  of  a 
canto  or  section,  as  a  more  stately  and  sonorous  close.  We 
shall  specify  the  different  orders  of  this  class,  with  a  notice  of 
their  varieties,  and  exemplifications  of  a  few  of  their  most 
ordinary  species. 

1 .  Gayatri,  5  x  4  =  24.  Eleven  varieties.  This  metre  is  not 
of  frequent  occurrence  in  profane  versification,  and  when  used, 
as  it  is  in  the  hymns  of  the  Vedas,  it  is  most  commonly  a 
triplet,  somewhat  varying  in  length.  The  most  usual  form  is 
a  triplet  of  three  lines  of  eight  syllables  each,  as  in  the  follow- 
ing, which  is  the  most  sacred  verse  of  the  Vedas,  and  known 
emphatically  as  '  the'  Gayatri.  It  is  held  in  such  reverence, 
that  it  is  never  to  be  uttered  in  the  hearing  of  ears  profane. 

^  Om !  let  us  meditate  on  the  glorious  splendour  of  that  divine 
sun,  that  he  may  inspire  us.' 

2.  Ushnih,  7  X  4  =  28.  Eight  varieties ;  none  of  frequent 
occurrence,  except  in  the  Vedas. 

3.  Anushtubh,  8  x4  =  32.  Twelve  varieties.  This  is  by  far 
the  most  frequent  and  useful  form  of  Sanskrit  verse.  It  is 
that  in  which  the  great  body  of  metrical  composition,  whether 
narrative  or  didactic,  exists.  AU  works  of  considerable  extent  are 
written  in  it,  reHeved  by  the  occasional  introduction  of  other 
measures.  It  is  the  prevailing  form  of  metre  in  the  laws  of 
Manu,  the  Mahabharata,  the  Ramayana,  and  the  Puranas. 

a.  The  Anushtubh  or  (in  the  nominative  inflexion)  Anushfup 


VARNA-VRITTA.  419 

stanza  is  divided  into  four  Padas,  of  eight  syllables  each.  In 
its  most  regular  form  the  first  foot  is  any  one  except  a 
tribrach ;  the  second  may  be  a  dactyl,  a  tribrach,  cretic,  or 
anapaest ;  the  other  two  syllables  are  indifferently  long  or 
short.  In  the  twelve  species,  however,  other  dispositions 
occur.  Thus  in  that  termed  Vidyunmala  the  whole  stanza  con- 
sists of  long  syllables,  or  is  a  verse  of  molossi  and  spondees : 
in  another,  Pramaiii,  we  have  alternately  short  and  long  sylla- 
bles, a  stanza  of  amphibrachs  or  iambics :  in  a  third,  Samani, 
long  and  short  syllables  alternate,  forming  a  verse  of  cretics  or 
trochees :  whilst  in  a  fourth,  Tunga,  the  first  six  syllables  of 
each  line  are  short,  or  two  tribrachs. 

b.  Another  rule  given  for  the  formation  of  the  Anusht'up 
verse  is,  that  the  fiflh  syllable  of  each  line  shall  be  short,  the 
sixth  long,  and  the  seventh  alternately  long  and  short ;  whilst 
the  four  first  syllables  and  the  eighth  are  arbitrary.  This  will 
be  found  to  be  usually  the  form  adopted,  with  occasional 
exceptions.     The  following  are  examples. 

|_      ^-1— II |^^-|w-     II      -.._|wo^|--l|^-v.|^^_|v.-|| 

*  This  universe  had  become  darkness,  undiscerned,  uncharac- 
terised,  indescribable,  incomprehensible,  as  if  every  where  in  a 
deep  sleep.'  Manu. 

_  ^      _| |_        ^||v^v^_|         _      ^     _|v.-     I 

m  fpRT^  irfiTFf  HHiiH:  ^TTwhnn: 

^  Never,  barbarian,  mayest  thou  acquire  fame  for  endless  years, 
since  thou  hast  slain  one  of  these  birds,  heedless  through 
passion.'    Ramayana. 

Tradition  affirms  of  this,  that  it  is  the  first  S'loka  or 
Anush^up  verse  ever  composed. 

|_v.v>|v.      -     ||v.-v.|^^-|w-    II     v.__|v.    ^-1       _     _||ww_|    -    w    -|v._|| 

^  At  Gangadwara  was  a  great  holy  sage,  Bharadwaja  by  name, 

3  H  2 


420  PROSODY. 

ever  engaged  in  devotion.'  Mahabharata.  In  the  first  Pada 
the  sixth  syllable  is  short ;  and  the  seventh  is  short  in  the 
first,  second,  and  fourth. 

1^      —I-  -II  --    -Iwv.    -1^-    II     _  ^--1     V.      ^_  I    _    -II    w^  _    I    ^  ^        1^_|1 

*  Maid  with  the  long  and  lotus  eyes,  O  look  upon  me  again. 
It  is  an  ancient  saying,  that  in  the  vrorld  poison  is  the  antidote 
of  poison.'    S'ringara  Tilaka. 

The  following  is  given  in  the  S'ruta  Bodha  both  as  the  rule 
and  the  example  of  a  verse  of  long  syllables : 

^W  ^^#r  ^t^  T!(^  fV^TRtwrfT  tif^  in^  i 

— I        _i_  _  ii_   -  -I  _   -  -I —  II 

*  That  (verse)  in  which  all  the  vowels  are  long,  and  there  is  a 
pause  at  each  Pada,  is  called,  O  lute-voiced,  Vidyunmala  by 
the  learned.' 

4.  Vrihati,  9  x  4  =  36.    Twelve  varieties  :  not  much  used. 

5.  Pankti,  10x4  =  40.  Fourteen  varieties :  not  much  used 
alone,  but  sometimes  mixed  with  the  following. 

6.  Trishfubh,  11x4  =  44.  Twenty-two  varieties.  Some  of 
the  species  of  this  order  are  next  in  frequency  of  use  to  the 
Anush{ubh,  and  are  generally  employed,  even  in  poems  written 
for  the  most  part  in  the  latter  metre,  in  passages  affecting  a 
more  elevated  or  animated  tone.  Many  parts  of  the  Maha- 
bharata, the  Puranas,  and  the  plays,  and  the  greater  portion 
of  the  Raghu  Vansa,  Kumara  Sambhava,  Bhatti  Kavya, 
Magha,  Kiratarjuniya,  and  other  popular  poems,  are  written 
in  one  or  other  form  of  the  eleven-syllable  metre,  either  singly 
or  alternating  with  other  kinds,  especially  with  the  next  or 
twelve-syllable  metre  ;  or  sometimes  mixed  with  it  or  with 
the  ten- syllable  metre  in  the  same  stanza ;  but  then  it  is 
considered  to  belong  to  the  third  class  of  metres,  under  the 
name  of  Vaitaliya  or  Aupachchandasika,  as  will  be  subse- 
quently noticed. 

«.  The  most  frequent  form  of  the  order  Trish^ubh  is  that 


VARNA-VRITTA.  421 

called  Indravajra,  a  verse  of  four  Padas,  each  of  which  contains 
two  antibacchics,  an  amphibrach,  and  two  long  syllables.  Instead 
of  a  double  antibacchic,  the  first  foot  may  be  an  amphibrach, 
when  the  metre  is  termed  TJpendravajra :  and  a  third  variety, 
named  Upajati,  is  said  to  be  formed  when  these  two  are,  as  is 
very  commonly  the  case,  mixed  in  difierent  Padas  of  the  same 
stanza,  as  in  the  following  examples ;  the  first  of  which  is  in 
the  Indravajrd,  the  second  in  the  Upendi'avajra,  and  the  third 
in  the  Upajati  metre. 

_        _  w|-        l^|v.-w|_        -  II        _-^|__^|v.       _^|__|| 

'  These  princes  returned  to  their  tents,  displaying  in  their 
appearance  and  attire  the  vexation  which  their  disappointed 
love  for  Bhojya  had  excited,  resembling  planets,  whose  lustre 
fades  before  the  dawn  of  day/    Raghu  Vansa. 

^_^i__^i^_  ^i__  II  _  _  ^i_  _  ^i^_^i_  _  II 

*  The  grief  that  tvas  felt  (by  Yudhish^hira)  for  the  loss  of  his 
most  precious  jewels,  his  treasure,  or  his  kingdom,  was  not  so 
severe  as  that  which  was  inflicted  by  the  glances  of  Krishna, 
darting  anger  and  shame.'    Mahabharata. 

^_^|__         ^|^_^|_     _^     II       __       ^|_  ..|^_        v.|__|| 

-    -      -I-        -   -I—     -i--     II       v>     _    V.I    -  _     ^|w    -    wl_-    II 

'  When  the  sun,  having  completed  his  (southern)  sojourn, 
commenced  to  travel  towards  the  quarter  protected  by  Kuvera 
(the  north),  the  region  of  the  south  breathed  forth  a  fragrant 
zephyr,  like  a  sigh  of  regret.'  Kumara  Sambhava.  In  this 
the  first  and  fourth  Padas  are  in  the  TJpendravajra,  the  second 
and  third  in  the  Indravajra  metre. 

7.   Jagati,    12x4  =  48.     Thirty  varieties.      This   order   of 
metres  is  also  of  frequent  employment,  and  very  commonly 


422  PROSODY. 

alternates  with  the  preceding  in  the  same  passages,  or  in 
separate  cantos.  The  most  common  variety  of  it  is  the  Van- 
sastha,  a  stanza  in  which  each  line  consists  of  an  amphibrach, 
an  antibacchic,  an  amphibrach,  and  a  cretic. 

*  With  the  music  of  the  waves  that  murmured  against  the 
borders  of  the  pool,  with  the  songs  of  the  flocks  of  koils,  and 
the  graceful  dance  of  the  peacock,  an  entertainment  was  pre- 
pared for  him  in  the  forest.  Where  is  it  that  the  man  who  is 
prosperous  meets  not  with  delight?'    Naishadha. 

Another  variety,  the  Indravansa,  differs  from  this  only  in 
the  first  foot,  which  may  be  an  antibacchic  as  well  as  the 
second ;  and  these  two  being  mixed  in  the  same  stanza,  as  in 
the  foregoing  order,  form  a  species  of  Upajati.  They  may 
both,  again,  be  blended  with  the  two  first  varieties  of  the 
Trish^ubh,  as  in  the  following,  in  which  the  first  Pada  is  in 
the  Indravajra  metre,  the  second  in  the  Indravansa,  the  third 
in  the  Upendravajra,  and  the  fourth  in  the  Vansastha. 

_     _       ^|_    _^|^     -..I-    _       II        -    -..I-       -    v.|w-        ^l-w-    II 

fwr  irtWt^ir  ^Fr»o|f?T:  i  ^TTjrn^  5^^^  fro^nn  i 


^  Varanasi,  the  eternal,  is  the  city  of  salvation,  the  native  land 
of  the  acquirement  of  true  wisdom  :  hence  he  wishes  to  dwell 
perpetually  here,  being  desirous  of  observing  the  practices 
that  cut  off  (the  bonds)  of  family  attachment.^  Prabodha 
Chandrodaya. 

8.  Atijagati,  13  x4  =  -52.  Sixteen  varieties.  In  the  earlier 
writers  this  order  of  metres  is  not  common,  although  occa- 
sional stanzas  occur  in  the  plays.  In  works  of  later  date,  and 
especially  in  the  Magha  and  Kiratarjuniya,  whole  cantos  are 
composed  in  one  or  other  of  its  varieties. 

a.  One  species,  the  Manjubhashini,  consists  of  an  anapaest 
and  an  amphibrach,  each  repeated,  and  a  long  syllable ;  as. 


VARNA-VRITTA.  42S 

^  Waft  me  home  upon  the  new  cloud,  converted  into  a  chariot 
for  our  happy  journey,  decorated  with  the  many-coloured  bow 
of  Indra,  and  waving  the  swifl  gleaming  lightning  for  its 
banner.'    Vikramorvasi. 

b.  Another  species,  the  Praharshini,  consists  of  a  molossus, 
a  tribrach,  an  amphibrach,  a  cretic,  and  a  long  syllable : 

1^        w    v..|w-    w|-    V.     -I    -      (I 1^    ^    ^\^-^\ 1-    II 

^The  speed  of  my  flight  through  the  sky  invests  me  with 
terror  as  well  as  grace,  being  musical,  instead  of  with  bells, 
with  the  fierce  clanging  sounds  of  the  skulls  that  form  my 
necklace,  striking  against  each  other  in  my  undulating  motion/ 
Malati  Madhava. 

c.  A  metre  composed  of  twelve  and  of  thirteen-syllable 
lines  is  also  to  be  found  in  some  extended  passages  in  the 
same  works  in  which  other  varieties  of  this  order  are  used. 
This,  however,  which  is  termed  Pushpitagra,  is  also  considered 
to  be  a  variety  of  the  third  class  of  metres,  or  of  those  regu- 
lated by  syllabic  instants. 

9.  S'akkari,  14  x  4  =  56.  Twenty  varieties.  The  forms  of 
this  order  are  also  not  unfrequent,  and  one  of  them  especially, 
the  Vasantatilaka,  is  often  used.  This  contains  in  each  Pada 
an    antibacchic,   a   dactyl,  two    amphibrachs,   and    two    long 

syllables. 

--    w  1-^    ^i^_    ^|^_..|__   II    __^|_^    ^l^_   ^|^_    ^i-_  II 
Tii^^^jTnw  ^^:  mHjcikuht:  i  ^mf^  ir^  Qm^t  "^^Trft  f^r^:  i 

'  The  enemy,  hastening  from  many  parts,  seized  the  women  of 
his  family,  and  plundered  the  treasures  of  the  king,  thus  fallen 
from  his  throne,  as  a  rocky  fragment  carries  away  the  fruit 
and  flowers  of  a  tree  that  has  been  hurled  from  the  summit  of 
a  mighty  mountain.'    Raja  Tarangini. 


494  PROSODY. 

10.  Atisakkari,  15  x4  =  6o.  Eighteen  varieties.  They  occur 
occasionally,  though  not  in  passages  of  any  length.  The  most 
common  is  the  species  termed  Mahni,  which  consists  of  two 
tribrachs,  a  molossus,  and  two  bacchics. 

..V.V.    I   w^w|-       -  -I--       -Iv.    _    _     II      w   w    ^l^v^^l Is.    _  _    Iv.     _     -11 

'  Rememberest  thou,  O  lovely-formed,  those  days  which  we 
passed  happily  together  in  that  mountain,  when  all  our  service 
was  performed  by  LakshmaAa  ?  Rememberest  thou  the  borders 
of  the  lake,  or  the  Godaveri  river?  Rememberest  thou  our 
habitation  upon  its  shore  ?'    Uttara  Rama  Charitra. 

11.  Ash{i,  16x4  =  64.  Twelve  varieties.  They  are  very 
rarely  met  with. 

12.  Atyashft,  17  x4  =  68.  Seventeen  varieties.  Some  of 
these  are  popular,  occurring  principally  in  short  passages  at 
the  close  of  a  section,  although  sometimes  forming  the  only 
metre  of  entire  poems,  when  they  are  not  of  great  extent. 
Thus  the  whole  of  the  Ananda  Lahari  is  written  in  a  popular 
variety  of  this  metre,  termed  S'ikharini,  in  which  each  Pada 
contains  a  bacchic,  a  molossus,  a  tribrach,  an  anapaest,  a 
dactyl,  and  one  short  and  one  long  syllable. 

I |ww.>Iwv.-|_       v.v.lw_| 

'  Some  blessed  sages  worship  thee,  the  wave  of  spiritual  feli- 
city, having  thy  resting  place  with  the  supreme  S'iva  upon  the 
throne  in  which  his  fivefold  form  is  typified,  in  the  temple  of 
the  all-bestowing  jewel,  which  stands  in  a  grove  of  Kadamba 
trees,  near  a  lake  surrounded  by  the  trees  of  heaven,  on  the 
island  of  gems,  in  the  midst  of  the  sea  of  ambrosia.' 

Another  variety  of  this  order,  the  Mandakranta,  forms  also 
the  metre  of  the  whole  of  the  Megha  Diita.     It  consists  of  a 


VARNA-VRITTA.  4^ 

molossus,  a  dactyl,  a  tribrach,  two  antibacchics,  and  two  long 
syllables  or  a  spondee. 

*  Enveloping  with  thy  shade  the  region  Brahmavartta  beneath 
thee,  go  thence  to  the  field  of  Kuru,  infamous  for  the  slaughter 
of  heroes,  and  with  thy  falling  rain-drops  pelt  the  lotus  flowers, 
as  the  wielder  of  the  bow  Gan'diva  here  showered  his  sharp 
and  countless  arrows  upon  the  faces  of  the  warriors.' 

13.  Dhriti,  i8x4  =  7:z.  Seventeen  varieties,  but  of  rare 
occurrence :  and  of  all  these  higher  numbers  it  may  be 
observed,  that  they  are  seldom  used  in  books,  except  in 
occasional  and  closing  stanzas,  and  that  it  is  only  in  elabo- 
rate and  commonly  turgid  panegyrical  inscriptions  that  they 
extend  to  wider  limits.  The  concluding  verse  of  the  twelfth 
book  of  the  Raghu  Vansa  is  an  example  of  the  variety  of  this 
order  termed  Mahamalika,  in  which  the  Pada  is  formed  of  two 
tribrachs  and  four  cretics. 

finrw^f^  r^THl  It  ill  ^^Hzq  f^nf  %ft<t!i: 

*  Rama  having  received  his  bride,  purified  by  fire,  and  trans- 
ferred the  kingdom  of  his  foe  to  his  friend  Vibhishana,  set  out, 
accompanied  by  the  son  of  the  sun  and  Saumitra  to  his  city, 
in  the  heavenly  car  which  his  arm  had  won.' 

14.  Atidhriti,  19  x  4  =  76.  Thirteen  varieties.  One  of  these 
is  a  favourite  metre  as  an  occasional  stanza.  This  is  the 
S'ardula  vikn^ita,  in  which  the  Pada  consists  of  a  molossus, 
an  anapcest,  an  amphibrach,  an  anapaest,  two  antibacchics,  and 
a  long  syllable. 

3  I 


426  PROSODY. 

1^   v.-!^  -  w|  ..^  -I    -  _     ^|__^|_ 

*  Having  contracted  his  body,  and  examined  the  whole  of 
Lanka,  whose  rows  of  white  palaces  shone  with  augmented 
beauty,  as  glistening  in  the  autumnal  moonlight,  and  having 
beheld  Janaki  in  the  Asoka  garden,  surrounded  by  Rakshasa 
females,  the  son  of  air  ascended  a  Kaiikelli  tree,  and  there 
remained  concealed.'    Hanuman  Nataka. 

15.  Kriti,  20  X  4  =  80.    Four  varieties  :  not  often  used. 

16.  Prakriti,  21  X4=84.  Three  varieties;  of  which  one, 
the  Sragdhara,  is  met  with  in  an  occasional  verse.  The  Pada 
comprises  a  molossus,  a  cretic,  a  dactyl,  a  tribrach,  and  three 
bacchics;   as, 

'  Who  are  they,  and  for  whose  use  created,  who  were  formed 
by  Brahma  treasures  of  every  excellence  ;  surpassing  in  their 
splendour  the  lords  of  the  elephant  herd,  when  shedding  the 
dews  of  passion  from  their  brows?  Like  the  haughty  and 
proud  monarch  of  the  forest  tribes,  who  submits  not  to  have 
his  teeth  broken,  so  sovereigns  such  as  those  emperors  of  the 
world  suffer  not  their  orders  to  be  disobeyed.'  Mudra 
Rakshasa. 

17.  ^riti,  22  X4=88.    Three  varieties. 

18.  Vikriti,  23  x4  =  92.    Six  varieties. 

19.  Sankriti,  24  X  4  =  96.    Five  varieties. 

20.  Atikriti,  25  x4=ioo.     Two  varieties. 

21.  Utkriti,  26  X  4=  104.    Three  varieties. 


GANA-VRITTA.  427 

Z2.  DaAclaka  is  the  general  name  given  to  all  metres  of 
this  class  exceeding  the  Utkriti  measure. 

SECTION   III. 

Gaha-vritta, 

3212!.  The  second  class  of  metres  consists  of  those  in  which 
the  feet  are  formed  of  four  short  syllables  or  their  equivalents. 
There  are  sixteen  classes  of  this  metre,  and  each  of  them 
admits  of  sixteen  species  ;  but  it  will  be  sufficient  to  notice 
the  five  principal  classes. 

I .  i^rya.  This  is  a  stanza  of  four  Padas,  the  first  of  which 
contains  twelve  short  syllables,  the  second  eighteen^  the  third 
twelve,  and  the  fourth  fifteen.  As  regulated  by  the  feet, 
however,  the  division  is  best  adapted  to  the  hemistich^  and 
the  Arya  stanza  may  be  more  conveniently  regarded  as  a 
couplet ;  the  first  half  of  w^hich  contains  thirty  syllabic  instants, 
distributed  amongst  seven  feet  and  a  half;  and  the  second, 
twenty-seven  syllabic  instants^  distributed  also  amongst  seven 
feet  and  a  half,  but  in  which  the  sixth  foot  consists  of  one 
short  syllable  only  ;   as  in  the  following : 

^^^\^    -    v^l    -     -   -I    ^    -        V.I-     -   I     ^1-   -I  - 

*  In  like  manner  as  the  secretion  of  the  unconscious  milk 
occurs  for  the  nutriment  of  the  calf,  so  the  activity  of  (igno- 
rant) matter  takes  place  for  the  hberation  of  spirit.'  Sankhya 
Karika. 

*  Fall  not  in  love  with  women,  for  they  disdain  the  man  who 
loves.  If  one  should  bear  you  affection,  love  her ;  if  she  be 
scornful,  let  her  go.'    Mrichchakati. 

a.  The   disposition   of  the   feet  in  the  i^rya  verse  is  not 

3  I  ^ 


428  PROSODY. 

altogether  arbitrary :  in  the  first  hemistich  the  sixth  foot  must 
either  be  a  long  syllable  between  two  short,  that  is,  an  amphi- 
brach, or  else  four  short  syllables.  In  the  second  hemistich 
the  sixth  foot  consists  of  one  short  syllable.  The  odd  feet  in 
either  hemistich^  the  first,  third,  fifth,  and  seventh,  should 
never  be  amphibrachs. 

h,  A  variety  of  the  ^rya,  and  of  the  other  classes  also,  is 
termed  Chapala  ;  in  which  it  is  required  that  the  second  and 
fourth  feet  should  be  amphibrachs,  the  first  a  spondee  or  an 
anapaest,  and  the  fifth  a  dactyl  or  spondee.  This  rule  may 
apply  to  both  hemistichs,  or  to  the  first  or  to  the  second  only ; 
constituting  thus  three  varieties  in  addition  to  the  regular  one, 
or  four  in  all. 

c.  In  like  manner,  when  the  pause  occurs  after  the  third 
foot,  the  verse  is  termed  Pathya ;  when  after  any  other, 
Vipula :  and  this  variation  may  prevail  in  either  hemistich  or 
in  both,  forming  therefore  four  modifications  of  the  pause  ; 
which  being  applied  to  the  four  modifications  of  the  metre, 
compose  the  sixteen  varieties  of  each  order  of  this  class  of 
metres. 

d.  The  j^rya  metre  is  in  general  employed  only  in  occa- 
sional verses ;  but  the  whole  of  the  Sankhya  Karika  is  com- 
posed in  it,  as  is  the  Nalodaya  of  Kalidasa. 

3.  Udgiti.  This  differs  from  the  j^rya  only  in  inverting 
the  order  of  the  second  and  fourth  Padas.  The  first  contains, 
as  before,  twelve  short  syllables ;  the  second,  fifteen  ;  the 
third,  as  before,  twelve  ;   and  the  fourth,  eighteen. 

3.  Upagiti.  In  this  class  each  hemistich  consists  of  but 
twenty-seven  short  syllables ;  the  second  as  well  as  the  fourth 
containing  but  fifteen ;  the  first  and  third  are  unaltered. 

4.  Giti.  Both  hemistichs  consist  of  thirty  short  syllables ; 
the  fourth  Pada  as  well  as  the  second  consisting  of  eighteen. 

5.  ^ryagiti.  In  this  class  each  hemistich  consists  of  eight 
full  feet,  or  thirty-two  short  syllables,  divided  into  Padas  of 
twelve  and  twenty  syllabic  instants. 


MATRACHHANDAS.  429 

SECTION     IV. 

Mdtrachhandas. 

323.  The  third  class  of  metres  is  regulated  in  the  first  instance 
by  the  number  of  short  vowels  or  syllabic  instants,  or  Matras, 
as  in  the  preceding  class  ;  not  by  the  number  of  syllables, 
without  regard  to  their  syllabic  length,  as  in  the  first.  It  so 
far  partakes,  however,  of  the  character  of  the  first  class,  that, 
after  having  defined  the  number  of  short  syllables,  or  their 
equivalents,  which  the  stanza  shall  contain,  they  may  be, 
either  wholly  or  partially,  distributed  into  trisyllabic  feet ;  so 
that  the  verses  may  in  many  instances  be  identified  with 
recognised  varieties  of  the  first  class  of  metres,  more  or  less 
intermixed  in  the  same  stanza.  The  principal  orders  of  this 
class  are  the  following. 

I.  Vaitaliya.  This  is  a  stanza  of  four  Padas  ;  the  first  and 
third  of  which  contain  the  time  of  fourteen  short  syllables  ; 
the  second  and  fourth,  sixteen.  Each  Pada  should  end  in  a 
cretic  and  iambic,  or  else  in  a  dactyl  and  spondee.  Of  the 
remaining  moments,  which  are  six  in  the  first  and  third,  and 
eight  in  the  second  and  fourth  Padas,  neither  the  second  and 
third,  nor  the  fourth  and  fifth,  should  be  combined  in  the 
same  long  syllable  ;  nor,  in  the  second  and  fourth  Padas, 
should  the  sixth  and  seventh  Matra  be  combined  in  one  long 
vowel.  There  are  exceptions,  however,  to  these  rules,  which 
constitute  varieties  of  the  class.  Entire  cantos  in  this  form  of 
metre  occur  in  the  Magha,  Kiratarjuniya,  and  Naishadha ;  and 
occasional  verses  in  it  are  found  in  other  works  ;  as  in  the 
following,  in  which  the  last  syllables  of  the  three  first  Padas 
are  long  by  position. 

IJ^:  ufrirM^HNriff  I  ^^^  M?^l.^  f%e^  ^  I 
*  This  was  (an  act)  prohibited  to  a  king ;   but  Dasaratha  (did 


430  PROSODY. 

it),  having  transgressed  the  prohibition.  Those  even  who  are 
learned  in  the  Vedas,  when  they  are  bUnded  by  passion,  set 
their  feet  on  a  forbidden  path.^    Raghu  Vansa. 

The  first  and  third  Padas  of  this  stanza  correspond  to  the 
Sanyukta  species  of  the  Paiikti,  or  ten -syllable  metre ;  the 
second  and  fourth  to  an  undefined  variety  of  the  Trishtubh, 
or  eleven- syllable. 

a,  A  variety  of  the  Vaitaliya  in  not  unfrequent  use,  termed 
Aupachchhandasika,  is  formed  by  merely  adding  a  long  syllable 
to  each  Pada ;  making  the  first  and  third  therefore  contain 
sixteen,  and  the  second  and  fourth  eighteen,  syllabic  instants. 

^  Those  princes  who  are  now  joined  in  alliance  with  the  enemy, 
but  who  know  themselves,  will  quickly  fall  from  him,  like 
cuckoos  soon  deserting  the  nest  of  the  crow.'    Magha. 

This  stanza  might  be  resolved  into  a  verse  of  mixed  metre, 
in  which  the  first  and  third  Padas  would  belong  to  the  eleven 
syllable  order,  and  the  second  and  fourth  to  the  twelve ;  in 
each  corresponding  Pada  admitting  of  precisely  the  same  dis- 
position of  the  syllables  into  trisyllabic  feet. 

b.  There  are  several  sub-species  of  each  variety  of  the 
Vaitaliya  ;  and  one  of  the  Aupachchhandasika,  termed  Pushpi- 
tagra,  is  of  frequent  occurrence.  The  whole  of  the  tenth 
Sarga  of  the  Kiratarjuniya,  from  which  the  following  is  taken, 
is  composed  in  it. 

'  The  celestial  nymphs,  beholding  the  form  (of  Arjuna),  effacing 
the  splendour  of  the  universe,  and  capable  of  protecting  the 
three  worlds,  felt  that  all  attempts  to  distract  the  penance  in 
which  he  was  immersed,  for  the  sake  of  victory,  would  be 
in  vain.' 


MATRACHHANDAS.  431 

The  verse,  in  fact,  is  a  compound  of  the  twelve  and  thirteen- 
syllable  metres,  and  the  trisyllabic  feet  in  each  Pada  are 
regular,  and  correspond  throughout. 

3.  Matrasamaka.  This,  which  is  the  second  order  of  the 
class,  consists  of  a  verse  of  four  Padas,  each  of  which  contains 
sixteen  short  syllables,  or  their  equivalents :  the  ninth  syllabic 
instant  must  be  single,  and  of  course  short,  and  the  last  long. 
Varieties  are  made  by  restricting  other  syllabic  instants,  as  the 
fifth,  eighth,  and  twelfth,  to  single  or  short  quantities,  or  by 
allowing  the  ninth  to  form  part  of  a  long  syllable.  The 
following  is  an  example  of  this  metre : 


'  Life  is  as  unstable  as  the  water  that  trembles  on  the  leaf  of 
the  lotus.  Association  with  the  virtuous,  although  for  a 
moment,  is  the  only  vessel  to  bear  us  across  the  ocean  of 
existence.'    Moha  Mudgara. 

3.  Gityarya.  This  is,  hke  the  preceding,  a  verse  of  which 
each  Pada  contains  sixteen  Matras,  or  syllabic  instants  ;  but 
they  are  all  short,  except  sometimes  the  last  of  each  hemistich, 
which  may  be  long.  Varieties  are  also  formed  by  constructing 
one  hemistich  entirely  of  long  syllables,  and  the  other  of 
short ;  or  by  slightly  altering  the  number  of  short  syllables  in 
the  stanza ;  so  that  each  hemistich  may  contain  but  twenty- 
nine,  or  the  first  may  contain  twenty-nine,  and  the  second 
thirty-one  ;  or  the  first  thirty,  and  the  second  thirty-two. 
These  forms  of  metre  are  not  often  met  with  in  works  of 
standard  reputation. 

As  a  specimen  of  irregular  metre,  as  well  as  of  rhyme,  the 
following  stanza  is  inserted  from  the  Gita  Govinda,  in  which 
lyrical  poem  a  great  variety  of  anomalous,  but  exceedingly 
melodious   versification   is  exemplified.     The   passage   is   left 


432 


PROSODY. 


untranslated,   as   a  short    exercise  for  those    who    may   have 
accompanied  this  Grammar  to  its  termination. 


INDEX    I. 


Abstract  nouns,  p.  312. 
Accents,  grave,  acute,  circumflex,  6. 
Adjectives,  74.    degrees  of  com- 
parison of,  74,  75.   syntax  of, 

385. 

Adverbs,  91.  alphabetical  list  of, 
92.  syntax  of,  389. 

Affixes,  (i)  inflectional;  of  declen- 
sion, 27.  of  conjugation,  1 14. 
(2)  comparative,  74,  75.  (3)  de- 
rivative ;  of  verbal  derivatives, 
2  9  2 .  of  nominal  derivatives,  313. 
of  miscellaneous  nouns,  ib.  of 
possessives,  of  degrees  of  com- 
parison, pronominals,  and  nume- 
rals, 330.  of  indeclinables,  332. 

Aggregative  nouns,  412. 

Akriti,  a  kind  of  metre,  426. 

Akshara-chbandas,  a  class  of  me- 
tres, 417. 

Alphabet,  i.  order  of,  2. 

Alphabetical  list  of  adjectives, 
76.  of  adverbs,  92.  of  affixes 
(verbal),  293.  of  affixes  (nomi- 
nal), 313.  of  conjunctions,  loi. 
of  Gati  prefixes,  100.  of  inde- 
clinables, 90.  of  indicatory  let- 
ters, 105.  of  particles,  103.  of 
past  participles,  276.  of  pro- 
nouns, 78.  of  verbs  not  inserting 
1^,  127.  of  verbs  of  each  conju- 
gation (see  Conjugations). 

Anga  or  inflective  base ;  of  nouns, 
27.  of  verbs,  107. 

Anubandhas,  or  indicatory  letters, 
104.  general  and  special,  105. 

Anusht'ubh,  a  kind  of  metre,  418. 

Anuswara,  2.  changes  of,  19. 


Appellatives,  312. 

Arddha-visarga,  23. 

Arya,  a  kind  of  metre,  427. 

Aryagiti,  a  kind  of  metre,  428. 

Asht'i,  a  kind  of  metre,  424. 

Atidhriti,  a  kind  of  metre,  425. 

Atijagati,  a  kind  of  metre,  422. 

Atikriti,  a  kind  of  metre,  426. 

Atisakkari,  a  kind  of  metre,  424. 

Atmane-pada,  or  reflective  voice, 
113.  terminations  of,  114.  sub- 
stituted for  the  Parasmai-pada, 
260. 

Attributives,  312. 

Atyasht'i,  a  kind  of  metre,  424. 

Augment,  temporal,  1 1 7, 1 24, 131. 
the  letter  7^,  1 26. 

Avyayi-bhava  compounds,  354. 

Bahuvrihi  compounds,  348. 

Base,  inflective;  of  nouns,  27.  of 
verbs,  107. 

Benedictive  mood,  113.  termina- 
tions of,  115.  formation  of, 
130.  syntax  of,  405. 

Cases  of  nouns,  27.  syntax  of,  363. 

Causal  verb;  formation  of,  135. 
inflexions  of,  T04.  voices  of, 
267.  governing  double  accusa- 
tive, 366.  syntax  of,  407. 

Classification  of  letters,  2,  6,  7. 

Combination  or  conjunction  of  let- 
ters, 7.  of  vowels,  8.  of  conso- 
nants, 15.  of  hard  and  soft  con- 
sonants, 16.  of  dentals,  17.  of 
nasals,  ib.  of  Anuswara,  19.  of 
semivowels,  ib.  of  sibilants,  20. 
of  ^,  2 1,  of  Visarga,  22. 

Comparison,  degrees  of,  74. 

3   K 


434 


INDEX    I. 


Comparative  degree,  74,  75. 

Compound  consonants,  3. 

Compound  metre,  417. 

Compound  prseterite  tense,  121. 

Compound  verbs,  260. 

Compound  words ;  classes  of,  336. 
Dwandwa,  338.  Tatpurusha,34o. 
Bahuvrihi,  348.  Avyavi-bhava, 
354.  general  rules,  358. 

Conditional  mood,  113.  termina- 
tions of,  I J  5 .  formation  of,  1 3 1 . 
syntax  of,  405. 

Conjugation,  principles  of,  116. 

Conjugational  inflexion,  107.  ter- 
minations, 114.  tenses,  109. 

Conjugations,  how  named  and  dis- 
tinguished, 108.  first,  153.  se- 
cond, 191.  third,  209.  fourth, 
214.  fifth,  226.  sixth,  231.  se- 
venth, 237.  eighth,  241.  ninth, 
243.  tenth,  250. 

Conjunction  of  vowels,  8.  of  con- 
sonants, 15. 

Conjunctions,  101.  syntax  of,  391. 

Consonants,  order  of,  2.  com- 
pound, 3.  hard  and  soft,  7. 
combination  of,  15. 

Dand'aka,  a  kind  of  metre,  427. 

Declension,  general  rules  of,  27. 

Declension  of '^,  28. 

of  nouns,  ending  in  ^ 

and  ^,  29.  in  ^  and  "3",  33.  in 
^and  "ai,  37.  in  ^,  "^,  "^^  and 
0^5  42.  in  ^  and  ^,  45.  in  Wt, 

46.  in  W,  47.    in  consonants, 

47.  in  gutturals,  48.  in  palatals, 
ib.  in  dentals,  53.  in  labials, 
59.  in  nasals,  ib.  in  semivowels, 
65.  in  sibilants,  ib.  in  ^,  71. 

of  participles    in   ^Tr^ 


and  ^,  55. 

of  possessives  in  Tf^ 


and^,  55. 


Derivation,  268. 

Derivatives;  verbal,  269,  291. 
nominal,  311. 

Derivative  verbs,  use  of,  407. 

Desiderative  verb ;  formation  of, 
138.  inflexions  of,  145. 

Devanagari  alphabet,  i. 

Dhatu  or  root,  104. 

Dhriti,  a  kind  of  metre,  425. 

Dwandwa  compounds,  338. 

Dwigu  compounds,  346. 

Expletives,  T02. 

Feet,  in  prosody,  415. 

Frequentative  verb,  141.  inserting 
^,  141.  omitting  IT ,  143.  form 
of,  147.  syntax  of,  408. 

Future,  first  or  definite,  112.  ter- 
minations of,  115.  formation  of, 
128.  syntax  of,  398. 

second   or   indefinite,    112. 

terminations  of,  115.  formation 
of,  129.  syntax  of,  399. 

Gana-vritta,  a  class  of  metres,  427. 

Gati  prefixes,  97,  100. 

Gayatri,  a  kind  of  metre,  418. 

Genders  of  the  noun,  27. 

Giti,  a  kind  of  metre,  428. 

Gityarya,  a  kind  of  metre,  43 1 . 

Guna  letters  or  substitutes,  6. 

^,  augment,  126.  when  not  in- 
serted, 127. 

Imperative  mood,  112.  termina- 
tions of,  115.  formation  of,  1 29. 
syntax  of,  401. 

Imperfect  tense,  or  first  prseterite, 
III. 

Impersonal  verbs,  150,  393. 

Indeclinables,  90.  syntax  of,  389. 

Indeclinable  nouns,  90. 

Indicative  mood,  no. 

Infinitive,  formation  of,  269. 

Inflectional  terminations  of  nouns, 
27.  of  verbs,  114. 


INDEX    I. 


436 


Inflexion,  principles  of,  27. 
Interjections,  102.  syntax  of,  392. 
Jagati,  a  kind  of  metre,  421. 
Karmmadharaya  compounds,  343. 
Kridanta  (verbal)  derivatives,  269. 
Kritij  a  kind  of  metre,  426. 
Letters,    i.     classification    of,    6. 

combination  of,  7. 
Matrachbandas,  a  class  of  metres, 

429. 
Matrasamaka,  a  kind  of  metre,  43 1 . 
Metre,  principles  of,  415.    kinds 

of,  417- 

Moods,  no.  indicative,  ib.  impe- 
rative, 112.  potential,  ib.  bene- 
dictive,  113.  conditional,  ib. 

Nagari  letters,  i . 

Nominal  derivatives,  311.  classes 

of,  3^3- 
Nominal  verbs ;  formation  of,  1 50. 

syntax  of,  408. 
Nouns ;  inflexions  of,  27.  declen- 
sions of,   29  (see  Declension) ; 

indeclinable,    90.    verbal,   291. 

syntax  of,  362. 
Numbers  of  the  noun,  27.  of  the 

verb,  114. 
Numerals,  85,  331. 
Optative  or  benedictive  mood,^  113. 
Ordinals,  89,  331. 
Padas  or  voices  of  the  active  verb, 

113.  changes  of,  259. 
Pankti,  a  kind  of  metre,  420. 
Parasmai-pada,    113.    changes  of, 

259- 
Participles ;  kinds  of,  270.  of  the 

present  tense,  271.  of  the  se- 
cond prseterite,  272.  indefinite 
past,  273.  hst  of  irregular  past, 
276.  future  active,  279.  future 
passive  or  neuter,  280.  inde- 
clinable, 287.  of  repetition  or 
adverbial,  290.  syntax  of,  409. 


Particles,  90.  words  used  as,  100. 
prefixes  or  affixes,  103. 

Passive  voice,  formation  of,  134. 

Patronymic  derivatives,  312. 

Persons  of  the  tenses,  1 1 4. 

Possessives ;  declension  of,  55. 
derivation  of,  326. 

Potential  mood,  112.  terminations 
of,  115.  formation  of,  130.  syn- 
tax of,  402. 

Prakriti,  a  kind  of  metre,  426. 

Praeterite  ist  or  imperfect,  in. 
terminations  of,  1 14.  formation 
of,  116.  syntax  of,  395. 

2d  or  perfect,  in.  ter- 
minations of,  115.  formation  of, 
n8.    compound,    121.    syntax 

ol  391' 
3d   or   indefinite  past. 


III.  terminations  of,  115.  form- 
ation of,  122.  syntax  of,  397. 

Prepositions,  97.  in  combination, 
ib.  singly,  100.  alphabetical  hst 
of,  97.  efiect  upon  voices  of 
verbs,  260. 

Present  tense,  in.  terminations 
of,  114.  formation  of,  116. 
syntax  of,  394. 

Pronominal  nouns,  ^'],  84,  330. 

Pronouns,  77.  personal,  78,  80. 
demonstrative,  ib.  id.  relative, 
79,  82.  interrogative,  ib.  id.  ho- 
norific, 79,  84.  syntax  of,  388. 

Pronunciation,  4. 

Prosody,  principles  of,  415. 

Quantities  of  vowels,  6. 

Quantity  in  prosody,  415. 

Reduplicate  prseterite,  118. 

Reduphcation,  rules  of,  118. 

Root  or  Dhatu,  104. 

S'akkari,  a  kind  of  metre,  423. 

Sandhi,  rules  of,  7. 

Sankriti,  a  kind  of  metre,  426. 

3    K   2 


436 


INDEX    I. 


Scheme  of  terminations  for  the 
noun,  27.  for  the  verb,  114. 

Sonant  consonants,  7. 

Superlative  degree,  74,  75. 

Surd  consonants,  7. 

Syntax,  361.  of  substantives,  362. 
of  cases,  363.  of  the  nomina- 
tive, ib.  of  the  accusative,  364. 
of  the  instrumental,  369.  of  the 
dative,  371.  of  the  ablative, 
374.  of  the  genitive,  377.  of 
the  locative,  382.  of  the  voca- 
tive, 385. 

'  of  adjectives,  385.  of 
pronouns,  388.  of  indeclina- 
bles,  389. 

— —  of  verbs,  393.  of  tenses. 


ib.  of  the  present,  394.  of  the 
first  praeterite,  395.  of  the  se- 
cond praeterite,  397.  of  the  in- 
definite past,  ib.  of  the  definite 
future,  398.  of  the  indefinite 
future,  399.  of  the  imperative, 
401.  of  the  potential,  402.  of 
the  benedictive,  405.  of  the 
conditional,  ib.  of  the  infinitive, 
406.  of  derivative  verbs,  407. 
— -  of  participles,  409.  of  the 


present  part.,  410.  of  the  past 
part.,  ib.  of  the  indeclinable 
past  part.,  ib.  of  the  future 
part.,  413.  of  participial  nouns, 
414. 

Taddhita  (nominal)  derivatives, 
311. 

Tatpurusha  compounds,  336.  kinds 
of>  337*  examples  of,  340. 
Karmmadhdraya,  class  of,  343. 
numerals,  or  Dwigu  class  of, 
346.  with  particles  and  prepo- 
sitions, ib. 

Temporal  augment,  117.  rejected 
after  a  negative,  396,  397. 


Tenses,  conjugational,  109.  pre- 
sent, no.  prseterites,  ni.  fu- 
tures, 112.  inflectional  termi- 
nations of,  1 14. 

Terminations,  inflectional ;  of  de- 
clension, 27.  substitutes  for, 
after  nouns,  30.  after  pro- 
nouns, 78. 

of  conjugation,  107, 

114.  modifications  of,  after  the 
second  prseterite,  121.  after  the 
third,  123. 

Trisht'ubh,  a  kind  of  metre,  420. 

Udgiti,  a  kind  of  metre,  428. 

ypagiti,  a  kind  of  metre,  428. 

Upasargas  or  prepositions,  97. 

Ushnih,  a  kind  of  metre,  418. 

Utkriti,  a  kind  of  metre,  426. 

Vaitaliya,  a  kind  of  metre,  429. 

Varna- vritta,  a  class  of  metres,4i  7. 

Verb,  principles  of  inflexion  of, 
107.  conjugations  of,  108. 
moods  and  tenses  of,  no. 
voices  of,  113.  numbers  and 
persons  of,  1 14.  not  taking  ^, 
126.  formation  of,  132.  conju- 
gations of,  153  (see  Conjuga- 
tion); syntax  of,  393. 

Verbs,  derivative,  135.  causals, 
135.  desideratives,  138.  fre- 
quentatives,  141. 

Verbs  compounded  with  preposi- 
tions, 260. 

Verbal  derivatives,  291. 

Vikriti,  a  kind  of  metre,  426. 

Visarga,  i.  changes  of,  22. 

Voices  ;  active,  113.  passive,  1 14. 
changes  of,  259. 

Vowels,  2.  initial,  ib.  medial  and 
final,  3.  quantities  of,  ib.  sub- 
stitutes for,  7.  conjunction  of,  8. 

Vriddhi  substitutes  for  vowels,  7. 

Vrihati,  a  kind  of  metre,  426. 


INDEX    II. 


VERBS  IN  THE  DIFFERENT  CONJUGATIONS. 


^a^  to  mark,  page  155. 
^r^  to  pervade,  155. 

ignr  to  go,  155. 

'^a^  to  become  manifest,  238. 

WS  to  go,  155. 

^  to  disrespect,  253. 

^  to  eat,  194. 

^!Tf  to  breathe,  195. 

^  to  pain,  253. 

^  to  be  fit,  155. 

^?r^  to  pervade,  2,2,7* 

W^  to  eat,  244. 

^RT  to  be,  195. 

^m  to  throw,  !zi^,  aao. 

^WTO  to  obtain,  22y. 

^rm  to  sit,  196. 
isiT^  to  speak,  izoij. 
1^  to  go,  156,  197. 
^  to  remember,  196. 
^  ('^nft)  to  study,  197. 
3[5if  to  shine,  239. 
^  to  send,  254. 
^  to  wish,  232. 
^  to  go,  216. 
^  to  see,  156. 
^  to  praise,  197. 
^to  go,  198. 


^  to  envy,  156. 

^  to  rule,  197. 

•g"  to  sound,  156. 

^n^  to  go,  157. 

T^  to  assemble,  220. 

Tr^  to  wet,  239. 

"gr^  to  cover,  198. 

•gjf  to  reason,  157. 

^  to  go,  to  gain,  157,  210. 

^^  to  go,  242. 

^»T  to  be  straight,  157. 

^ni  to  increase,  216,  220,  227. 

^togo,  245- 

^V  to  increase,  153. 

^f^  to  be  dry,  158. 

^Rir  to  wink,  254. 

oF^  to  speak,  254. 

«K^  to  call,  167. 

^PT  to  desire,  158. 

cirf55  to  count,  254. 

■fer  to  cure,  158. 

oR  to  sound,  to  coo,  203,  232. 

■^  to  contract,  233. 

oK3  to  be  crooked,  232. 

"^  to  contract,  254. 

-^  to  be  childish,  233. 

^  to  speak  falsely,  258. 


438 


INDEX  OF  VERBS. 


'^PH  to  suffer  pain,  245. 

^  to  be  angry,  ^^o. 

^iTR  to  play  as  a  child,  255. 

"^  to  embrace,  220. 

^to  astonish,  :Z54. 

^to  sound,  234. 

^  to  injure,  ddS. 

^  to  do,  243. 

^  to  be  thick,  2^^. 

^  to  cut,  2^6. 

^  to  be  able,  158,  170,  255. 

^  to  be  feeble,  255. 

^^  to  injure,  228. 

^  to  become  thin,  220. 

-mq  to  plough,  draw  furrows, 

^33- 
"Sfi  to  throw,  2^'^. 
"^  to  injure,  247. 
^  to  utter,  to  celebrate,  255. 
%  to  sound,  160. 
jf!^  to  call,  167. 
W^  to  go,  to  walk,  159. 
^  to  buy,  244. 
"^  to  be  angry,  220. 
^  to  cry,  159. 
-pJT  to  be  sad,  224. 
f^  to  be  moist,  167,  220. 
f^r^  to  be  distressed,  245. 
orajT  to  speak,  199. 
"^TUr  to  kill,  to  hurt,  242. 
iG^  to  be  patient,  159,  224. 
f^  to  waste,  160. 
ftpr  to  kill,  to  hurt,  242. 
f^  to  let  loose,  220. 
fOT  to  throw,  216. 


"^  to  sneeze,  203. 

"^  to  send,  240. 

W^  to  be  hungry,  220. 

"^  to  agitate,  170. 

"^vr  to  be  agitated,  220,  245. 

"^  to  waste,  to  decay,  160. 

T^FT  to  whet,  to  sharpen,  203. 

^Tf  to  dig,  161. 

f^  to  hurt,  236. 

Wn  to  speak,  199. 

iTO  to  count,  254. 

TX^  to  speak,  254. 

ipFT  to  go,  161. 

TTT^  to  agitate,  162. 

7p{  to  sound,  233. 

Jj?  to  make  effort,  233. 

g?  to  preserve,  233. 

jpi  to  advise,  254. 

TiTj  to  protect,  162. 

gxr  to  blame,  162. 

gxf  to  disturb,  220. 

^  to  sing,  t6o. 

ipr  to  be  greedy,  220. 

T^  to  take,  163,  254. 

IT  to  swallow,  233. 

IT  to  sound,  247. 

^"^  to  serve,  186. 

jjp?r  to  arrange,  245. 

H^  to  take,  246. 

%to  be  weary,  160. 

ITF  to  eat,  163. 

vz  to  exchange,  1 70. 

OT  to  proclaim,  256. 

Tm  to  shine,  242. 

TTT  to  smell,  163. 


INDEX  OF  VERBS. 


439 


^chl^  to  shine,  199. 
^^  to  speak,  199. 
^^tr  to  pound,  %^6. 
'^^^  to  eat,  164. 

^i:to  go,  164. 

^  to  pound,  %^6, 

f%  to  collect,  228,  %^6, 

fqif  to  think,  1^6. 

^  to  cut,  10,'>,, 

^  to  steal,  252. 

"^If  to  hurt,  234. 

"^  to  make  effort,  258. 

"^giT  to  drop,  164. 

f^  to  cut,  240. 

^  to  cut,  233. 

-^to  cut  233. 

1^  to  play,  to  shine,  239 

"sft  to  cut,  225. 

"Sf^  to  eat,  199. 

«nT  to  produce,  210. 

^T«T  to  be  born,  216. 

^TH  to  yawn,  165. 

IT^  to  let  loose,  220. 

^TPT  to  wake,  220. 

ftr  to  conquer,  153. 

^fk  to  live,  165,  257. 

^  to  bind,  233. 

^  to  yawn,  165. 

m  to  grow  old,  216. 

»T  to  decay,  247* 

^  to  know,  256. 

^  to  know,  246. 

3irr  to  become  old,  246. 

^g^Cto  have  fever,  165. 

f^-q  to  throw,  220,  233. 


^  to  fly,  217. 

^  to  go,  165. 

l!!W  to  hurt,  170,  220. 

Ttnr  to  bow,  166. 

iirgfT  to  perish,  217,  220. 

Tir^  to  bind,  217. 

"ftCTTr  to  cleanse,  200,  210. 

"ftlj^  to  blame,  166. 

lift  to  lead,  166. 

XT  to  praise,  203,  234. 

m  to  praise,  234. 

■fT^  *  to  support'  a  family,  258. 

"fHT  to  stretch,  242. 

mr  to  heat,  217. 

im  to  be  distressed,  224. 

"cTO  to  toss,  220. 

fifnT  to  endure,  167. 

^  to  make  a  riot,  233. 

WT  to  inflict  pain,  233. 

H^  to  inflict  pain,  231. 

HH  to  hurt,  170,  220. 

"^■q  to  be  pleased,  220. 

im  to  eat  grass,  243. 

■fftr  to  be  satisfied,  218,  220. 

-^  to  satisfy,  234. 

"ff^  to  thirst,  220. 

lj^  to  injure,  239. 

If  to  cross,  167. 

ii[^  to  abandon,  167. 

^  to  cut,  233. 

1^  to  hasten,  165,  258. 

^  to  bite,  168. 

^  to  give,  168. 

^V  to  have,  to  hold,  168. 

^  to  tame,  224. 


440 


INDEX  OF  VERBS. 


^T>T  to  deceive,  228. 

^ft5T  to  be  poor,  200. 

^  to  toss,  :i30. 

^  to  burn,  168. 

^  to  give,  169,  Sill. 

^  to  cut,  201. 

f^  to  play,  21S' 

f^  to  anoint,  i^oij. 

^to  decay,  a  18. 

^(hft  to  shine,  :iOi. 

^  to  shine,  !Zi8,  !257. 

5  to  run,  169. 

5^  to  become  bad,  zzo, 

gf  to  milk,  :20i. 

^  to  be  proud,  318. 

U^  to  see,  169. 

H  to  tear,  347,  258. 

^  to  protect,  170. 

^  to  cleanse,  160. 

^  to  cut,  225. 

w  to  assail,  203. 

^  to  shine,  170. 

^  to  fly,  201. 

-^  to  run,  171. 

^toinjure,tooppress,2i9,22o. 

ftr^  to  hate,  202. 

VT  to  have,  to  hold,  211. 

>ft  to  uphold,  22 T. 

^  to  shake,  229,  246. 

^to  shake,  229. 

^  to  hold,  174. 

^  to  drink,  171. 

Vt^  to  gallop,  171. 

UJT  to  blow,  171. 

"S  to  meditate,  160. 


^  to  be  firm,  171. 

^  to  be  firm,  234. 

^a[^  to  fall  down,  170,  190. 

S5R  to  sound,  254. 

^  to  be  happy,  167. 

^TTT  to  dance,  219. 

iT^  to  cook,  172. 

X(z  to  tie,  254. 

TTrT  to  fall,  172. 

r^  to  go,  219,  254. 

iT^r  to  tie,  255. 

trr  to  drink,  172. 

TjT  to  preserve,  201. 

int  to  cross  over,  257. 

fij^  to  be  organized,  236. 

frr^  to  grind,  241. 

xft  to  drink,  221. 

iflr  to  pain,  257* 

"g7  to  contract,  255. 

xr^  to  abandon,  233. 

g^  to  nourish,  219,  247* 

^to  purify,  247. 

^  to  dehght,  229. 

^  to  extend,  234. 

jpt  to  throw,  257. 

i|  to  fill,  247,  257- 

^^  to  serve,  186. 

"ornr  to  grow,  173. 

ir^  to  ask,  234. 

inr  to  declare,  257. 

in  to  fill,  201. 

ift  to  be  pleased,  221. 

jft  to  desire,  244. 

ift  to  please,  248,  258. 

^  to  bum,  220. 


INDEX  OF  VERBS. 


441 


Wr  to  eat,  20 1. 

TJRir  to  approach,  173. 

TRf5  to  bear  fruit,  173. 

"^V  to  despise,  173. 

W^  to  bind,  248. 

^c5  to  live,  257. 

^  to   know,   to   understand, 

174,  221. 
'^to  speak,  202. 
>T^  to  break,  240. 
>TO  to  shine,  211. 
>Tr  to  shine,  201. 
HT^  to  speak,  257. 
WTS  to  shine,  257. 
^T^  to  break,  239. 
\ff  to  fear,  212. 
H  to  nourish,  174,  212. 
^  to  fall,  220. 
^  to  threaten,  247. 
>j^  to  fall,  221. 
H^  to  fall,  170,  190. 
HH  to  whirl,  175,  224. 
^i^  to  fry,  235. 
>jra  to  shine,  257. 
Wt  to  support,  247. 
W^  to  advise,  258. 
n^  to  be  mad,  221,  224. 
^m  to  respect,  221. 
i{r{  to  understand,  243. 
T{7Zf  to  chum,  175,  246. 
JT^T  to  bind,  175. 
im  to  weigh,  220. 
»r^  to  be  immersed,  235. 
HT  to  measure,  20 1,  212. 
TTR  to  investigate,  175. 


f^  to  throw,  229. 

f^  to  be  unctuous,  170,  222. 

»ft  to  injure,  to  kill,  218,  244, 

248. 
jfr?5  to  close,  257. 
g^  to  hberate,  235. 
^  to  break,  220. 
^  to  be  perplexed,  to  be  silly, 

220,  222. 
^  to  die,  236. 
ipx  to  seek,  255. 
ipf  to  clean,  203. 
H  to  injure,  247. 
^  to  barter,  176. 
^  to  serve,  186. 
^  to  remember,  176. 
^  to  trample,  258. 
inr  to  worship,  176. 
iTiT  to  make  effort,  1 76. 
XR  to  restrain,  176. 
iR  to  feed,  257. 
TTBT  to  take  pains,  220. 
TTT  to  go,  201. 
5  to  join,  203,  249. 
"gpT  to  engage  in  devotion,  222. 
^W  to  join,  240. 
^  to  fight,  222. 
g^T  to  disturb,  220. 
T?^  to  make,  255. 
T^  to  colour,  176,  222. 
T>I  to  hurt,  220,  222. 
T>?  to  commence,  177. 
TH  to  sport,  178. 
t:^  to  leave,  255. 
Tj  to  give,  to  take,  201. 

3  ^ 


442 


INDEX  OF  VERBS. 


TT*I  to  propitiate,  223. 

TT^I  to  accomplish,  2^30. 

ft:^  to  purge,  240. 

7^  to  injure,  221. 

;^  to  roar,  247. 

^  to  sound,  204. 

;^  to  shine,  170. 

^  to  resist,  170. 

^  to  weep,  204. 

^  to  obstruct,  238. 

^  to  disturb,  220. 

^  to  be  angry,  220. 

:^  to  grow,  178. 

t  to  sound,  160. 

<;jvr  to  gain,  178. 

H^  to  be  ashamed,  235. 

c5T  to  give,  to  take,  201. 
fi;jTr  to  smear,  236. 
f75^  to  lick,  204. 

c^  to  embrace,  218,  247. 

c^  to  melt,  258. 

<^  to  resist,  170. 

<g7  to  roll  on  the  ground,  220. 

<57  to  resist,  1 70. 

cgT?  to  be  lost,  220. 

(jxr  to  cut,  236. 

c5H  to  covet,  220,  223. 

^  to  cut,  248. 

cJjVcR  to  see,  178. 

^^  to  speak,  204. 

•qz  to  surround,  255. 

^  to  speak,  179. 

"^TT  to  ask,  243. 

^t;  to  weave,  179. 

^X:to  choose,  255. 


^  to  subdue,  205. 

^^  to  dwell,  179. 

'^^  to  fix,  220. 

^  to  bear,  179. 

^  to  blow,  201. 

f^  to  separate,  240. 

"f^  to  discriminate,  213. 

f^  to  fear,  240. 

f^  to  know,  205. 

f^  to  exist,  223. 

1^  to  find,  236. 

f^  to  surround,  213. 

f^  to  convey,  220. 

^  to  go,  206. 

^  to  cast  off,  220. 

^  to  choose,  230,  249* 

^oR  to  accept,  180. 

^W  to  be,  170,  180. 

^  to  grow,  170. 

^  to  choose,  248. 

^  to  weave,  180. 

^  to  go,  206. 

^  to  surround,  258. 

tq^  to  deceive,  236. 

iqv  to  pierce,  223. 

^  to  cover,  181. 

W^  to  cut,  236. 

eft  to  choose,  221,  248. 

^  to  support,  248. 

^  to  praise,  181. 

-^ni;  to  be  able,  224,  230. 

^  to  speak  ill,  255. 

^  to  wither,  to  decay,  181. 

"51??  to  be  tranquil,  224. 

^^  to  desire,  to  bless,  181. 


INDEX  OP  VERBS. 


443 


l^rnr  to  instruct,  206. 

ftpr  to  distinguish,  241. 

^  to  sleep,  206. 

^[ftoR  to  sprinkle,  182. 

^^  to  sorrow,  182. 

^  to  be  clean,  220. 

31>T  to  be  beautiful,  to  shine, 

170,  182. 

tm  to  become  dry,  220. 

SIV  to  break  wind,  179. 

^pl  to  laugh  at,  259. 

^  to  injure,  249. 

^>  to  pare,  225. 

TSSK  to  drop,  164. 

'^R  to  be  weak,  255. 

'^F'T  to  loosen,  246. 

"^PT  to  be  weary,  224. 

TSrr  to  cook,  201. 

f^  to  serve,  182. 

"^  to  hear,  183. 

'^  to  melt,  160. 

f%^  to  embrace,  220,  224. 

ig^  to  breathe,  207. 

f^  to  increase,  183. 

fw  to  be  white,  T70. 

iq:^  to  embrace,  184. 

"^^  to  give,  243. 

ij^  to  decay,  to  be  sad,  184. 

^5f3T  to  go,  184. 

Tq^  to  bear,  184,  225. 

"qrvr  to  accomplish,  223. 

f^  to  bind,  249. 

f^  to  sprinkle,  236. 

f^  to  accomplish,  185. 

fTW  to  become  perfect,  220. 


f^  to  sew,  225. 

^  to  bear  children,  185,  204. 

^  to  extract  juice,  226, 

"i|^to  bring  forth,  207,  225. 

"^  to  hurt,  1 85. 

^  to  serve,  i85. 

%  to  decay,  160. 

•R^  to  destroy,  225. 

¥H  to  stop,  to  hinder,  186. 

^  to  praise,  207. 

FT  to  stand,  186. 

■fe^  to  spit,  187,  225. 

WT  to  bathe,  201. 

fW5  to  be  kind,  219. 

"OJ  to  distil,  203. 

"OT^  to  vomit,  219. 

f^  to  smile,  187. 

^xf  to  sleep,  207. 

f^  to  sweat,  187,  220. 

^TR  to  tranquilhze,  259. 

^  to  go,  188,  213. 

^if  to  abandon,  let  go,   226, 

^37- 
^  to  creep,  188. 
;gF^  to  go,  188. 
^;»T  to  stop,  250. 
"^  to  leap,  249. 
^wr  to  stop,  250. 
M^  to  sound,  255. 
^cr»>T  to  stop,  250. 

iJTiT  to  stop,   250. 

^  to  cover,  230. 

m  to  spread,  258. 

m  to  spread,  250. 

^q^  to  envy,  to  emulate,  188. 

3   L  2 


444 


INDEX  OF  VERBS. 


W^  to  touch,  258. 

?=^  to  touch,  2^6. 

^  to  envy,  255. 

^qrnr  to  increase,  189. 

"^  to  bud,  to  expand,  233. 

^^  to  throb,  233. 

^  to  remember,  189,  258. 

^qr^  to  ooze,  to  drop,  170,  189. 

^'^  to  fall,  189. 

^r»T  to  trust  in,  170. 

^  to  drop,  190. 


^^  to  sound,  255. 

1^  to  kill,  208. 

1^  to  abandon,  213. 

l^T  to  go,  213. 

f^  to  injure,  241. 

^  to  sacrifice,  209. 

:^  to  take,  190. 

^  to  rejoice,  220. 

"^  to  be  ashamed,  214. 

^T^  to  be  glad,  3  90. 

^  to  call,  190. 


CORRECTIONS. 


Page 

Line 

I 

4 

5> 

'  chchhra     read  chhra 

4 

8 

Aa 

Ma 

7 

2 

t 

^ 

II 

21 

^TT^TT^iT 

-^tr^^hrfff 

13 

16 

t 

14 

32 

r^ejiiH^H: 

16 

26 

^^ 

^f^ 

iii 

18 /or 

•  such  a  ^  is 

changed  to  re«6/  it  is 

changed 

to  TT,  which  becomes 

23 

20  /or 

f^         read    f^: 

^4 

5 
5 

TTT^T 

24 

^51^191 

27 

5  c?e/e  Section  I. 

' 

29 

14 /or 

•  Section  II.  read  Section  I. 

39 

27 

^WK 

■?ft«t: 

40 

10 

^. 

^ 

49 

20 

H^ 

H^ 

51 

9 

inr 

in^ 

51 

9 

irwT 

TTWf 

51 

27 

fintT 

flT^^ 

55 

4 

^■f3rr: 

"'T^^sr: 

55 

7 

tr^^ 

88 

23 

fu^^riinH-nr 

90 

12 

^^«p 

Tj^^w: 

95 

5 

JITT 

97 

30 

lOI 

7 

with  verbs 

the  verbs  ^,  ^3^,  and  ^ 

108 

II 

1^'f^ 

^ur<^ 

III 

14 

^HH^^ 

^rfW^T^ 

123 

9 

ft? 

ftri-. 

123 

31 

^nn 

124 

33 

^3*^H 

130 

9 

rTTiT 

inif^ 

446 


CORRECTIONS. 

Page 

Line 

133 

28  for  VT^rf           read 

H^* 

134 

27      . 

^wrf^RiT 

136 

32 

141 

27 

^m^ud 

MIM^Md 

2 

^1?^ 

c."N 

143 

^^C^^ 

143 

2 

M*t!^rf 

T^ijt^^i 

146 

8 

f>|MI^*IH 

^^^m^aim 

146 

10 

^fHf^: 

'si^ftr^ 

146 

10 

^^>|ftFRr: 

146 

31 

f^Whrr^n 

156 

9  dele  vM^^H 

-^si 

3 

^51^ 

157 

33 

^^tfftfTT 

171 

5  for  ^«irtiifi      reca 

171 

12 

^^^^^\ 

^f^^^if 

171 

31 

^vtft 

§vrft 

172 

20 
2 

'  to  go' 

*  to  go  ;'  '  to  fall.' 

-^n 

^wm^fi; 

^15 

5 

>JH;J 

^^: 

175 

7 

f^Hftf^fW 

r^HrHMfd 

176 

27 

*u^4iaiflfr 

'5I^T^ 

178 

7 

^T75^ 

^c!J<*T 

180 

18 

^S^^d 

^<=l^d 

181 

26 

«II^(«^ 

-ill^l^l^ 

181 

27 

:^ir<H«qrt 

^  1  ^1  Pti  *M  n 

184 

7 
10 

^rrftriHi^ 

190 

191 

7 

■^i^irrf 

202 

17 

n 

%ffe 

202 

17 

f^f 

f^H 

203 

16 

28 

214 

\^H\\^ 

214 

28 

^'R 

^ 

216 

6 

^ 

$^5r?T 

221 

24 

5^Hir< 

^mrf^ 

CORRECTIONS. 

Page 

Line 

237 

16  for  iffr^        read 

^liiMff 

228 

3^ 

^ 

^>T^. 

238 

5 

W^ 

^^ 

244 

2 

in  vowels 

in  long  vowels 

249 

28 

^^HlfT 

^r^^TTlT 

2 

-^k^jihI 

253 

''fli.^m^ 

254 

13 

-i<<*!iirf?rarH 

254 

22 

P^c+yniMprf 

254 

27 

T^ 

Tm 

256 

32 

^^1-*(^H^ 

w^t^?^ 

262 

23 

"^TOT 

^TBCf 

271 

7 

fifwl^ 

fir?f|; 

'^n 

8 

fTf^f^ii: 

f^r^fc^^cf 

291 

20 

«* 

# 

291 

21 

^ 

i^ 

345 

18 

§^^1 

^^WT 

345 

348 

20 

17^^^ 

31 

mih1<*I 

HlW^cfct 

z^^ 

23 

^^f^ 

^f^ 

zs^ 

16 

^x 

^nr 

361 

30 

^Ip^l^l 

^rrftirr 

3^9 

15 

-^muTrr^ 

-iqTHi^lr^'^T^ 

374 

16 

^ftr^ 

^nr^ 

375 

3 

ITT 

375 

20 

^l^lff 

Hl^^lif 

?>n 

28 

^7n& 

?>H 

6 

<*qg 

^3 

386 

8 

^ 

^ 

391 

4 

^ 

^ 

394 

12 

5^*^ 

S^nI 

39<^ 

7 

??T^ 

»<IW 

397 

34 

^tx^t: 

^rt^i 

400 

8 

i^wmt 

iflTTRRt 

411 

29 

^^ 

^^ 

422 

6 

^jTJxnj 

^JITTTTV 

447 


WORKS  BY  THE  SAME  AUTHOR, 

To  be  had  of  Messrs.  Madden  and  Co. 


DICTIONARY,  Sanskrit  and  English.    2d  edition.    Calcutta,  1832. 
51.  105. 

SELECT    SPECIMENS    of  the   THEATRE   of   the    HINDUS. 
2  vols.  8vo.  2d  edition.   Allen  and  Co.    1/.  1^. 

SANKHYA  KARIKA.    Hindu  Philosophy.    London,  4to.    lO^.  Qd.. 

VISHNU    PURANA.      Hindu    Mythology    and    History.      4to. 
J.  Murray,  1840.    21.  2s. 

MILL'S   BRITISH    INDIA,   with  Notes.    6  vols.   8vo.    Madden 
and  Co.  145.  per  vol. 

In  the  Press. 

ARIANA  ANTIQUA.   Antiquities  of  Afghanistan,  with  Plates.  4to. 
21.  2s. 

HISTORY    OF    BRITISH    INDIA,    in   continuation    of   Mill's 
History.   2  vols.  8vo. 


Also  latelij  published  by  Madden  and  Co. 

HITOPADESA ;    First  Book :    Sanskrit  Text,  with  Glossary.     By 
Professor  Johnson.    4to.   155.  "X^ 


RETURN     CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT                  J 
TO— ►      202  Main  Library                                      | 

LOAN  PERIOD  1 
-    HOME  USE 

2                               3 

4 

5                               6 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS                                                            1 

1-month  loanr.  rr>ay  be  renewed  by  raffing  BJ<?'^>^*                                                                            1 
1-year  loans  roay  D-  rrachafged  by  bringing  tii;    .  •        r.    '-ps  t:irsulSfl<S#5-3405                                     I 
Renewals  and  rociiurgca  may  be  noade  4  (iay.-.  i'.;:^:,  s^.  „>..  ..wa              '     '"'■'""  *'"  ""                       ^ 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BEL 

ow 

KK    OCT  2  11985 

}Gr  2  2  1991 

^  ^.M 

mum  <^CT  1 B, 

991 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 

FORM  NO.  DD6,  60m,  1/83         BERKELEY,  CA  94720 

®$ 


w 


GtMtR^^- 


UBR^B'' 


.U.C. 


BtRKtLtV 


J. 


If-'--  *1 


\1<